PLC Hardware S7-300

FLSA Documentation
Created: 08-05-2007 Marie Luise Blæsbjerg

Modified: 19-06-2007 Marie Luise Blæsbjerg
File: Ha Long\AD-056061: FLS-DK Ha Long (ACE)\4.20.09 PLC Hardware S7-300
Original FLSA Documentation

Issue Date: Plant: Issued for Order:
08-05-2007 Ha Long AD-056061: FLS-DK Ha Long (ACE)
Contract: Other Order References
System Reference:
ACE1156
Sub-System Reference(s):
Title:
PLC Hardware S7-300
Drawing No: No. of Pages:
80007854 1 Binder
Issued by: Approved for engineering by: Approval Date:
Marie Luise Blæsbjerg Henry Lukas 08-05-2007
Comments:
none
Documentation Status: Revision Number:
As-Shipped A
Contractual Date (Due date according to Project File Refence:
Contract): 4.20.09 PLC Hardware S7-300
Sent to:
Category: CompanyName:
Rev. Issued Pages Approved Status Sent To Comments:
1. SIEMENS S7-300, Module specification
2. SIEMENS S7-300, Hardware and Installation
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Ha Long Main
9.
ACE 1156
Project Specific 10.

Documentation
11.
Drw.no.
80007854 12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
TAB
TAB
Preface, Contents
SIMATIC
1
General Technical Specifications
Programmable Logic 2
Power Supply Modules
Controllers S7-300
Module Data 3
Digital Modules
4
Analog Modules
Reference Manual 5
Special Signal Modules
6
Interface Modules
The following supplement is part of this documentation:
7
No. Designation Drawing number Edition RS 485 Repeater
1 Product information A5E00201782-03 12/2004
SIMATIC TOP Connect and 8
SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA
5 Product information A5E00455107-01 05/2005 Appendices
Parameter Sets for
Signal Modules
A
Diagnostics Data of
Signal Modules
B
Dimension Drawings
C
Spare Parts and Accessories
for S7-300 Modules
D
This manual is part of the documentation package
with the order numbers: Guidelines for Handling Electro-
Programmable Controller S7-300: static Sensitive Devices (ESD)
E
6ES7398-8FA10-8BA0
List of Abbreviations
F
ET 200M Distributed I/O Device:
6ES7153-1AA00-8BA0
Glossary, Index
Edition 02/2004
A5E00105505-03
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices intended to ensure personal safety, as well as to protect the products and
connected equipment against damage. These notices are highlighted by the symbols shown below and
graded according to severity by the following texts:
Danger
! indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions
are not taken.
Warning
! indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.
Caution
! indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a
particular part of the documentation.
Qualified Personnel
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are
defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground and to tag circuits, equipment, and
systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Correct Usage
Note the following:
Warning
! This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the
technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which
have been approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed
correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
Trademarks
SIMATIC, SIMATIC HMI and SIMATIC NET are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG.
Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks
might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners.
Copyright W Siemens AG 2004 All rights reserved Disclaim of Liability

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement
contents is not permitted without express written authority. with the hardware and software described. Since deviations
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed
design, are reserved. regularly and any necessary corrections included in
subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are
Siemens AG welcomed.
Bereich Automation and Drives
Geschaeftsgebiet Industrial Automation Systems  Siemens AG 2004
Postfach 4848, D- 90327 Nuernberg Technical data subject to change.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft A5E00105505-03
Preface
Purpose of the manual

The information contained in this manual will enable you to look up operator
actions, function descriptions and the technical specifications of the signal
modules, power supply modules and interface modules of the S7-300.
How to configure, assemble and wire these modules in an S7-300 or ET 200M
system is described in the installation manuals for each system.
Required basic knowledge

To understand this manual, it is necessary to have a general knowledge of
automation and programmable logic controllers.
Scope of this manual

The present documentation package contains reference manuals for all the
modules current at the time the manuals were published.
We reserve the right to enclose a product information leaflet containing up-to-date
information on the module with new modules and modules with a new product
version.
Changes compared with the previous version

Compared to the previous version, of the “Module Data” reference manual, the
following chapters and appendices have been thoroughly revised and new modules
added, as necessary:
• Preface
• Chapter 1 “General Technical Specifications”
• Chapter 3 “Digital Modules”,
• Chapter 4 “Analog Modules”
• Appendix A “Signal Module Parameter Sets”
• Glossary
Note: The previous version of this “Module Data” reference manual can be
recognized by the number in the footer: A5E00105505-02.
The current number is: A5E00105505-03.
Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 iii
Preface
Approbations
Refer to Section 1.1 Standards and approvals.
CE Approval
Identification for Australia (C-Tick-Mark)

Standards

iv A5E00105505-03
Preface
How the manual fits in
S7-300
Manual Description of operation, functions and

• CPU 31xC and CPU 31x, Technical Data technical specifications of the CPU.
Reference Manual Description of operation, functions and

• CPU Data: CPU 312 IFM – 318-2 DP technical specifications of the CPU.
Operating Manual Description of configuration, installation,

• S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Installation wiring, networking and commissioning of an
S7-300.
Installation manual Description of configuration, installation,
• Automation system S7-300, installation: CPU 312 wiring, networking and commissioning of an
IFM – 318-2 DP S7-300.
Manual Description of the individual technological

• CPU 31xC: Technological Functions functions: Positioning, counting, point–to–point
coupling, control.
• Examples
The CD contains examples for the
technological functions.
Module data reference manual Descriptions of functions and technical
specifications of signal modules, power
→ • Reference Manual supply modules and interface modules.
You are reading this manual
Instruction List The instruction set lists of the CPUs and their
• CPU 312 IFM – 318-2 DP execution times.
• CPU 31xC and CPU 31x A list of executable blocks (OBs/SFCs/SFBs)
and their execution times.
Getting Started Getting Started documents use a concrete
• CPU 31x: Commissioning example to guide you through the individual
commissioning steps until you have a
• CPU 31xC: Commissioning
functioning application.
• CPU 31xC: Positioning with analog output
• CPU 314C: Positioning with digital output
• CPU 31xC: Counting
• CPU 31xC: Rules
• CPU 31xC: Point-to-point connection
• CPU 317-2 PN/DP: Configuration of the PROFInet
interface X2

A5E00105505-03 v
Preface
ET 200M
Distributed Peripheral manual

• Manual Description of configuration, assembly,
wiring.
Signal modules for process automation reference
manual Description of use in process automation,
• Reference Manual parameterization with SIMATIC PDM, digital
input modules, digital output modules.
Module data reference manual
→ • Reference Manual Descriptions of functions and technical

specifications of signal modules, power

supply modules and interface
modules.
Navigation
To help you find special information quickly, the manual contains the following
access aids:
• At the start of the manual you will find a complete table of contents and a list of
the diagrams and tables that appear in the manual.
• An overview of the contents of each section is provided in the left column on
each page of each chapter.
• You will find a glossary in the appendix at the end of the manual. The glossary
contains definitions of the main technical terms used in the manual.
• At the end of the manual you will find a comprehensive index which gives you
fast access to the information you need.
Recycling and disposal

Because of its low-emission equipment, it is possible to recycle the S7-300. For
ecologically harmless recycling and disposal of your old device, contact a
certificated disposal service for electronic scrap.

vi A5E00105505-03
Preface
Additional support
Please contact your local Siemens representative if you have any queries about
the products described in this manual.
http://www.ad.siemens.com/automation/partner
Training center
We offer a range of relevant courses to help you to get started with the SIMATIC
S7 programmable controller. Please contact your local training center or the central
training center in Nuremberg, D 90327 Germany.
Phone: +49 (911) 895-3200.
Internet: http://www.sitrain.com

A5E00105505-03 vii
Preface
A&D Technical Support

Worldwide, available 24 hours a day:
Nuernberg
Johnson City
Beijing
Technical Support
Worldwide (Nuernberg)
Technical Support
24 hours a day, 365 days a year

Phone: +49 (180) 5050-222
Fax: +49 (180) 5050-223
E-Mail: adsupport@
siemens.com
GMT: +1:00
Europe / Africa (Nuernberg) United States (Johnson City) Asia / Australia (Beijing)
Authorization Technical Support and Technical Support and
Authorization Authorization
Local time: Mon.-Fri. Local time: Mon.-Fri. Local time: Mon.-Fri.
8:00 AM to 5:00 PM 8:00 AM to 500 PM 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM
Phone: +49 (180) 5050–222 Phone: +1 (423) 262 2522 Phone: +86 10 64 75 75 75
Fax: +49 (180) 5050-223 Fax: +1 (423) 262 2289 Fax: +86 10 64 74 74 74
E-Mail: adsupport@ E-Mail: simatic.hotline@ E-Mail: adsupport.asia@
siemens.com sea.siemens.com siemens.com
GMT: +1:00 GMT: –5:00 GMT: +8:00
The languages of the SIMATIC Hotlines and the authorization hotline are generally German and English.

viii A5E00105505-03
Preface
Service & Support on the Internet

In addition to our documentation, we offer our Know-how online on the internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
where you will find the following:
• The newsletter, which constantly provides you with up–to–date information on
your products.
• The right documents via our Search function in Service & Support.
• A forum, where users and experts from all over the world exchange their
experiences.
• Your local representative for Automation & Drives.
• Information on field service, repairs, spare parts and more under “Services”.

A5E00105505-03 ix
Preface

x A5E00105505-03
Contents
1 General Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 Standards and Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup Batteries . . . . 1-8
1.4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions
for Operating S7-300s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.5 Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class
and Degree of Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.6 Rated Voltages of the S7-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.7 SIPLUS S7-300 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.8 Mechanical and Climatic Ambient Conditions
for the Operation of SIPLUS S7-300 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.9 Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 potentially explosive area . . . . 1-17
2 Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Power Supply Module PS 305; 2 A;
(6ES7305-1BA80-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
(6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
(6ES7307-1EAx0-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
(6ES7307-1KA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
3 Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module 3-10
3.3 Digital Module Parameter Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.4 Diagnostics of the Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.5 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x VDC 24;
(6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.6 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC;
(6ES7321-1EL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
(6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.8 Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed; (6ES7321-1BH10-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

A5E00105505-03 xi
Contents
3.9 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V;

with Hardware and Diagnostic Interrupts, clocked;
(6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.9.1 Synchronicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.9.2 Assigning Parameters to SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.9.3 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.9.4 Interrupts of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.10 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V; Source Input;
(6ES7321-1BH50-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3.11 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x UC 24/48 V
(6ES7321-1CH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3.12 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 48-125;
(6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.13 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x AC 120/230 V
(6ES7321-1FH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
3.14 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 8 x VAC 120/230;
(6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL (6ES7321-1FF10-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3.16 Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 32 x 24 VDC/ 0.5 A; (6ES7322-1BL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
DO 32 x VAC 120/230/1 A; (6ES7322-1FL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
DO 16 x DC 24 V/ 0.5 A; (6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.19 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed;
(6ES7322-1BH10-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.20 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC;
(6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3.20.1 Parameters of digital output module SM 322 DO 16 x UC24/48 V . . . . . . 3-63
DO 16 x VAC 120/230/1 A; (6ES7322-1FH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.22 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A;
(6ES7322-1BF01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
3.23 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/ 0.5 A;
with diagnostic interrupt; (6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
3.23.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
3.23.2 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . 3-77
3.23.3 Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
3.24 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 48-125/1,5 A;
(6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
DO 8 x VAC 120/230/2 A; (6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL (6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87

xii A5E00105505-03
Contents
3.27 Relay Output Module SM 322;

DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC; (6ES7322-1HH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
3.28 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC;
(6ES7322-1HF01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A; (6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
3.29.1 SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
3.29.2 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8 x 230 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . 3-104
3.29.3 Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
3.30 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. VAC 230/5 A;
(6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
3.31 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323;
DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7323-1BL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
DI 8/DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A; (6ES7323-1BH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A; parameterizable (6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0) . . 3-116
3.33.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A . . . . . . 3-119
4 Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Module . . . . . . 4-8
4.3 Analog Value Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.3.1 Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.3.2 Analog Value Representation for Analog Output Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.4 Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of Analog Input
Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.5 Behavior of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.5.1 Effect of Supply Voltage and Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.5.2 Effect of Range of Values of the Analog Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.5.3 Effect of Operational Limit and Basic Error Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4.6 Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog Modules . . . . 4-35
4.7 Analog Module Parameter Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.7.1 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4.7.2 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.7.3 Parameters of the analog input/output modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4.8 Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4.9 Connecting Voltage Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4.10 Connecting Current Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4.11 Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4.11.1 Connecting resistance thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . 4-56
4.12 Connecting Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4.13 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4.14 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Voltage Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
4.15 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Current Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70

A5E00105505-03 xiii
Contents
4.16 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

4.17 Interrupts of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4.18 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits;
(6ES7331-7NF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
4.18.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
4.18.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4.19 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits
(6ES7331-7NF10-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
4.19.2 8-channel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
4.19.3 4-channel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
4.19.4 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x16 bits 4-94
4.20 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed; synchronous;
(6ES7331-7HF0x-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
4.20.1 Synchronicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
4.20.2 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
(6ES7331-1KF01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
4.21.1 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
4.21.2 Measuring Methods of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
(6ES7331-7KF02-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
4.23 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (6ES7331-7PF00-0AB0) . . . . 4-125
4.23.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
4.23.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . 4-135
4.24 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC (6ES7331-7PF10-0AB0) . . . . . . 4-138
4.24.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
4.24.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . 4-150
(6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
AI 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
4.26 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits;
(6ES7332-5HF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
4.26.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
4.26.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332;
AO 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
4.27 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bit; synchronous;
(6ES7332-7ND01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
4.27.1 Synchronicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172
4.27.2 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174
4.27.3 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits . . . 4-175

xiv A5E00105505-03
Contents

(6ES7332-5HD01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176
AO 4 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180
(6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-182
AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-186
4.30 Analog Input/Output Module SM334;
AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits; (6ES7334-0CE01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-188
4.30.1 Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-192
4.30.2 Measuring/output Method and Measuring/output Range of the SM 334;
AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-193
4.31 Analog Input/Output Module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits;
(6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-194
4.31.1 Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-198
4.31.2 Measuring/output Method and Measuring/output Range of the SM 334;
AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-198
5 Special Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16;
(6ES7374-2XH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.3 Dummy Module DM 370; (6ES7370-0AA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.4 Position Decoder Module SM 338; POS-INPUT;
(6ES7338-4BC01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.4.1 Synchronous Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4.2 Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.4.3 Functions of the SM 338; POS INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4.4 Encoder Value Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4.5 Gray/Dual Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.4.6 Transferred Encoder Value and Normalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.4.7 Freeze Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.4.8 SM 338; POS-INPUT Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.4.9 SM 338; POS-INPUT Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.4.10 Diagnosis of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.4.11 Interrupts of the SM 338; POS INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.4.12 Technical Specifications of the 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

A5E00105505-03 xv
Contents
6 Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Interface Module IM 360; (6ES7360-3AA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3 Interface Module IM 361; (6ES7361-3CA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.4 Interface Module IM 365; (6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
7 RS 485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Application and Characteristics; (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2 Appearance of the RS 485 Repeater; (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0) . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.3 RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.4 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
8 SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Wiring Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.1 Cut the Connecting Cable to Length and Terminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.2 Wiring the Front Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.2.3 Connecting the Connecting Cable to the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.2.4 Wiring Actuators/Sensors to the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.3 Wiring SIMATIC TOP Connect with Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.3.1 SIMATIC TOP connect Components and Selection Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.3.2 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for One-Conductor Connection . . 8-14
8.3.3 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for Three-Conductor Connection 8-16
8.3.4 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for 2A Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8.4 Wiring SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA with Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.4.1 SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA Components and Selection Aid . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.4.2 SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA Terminal Assignment
and Terminal Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8.4.3 Connecting the Signal-Line Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
8.4.4 Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
A Parameter Sets for Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1 How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User Program . A-1
A.2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A.5 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
A.6 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
A.7 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
A.8 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
A.9 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
A.10 Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
A.11 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41

xvi A5E00105505-03
Contents
B Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

B.1 Evaluating Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the User Program . B-1
B.2 Structure and Content of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B.3 Channel-Specific Diagnostic Data from Byte 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B.4 Diagnostic Data of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
C Dimension Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C.1 Dimension Drawings of the Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.2 Dimension Drawings of the Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C.3 Dimension Drawings of the Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C.4 Dimension Drawings of the Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
C.5 Dimension Drawings for Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
D Spare Parts and Accessories for S7-300 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
E Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
E.1 What is ESD? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
E.2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
E.3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage . E-4
F List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

A5E00105505-03 xvii
Contents
Figures
2-1 Wiring Schematic of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . 2-5
2-7 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-8 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) . . . . . 2-15
3-1 Module View and Block Diagram of the Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 32 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-2 Terminal assignment of the SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-3 ModuleView and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 32 x 20 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3-4 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 16 x 24VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-5 Module view and block diagram of the SM 321;
DI 16 x 24VDC High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3-7 Terminal assignment for redundant supply of encoders of SM 321;
DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-8 Terminal assignment for resistive circuit of the encoder of the SM 321;
DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-9 Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Has Triggered
the Hardware Interrupt at the Limit Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
DI 16 x 24 VDC (Source Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
DI 16 x 24/48VUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3-12 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 321; DI 16 x 48-125 VDC . . . . . . 3-38
3-13 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230VAC . . 3-40
3-14 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC . . . 3-42
3-15 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321;
DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3-16 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3-17 Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3-18 Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322;
D0 32 x VAC 120/230 /1 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3-19 Terminal assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 x AC 120/230 V/1 A . . . . . . 3-51
3-20 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A 3-54
DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3-22 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC . . . . . . 3-60
DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/1 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3-24 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
3-25 Module view of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 V DC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
3-26 Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85

xviii A5E00105505-03
Contents

DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
3-30 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 322;
DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
3-31 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM
322; DO 8 x REL. 230 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
3-33 Special Characteristic for Operation
with a Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
3-35 Special Characteristic for Operation with a
Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111
3-37 Terminal assignment of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . 3-111
3-38 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input/Output Module SM 323;
DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, parameterizable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117
3-40 Data record 1 of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
3-41 Re-readability of the outputs of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A 3-121
4-1 Easing Measuring Range Modules from the Analog Input Module . . . . . . 4-29
4-2 Inserting Measuring Range Modules into the Analog Input Module . . . . . 4-30
4-3 Example of the Relative Error of an Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4-4 Scan time of an analog input or output module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4-5 Example of the Influence of Smoothing on the Step Response . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4-6 Settling and Response times of the Analog Output Channels . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4-7 Connecting Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4-8 Connecting Isolated Sensors to a Non-Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4-9 Connecting Non-Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4-10 Connecting non-isolated sensors to a non-isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4-11 Connecting Voltage Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4-12 Connecting two-wire transmitters to an isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4-13 Connecting two-wire transmitters supplied from L+ to an
isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4-14 Connecting four-wire transmitters to an isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4-15 Four-conductor connection of resistance thermometers to an isolated AI 4-54
4-16 Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers
to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4-17 Two-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers
to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4-18 Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers
to the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4-19 Two-conductor connection of resistance thermometers
to the SM 331; AI 8x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4-20 Three-conductor connection of resistance thermometers
to the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4-21 Four-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers
to the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
4-22 Design of Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4-23 Connection of Thermocouples with Internal Compensation to
an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4-24 Connection of Thermocouples with Compensation Box to an Isolated AI 4-62

A5E00105505-03 xix
Contents
4-25 Connection of Thermocouples with Comparison Point (Order No.

M72166-xxx00) to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4-26 Connecting thermocouples via a reference junction to the
SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
4-27 Connecting thermocouples with external compensation via resistance
thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
4-28 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated AO over
a Four-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4-29 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of a Non-Isolated AO over a
Two-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
4-30 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of an Isolated AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4-31 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of a Non-Isolated AO . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
4-32 Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Has Triggered
the Hardware Interrupt at the Limit Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4-33 Module view and block diagram of the analog input module SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4-34 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4-35 8-channel mode cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
4-36 4-channel mode cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
4-38 Calculation of the filter and processing time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
4-39 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331;
AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
4-41 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
4-42 Hardware filter 8 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
4-43 Software filter 8 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
4-45 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
4-47 Software filter 8 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
AI 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
4-50 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332;
AO 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
4-51 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . 4-170
4-52 Calculation of the processing time and the time for updating the output . 4-173
AO 4 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-177
AO 2 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-183
4-55 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input/Output Module SM 334;
AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-189
4-56 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits . . . 4-195
5-1 Module view of the simulator module SM 374; IN/OUT 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-2 Module view of the dummy module DM 370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-3 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . 5-9
6-1 Front View of the Interface Module IM 360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
7-1 RC Network with 10 MW for Configuration with
Ungrounded Reference Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

xx A5E00105505-03
Contents
7-2 Isolation between the Bus Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

7-3 Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
8-1 SIMATIC TOP connect on a S7-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-2 Threading the Round-Sheath Ribbon Cable into the Connector . . . . . . . . 8-5
8-3 Inserting the Connecting Cable into the Front Connector Module . . . . . . . 8-8
8-4 Front connector module for 32-channel digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8-5 Insert the connecting cable into the terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8-6 Spring-loaded terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8-7 Principle of Spring-Loaded Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8-8 Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a
One-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8-9 Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a
Three-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8-10 Wiring with Terminal Block for 2A Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8-11 Terminal Assignment of Analog Module to SIMATIC TOP connect TPA . 8-22
8-12 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Terminal Block with Shielding Plate . . . . . . . 8-23
8-13 Example of Connecting SIMATIC TOP connect TPA to SM 321;
AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
A-1 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A-2 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A-3 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A-4 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A-5 Data Record 128 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
A-6 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
A-7 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
A-8 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
A-9 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
A-10 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
A-11 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
A-12 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
A-13 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
A-14 Data record 128 for parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . A-32
A-17 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . A-37
A-18 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . A-40
A-19 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . A-42
B-1 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B-2 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B-3 Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
B-4 Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Input Channel of the SM 321;
DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B-5 Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Output Channel of the SM 322;
DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B-6 Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Input Channel of a SM 331
with Diagnostics Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B-7 Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Output Channel of a SM 332
with Diagnostics Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B-8 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . B-7
B-9 Bytes 2 and 7 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . B-8
B-10 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
C-1 Dimension Drawing of the 483 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C-4 Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C-5 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 160 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . . . C-4
C-6 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 482.6 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . C-4

A5E00105505-03 xxi
Contents
C-9 Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
C-10 Complete Dimension Drawing of a Rail for “Insert and Remove” Function
with Active Bus Module, S7-300 Module and Explosion-proof Partition . . C-7
C-11 Dimension Drawing of the Active Bus Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C-12 Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C-13 Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
C-14 Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
C-15 Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A
with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
C-16 Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A
with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
C-17 Interface Module IM 360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C-20 Signal Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
C-21 2 Signal Modules with Shield Connecting Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
C-22 SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
C-25 RS 485 Repeater on Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
C-26 RS 485 repeater on S7-300 rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
E-1 Electrostatic Voltages which Can Build up on a Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

xxii A5E00105505-03
Contents
Tables
1-1 Use in an Industrial Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-2 Pulse-Shaped Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-3 Sinusoidal Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-4 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-5 Mechanical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-6 Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-7 Climatic Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-8 Test Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-9 Rated Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-10 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-11 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test . . . . . . . . 1-16
1-12 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules Climatic Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
2-1 Reaction of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A)
to Atypical Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
3-1 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-2 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued) . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-3 Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-4 Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued) . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-5 Relay Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3-6 Digital Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-7 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module 3-10
3-8 Parameters of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3-9 Assigning Interrupt Parameters to the Inputs of the SM 321;
DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-10 Tolerances of the Input Delays of SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-11 Dependencies of Input Values on the Operating Mode
of the CPU and Supply Voltage L+ of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . 3-29
3-12 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3-13 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V,
Causes of Error and Remedial Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3-14 Data record no. 0 (static parameters): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3-15 Data record no. 1 (dynamic parameters): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3-16 Structure of the data record for SM 322 DO 16 x UC 24/48 V . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3-17 System diagnostics for SM 322 DO 16 x UC 24/48 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3-18 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
3-19 Dependence of the output values on the operating mode of the
CPU and on the supply voltage L+ of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A. 3-77
3-20 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
3-21 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A,
Causes of Error and Remedial Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
3-22 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
3-23 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL . . 3-91
3-24 Diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL,
error causes and remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
3-25 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
3-26 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. AC 230 VDC/0.5 A . . 3-104
3-27 Diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A,
error causes and remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105

A5E00105505-03 xxiii
Contents
3-28 Parameters of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 VDC 24/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119

4-1 Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-2 Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued) . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-3 Analog Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-4 Analog Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-5 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module 4-8
4-6 Example: Bit pattern of a 16-bit and a 13-bit analog value . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-7 Possible analog value resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-8 Bipolar Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-9 Unipolar Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-10 Analog Value Representation in
Voltage Measuring Ranges + 10 V to + 1 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Voltage Measuring Ranges + 500 mV to + 80 mV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Voltage Measuring Ranges 1 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Current Measuring Ranges + 20 mA to + 3.2 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Current Measuring Ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-15 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Type Transmitters
from 10 kW
and from 150 W to 600 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-16 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors
PT 100, 200, 500, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
PT 100, 200, 500, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Ni100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-20 Analog Value Representation for
RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-21 Analog Value Representation for
RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-22 Analog value representation for thermocouples type B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-23 Analog value representation for thermocouples type C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-24 Analog value representation for thermocouples type E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-25 Analog value representation for thermocouples type J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-26 Analog value representation for thermocouples type K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-27 Analog value representation for thermocouples type L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-28 Analog value representation for thermocouples type N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-29 Analog value representation for thermocouples type R, S . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-30 Analog value representation for thermocouples type T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4-31 Analog value representation for thermocouples type U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4-32 Bipolar Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-33 Unipolar Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-34 Analog Value Representation in Output Range +10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4-35 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 to 10 V and 1 to 5 V . 4-26
4-36 Analog Value Representation in Output Range +20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4-37 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 and 20 mA
and 4 to 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4-38 Dependencies of the Analog Input/Output Values on the Operating State
of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4-39 Behavior of the Analog Input Modules as a Function of the Position

xxiv A5E00105505-03
Contents
of the Analog Value within the Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

4-40 Behavior of the Analog Output Modules as a Function of the Position
of the Analog Value within the Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4-42 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4-43 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4-44 Options for Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature . . . . . 4-59
4-45 Ordering Data of the Comparison Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4-46 Diagnostic Messages of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
4-47 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
4-48 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of Errors
and Remedial Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
4-49 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules, Causes of Errors
and Remedial Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4-50 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
4-51 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits
to Channel Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
4-52 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4-53 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
4-55 Assignment of the channels of the isolated analog input module SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits to channel groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
4-56 Scan times in 8-channel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
4-57 Measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
4-58 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from
OB40 during a hardware interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt . . . . 4-96
4-59 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits
High Speed using Measuring Range Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
4-60 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
4-61 Assignment of the channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed to
channel groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
4-62 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
Using Measuring Range Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
4-65 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
4-66 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits
to Channel Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
4-67 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
4-68 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
4-69 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD to Channel Groups 4-131
4-70 Scan Times in “Software Filter, 8 Channels” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
4-71 Measuring ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
4-72 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from OB40
during a hardware interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
4-73 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
4-74 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC to Channel Groups . . 4-145
4-75 Scan Times in “Software Filter, 8 Channels” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
4-76 Measuring Ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
AI 8 x TC in 5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
AI 8 x TC in 5F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152

A5E00105505-03 xxv
Contents
4-79 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from

OB40 during a hardware interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt . . . . 4-152
Using Measuring Range Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
4-81 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
4-82 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
4-83 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits . . . 4-168
4-84 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits . . 4-175
4-87 Measuring ranges of the SM 334;AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-199
4-88 Output ranges of the SM 334;AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-200
5-1 Special signal modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-2 Meaning of the switch settings of the dummy module DM 370 . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-3 Parameters of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-4 SM 338; POS-INPUT: Input Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-5 Diagnostic messages of the SM 338; POS INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5-6 Diagnostics Messages of the SM 338, Causes of Errors and Remedial
Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
6-1 Interface Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
7-1 Maximum Cable Length of a Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-2 Maximum Cable Length between Two RS 485 Repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-3 Description and Functions of the RS 485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
8-1 SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA: ConnecModules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8-2 Sequence of Steps for Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-3 Wiring Rules for Connecting the Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8-4 Assignment of Connecting Cable Terminals to Address Bytes
of 32-Channel Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8-5 Components of SIMATIC TOP connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8-6 Selection for SIMATIC TOP connect Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8-7 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect
with One-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8-8 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block
for One-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8-9 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect
with Three-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8-10 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block
for Three-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8-11 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with 2A Module Connection 8-18
8-12 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for 2A Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8-13 Components for SIMATIC TOP connect TPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8-14 Terminal Assignment of the Terminal Block
of SIMATIC TOP connect TPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
A-1 SFCs for assigning Parameters to Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A-2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A-3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A-4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A-5 Codes for Interference Suppression of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . A-9
A-6 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . A-9
A-7 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
A-8 Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
A-9 Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . A-16
A-10 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . A-16
A-11 Codes of Temperature Coefficients of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . A-18
A-12 Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18

xxvi A5E00105505-03
Contents
A-13 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19

A-14 Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
A-15 Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . A-24
A-16 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
A-17 Codes of Reaction to Open Thermocouple of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . A-26
A-18 Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
A-19 Codes for temperature measurement of the analog input module . . . . . . A-28
A-20 Codes for Interference Suppression of the Analog Input Module . . . . . . . A-28
A-21 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . A-28
A-22 Codes for temperature measurement of the analog input module . . . . . . A-29
A-23 Parameters for the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . A-30
A-24 Codes for the modes of SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
A-25 Codes for interference frequency suppression of the SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
A-26 Codes for the measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x16 bits . . . . . . . . . A-35
A-27 Codes for the smoothing mode settings of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . A-36
A-28 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
A-29 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . A-38
A-30 Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
A-31 Codes for the output ranges of the analog output module SM332;
AO 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
A-32 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
A-33 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . A-43
A-34 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . A-43
B-1 Codes of the Module Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
D-1 Accessories and Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

A5E00105505-03 xxvii
Contents

xxviii A5E00105505-03
General Technical Specifications 1
What are general technical specifications?
General technical specifications include the following:
• the standards and test values which the modules of the S7-300 programmable
logic controller maintain and satisfy
• the test criteria to which the S7-300 modules were tested.
In this chapter
Section Contents Page

1.1 Standards and Approvals 1-2
1.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility 1-6
1.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup 1-8
Batteries
1.4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for Operating 1-9
S7-300s
1.5 Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of 1-12
Protection
1.6 Rated Voltages of the S7-300 1-13
1.7 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules 1-14
1.8 Mechanical and Climatic Ambient Conditions for the Operation of 1-16
SIPLUS S7-300 Modules
1.9 Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 Potentially Explosive 1-17
Area

A5E00105505-03 1-1
1.1 Standards and Approvals
CE approval
The S7-300 programmable logic controller meets the requirements and
safety-related requirements of the following EU directives and conforms with the
harmonized European standards (EN) for programmable controllers announced in
the Official Journals of the European Community:
• 73/23/EEC “Electrical Equipment Designed for Use between Certain Voltage
Limits” (Low-Voltage Directive)
• 89/336/EEC “Electromagnetic Compatibility” (EMC Directive)
• 94/9/EU “Devices and protection systems for use as prescribed in potentially
explosive areas” (Guidelines for Explosion Protection)
The declarations of conformity are held

at the disposal of the competent authorities at the address below:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
A&D AS RD4
Postfach 1963
D-92209 Amberg

1-2 A5E00105505-03
UL approval
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with
• UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
CSA approval
Canadian Standards Association in accordance with
• C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
or
UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
or

UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
HAZ. LOC. CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)

UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)
CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
Note
The currently applicable approvals can be found on the nameplate of the particular
module.

A5E00105505-03 1-3
FM approval
Factory Mutual Research (FM) in accordance with
Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
in accordance with EN 50021 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive

atmospheres; Type of protection “n”)
II 3 G EEx nA II T4..T5
Identification for Australia

The S7-300 programmable logic controller meets the requirements of standard
AS/NZS 2064 (Class A).
IEC 61131
The S7-300 programmable logic controller meets the requirements and criteria of
standard IEC 61131-2 (Programmable Controllers, Part 2: Equipment
Requirements and Tests).
Shipbuilding approval
Classification Societies:
• ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
• BV (Bureau Veritas)
• DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
• GL (Germanischer Lloyd)
• LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
• Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)

1-4 A5E00105505-03
Use in an industrial environment

SIMATIC products have been designed for use in an industrial environment.
Table 1-1 Use in an Industrial Environment
EMC Directive Requirements in respect of:

Emitted interference Immunity
Industry EN 61000-6-4: 2001 EN 61000-6-2: 2001
Use in residential environments

If you operate an S7-300 in a residential area, you must ensure Limit Value Class
B in accordance with EN 55011 to guard against radio interference emissions.
Suitable measures to achieve interference suppression according to Limit Value
Class B:
• installation of the S7-300 in grounded cabinets and control boxes
• use of filters in supply lines
Warning
! Personal injury or property damage can result.
In areas subject to danger of explosion, personal injury or property damage can
result if you withdraw connectors while an S7-300 is in operation.
Always isolate the S7-300 in areas subject to danger of explosion before
withdrawing connectors.

A5E00105505-03 1-5
1.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility
Introduction
In this section you will find details of the noise immunity of S7-300 modules and
details of radio interference suppression.
The S7-300 modules satisfy, among other things, the requirements of the law
applicable to EMC on the European domestic market.
Definition of “EMC”
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical installation to
function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with
that environment.
Pulse-shaped interference
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of modules compared
to pulse-shaped disturbance variables. A requirement for this is that the S7-300
system complies with the specifications and directives on electric design.
Table 1-2 Pulse-Shaped Interference
Pulse-Shaped Interference Tested with Satisfies

degree of
severity
Electrostatic discharge Discharge in air:"8 kV 3
according to IEC 61000-4-2 Contact discharge: "4 kV
Bursts (fast transient bursts) to 2 kV (supply cable) 3
IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV (signal cable > 3 m)
1 kV (signal cable < 3 m)
Energy-rich single impulse (surge) according to IEC 61000-4-5
External protective circuit required (refer to the manual
S7-300 Programmable Logic Controller, Hardware and Installation,
Chapter “Lightning Protection and Overvoltage Protection”)
• Asymmetrical coupling 2 kV (supply cable)
Direct voltage with protective
elements 3
2 kV (signal/
data cable only > 3 m) possi-
bly with protection elements
• Symmetrical coupling 1 kV (supply cable)
Direct voltage with protection
elements
1 kV (signal line only > 3 m)
possibly with protection ele-
ments

1-6 A5E00105505-03
Additional measures
If you want to connect an S7-300 system to the public network, you must ensure
Limit Value Class B in accordance with EN 55022.
Sinusoidal interference
The table below shows the EMC behavior of the S7-300 modules with regard to
sinusoidal disturbance variables.
Table 1-3 Sinusoidal Interference
Sinusoidal Interference Test values Satisfies

degree of
severity
HF irradiation (electromagnetic fields)
according to IEC 61000-4-3
10 V/m with 80% amplitude modulation of 1 kHz
3
over the range from 80 MHz to 1000 MHz
according to IEC 61000-4-3
10 V/m with 50% pulse modulation at 900 MHz
HF conductance on cables and cable Test voltage 10 V with 80% amplitude modula-
shields according to IEC 61000-4-6 tion of 1 kHz over the range from 9 MHz to 3
80 MHz
Emission of radio interference

Interference emission of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011: Limit
value class A, Group 1.
From 30 to 230 MHz < 40 dB (V/m)Q

From 230 to 1000 MHz < 47 dB (V/m)Q
Measured at a distance of 10 m (98.4 ft.)
Interference emission via the mains AC power supply in accordance with

EN 55011: Limit value class A, Group 1.
From 0.15 to 0.5 MHz < 79 dB (V)Q

< 66 dB (V)M
From 0.5 to 5 MHz < 73 dB (V)Q
< 60 dB (V)M
From 5 to 30 MHz < 73 dB (V)Q
< 60 dB (V)M

A5E00105505-03 1-7
1.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup

Batteries
Shipping and storage of modules

S7-300 modules surpass the requirements of IEC 61131-2, in respect of shipping
and storage requirements. The following details apply to modules shipped and/or
stored in their original packing.
Climatic conditions correspond to IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3K7 for storage and IEC
60721-3-2, Class 2K4 for transportation.
Mechanical conditions correspond to IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2M2.
Table 1-4 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules
Condition Permitted range

Free fall (in shipping packing) v 1m
Temperature from – 40 C to + 70C
Atmospheric pressure 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponding to an
altitude of –1000 to 3500 m)
Relative humidity 10 to 95 %, no condensation
Sinusoidal oscillations 5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
to IEC 60068-2-6 9 – 150 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Shock according to IEC 60068-2-29 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks
Transporting backup batteries

Wherever possible, transport backup batteries in their original packing. Special
approval does not have to be obtained for transporting backup batteries for S7-300
systems. The lithium content of the backup battery is approximately 0.25 g.

1-8 A5E00105505-03
Storing backup batteries

Backup batteries must be stored in a cool and dry place. The maximum shelf life is
5 years.
Warning
! Improper handling of backup batteries can result in injury and damage to property.
If backup batteries are not treated properly, they can explode and cause severe
burning.
Observe the following rules when handling backup batteries used in the S7-300
programmable logic controller:
• never charge them
• never heat them
• never throw them in the fire
• never damage them mechanically (drill, squeeze, etc.)
1.4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for

Operating S7-300s
Operating conditions
S7-300 systems are intended for stationary use in locations protected against the
weather. The operating conditions surpass the requirements of DIN IEC 60721-3-3.
• Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
• Class 3K3 (climatic requirements)
Use with additional measures

The S7-300, for example, must not be used without taking additional measures:
• in locations exposed to a high degree of ionizing radiation
• in hostile environments caused, for instance, by
– dust accumulation
– corrosive vapors or gases
– strong electric or magnetic fields
• in installations requiring special monitoring, for example
– elevators
– electrical installations in particularly hazardous areas
An additional measure might be, for instance, installation of the S7-300 in a cabinet
or in a housing.

A5E00105505-03 1-9
Ambient mechanical conditions

The ambient mechanical conditions for S7-300 modules are listed in the following
table in the form of sinusoidal oscillations.
Table 1-5 Mechanical Conditions
Frequency Range Continuous Occasional

in Hz
10 v f v 58 0.0375 mm amplitude 0.075 mm amplitude
58 v f v 150 0.5 g constant acceleration 1 g constant acceleration
Reducing vibrations
If your S7-300 modules are exposed to severe shock and/or vibrations, you must
take the appropriate measures to reduce the acceleration and/or amplitude,
respectively.
We recommend that you install the S7-300 on vibration-damping materials
(for example, rubber-metal antivibration mountings).
Ambient mechanical conditions test

The following table contains important information on the type and scope of tests
for ambient mechanical conditions.
Table 1-6 Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test
Test ... Test Standard Remarks

Vibrations Vibration test accor- Type of oscillation: frequency sweeps with a rate of
ding to IEC 60068 change of 1 octave/minute.
Part 2-6 (sinusoidal) 10 Hz v f v 58 Hz, constant amplitude of
0.075 mm
58 Hz v f v 150 Hz, constant acceleration of 1 g
Duration of oscillation: 10 frequency sweeps per
axis in each of three axes perpendicular to each
other
Shock Shock test to Type of shock: half-sine
IEC 60068, Part 2-29 Severity of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration
Direction of shock: 3 shocks each in the +/– direc-
tion in each of three axes perpendicular to each
other

1-10 A5E00105505-03
Climatic conditions
You can use S7-300s under the following climatic conditions:
Table 1-7 Climatic Conditions
Climatic Conditions Permitted range Remarks

Temperature: –
horizontal installation: from 0 to 60C
vertical installation: from 0 to 40C
Relative humidity 10 to 95 % Non-condensing, corres-
ponds to relative humi-
dity (RH) Class 2 accor-
ding to IEC 61131, Part 2
Atmospheric pressure 1080 to 795 hPa Corresponding to an alti-
tude of –1000 to 2000 m
Concentration of contami- SO2: < 0.5 ppm; Test: 10 ppm; 4 days
nants RH < 60 %, non-condensing
H2S: < 0.1 ppm; Test: 1 ppm; 4 days
RH < 60 %, non-condensing

A5E00105505-03 1-11
1.5 Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of

Protection
Test voltages
Insulation stability must be demonstrated in the type test with the following test
voltages in accordance with IEC 61131-2:
Table 1-8 Test Voltages
Circuits with rated voltage Ue to other Test Voltage

circuits or to ground
< 50 V 500 VDC
< 150 V 2500 VDC
< 250 V DC 4000 V
Protection class
Protection Class I according to IEC 60536 – in other words, protective conductor
connection to rail necessary
Protection against ingress of foreign bodies and water

Degree of protection IP 20 according to IEC 60529, that is, protection against
contact with standard probes.
There is no special protection against the ingress of water.

1-12 A5E00105505-03
1.6 Rated Voltages of the S7-300
Rated operating voltages

The modules of the S7-300 operate with different rated voltages. The following
table contains the rated voltages and the corresponding tolerances.
Table 1-9 Rated Voltages
Rated voltage Tolerance Range

24 VDC 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
120 VAC 93 to 132 VAC
230 VAC 187 to 264 VAC

A5E00105505-03 1-13
1.7 SIPLUS S7-300 modules
Definition
SIPLUS S7-300 modules are modules that can be used under extended
environmental conditions. Extended environmental conditions mean:
• operation possible at temperatures from –25°C to +60°C
• occasional, brief condensation permitted
• increased mechanical stress permissible
Comparison with “standard” modules

The functional scope and technical specifications for the SIPLUS S7-300 modules
are the same as those of the “standard” modules.
The mechanical and climatic environmental conditions as well as their test method
have changed.
The SIPLUS S7-300 modules have their own order numbers (see table 1-10)
Project engineering in STEP 7

The SIPLUS S7-300 modules are not included in the hardware catalog. Please
design your installation with the corresponding “standard” modules according to the
table 1-10.

1-14 A5E00105505-03
SIPLUS S7-300 Modules

The following table contains all SIPLUS S7-300 modules.
The order numbers of the corresponding “standard” modules have been included
as an aid to configuration. You can refer to the description and technical
specifications in the special section on the “standard” module.
Table 1-10 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules
Module SIPLUS S7-300-SIMATIC ”Standard” modules

module for use under
extended environmental
conditions
as of order no.
IM 153-1 6AG1153-1AA03-2XB0 6ES7153-1AA03-0XB0
CPU 312C 6AG1312-5BD00-2AB0 6ES7312-5BD00-0AB0
CPU 313C 6AG1313-5BE00-2AB0 6ES7313-5BE00-0AB0
CPU 314 6AG1314-1AF10-2AB0 6ES7314-1AF10-0AB0
CPU 315-2 DP 6AG1315-2AG10-2AB0 6ES7315-2AG10-0AB0
IM 365 6AG1365-0BA01-2AA0 6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0
SM 321 digital input module;
SM 321; DI 16 x 24VDC 6AG1321-1BH02-2AA0 6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0
SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC 6AG1321-1BL00-2AA0 6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC 6AG1321-7BH01-2AB0 6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 V-125 VDC 6AG1321-1CH20-2AA0 6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0
SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC 6AG1321-1FF01-2AA0 6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0
SM 322 digital output module;
SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A 6AG1322-1BH01-2AA0 6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0
SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A 6AG1322-1HF10-2AA0 6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0
SM 322, DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A 6AG1322-1CF00-2AA0 6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0
SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A 6AG1322-1FF01-2AA0 6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A 6AG1322-8BF00-2AB0 6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0
Digital Input/Output Module
SM 323; DI8/DO8 x DC 24V/0.5A 6AG1323-1BH01-2AA0 6ES7323-1BH01-0AA0
Analog input module
SM 331 analog input module; AI 2 x 12 bits 6AG1331-7KB02-2AB0 6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0
Analog output module
SM 332 analog output module; AO 2 x 12 6AG1332-5HB01-2AB0 6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0
bits
SM 334 analog I/O module;
SM 334; AI4/AO 2 x 12 bits 6AG1334-0KE00-2AB0 6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0

A5E00105505-03 1-15
1.8 Mechanical and Climatic Ambient Conditions for the Operation

of SIPLUS S7-300 Modules
Ambient mechanical conditions

Operating category: according to IEC 721 3-3, Class 3M4.
Ambient mechanical conditions test

The following table contains important information on the type and scope of tests
for ambient mechanical conditions of SIPLUS S7-300 modules.
Table 1-11 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test
Test ... Test Standard Remarks

Vibrations Vibration test according to Type of oscillation: frequency sweeps with a rate of
IEC 6008 Part 2-6 (sinusoidal) change of
1 octave/minute.
5 Hz f 9 Hz, constant amplitude of 3.5 mm
9 Hz f 150 Hz, constant acceleration of 1 g
oscillation period: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in
each of three axes perpendicular to each other
Shock Shock test according to IEC 6008 Type of shock: half-sine
Part 2-27 severity of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration
Direction of shock: 3 shocks each in the +/–
direction in each of three axes perpendicular to
each other

1-16 A5E00105505-03
Climatic conditions
You can use SIPLUS S7-300 modules under the following climatic conditions:
Operating category: according to IEC 721 3-3, Class 3K5.
Table 1-12 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules Climatic Conditions
Ambient Condition Permitted range Remarks

Temperature: –
horizontal installation –25 °C to 60 °C
vertical installation –25 °C to 40 °C
Relative humidity From 5 to 95 % Occasional, brief condensation,
corresponds to relative humidity (RH) Class
2 according to IEC 61131, Part 2
Pollutant concentration Test:
(according to IEC 721 3-3; SO2: < 0.5 ppm; 10 ppm; 4 days
class 3C3) Relative humidity < 60%
H2S: < 0.1 ppm; 1 ppm; 4 days
Relative humidity < 60%
1.9 Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 Potentially Explosive

Area
The following sections contain important information in the following languages.
In this chapter
Section Topic
1.9.1 Using the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 potentially explosive area
1.9.2 Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area
1.9.3 Utilisation de l’ET 200M / S7-300 dans un environnement à risque d’explosion
en zone 2
1.9.4 Aplicación del ET 200M / S7-300 en áreas con peligro de explosión, zona 2
1.9.5 Impiego dell’ET 200M / S7-300 nell’area a pericolo di esplosione zona 2
1.9.6 Gebruik van de ET 200M / S7-300 in het explosieve gebied zone 2
1.9.7 Brug af ET 200M / S7-300 i det eksplosionsfarlige område zone 2
1.9.8 ET 200M / S7-300:n käyttö räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla, vyöhyke 2
1.9.9 Användning av ET 200M / S7-300 i explosionsriskområde zon 2
1.9.10 Uso do ET 200M / S7-300 em área exposta ao perigo de explosão, zona 2
1.9.11 p ET 200M / S


A5E00105505-03 1-17
1.9.1 Einsatz der ET 200M / S7-300 im explosionsgefährdeten Bereich

Zone 2
Zone 2
Explosionsgefährdete Bereiche werden in Zonen eingeteilt. Die Zonen werden
nach der Wahrscheinlichkeit des Vorhandenseins einer explosionsfähigen
Atmosphäre unterschieden.
Zone Explosionsgefahr Beispiel

2 explosive Gasatmosphäre tritt Bereiche um Flanschverbindungen mit
nur selten und kurzzeitig auf Flachdichtungen bei Rohrleitungen in
geschlossenen Räumen
sicherer nein • außerhalb der Zone 2
Bereich • Standardanwendungen von dezentraler
Peripherie
Nachfolgend finden Sie wichtige Hinweise für die Installation des Dezentralen
Peripheriegerätes ET 200M und der SIMATIC S7-300 im explosionsgefährdeten
Bereich.
Weitere Informationen
Weitere Informationen zum ET 200M und zu den verschiedenen S7-300-
Baugruppen finden Sie im Handbuch.
Fertigungsort
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany
Zulassung
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 nach EN 50021 : 1999

Prüfnummer: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X
Hinweis
Baugruppen mit der Zulassung II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 dürfen nur in
Automatisierungssysteme SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M der Gerätekategorie 3
eingesetzt werden.

A5E00105505-03 18
Instandhaltung
Für eine Reparatur muss die betroffene Baugruppe an den Fertigungsort geschickt
werden. Nur dort darf die Reparatur durchgeführt werden.
Besondere Bedingungen
1. Das Dezentrale Peripheriegerät ET 200M und die SIMATIC S7-300 müssen in
einen Schaltschrank oder ein metallisches Gehäuse eingebaut werden. Diese
müssen mindestens die Schutzart IP 54 (nach EN 60529) gewährleisten. Dabei
sind die Umgebungsbedingungen zu berücksichtigen, in denen das Gerät
installiert wird. Für das Gehäuse muss eine Herstellererklärung für Zone 2
vorliegen (gemäß EN 50021).
2. Wenn am Kabel bzw. an der Kabeleinführung dieses Gehäuses unter Betriebs-
bedingungen eine Temperatur > 70 °C erreicht wird oder wenn unter Betriebs-
bedingungen die Temperatur an der Aderverzweigung > 80 °C sein kann,
müssen die Temperatureigenschaften der Kabel mit den tatsächlich
gemessenen Temperaturen übereinstimmen.
3. Die eingesetzten Kabeleinführungen müssen der geforderten IP-Schutzart und
dem Abschnitt 7.2 (gemäß EN 50021) entsprechen.
4. Alle Geräte, einschließlich Schalter etc., die an den Ein- und Ausgängen von
ET 200M- und S7-300-Systemen angeschlossen werden, müssen für den
Explosionsschutz Typ EEx nA oder EEx nC genehmigt sein.
5. Es müssen Maßnahmen getroffen werden, dass die Nennspannung durch
Transienten um nicht mehr als 40 % überschritten werden kann.
6. Umgebungstemperaturbereich: 0° C bis 60° C
7. Innerhalb des Gehäuses ist an einem nach dem Öffnen gut sichtbaren Platz ein
Schild mit folgender Warnung anzubringen:
Warnung
Das Gehäuse darf nur kurze Zeit geöffnet werden, z. B. für visuelle Diagnose.
Betätigen Sie dabei keine Schalter, ziehen oder stecken keine Baugruppen und
trennen keine elektrischen Leitungen (Steckverbindungen).
Diese Warnung kann unberücksichtigt bleiben, wenn bekannt ist, dass keine
explosionsgefährdete Atmosphäre herrscht.
Liste der zugelassenen Baugruppen

Die Liste mit den zugelassenen Baugruppen finden Sie im Internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/
unter der Beitrags-ID 13702947

A5E00105505-03 1-19
1.9.2 Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area
Zone 2
Hazardous areas are divided up into zones. The zones are distinguished according
to the probability of the existence of an explosive atmosphere.
Zone Explosion Hazard Example

2 Explosive gas atmosphere Areas around flange joints with flat
occurs only seldom and for a gaskets in pipes in enclosed spaces
short time
Safe area No • Outside zone 2
• Standard distributed I/O applications
Below you will find important information on the installation of the ET 200M
distributed I/O device and the SIMATIC S7-300 in a hazardous area.
Further Information
You will find further information on the ET 200M and the various S7-300 modules
in the manual.
Production Location
92224 Amberg
Germany
Certification
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 to EN 50021 : 1999
Test number: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X
Note
Modules with II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 certification can only be used in
SIMATIC S7-300/ET 200M automation systems belonging to equipment
category 3.

1-20 A5E00105505-03
Maintenance
If repair is necessary, the affected module must be sent to the production location.
Repairs can only be carried there.
Special Conditions
1. The ET 200M distributed I/O device and the SIMATIC S7-300 must be installed
in a cabinet or metal housing. These must comply with the IP 54 degree of
protection as a minimum. The environmental conditions under which the
equipment is installed must be taken into account. There must be a
manufacturer's declaration for zone 2 available for the housing (in accordance
with EN 50021).
2. If a temperature of > 70 °C is reached in the cable or at the cable entry of this
housing under operating conditions, or if a temperature of > 80 °C can be
reached at the junction of the conductors under operating conditions, the
temperature-related properties of the cables must correspond to the
temperatures actually measured.
3. The cable entries used must comply with the required IP degree of protection
and Section 7.2 (in accordance with EN 50021).
4. All devices (including switches, etc.) that are connected to the inputs and
outputs of fail-safe signal modules must be approved for EEx nA or EEx nC
explosion protection.
5. Steps must be taken to ensure that the rated voltage through transients cannot
be exceeded by more than 40 %.
6. Ambient temperature range: 0° C to 60° C
7. A sign containing the following warning must be put up inside the housing in an
easily visible position when the housing is opened:
Warning
The housing can only be opened for a short time (e.g. for visual diagnostics). If
you do this, do not operate any switches, remove or install any modules or
disconnect any electrical cables (plug-in connections).
You can disregard this warning if you know that the atmosphere is not
hazardous (i.e. there is no risk of explosion).
List of Approved Modules

You will find the list of approved modules under the ID 13702947 on the Internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/.

A5E00105505-03 1-21
1.9.3 Utilisation de l'ET 200M / S7-300 dans un environnement à

risque d'explosion en zone 2
Zone 2
Les environnements à risque d'explosion sont répartis en zones. Les zones se
distinguent par la probabilité de présence d'une atmosphère explosive.
Zone Risque d'explosion Exemple

2 Formation rare et brève d'une Environnement de raccords à joints plats
atmosphère gazeuse explosive dans le cas de conduites dans des locaux
fermés
Zone sûre Non • A l'extérieur de la zone 2
• Utilisation standard de périphérie
décentralisée
Vous trouverez ci-après des remarques importantes pour l'installation de la station

de périphérie décentralisée ET 200M et du SIMATIC S7-300 dans un
environnement présentant un risque d'explosion.
Informations complémentaires
Des informations complémentaires sur l'ET 200M et les divers modules S7-300 se
trouvent dans le manuel.
Lieu de production
92224 Amberg
Germany
Homologation
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 selon EN 50021 : 1999
Numéro de contrôle : KEMA 02ATEX1096 X
Nota
Les modules homologués II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 ne peuvent être utilisés
que dans des automates SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M de catégorie 3.

1-22 A5E00105505-03
Entretien
Si une réparation est nécessaire, le module concerné doit être expédié au lieu de
production. La réparation ne doit être effectuée qu'en ce lieu.
Conditions particulières
1. La station de périphérie décentralisée ET 200M et le SIMATIC S7-300 doivent
être installés dans une armoire ou un boîtier métallique. Ceux-ci doivent assurer
au moins l'indice de protection IP 54. Il faut alors tenir compte des conditions
d'environnement dans lesquelles l'appareil est installé. Le boîtier doit faire
l’objet d’une déclaration de conformité du fabricant pour la zone 2 (selon
EN 50021).
2. Si dans les conditions d’exploitation, une température > 70 °C est atteinte au
niveau du câble ou de l’entrée du câble dans ce boîtier, ou bien si la
température au niveau de la dérivation des conducteurs peut être > 80 °C, les
capacités de résistance thermique des câbles doivent corespondre aux
températures effectivement mesurées.
3. Les entrées de câbles utilisées doivent avoir le niveau de protection IP exigé et
être conformes au paragraphe 7.2 (selon EN 50021).
4. Tous les appareillages (y compris les interrupteurs, etc.) raccordés aux entrées
et sorties de modules de signaux à sécurité intrinsèque doivent être
homologués pour la protection antidéflagrante type EEx nA ou EEx nC.
5. Il faut prendre des mesures pour que la tension nominale ne puisse pas être
dépassée de plus de 40% sous l’influence de transitoires.
6. Plage de température ambiante : 0° C à 60° C
7. A l’intérieur du boîtier, il faut placer, à un endroit bien visible après ouverture,
une plaquette comportant l’avertissement suivant :
Avertissement
Ouvir le boîtier le moins longtemps possible, par exemple pour effectuer un
diagnostic visuel. Ce faisant, n’actionnez aucun commutateur, ne déconnectez
aucun module et ne débanchez pas de câbles électriques (connexions).
Le respect de cet avertissement n’est pas impératif s’il est certain que
l’environnement ne présente pas de risque d’explosion.
Liste des modules homologués

Vous trouverez sur Internet la liste des modules homologués :
référence ID 13702947

A5E00105505-03 1-23
1.9.4 Aplicación de la ET 200M / S7-300 en áreas con peligro de

explosión, zona 2
Zona 2
Las áreas con peligro de explosión se clasifican en zonas. Las zonas se
diferencian según la probabilidad de la existencia de una atmósfera capaz de sufrir
una explosión.
Zona Peligro de explosión Ejemplo

2 La atmósfera explosiva de gas Áreas alrededor de uniones abridadas con
sólo se presenta rara vez y muy juntas planas en tuberías en locales
brevemente cerrados
Área segura No • fuera de la zona 2
• Aplicaciones estándar de la periferia
descentralizada
A continuación encontrará importantes informaciones para la instalación de la

unidad periférica descentralizada ET 200M y del SIMATIC S7-300 en áreas con
peligro de explosión.
Otras informaciones
Encontrará otras informaciones relativas a la ET 200S y a los distintos módulos
S7-300 en el Manual.
Lugar de fabricación
92224 Amberg
Germany
Homologación
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 según norma EN 50021 : 1999
Número de comprobación: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X
Nota
Los módulos con la homologación II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 pueden
utilizarse únicamente en los autómatas programables SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M
de la categoría de equipo 3.

1-24 A5E00105505-03
Mantenimiento
Para una reparación se ha de remitir el módulo afectado al lugar de fabricación.
Sólo allí se puede realizar la reparación.
Condiciones especiales
1. La unidad periférica descentralizada ET 200M y el SIMATIC S7-300 se han de
montar en un armario eléctrico de distribución o en una carcasa metálica. Éstos
deben garantizar como mínimo el grado de protección IP 54. Para ello se han
de tener en cuenta las condiciones ambientales, en las cuales se instala el
equipo. La caja deberá contar con una declaración del fabricante para la zona 2
(conforme a EN 50021).
2. Si durante la operación se alcanzara una temperatura > 70° C en el cable o la
entrada de cables de esta caja o bien una temperatura > 80° C en la
bifurcación de hilos, deberán adaptarse las propiedades térmicas de los cables
a las temperaturas medidas efectivamente.
3. Las entradas de cable utilizadas deben cumplir el grado de protección IP
exigido y lo expuesto en el apartado 7.2 (conforme a EN 50021).
4. Todos los dispositivos –inclusive interruptores, etc.– conectados a las entradas
y salidas de módulos de señales de alta disponibilidad deben estar
homologados para la protección contra explosiones del tipo EEx nA o EEx nC.
5. Es necesario adoptar las medidas necesarias para evitar que la tensión
nominal pueda rebasar en más del 40 % debido a efectos transitorios.
6. Margen de temperatura ambiente: 0° C hasta 60° C
7. Dentro de la caja deberá colocarse en un lugar perfectamente visible tras su
apertura un rótulo con la siguiente advertencia:
Precaución
Abrir la caja sólo brevemente, p.ej. para el diagnóstico visual. Durante este
tiempo Ud. no deberá activar ningún interruptor, desenchufar o enchufar
módulos ni separar conductores eléctricos (conexiones enchufables).
Esta advertencia puede ignorarse si Ud. sabe que en la atmósfera existente no
hay peligro de explosión.
Lista de los módulos homologados

En la internet hallará Ud. una lista con los módulos homologados:
bajo el ID de asignación 13702947

A5E00105505-03 1-25
1.9.5 Impiego dell'ET 200M / S7-300 nell'area a pericolo di esplosione

zona 2
Zona 2
Le aree a pericolo di esplosione vengono suddivise in zone. Le zone vengono
distinte secondo la probabilità della presenza di un'atmosfera esplosiva.
Zona Pericolo di esplosione Esempio

2 L'atmosfera esplosiva si Aree intorno a collegamenti a flange con
presente solo raramente e guarnizioni piatte nelle condotte in
brevemente ambienti chiusi
Area sicura No • Al di fuori della zona 2
• Applicazioni standard di periferia
decentrata
Qui di seguito sono riportate delle avvertenze importanti per l'installazione dell'unità
di periferia decentrata ET 200M e del SIMATIC S7-300 nell'area a pericolo di
esplosione.
Ulteriori informazioni
Ulteriori informazioni sull'ET 200M e sulle diverse unità S7-300 si trovano nel
manuale.
Luogo di produzione
92224 Amberg
Germany
Autorizzazione
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 secondo EN 50021 : 1999
Numero di controllo: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X
Avvertenza
Le unità con l'autorizzazione II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 possono essere
impiegate solo nei sistemi di controllori programmabili SIMATIC S7-300 /
ET 200M della categoria di apparecchiature 3.

1-26 A5E00105505-03
Manutenzione
Per una riparazione, l'unità interessata deve essere inviata al luogo di produzione.
La riparazione può essere effettuata solo lì.
Condizioni particolari
1. L'unità di periferia decentrata ET 200M e il SIMATIC S7-300 devono essere
montati in un armadio elettrico o in un contenitore metallico. Questi devono
assicurare almeno il tipo di protezione IP 54. In questo caso bisogna tenere
conto delle condizioni ambientali nelle quali l'apparecchiatura viene installata.
Per il contenitore deve essere presente una dichiarazione del costruttore per la
zona 2 (secondo EN 50021).
2. Se nei cavi o nel loro punto di ingresso in questo contenitore viene raggiunta in
condizioni di esercizio una temperatura > 70 °C o se in condizioni di esercizio la
temperatura nella derivazione dei fili può essere > 80 °C, le caratteristiche di
temperatura dei cavi devono essere conformi alla temperatura effettivamente
misurata.
3. Gli ingressi dei cavi usati devono essere conformi al tipo di protezione richiesto
e alla sezione 7.2 (secondo EN 50021).
4. Tutte le apparecchiature, inclusi interruttori, ecc. che vengono collegati agli
ingressi/uscite di unità di segnale ad elevata sicurezza, devono essere stati
omologati per la protezione da esplosione tipo EEx nA o EEx nC.
5. Devono essere prese delle misure per evitare che la tensione nominale possa
essere superata per più del 40% da parte di transienti.
6. Campo termico ambientale: da 0° C a 60° C
7. All’interno del contenitore va apportata, in un luogo ben visibile dopo l’apertura,
una targhetta con il seguente avvertimento:
Attenzione
Il contenitore può rimanere aperto solo per breve tempo, ad esempio per una
diagnostica a vista. In tal caso non azionare alcun interruttore, non disinnestare
o innestare unità e non staccare connessioni elettriche (connettori).
Non è necessario tenere conto di questo avvertimento se è noto che non c’è
un’atmosfera a rischio di esplosione.
Elenco delle unità abilitate

La lista con le unità omologate si trova in Internet al sito:
all’ID di voce 13702947

A5E00105505-03 1-27
1.9.6 Gebruik van de ET 200M / S7-300 in het explosief gebied zone 2
Zone 2
Explosieve gebieden worden ingedeeld in zones. Bij de zones wordt
onderscheiden volgens de waarschijnlijkheid van de aanwezigheid van een
explosieve atmosfeer.
Zone Explosiegevaar Voorbeeld

2 Een explosieve gasatmosfeer Gebieden rond flensverbindingen met
treedt maar zelden op en voor pakkingen bij buisleidingen in gesloten
korte duur vertrekken
Veilig Neen • Buiten de zone 2
gebied • Standaardtoepassingen van decentrale
periferie
Hierna vindt u belangrijke aanwijzingen voor de installatie van het decentrale

periferieapparaat ET 200M en van de SIMATIC S7-300 in het explosief gebied.
Verdere informatie
In het handboek vindt u verdere informatie over de ET 200M en over de
verschillende
S7-300-modulen.
Productieplaats
Werner-von-Siemens-Strasse 50
92224 Amberg
Germany
Vergunning
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 conform EN 50021 : 1999
Keuringsnummer: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X
Opmerking
Modulen met de vergunning II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 mogen slechts worden
gebruikt in automatiseringssystemen SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M van de
apparaatcategorie 3.

1-28 A5E00105505-03
Instandhouding
Voor een reparatie moet de betreffende module naar de plaats van vervaardiging
worden gestuurd. Alleen daar mag de reparatie worden uitgevoerd.
Speciale voorwaarden
1. Het decentrale periferieapparaat ET 200M en de SIMATIC S7-300 moeten
worden ingebouwd in een schakelkast of in een behuizing van metaal. Deze
moeten minstens de veiligheidsgraad IP 54 waarborgen. Hierbij dient rekening
te worden gehouden met de omgevingsvoorwaarden waarin het apparaat wordt
geïnstalleerd. Voor de behuizing dient een verklaring van de fabrikant voor
zone 2 te worden ingediend (volgens EN 50021).
2. Als aan de kabel of aan de kabelinvoering van deze behuizing onder
bedrijfsomstandigheden een temperatuur wordt bereikt > 70 °C of als onder
bedrijfsomstandigheden de temperatuur aan de adervertakking > 80 °C kan
zijn, moeten de temperatuureigenschappen van de kabel overeenstemmen met
de werkelijk gemeten temperaturen.
3. De aangebrachte kabelinvoeringen moeten de vereiste IP-veiligheidsgraad
hebben en in overeenstemming zijn met alinea 7.2 (volgens EN 50021).
4. Alle apparaten, schakelaars enz. inbegrepen, die worden aangesloten op de in-
en uitgangen van tegen fouten beveiligde signaalmodulen, moeten zijn
goedgekeurd voor de explosiebeveiliging type EEx nA of EEx nC.
5. Er dienen maatregelen te worden getroffen, zodat de nominale spanning door
transiënten met niet meer dan 40 % kan worden overschreden.
6. Omgevingstemperatuurbereik: 0° C tot 60° C
7. Binnen de behuizing dient op een na het openen goed zichtbare plaats een
bord te worden aangebracht met de volgende waarschuwing:
Waarschuwing
De behuizing mag slechts voor korte tijd worden geopend, bijv. voor een visuele
diagnose. Bedien hierbij geen schakelaar, trek of steek geen modulen en
ontkoppel geen elektrische leidingen (steekverbindingen).
Deze waarschuwing kan buiten beschouwing blijven, indien bekend is dat er
geen explosieve atmosfeer heerst.
Lijst van de toegelaten modulen

De lijst met de toegelaten modulen vindt u in het internet:
onder de bijdrage-ID 13702947

A5E00105505-03 1-29
1.9.7 Brug af ET 200M / S7-300 i det eksplosionfarlige område zone 2
Zone 2
Eksplosionsfarlige områder inddeles i zoner. Zonerne adskiller sig indbyrdes efter
hvor sandsynligt det er, at der er en eksplosiv atmosfære.
Zone Eksplosionsfare Eksempel

2 Eksplosiv gasatmosfære Områder rundt om flangeforbindelser med
optræder kun sjældent og varer flade pakninger ved rørledninger i lukkede
kort rum
Sikkert Nej • Uden for zone 2
område • Standardanvendelser decentral periferi
I det følgende findes vigtige henvisninger vedr. installation af det decentrale

periferiudstyr ET 200M og SIMATIC S7-300 i det eksplosionfarlige område.
Yderligere informationer
Yderligere informationer om ET 200M og de forskellige S7-300-komponenter
findes i manualen.
Produktionssted
92224 Amberg
Germany
Godkendelse
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 efter EN 50021 : 1999
Kontrolnummer: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X
Bemærk
Komponenter med godkendelsen II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 må kun monteres
i automatiseringssystemer SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M - udstyrskategori 3.

1-30 A5E00105505-03
Vedligeholdelse
Skal den pågældende komponent repareres, bedes De sende den til
produktionsstedet. Reparation må kun udføres der.
Særlige betingelser
1. Det decentrale periferiudstyr ET 200M og SIMATIC S7-300 skal monteres i et
kontrolskab eller et metalkabinet. Disse skal mindst kunne sikre
beskyttelsesklasse IP 54. I denne forbindelse skal der tages højde for de
omgivelsestemperaturer, i hvilke udstyret er installeret. Der skal være
udarbejdet en erklæring fra fabrikanten for kabinettet for zone 2 (iht. EN 50021).
2. Hvis kablet eller kabelindføringen på dette hus når op på en temperatur på
> 70 °C under driftsbetingelser eller hvis temperaturen på åreforegreningen kan
være > 80 °C under driftsbetingelser, skal kablernes temperaturegenskaber
stemme overens med de temperaturer, der rent faktisk måles.
3. De benyttede kabelindføringer skal være i overensstemmelse med den
krævede IP-beskyttelsestype og afsnittet 7.2 (iht. EN 50021).
4. Alle apparater, inkl. kontakter osv., der forbindes med ind- og udgangene til
fejlsikre signalkomponenter, skal være godkendt til eksplosionsbeskyttelse af
type EEx nA eller EEx nC.
5. Der skal træffes foranstaltninger, der sørger for, at den nominelle spænding via
transienter ikke kan overskrides mere end 40 %.
6. Omgivelsestemperaturområde: 0° C til 60° C
7. I kabinettet skal der anbringes et skilt, der skal kunne ses, når kabinettet åbnes.
Dette skilt skal have følgende advarsel:
Advarsel
Kabinettet må kun åbnes i kort tid, f.eks. til visuel diagnose. Tryk i denne
forbindelse ikke på kontakter, træk eller isæt ikke komponenter og afbryd ikke
elektriske ledninger (stikforbindelser).
Denne advarsel skal der ikke tages højde for, hvis man ved, at der ikke er
nogen eksplosionsfarlig atmosfære.
Liste over godkendte komponenter

Listen med de godkendte komponenter findes på internettet:
under bidrags-ID 13702947

A5E00105505-03 1-31
1.9.8 ET 200M / S7-300:n käyttö räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla,

vyöhyke 2
Vyöhyke 2
Räjähdysvaarannetut alueet jaetaan vyöhykkeisiin. Vyöhykkeet erotellaan
räjähdyskelpoisen ilmakehän olemassa olon todennäköisyyden mukaan.
Vyöhyke Räjähdysvaara Esimerkki

2 Räjähtävä kaasuilmakehä Alueet putkistojen lattatiivisteillä varustuilla
ilmaantuu vain harvoin ja laippaliitoksilla suljetuissa tiloissa
lyhytaikaisesti
turvallinen Ei • vyöhykkeen 2 ulkopuolella
alue • Hajautetun ulkopiirin vakiosovellukset
Seuraavasta löydätte tärkeitä ohjeita hajautetun ulkopiirilaitteen ET 200M ja

SIMATIC S7-300 asennukseen räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla.
Lisätietoja
Lisätietoja ET 200M:ään ja erilaisiin S7-300-rakenneryhmiin löydätte ohjekirjasta.
Valmistuspaikka
92224 Amberg
Germany
Hyväksyntä
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 EN 50021 mukaan: 1999
Tarkastusnumero: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X
Ohje
Rakenneryhmät hyväksynnän II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 kanssa saadaan
käyttää ainoastaan laitekategorian 3 automatisointijärjestelmissä
SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M.

1-32 A5E00105505-03
Kunnossapito
Korjausta varten täytyy kyseinen rakenneryhmä lähettää valmistuspaikkaan.
Korjaus voidaan suorittaa ainoastaan siellä.
Erityiset vaatimukset
1. Hajautettu ulkopiirilaite ET 200M ja SIMATIC S7-300 täytyy asentaa
kytkentäkaappiin tai metalliseen koteloon. Näiden täytyy olla vähintään
kotelointiluokan IP 54 mukaisia. Tällöin on huomioitava ympäristöolosuhteet,
johon laite asennetaan. Kotelolle täytyy olla valmistajaselvitys vyöhykettä 2
varten (EN 50021 mukaan).
2. Kun johdolla tai tämän kotelon johdon sisäänviennillä saavutetaan > 70 °C
lämpötila tai kun käyttöolosuhteissa lämpötila voi piuhajaotuksella olla > 80 °C,
täytyy johdon lämpötilaominaisuuksien vastata todellisesti mitattuja lämpötiloja.
3. Käytettyjen johtojen sisäänohjauksien täytyy olla vaaditun IP-kotelointiluokan ja
kohdan 7.2 (EN 50021 mukaan) mukaisia.
4. Kaikkien laitteiden, kytkimet jne. mukaan lukien, jotka liitetään virheiltä
suojattujen signaalirakenneryhmien tuloille ja lähdöille, täytyy olla hyväksyttyjä
tyypin EEx nA tai EEx nC räjähdyssuojausta varten.
5. Toimenpiteet täytyy suorittaa, ettei nimellisjännite voi transienttien kautta ylittyä
enemmän kuin 40 %.
6. Ympäristölämpötila-alue: 0° C ... 60° C
7. Kotelon sisälle, avauksen jälkeen näkyvälle paikalle, on kiinnitettävä kilpi, jossa
on seuraava varoitus:
Varoitus
Kotelo saadaan avata ainoastaan lyhyeksi ajaksi, esim. visuaalista diagnoosia
varten. Älä tällöin käytä mitään kytkimiä, vedä tai liitä mitään rakenneryhmiä,
äläkä erota mitään sähköjohtoja (pistoliittimiä).
Tätä varoitusta ei tarvitse huomioida, kun on tiedossa, että minkäänlaista
räjähdysvaarannettua ilmakehää ei ole olemassa.
Hyväksyttyjen rakenneryhmien lista

Lista hyväksiytyistä rakennesarjoista löytyy internetistä osoitteesta:
käyttäjätunnuksella 13702947

A5E00105505-03 1-33
1.9.9 Användning av ET 200M / S7-300 i explosionsriskområde zon 2
Zon 2
Explosionsriskområden delas in i zoner. Zonerna delas in enligt sannolikheten att
en atmosfär med explosionsfara föreligger.
Zon Explosionsfara Exempel

2 Explosiv gasatmosfär uppstår Områden kring flänsförbindelser med
endast sällan eller kortvarigt packningar vid rörledningar i slutna
utrymmen
Säkert Nej • Utanför zon 2
område • Standardanvändning av decentral
periferi
Nedan följer viktiga anvisningar om installationen av den decentrala

periferienheten ET 200M och SIMATIC°S7-300 i ett explosionsriskområde.
Ytterligare information
Ytterligare information om ET 200M och de olika S7-300-komponentgrupperna
finner du i handboken.
Tillverkningsort
92224 Amberg
Germany
Godkännande
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 enligt EN 50021 : 1999
Kontrollnummer: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X
Anvisning
Komponentgrupper med godkännande II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 får endast
användas i automatiseringssystemen SIMATIC S7-300 / ET°200M från
apparatgrupp 3.

1-34 A5E00105505-03
Underhåll
Vid reparation måste den aktuella komponentgruppen insändas till tillverkaren.
Reparationer får endast genomföras där.
Särskilda villkor
1. Den decentrala periferienheten ET 200M och SIMATIC°S7-300 måste monteras
i ett kopplingsskåp eller metallhus. Dessa måste minst vara av skyddsklass
IP 54. Därvid ska omgivningsvillkoren där enheten installeras beaktas. För
kåpan måste en tillverkardeklaration för zon 2 föreligga (enligt EN 50021).
2. Om en temperatur på > 70°C uppnås vid husets kabel resp kabelinföring under
driftvillkor eller om temperaturen vid trådförgreningen kan vara > 80°C under
driftvillkor, måste kabelns temperaturegenskaper överensstämma med den
verkligen uppmätta temperaturen.
3. De använda kabelinföringarna måste uppfylla kraven i det krävda IP-
skyddsutförandet och i avsnitt 7.2 (enligt EN 50021).
4. Alla apparater, inklusive brytare osv, som ansluts till felsäkrade signalenheters
in- och utgångar, måste vara godkända för explosionsskydd av typ EEx nA eller
EEx nC.
5. Åtgärder måste vidtas så, att märkspänningen ej kan överskridas med mer än
40°% genom transienter.
6. Omgivningstemperatur: 0° C till 60° C
7. När huset öppnats ska en skylt med följande varning monteras på ett tydligt
synligt ställe huset:
Varning
Huset får endast öppnas under kort tid, t ex för visuell diagnos. Använd därvid
inga brytare, lossa eller anslut inga enheter och frånskilj inga elektriska
ledningar (insticksanslutningar).
Ingen hänsyn måste tas till denna varning om det är säkert att det inte råder
någon explosionsfarlig atmosfär.
Lista över godkända komponentgrupper

Lista över godkända enheter återfinns i Internet:
under bidrags-ID 13702947

A5E00105505-03 1-35
1.9.10 Uso do ET 200M / S7-300 em área exposta ao perigo de

explosão 2
Zona 2
As áreas expostas ao perigo de explosão são divididas em zonas. As zonas são
diferenciadas de acordo com a probabilidade da existência de uma atmosfera
explosiva.
Zona Perigo de explosão Exemplo

2 Só raramente e por um breve Áreas em torno de ligações flangeadas
período de tempo surgem com vedações chatas em tubulações em
atmosferas explosivas recintos fechados
Área segura Não • fora da zona 2
• Aplicações descentralizadas de
periferia descentralizada
A seguir, o encontrará avisos importantes para a instalação do aparelho periférico

descentralizado ET 200M e da SIMATIC S7-300 em área exposta ao perigo de
explosão.
Mais informações
Para obter mais informações sobre o ET 200M e os diversos grupos construtivos
S7-300, consulte o manual.
Local de produção
92224 Amberg
Germany
Licença
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 seg. EN 50021 : 1999
Número de ensaio: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X
Aviso
Componentes com a licença II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 só podem ser
aplicados em sistemas de automação SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M da categoria
de aparelho 3.

1-36 A5E00105505-03
Reparo
Os grupos construtivos em questão devem ser remetidos para o local de produção
a fim de que seja realizado o reparo. Apenas lá deve ser efetuado o reparo.
Condições especiais
1. O aparelho periférico ET 200M e a SIMATIC S7-300 devem ser montados em
um armário de distribuição ou em uma caixa metálica. Estes devem garantir no
mínimo o tipo de proteção IP 54. Durante este trabalho deverão ser levados em
consideração as condições locais, nas quais o aparelho será instalado. Para a
caixa deverá ser apresentada uma declaração do fabricante para a zona 2 (de
acordo com EN 50021).
2. Caso no cabo ou na entrada do cabo desta carcaça sob as condições
operacionais seja atingida uma temperatura de > 70 °C, ou caso sob condições
operacionais a temperatura na ramificação do fio poderá atingir > 80 °C, as
caraterísticas de temperatura deverão corresponder às temperaturas realmente
medidas.
3. As entradas de cabo utilizadas devem corresponder ao tipo exigido de
proteção IP e à seção 7.2 (de acordo com o EN 50021).
4. Todos os aparelhos, inclusive as chaves, etc., que estejam conectadas em
entradas e saídas de módulos de sinais protegidos contra erro, devem possuir
a licença para a proteção de explosão do tipo EEx nA ou EEx nC.
5. Precisam ser tomadas medidas para que a tensão nominal através de
transitórios não possa ser ultrapassada em mais que 40 %.
6. Área de temperatura ambiente: 0° C até 60° C
7. No âmbito da carcaça deve ser colocada, após a abertura, em um ponto bem
visível uma placa com a seguinte advertência:
Advertência
A carcaça deve ser aberta apenas por um breve período de tempo, por ex. para
diagnóstico visual. Não acione nenhum interruptor, não retire ou conecte
nenhum módulo e não separe nenhum fio elétrico (ligações de tomada).
Esta advertência poderá ser ignorada caso se saiba que não há nenhuma
atmosfera sujeita ao perigo de explosão.
Lista dos componentes autorizados

A lista com os módulos autorizados encontram-se na Internet:
sob o número de ID 13702947

A5E00105505-03 1-37
1.9.11 Χρήση της συσκευής ET 200M / S7-300 σε επικίνδυνη για έκρηξη

περιοχή, ζώνη 2
Ζώνη 2
Οι επικίνδυνες για έκρηξη περιοχές χωρίζονται σε ζώνες. Οι ζώνες διαφέρουν
σύµφωνα µε την πιθανότητα ύπαρξης ενός ικανού για έκρηξη περιβάλλοντος.
Ζώνη Κίνδυνος έκρηξης Παράδειγµα

2 Εκρηκτικό περιβάλλον αερίου Περιοχές γύρω από φλαντζωτές
παρουσιάζεται µόνο σπάνια και συνδέσεις µε τσιµούχες σε σωληνώσεις σε
για σύντοµο χρονικό διάστηµα κλειστούς χώρους
Ασφαλής Όχι • Εκτός της ζώνης 2
περιοχή • Τυπικές εφαρµογές αποκεντρωµένης
περιφέρειας
Στη συνέχεια θα βρείτε σηµαντικές υποδείξεις για την εγκατάσταση της

αποκεντρωµένης περιφερειακής συσκευής ET 200M και του δοµικού
συγκροτήµατος SIMATIC S7-300 σε επικίνδυνη για έκρηξη περιοχή.
Επιπλέον πληροφορίες
Επιπλέον πληροφορίες για τη συσκευή ET 200M και για τα διάφορα δοµικά
συγκροτήµατα (ενότητες) S7-300 θα βρείτε στο εγχειρίδιο.
Τόπος κατασκευής
92224 Amberg
Germany
Άδεια
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 σύµφωνα µε το πρότυπο
EN 50021 : 1999
Αριθµός ελέγχου: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X
Υπόδειξη
Τα δοµικά συγκροτήµατα µε την άδεια II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 επιτρέπεται
να τοποθετηθούν µόνο σε συστήµατα αυτοµατισµού SIMATIC S7-300 / ET 200M
της κατηγορίας συσκευής 3.

1-38 A5E00105505-03
Συντήρηση
Για µια επισκευή πρέπει να σταλθεί το αντίστοιχο δοµικό συγκρότηµα στον τόπο
κατασκευής. Μόνο εκεί επιτρέπεται να γίνει η επισκευή.
Ιδιαίτερες προϋποθέσεις
1. Η αποκεντρωµένη περιφερειακή συσκευή ET 200M και το δοµικό συγκρότηµα
SIMATIC S7-300 πρέπει να ενσωµατωθούν σε ένα ερµάριο ζεύξης ή σε ένα
µεταλλικό περίβληµα. Αυτά πρέπει να εξασφαλίζουν το λιγότερο το βαθµό
προστασίας IP 54. Σε αυτήν την περίπτωση πρέπει να ληφθούν υπόψη οι
περιβαλλοντικές συνθήκες, στις οποίες θα εγκατασταθεί η συσκευή. Για το
περίβληµα πρέπει να προβλέπεται δήλωση του κατασκευαστή για τη ζώνη 2
(σύµφωνα µε το πρότυπο EN 50021).
2. Εάν στο καλώδιο ή στην είσοδο του καλωδίου αυτού του περιβλήµατος κάτω
από συνθήκες λειτουργίας η θερµοκρασία ξεπεράσει τους 70 °C ή όταν κάτω
από συνθήκες λειτουργίας η θερµοκρασία στη διακλάδωση του σύρµατος
µπορεί να είναι µεγαλύτερη από 80 °C, πρέπει οι θερµοκρασιακές ιδιότητες των
καλωδίων να ταυτίζονται µε τις πραγµατικά µετρηµένες θερµοκρασίες.
3. Οι χρησιµοποιούµενες εισόδοι καλωδίων πρέπει να συµµορφώνονται µε το
βαθµό προστασίας IP 54 στην ενότητα 7.2 (σύµφωνα µε το πρότυπο
EN 50021).
4. Όλες οι συσκευές, συµπεριλαµβανοµένων διακοπτών κ.α., που συνδέονται στις
εισόδους και εξόδους δοµικών συγκροτηµάτων ασφαλών σηµάτων, πρέπει να
φέρουν εγκριµένη προστασία κατά έκρηξης τύπου EEx nA ή EEx nC.
5. Πρέπει να ληφθούν µέτρα, να µην µπορεί να γίνει υπέρβαση της ονοµαστικής
τάσης µέσω αιφνίδιας µεταβολής της τάσης πάνω από 40 %.
6. Περιοχή θερµοκρασίας περιβάλλοντος: 0° C έως 60° C
7. Πρέπει να τοποθετηθεί µέσα στο περίβληµα σε ευδιάκριτο σηµείο µετά το
άνοιγµα µία πινακίδα µε την ακόλουθη προειδοποίηση:
Προειδοποίηση
Το περίβληµα επιτρέπεται να ανοίγει µόνο για µικρό χρονικό διάστηµα, π.χ. για
τη διενέργεια οπτικής διάγνωσης. Μην κάνετε χρήση διακοπτών, µην τραβάτε ή
εµβυσµατώνετε δοµικά συγκροτήµατα και µη διαχωρίζετε ηλεκτροφόρους
αγωγούς (εµβσυµατώσιµες συνδέσεις).
Η προειδοποίηση αυτή δε χρειάζεται να ληφθεί υπ’ όψιν, εάν είναι γνωστό ότι
δεν υφίσταται ατµόσφαιρα παρουσιάζουσα κίνδυνο έκρηξης.
Κατάλογος των εγκεκριµένων δοµικών συγκροτηµάτων

Η λίστα µε τα εγκριµένα δοµικά συγκροτήµατα υπάρχει στο διαδίκτυο:
µε τον κωδικό συνδροµής 13702947

A5E00105505-03 1-39

1-40 A5E00105505-03
Power Supply Modules 2
Introduction
Various power supply modules are available to supply your S7-300 programmable
controller and the sensors/actuators with 24 VDC.
Power supply modules

This chapter describes the technical specifications of the power supply modules of
the S7-300 programmable controller.
In addition to the technical specifications, this chapter describes the following:
• The characteristics
• Connection Diagram
• Block Diagram
• Line protection
• Reaction to atypical operating conditions
In this chapter

2.1 Power Supply Module PS 305; 2 A 2-2
(6ES7305-1BA80-0AA0)
2.2 Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A; 2-6
(6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0)
(6ES7307-1EAx0-0AA0)
(6ES7307-1KA00-0AA0)

A5E00105505-03 2-1

(6ES7305-1BA80-0AA0)
Order number “SIMATIC Outdoor module”

6ES7305-1BA80-0AA0
Characteristics
The PS 305 power supply module (2 A) has the following salient features:
• Output current 2 A
• Output voltage 24 VDC; proof against short-circuit and open circuit
• Connection to DC power supply
(rated input voltage 24/48/72/96/110 VDC)
• Reliable isolation to EN 60 950
• Can be used as load power supply

2-2 A5E00105505-03
Terminal assignment of the PS 305; 2 A
LED for “24 VDC

output voltage
available”
24 VDC
On/Off switch
for 24 VDC
I
Terminals for system
voltage and protective
grounding conductor
L+1
M1
L+2
Terminals for
M2 24 VDC output
L+2
voltage
M2
L+2
M2
Strain-relief assembly
Figure 2-1 Wiring Schematic of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A)

A5E00105505-03 2-3
Technical specifications of the PS 305; 2 A (6ES7305-1BA80-0AA0)
Dimensions and Weight Other Parameters

Dimensions W H D 80 125 120 Protection class according to I, with protective
(in millimeters) IEC 536 (DIN VDE 0106, Part grounding conductor
1)
Weight Approx. 740 g
Insulation
Input Rating
• Isolation voltage rating 150 VAC
Input voltage (24 V to input)
• Rated value 24/48/72/96/110 VDC
• Tested with 2800 VDC
• Voltage range 16.8 to 138 VDC
Reliable isolation SELV circuit
Rated input current
• At 24 V 2.7 A Buffering of supply failures (at > 10 ms
24/48/72/96/110 V)
• At 48 V 1.3 A
• At 72 V 0.9 A • Repeat rate min. 1 s
• At 96 V 0.65 A Efficiency 75%
• At 110 V 0.6 A
Power input 64 W
Inrush current (at 25 C) 20 A
Power loss 16 W
I2t (at inrush current) 5 A2s
Diagnostics
Output Rating
LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED
Output voltage
• Rated value 24 VDC
1) With limited input voltage range > 24 V (24 to 138 VDC)
• Permitted range 24 V " 3 %, stable at
no load the PS 305 can be loaded with 3 A.
• Ramp-up time max. 3 s

Output current
• Rated value 2 A; 1)
Can be connected in
parallel
Short-circuit protection Electronic, nonlatching,
from 1.65 to 1.95 x IN
Residual ripple max. 150 mVss

2-4 A5E00105505-03
Basic circuit diagram of the PS 305; 2 A
L+1 L+2
M1 M2
24 VDC
I/
Figure 2-2 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A)
Line protection
We recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) (for example
Siemens 5SN1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply
cable of the PS 305 power supply module (2 A):
• Rated current at 110 VDC: 10 A
• Tripping characteristic (type): C.
Reaction to atypical operating conditions
Table 2-1 Reaction of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) to Atypical Operating
Conditions
If ... ... Then ... 24 VDC

LED
... the output circuit is overloaded:
• I > 3.9 A (dynamic) Voltage dip, autom. volt. recovery Flashes
• 3 A < I v 3.9 A (static) Voltage drop, shortening of service life
... the output is short-circuited Output voltage 0 V; automatic voltage Dark
recovery after short circuit has been
eliminated
An overvoltage occurs on the primary side Possible destruction -
There is an undervoltage on the primary Automatic disconnection; automatic voltage Dark
side recovery

A5E00105505-03 2-5

(6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0
Characteristics
• Connection to single-phase AC system
(input voltage 120/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz)
Wiring schematic of the PS 307; 2 A
LED for “24 VDC output

voltage available”
24 VDC
230V Voltage Selector
On/Off switch for

I 24 VDC
L1 Terminals for system

N voltage and protective
grounding conductor
L+
Terminals for 24 VDC
M output voltage
L+
M

2-6 A5E00105505-03
L1 L+
N M
24 VDC
I/
Line protection
• Rated current at 230 VAC: 6 A
Conditions
If ... ... Then ... 24 VDC

LED
eliminated
An overvoltage occurs on the primary side Possible destruction -
side recovery

A5E00105505-03 2-7
Technical specifications of the PS 307; 2 A (6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0)

Dimensions W H D 50 125 120 Protection class according to I, with protective
1)
Insulation
Input Rating
• Rated insulation level 250 VAC
Input voltage (24 V to L1)
• Rated value 120 / 230 VAC • Tested with 2800 VDC
System frequency
• Rated value 50 Hz or 60 Hz
• Permitted range 47 Hz to 63 Hz Bridging of power failures (at 93 min. 20 ms
and/or 187 V)
Rated input current • Repeat rate min 1 s
• At 230 V 0.5 A
• At 120 V 0.8 A Efficiency 83 %
Inrush current (at 25°C) 20 A Power input 58 W
I2t (at inrush current) 1 A2s Power loss typ. 10 W
Output Rating Diagnostics
Output voltage LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED
no load
• Ramp-up time max. 2.5 s
Output current
• Rated value 2 A,
Cannot be connected in
parallel
1.1 to 1.3 x IN

2-8 A5E00105505-03

(6ES7307-1EAx0-0AA0)
Order number: “Standard module

6ES7307-1EA00-0AA0
Order number “SIMATIC Outdoor module”

6ES7307-1EA80-0AA0
Characteristics

A5E00105505-03 2-9
LED for “24 VDC

output voltage
available”
24 VDC
Voltage Selector
230V
On/Off switch
for 24 VDC
I
Terminals for system
grounding conductor
L1
N
L+ Terminals for
M 24 VDC output
L+ voltage
M
L+
M
L1 L+
N M
24 VDC
I/

2-10 A5E00105505-03
Line protection
Conditions
If ... ... Then ... 24 VDC

LED
... the output is short-circuited Output voltage 0 V; automatic voltage recovery Dark
after short circuit has been eliminated
An overvoltage occurs on the primary Possible destruction –
side
There is an undervoltage on the Automatic disconnection; automatic voltage Dark
primary side recovery

A5E00105505-03 2-11
Technical specifications of the PS 307; 5 A (6ES7307-1EA00-0AA0)

Dimensions W x H x D 80 x 125 x 120 Protection class according to I, with protective
1)
Insulation
Input Rating
• Rated value 120 / 230 VAC
• Tested with 2800 VDC
System frequency
• Permitted range 47 Hz to 63 Hz Bridging of power failures (at 93 min. 20 ms
and/or 187 V)
• At 120 V 2A
• At 230 V 1A Efficiency 87 %
Inrush current (at 25 C) 45 A Power input 138 W
I2t (at inrush current) 1.2 A2s Power loss typ. 18 W
Output Rating Diagnostics
Output voltage LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED
• Permitted range 24 V " 5 %,
stable at no load

Output current
• Rated value 5A
parallel

2-12 A5E00105505-03
Technical specifications of the PS 307; 5 A (6ES7307-1EA80-0AA0)

1)
Insulation
Input Rating
• Rated value 120/230 VDC • Tested with 2800 VDC
System frequency Reliable isolation SELV circuit
• Rated value 50 Hz or 60 Hz Bridging of power failures (at 93 min. 20 ms
• Permitted range 47 Hz to 63 Hz and/or 187 V)
Rated input current • Repeat rate min. 1 s
• At 120 V 2.1 A Efficiency 84%
• At 230 V 1.2 A Power input 143 W
Inrush current (at 25 C) 45 A Power loss 23 W
I2t (at inrush current) 1.8 A2s Diagnostics
Output Rating LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED
Output voltage
• Permitted range 24 V " 3 %
• Ramp-up time max. 3 s
Output current
• Rated value 5 A; cannot be
connected in parallel
Short-circuit protection Electronic,
nonlatching,

A5E00105505-03 2-13

(6ES7307-1KA00-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7307-1KA00-0AA0
Characteristics
LED for “24 VDC

output voltage
available” 24 VDC
230V
Voltage Selector
On/Off switch for I

24 VDC
L+ Terminals for
M
L+ 24 VDC
M output
L1 L+ voltage
N M
L+
M
Strain-relief assembly Terminals for system

grounding conductor

2-14 A5E00105505-03
L1 L+
N M
24 VDC
I/
Line protection
We recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) (for example,
Conditions
If ... Reaction of the module 24 VDC

LED
• I > 13 A (dynamic) Voltage dip, autom. volt. recovery Flashes
• 10 A < I v 13 A (static) Voltage drop, shortening of service life
eliminated
An overvoltage occurs on the primary side Possible destruction –
side recovery

A5E00105505-03 2-15
Technical specifications of the PS 307; 10 A (6ES7307-1KA00-0AA0)

1)
Weight 1.2 kg
Insulation
Input Rating
• Rated value 120 / 230 VAC • Tested with 2800 VDC
System frequency Reliable isolation SELV circuit
Bridging of power failures (at 93 min. 20 ms
• Permitted range 47 Hz to 63 Hz
and/or 187 V)
• At 230 V 1.7 A
Efficiency 89 %
• At 120 V 3.5 A
Power input 270 W
Inrush current (at 25 °C) 55 A
Power loss typ. 30 W
I2t (at inrush current) 9 A2s
Diagnostics
Output Rating
LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED
Output voltage
no load
Output current
• Rated value 10 A,
parallel

2-16 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules 3
Structure of the chapter
The present chapter is broken down into the following subjects:
1. Chapter overview of which modules are available and described here
2. Module overview on the most important properties of the modules
3. Sequence of steps from choosing to commissioning the digital module
4. Information that is generally valid – in other words, relating to all digital modules
(for example, parameter assignment and diagnostics)
5. Information that refers to specific modules (for example, characteristics,
diagram of connections and block diagram, technical specifications and special
characteristics of the module):
a) for digital input modules
b) for digital output modules
c) for relay output modules
d) for digital input/output modules
Additional information
Appendix A describes the structure of the parameter sets (data records 0, 1 and
128) in the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to
modify the parameters of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.
Appendix B describes the structure of the diagnostic data (data records 0 and 1) in
the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to
evaluate the diagnostic data of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.

A5E00105505-03 3-1
Digital Modules
In this chapter

3.1 Module Overview 3-4
3.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital 3-10
Module
3.3 Digital Module Parameter Assignment 3-11
3.4 Diagnostics of the Digital Modules 3-12
3.5 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x VDC 24; 3-13
(6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0)
3.6 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC; 3-16
(6ES7321-1EL00-0AA0)
3.7 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24; 3-18
(6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0)
3.8 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed; 3-20
(6ES7321-1BH10-0AA0)
3.9 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V; with Hardware and 3-22
Diagnostic Interrupts, clocked; (6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0)
3.10 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; Source Input; 3-34
(6ES7321-1BH50-0AA0)
3.11 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x UC 24/48 V 3-36
(6ES7321-1CH00-0AA0)
3.12 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 48-125; 3-38
(6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0)
3.13 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230 VAC 3-40
(6ES7321-1FH00-0AA0)
3.14 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 8 x VAC 120/230; 3-42
(6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0)
3.15 Digital Input Module SM 321; 3-44
DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL (6ES7321-1FF10-0AA0)
3.16 Digital Input Module SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; 3-46
(6ES7322-1BL00-0AA0)
3.17 Digital Input Module SM 322; DO 32 x VAC 120/230/1 A; 3-49
(6ES7322-1FL00-0AA0)
3.18 Digital Input Module SM 322; DO 16 x VDC 24/0.5 A; 3-53
(6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0)
3.19 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A 3-56
High Speed; (6ES7322-1BH10-0AA0)
3.20 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC 3-59
(6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0)
3.21 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/1 A 3-66
(6ES7322-1FH00-0AA0)
3.22 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A; 3-69
(6ES7322-1BF01-0AA0)
3.23 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A; 3-72
with Diagnostic Interrupt; (6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0)
3.24 Digital Input Module SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 48-125/1,5 A; 3-81
(6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0)

3-2 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules

3.25 Digital Input module SM 322; DO 8 x VAC 120/230/2 A; 3-84
(6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0)
3.26 Digital Output Module SM 322; 3-87
DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL (6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0)
3.27 Relay Output Module SM 322; 3-93
DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC; (6ES7322-1HH01-0AA0)
3.28 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC; 3-96
(6ES7322-1HF01-0AA0)
3.29 Relay Output Module SM 322; 3-100
DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A; (6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0)
3.30 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. VAC 230/5 A; 3-106
(6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0)
3.31 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; 3-110
DI 16/DO16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7323-1BL00-0AA0)
DI 8/DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A; (6ES7 323-1BH01-0AA0)
DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A; (6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0)

A5E00105505-03 3-3
Digital Modules
3.1 Module Overview
Introduction
The following tables summarize the most important characteristics of the digital
modules. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module
for your task.
Table 3-1 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance
SM 321; SM 321; SM 321; SM 321; SM 321; SM 321;

Module DI 32 x DI 32 x DI 16 x DI 16 x DI 16 x DI 16 x
24 VDC 120 VAC 24 VDC 24 VDC High 24 VDC with 24 VDC;
Speed hardware and source input
Char- diagnostic
acter- interrupts
istics
(-1BL00-) (-1EL00-) (-1BH02-) (-7BH01-) (-1BH50-)
(-1BH10-)
Number of inputs 32 DI; 32 DI; 16 DI; 16 DI; isolated 16 DI; isolated in 16 DI,
isolated in isolated in isolated in in groups of 16 groups of 16 source input,
groups of 16 groups of 8 groups of 16 isolated in
groups of 16
Rated input 24 VDC 120 VAC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

voltage
Suitable for... Switches;
two, three, and four-wire proximity switches (BEROs)
Supports No No No Yes Yes No
clocked operation
Programmable No No No No Yes No
diagnostics
Diagnostic No No No No Yes No
interrupt
Hardware interrupt No No No No Yes No
upon edge change
Settable No No No No Yes No
input delays
Special Features – – – - 2 –
short-circuit-pro
of sensor
supplies for 8
channels each
External
redundant power
supply possible
to supply
sensors

3-4 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Table 3-2 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued)
SM 321; SM 321; SM 321; SM 321; SM 321;

Module
DI 16 x DI 16 x DI 16 x DI 8 x DI 8 x
UC 24/48V 48-125 VDC 120/230 VAC 120/230 VAC 120/230 VAC
Char- ISOL
acter- (-1CH20-) (-1FH00-) (-1FF01-)
istics (-1CH00-) (-1FF10-)
Number of inputs 16 DI; isolated in 16 DI; isolated in 16 DI; isolated in 8 DI, isolated in 8 DI; isolated in
groups of 1 groups of 8 groups of 4 groups of 2 groups of 1
Rated input 24 to 48 VDC, 24 48 to 125 VDC 120/230 VAC 120/230 VAC 120/230 VAC
voltage to 48 VAC
Suitable for... Switches; Switches;
two, three, and four-wire proximity two and three-wire AC proximity switches
switches (BEROs)
Supports No No No No No
clocked operation
Programmable No No No No No
diagnostics
Diagnostic No No No No No
interrupt
Hardware interrupt No No No No No
upon edge change
Settable No No No No No
input delays
Special Features – –

A5E00105505-03 3-5
Digital Modules
Table 3-3 Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance
SM 322; SM 322; SM 322; SM 322; SM 322; SM 322;

Module DO 32 x DO 32 x DO 16 x DO 16 x DO 16 x DO 16 x
24 VDC VAC 120/230/ 24 VDC/ 24 VDC/ 24/48 VUC 120/230 VDC/
Char- 0.5 A 1A 0.5 A 0.5 A High 1A
acter- Speed
istics (-1BL00-) (-1FL00-) (-1BH01-) (-1BH10-) (-5GH00-) (-1FH00-)
Number of outputs 32 DO; 32 DO; 16 DO; 16 DO; 16 DO; 16 DO;

isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in
groups of 8 groups of 8 groups of 8 groups of 8 groups of 1 groups of 8
Output current 0.5 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A
Rated load voltage 24 VDC 120 VAC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 to 48 VDC, 120/230 VAC
24 to 48 VAC
Suitable for... Solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights
Supports No No No Yes No No
clocked operation
Programmable No No No No Yes No
diagnostics
Diagnostic No No No No Yes No
interrupt
Substitute value No No No No Yes No
output
Special Features –

3-6 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Table 3-4 Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued)
SM 322; SM 322; SM 322; SM 322; SM 322;

Module DO 8 x 24VDC/ DO 8 x DO 8 x 48-125 DO8 x DO8 x
2A 24 VDC/0.5 A VDC/ 1.5 A 120/ 230 VAC/2A 120/ 230 VAC/
Char- with diagnostic 2A ISOL
acter- interrupt
istics (-1BF01-) (-8BF00-) (-1CF00-) (-1FF01-) (-5FF00-)
Number of outputs 8 DO; isolated in 8 DO; isolated in 8 DO; isolated 8 DO; isolated in 8 DO; isolated in
groups of 4 groups of 8 and reverse groups of 4 groups of 1
polarity
protection, in
groups of 4
Output current 2A 0.5 A 1.5 A 2A 2A
Rated load voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 48 to 125 VDC 120/230 VAC 120/230 VAC
Suitable for... Solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights AC solenoid valves, contactors, motor
starters, fractional h.p. motors and
indicator lights.
Supports No No No No No
clocked operation
Programmable No Yes No No Yes
diagnostics
Diagnostic No Yes No No Yes
interrupt
Substitute value No Yes No No Yes
output
Special Features – Redundant – Fuse blown -
driving of a load display.
possible Replaceable fuse
for each group

A5E00105505-03 3-7
Digital Modules
Table 3-5 Relay Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance
Module SM 322; DO 16 x SM 322; DO 8 x SM 322; DO 8 x SM 322; DO 8 x

Char- Rel. 120 VAC Rel. 230 VAC Rel. 230 VAC/ 5 A Rel. 230 VAC/ 5 A
(-1HH01-) (-1HF01-) (-5HF00-) (-1HF10-)
acter-
istics
Number of outputs 16 outputs, isolated in 8 outputs, isolated in 8 outputs, isolated in 8 outputs, isolated in
groups of 8 groups of 2 groups of 1 groups of 1
Rated load voltage 24 to 120 VDC, 24 to 120 VDC, 24 to 120 VDC, 24 to 120 VDC,
48 to 230 VAC 48 to 230 VAC 24 to 230 VAC 48 to 230 VAC
Suitable for... AC/DC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional horsepower motors and
indicator lights
Supports No No No No
clocked operation
Programmable No No Yes No
diagnostics
Diagnostic interrupt No No Yes No
Substitute value output No No Yes No

3-8 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Table 3-6 Digital Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance
Module SM 323; SM 323; SM 327;

DI 16/DO 16x24 VDC/ DI 8/DO 8x DI 8/DX 8x
Char- 0.5 A 24 VDC/0.5 A DC 24 V/0.5 A,
acter- parameterizable
istics (-1BL00-) (-1BH01-) (-1BH00-)
Number of inputs 16 inputs, isolated in 8 inputs, isolated in 8 digital inputs and 8

groups of 16 groups of 8 individually
parameterizable inputs
Number of outputs 16 outputs, isolated in 8 outputs, isolated in or outputs, isolated in
groups of 8 groups of 8 groups of 16
Rated input voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC
Output current 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A
Rated load voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC
Inputs suitable for... Switches and two, three and four-wire proximity switches (BEROs).
Outputs suitable for... Solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights
Supports No No No
clocked operation
Programmable No No No
diagnostics
Diagnostic interrupt No No No
Hardware interrupt upon No No No
edge change
Settable input delay No No No
Substitute value output No No No

A5E00105505-03 3-9
Digital Modules
3.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the

Digital Module
Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other
to commission digital modules successfully.
The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either
earlier or later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install other
modules or install, commission etc. other modules in between times.
Sequence of steps
Table 3-7 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module
Step Procedure Refer To...

1. Select the module Section 3.1 and specific module section from
Section 3.5
2. Install the module in the “Mounting” section in the Installation Manual for
SIMATIC S7 network the programmable logic controller being used:
• S7-300 Programmable Controllers, Hardware
and Installation or S7-400, M7-400
Programmable Controllers, Hardware and
Installation
or
• ET 200M Distributed I/O Device
3. Assign parameters to module Section 3.3
4. Commission configuration “Commissioning” section in the Installation
Manual for the programmable controller being
used:
Installation
or
5. If commissioning was not Section 3.4
successful, diagnose
configuration

3-10 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
3.3 Digital Module Parameter Assignment
Introduction
Digital modules can have different characteristics. You can set the characteristics
of dome modules by means of parameter assignment.
The information contained in this section refers only to the programmable digital
modules:
• Digital input module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V with process and diagnosis
alarm, synchronous; (6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0)
• Digital input module SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A with diagnostic interrupt
(6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0)
• Digital output module SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC /2A ISOL
(6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0)
• Relay output module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC /5A
(6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0)
• Digital Input/Output Module SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A
(6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0)
Tools for parameter assignment

You assign parameters to digital modules in STEP 7. You must perform parameter
assignment in STOP mode of the CPU.
When you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the
programming device to the CPU. On a transition from STOP ³ to RUN mode, the
CPU then transfers the parameters to the individual digital modules.
Static and dynamic parameters

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters.
Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU, as described above.
You can also change the dynamic parameters in the running user program in an S7
logic control using SFC. Note, however, that after a change from RUN ³ STOP,
STOP ³ RUN of the CPU, the parameters set in STEP 7 apply again. You will find
a description of the parameter assignment of modules in the user program in
Appendix A.
Parameter Settable with CPU Operating State

Static PG (STEP 7 HW CONFIG) STOP
Dynamic PG (STEP 7 HW CONFIG) STOP
SFC 55 in the user program RUN

A5E00105505-03 3-11
Digital Modules
Parameters of the digital modules

The settable parameters are listed in the special section on the module.
3.4 Diagnostics of the Digital Modules
Introduction
The information contained in this section refers only to the digital modules with
diagnostics capability. For the S7-300, these modules are as follows:
• Digital input module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V with hardware and diagnostic
interrupts, clocked; (6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0)
• Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC
(6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0)
• Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A with diagnostic interrupt
(6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0)
• Digital output module SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC /2A ISOL
(6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0)
• Relay output module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC /5A
(6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0)
Programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages

In diagnostics, we make a distinction between programmable and
non-programmable diagnostic messages.
You obtain programmable diagnostic messages only if you have enabled
diagnostics by parameter assignment. You perform parameter assignment in the
“Diagnostics” parameter field in STEP 7.
Non-programmable diagnostic messages are always made available by the digital
module irrespective of diagnostics being enabled.
Actions following diagnostic message in STEP 7

Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions:
• The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnosis of the digital module and
forwarded to the CPU.
• The SF LED on the digital module lights.
• If you have programmed “Enable Diagnostic Interrupt” in STEP 7, a diagnostic
interrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called.

3-12 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Reading out diagnostic messages

You can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of SFCs in the user
program (refer to the Appendix “Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules”).
You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7, in the module diagnosis (refer to
online Help for STEP 7).
Diagnostic message by means of SF LED

The digital modules with diagnostics capability indicate errors for you by means of
their SF LED (group error LED). The SF LED lights as soon as a diagnostic
message is triggered by the digital module. It goes out when all errors have been
rectified.
The group fault (SF) LED also lights up in case of external errors (short circuit of
sensor supply), independent of the operating status of the CPU (if power is on).
Diagnostic messages interrupt processing by the digital modules

You will find the diagnostic messages with their possible causes and remedial
action, together with a description of possible interrupts in the specific section on
the module.

(6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0)
Order number: “Standard module”

6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0
Order number: SIPLUS S7-300 Module

6AG1321-1BL00-2AA0
Characteristics
The digital input module SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC has the following salient
features:
• 32 inputs, isolated in groups of 16
• 24 VDC rated input voltage
• Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches).

A5E00105505-03 3-13
Digital Modules
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC
Backplane bus
interface
24V 24V
Channel
number
Status display – green
Figure 3-1 Module View and Block Diagram of the Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC
Terminal assignment of the SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC

The following figure shows the assignment of the channels to the addresses.
Input byte x Input byte (x+2)
Input byte (x+1) Input byte (x+3)
Figure 3-2 Terminal assignment of the SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC

3-14 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC
Dimensions and Weight Insulation tested with 500 VDC

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 120 Current consumption
(in millimeters) • From the backplane bus max. 15 mA
Weight Approx. 260 g Power dissipation of the module typ. 6.5 W
Data for Specific Module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Supports clocked No Status display Green LED per channel
operation
Interrupts None
Number of inputs 32
Diagnostic functions None
Length of cable
• Unshielded max. 600 m Data for Selecting a Sensor
• Shielded max. 1000 m Input voltage
Voltages, Currents, Potentials • Rated value 24 VDC

• For signal “1” 13 to 30 V
Number of inputs that can be
triggered simultaneously • For signal “0” –30 to + 5 V
• Horizontal configuration Input current

Up to 40 C 32 • At signal “1” typ. 7 mA
Up to 60 C 16 Input delay
• Vertical configuration • At “0” to “1” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
Up to 40 C 32 • At “1” to “0” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
Isolation Input characteristic curve According to
• Between channels and IEC 61131, type 1
backplane bus Yes
Connection of Two-Wire Possible
• Between the channels Yes BEROs max. 1.5 mA
In groups of 16
• Permitted bias current
Permitted potential difference
• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
circuits

A5E00105505-03 3-15
Digital Modules
3.6 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC;

(6ES7321-1EL00-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7321-1EL00-0AA0
Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 32 x 20 VAC features the following characteristics:
• 120 VAC rated input voltage
• Suitable for switches and two / three-wire AC proximity switches
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC
1L 3L
1N 3N
backplane
bus
IM 4L
2L
2N 4N
Channel
number
Status display - green
Figure 3-3 ModuleView and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x 20 VAC

3-16 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC
Dimensions and Weight Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Status display Green LED per channel
(in millimeters)
Interrupts None
Data for Specific Module
Data for Selecting a Sensor
Supports clocked No
Input voltage
operation
• Rated value 120 VAC
Number of inputs 32
• For ‘‘1’’ signal 74 to 132 V
Length of cable
• For ‘‘0’’ signal 0 to 20 V
• Unshielded max. 600 m
47 to 63 Hz
• Frequency range
• Shielded max. 1000 m
Input current
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
• At ‘‘1’’ signal typ. 21 mA
triggered simultaneously Input delay
• Horizontal configuration • From ‘‘0’’ to ‘‘1’’ max. 15 ms
Up to 40 C 32
• From ‘‘1’’ to ‘‘0’’ max. 25 ms
Input characteristic curve According to

Up to 60 C 24
IEC 61131, type 2
• Vertical configuration Connection of Two-Wire Possible
Up to 40 C 32 BEROs max. 4 A
Isolation • Permitted bias current
• Between channels and Yes
backplane bus
• Between the channels Yes
In groups of 8
• Between Minternal and 120 VAC
the inputs
• Between the inputs of 250 VAC
the different groups
Insulation tested with 2500 VDC
Current consumption
• From the backplane bus max. 16 mA
Power dissipation of the module typ. 4 W

A5E00105505-03 3-17
Digital Modules

(6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0)

6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0
Order number: SIPLUS S7-300 module

6AG1321-1BH02-2AA0
Characteristics
The digital input module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC has the following salient
features:
Backplane bus
interface
M
24 V
Channel number
Figure 3-4 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24VDC

3-18 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting a Sensor
Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Input voltage

(in millimeters) • Rated value 24 VDC
Weight Approx. 200 g • For signal “1” 13 to 30 V
Data for Specific Module • For signal “0” –30 to + 5 V
Supports clocked No Input current

operation • At signal “1” typ. 7 mA
Number of inputs 16 Input delay
Length of cable • At “0” to “1” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
• Unshielded max. 600 m • At “1” to “0” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
• Shielded max. 1000 m Input characteristic curve According to
IEC 61131, type 1
BEROs max. 1.5 mA
triggered simultaneously
• Horizontal configuration
Up to 60 C 16
• Vertical configuration
Up to 40 C 16
Isolation
backplane bus

circuits
Current consumption
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.5 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None

A5E00105505-03 3-19
Digital Modules

DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed; (6ES7321-1BH10-0AA0)
Order number:
6ES7321-1BH10-0AA0
Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed has the following salient features:
• Supports clocked operation
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321;

DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed
Backplane bus
interface
M
24 V
Channel number
Figure 3-5 Module view and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24VDC High Speed

3-20 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed

Supports clocked Yes Input current

Length of cable • At “0” to “1” 25 to 75 s
• Unshielded max. 600 m • At “1” to “0” 25 to 75 s
Voltages, Currents, Potentials IEC 61131, type 1
Number of inputs that can be Connection of Two-Wire Possible

triggered simultaneously BEROs max. 1.5 mA
• Horizontal configuration • Permitted bias current
Up to 60 C 16
Up to 40 C 16
Isolation
backplane bus

circuits
Current consumption

Interrupts None

A5E00105505-03 3-21
Digital Modules
3.9 Digital input module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V;

with Hardware and Diagnostic Interrupts, clocked;
(6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0)

6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0
Order number: SIPLUS S7-300 module

6AG1321-7BH01-2AB0
Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; with hardware and diagnostic interrupts features the
following characteristics:
• Input characteristic curve according to IEC 61131, Type 2
• 2 short-circuit-proof sensor supplies for 8 channels each
• External redundant power supply possible to supply sensors
• “Sensor supply (Vs)” status display
• Group error display
• Supports the “parameter changing during the RUN” function
• Programmable diagnostics
• Programmable diagnostic interrupt
• Programmable hardware interrupt
• Programmable input delays

3-22 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
SF L+
L+
Broken–wire
detection
Vs Vs
L+
Vs
Vs
Broken–wire
detection
Backplane bus M M
interface
24 V
Channel number
Fault indicator – red
Encoder supplies Vs – green
Figure 3-6 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

A5E00105505-03 3-23
Digital Modules
Terminal assignment for redundant supply of encoders

The figure below shows how encoder can additionally be supplied by means of Vs
with a redundant voltage source – for example, via another module).
L+ 1 L+
Short-circuit-
proof driver Vs
2 L+
Digital input M
module ±
to the sensors
Figure 3-7 Terminal assignment for redundant supply of encoders of SM 321;

DI 16 x VDC 24
Terminal assignment for resistive circuit of the encoder

In order to detect a broken wire, it is necessary to wire the encoder contact with a
resistor.
L +/ Vs E x.x
15 k ... 18 k
Figure 3-8 Terminal assignment for resistive circuit of the encoder of the SM 321;
DI 16 x 24 VDC

3-24 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Dimensions and Weight Interrupts

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 • Hardware interrupt Parameters can be
(in millimeters) • Diagnostic interrupt assigned
Parameters can be
Weight Approx. 200 g assigned
Data for Specific Module Diagnostic functions Parameters can be
Supports clocked Yes assigned
operation • Group error display Red LED (SF)
Parameter changing during the Yes • Diagnostics information Possible
RUN is possible read-out
• Behavior of the non para- gives the last valid Monitoring of
meterized inputs output value before the
parameterization • Wire-break yes, at I < 1 mA
Number of inputs 16 Sensor Power Supply Outputs
Length of cable Number of outputs 2

• Unshielded max. 600 m Output voltage
• Shielded max. 1000 m • With load min. L+ (–2.5 V)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Output current
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC • Rated value 120 mA
electronics and encoder L+ • Permitted range 0 to 150 mA
• Reverse polarity protection Yes Additional (redundant) supply Permitted
Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously Short-circuit protection Yes, electronic
• Horizontal configuration Data for Selecting a Sensor

Up to 60 C 16 Input voltage
• Vertical configuration • Rated value 24 VDC
Up to 40 C 16 • For signal “1” 13 to 30 V
Isolation
• For signal “0” *30 to + 5 V
• Between channels and Yes Input current

backplane bus • At signal “1” typ. 7 mA
Permitted potential difference Input characteristic curve According to
• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC IEC 61131, type 2
circuits Connection of Two-Wire Possible
Insulation tested with 500 VDC BEROs max. 2 mA
Current consumption
Resistive circuit of the sensor 10 to 18 kOhm
• From the backplane bus max. 130 mA for detecting broken wires
• From load voltage L + max. 90 mA Time/Frequency
(without sensor supply VS)
Internal processing time for
Power dissipation of the module typ. 4 W status processing (in non
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics synchronous operation)
Status display
• Release of process and max. 40 s
diagnosis alarm
• Inputs Green LED per channel
Input delay
• Sensor power supplies (Vs) Green LED per output
• Parameters can be Yes
assigned typ. 0.1/0.5/3/15/20 ms
• Rated value

A5E00105505-03 3-25
Digital Modules
3.9.1 Synchronicity
Characteristics
Reproducible (i.e. same length) reaction times are achieved for the SIMATIC with
an equidistant DP bus cycle and synchronization of the following free running
single cycles:
• Free running of the user program. The length of the cycle time can vary due to
acyclic program branches.
• Free running, variable DP cycle at the PROFIBUS subnetwork
• Free running cycle at the DP slave back plane bus.
• Free running cycle during signal processing and conversion in the electronic
modules of the DP slave.
In the case of equidistance the DP cycle runs in phase and with the same length.
The procedure levels of a CPU (OB 61 to OB 64) and the synchronous peripheral
are synchronized in this cycle. The E/A data are therefore transferred at defined
and consistent time intervals (clock synchronicity).
Requirements
• The DP-Master and DP-Slave must support the synchronicity. They require
STEP 7 from Version 5.2.
Module filtering mode Synchronicity

In synchronous operation, the following conditions apply:
Filter and processing time TWE between reading the current value 255 to 345 s
and loading it into the transfer buffer
(the specified value for TWE applies, independent of the activation of
the hardware interrupt or diagnosis)
including an input delay time of 100 s
TDPmin 2.5 ms
Diagnostic interrupt max. 4 x TDP
Note
In “synchronous” mode the input delay of the inputs is always set to 100 s
independent of the input delay parameterized in STEP 7
Further information
Further information on clock synchronicity is given in the Online help of STEP 7, in
the manual Local peripheral system ET 200Mand in the manual
Clock synchronicity.

3-26 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
3.9.2 Assigning Parameters to SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24
Parameter assignment
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
digital modules in the reference manual, section 3.3.
Parameters of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default
settings for the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC in the table below.
The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in
STEP 7.
Table 3-8 Parameters of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24
Parameter Value Range Default Parameter Scope

Settings Type
Enable
• Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Dynamic Module
• Hardware interrupt Yes/no No
Input delay/voltage type 0.1 ms (DC) (DC) Static Module
0.5 ms (DC)
3 ms (DC)
15 ms (DC)
20 ms (DC/AC)
Diagnostics
• Sensor supply missing Yes/no No Static Channel
• Wire-break Yes/no No group
Trigger for hardware interrupt

• Rising edge Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
• Falling edge Yes/no No group
Assignment of the encoder supplies to channel groups

The two encoder supplies of the module are used to supply two channel groups:
inputs 0 to 7 and inputs 8 to 15. In these two channel groups, you parameterize the
diagnostics for the encoder supply, too.
Assigning interrupt parameters to channel groups

The table below shows the channels that can be combined to form a channel
group if you would like to parameterize interrupt processing.
You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the user program
with an SFC.

A5E00105505-03 3-27
Digital Modules
Table 3-9 Assigning Interrupt Parameters to the Inputs of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24
Parameter... Can Be Set in Following Channel Group

Channel Groups Number
0 and 1 0
2 and 3 1
4 and 5 2
Hardware interrupt
6 and 7 3
(for falling, rising or both types of pulse
8 and 9 4
edges)
10 and 11 5
12 and 13 6
14 and 15 7
Diagnostic interrupt 0 to 7
-
for missing sensor supply 8 to 15
Diagnostic interrupt 0 and 1 0
for wire–break 2 and 3 1
:
Tolerances of the programmable input delays
Table 3-10 Tolerances of the Input Delays of SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24

Programmed Input delay Tolerance
0.1 ms 60 to 140 s
0.5 ms 400 to 900 ms
3 ms (preset) 2,6 to 3,3 ms
15 ms 12 to 15 ms
20 ms 17 to 23 ms

3-28 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
3.9.3 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC
Effect of operating and mode supply voltage on the input values

The input values of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 DC depend on the operating mode of
the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.
Table 3-11 Dependencies of Input Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU and Supply
Voltage L+ of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24
CPU Operating State Power Supply L+ Input Value of Digital

to Digital Module Module
POWER ON RUN L+ exists Process value
L+ missing 0 signal
STOP L+ exists Process value
L+ missing 0 signal
POWER OFF – L+ exists –
L+ missing –
Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC

The table below presents an overview of the diagnostic messages for the SM 321;
DI 16 x 24 VDC.
Table 3-12 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24
Diagnostics Message LED Scope of the Diagno- Parameters

stics can be
assigned
Sensor supply missing SF Channel group
Wire-break SF Channel group Yes
Module not parameterized. SF Channel group

External auxiliary supply missing SF Module
Internal auxiliary power missing SF Module
Fuse blown SF Module
Incorrect parameter on module SF Module
No
Watchdog timeout SF Module
EPROM error SF Module
RAM error SF Module
Hardware interrupt lost SF Module

A5E00105505-03 3-29
Digital Modules
Note
A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic
messages is that you have assigned parameters to the digital module accordingly
in STEP 7.
Behavior upon failure of the supply voltage

A failure of the supply voltage of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 DC is always indicated by
the SF LED on the module. Furthermore, this information is made available on the
module.
The input value is initially held for 20 to 40 ms before the 0 signal is transferred to
the CPU. Supply voltage dips < 20 ms do not modify the process value (refer to
Table 3-11).
Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment (see
Section 3.9.4).
Failure of the supply voltage with redundant encoder incoming supply
Note
If an external redundant source is applied simultaneously to the sensor supply
(Vs), a failure in the internal sensor supply causes a failure of the internal and/or
external sensor supply and/or a blown fuse to be indicated instead of a regular
sensor supply failure.
Short-circuit of sensor supply Vs

Irrespective of the parameter assignment, the corresponding Vs LED goes out if a
short-circuit of the encoder supply Vs occurs.

3-30 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Causes of error and remedial measures
Table 3-13 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V, Causes of Error and

Remedial Action
Diagnostics Possible Error Cause Remedy

Message
Lack of encoder Overload of sensor supply Eliminate overload
supply
Short circuit of sensor supply to M Eliminate short circuit
External auxiliary Power supply L+ to module missing Feed supply L+
voltage missing
Internal auxiliary Power supply L+ to module missing Feed supply L+
voltage missing
Fuse in module defective Replace module
Fuse blown Fuse in module defective Replace module
Wrong parameters in One parameter or the combination of Reassign module parameter
module parameters is not plausible
Watchdog tripped Temporary high electromagnetic Eliminate interference
interference
Module defective Replace module
EPROM error Temporary high electromagnetic Eliminate interference and switch on/off
interference power supply of CPU
RAM error Temporary high electromagnetic Eliminate interference and switch on/off
interference power supply of CPU
Hardware interrupt lost The module cannot send an interrupt, Change interrupt processing in CPU
since the previous interrupt was not and reconfigure module parameters, if
acknowledged; configuration error required
possible The error continues until the module is
configured with new parameters
Module not Fault during startup Reassign module parameters
parameterized

A5E00105505-03 3-31
Digital Modules
3.9.4 Interrupts of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC
Introduction
This section describes the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC with regard to its interrupt
behavior. The following interrupts exist:
• Diagnostic interrupt
• Hardware interrupt
The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7,
where they are described in greater detail.
Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not preset – in other words, they are inhibited without
appropriate parameter assignment. Assign parameters to the Interrupt Enable in
STEP 7 (refer to Section 3.9.2).
Diagnostic interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial
occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after
troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt.
The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the
diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82).
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more
detailed diagnostic information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When
OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.
Hardware interrupt
The SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC can trigger a hardware interrupt for every channel
group with a rising or falling edge, or both, of a signal status change.
Perform parameter assignment one channel group at a time. It can be modified at
any time (in RUN mode using the user program).
Pending hardware interrupts trigger hardware interrupt processing in the CPU
(OB 40). The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program or of the priority
classes with low priority.
You can set in the user program of the hardware interrupt OB (OB 40) how the
programmable logic controller has to react to an edge change. When the hardware
interrupt OB is exited, the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the module.
The module can buffer one interrupt per channel. If no higher priority run-time
levels are waiting to be processed, the buffered interrupts (of all modules) are
serviced one after the other by the CPU according to the order in which they
occurred.

3-32 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Hardware interrupt lost

In an interrupt has been buffered for a channel and another interrupt occurs on that
channel before it has been processed by the CPU, a diagnostic interrupt “hardware
interrupt lost” is triggered.
More interrupts on this channel are not acquired until processing of the interrupt
buffered on this channel has been executed.
Interrupt-triggering channels
The channel triggered by the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information
of the OB 40 in the OB40_POINT_ADDR variable. Figure 3-9 shows the
assignment of the bits to the local data double word 8.
Byte Variable Data type Description

6/7 OB40_MDL_ADDR WORD B#16#0 Address of the interrupt
triggering module
From OB40_POINT_ADDR DWORD See Display of the interrupt
8 Figure 3-9 triggering inputs
LB 8 LB 9 LB 10 LB 11
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 1 0 Bit no.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LD 8
reserved
Edge change: Channel 8

Edge change channel 10

Edge change channel 2
Figure 3-9 Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Has Triggered the Hardware Interrupt at the Limit
Value

A5E00105505-03 3-33
Digital Modules
3.10 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V; Source

Input; (6ES7321-1BH50-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7321-1BH50-0AA0
Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC (source input) has the following salient features:
• 16 inputs, source input, isolated in groups of 16
L+
Backplane bus
interface
Channel number
Figure 3-10 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC
(Source Input)

3-34 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Input voltage (reference potential is L+)
(in millimeters)
Weight Approx. 200 g • For signal “1” –13 V to –30 V
Data for Specific Module • For signal “0” +30 V to –5 V
• Unshielded max. 600 m • At “1” to “0” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
• Shielded max. 1000 m Input characteristic curve According to IEC 61131,
Voltages, Currents, Potentials type 1
Number of inputs that can be Connection of Two-Wire Possible

triggered simultaneously BEROs max. 1.5 mA
Up to 60 C 16
Up to 40 C 16
Isolation
backplane bus
circuits
Current consumption
Power dissipation of the typ. 3.5 W
module
Interrupts None

A5E00105505-03 3-35
Digital Modules
3.11 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x UC 24/48 V

(6ES7321-1CH00-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7321-1CH00-0AA0
Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16 x UC24/48 V features the following characteristics:
• 16 inputs, isolated electrically
• Electrical isolation between channels of 120 V
• Rated input voltage from 24 to 48 DC)
• Inputs are fully independent and can be connected in any required configuration
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24/48 VUC
1 21
2 22
0 0
3 23
4 24
1 1
5 25
6 26
2 2
Backplane bus interface
7 27
8 28
3 3
9 29
10 30
11 31
4 4 12 32
13 33
5 5 14 34
15 35
6 6 16 36
17 37
7 7 18 38
19 39
20 40
Channel number
Figure 3-11 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24/48VUC

3-36 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24/48 VUC
Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Status display Green LEDs per

Interrupts channel
Data for Specific Module None
Supports clocked No Data for Selecting a Sensor
operation
Input voltage
Number of inputs 16
• Rated value 24 or 48 VDC/ 24 or
Length of cable 48 VAC
• Unshielded max. 600 m • At signal “1” 14 V to 60 V
• Shielded max. 1000 m • At signal “0” –5 V to 5 V
Voltages, Currents, Potentials • Frequency range 0 to 63 Hz
Number of inputs that can be Input current

• At signal “1” typ. 2.7 mA
• Horizontal configuration 16
Up to 60°C • At signal “0” –1 to +1 mA
• All other configuration types 16 Input delay

Up to 40° C • From “ 0” to “1” max. 16 ms
Isolation • At “1” to “0” max. 16 ms
• Between channels and Yes Input characteristic curve According to

backplane bus IEC 61131, type 1
• Between channels Yes Connection of Two-Wire Possible

In groups of 1 BEROs
Permitted potential difference • Permitted bias current max. 1 mA
• Between the channels and 170 VDC, 120 VAC

the backplane bus
• Between the inputs of the 170 VDC, 120 VAC

different groups
Insulation tested with
• Between the channels and 1500 VAC

the backplane bus
• Between the inputs of the 1500 VAC

different groups
Current consumption
Power dissipation of the module
• Operation with 24 V typ. 1.5 W

• Operation with 48 V typ. 2.8 W

A5E00105505-03 3-37
Digital Modules
3.12 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 48-125;

(6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0)

6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0
Order number: “SIPLUS S7-300-Module”

6AG1321-1CH20-2AA0
Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16 x 48-125 VDC features the following characteristics:
• Rated input voltage 48 to 125 VDC
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 48-125 VDC
2
3
4
M
5
6
7
8
9
10 1M
48 to 125 V
12
13
14
M
15
Backplane bus 16
interface 17
18
19
20 2M
48 to 125 V
Channel number
Figure 3-12 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 321; DI 16 x 48-125 VDC

3-38 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 x 48-125 VDC

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x125 x120 Status display Green LED per channel
(in millimeters)
Interrupts None
Sensor Selection Data
Supports clocked No
operation Input voltage
Number of inputs 16 • Rated value 48 VDC to

125 VDC
Length of cable
• Unshielded max. 600 m • For signal “1” 30 V to 146 V
• Shielded max. 1000 m • For signal “0” –146 V to 15 V
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Input current
Number of inputs that can be • At signal “1” typ. 3.5 mA

triggered simultaneously at UE Up to 60 V Input delay
Up to 146 V
• From “ 0” to “1” 0.1 ms to 3.5 ms
• Horizontal installation • At “1” to “0” 0.7 ms to 3.0 ms
Up to 50 C 8 8
Up to 60 C 8 6 IEC 61131, type 1
• Vertical configuration Connection of Two-Wire Possible
Up to 40 C 8 8 BEROs max. 1 mA
Isolation • Permitted bias current

backplane bus
In groups of 8
Permiss. potential differences
circuits
Current consumption

A5E00105505-03 3-39
Digital Modules
3.13 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x AC 120/230 V

(6ES7321-1FH00-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7321-1FH00-0AA0
Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230 VAC features the following characteristics:
• 16 inputs, electrically isolated in groups of 4
• 120/230 VAC rated input voltage
• Suitable for switches and two / three-wire proximity switches (alternating
voltage)
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230 VAC
N
M
Backplane bus N
interface
N
M
Channel number
Figure 3-13 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230VAC

3-40 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230 VAC

(in millimeters)
Interrupts None
Weight Approx. 240 g Diagnostic functions None
Data for Specific Module SensorSelection Data
Supports clocked No Input voltage
operation
• Rated value 120/230 VAC
Number of inputs 16 • For signal “1” 79 to 264 V
Length of cable • For signal “0” 0 to 40 V
• Unshielded max. 600 m • Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
• Shielded max. 1000 m Input current
Voltages, Currents, Potentials • At signal “1”
120 V, 60 Hz typ. 8.0 mA
Rated load voltage L1 120/230 V
230 V, 50 Hz typ. 16.0 mA
All load voltages must be of the
same phase Input delay

• “0” to “1” max. 25 ms
triggered simultaneously • “0” to “1” max. 25 ms
• Horizontal configuration 16 Input characteristic curve According to IEC 61131,

Up to 60 °C type 1
• Vertical configuration 16
BEROs
Up to 40 °C max. 2 mA
Isolation

backplane bus
• Between channels Yes

In groups of 4
• Between Minternal and the 500 VAC

inputs

different groups
Current consumption

A5E00105505-03 3-41
Digital Modules
3.14 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 8 x VAC 120/230;

(6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0)

6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0

6AG1321-1FF01-2AA0
Characteristics
The SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC features the following characteristics:
• Suitable for switches and two / three-wire AC proximity switches
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC
1N
2N
M
Backplane bus in-
terface 3N
4N
M
Channel number
Figure 3-14 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC

3-42 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC

(in millimeters)
Interrupts None
Supports clocked No
Input voltage
operation
• Rated value 120/230 VAC
Number of inputs 8
Length of cable
• Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
Input current
• At signal “1”
Number of inputs that can be 120 V, 60 Hz typ. 6.5 mA
230 V, 50 Hz typ. 11 mA
Input delay
Up to 60 C 8
• At “0” to “1” max. 25 ms
• At “1” to “0” max. 25 ms
Up to 40 C 8
Isolation IEC 61131, type 1
• Between channels and Yes Connection of Two-Wire Possible
backplane bus BEROs max. 2 mA
• Between the channels Yes • Permitted bias current
In groups of 2
inputs
different groups
Current consumption

A5E00105505-03 3-43
Digital Modules

DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL (6ES7321-1FF10-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7321-1FF10-0AA0
Characteristics
The digital input module SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL has the following
distinguishing characteristics:
• 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 1
• Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire AC proximity switches
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL
4
7
10
M
11
14
17
M 20
Backplane bus
interface 21
24
27
30
31
34
37
40
M
Channel
number
Figure 3-15 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL

3-44 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL
Weight Approx. 240 g Interrupts None
Data for Specific Module Diagnostic functions None
Supports clocked No Data for Selecting a Sensor

operation Input voltage
Number of inputs 8 • Rated value 120/230 VAC
Length of cable


• Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Input current

Rated load voltage L1 120/230 VAC
120 V, 60 Hz typ. 7.5 mA
All load voltages must be of the
230 V, 50 Hz typ. 17.3 W
same phase
Input delay
triggered simultaneously • ”0” to “1” max. 25 ms
• Horizontal configuration 8
• ”0” to “1” max. 25 ms
Up to 60 °C Input characteristic curve According to
IEC 61131, type 1
• Vertical configuration 8
Up to 40 °C Connection of Two-Wire Possible
BEROs
Isolation
• Permitted bias current max. 2 mA
backplane bus
In groups of 1

inputs

different groups

inputs

different groups
Current consumption

A5E00105505-03 3-45
Digital Modules

DO 32 x 24 VDC/ 0.5 A; (6ES7322-1BL00-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7322-1BL00-0AA0
Characteristics
The digital output module SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A has the following salient
features:
• 0.5 A output current
• 24 VDC rated load voltage
• Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights
Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in
connection with high-speed counters:
Note
When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of
the SM 322; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A carry a “1” signal for approximately 50 s for
reasons associated with the circuitry.

3-46 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/ 0.5 A
1 L+ 3 L+
24 V 24 V
M M
Backplane bus
interface
1M 3M
2L+ 4 L+
24 V 24 V
M M
2M 4M
Channel
number
Status display -green
Figure 3-16 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A
Terminal assignment
Output byte x Output byte (x + 2)
Output byte (x + 1) Output byte (x + 3)
Figure 3-17 Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC

A5E00105505-03 3-47
Digital Modules
Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/ 0.5 A
Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Output voltage
(in millimeters) • At signal “1” min. L + (–0.8 V)
Weight Approx. 260 g Output current
Data for Specific Module • At signal “1”
Supports clocked No Rated value 0.5 A
operation
Permitted range 5 mA to 0.6 A
Number of outputs 32 • At signal “0” max. 0.5 mA
Length of cable (leakage current)
• Unshielded max. 600 m Output delay (for resistive load)
• Shielded max. 1000 m • From “ 0” to “1” max. 100 s
Voltages, Currents, Potentials • At “1” to “0” max. 500 s
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC Load resistor range 48 to 4 k
Total current of the outputs Lamp load max. 5 W
(per group)
Parallel connection of 2
• Horizontal configuration outputs
Up to 40 C max. 4 A
• For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
Up to 60 C max. 3 A a load of the same group)
• Vertical configuration • To increase performance Not possible
Up to 40 C max. 2 A Triggering a digital input Possible
Isolation Switch rate
backplane bus • For resistive load max. 100 Hz
• Between the channels Yes • Inductive loads max. 0.5 Hz

according to IEC 947-5-1,
In groups of 8 DC 13
Permitted potential difference • For lamp load max. 10 Hz
Limit (internal) of the inductive L + (–53 V), typ.
circuits
circuit interruption voltage up
Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic
Current consumption output
• From the backplane bus max. 110 mA • Threshold on 1 A, typ.
• From load voltage L + max. 160 mA
(without load)
Interrupts None

3-48 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules

DO 32 x VAC 120/230/1 A; (6ES7322-1FL00-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7322-1FL00-0AA0
Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 32 x VAC 120/230/1 A has the following distinguishing
characteristics:
• 32 outputs, fused and isolated in groups of 8
• 120/230 VAC rated load voltage
• Blown fuse indicator for each group
• Suitable for AC solenoids, contactors, starters, fractional horsepower motors
and indicator lights

A5E00105505-03 3-49
Digital Modules
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 32 x VC 120/230/1 A
SF1 SF3
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
SF2 SF4
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
X 2
3 4
Channel numbers
Error display - red
SF
1 L1 2 L1
Back-
plane
bus
interface
SF 1N 2N
1 L1 2 L1
1N 2N
Figure 3-18 Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; D0 32 x VAC 120/230 /1 A

3-50 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Terminal assignment
Output byte x Output byte (x + 2)
Output byte (x + 1) Output byte (x + 3)
Figure 3-19 Terminal assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 x AC 120/230 V/1 A

A5E00105505-03 3-51
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 32 x 120 VAC/1.0 A

Dimensions 80 x 125 x 117 Output voltage
WxHxD • At signal “1” min. L1 (–0,8 V)
(in millimeters)
Output current
• At “1” signal
Rated value 1A
Supports clocked No
operation Permitted range 10 mA to 1 A
Number of outputs 32 Permitted current surge 10 A

(per group) (for 2 AC scan cycles)
Length of cable
• At “0” signal max. 2 mA
Leakage current
Output delay (for resistive load)
• At “0” to “1” 1 AC scan cycle
• At “1” to “0” 1 AC scan cycle
• Permitted frequency range 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Blocking voltage
Total current of the outputs Zero transition max. 60 V
(per group)
Size of the motor starter max. size 4 to NEMA
up to 60 C max. 3 A Lamp load max. 50 W
up to 40 C max. 4 A Parallel connection of
2 outputs
Up to 40C max. 4 A • For redundant Possible (only outputs
actuation of a load of the same group)
Isolation

• To increase Not possible
performance
backplane bus
Actuation of Possible
digital input
In groups of 8
Switch rate
Permitted potential difference • For resistive load max. 10 Hz
• Between Minternal and the 250 VAC • Inductive loads, max. 0.5 Hz
outputs according to
• Between the outputs of the 250 VAC IEC 947-5-1, AC 15 1 Hz
different groups • For lamp load
Insulation tested with DC 4000 V Short-circuit protection of the No
Current consumption output

• From load voltage L1 max. 10 mA
(without load)
Power dissipation of the module typ. max. 25 W
Interrupts No
Diagnostic functions Yes
• Group error display Red LED (SF)

3-52 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules

DO 16 x DC 24 V/ 0.5 A; (6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0)

6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0

6AG1322-1BH01-2AA0
Characteristics
The digital output module SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A has the following salient
features:

Note
the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A carry a “1” signal for approximately 50 s for

A5E00105505-03 3-53
Digital Modules
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A
1 L+
M 24 V
Backplane bus
interface
1M
2 L+
M 24 V
2M
Channel number
Figure 3-20 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

3-54 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

operation
Number of outputs 16
• At signal “0” max. 0.5 mA
• Unshielded max. 600 m Output delay
• Shielded max. 1000 m (for resistive load)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials • From “ 0” to “1” max. 100 s
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC • At “1” to “0” max. 500 s
Total current of the outputs Load resistor range 48 to 4 k
(per group)
Lamp load max. 5 W
• Horizontal configuration Parallel connection of
Up to 40 C max. 4 A 2 outputs
Up to 60 C max. 3 A • For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
• Vertical configuration a load of the same group)
Up to 40 C max. 2 A • To increase performance Not possible
Isolation Triggering a digital input Possible
• Between channels and Yes Switch rate

backplane bus • For resistive load max. 100 Hz
• Between the channels Yes • Inductive loads max. 0.5 Hz
In groups of 8 according to IEC 947-5-1,
DC 13
• For lamp load max. 10 Hz
circuits Limit (internal) of the inductive L + (–53 V), typ.
Current consumption
output
• Threshold on 1 A, typ.
(without load)
Interrupts None

A5E00105505-03 3-55
Digital Modules
3.19 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

High Speed;
(6ES7322-1BH10-0AA0)
Order number:
6ES7322-1BH10-0AA0
Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed has the following salient features:

Note
the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed carry a “1” signal for
approximately 50 s for reasons associated with the circuitry.

3-56 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO

16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed
1 L+
M 24 V
Backplane bus
interface 1M
2 L+
24 V
2M
Channel number
Figure 3-21 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed

A5E00105505-03 3-57
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed

Supports clocked Yes Rated value 0.5 A
operation
• Unshielded max. 600 m Output delay
• Shielded max. 1000 m (for resistive load)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials • From “ 0” to “1” max. 100 s
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC • At “1” to “0” max. 200 s
Total current of the outputs Internal module run time
(per group) between the backplane bus and
the output driver input
Up to 40 C max. 4 A • “0” to “1” 0.1 s to 20 s
Up to 60 C max. 3 A • At “1” to “0” 0.1 s to 20 s
• Vertical configuration Load resistor range 48 to 4 k
Up to 40 C max. 2 A Lamp load max. 5 W
Isolation Parallel connection of
• Between channels and Yes 2 outputs
backplane bus • For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
• Between the channels Yes a load of the same group)
In groups of 8 • To increase performance Not possible
Permitted potential difference Triggering a digital input Possible

• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC Switch rate
circuits • For resistive load max. 1000 Hz
Insulation tested with 500 VDC • Inductive loads max. 0.5 Hz
Current consumption according to IEC 947-5-1,
• From the backplane bus max. 70 mA DC 13
• From load voltage L + max. 110 mA • For lamp load max. 10 Hz

(without load) Limit (internal) of the inductive L + (–53 V), typ.
Power dissipation of the module typ. 5 W circuit interruption voltage up
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic

output
Interrupts None

3-58 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
3.20 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC;

(6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0
Characteristics
Digital output module SM 322; DO 16 x UC24/48 V has the following features:
• 16 individually isolated static relay outputs
• Electrical isolation between channels of 120 V
• Switch characteristics: RDS ON is typically 0.25 ohms and RDS OFF is typically
greater than 100 G-ohms
• Designed for load voltages up to 48 V AC or DC and there is no minimum load
voltage
• Designed for output loads up to 0.5 A and there is no minimum load current
• Outputs are fully independent and can be connected in any required
configuration
• Substitute values or “Hold last values” can be programmed for the outputs
• The module has diagnostics for parameterization errors and external loss of
voltage
• Suitable for AC solenoids, contact makers, motor starters, fractional
horsepower motors and indicator lights

A5E00105505-03 3-59
Digital Modules
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC
24V L+ 1 21
SF
0 2 22
0
3 23
1 4 24
1
5 25
2 6 26
2
7 27
3 3 8 28
Backplane bus
9 29
10 30
5V
+
11 31
4 4 12 32
13 33
5 5 14 34
15 35
6 6 16 36
17 37
7 7 18 38
19 39
M 20 40
Channel number
Status LEDs - green
Byte X Byte (X +1)
Figure 3-22 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC

3-60 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC
Dimensions and Weight Insulation tested with

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 • Between channels and 1500 VAC
(in millimeters) backplane bus
Weight Approx. 260 g • Between channels and 1500 VAC
Data for Specific Module power supply of the
Supports clocked No electronics
operation • Between the outputs of 1500 VAC
Number of outputs 16 the different groups
Length of cable Current consumption
• Unshielded max. 600 m • From the backplane bus max. 100 mA
• Shielded max. 1000 m • From supply max. 200 mA
Voltages, Currents, Potentials voltage L+
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC Power dissipation of the module typ. 2.8 W
electronics L+ Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
• Reverse polarity Yes Status display Green LEDs per
protection min. 5 ms channel
• Power failure Diagnostic functions
jumpering
Total current of the outputs
(per group) Interrupts
• Horizontal configuration max. 0.5 A • Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be

assigned
Up to 60° C • Diagnostics information
read-out Possible
• All other mounting max. 0.5 A
positions Data for Selecting an Actuator
Up to 40° C Output voltage
Total current of the outputs (per • At signal “1” min. L+ (–0.25 V)
module)
Output current
• Horizontal configuration max. 8 A
Up to 60° C 0.5 A
rated value
• All other mounting max. 8 A permissible surge max. 1.5 A
positions (max. 50 ms)
current (per group)
Up to 40° C max. 10 uA
• For “0” signal
Isolation (leakage current)
• Between channels and Yes Output delay (for resistive load)
backplane bus • From “ 0” to “1” max. 6 ms
• Between channels and Yes • At “1” to “0” max. 3 ms
power supply of the External fuse for relay outputs Fuse,
electronics I2 t: 1 A2 s,
• Between channels Yes quick-acting*
In groups of 1 Lamp load max. 2.5 W
Permitted potential difference Contact circuit (internal) parallel Varistor, 85 V
switching of 2 outputs
• Between channels and 170 VDC, 120 VAC
backplane bus • For redundant triggering Possible
of a load
• Between channels and 170 VDC, 120 VAC
• To increase Not possible
power supply of the
performance
electronics
• Between the outputs of 170 VDC, 120 VAC

A5E00105505-03 3-61
Digital Modules
Triggering a digital input Possible * Outputs must be protected by a 250 V quick-acting

fuse (recommended fuses: Wickman 194-1100 1.1
Switch rate
A and Littelfuse 0217-800 V 800 mA).
• For resistive load max. 10 Hz When mounted in a hazardous area in accordance
• Inductive loads max. 0.5 Hz with the National Electric Code (NEC), use only a
according to suitable tool to remove the fuse if the module is not
IEC 947-5-1; DC 12 located in a potentially explosive atmosphere.
AC/12
• For lamp load max. 0.5 Hz

3-62 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
3.20.1 Parameters of digital output module SM 322 DO 16 x UC24/48 V
Table 3-14 and Table 3-15 show the data record numbers for static and dynamic
parameters.
Table 3-14 Data record no. 0 (static parameters):
Parameters Comments
Enable diagnostics Enabling an interrupt when the module fails
because of an operation code error, a hardware
fault or a voltage error.
Table 3-15 Data record no. 1 (dynamic parameters):
Parameters Comments
Behavior on CPU STOP
Hold last value
Substitute value output
Substitute value
Substitute value Each bit corresponds to an output.
This module supports failure state/substitute value outputs when the CPU changes
from RUN to STOP.
Status display
Each output of this module has a green LED to indicate the status of the relay.
There is also a red LED (SF) that indicates the diagnostics status of the module.
Diagnostics, troubleshooting
Diagnostic data is assigned in accordance with the following technical
specifications.
In the additional interrupt information, the four system diagnostics data bytes can
be read as data record 0 or in the first 4 bytes of data record 1.
Structure of the data record

The structure of data record 1 is as specified in Table 3-16.

A5E00105505-03 3-63
Digital Modules
Table 3-16 Structure of the data record for SM 322 DO 16 x UC 24/48 V
Data record 1 Available information Contents

byte address
0..3 System-specific diagnostics data 4 Bytes
4 Channel type 72h
5 Diagnosis length per channel in bytes 0
6 Number of channels 16
7 Channel error vector 0 byte per
channel
8..15 Channel-specific diagnostic data 0 byte per
channel
Table 3-17 shows the system diagnostics for module SM 322;

DO 16 x UC24/48 V.
Table 3-17 System diagnostics for SM 322 DO 16 x UC 24/48 V
System diagnosis byte 1: Technical specification

D0: Module error Yes
D1: Internal malfunction Yes
D2: External malfunction Yes
D3: Channel error No
D4: External auxiliary supply missing Yes
D5: Front connector missing No
D6: Module not parameterized. Yes
D7: Wrong parameters Yes

3-64 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Table 3-17 System diagnostics for SM 322 DO 16 x UC 24/48 V
System diagnosis byte 2:

D0..D3 Module Type 1111
D4: Channel information available No
D5: User information available No
D6: Diagnostic alarm from substitute No
D7: Spare
D0: Memory module incorrect/missing No
D1: Communication error No
D2: RUN/STOP mode No
D3: Time monitoring triggered Yes
D4: Internal power failure No
D5: Battery 1 empty No
D6: Complete backup failure No
D7: Spare
D0: Rack failure No
D1: Processor failure Yes
D2: EPROM error Yes
D3: RAM error Yes
D4: DAC error No
D5: Blown fuse No
D6: Hardware interrupt lost No
D7: Spare
Channel-specific diagnosis byte
D0: Parameter setup error No
D1: Grounding error No
D2: Short-circuit to P No
D3: Short-circuit to M No
D4: Wire-break No
D5: Spare
D6: Auxiliary supply missing No
D7: Overtemperature No

A5E00105505-03 3-65
Digital Modules

DO 16 x VAC 120/230/1 A; (6ES7322-1FH00-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7322-1FH00-0AA0
Characteristics
Digital output module SM 322; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/1 A has the following
• 16 outputs, fused and electrically isolated in groups of 8
• 1 A output current
• Rated load voltage 120/230 VAC
• Suitable for AC solenoids, contact makers, motor starters, fractional
horsepower motors and indicator lights

3-66 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322 DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/1 A
SF 5V L1
SF
Backplane bus
interface
N
5V
L1
SF
Channel number
Status LEDs - green
Figure 3-23 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/1 A

A5E00105505-03 3-67
Digital Modules

Supports clocked No Rated value 1A
operation Permitted range for 0° C to 10 mA to 1 A
40° C
Permitted range for 0° C to 10 mA to 0.5 A
Length of cable 60° C
• Unshielded max. 600 m Permitted surge current max. 20 A
• Shielded max. 1000 m (per group) (with 2 half-waves)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials • At signal “0” max. 2 mA

(leakage current)
All load voltages must be of the Inhibit voltage max. 60 V
same phase Zero cross inhibit voltage
Total current of the outputs Size of the motor starter max. size 4 to NEMA
(per group)
Lamp load max. 50 W
Up to 40 C max. 4 A Connecting two outputs in
parallel
Up to 60 C max. 2 A
• For redundant triggering Possible (only outputs
of a load of the same group)
Up to 40 C max. 2 A
• To increase No
Isolation
performance
Triggering a digital input Possible
backplane bus
Switch rate
In groups of 8 • For resistive load max. 10 Hz
Permitted potential difference • Inductive loads, max. 0.5 Hz

according to
outputs
IEC 947-5-1, AC 15
• Between the outputs of the 230 VAC • For lamp load max. 1 Hz
different groups Short-circuit protection of output Fuse 8 A,
Insulation tested with 4000 VDC 250 V; per group
Current consumption • Min. current required for min. 40 A

• From the backplane bus max. 200 mA fuse to blow
• From load voltage L+ max. 2 mA • Max. response time max. 300 ms
(without load)
Replacement fuses 8 A fuse, quick-acting
• Wickman 19 194-8 A
• Schurter SP001.1014
Status display Green LED per channel • Littlefuse 217.008
Interrupts
Fuse carrier
• Diagnostic interrupt No
• Wickman 19 653
Diagnostic functions
(fuse or no L1/N)

3-68 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
3.22 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A;

(6ES7322-1BF01-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7322-1BF01-0AA0
Characteristics
The digital output module SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A has the following salient
features.

Note
the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A carry a “1” signal for approximately 50 s for

A5E00105505-03 3-69
Digital Modules
Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A
1 L+
M
24 V
Backplane bus
interface
1M
2 L+
M
24 V
2M
Channel number
Figure 3-24 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A

3-70 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A

(in millimeters) • At signal “1” min. L + –0.8 V
Supports clocked No Rated value 2A
operation Permitted range 5 mA to 2.4 A
Number of outputs 8 • At signal “0” max. 0.5 mA
• Unshielded max. 600 m Output delay (for resistive load)
• Shielded max. 1000 m • From “ 0” to “1” max. 100 s
Voltages, Currents, Potentials • At “1” to “0” max. 500 s
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC Load resistor range 12 to 4 k
Total current of the outputs Lamp load max. 10 W
(per group)
Parallel connection of
• Horizontal configuration 2 outputs
Up to 60 C max. 4 A • For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
• Vertical configuration a load of the same group)
Isolation Triggering a digital input Possible
• Between channels and Yes Switch rate
backplane bus
• For resistive load max. 100 Hz
• Inductive loads max. 0.5 Hz
In groups of 4 according to IEC 947-5-1,
Permitted potential difference DC 13
• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC • For lamp load max. 10 Hz

circuits
Limit (internal) of the inductive typ. L + (–48 V)
Insulation tested with 500 VDC circuit interruption voltage up
Current consumption Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic

• From the backplane bus max. 40 mA output
• From load voltage L+ max. 60 mA • Threshold on typ. 3 A

(without load)
Interrupts None

A5E00105505-03 3-71
Digital Modules
3.23 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/ 0.5 A;

with diagnostic interrupt; (6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0)

6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0

6AG1322-8BF00-2AB0
Characteristics
The digital output module SM 322; DO x 24 VDC/0.5 A has the following salient
features:
• 2 terminals per output
– Output without series diode
– Output with series diode (for redundant load control)
• Channel-specific status and error LEDs
• Programmable substitute value output

3-72 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A
SF
F0
0
F1
1
F2
2
F3
3
F4
4
F5
5
F6
6
F7
7
Connection Diagram
Channel number, channel fault (F)
Figure 3-25 Module view of the SM 322; DO 8 24 V DC/0.5 A

A5E00105505-03 3-73
Digital Modules
L+ Monitoring
L+
Fuse
Monitoring
Control
Output
Diagnostics
Output Output
Status (8x)
drivers
Backplane (8 x)
bus Logic M
Channel status LED (8x) ƪ0 to 7ƫ

green
Channel fault LED (8x) F ƪ0 to 7ƫ

red
Group error display (1x) SF

red
Figure 3-26 Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 DC 24 V/0.5 A
Redundant control of a load

The output with series diode can be used for redundant control of a load.
Redundant control is possible from two different signal modules without external
circuitry. Both modules must have the same reference potential, M.
Note
If the output with series diode is used, external short-circuits to L+ cannot be
detected.

3-74 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A
Dimensions and Weight Diagnostic functions Parameters can be

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 • Group error display assigned
(in millimeters) • Channel error display (F) Red LED (SF)
Weight Approx. 210 g • Diagnostics information Red LED (F) per

readable channel
Data for Specific Module Possible
Supports clocked No Data for Selecting an Actuator
operation
Output voltage
Number of outputs 8 • At signal “1”
Length of cable Without series diode min. L + (–0.8 V)
• Unshielded max. 600 m With series diode min. L + (–1.6 V)
Output current
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC Rated value 0.5 A
Total current of the outputs (per Permitted range 10 mA to 0.6 A1)
group) without series diode
• Horizontal configuration (leakage current)
Up to 40 C max. 4 A Output delay (for resistive load)
Up to 60 C max. 3 A • At “0” to “1”
• Vertical configuration • At “1” to “0” max. 180 s
Up to 40 C max. 4 A max. 245 s
Total current of the outputs (per Load resistor range 48 to 3 k

group) with series diode Lamp load max. 5 W
• Horizontal configuration Parallel connection of
Up to 40 C max. 3 A 2 outputs
Up to 60 C max. 2 A • For redundant Output with series
• Vertical configuration actuation of a load diode only, must have
the same reference
Up to 40 C max. 3 A
potential
Isolation
• To increase performance Not possible
backplane bus Triggering a digital input Possible
1 binary input
according to
• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC IEC 61131, Type 2;
circuits
Type 1 with disabled
Insulation tested with 500 VDC open-circuit monitoring
Current consumption Switch rate

• From the backplane bus max. 70 mA • For resistive load max. 100 Hz
• From load voltage L+ max. 90 mA • Inductive load according to max. 2 Hz
(without load) IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC
Power dissipation of the module typ. 5 W • For lamp load max. 10 Hz
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Limit (internal) of the inductive typ. L + (–45 V)

Interrupts output
• Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be • Threshold on typ. 0.75 A to 1.5 A
assigned
1) 5 mA to 0.6 A with disabled open-circuit
monitoring

A5E00105505-03 3-75
Digital Modules
3.23.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A
digital modules in Section 3.3.
Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

settings for the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A in the table below.
STEP 7.
Table 3-18 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Settings Type
Enable
Behavior on CPU STOP Apply substitute value (EWS) EWS
Hold last value (LWH)
Diagnostics
• Wire-break Yes/no No
• No load voltage L+ Yes/no No Static Channel
• Short-circuit to M
• Short-circuit to L+ Yes/no No
Yes/no No
Apply substitute value “1” Yes/no No Dynamic Channel

3-76 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
3.23.2 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A
Effect of operating and mode supply voltage on the output values

The output values of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A depend on the operating
mode of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.
Table 3-19 Dependence of the output values on the operating mode of the CPU and on the
supply voltage L+ of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A.
CPU Operating State Power Supply L+ to Digital Output Value of Digital

Module Module
POWER ON RUN L+ exists CPU value
L+ missing 0 signal
STOP L+ exists Substitute value/last value
(0 signal preset)
L+ missing 0 signal
POWER – L+ exists 0 signal
OFF
L+ missing 0 signal
Behavior upon failure of the supply voltage

Failure of the supply voltage of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A is always
indicated by the SF LED on the module. Furthermore, this information is made
available on the module (entry in diagnosis).
Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment
(see Section 3.23.3).

A5E00105505-03 3-77
Digital Modules
Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

The following table provides an overview of the diagnostic messages of the
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A.
Table 3-20 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A
Diagnostics Message LED Scope of the Parameters can

Diagnostics be assigned
Wire-break SF Channel Yes
Load voltage missing SF Channel Yes
Short-circuit to M SF Channel Yes
Short-circuit to L+ SF Channel Yes
External auxiliary supply missing SF Module No
Internal auxiliary power missing SF Module No
Fuse blown SF Module No
Watchdog timeout SF Module No
EPROM error SF Module No
RAM error SF Module No
* Open-circuit detection is performed at a current < 1 mA.
When suitably parameterized, a wire-break results only in the
SF LED and the corresponding channel error LED lighting up.
Note
messages is that you have assigned parameters to the digital module accordingly
in STEP 7.

3-78 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Causes of error and remedial action
Table 3-21 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, Causes of Error and Remedial
Action
Diagnostics Mes- Error Detec- Possible Error Cause Remedy

sage tion ...
Wire-break Only with Open circuit between module Close circuit
output to “1” and actuator
Channel not connected Disable the “Diagnose
(open) Wire-break” parameter for the
channel in STEP 7
No load voltage Only with Defective output Replace module
output to “1”
Short-circuit to M Only with Overload of output Eliminate overload
output to “1”
Short-circuit of output to M Eliminate short circuit
Short-circuit to L+ Always Short-circuit at output to L+ of Eliminate short circuit
module supply
No external auxiliary Always Power supply L+ to module Feed supply L+
voltage missing
No internal auxiliary Always Power supply L+ to module Feed supply L+
voltage missing
Fuse in module defective Replace module
Fuse blown Always Fuse in module defective Replace module
Watchdog tripped Always Temporary high Eliminate interference
electromagnetic interference
EPROM error Always Temporary high Eliminate interference and
electromagnetic interference switch on/off power supply of
CPU
RAM error Always Temporary high Eliminate interference and
electromagnetic interference switch on/off power supply of
CPU

A5E00105505-03 3-79
Digital Modules
3.23.3 Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A
Introduction
The SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A can trigger diagnostic interrupts.
Enabling interrupts

3-80 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
3.24 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 48-125/1,5 A;

(6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0)

6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0

6AG1322-1CF00-2AA0
Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A features the following characteristics:
• 8 outputs, reverse polarity protection and isolated in groups of 4
• Rated load voltage 48 to 125 VDC

Note
When connecting the power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of the
SM 322; DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A carry a “1” signal for approximately 50 s for

A5E00105505-03 3-81
Digital Modules
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A
+5V 1 1 L+
SF
SF
5
48 to
7
125 V
9
Backplane bus
interface 10 1M
+5V 11 2 L+
13
15
48 to
17 125 V
19
20 2M
Channel number
Figure 3-27 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A

3-82 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x125 x117 Output voltage
(in millimeters) • At “ 1” signal min. L + (–1.,2 V)
Data for Specific Module • At “ 1” signal
operation Permitted range 10 mA to 1.5 A
Number of outputs 8 • Permitted surge current max. 3 A for 10 ms
Length of cable • For ”0” signal max. 0.5 mA
• Unshielded max. 600 m (leakage current)
• Shielded max. 1000 m Output delay (for resistive load)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials • From “ 0” to “1” max. 2 ms
Rated load voltage L+ 48 VDC to 125 VDC • At “1” to “0” max. 15 ms
• Reverse polarity protection Yes, by means of Lamp load max. 15 W at 48 V

fuse1) max. 40 W at 125 V
Total current of the outputs Parallel connection of

(per group) 2 outputs
• Horizontal configuration • For redundant actuation of Possible (only outputs

a load of the same group)
Up to 40 C max. 6 A
Up to 60 C max. 3 A Triggering a digital input Possible
• Vertical configuration Switch rate

Up to 40 C max. 4 A • For resistive load max. 25 Hz
Isolation • For inductive load max. 0.5 Hz
• Between channels and Yes • For lamp load max. 10 Hz

backplane bus Limit (internal) of the in typ. M (–1V)
• Between the channels Yes ductive circuit interruption
voltage up
In groups of 4
Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic3)
Permitted potential difference output
• Between the different 146 VDC / 132 VAC • Threshold on typ. 4.4 A
circuits
Replacement fuses Fuse 6.,3 A/250 V,
Insulation tested with 1500 VAC quick blow, 5 x 20 mm
Current consumption • Schurter SP0001.1012
• From the backplane bus max. 100 mA • Wickman 194-1630-0
• From the load voltage L+ max. 2 mA
(no load) Fuse carrier
• Wickman 653 0000 040
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics 1) The fuses on this module are merely
Status display Green LED per channel supplementary fuses. External overcurrent
protection (suitable for branch circuits conforming
Interrupts None to the local regulations for electrical engineering)
Diagnostic functions is required in the supply cables of the load circuit.
2) Potential errors are:
• Group error display Red LED (SF)2) - No load voltage
- Fuse defective
- Output overloaded
3) If an overload condition is detected, the output is
inhibited for approximately 2.4 s.

A5E00105505-03 3-83
Digital Modules

DO 8 x VAC 120/230/2 A; (6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0)

6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0

6AG1322-1FF01-2AA0
Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A features the following characteristics:
• 8 outputs, fused and isolated in groups of 4
• Suitable for AC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p.
motors and indicator lights.

3-84 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A
5V
SF 1L
SF 1N
Backplane bus
interface
5V
2L
2N
M
*
M
Channel number
Fault indicator – red * Zero cross inhibit voltage triac
Figure 3-28 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A

A5E00105505-03 3-85
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A

(in millimeters) • At signal “1”
Weight Approx. 275 g – At maximum current min. L1 (–1.5 V)
Data for Specific Module – At minimum current min. L1 (–8.5 V)
Supports clocked No Output current
operation • At signal “1”
Number of outputs 8 Rated value AC 2 A1)
Length of cable Permitted range for 0 C to 10 mA to 2 A
• Unshielded max. 600 m 40 C
• Shielded max. 1000 m Permitted range for 40 C 10 mA to 1 A
Voltages, Currents, Potentials to 60 C
Rated load voltage L1 120/230 VAC Permitted current surge max. 20 A
• Permitted frequency range 47 Hz to 63 Hz (per group) (not more than 1 AC
scan cycle)
(per group) • At signal “0” max. 2 mA
(leakage current)
Output delay (for resistive load)
Up to 40 C max. 4 A
• From “0” to “1” Not more than 1 AC
Up to 60 C max. 2 A scan cycle
• Vertical configuration • From “1” to “0” Not more than 1 AC
Up to 40 C max. 2 A scan cycle
Isolation Minimum load current 10 mA
• Between channels and Yes Zero cross inhibit voltage max. 60 V
backplane bus
Lamp load max. 50 W
In groups of 4
Connecting two outputs in parallel
• Between Minternal and the 230 VAC a load of the same group)
outputs
• Between the outputs of the 500 VAC
different groups Triggering a digital input Possible
Insulation tested with 1500 VAC Switch rate

Current consumption
• Inductive loads, according max. 0.5 Hz
• From the backplane bus max. 100 mA to IEC 947-5-1, AC 15
• From load voltage L1 max. 2 mA • For lamp load 1 Hz
(without load)
Short-circuit protection Fuse, 8 A/250 V; per
Power dissipation of the module typ. 8.6 W of output group
• Min. current required for min. 40 A
Status display Green LED per channel fuse to blow
Interrupts None • Max. response time max. 300 ms
Diagnostic functions Yes Replacement fuses 8 A fuse/quick-acting
• Group error display Red LED (SF) 2) • Wickman 194-1800-0
• Schurter SP001.1013
• Littelfuse 217.008
Fuse carrier
• Wickman 653 07
1) The load current must not be half-wave

2) Potential errors are:
- No load voltage
- Fuse defective

3-86 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules

DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL (6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0
Characteristics
Digital output module SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL has the following
• 8 outputs, isolated in one group
• Channel-specific status LEDs

A5E00105505-03 3-87
Digital Modules
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL
SF
Group error display – red
1
1L
4
7 2L
10
11 3L
M
14
17 4L
Backplane bus 20
interface
21 L5
24
27 L6
30
31 7L
M 34
37 8L
40
Channel
number
Figure 3-29 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

3-88 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

Weight Approx. 275 g • At signal “1” min. L1 (–8.5 V)
Data for Specific Module Output current
Supports clocked No
operation • At signal “1”
Rated value 2A
Number of outputs 8
Permitted range for 0 °C to 10 mA to 2 A
Length of cable
40 °C
Permitted range for 10 mA to 1 A
• Shielded max. 1000 m 40 °C to 60 °C
Permitted surge current max. 20 A
Rated load voltage L1 120/230 VAC (per group) (with 2 half-waves)
(module)
• For “0” signal max. 2 mA
(leakage current)
Zero cross inhibit voltage max. 60 V
Up to 40 °C max. 8 A
Up to 60 °C max. 4 A Size of the motor starter max. size 5 to NEMA
• Vertical configuration max. 4 A Lamp load max. 50 W

Up to 40 °C Connecting two outputs in
Isolation parallel
• Between channels and Yes • For redundant triggering of Possible
backplane bus a load
• Between channels Yes • To increase performance Not possible
In groups of 1 Triggering a digital input Possible
Switch rate
outputs • For resistive load max. 10 Hz
• Between outputs 500 VAC • Inductive loads, according max. 0.5 Hz
Insulation tested with to IEC 947-5-1, AC 15
• Between Minternal and the 1500 VAC • For lamp load max. 1 Hz
outputs
Short-circuit protection of output Yes,
• Between the outputs of the 2000 VAC 3.15 A /
different groups 250 V fuse, fast-acting
Current consumption
• From load voltage L1 max. 2 mA
(without load)

Interrupts
• Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be
assigned
Diagnostic functions

A5E00105505-03 3-89
Digital Modules
Note
The outputs must be protected by a high-speed, fast-acting 3.15 A 250 VAC fuse.
When mounted in a hazardous area in accordance with the National Electric Code,
a tool must be used to remove the fuse and the area must be designated safe
before the fuse is removed/replaced.
Parameterization of the SM 322; DO x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

A description of the general procedure for parameterizing digital modules can be
found in section 3.3.
Detailed information on the digital output module parameters can be found in
Appendix A.3.
Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

Table 3-22 shows the settable parameters with the default settings for the SM 322;
DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL.
STEP 7.
Table 3-22 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

settings type
Enable
• Diagnostic interrupts Yes/no No Dynamic Module
Behavior on CPU STOP Switch substitute value EWS Dynamic Channel
(EWS)
Switch substitute value Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
“1”

3-90 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

Table 3-23 gives an overview of the diagnostic messages of the
SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL.
Table 3-23 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL
Diagnostics Message LED Scope of the diagnostics Parameters can be

assigned
Time-out SF Module No
Error causes and remedies

Table 3-24 shows the diagnostic messages and error causes as well as the
remedies of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL.
Table 3-24 Diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL,

error causes and remedies
Diagnostics Error detection Possible error cause Remedy

message
Time-out Always Transient high Remove interference and turn
electromagnetic the CPU power supply off and
interference on
EPROM error Always Transient high Remove interference and turn
interference on
RAM error Always Transient high Remove interference and turn
interference on

A5E00105505-03 3-91
Digital Modules
Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL

The SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL can trigger diagnostic interrupts.
The OBs and SFCs mentioned below are described in detail in the online Help for
STEP 7.
Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not available – in other words, they are withheld without
appropriate parameter assignment. Use STEP 7 to assign parameters for enabling
interrupts.
troubleshooting) are reported by means of interrupts.
The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the diagnostic
interrupt block (OB 82).
OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged at the module.
Load restrictions with a horizontal configuration

With a horizontal configuration, the module loads must be restricted so that two
adjacent inputs or outputs do not exceed the maximum rating for an input or an
output.
Load restrictions with a vertical configuration

With a vertical configuration, the module loads must be restricted so that four
adjacent inputs or outputs do not exceed the maximum rating for an input or an
output.

3-92 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules

DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC; (6ES7322-1HH01-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7322-1HH01-0AA0
Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC features the following characteristics:
• Rated load voltage 24 VDC to 120 VDC, 48 VAC to 230 VAC
• Suitable for AC/DC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p.
Behavior upon power down of the supply voltage
Note
When the power supply is switched off, the capacitor still stores energy for
about 200 ms. The relay can therefore still be driven briefly within this time by the
user program.

A5E00105505-03 3-93
Digital Modules

DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC
M
Backplane bus
interface N
L+
24 V
M
N
M
Channel number
Figure 3-30 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 322; DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC

3-94 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC
Dimensions and Weight Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 • For resistive load
(in millimeters)
Voltage Current No. of
Weight Approx. 250 g switching cyc.
(typ.)
24 VDC 2.0 A 0.1 million
Supports clocked No
1.0 A 0.2 million
operation
0.5 A 1.0 million
Number of outputs 16 60 VDC 0.5 A 0.2 million
Length of cable
24 VAC 1.5 A 1.5 million
• Unshielded max. 600 m 48 VAC 1.5 A 1.5 million
• Shielded max. 1000 m 60 VAC 1.5 A 1.5 million
1.0 A 1.5 million
Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC 0.5 A 2.0 million
relay L + 230 VAC 2.0 A 1.0 million
1.0 A 1.5 million
Total current of the outputs max. 8 A
0.5 A 2.0 million
(per group)
Isolation
• Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1 DC13/AC15
• Between channels and Yes switching cyc.
backplane bus (typ.)
• Between the channels Yes 24 VDC 2.0 A 0.05 million
In groups of 8 1.0 A 0.1 million
0.5 A 0.5 million
• Between Minternal and 75 VDC / 60 VAC 120 VDC 0.2 A 0.3 million
supply voltage of the 24 VAC 1.5 A 1 million
relays 48 VAC 1.5 A 1 million
60 VAC 1.5 A 1 million
supply voltage of the
1.0 A 1.0 million
relays and the outputs
0.5 A 1.5 million
• Between the outputs of 500 VAC 230 VAC 2.0 A 0.7 million
the different groups 1.0 A 1.0 million
0.5 A 1.5 million
An external protection circuit will enhance the service life
• Between Minternal and 500 VDC of the contacts.
supply voltage of the
relays Size of the motor starter max. size 5 to NEMA
supply voltage of the Lamp load 50 W / 230 VAC
relays and the outputs 5 W / 24 VDC
• Between the outputs of 2000 VAC Contact protection (internal) None
Current consumption 2 outputs
• For redundant triggering Possible (only outputs of
• From supply voltage L+ max. 250 mA of a load the same group)
Power dissipation of the typ. 4.5 W • To increase performance Not possible
module
Switch rate
• Mechanical max. 10 Hz
Interrupts None
• For resistive load 1 Hz
• Inductive loads according max. 0.5 Hz
Data for Selecting an Actuator to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13/AC
Continuous thermal current max. 2 A 15
Minimum load voltage / 10 V / 10 mA • For lamp load 1 Hz
current
Short-circuit proof to 200 A, with B10/B16
IEC 947-5-1 circuit breaker

A5E00105505-03 3-95
Digital Modules
3.28 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC;

(6ES7322-1HF01-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7322-1HF01-0AA0
Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 8 x REL. 230 VAC features the following characteristics:
Behavior upon power down of the supply voltage
Note
Applicable only for the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC with product status 1 is:
When the power supply is switched off, the capacitor still stores energy for about
200 ms. The relay can therefore still be driven briefly within this time by the user
program.

3-96 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC
M
Backplane bus 24 V
interface
Channel number
Figure 3-31 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x REL. 230 VAC

A5E00105505-03 3-97
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Continuous thermal current max. 3 A
(in millimeters)
Minimum load voltage / current 10 V /5 mA
Short-circuit proof according to With circuit-breaker of
Data for Specific Module IEC 947-5-1 2) characteristic B for:
Supports clocked No cos 1.0: 600 A
operation cos 0.5 to 0.7: 900
A
Number of outputs 8
With Diazed 8 A fuse:
Length of cable 1000 A
• Unshielded max. 600 m Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts
• For resistive load
Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC switching
relay L + cyc. (typ.)
Total current of the outputs max. 4 A 24 VDC 2.0 A 0.7 million
(per group) 1.0 A 1.6 million
0.5 A 4 million
Isolation
• Between channels and Yes 120 VDC 0.2 A 1.6 million
backplane bus 48 VAC 2.0 A 1.6 million
• Between the channels Yes 120 VAC 2.0 A 0.5 million 2)
In groups of 2 1.0 A 0.7 million 2)
0.5 A 1.5 million 2)
Permitted potential difference 230 VAC 2.0 A 0.5 million 2)
• Between Minternal and 75 VDC / 60 VAC 1.0 A 0.7 million 2)
supply voltage of the relays 0.5 A 1.5 million
• Between Minternal and 230 VAC • Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1 13 DC/15 AC
supply voltage of the relays Voltage Current No. of
and the outputs switching
• Between the outputs of the 400 VAC cyc. (typ.)
different groups 24 VDC 2.0 A 0.3 million
Insulation tested with 1.0 A 0.5 million
0.5 A 1.0 million
• Between Minternal and 500 VDC 60 VDC 0.5 A 0.5 million
supply voltage of the relays 120 VDC 0.2 A 0.3 million 2)
supply voltage of the relays
and the outputs
1.0 A 0.7 million
• Between the outputs of the 1500 VAC 0.7 A 1 million
different groups 0.5 A 2.0 million
230 VAC 2.0 A 0.3 million 2)
Current consumption 1.0 A 0.7 million 2)
• From the backplane bus max. 40 mA 0.5 A 2 million 2)
• From supply voltage L+ max. 160 mA Contact protection (internal) Varistor SIOV-CU4032
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.2 W K275 G
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics An external protection circuit will enhance the service life
of the contacts.
Interrupts None

3-98 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Data for Selecting an Actuator, continued Connecting two outputs in parallel

Lamp load 1) max. 50 W • For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
a load of the same group)
Power No. of
switching • To increase performance Not possible
cyc. (typ.)
Lamp load (230 VAC) 2) 1000 W 25000
1500 W 10000 Switch rate
Energy-saving 10 58W 25000
lamps/fluorescent lamps with • For resistive load max. 2 Hz
electronic ballast2)
Fluorescent lamps, 1 58W 25000 to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13/15
conventionally compensated 2) AC
Fluorescent lamps, 10 58W 25000 • For lamp load max. 2 Hz

non-compensated 2)
1) Product status 1
2) Product status 2 or later

A5E00105505-03 3-99
Digital Modules

DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A; (6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0
Characteristics
Relay output module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A has the following
• 8 outputs, isolated in one group
• Load voltage 24 VDC to 120 VDC, 24 VAC to 230 VAC
• An RC quenching element can be connected via a jumper (SJ) to protect the
contacts.
• Channel-specific status LEDs

3-100 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Protection of contacts against overvoltages

You protect the contacts against overvoltages by inserting jumpers (SJ) on the
module between terminals 3 and 4, 7 and 8, 12 and 13 etc. (refer to Figure 3-32).
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A

SF 1 1L+ 2L+ 21
2 22
3 23
1L+ 1L+
4 24
SJ 5 25 SJ
6 26
7 1M 1M
27
1L+ 1L+
8 28
SJ 9 29 SJ

10 30
1M 1M
24V 24V
11 31
1L+ 1L+
12 32
SJ SJ
13 33
14 34
1M 1M
15 35
1L+ 1L+
16 36
SJ 17 37 SJ
18 38
1M 1M
19 39
20 SF 40
1M 2M
Channel
number
Figure 3-32 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A

A5E00105505-03 3-101
Digital Modules
Operation with safe electrical extra-low voltage

When using relay output module 6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0 with safe and electrically
isolated extra-low voltage, take the following special characteristic into account:
If a terminal is operated with a safe and electrically isolated extra-low voltage, the
horizontally adjacent terminal must be operated at a rated voltage of not more
than 120 VUC. With operation at voltages greater than 120 VUC, the creepages
and clearances of the 40-pin front connector do not meet the SIMATIC
requirements for safe electrical isolation.
If one of the two horizontally adjacent termi-

nals is operated with a safe electrical extra-
low voltage, the adjacent terminal must be
operated at not more than UC 120 V.
Figure 3-33 Special Characteristic for Operation with a Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage
Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A
Dimensions and Weight • Between the channels and Yes

the relay supply voltage
Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117
(in millimeters) • Between the channels Yes
Weight Approx. 320 g In groups of 1
Data for Specific Module Permitted potential difference
Supports clocked No • Between Minternal and 75 VDC / 60 VAC

operation supply voltage of the relays
Number of outputs 8 • Between Minternal and 250 VAC

supply voltage of the relays
Length of cable and the outputs
• Unshielded max. 600 m • Between the outputs of the 500 VAC
• Shielded max. 1000 m different groups
Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC
electronics L +
• Reverse polarity protection Yes
(per group)
• Horizontal configuration max. 5 A
Up to 60° C
• Vertical configuration max. 5 A
Up to
40 ° C
Isolation
backplane bus

3-102 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Insulation tested with • Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1 13 DC/15 AC

• Between Minternal and 500 VDC Voltage Current No. of
supply voltage of the relays switching
cyc. (typ.)
supply voltage of the relays 24 VDC 5.0 A 0.1 million
and the outputs 24 VDC 2.5 A 0.25 million
• Between the outputs of the 2000 VAC 230 VAC 5.0 A 0.1 million
different groups 230 VAC 2.5 A 0.25 million
Current consumption 230 VAC 1.0 A 0.5 million
• From the backplane bus max. 100 mA With a connected RC quenching element (jumper “SJ”
• From supply voltage L+ max. 160 mA inserted) or with an external protection circuit, you
lengthen the service life of the contacts.
Power No. of
Status display Green LED per channel switching
Interrupts cyc. (typ.)
• Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be Lamp load (230 VAC) 1000 W 25000
assigned 1500 W 10000
Diagnostic functions Parameters can be Energy-saving 10 58W 25000

assigned lamps/fluorescent lamps with
electronic ballast
Fluorescent lamps, 1 58W 25000
• Diagnostics information Possible conventionally compensated
read-out
Data for Selecting an Actuator non-compensated
Continuous thermal current max. 5 A Contact protection RC quenching element
330 Ω, 0.1 F
Minimum load voltage / current 10 V /10 mA1)
Leakage current 11.5 mA 2)
Short-circuit proof according to With circuit-breaker of a load with identical load vol-
IEC 947-5-1 characteristic B for: tage)
cos 1.0: 600 A
cos 0.5 to 0.7: 900
A Triggering a digital input Possible
With Diazed 8 A fuse: Switch rate
1000 A
Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts
Voltage Current No. of to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13/15
switching AC
cyc. (typ.)
1) Without inserted jumper (SJ).
230 VAC 5.0 A 0.2 million 2) For AC load voltage and inserted jumper (SJ).
230 VAC 2.5 A 0.4 million Without jumper (SJ) inserted there is a leakage
230 VAC 1.0 A 0.9 million current
Note
Due to the leakage current of the RC quenching element, wrong signal states
might occur when an IEC Type 1 input is connected (remove SJ jumper)

A5E00105505-03 3-103
Digital Modules
3.29.1 SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A parameterization
You will find the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules in
Section 3.3.
Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A

settings for the SM 322; DO 8 x 230 VDC/0.5 A in the table below.
Table 3-25 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A

settings type
Enable
• Diagnostic interrupts Yes/no No Dynamic Module
Behavior on CPU STOP Switch substitute value EWS Dynamic Channel
(EWS)
Switch substitute value Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
“1”
3.29.2 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8 x 230 VDC/0.5 A
Diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A

The table below presents an overview of the diagnostic messages for the
SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A.
Table 3-26 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. AC 230 VDC/0.5 A
Diagnostics message LED Scope of the diagnostics Parameters can be

assigned
Time-out SF Module No

3-104 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Error causes and remedies
Table 3-27 Diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A, error causes and remedies
Diagnostics Error Detection Possible Error Cause Remedy

Message
Time-out Always Temporary high Remove interference and turn
interference on
EPROM error Always Temporary high Remove interference and turn
interference on
RAM error Always Temporary high Remove interference and turn
interference on
3.29.3 Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A
Introduction
The SM 322; DO8 x Rel.230VAC/0.5 A can trigger diagnostic interrupts.
Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not available – in other words, they are inhibited without
appropriate parameter assignment. Use STEP 7 to assign parameters for enabling
interrupts.
Diagnostic Interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then incoming active error events (initial

A5E00105505-03 3-105
Digital Modules
3.30 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. VAC 230/5 A;

(6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0)

6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0

6AG1322-1HF10-2AA0
Characteristics
The SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A features the following characteristics:
Measures with switching currents > 3 A
Note
To keep the additional temperature rise of the module near the connectors as low
as possible, you must select a cable cross-section of 1.5 mm2 for connecting
cables with switching currents > 3 A.

3-106 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A
L+
L+
L+ L+
1)
M M
L+ L+

M M
24 V
1)
L+ L+
1)
M M
L+ L+
M M
M
M
Channel 1) Connection possibility for contact supply

number I aggregate current v8 A for Ta v30 C
Status display -green I aggregate current v5A for Ta v60 C
Figure 3-34 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A
Operation with safe electrical extra-low voltage

When using relay output module 322-1HF10 with safe and electrically isolated
extra-low voltage, take the following special characteristic into account:
If a terminal is operated with a safe and electrically isolated extra-low voltage, the
horizontally adjacent terminal must be operated at a rated voltage of not more
than 120 VUC. With operation at voltages greater than 120 VUC, the creepages
and clearances of the 40-pin front connector do not meet the SIMATIC
requirements for safe electrical isolation.
If one of the two horizontally adjacent termi-

nals is operated with a safe electrical extra-
low voltage, the adjacent terminal must be
operated at not more than UC 120 V.
Figure 3-35 Special Characteristic for Operation with a Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage

A5E00105505-03 3-107
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A
Dimensions and Weight Permitted potential difference

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 120 • Between Minternal and 75 VDC / 60 VAC
(in millimeters) supply voltage of the
relays
Data for Specific Module supply voltage of the
Supports clocked No relays and the outputs
operation • Between the outputs of the 500 VAC
Number of outputs 8 different groups
Length of cable Insulation tested with

• Unshielded max. 600 m • Between Minternal and 500 VDC
• Shielded max. 1000 m supply voltage of the
relays
Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC supply voltage of the
relay L + relays and the outputs
Total current of the outputs • Between the outputs of the 2000 VAC
(per group) different groups
• Horizontal configuration Current consumption
Up to 30 C max. 8 A • From the backplane bus max. 40 mA
Up to 60 C max. 5 A • From supply voltage L+ max. 125 mA
• Vertical configuration max. 5 A
Up to 40 C module
Isolation
backplane bus
In groups of 1

3-108 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts

Status display Green LED per channel • Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1 13 DC/15 AC
Interrupt None Voltage Current No. of
Diagnostic functions None switching
cyc. (typ.)
Data for Selecting an Actuator
Continuous thermal current max. 8 A 1.0 A 0.5 million
Minimum load voltage / current 10 V / 5 mA 0.5 A 1 million
Short-circuit proof to With circuit-breaker of 60 VDC 0.5 A 0.5 million

IEC 947-5-1 characteristic B for: 0.3 A 1 million
cos 1.0: 600 A 120 VDC 0.2 A 0.5 mill.
cos 0.5 to 0.7: 900 A
With Diazed 8 A fuse: 1.5 A 1 million
1000 A
Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts 60 VAC 3.0 A 0.3 million
1.5 A 1 million
Voltage Current No. of 2.0 A 0.3 million
switching 1.0 A 0.7 million
cyc. (typ.) 0.5 A 2.0 million
24 VDC 8.0 A 0.1 million 230 VAC 3.0 A 0.1 million
4.0 A 0.3 million 2.0 A 0.3 million
2.0 A 0.7 1.0 A 0.7 million
0.5 A 4.0 million 0.5 A 2.0 million
60 VDC 0.5 A 4 million • Aux. contactors Size 0 30 mill.
120 VDC 0.2 A 1.6 mill. (3TH28)
48 VAC 8.0 A 0.1 million An external protection circuit will enhance the service life
2.0 A 1.6 million of the contacts.
60 VAC 8.0 A 0.1 million Power No. of

2.0 A 1.2 million switching
cyc. (typ.)
4.0 A 0.3 million Lamp load (230 VAC) 1000W 25000
2.0 A 0.5 million 1500W 10000
1.0 A 0.7 million Energy-saving 10 58W 25000
0.5 A 1.5 million lamps/fluorescent lamps with
230 VAC 8.0 A 0.1 million electronic ballast
4.0 A 0.3 million
2.0 A 0.5 million
conventionally compensated
1.0 A 0.7 million
0.5 A 1.5 million Fluorescent lamps, 10 58W 25000
non-compensated
Contact protection (internal) None
• For redundant actuation of Possible
a load
Switch rate
to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13/15
AC

A5E00105505-03 3-109
Digital Modules

DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7323-1BL00-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7323-1BL00-0AA0
Characteristics
The SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A features the following characteristics:
• Inputs suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity
switches)
• Outputs suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights

Note
the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A carry a “1” signal for approximately
50 s for reasons associated with the circuitry.

3-110 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules

DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A
2L+
24V
M
2M
Backplane bus
interface
3L+
24V
1M M 3M
24V
Channel
number
Figure 3-36 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A
Terminal assignment
The figure below shows the assignment of the channels to the input and output
addresses.
Inputs Outputs
Input byte x Output byte x
Input byte (x + 1) Output byte (x + 1)
Figure 3-37 Terminal assignment of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

A5E00105505-03 3-111
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Clocked No Input current

• At signal “1” typ. 7 mA
Number of inputs 16
Input delay
• At “0” to “1” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
IEC 61131, type 1
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC BEROs max. 1.5 mA
Number of inputs that can be • Permitted bias current
triggered simultaneously Data for Selecting an Actuator
• Horizontal configuration Output voltage
Up to 40 C 16 • At signal “1” min. L + (–0.8 V)
Up to 60 C 8 Output current
• Vertical configuration • At signal “1”
Up to 40 C 16 Rated value 0.5 A
(per group) • At signal “0” max. 0.5 mA
Up to 40 C max. 4 A Output delay
Up to 60 C max. 3 A (for resistive load)
• Vertical configuration • At “0” to “1” max. 100 s

Up to 40 C max. 2 A • At “1” to “0” max. 500 s
Load resistor range 48 to 4 k
Isolation
• Between channels and Yes Lamp load max. 5 W
backplane bus Parallel connection of
• Between the channels Yes 2 outputs
Inputs in groups of 16 • For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
Outputs in groups of 8 a load of the same group)
Permitted potential difference • To increase performance Not possible

• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC Triggering a digital input Possible
circuits Switch rate
Insulation tested with VDC 500 • For resistive load max. 100 Hz
Current consumption • Inductive load according to max. 0.5 Hz
IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC
• From the backplane bus max. 80 mA max. 10 Hz
• From load voltage L+ max. 80 mA • For lamp load
(without load) Limit (internal) of the inductive L + (–53 V), typ.
Power dissipation of the module typ. 6.5 W circuit interruption voltage up
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic

output
Interrupts None

3-112 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules

DI 8/DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A; (6ES7323-1BH01-0AA0)

6ES7323-1BH01-0AA0

6AG1323-1BH01-2AA0
Characteristics
The SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A features the following characteristics:
switches)

Note
the SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A carry a “1” signal for approximately 50 s
for reasons associated with the circuitry.

A5E00105505-03 3-113
Digital Modules
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A
1M
24V
2L+
M
24V
Backplane bus
interface
2M
Channel number
Figure 3-38 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input/Output Module SM 323;
DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

3-114 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Data for Specific Module • For signal “0” –30 to 5 V

Number of outputs 8 • At “0” to “1” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
• Unshielded max. 600 m Input characteristic curve According to

IEC 61131, type 1
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Connection of Two-Wire Possible
BEROs max. 1.5 mA
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC • Permitted bias current
Number of inputs that can be Data for Selecting an Actuator
Output voltage
• At signal “1” min. L + (–0.8 V)
Up to 60 C 8
Output current
Up to 40 C 8 • At signal “1”
Rated value 0.5 A
(per group) Permitted range 5 mA to 0.6 A
• Horizontal configuration • At signal “0” max. 0.5 mA

(leakage current)
Up to 60 C max. 4 A
• Vertical configuration Output delay (for resistive load)
Isolation • At “1” to “0” max. 500 s
• Between channels and Yes Load resistor range 48 to 4 k

backplane bus Lamp load max. 5 W
• Between the channels Yes Parallel connection of
Inputs in groups of 8 2 outputs
Outputs in groups of 8 • For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
Permitted potential difference a load of the same group)
• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC • To increase performance Not possible
circuits
Switch rate
Current consumption • For resistive load max. 100 Hz
• From the backplane bus max. 40 mA • Inductive load according to max. 0.5 Hz
• From load voltage L+ max. 40 mA IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC
(without load) • For lamp load max. 10 Hz
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.5 W Limit (internal) of the inductive L + (–53 V), typ.
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics circuit interruption voltage up
Status display Green LED per channel Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic
output
Interrupts None

A5E00105505-03 3-115
Digital Modules

DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A; parameterizable
(6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0
Characteristics
The SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 VDC 24/0.5 A features the following characteristics:
• 8 digital inputs and 8 individual parameterizable inputs or outputs, isolated in
groups of 16
switches)
• The parameters of the module can be dynamically changed-channel during the
RUN (CiR-capable)
• Re-readability of the outputs.

Note
the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A carry a “1” signal for approximately 50 s
for reasons associated with the circuitry.

3-116 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules

DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, parameterizable
2
0
3
1 4
2 5
3 M 6
4 7
5 8
6 9
Backplane bus
7 interface
11
L+
0 12
1 13
2 14
3 15
M
4 16
L+
5 17
6 18
M
7
19
20
M
Channel number
Figure 3-39 Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A,
parameterizable

A5E00105505-03 3-117
Digital Modules
Technical data of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, parameterizable

Data for Specific Module • For signal “0” –30 to 5 V

Number of inputs 8 digital Input delay
Number of inputs/outputs 8 single, • At “0” to “1” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
parameterizable • At “1” to “0” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
Length of cable Input characteristic curve According to
• Unshielded max. 600 m IEC 61131, type 1
• Shielded max. 1000 m Connection of Two-Wire Possible
Voltages, Currents, Potentials BEROs max. 1.5 mA
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC
triggered simultaneously Output voltage
• At signal “1” min. L + (– 1,5 V)
Up to 60 C 16 Output current
• Vertical configuration • At signal “1”
Up to 40 C 16 Rated value 0.5 A
Total current of the outputs Permitted range 5 mA to 0.6 A
(per group) • At signal “0” max. 0.5 mA
Up to 40 C max. 4 A Output delay (for resistive load)
• Vertical configuration max. 2 A • At “1” to “0” max. 500 s
Up to 40 C
Load resistor range 48 to 4 k
Isolation
Lamp load max. 5 W
backplane bus
2 outputs
• Between the channels No
• For redundant triggering of Possible
Permitted potential difference a load
• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC • To increase performance Not possible
circuits
Switch rate
Current consumption
• Inductive load according to max. 0.5 Hz
• From load voltage L+ max. 20 mA IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC
(without load)
Limit (internal) of the inductive typ. L + (–54 V)
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics circuit interruption voltage up
Status display Green LED per channel Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic
output
Interrupts None

3-118 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
3.33.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A
digital modules in Section 3.3.
Parameters of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, parameterizable

settings for the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A in the table below.
STEP 7.
You will see which parameters you can modify from the list:
• In STEP 7
• With SFC 55 “WR_PARM”
• with SFB 53 “WRREC” (e. g. for GSD).
The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 and
the SFB 53 to the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).
Table 3-28 Parameters of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 VDC 24/0.5 A
Parameter Value Default Parameter Scope Data Parameters can be

Range Settings Type Record assigned with ...
No.
SFC 55, Program
SFB 53 ming
device
Digital output Yes/no No Dynamic Channel 1 Yes Yes

A5E00105505-03 3-119
Digital Modules
Structure of data record 1

The following figure shows the structure of data record 1 of the dynamic
parameters of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A.
Byte 0 Not relevant
Byte 1 Not relevant
Byte 2 Not relevant
Byte 3 Not relevant
Byte 4 Not relevant
Byte 5
1: Use channel 8 as output

0: Use channel 8 as input
...
...
...
...
...
...
+1: Use channel 15 as output
0: Use channel 15 as input
Figure 3-40 Data record 1 of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A

3-120 A5E00105505-03
Digital Modules
Re-readability of the outputs

The digital outputs can be read back into the user data area: If, e. g. A11.3 is
parameterized as an output, it can be read back via E11.3. see Figure3-41
Byte n Byte n+1

.7 .0 .7 .0
Inputs
Re–readability
.7 .0 .7 .0
Outputs 0
Byte n+1
The following applies: Channel 8: n+1.0

Channel 9: n+1.1
Channel 10: n+1.2
Channel 11: n+1.3
Channel 12: n+1.4
Channel 13: n+1.5
Channel 14: n+1.6
Channel 15: n+1.7
Figure 3-41 Re-readability of the outputs of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

A5E00105505-03 3-121
Digital Modules

3-122 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules 4
The present chapter is broken down into the following subjects:
1. Chapter overview of which modules are available and described here
2. Module overview of the most important properties of the modules
3. Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module
4. Information that is generally available – in other words, affects all analog
modules (such as parameter assignment and diagnostics)
5. Information that refers to specific modules (for example, characteristics,
diagram of connections and block diagram, technical specifications and special
characteristics of the module):
a) for analog input modules
b) for analog output modules
c) for analog input/output modules
STEP 7 blocks for analog functions

You can use the blocks FC 105 “SCALE” (Scale Values) and FC 106 “UNSCALE”
(Unscale Values) for reading and outputting analog values in STEP 7. You will find
the FCs in the standard library of STEP 7 in the subdirectory called
“TI-S7-Converting Blocks” (for a description, refer to the STEP 7 Online Help for
the FCs).
Additional information
Appendix A describes the structure of the parameter sets (data records 0, 1 and
128) in the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to
modify the parameters of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.
Appendix B describes the structure of the diagnostic data (data records 0 and 1) in
the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to
evaluate the diagnostic data of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.

A5E00105505-03 4-1
Analog Modules
In this chapter

4.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning 4-8
the Analog Module
4.3 Analog Value Representation 4-9
4.4 Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of Analog 4-28
Input Channels
4.5 Behavior of Analog Modules 4-31
4.6 Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog 4-35
Modules
4.7 Analog Module Parameter Assignment 4-39
4.8 Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs 4-45
4.9 Connecting Voltage Sensors 4-50
4.10 Connecting Current Sensors 4-51
4.11 Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors 4-53
4.12 Connecting Thermocouples 4-58
4.13 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs 4-66
4.14 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Voltage Outputs 4-67
4.15 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Current Outputs 4-70
4.16 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules 4-71
4.17 Interrupts of the Analog Modules 4-75
4.18 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits; 4-77
(6ES7331-7NF00-0AB0)
4.19 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits 4-86
(6ES7331-7NF10-0AB0)
4.20 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed; 4-97
(6ES7331-7HF0x-0AB0)
(6ES7331-1KF01-0AB0)
(6ES7331-7KF02-0AB0)
4.23 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD 4-125
(6ES7331-7PF00-0AB0)
4.24 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC (6ES7331-7PF10-0AB0) 4-138
(6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0)
4.26 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits 4-163
(6ES7332-5HF00-0AB0)
4.27 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits, synchronous; 4-169
(6ES7332-7ND01-0AB0)
4.28 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits; 4-176
(6ES7332-5HD01-0AB0)

4-2 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules

4.29 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits; 4-182
(6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0)
4.30 Analog Input/Output Module SM334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits; 4-188
(6ES7334-0CE01-0AA0)
4.31 Analog Input/Output Module SM334; AI 4/AO 2 x12 bits; 4-194
(6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0)
4.1 Module Overview
Introduction
The following tables summarize the most important characteristics of the analog
modules. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module
for your task.

A5E00105505-03 4-3
Analog Modules
Table 4-1 Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance
Module SM 331; SM 331; SM 331; SM 331;

AI 8 x 16 bits AI 8 x 16 bits AI 8 x 14 bits AI 8 x 13 bits
Char- High Speed
acter- (-7NF00-) (-7NF10-) (-7HF0x-) (-1KF01-)
istics
Number of 8 inputs in 4 8 inputs in 4 8 inputs in 4 8 inputs in 8
inputs channel groups channel groups channel groups channel groups
Resolution Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each
channel group: channel group: channel group: channel group:
• 15 bits + sign • 15 bits + sign • 13 bits + sign • 12 bits+sign
Measuring Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each
Method channel group: channel group: channel group: channel:
• Voltage • Voltage • Voltage
• Current • Current • Current • Voltage
• Current
• Resistors
• Temperature
Selection of Arbitrary, per Arbitrary, per Arbitrary, per Arbitrary,
measuring channel group channel group channel group per channel
range
Supports No No Yes No
clocked
operation
Programmable Yes Yes Yes No
diagnostics
Diagnostic Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable No
interrupt
Limit value Adjustable for Adjustable for Adjustable for No
monitoring 2 channels 8 channels 2 channels
Hardware Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable No
interrupt upon
limit violation
Hardware No Yes No No
interrupt at end
of cycle
Potential Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation
relationships to: to: to: to:
• CPU • CPU • CPU • CPU
• Load voltage (not
for 2-DMU)
Permitted 50 VDC 60 VDC 11 VDC 2.0 VDC
potential
difference
between the
inputs (ECM)
Special – - – –
Features
Sign Sign
2-DMU 2-wire transmitter

4-4 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Table 4-2 Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued)

Module SM 331; SM 331; SM 331; SM 331;
AI 8 x 12 bits AI 8 x RTD AI 8 x TC AI 2 x 12 bits
Char-
acter- (-7KF02-) (-7PF00-) (-7PF10-) (-7KB02-)
istics
Number of 8 inputs in 4 8 inputs in 4 8 inputs in 4 2 inputs in 1
inputs channel groups channel groups channel groups channel group
Resolution Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each
channel group: channel group: channel group: channel group:
• 9 bits+sign • 15 bits + sign • 15 bits + sign • 9 bits+sign
• 12 bits+sign • 12 bits+sign
• 14 bits+sign • 14 bits+sign
Measuring Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each
Method channel group: channel group: channel group: channel group:
• Voltage • Resistors • Temperature • Voltage
• Current • Temperature • Current
• Resistors • Resistors
• Temperature • Temperature
Selection of Arbitrary, per Arbitrary, per Arbitrary, per Arbitrary, per
measuring channel group channel group channel group channel group
range
Programmable No Yes Yes Yes
diagnostics
Supports Yes No No No
clocked
operation
Diagnostic Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable
interrupt
Limit value Adjustable for Adjustable for Adjustable for Adjustable for
monitoring 2 channels 8 channels 8 channels 1 channel
Hardware Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable

interrupt upon
limit violation
Hardware No Adjustable Adjustable No
interrupt at end
of cycle
relationships to: to: to: to:
• CPU • CPU • CPU • CPU
• Load voltage (not • Load voltage (not
for 2-DMU) for 2-DMU)
Permitted 2.5 VDC 75 VDC / 60 VAC 75 VDC / 60 VAC 2.5 VDC
potential
difference
between the
inputs (ECM)
Special – – –
Features
Sign Sign
2-DMU 2-wire transmitter

A5E00105505-03 4-5
Analog Modules
Table 4-3 Analog Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance
Module SM 332; SM 332; SM 332; SM 332;

AO 8 x 12 bits AO 4 x 16 bits AO 4 x 12 bits AO 2 x 12 bits
Char-
acter- (-5HF00-) (-7ND01-) (-5HD01-) (-5HB01-)
istics
Number of outputs 8 Output channels 4 outputs in 4 4 Output channels 2 Output channels

channel groups
Resolution 12 bits 16 bits 12 bits 12 bits
Output type Channel by Channel by Channel by Channel by
channel: channel: channel: channel:
• Voltage • Voltage • Voltage • Voltage
• Current • Current • Current • Current
Supports No Yes No No
clocked operation
Programmable Yes Yes Yes Yes
diagnostics
Diagnostic Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable
interrupt
Substitute value No Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable
output
relationships between: between: to: to:
• CPU • CPU and • CPU • CPU
• Of the load channel • Of the load • Of the load
voltage • The channels voltage voltage
• Output and L+,
M
• CPU and L+, M
Special Features – – – –

4-6 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Table 4-4 Analog Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance
Module SM 334; SM 334;

AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits
Characteristics (-0CE01-) (-0KE00-)
Number of inputs 4 inputs in 1 channel group 4 inputs in 2 channel groups

Number of outputs 2 outputs in 1 channel group 2 outputs in 1 channel group
Resolution 8 bits 12 bits + sign
Measuring Method Adjustable for each channel Adjustable for each channel
group: group:
• Voltage • Voltage
• Current • Resistors
• Temperature
Output type Channel by channel: Channel by channel:
• Voltage • Voltage
• Current
Supports clocked No No
operation
Programmable diagnostics No No
Diagnostic interrupt No No
Limit value monitoring No No
Hardware interrupt upon limit No No
violation
Hardware interrupt at end of No No
cycle
Substitute value output No No
Potential relationships • Non-isolated to CPU Galvanic isolation to:
• Galvanic isolation to load • CPU
voltage • Of the load voltage
Special Features Not parameterizable, setting of –
measurement and output type by
means of wiring

A5E00105505-03 4-7
Analog Modules
4.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the

Module
Introduction
to commission analog modules successfully.
The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either
earlier or later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install other
modules or install, commission etc. other modules in between times.
Sequence of steps
Table 4-5 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module
Step Procedure Refer To...

1. Select the module Section 4.1 and specific module section from
Section 4.22
2. With some analog input Section 4.4
modules: set the measuring
method and measuring range by
means of the measuring range
module
3. Install the module in the ”Mounting” section in the Installation Manual for
SIMATIC S7 network the programmable logic controller being used:
Installation
or
4. Assign parameters to module Section 4.7
5. Connect measuring sensor or Sections 4.8 to 4.15
loads to module
6. Commission configuration ”Commissioning” section in the Installation
Manual for the programmable controller being
used:
Installation
or
7. If commissioning was not Section 4.16
successful, diagnose
configuration

4-8 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
4.3 Analog Value Representation
Introduction
This section describes the analog values for all the measuring ranges and output
ranges which you can use with the analog modules.
Converting Analog Values

The CPU processes the analog values in binary form only.
Analog input modules convert the analog process signal into digital form.
Analog output modules convert the digital output value into an analog signal.
Analog value representation with 16-bit resolution

The digitized analog value is the same for both input and output values having the
same nominal range. The analog values are represented as a fixed-point number
in two’s complement. The resulting assignment is as follows:
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value of bits 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Sign
The sign of the analog value is always contained in bit number 15:
• “0” ³ )
• “1” ³ *
Resolution less than 16 bits

If the resolution of an analog module has fewer than 16 bits, the analog value is
stored left-justified on the module. The lower-order bit positions not used are
padded with zeros (”0”).

A5E00105505-03 4-9
Analog Modules
Example
In the following example you can see how the positions not padded with “0” are
written for low resolution.
Table 4-6 Example: Bit pattern of a 16-bit and a 13-bit analog value
Resolution Analog value

Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
16-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
13-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
4.3.1 Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Channels
Introduction
The tables in this chapter contain the measured value representations for the
various measuring ranges of the analog input modules. The values in the tables
apply to all modules with the corresponding measuring ranges.
Notes for readers of the tables

Tables 4-8 to 4-9 contain the binary representation of the measured values.
Since the binary representation of the measured values is always the same,
starting at 4-10 these tables only contain the measured values and the units.

4-10 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Measured-value resolution
The resolution of the analog values may differ, depending on the analog module
and its parameterization. With resolutions < 15 bits, the bits indicated by “x” are set
to “0”.
Note: This resolution does not apply to temperature values. The converted
temperature values are the result of a conversion in the analog module (see Tables
4-16 to 4-31).
Table 4-7 Possible analog value resolutions
Resolution Units Analog value

in bits (+ sign)
decimal hexadecimal High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte
8 128 80H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1xxxxxxx
9 64 40H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01xxxxxx
10 32 20H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 001xxxxx
11 16 10H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0001xxxx
12 8 8H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001xxx
13 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx
14 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
15 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

A5E00105505-03 4-11
Analog Modules
Binary representation of the input ranges

The input ranges shown in Tables 4-8 to 4-9 are defined in two’s complement
representation:
Table 4-8 Bipolar Input Ranges
Units Measured Data Word Range

Value
in % 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 u118.515 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow

32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over
range
27649 u100.00 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
4
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rated
range
–1 –0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
–27648 –100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
–27649 v–100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Under
range
–32512 –117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
–32768 v–117.596 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow
Table 4-9 Unipolar Input Ranges
Units Measured Data Word Range

Value
in % 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 w118.515 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow

32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over-
range
27649 w100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
range
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Rated
range
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
–1 –0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Under-
range
–4864 –17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
range
–32768 v–17.596 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

4-12 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges
Table 4-10 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges ± 10 V to ± 1 V
System Voltage Measuring Range

Dec. Hex. ±10 V ±5 V ±2.5 V ±1 V
32767 7FFF 11.851 V 5.926 V 2.963 V 1.185 V Overflow
32512 7F00
32511 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V 2.940 V 1.176 V
Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 10 V 5V 2.5 V 1V
20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V 1.875 V 0.75 V
1 1 361.7 V 180.8 V 90.4 V 36.17 V
0 0 0V 0V 0V 0V Rated range
–1 FFFF
–20736 AF00 –7.5 V –3.75 V –1.875 V –0.75 V
–27648 9400 –10 V –5 V –2.5 V –1 V
–27649 93FF
Underrange
–32512 8100 –11.759 V –5.879 V –2.940 V –1.176 V
–32513 80FF Underflow
–32768 8000 –11.851 V –5.926 V –2.963 V –1.185 V
Table 4-11 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges ± 500 mV to ± 80 mV

Dec. Hex. ±500 mV ±250 mV ±80 mV
32767 7FFF 592.6 mV 296.3 mV 94.8 mV Overflow
32512 7F00
32511 7EFF 587.9 mV 294.0 mV 94.1 mV Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 500 mV 250 mV 80 mV
20736 5100 375 mV 187.5 mV 60 mV
1 1 18.08 V 9.04 V 2.89 V
0 0 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV Rated range
–1 FFFF
–20736 AF00 –375 mV –187.5 mV –60 mV
–27648 9400 –500 mV –250 mV –80 mV
–27649 93FF Underrange
–32512 8100 –587.9 mV –294.0 mV –94.1 mV
–32768 8000 –592.6 mV –296.3 mV –94.8 mV

A5E00105505-03 4-13
Analog Modules
Table 4-12 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges 1 to 5 V and

0 to 10 V

Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
32767 7FFF 5.741 V 11.852 V
Overflow
32512 7F00
32511 7EFF 5.704 V 11.759 V
Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 5V 10 V
20736 5100 4V 7.5 V
Rated range
1 1 1 V + 144.7 V 0 V + 361.7 V
0 0 1V 0V
–1 FFFF
Underrange
–4864 ED00 0.296 V
Negative values not
–4865 ECFF possible
Underflow
–32768 8000
Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges
Table 4-13 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges ± 20 mA to ± 3.2 mA
System Current Measuring Range

Dec. Hex. ±20 mA ±10 mA ±3.2 mA
32767 7FFF 23.70 mA 11.85 mA 3.79 mA Overflow
32512 7F00
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 11.76 mA 3.76 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA 10 mA 3.2 mA
20736 5100 15 mA 7.5 mA 2.4 mA
1 1 723.4 nA 361.7 nA 115.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA Rated range
–1 FFFF
–20736 AF00 –15 mA –7.5 mA –2.4 mA
–27648 9400 –20 mA –10 mA –3.2 mA
–32512 8100 –23.52 mA –11.76 mA –3.76 mA
–32768 8000 –23.70 mA –11.85 mA –3.79 mA

4-14 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Table 4-14 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to

20 mA
System Current Measuring Range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
32767 7FFF 23.70 mA 22.96 mA
Overflow
32512 7F00
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA
Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA
20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA
Rated range
1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 4 mA
–1 FFFF
Underrange
–4864 ED00 –3.52 mA 1.185 mA
–4865 ECFF
Underflow
–32768 8000
Analog Value Representation for Resistance-Type Transmitters
Table 4-15 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Type Transmitters from 10 k
and from 150 to 600
System Resistance-Type Transmitter Range

Dec. Hex. 10 k 150 300 600
32767 7FFF 11.852 177.77 355.54 711.09 Overflow
k
32512 7F00 150.01 300.01 600.02

32511 7EFF 11.759 176.38 352.77 705.53 Overrange
k
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 10 k 150 300 600
20736 5100 7.5 k 112.5 225 450
1 1 361.7m 5.43 m 10.85 21.70 Rated range
m m
0 0 0 0 0 0
(negative values physically Underrange

not possible)

A5E00105505-03 4-15
Analog Modules
Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Pt x00

standard
Table 4-16 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors PT 100, 200, 500,
1000
Pt x00 Units Pt x00 Units Pt x00 Units

standard standard standard
in 5C
C decimal hexa- in 5F
F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit decimal (1 digit decimal (1 digit = decimal
=0.15C) =0.1 5F) 0.1 K)
> 1000.0 32767 7FFFH > 1832.0 32767 7FFFH > 1273.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1000.0 10000 2710H 1832.0 18320 4790H 1273.2 12732 31BCH
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
850.1 8501 2135H 1562.1 15621 3D05H 1123.3 11233 2BE1H
850.0 8500 2134H 1562.0 15620 3D04H 1123.2 11232 2BE0H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H 73.2 732 2DCH
–200.1 –2001 F82FH –328.1 –3281 F32FH 73.1 731 2DBH
Underrang
: : : : : : : : :
e
–243.0 –2430 F682H –405.4 –4054 F02AH 30.2 302 12EH
< –243.0 –32768 8000H < –405.4 –32768 8000H < 30.2 32768 8000H Underflow
Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Pt x00

climate
Table 4-17 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Pt 100, 200, 500,
1000
Pt x00 Units Pt x00 Units

climate climate
in 5C
F decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.015C) 0.01 5F)
>155.00 32767 7FFFH >311.00 32767 7FFFH Overflow
155.00 15500 3C8CH 311.00 31100 797CH
: : : : : : Overrange
130.01 13001 32C9H 266.01 26601 67E9H
130.00 13000 32C8H 266.00 26600 67E8H
: : : : : : Rated range
–120.00 –12000 D120H –184.00 –18400 B820H
–120.01 –12001 D11FH –184.01 –18401 B81FH
: : : : : : Underrange
–145.00 –14500 C75CH –229.00 –22900 A68CH
< –145.00 –32768 8000H < –229.00 –32768 8000H Underflow

4-16 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni x00

standard
Table 4-18 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni100, 120, 200, 500,
1000, LG-Ni 1000
Ni x00 Units Ni x00 Units Ni x00 Units

in 5C
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.15C) 0.1 5F) 0.1 K)
>295.0 32767 7FFFH >563.0 32767 7FFFH >568.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
295.0 2950 B86H 563.0 5630 15FEH 568.2 5682 1632H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
250.1 2501 9C5H 482.1 4821 12D5H 523.3 5233 1471H
250.0 2500 9C4H 482.0 4820 12D4H 523.2 5232 1470H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–60.0 –600 FDA8H –76.0 –760 FD08H 213.2 2132 854H
–60.1 –601 FDA7H –76.1 –761 FD07H 213.1 2131 853H
: : : : : : : : : Underrange
–105.0 –1050 FBE6H –157.0 –1570 F9DEH 168.2 1682 692H
< –105.0 –32768 8000H < –157.0 –32768 8000H <168.2 32768 8000H Underflow
Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni x00

climate
Table 4-19 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni 100, 120, 200,
500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000
Ni x00 Units Ni x00 Units

climate climate
in 5C
0.015C) 0.01 5F)
> 295.00 32767 7FFFH >325.11 32767 7FFFH Overflow
295.00 29500 733CH 327.66 32766 7FFEH
250.01 25001 61A9H 280.01 28001 6D61H
250.00 25000 61A8H 280.00 28000 6D60H
–60.00 –6000 E890H –76.00 –7600 E250H
–60.01 –6001 E88FH –76.01 –7601 E24FH
–105.00 –10500 D6FCH –157.00 –15700 C2ACH
< –105.00 –32768 8000H < –157.00 –32768 8000H Underflow

A5E00105505-03 4-17
Analog Modules
Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10

standard
Table 4-20 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10
Cu 10 Units Cu 10 Units Cu 10 Units

in 5C
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.015C) 0.01 5F) 0.01 K)
> 312.0 32767 7FFFH >593.6 32767 7FFFH >585.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
312.0 3120 C30H 593.6 5936 1730H 585.2 5852 16DCH
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
260.1 2601 A29H 500.1 5001 12D5H 533.3 5333 14D5H
260.0 2600 A28H 500.0 5000 1389H 533.2 5332 14D4H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H 73.2 732 2DCH
–200.1 –2001 F82FH –328.1 –3281 F32FH 73.1 731 2DBH
: : : : : : : : : Underrange
–240.0 –2400 F6A0H –400.0 –4000 F060H 33.2 332 14CH
< –240.0 –32768 8000H < –400.0 –32768 8000H <33.2 32768 8000H Underflow
Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10

climate
Table 4-21 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10
Cu 10 Units Cu 10 Units
climate climate
in 5C
0.015C) 0.01 5F)
180.00 18000 4650H 327.66 32766 7FFEH
150.01 15001 3A99H 280.01 28001 6D61AH
150.00 15000 3A98H 280.00 28000 6D60H
–50.00 –5000 EC78H –58.00 –5800 E958H
–50.01 –5001 EC77H –58.01 –5801 E957H
–60.00 –6000 E890H –76.00 –7600 E250H
< –60.00 –32768 8000H < –76.00 –32768 8000H Underflow

4-18 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Analog value representation for thermocouples type B
Table 4-22 Analog value representation for thermocouples type B
Units Units Units

Type B Type B Type B Range
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
2070.0 20700 50DCH 3276.6 32766 7FFEH 2343.2 23432 5B88H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1821.0 18210 4722H 2786.6 27866 6CDAH 2094.2 20942 51CEH
1820.0 18200 4718H 2786.5 27865 6CD9H 2093.2 20932 51C4H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
0.0 0 0000H 32.0 320 0140H 273.2 2732 0AACH
: : : : : : : : : Underrange
–120.0 –1200 FB50H –184.0 –1840 F8D0H 153.2 1532 05FCH
< –120.0 –32768 8000H < –184.0 –32768 8000H <153.2 32768 8000H Underflow
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type C
Table 4-23 Analog value representation for thermocouples type C
Units Units
Type C Type C Range
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa-
decimal decimal
2500.0 25000 61A8H 3276.6 32766 7FFEH
2315.1 23151 5A6FH 2786.6 27866 6CDAH
2315.0 23150 5A6EH 2786.5 27865 6CD9H
0.0 0 0000H 32.0 320 0140H
0.1 –1 FFFFH 31.9 319 013FH
–120.0 –1200 FB50H –184.0 –1840 F8D0H
< –120.0 –32768 8000H < –184.0 –32768 8000H Underflow

A5E00105505-03 4-19
Analog Modules
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type E
Table 4-24 Analog value representation for thermocouples type E
Units Units Units

Type E Type E Type E Range
> 1200.0 32767 7FFFH > 2192,0 32767 7FFFH > 1473.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1200.0 12000 2EE0H 2192.0 21920 55A0H 1473.2 14732 398CH
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1000.1 10001 2711H 1833.8 18338 47A2H 1274.2 12742 31C6H
1000.0 10000 2710H 1832.0 18320 4790H 1273.2 12732 31BCH
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–270.0 –2700 F574H –454.0 –4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< –270.0 < –2700 H < –454.0 < –4540 <EE44H <0 <0 <0000H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of FB70H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H.
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type J
Table 4-25 Analog value representation for thermocouples type J
Units Units Units

Type J Type J Type J Range
> 1450.0 32767 7FFFH > 2642,0 32767 7FFFH > 1723.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1450.0 14500 38A4H 2642.0 26420 6734H 1723.2 17232 4350H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1201.0 12010 2EEAH 2193.8 21938 55B2H 1474.2 14742 3996H
1200.0 12000 2EE0H 2192.0 21920 55A0H 1473.2 14732 398CH
: : : : : : : : : Rated range
–210.0 –2100 F7CCH –346.0 –3460 F27CH 63.2 632 0278H
< –210.0 < –2100 < –346.0 < –3460 <63.2 < 632 < 0278H
Underflow
H H
... of F31CH and outputs 8000H. ... of EA0CH and outputs 8000H. ... of FDC8H and outputs 8000H.

4-20 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Analog value representation for thermocouples type K
Table 4-26 Analog value representation for thermocouples type K
Units Units Units

Type K Type K Type K Range
> 1622.0 32767 7FFFH >2951.6 32767 7FFFH > 1895.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1622.0 16220 3F5CH 2951.6 29516 734CH 1895.2 18952 4A08H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1373.0 13730 35A2H 2503.4 25034 61CAH 1646.2 16462 404EH
1372.0 13720 3598H 2501.6 25061 61B8H 1645.2 16452 4044H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–270.0 –2700 F574H –454.0 –4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< –270.0 < –2700 < F574H < –454.0 < –4540 <EE44H 0% 0% < 0000H Underflow
... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H. ... of FB70H and outputs 8000H.
Analog value representation for thermocouples type L
Table 4-27 Analog value representation for thermocouples type L
Units Units Units

Type L Type L Type L Range
1150.0 11500 2CECH 2102.0 21020 521CH 1423.2 14232 3798H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
901.0 9010 2332H 1653.8 16538 409AH 1174.2 11742 2DDEH
900.0 9000 2328H 1652.0 16520 4088H 1173.2 11732 2DD4H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H 73.2 732 02DCH
< –200.0 < –2000 < F830H < –328.0 < –3280 H <73.2 < 732 <02DCH Underflow
... of F380H and outputs 8000H. ... of EAC0H and outputs 8000H. ... of FE2CH and outputs 8000H.

A5E00105505-03 4-21
Analog Modules
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type N
Table 4-28 Analog value representation for thermocouples type N
Units Units Units

Type N Type N Type N Range
> 1550.0 32767 7FFFH >2822.0 32767 7FFFH > 1823.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1550.0 15500 3C8CH 2822.0 28220 6E3CH 1823.2 18232 4738H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1300.1 13001 32C9H 2373.8 23738 5CBAH 1574.2 15742 3D7EH
1300.0 13000 32C8H 2372.0 23720 5CA8H 1573.2 15732 3D74H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–270.0 –2700 F574H –454.0 –4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< –270.0 < –2700 < F574H < –454.0 < –4540 <EE44H 0% 0% < 0000H Underflow
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type R, S
Table 4-29 Analog value representation for thermocouples type R, S
Units Units Units

Types R, S Types R, Types R,
decimal hexa- S decimal hexa- S decimal hexa- Range
in 5C decimal in 5F decimal in K decimal
2019.0 20190 4EDEH 3276.6 32766 7FFEH 2292.2 22922 598AH
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1770.0 17770 4524H 3218.0 32180 7DB4H 2043.2 20432 4FD0H
1769.0 17690 451AH 3216.2 32162 7DA2H 2042.2 20422 4FC6H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–50.0 –500 FE0CH –58.0 –580 FDBCH 223.2 2232 08B8H
–51.0 –510 FE02H –59.8 –598 FDAAH 222.2 2222 08AEH
: : : : : : : : : Underrange
–170.0 –1700 F95CH –274.0 –2740 F54CH 103.2 1032 0408H
< –170.0 –32768 8000H < –274.0 –32768 8000H < 103-2 < 1032 8000H Underflow

4-22 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type T
Table 4-30 Analog value representation for thermocouples type T
Units Units Units

Type T Type T Type T Range
540.0 5400 1518H 1004.0 10040 2738H 813.2 8132 1FC4H
: : : Overrange
401.0 4010 0FAAH
400.0 4000 0FA0H 752.0 7520 1D60H 673.2 6732 1AACH
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–270.0 –2700 F574H –454.0 –4540 EE44H 3.2 32 0020H
< –270.0 < –2700 H < –454.0 < –4540 <EE44H <3.2 < 32 < 0020H Underflow
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type U
Table 4-31 Analog value representation for thermocouples type U
Units Units Units

Type U Type U Type U Range
850.0 8500 2134H 1562.0 15620 2738.0H 1123.2 11232 2BE0H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
601.0 6010 177AH 1113.8 11138 2B82H 874.2 8742 2226H
600.0 6000 1770H 1112.0 11120 2B70H 873.2 8732 221CH
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H 73.2 732 02DCH
< –200.0 < –2000 H < –328.0 < –3280 H <73.2 < 732 <02DCH Underflow
... of F380H and outputs 8000H. ... of EAC0H and outputs 8000H. ... of FE2CH and outputs 8000H.

A5E00105505-03 4-23
Analog Modules
4.3.2 Analog Value Representation for Analog Output Channels
Introduction
The tables in this chapter contain the analog value representation for output
channels of the analog output modules. The values in the tables apply to all
modules with the corresponding output ranges.
Notes for readers of the tables

Tables 4-32 to 4-33 contain the binary representation of the output values.
Since the binary representation of the output values is always the same, starting at
4-34 these tables only contain the output ranges and the units.
Output ranges for the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 8/8 bits

The analog input/output module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits has output ranges
from 0 to 10 V and from 0 to 20 mA. Unlike the other analog modules, the SM 334
has a lower resolution, however. Please not that the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits
with product status 1 does not have overranges.
Binary representation of the output ranges

The output ranges shown in Tables 4-32 to 4-33 are defined in two’s complement
representation:

4-24 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Table 4-32 Bipolar Output Ranges
Units Output Data Word Range

Value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
w32512 0 % 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over
range
27649 w100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rated
range
–1 –0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
–27648 –100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
–27649 v100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Under
range
–32512 –117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
v32513 0 % 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Underflow
Table 4-33 Unipolar Output Ranges
Units Output Data Word Range

Value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
w32512 0 % 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Over-
flow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over-
range
27649 w100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Rated
range
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
–1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Limited
0.000 to rated
range
lower
–32512 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 limit 0 V
and
0 mA
v32513 0 % 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Under-
flow

A5E00105505-03 4-25
Analog Modules
Analog Value Representation in Voltage Output Ranges
Table 4-34 Analog Value Representation in Output Range ±10 V
System Voltage Output Range

Dec. hex. ±10 V
118.5149% 32767 7FFF 0.00 V Overflow, off circuit and de-energized
32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 11.76 V Overrange
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 10 V
75% 20736 5100 7.5 V
0.003617% 1 1 361.7 µV Rated range
0% 0 0 0V
–1 FFFF –361.7 µV
–75 % –20736 AF00 –7.5 V
–100 % –27648 9400 –10 V
–117.593% –32512 8100 –11.76 V
–32513 80FF Underflow, off circuit and de-energized
–118.519% –32768 8000 0.00 V
Table 4-35 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 to 10 V and 1 to 5 V
System Voltage Output Range

Dec. hex. 0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V
118.5149% 32767 7FFF 0.00 V 0.00 V Overflow, off circuit and de-
energized
32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 11.76 V 5.70 V Overrange
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 10 V 5V
75% 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V
0.003617% 1 1 361.7µV 1V+144.7µV Rated range
0% 0 0 0V 1V
–1 FFFF Underrange
–25 % –6912 E500 0V
–6913 E4FF Not possible.
The output value is limited
–117.593% –32512 8100 to 0 V.
–32513 80FF Underflow, off circuit and
de-energized
–118.519% –32768 8000 0.00 V 0.00 V

4-26 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Analog Value Representation in Current Output Ranges
Table 4-36 Analog Value Representation in Output Range ±20 mA
System Current Output Range

Dec. hex. ±20 mA
118.5149% 32767 7FFF 0.00 mA Overflow, off circuit and de-energized
32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA
75% 20736 5100 15 mA
0.003617% 1 1 723.4 nA
0% 0 0 0 mA Rated range
–1 FFFF –723.4 nA
–75 % –20736 AF00 –15 mA
–100 % –27648 9400 –20 mA
–117.593% –32512 8100 –23.52 mA
–32513 80FF Underflow, off circuit and de-energized
–118.519% –32768 8000 0.00 mA
Table 4-37 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 and 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA
System Current Output Range

Dec. hex. 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
118.5149% 32767 7FFF 0.00 mA 0.00 mA Overflow, off circuit
and de-energized
32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA
75% 20736 5100 15 mA 15 mA Rated range
0.003617% 1 1 723.4 nA 4mA+578.7 nA
0% 0 0 0 mA 4 mA
–1 FFFF Underrange
–25 % –6912 E500 0 mA
–6913 E4FF Not possible. The
output value is limi-
–117.593% –32512 8100 ted to 0 mA.
–32513 80FF Underflow, off circuit
and de-energized
–118.519% –32768 8000 0.00 mA 0.00 mA

A5E00105505-03 4-27
Analog Modules
4.4 Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of

Analog Input Channels
Two procedures
There are two procedures for setting the measuring method and the measuring
ranges of the analog input channels of the analog modules:
• With measuring range module and STEP 7
• By means of wiring the analog input channel and STEP 7
Which of these two methods is used for the individual analog modules depends on
the module and is described in detail in the specific module sections.
The procedure for setting the measuring method and measuring range of the
module in STEP 7 is described in Section 4.7.
The following section describes how you set the measuring method and the
measuring range by means of measuring range modules.
Setting the Measuring Method and the Measuring Ranges with Measuring Range
Modules
If the analog modules haves measuring range modules, they are supplied with the
measuring range modules plugged in.
If necessary, the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the
measuring method and the measuring range.
Note
Make sure that the measuring range modules are on the side of the analog input
module.
Before installing the analog input module, therefore, check whether the measuring
range modules have to be set to another measuring method and another
measuring range.
Possible settings for the measuring range modules

The measuring range modules can be set to the following positions: “A”, “B”, “C” and
“D”.
Which measuring range module positions you must select for the individual
measuring methods and measuring ranges is described in detail in the specific
module section.
The settings for the various types of measurement and measuring ranges are also
printed on the analog module.

4-28 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Replugging measuring range modules

If you want to replug a measuring range module, perform the following steps:
1. Use a screwdriver to ease the measuring range module out of the analog input
module.
Figure 4-1 Easing Measuring Range Modules from the Analog Input Module

A5E00105505-03 4-29
Analog Modules
2. Insert the measuring range module (correctly positioned (1)) into the analog
input module.
The measuring range selected is the one that points to marker point on
module (2).
Figure 4-2 Inserting Measuring Range Modules into the Analog Input Module
Perform the same steps for all other measuring range modules.
The next step is to install the module.
Caution
! If you have not set the measuring range modules correctly, the module may be
destroyed.
Make sure that the measuring range module is in the correct position before
connecting a sensor to the module.

4-30 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
4.5 Behavior of the Analog Modules
Introduction
In this section, you will find information on:
• How the analog input and output values depend on the operating states of the
CPU and the supply voltage of the analog module
• The behavior of the analog modules depending on where the analog values lie
within the value range
• The effect of the operational limit of the analog module on the analog input and
output value, as illustrated by an example
4.5.1 Effect of Supply Voltage and Operating Mode
Effect of supply voltage and operating mode on the modules

The input and output values of the analog modules depend on the operating state
of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.
Table 4-38 Dependencies of the Analog Input/Output Values on the Operating State of the CPU and the
Supply Voltage L+
CPU Operating Supply Vol- Input Value of the Output Value of the
State tage L+ at Analog Input Module Analog Output Module
Analog Mo-
dule
POWER RUN L+ present Measured value CPU values
ON
7FFFH until first conversion Until the first conversion...
following power-up or after • after power-up has been
parameter assignment of the completed, a signal of 0 mA
module has been completed or 0 V is output.
• after parameter
assignment has been
completed, the previous
value is output.
L+ missing Overflow value 0 mA/0 V
POWER STOP L+ present Measured value Substitute value/last value
ON (default values: 0 mA/0 V)
7FFFH until first conversion
following power-up or after
parameter assignment of the
module has been completed
L+ missing Overflow value 0 mA/0 V
POWER – L+ present – 0 mA/0 V
OFF
L+ missing – 0 mA/0 V

A5E00105505-03 4-31
Analog Modules
Behavior on failure of the supply voltage

Failure of the supply voltage of the analog modules is always indicated by the SF
LED on the module. Furthermore, this information is made available on the module
(entry in diagnostic buffer).
Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment (see
Section 4.7).
4.5.2 Effect of Range of Values of the Analog Values
Effect of errors on analog modules with diagnostics capability

Any errors that occur can lead to a diagnostics entry and a diagnostic interrupt with
analog modules with diagnostics capability and corresponding parameter
assignment. You will find the errors that might be involved in Section 4.16.
Effect of range of values on the analog input module

The behavior of the analog modules depends on where the input values lie within
the range of values.
Table 4-39 Behavior of the Analog Input Modules as a Function of the Position of the
Analog Value within the Range of Values
Measured Input Value SF LED Diagnostics Interrupt

Value In
Rated range Measured – – –
value
Overrange/und Measured – – –
errange value
Overflow 7FFFH Flashes1) Entered1) Diagnostic
interrupt1)
Underflow 8000H Flashes1) Entered1) Diagnostic
interrupt1)
Beyond the Measured – – Hardware
programmed value interrupt1)
limit
1) Only for modules with diagnostics capability and depending on parameter assignment

4-32 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Effect of range of values on the analog output module

The behavior of the analog modules depends on where the output values lie within
the value range.
Table 4-40 Behavior of the Analog Output Modules as a Function of the Position of the
Analog Value within the Range of Values
Process Value Output Value SF LED Diagnostics Interrupt

Lies Within
Rated range CPU value – – –
Overrange/und CPU value – – –
errange
Overflow 0 signal – – –
Underflow 0 signal – – –

A5E00105505-03 4-33
Analog Modules
4.5.3 Effect of Operational Limit and Basic Error Limit
Operational limit
The operational limit is the measuring error or output error of the analog module
over the entire temperature range authorized for the module, referred to the rated
range of the module.
Basic error limit

The basic error limit is the operational limit at 25 °C, referred to the rated range of
the module.
Note
The percentage details of operational and basic error limits in the technical
specifications of the module always refer to the highest possible input and output
value in the rated range of the module.
Example of determination of the output error of a module

An analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits is being used for voltage output.
The output range from “0 to 10 V” is being used. The module is operating at an
ambient temperature of 30 °C. Thus the operational limit applies. The technical
specifications of the module state:
• Operational limit for voltage output: "0.5 %
An output error, therefore, of "0.05 V ("0.5% of 10 V) over the whole rated range
of the module must be expected.
This means that with an actual voltage of, say, 1 V, a value in the range from 0.95
V to 1.05 V is output by the module. The relative error is "5 % in this case.
The figure below shows for the example how the relative error becomes
increasingly less the more the output value approximates to the end of the rated
range of 10 V.
"0.05 V "0.05 V "0.05 V

(¢ "5 %) (¢ "0.625 %) (¢ "0.5 %*)
Output Value
–1 V 0V 1V 8V 10 V
* Operational limit
Figure 4-3 Example of the Relative Error of an Analog Output Module

4-34 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
4.6 Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog

Modules
Conversion time of analog input channels

The conversion time consists of a basic conversion time and additional processing
times of the module for:
• Resistance test
• Wire-break monitoring
The basic conversion time depends directly on the conversion method of the
analog input channel (integrating method, instantaneous value conversion).
In the case of integrating conversion methods, the integration time has a direct
influence on the conversion time. The integration time depends on the interference
frequency suppression that you set in STEP 7 (refer to Section 4.7.1).
For the basic conversion times and additional processing times of the different
analog modules refer to the technical specifications of the module concerned,
starting at Section 4.18.
Scan time of analog input channels

Analog-to-digital conversion and the transfer of the digitized measured values to
the memory and/or to the bus backplane are performed sequentially – in other
words, the analog input channels are converted one after the other. The scan time
– in other words, the time elapsing until an analog input value is again converted, is
the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog input channels of the
analog input module.
The following figure illustrates the components of the scan time for an n-channel
analog module.
Conversion time,
channel 1
Conversion time,
channel 2
Scan time
Conversion time,
channel n
Figure 4-4 Scan time of an analog input or output module

A5E00105505-03 4-35
Analog Modules
Conversion and scan times for analog input channels in channel groups
When the analog input channels are grouped in channel groups, you must take into
account the conversion time channel group by channel group.
Example
Two analog input channels of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 12 bits are
combined to form a channel group. You must therefore grade the scan time in
steps of 2.
Setting smoothing of analog values

You can set the smoothing of the analog values in STEP 7 for some analog input
modules.
Using smoothing
Smoothing of analog values ensures a stable analog signal for further processing.
It makes sense to smooth the analog values with slow variations of measured
values – for example, with temperature measurements.
Smoothing principle
The measured values are smoothed by digital filtering. Smoothing is accomplished
by the module calculating average values from a defined number of converted
(digitized) analog values.
The user assigns parameters to smoothing at not more than four levels (none, low,
average, high). The level determines the number of analog signals used for
averaging.
The higher the smoothing level chosen, the more stable is the smoothed analog
value and the longer it takes until the smoothed analog signal is applied after a
step response (refer to the following example).

4-36 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Example
The following figure shows the number of module cycles for a step response after
which the smoothed analog value is approximately 100% applied, as a function of
the smoothing that has been set. The figure applies to every change of signal at
the analog input.
Signal variation Step response for any analog input signal

in percent
100
63
50
0 50 100 150 200

Smoothing: low:
Module cycles
average:
high:
Figure 4-5 Example of the Influence of Smoothing on the Step Response
Additional information on smoothing

Refer to the specific section on the analog input module (from Section 4.22) to
determine whether smoothing can be set for the specific module and for any
special features that have to be taken into account.
Conversion time of the analog output channels

The conversion time of the analog output channels comprises the transfer of the
digitized output values from the internal memory and the digital-to-analog
conversion.
Scan time of analog output channels

The analog output channels are converted sequentially – in other words, the
analog output channels are converted one after the other.
The scan time – in other words, the time elapsing until an analog output value is
again converted, is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog output
channels (refer to 4-4).

A5E00105505-03 4-37
Analog Modules
Tip
You should disable any analog channels that are not being used to reduce the scan
time in STEP 7.
Overview of the settling time and response time of the analog output modules
tA
tE
tZ
t1 t2 t3
tA = Response time
tZ = Scan time corresponds to n conversion time (n = activated channels)
tE = Settling time
t1 = New digitized output value is present
t2 = Output value transferred and converted
t3 = Specified output value reached
Figure 4-6 Settling and Response times of the Analog Output Channels
Settling time
The settling time (t2 to t3) – in other words, the time elapsing from application the
converted value until the specified value is reached at the analog output – is
load-dependent. A distinction is made between resistive, capacitive and inductive
loads.
For the settling times of the different analog output modules as a function of load
refer to the technical specifications of the module concerned, starting at Section
4.28.
Response time
The response time (t1 to t3) – in other words, the time elapsing from application of
the digital output values in the internal memory until the specified value is reached
at the analog output – in a worst case scenario is the sum of the scan time and the
settling time.
You have a worst case situation, if, shortly prior to the transfer of a new output
value, the analog channel has been converted and is not converted again until all
other channels are converted (scan time).

4-38 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
4.7 Analog module parameter assignment
Introduction
Analog modules can have different characteristics. You can set the characteristics
of the modules by means of parameter assignment.
Tools for parameter assignment

You assign parameters to analog modules with STEP 7. You must perform
parameter assignment in STOP mode of the CPU.
When you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the
programming device to the CPU. On a transition from STOP to ³ RUN mode, the
CPU then transfers the parameters to the individual analog modules.
In addition, if necessary you must place the measuring range modules of the
module in the necessary position (refer to Section 4.4).
Static and dynamic parameters

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters.
Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU, as described above.
You can similarly modify the dynamic parameters in the current user program by
means of SFCs. Note, however, that after a change from RUN ³ STOP, STOP ³
RUN of the CPU, the parameters set in STEP 7 apply again. You will find a
description of the parameter assignment of modules in the user program in
Appendix A.
Parameter Settable with CPU Operating

State
Static PG (STEP 7 HW CONFIG) STOP
Dynamic PG (STEP 7 HW CONFIG) STOP
SFC 55 in the user program RUN

A5E00105505-03 4-39
Analog Modules
4.7.1 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules
The analog input modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values
listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. Refer to the section on the
module concerned, starting from Section 4.22, for the subset “mastered” by the
specific analog modules.
STEP 7.
Table 4-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules
Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Enable
Yes/no
• Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no
No
• Hardware interrupt No
Dynamic Module
upon limit violation
• Hardware interrupt at Yes/no
end of cycle No
Trigger for hardware Constraint possible due to measuring
interrupt range Channel or
• Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 – Dynamic Channel
• Lower limit value –32512 to 32511 group
Diagnostics
• Group diagnostics Yes/no No Channel or
Static Channel
• With wire-break Yes/no No group
check

4-40 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Table 4-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules, continued

Settings meter
Type
Measurement
• Measuring method Deactivated U
U Voltage
4DMU Current
(4-wire transmitter)
2DMU Current
(2-wire transmitter)
R-4L Resistance
(four-conductor
connection)
R-3L Resistance
(three-conductor
connection)
RTD-4L Bulb resistor (linear,
four-conductor
connection)
RTD-3L Bulb resistor
(linear, three-conductor
connection) Channel or
TC-I1) Thermocouple Dynamic Channel
(internal comparison) group
TC-E1) Thermocouple
(external comparison)
TC-IL2) Thermocouple
(linear, internal
comparison)
TC-EL2) Thermocouple
(linear, external
comparison)
TC-L00C2) Thermocouple (linear,
reference temp. 0 °C)
TC-L50C2) Thermocouple (linear,
reference temp. 50°C)
• Measuring range For the settable measuring ranges of "10 V
the input channels, please refer to the
individual module description.
• Reaction with open Overflow; underflow Overflow
thermocouple
• Temperature unit3) Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit; Degrees
Dynamic Module
degrees Kelvin Celsius
• Module filtering mode 8 channels hardware filter 8
8 channels software filter channels,
Dynamic Module
4 channels hardware filter hardware
filter

A5E00105505-03 4-41
Analog Modules
Table 4-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules, continued

Settings meter
Type
• Temperature Platinum (Pt) 0.00385 Dynamic Channel or
coefficient for 0.00385 / °C Channel
temperature 0.003916 / °C group
measurement with 0.003902 / °C
bulb resistor (RTD) 0.003920 / °C
0.003851 / °C
Nickel (Ni)
0.00618 / °C
0.00672 / °C
Copper (Cu)
0.00427 / °C
• Interference 400/60/50 Hz; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 50 Hz Dynamic Channel or
frequency 10 Hz Channel
suppression group
• Smoothing None None Dynamic Channel or
Low Channel
Average group
High
1) The module supplies a decimal value of the measured thermal voltage to the CPU –
for example, 27648 at 80 mV (refer to Table 4-11)
2) The module supplies a temperature value to the CPU – for example, 120°C (refer to Table 4-17)
3) 1 digit =0.1 °C; 1 digit =0.1 °F

4-42 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
4.7.2 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules
The analog output modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values
listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. Refer to the section on the
module concerned, starting from Section 4.28, for the subset “mastered” by the
specific analog modules.
STEP 7.
Table 4-42 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

Settings meter Type
Enable
• Diagnostic Yes/no No Dynamic Module
interrupt
Diagnostics
• Group diagnostics Yes/no No Static Channel
Output
• Output type Deactivated U
Voltage
Current Dynamic Channel
• Output range For the settable measuring ranges of the "10 V
output channels, please refer to the
individual module description.
Response with ASS Outputs de-energized ASS
CPU-STOP LWH Hold last value Dynamic Channel
EWS Apply substitute value

A5E00105505-03 4-43
Analog Modules
4.7.3 Parameters of the analog input/output modules
The analog input/output modules make available the parameters in the following
table. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment
in STEP 7.
Table 4-43 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules

Settings meter
Type
Input
Measurement
• Measuring Deactivated RTD-4L
method U Voltage
R-4L Resistance
(four-conductor connection)
Dynamic Channel
RTD-4L Bulb resistor (linear,
four-conductor connection)
• Measuring Range 0 to 10 V Pt 100
10000 climate
Pt 100 climate
• Integration time 20 ms; 16.6 ms 20 ms
Output
• Output type Deactivated U
Voltage Dynamic Channel
• Output range 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V

4-44 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
4.8 Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs
Introduction
You can connect different sensors to the analog input modules depending on the
measuring method; voltage and current sensors, and resistors.
This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the
connection options for sensors described in the sections that follow.
Cables for analog signals

To reduce electrical interference, you should use twisted-pair shielded cables for
the analog signals. The shield of the analog signal cables should be grounded at
both cable ends.
If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding
current can flow over the shield, which leads to an interference of the analog
signals. In such a case, you should ground the shield at one end of the cable only.
Isolated analog input modules

In the case of isolated analog input modules, there is no electrical connection
between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of
the CPU.
You must use isolated analog input modules if a potential difference UISO can
occur between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the
M terminal of the CPU. An equipotential bonding conductor between the MANA
terminal and the M terminal of the CPU ensures that UISO does not exceed the
permitted value.
Non-isolated analog input modules

In the case of the non-isolated analog input modules, you must establish a
connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M
terminal of the CPU or IM 153. To do so, connect the MANA terminal with the M
terminal of the CPU or IM 153. A potential difference between MANA and the M
terminal of the CPU or IM 153 can result in corruption of the analog signal.
Limited potential difference UCM

Only a limited potential difference UCM (common mode voltage) may occur
between the measuring lines M– of the input channels and the reference point of
the measuring circuit MANA. In order to prevent the permissible value from being
exceeded, you must take different actions, described below, depending on the
potential connection of the sensors.

A5E00105505-03 4-45
Analog Modules
Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following
meanings:
M +: Measuring lead (positive)
M–: Measuring lead (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M: Ground terminal
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
UCM: Potential difference between inputs and reference potential of
the MANA measuring circuit
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and M terminal of CPU
I +: Measuring lead for current input
U +: Measuring lead for voltage input
Connecting isolated measuring sensors

Isolated sensors are not connected with the local ground potential (local ground).
They can be operated free of potential.
With isolated sensors, potential differences might arise between the different
sensors. These potential differences can arise as a result of interference or the
local distribution of the sensors.
To prevent the permissible value for UCM being exceeded when used in
environments with a high level of EMC interference, we advise you to connect M–
with MANA.

4-46 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
You can operate the CPU in Grounded mode (refer to the figure below) or
Ungrounded mode.
L+
M
M+
M–
Isolated
Logic
M+ ADC
sensors Backplane
M–
bus
Recommended
connection MANA
CPU
UISO
Minternal
L+
M
Ground bus
Figure 4-7 Connecting Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI
L+
M
M+
Isolated M–
Logic
sensors ADC
M+
M– Backplane
bus
Recommended
connection MANA
CPU
Minternal
L+
M
Ground bus
Figure 4-8 Connecting Isolated Sensors to a Non-Isolated AI
Note
Do not connect M– to MANA when connecting 2-wire transmitters for current
measurement and resistance-type sensors. This also applies to inputs which are
not used.

A5E00105505-03 4-47
Analog Modules
Non-isolated sensors
The non-isolated sensors are connected with the local ground potential (local
ground). When using non-isolated sensors, you must connect MANA to the local
ground.
Connecting non-isolated sensors

Caused by local conditions or interferences, potential differences UCM (static or
dynamic) can occur between the locally distributed individual measuring points. If
the potential difference UCM exceeds the permissible value, you must provide
equipotential bonding conductors between the measuring points.
When connecting non-isolated sensors to optically isolated modules, you can
operate the CPU in Grounded mode (refer to the figure below) or Ungrounded
mode.
L+
M
M+
Non-isolat M–
ed sensors
Logic
M+ ADC
M– Backplane bus
UCM
MANA
Equipotential CPU
bonding UISO
conductor
Minterna
L+
l
M
Ground bus
Figure 4-9 Connecting Non-Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI

4-48 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
When connecting non-isolated sensors to non-isolated modules, you can operate

the CPU only in Grounded mode.
L+
M
M+
Non-isolated M–
sensors
Logic
M+ ADC
M– Backplane
bus
UCM MANA
CPU
Equipotential Minternal
bonding L+
M
conductor
Ground bus
Figure 4-10 Connecting non-isolated sensors to a non-isolated AI
Note
You must not use non-isolated two-wire transmitters and non-isolated
resistance-type sensors with a non-isolated AI!

A5E00105505-03 4-49
Analog Modules
4.9 Connecting Voltage Sensors
Note
The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the
analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with
its generally valid information for connecting sensors.
Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figure below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figure below have the following
meanings:
M: Ground terminal
U +: Measuring lead for voltage input
Connection of voltage sensors
L+
M
+ M+
U M–
–
Logic
+ M+ ADC
U M– Backplane
– bus
MANA
Figure 4-11 Connecting Voltage Sensors to an Isolated AI

4-50 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
4.10 Connecting Current Sensors
Note

meanings:
M: Ground terminal
I +: Measuring lead for current input
Supply voltage of the sensors

The 2-wire transmitter receives its short-circuit-proof power supply via the
terminals of the analog input module.
This transmitter then converts the measured variable into a current. Two-wire
transmitters must be isolated sensors.
Four-wire transmitters have separate power supplies.

A5E00105505-03 4-51
Analog Modules
Connecting 2-wire transmitters
L+
Sensor,
for example, M
pressure gauge
Two-wire
P transmitter + M+
– M–
Logic
M+ ADC
Two-wire + Backplane
M–
P transmitter – bus
MANA
Figure 4-12 Connecting two-wire transmitters to an isolated AI
When the supply voltage L+ is fed from the module, you must assign parameters
to the two-wire transmitter as a four-wire transmitter in STEP 7.
Sensor,
for example, L+
pressure gauge M
2-wire +
P trans M+
mitter –
Logic
ADC
M– Backplane
bus
MANA
Figure 4-13 Connecting two-wire transmitters supplied from L+ to an

isolated AI
Connecting four-wire transmitters
L+
Sensor, M
for example,
pressure gauge
M+
+
P M–
–
transmitter
Four-wire
Logic
M+ ADC
+
P M– Backplane
–
bus
MANA
L+ M
Figure 4-14 Connecting four-wire transmitters to an isolated AI

4-52 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
4.11 Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors
Note

meanings:
IC+: Constant-current lead (positive)
IC–: Constant-current lead (negative)
M+: Measuring lead (positive)
M: Ground terminal
L+: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
S–: Detector lead (negative)
Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors

The resistance thermometers/resistors are wired in a four-conductor,
three-conductor or two-conductor connection.
With four-conductor and three-conductor connections, the module supplies a
constant current via terminals IC+ and IC– so that the potential drop occurring on
the measuring cables is compensated. It is important that the connected constant
current cables are directly connected to the resistance thermometer/resistor.
Measurements with four-conductor or three-conductor connections supply a more
precise measuring result due to compensation than measurements with a
two-conductor connection.

A5E00105505-03 4-53
Analog Modules
Four-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

The voltage generated at the resistance thermometer is measured via the M+ and
M– terminals. When you connect, watch out for the polarity of the connected cable
(connect IC+ and M+ as well as IC– and M– to the resistance thermometer).
When connecting, make sure that the connected cables IC+ and M+ and the
cables IC– and M– are connected directly to the resistance thermometer.
L+
M
M+
M–
Logic
ADC
IC+ Backplane
IC IC– bus
MANA
Figure 4-15 Four-conductor connection of resistance thermometers to an isolated AI
Three-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

With a three-conductor connection on modules with four terminals, you must
normally insert a jumper between M– and IC– (refer to Figure 4-16). Take note of
the exception for the SM 331; AI 8 RTD (refer to Figure 4-18).
When connecting, make sure that the connected cables IC+ and M+ are
connected directly to the resistance thermometer.
L+
M
M+
M–
Logic
ADC
IC+ Backplane
IC IC– bus
MANA
Figure 4-16 Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an Isolated AI

4-54 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Two-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

With a two-conductor connection, you must insert jumpers on the module between
M+ and IC+ and between M– and IC– .
L+
M
M+
M–
Logic
ADC
IC+ Backplane
IC– bus
MANA
Figure 4-17 Two-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an Isolated AI
Three-conductor connection to the SM 331; AI 8 RTD

With a three-conductor connection to the SM 331; AI 8 RTD you must insert a
jumper between M+ and IC+ (refer to figure4-18).
When connecting, make sure that the connected cables IC– and M– are connected
directly to the resistance thermometer.
L+
M
M+
M–
Logic
ADC
IC+ Backplane
IC IC– bus
MANA
Figure 4-18 Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to the SM 331;

AI 8 x RTD
Caution
! Due to incorrect wiring of the three-conductor connection, unforeseen operation of
the module and dangerous conditions can result in the system.

A5E00105505-03 4-55
Analog Modules
4.11.1 Connecting resistance thermometers to the SM 331;

AI 8 x 13 bits
Two-conductor connection
With a two-conductor connection, you must insert jumpers on the module between
M– and S–.
S–
Backplane
Logic
M+ ADC bus
M–
Figure 4-19 Two-conductor connection of resistance thermometers to the SM 331;

AI 8x 13 bits
Three-conductor connection
S–
Backplane
Logic
M+ ADC
bus
M–
Figure 4-20 Three-conductor connection of resistance thermometers to the SM 331;

AI 8 x 13 bits

4-56 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Four-conductor connection
With a four-conductor connection, you must not connect the fourth conductor
(the conductor is not used at all, see Figure 4-21).
4th conductor S–
not connected Backplane
Logic
M+ ADC
bus
M–
Figure 4-21 Four-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to the SM 331;

AI 8 x 13 bits

A5E00105505-03 4-57
Analog Modules
4.12 Connecting Thermocouples
Design of thermocouples
A thermocouple consists of a pair of sensors and the necessary installation and
connecting parts. The thermocouple consists of two wires of dissimilar metals or
metal alloys soldered or welded together at the ends.
There are different types of thermocouple, depending on the composition of the
material used – for example, K, J, N thermocouples. The measuring principle of all
thermocouples is the same, irrespective of their type.
Measuring junction
Thermocouple with positive or negative limbs
Connecting point
Compensating leads
Reference junction
Leads
Point at which thermo-e. m. f. is measured
°C
Figure 4-22 Design of Thermocouples
Principle of Operation of Thermocouples

If the measuring point is subjected to a temperature different from that of the free
ends of the thermocouple (point of connection), a voltage, the thermo emf, occurs
at the free ends. The magnitude of the thermo-e.m.f. generated depends on the
difference between the temperature at the measuring junction and the temperature
at the free ends, as well as on the material combination used for the thermocouple.
Since a thermocouple always measures a temperature difference, the free ends
must be kept at a known temperature at a reference junction in order to determine
the temperature of the measuring junction.
The thermocouples can be extended from their point of connection to the reference
junction by means of compensating wires. These compensating wires consist of
the same material as the thermocouple wires. The supply leads are copper wire.
Note: Make sure these wires are connected with the correct polarity, otherwise
there will be considerable measuring errors.

4-58 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Compensation of the reference junction temperature

You can compensate for the effects of temperature fluctuations at the reference
junction by means of compensating leads.
There are several options for you to choose from for acquiring the reference
junction temperature in order to obtain an absolute temperature value from the
difference in temperature between the reference junction and measuring point.
You can use internal or external compensation, depending on where you want the
reference junction to be.
Table 4-44 Options for Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature
Option Explanation
No compensation If you want to acquire only the difference in temperature
between the measuring point and the reference junction.
Internal compensation If you employ internal compensation, the internal
(refer to Figure 4-23 for connection) temperature (thermocouple internal comparison) of the
module is used for comparison purposes.
External compensation with compensating You have already acquired and compensated the
box in the leads of an individual reference junction temperature (thermocouple external
thermocouple (refer to Figures 4-24 and comparison) using a compensating box, which you have
4-25 for its connection) looped into an individual thermocouple.
No further processing is necessary owing to the module.
Only for SM 331; AI 8 x TC: You can acquire the reference temperature by means of a
External compensation with resistance resistance thermometer (platinum or nickel) and have it
thermometer for acquisition of the reference calculated by the module for any thermocouple.
junction temperature
(refer to Figure 4-26 and 4-27for
connection)
Theory of operation of internal compensation

With internal compensation, you can establish the reference point across the
terminals of the analog input modules. In this case, you must run the
compensating lines right up to the analog module. The internal temperature sensor
acquires the temperature of the module and supplies a compensation voltage.
Note that internal compensation is not as accurate as external compensation.
Theory of operation of external compensation with compensating box

If you employ external compensation, the temperature of the reference junction of
the thermocouples is taken into account via a compensating box, for example.
The compensating box contains a bridge circuit calibrated for a definite reference
junction temperature. The reference junction is formed by the connections for the
ends of the thermocouple’s compensating leads.
If the actual temperature deviates from the compensating temperature, the
temperature-sensitive bridge resistance changes. This results in a positive or
negative compensating voltage, which is added to the thermo-e.m.f.

A5E00105505-03 4-59
Analog Modules

meanings:
IC+: Positive connection of constant current output
IC-: Negative connection of constant current output
COMP+: Compensating terminal (positive)
COMP –: Compensating terminal (negative)
M: Ground terminal
P5V: Module logic power supply
KV +/KV –: Connections to the shunt comparison
Note

4-60 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Connection of thermocouples with internal compensation

Connect the thermocouples to the inputs of the module, either directly or by means
of compensating lines. Each channel group can use a thermocouple type
supported by the analog module independently of the other channel groups.
L+
Thermocouple M
M+
K0 M–
Logic
. ADC
. Backplane
. bus
M+
K7 M–
Compensating leads
(same material as COMP+
thermocouple) COMP–/MANA
Figure 4-23 Connection of Thermocouples with Internal Compensation to an

Isolated AI
Connecting the compensating box

Connect the compensating box to the COMP terminals of the module, locating the
compensating box at the reference junction of the thermocouples. The
compensating box must have an isolated supply. The power supply must have
adequate filtering, for example by means of a grounded shielding winding.
The terminals for connecting the thermocouple to the compensating box are not
required and must therefore be shorted (refer to Figure 4-25 for an example).
The following constraints apply:
• The parameters of a channel group are general valid for all channels of that
group (for example, input voltage, integrating time etc.)
• External compensation with connection of the compensating box to the COMP
terminals of the module can be performed only for one thermocouple type. In
other words, all channels operating with external compensation must use the
same type.

A5E00105505-03 4-61
Analog Modules
Connecting thermocouples with compensating box

If all thermocouples connected to the inputs of the module have the same
comparison point, you compensate as follows:
Copper L+
wire M
M+
M–
Thermo-
Logic
couples M+ ADC
M– Backplane
bus
Compensating L+ M
leads (same
material as Comp. COMP+
thermocouple) Box COMP–/MANA
Ref. junction
Figure 4-24 Connection of Thermocouples with Compensation Box to an Isolated AI
Note
Use compensating boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0C for
analog input modules.
Recommended compensating box

We recommend you to use a comparison point (with integrated power supply unit)
from Siemens as a compensating box. You will find the necessary ordering data in
the table below.

4-62 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Table 4-45 Ordering Data of the Comparison Point
Recommended Compensating Box Order number

Reference junction with integrated power supply M72166-
unit, for rail mounting
Auxiliary power 220 VAC B1

110 VAC B2
24 VAC B3
24 VDC B4
Connection
to thermocouple Fe-CuNi Type L 1
Fe/Cu Ni Type J 2
Ni Cr/Ni Type K 3
Pt 10% Rh/Pt Type S 4
Pt 13% Rh/Pt Type R 5
Cu/Cu Ni Type U 6
Cu/Cu Ni Type T 7
Reference temperature 0 C 00
Connecting to the comparison point (Order No. M72166-xxx00)

If all thermocouples connected to the inputs of the module have the same
comparison point, you compensate as follows:
Compensating leads Copper L+

(same material as wire M
thermocouple)
M+
M–
Thermoco
Logic
uples M+ ADC
M– Backplane
bus
Auxiliary power
+ –
3 1 COMP+
COMP–/MANA
The terminals for the SIEMENS
compensating wire M72166-
must be short-
circuited!
12 11
9 8
+ –
Output (Cu wires)
Figure 4-25 Connection of Thermocouples with Comparison Point (Order No. M72166-xxx00) to an
Isolated AI

A5E00105505-03 4-63
Analog Modules
Connecting thermocouples with temperature compensation to the

SM 331; AI 8 x TC
All 8 inputs are available as measurement channels when the thermocouples are
connected via reference junctions that are controlled at 0 °C or 50 °C.
L+
Copper M
wire
M+
K0 M-
.
Reference junction .
Logic
controlled at ADUs Backplane
.
0C or 50C bus
M+
K6 M-
M+
K7 M-
Figure 4-26 Connecting thermocouples via a reference junction to the

SM 331; AI 8 x TC

4-64 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Connecting thermocouples with resistance thermometer to the

SM 331; AI 8 x TC
With this type of compensation, the reference junction terminal temperature is
determined by a bulb resistor sensor with a temperature range of -25 °C to 85 °C.
Copper L+
wire M
KV+
K0 KV–
Thermo- P5V
couples ADC
KV+
Logic
K7 KV–
Backplane
KV+ bus
Compensating KV–
leads (same Pt 100
material as IC+ M internal
thermocouple) IC–
Ref. junction
Figure 4-27 Connecting thermocouples with external compensation via resistance thermometers to the
SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00105505-03 4-65
Analog Modules
4.13 Connecting Loads/Actuators to analogo output
Introduction
You can use the analog output modules to supply loads and actuators with current
and voltage.
This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the
connection options for loads and actuators described in the sections that follow.
Cables for analog signals

For the analog signals, you should use shielded and twisted pair cables. The cables
QV and S+ and M and S–, respectively, are to be twisted together. This reduces the
interference. Ground the screen of the analog cables at both ends of the cables.
If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding
current, which can flow over the shield, can cause interference of the analog
signals. In such a case, you should ground the shield at one end of the cable only.
Isolated Analog Output Modules

With the isolated analog output modules there is no electrical connection between
the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of the CPU.
You must use isolated analog output modules if a potential difference UISO can
occur between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the
M terminal of the CPU. By means of a equipotential bonding conductor between
the MANA terminal and the M terminal of the CPU, make sure that UISO does not
exceed the permitted value.
Non-Isolated Analog Output Modules

With the non-isolated analog output modules, you must establish a connection
between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of
the CPU. Therefore, connect the MANA terminal with the M terminal of the CPU. A
potential difference between MANA and the M terminal of the CPU can lead to a
corruption of the analog signal.

4-66 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
4.14 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Voltage Outputs
Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output

Connecting loads to a voltage output is possible both in a four-conductor and a
two-conductor connection. However, not all analog output modules allow both
types of connection.
Note
analog output module, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
its generally valid information for connecting loads and actuators.

meanings:
QV: Analog output voltage
S +: Detector lead (positive)
S–: Detector lead (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of analog circuit
RL: Load impedance
M: Ground terminal
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and M terminal of CPU.

A5E00105505-03 4-67
Analog Modules
Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated Module over a

Four-Conductor Connection
A high accuracy at the load can be achieved through the four-conductor
connection. You must therefore connect the sensor leads (S– and S+) directly to
the load. The voltage is thus measured and corrected directly at the load.
Interferences or a voltage drop can result in a potential difference between the
sensor lead S– and the reference circuit of the analog circuit MANA. This potential
difference must not exceed the permissible value. If the permissible potential
difference is exceeded, the accuracy of the analog signal is impaired.
L+
M
QV
Logic
DAC S+
Backplane
bus RL
S–
MANA
CPU
UISO
Minternal
L+
M
Ground bus
Figure 4-28 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated AO over a Four-Conductor Connection

4-68 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Connecting loads to a voltage output of a non-isolated module via a

two-conductor connection
With a two-conductor connection, the S+ and S– terminals can be left open.
However, you will not achieve the accuracy of a four-conductor connection.
Connect the load to terminals QV and the reference point of the measuring circuit,
MANA.
L+
M
QV
Logic
DAC
Backplane
bus RL
MANA
CPU
Minternal
L+
M
Ground bus
Figure 4-29 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of a Non-Isolated AO over a Two-Conductor

Connection

A5E00105505-03 4-69
Analog Modules
4.15 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Current Outputs
Note
analog output module, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
its generally valid information for connecting loads and actuators.

meanings:
QI: Analog output current
MANA: Reference potential of analog circuit
RL: Load impedance
M: Ground terminal
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and M terminal of CPU.
Connecting Loads to a Current Output

You must connect loads to QI and the reference point of the analog circuit MANA of
a current output.
L+
M
QI
Logic
DAC
Backplane
bus RL
MANA
CPU
UISO
Minternal
L+
M
Ground bus
Figure 4-30 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of an Isolated AO

4-70 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
L+
M
QI
Logic
DAC
Backplane
bus RL
CPU
MANA
Minternal
L+
M
Ground bus
Figure 4-31 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of a Non-Isolated AO
4.16 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules
Programmable and Non-Programmable Diagnostic Messages

In diagnostics, we make a distinction between programmable and
non-programmable diagnostic messages.
You obtain programmable diagnostic messages only if you have enabled
diagnostics by parameter assignment. You perform parameter assignment in the
“Diagnostics” parameter field in STEP 7 (refer to Section 4.7).
Non-programmable diagnostic messages are always made available by the analog
module irrespective of diagnostics being enabled.

• The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnosis of the analog module and
• The error LED on the analog module lights.
• If you have programmed “Enable Diagnostic Interrupt” with STEP 7, a
diagnostic interrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called (refer to Section 4.17).

A5E00105505-03 4-71
Analog Modules

Diagnostic message in the measured value of analog input modules

Every analog input module supplies the measured value 7FFFH irrespective of the
parameter assignment when an error is detected. This measured value means
either Overflow, Malfunction or a channel is disabled.
Diagnostic message by means of SF LED

Every analog module indicates errors for you by means of your SF LED (group
error LED). The SF LED lights as soon as a diagnostic message is triggered by the
analog module. It goes out when all errors have been rectified.
Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the analog input
modules.
Table 4-46 Diagnostic Messages of the Analog Input Modules
Diagnostics Message LED Diagnostics Parameters can

Effective for be assigned
Configuring/parameter assignment SF
Channel Yes
error
Common-mode error SF Channel Yes
Underflow SF Channel Yes
Overflow SF Channel Yes

4-72 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Diagnostic messages of the analog output modules

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the analog
output modules.
Table 4-47 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules
Diagnostics Message LED Diagnostics Ef- Parameters can

fective for be assigned
Configuring/parameter assignment SF
Channel Yes
error
Short-circuit to M SF Channel Yes
Note
messages is that you have assigned parameters to the analog module accordingly
in STEP 7.
Causes of errors and remedial measures for analog input modules
Table 4-48 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of Errors and
Remedial Measures

Message
External load voltage Load voltage L+ of module missing Feed supply L+
missing
Configuring/parameter Illegal parameters transferred to Check measuring range module
assignment error module
Reassign module parameter
Common-mode error Potential difference UCM between Connect M– with MANA
the inputs (M–) and reference
potential of measuring circuit (MANA)
too high
Wire-break Resistance too high in the sensor Use different type of sensor or
connection connection, e.g. use conductors with a
larger cross-sectional core area
Open circuit between module and Close circuit
sensor
Channel not connected (open) Disable channel group (“measuring
procedure” parameter
Connect channel

A5E00105505-03 4-73
Analog Modules
Table 4-48 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of Errors and
Remedial Measures

Message
Underflow Input value underflows underrange,
error may be caused:
Wrong measuring range selected
Configure other measuring range
With the measuring ranges 4 to Check terminals
20 mA and 1 to 5 V, if necessary by
polarity reversal of sensor
connection
Overflow Input value overflows overrange Configure other measuring range
Causes of errors and remedial measures for analog output modules
Table 4-49 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules, Causes of Errors and
Remedial Measures

Message
External load voltage Load voltage L+ of module Feed supply L+
missing missing
Configuring/parameter Illegal parameters transferred to Reassign module parameter
assignment error module
Short-circuit after M Overload of output Eliminate overload

Short-circuit of output QV after Eliminate short circuit
MANA
Wire-break Actuator resistance too high Use different type of actuator or connection,
e.g. use conductors with a larger
cross-sectional core area
Open circuit between module Close circuit
and actuator
Channel not used (open) Disable channel group (”output type”
parameter)

4-74 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
4.17 Interrupts of the Analog Modules
Introduction
In this Section, the interrupt behavior of the analog modules is described. The
following interrupts exist:
• Diagnostic interrupt
• Hardware interrupt
Note that not all analog modules have interrupt capability or they are only capable
of a subset of the interrupts described here Refer to the technical specifications of
the modules, starting at Section 4.18, to determine which analog modules have
interrupt capability.
Enabling interrupts
STEP 7 (refer to Section 4.7).
Hardware interrupt with trigger “Upper or lower limit exceeded”

Define a working range by setting parameters for an upper and lower limit value. If
the process signal (for example, the temperature) leaves this working range, the
module triggers a hardware interrupt, provided the interrupt is enabled.
The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the hardware
In the user program of OB 40, you can set how the programmable logic controller
is required to react to a limit value being surpassed or not being reached.
When OB 40 is exited, the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

A5E00105505-03 4-75
Analog Modules
Note
Note that a hardware interrupt is not triggered if you have set the upper limit above
the overrange or the lower limit below the underrange.
Structure of the start information tag OB40_POINT_ADDR of OB 40

The limit values exceeded by the different channels are entered in the start
information of OB 40 in the tag OB40_POINT_ADDR. The following figure shows
the assignment to the bits of local data double word 8.
LB 8 LB 9 LB 11
.1 .0
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 17 16 1 0 Bit no.
1 1 1 1 LD 8
Value falls below lower limit in channel 0

Value falls below lower limit in channel 1
Value exceeds upper limit in channel 0
Value exceeds upper limit in channel 1
Figure 4-32 Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Has Triggered the Hardware Interrupt at the
Limit Value
Hardware interrupt upon trigger “Reached end of scan cycle”

By parameterizing the hardware interrupt a the end of the scan cycle, you have the
option of synchronizing a process with the scan cycle of the analog input module.
A scan cycle includes the conversion of the measured values of all enabled
channels of the analog input module. The module processes the channels one
after the other. After all the measured values have been converted, the module of
the CPU reports by means of an interrupt that there are new measured values on
all channels.
You can use the interrupt to load the currently converted analog values.

4-76 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules

(6ES7331-7NF00-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7331-7NF00-0AB0
Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8x 16 bits has the following characteristic
features:
• 8 inputs in 4 channel groups
• Measured-value resolution 15 bits + sign (independent of integration time)
• Measurement mode selectable per channel group:
– Voltage
– Current
• Arbitrary measuring range and filter/update rate selection per channel group
• Two channels with limit monitoring
• Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded
• Isolated against the backplane bus interface
• Permissible common mode voltage between channels of 50 VDC maximum

A5E00105505-03 4-77
Analog Modules
Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits
1 21
2 22
A 250 OHM + CHO

3 23 –
24
4
250 OHM
V
+ CH1
5 25 –
SF
ADC
6 26
250 OHM
V
+ CH2
7 27 –
Isolation 28
8
250 OHM Back- V
+ CH3
9 29 –
plane
10
bus 30
interface
11 module 31
12 SF 32
250 OHM
V
+ CH4
13 33 –
34
14
250 OHM
V
+ CH5
15 35 –
ADC 36
16
250 OHM
V
+ CH6
17 37 –
38
18
250 OHM V + CH7
19 39 –
20 40
Figure 4-33 Module view and block diagram of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits
Please note that in Figure 4-33, channel 0 is configured for current measurement
and channel 7 for voltage measurement.

4-78 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Wiring of the module for measuring current

Current measurements are made by paralleling a channel’s voltage input terminals
with its respective current sense resistor. This is accomplished by jumpering the
channels input terminals to the adjacent terminals on the field connector.
Example: To configure channel 0 for current mode, you must jumper terminal 22 to
2 and terminal 23 to 3.
The channel being configured for current measurements must be paired with the
sense resistor connected to the channel’s adjacent terminals in order to achieve
the specified accuracy.
Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits
Dimensions and Weight Analog value generation
Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Measuring principle Integrating

(in millimeters)
Integration time/conversion
Weight Approx. 272 g time/ resolution (per channel)
Data for Specific Module • Parameters can be Yes

assigned
Supports clocked operation No
Number of inputs 8
• Integration time in 10 16.7 20 100
milliseconds
Length of cable
• Basic conversion time 35 55 65 305
per channel group
Voltages, Currents, Potentials when more than one
Isolation
channel group is
active
backplane bus • Channel conversion 10 16.7 20 100
time per channel
Permitted potential difference group if only channel
• Between the inputs 50 VDC, 35 VAC group 0 or 1 is
(ECM) enabled
• Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC Channel integration time 10 16.7 20 100
Minternal (UISO) (1/f1)
in ms
• Resolution including 15 bits + sign
Current consumption sign
• Suppression of 100 60 50 10
Power dissipation of the typically 0.6 W interference voltage for
module interference frequency f1
in Hertz
Basic execution time of the 140 220 260 1220

module, in ms (all channels
enabled)

A5E00105505-03 4-79
Analog Modules
Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Noise suppression for f = n (f1 ± 1%), Interrupts

(f1 = interference frequency); n= 1, 2, ... • Hardware interrupt when Programmable
limit has been exceeded channels 0 and 2
• Common-mode noise > 100 dB
(Ucm < 50 V) • Diagnostic interrupt Programmable
• Series-mode > 90 dB Diagnostic functions Programmable

interference (peak • Group error display Red LED (SF)
value of interference • Diagnostics information Possible
< rated value of input read-out
range)
Crosstalk between the inputs > 100 dB
Input range (rated values)/Input resistance
Operational limit (over entire UCM = 0 / UCM = ±50 V
• Voltage ±5V / 2MΩ
temperature range, referred
to input range) 1 to 5 V / 2MΩ
± 10 V / 2MΩ
• Voltage input ±0.1% / ± 0.7%
• Current 0 to 20 mA; / 250 Ω
• Current input ±0.3% / ± 0.9%
± 20 mA / 250 Ω
Basic error (operational limit at 25° C referred to input 4 to 20 mA: / 250 Ω
range)
Maximum input voltage for max. 50 V continuous
• Voltage input ±0.05% voltage input (destruction
limit)
• Current input ±0.05%
Maximum input current for max. 32 mA
Temperature error (with ±0.005%/K current input (destruction
reference to the input range) limit)
Linearity error (with reference ±0.03% Connection of the sensor
to the input range)
• For measuring voltage Possible
Repeat accuracy (in the ±0.025%
steady state at 25°C, referred • For measuring current
to the input range)
As two-wire transmitter Possible with separate
supply for the transmitter
As four-wire transmitter Possible
• Load of the two-wire max. 820 Ω

transmitter

4-80 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
4.18.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits
You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits STEP 7.
Parameter
analog modules in Section 4.7.
An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are
shown in the table below.
Table 4-50 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

Settings meter
Type
Enable

interrupt range.
• Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 – Dynamic
Channel
• Lower limit value –32512 to 32511
Diagnostics
• Group diagnostics Yes/no No
Channel
Static
group
• With wire-break Yes/no No
check
Measurement
• Measuring Method Deactivated U
U Voltage
4DMU Current (4-wire transmitter)
Channel
• Measuring Range Refer to Section 4.18.2 for the "10 V Dynamic
group
measuring ranges of the input
channels that you can set.
• Interference 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz 50 Hz
Suppression

A5E00105505-03 4-81
Analog Modules
Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits are arranged in four groups of two. You
can only ever assign parameters to one channel group.
The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in
each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the
user program with an SFC.
Table 4-51 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits to Channel Groups
Channels ... ... form one Channel Group each

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7
High Speed Update Mode

In the high speed update mode, updates for the two channels in the group occur
three times faster than with multiple channel groups enabled.
Example: If channels 0 and 1 are enabled with 2.5 ms filtering, data updates for
both channels will be available to the PLC every 10 msec. (For other filter settings,
the filter setting equals the update rate.)
The high speed update mode is only available when both channels are enabled on
channel group 0 or 1, in other words, the “measuring method” parameter is set.
However, only channel group 0 or only channel 1 (in other words, not both
together) must be enabled.
Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts

You can set hardware interrupts in STEP 7 for the channel groups 0 and 1. Note,
however, that a hardware interrupt is set only for the first channel in the channel
group in each case – in other words, for channel 0 or channel 2
Diagnostics
You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the “group diagnosis”
parameter in Table 4-46, on page 4-72.

4-82 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules

AI 8 x 16 bits
Measuring Methods
You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels:
• Voltage measurement
• Current measurement
You perform the setting with the “measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.
Unused Channels
Set the “measuring method” parameter for unused channels to “disabled”. In this
way you shorten the scan time of the module.
Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group
generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these
inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels.
• Measuring range 1 to 5 V: Connect the unused input in parallel with a used
input of the same channel group.
• Current measurement 4 to 20 mA: Connect the unused input in series with an
input of the same channel group. Ensure that a current sense resistor is
connected for each active and unused channel.
• Other ranges: Short the positive to the negative input of the channel.
Measuring ranges
The measuring ranges are set with the “measuring range” parameter in STEP 7.
Table 4-52 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits
Method Selected Measuring Range Description

U: Voltage ±5 V You will find the digitized analog values in
1 to 5 V Section 4.3.1 in the voltage measuring
±10 V range
4DMU: Current (4-wire from 0 to 20 mA You will find the digitized analog values in
transmitter) ±20 mA Section 4.3.1 in the current measuring
from 4 to 20 mA range

A5E00105505-03 4-83
Analog Modules
Default Settings
The default settings of the module are “voltage” for the measuring method “ and
" 10 V” for the measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring
method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits in
STEP 7.
Measuring errors with common-mode voltages

The SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits can make measurements in the presence of AC or DC
common mode voltage.
For AC common mode voltages at multiples of the filter frequency setting, the
suppression of interference is accomplished by the integration period of the A/D
converter and by the common mode suppression of the input amplifiers. For AC
common mode voltages < 35 VRMS, the suppression ratio of > 100 dB results in
negligible measurement error.
For DC common mode voltages, only the interference suppression of the input
amplifier stage is available to minimize the effect of the common mode voltage.
Therefore, some accuracy degradation occurs in proportion to the common mode
voltage. The worst case error occurs with 50 VDC between one channel and the
other seven channels. The calculated worst case error is 0.7 % at 0 to 60 °C, and
measured error is typically ≤ 0.1% at 25 °C.
Special characteristic of parameter assignment to upper and lower limit values

The parameterizable limit values (triggers for hardware interrupt) differ for the
SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits from the range of values contained in Table 4-50.
The reason for this is that numerical methods in the module software for evaluating
the process variables prevent values up to 32511 from being reported in some
cases. The process input value at which a hardware interrupt for an underflow or
overflow occurs depends on the calibration factors for an individual channel and
can vary between the lower limits shown in the table below and the value 32511
(7EFF H).

4-84 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Limit values should not be set at values higher than the minimum potential limit
values shown in the table below.
Table 4-53 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits
Measuring Range Minimum Possible Minimum Possible

Upper Limit Value Lower Limit Value
±10 V 11.368 V –11.369 V
31430 –31433
7AC6H 8537H
±5 V 5.684 V –5.684 V
31430 –31430
7AC6H 853AH
1 to 5 V 5.684 V 0.296 V
32376 –4864
7E78H ED00H
0 to 20 mA 22.737 mA –3.519 mA
31432 –4864
7AC8H ED00H
4 to 20 mA 22.737 mA 1.185 mA
32378 –4864
7E7AH ED00H
±20 mA 22.737 mA –22.737 mA
31432 –31432
7AC8H 8538H
Wire-Break Check
The wire-break check is available for the 1 to 5 V voltage range and the 4 to 20 mA
current range.
The following applies to both measuring ranges:
Enabled wire-break check, the analog input module enters a wire-break in the
diagnosis if a current falls below 3.6 mA (0.9 V).
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts during configuration, the module
additionally triggers a diagnostic interrupt.
If no diagnostic interrupt has been enabled, the illuminated SF LED is the only
indication of the wire-break and you must evaluate the diagnostic bytes in the user
program.
With a disabled wire-break check and enabled diagnostic interrupt, the module
triggers a diagnostic interrupt when the underflow is reached.

A5E00105505-03 4-85
Analog Modules
4.19 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

(6ES7331-7NF10-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7331-7NF10-0AB0
Characteristics
The isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits has the following
characteristic features:
• 8 isolated inputs in 4 channel groups
• Measured-value resolution 15 bits + sign
• Rapid measured value updating for up to 4 channels
• Measuring method selectable per channel group
• 8 channels with limit monitoring
• Programmable end-of-scan-cycle interrupt
• Electrical isolation to the backplane bus interface
Special feature
When you use the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits in the distributed peripheral ET 200M,
you must have one of the following IM 153-x:
• IM 153-1 6ES7153-1AA03-0XB0, E 01
• IM 153-2 6ES7153-2AA02-0XB0, E 05
• IM 153-2 6ES7153-2AB01-0XB0, E 04

4-86 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

1 21 L+
2 L M 22
SF Channel 0 M0+
3 23
M4+
Channel 4
4 24
A V DC V A
5
250
to 25
250
6
DC 26
M0– M4–
Channel 1 M1+ 7 27 M5+
Channel 5
8 28
A V V A
9 29
250 250
ADC ADC
10 30
M1– M5–
Channel 2 M2+ M6+
11 31
ADC ADC Channel 6
12 32
A V V A
13 33
250 250
14 34
M2– Interface M6–
Channel 3 M3+ module M7+
15 logic 35
and Channel 7
16 back- 36
A V plane V A
17 bus 37
250 250
18 38
M3– SF M7–
19 39
20 40 M
Figure 4-34 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

A5E00105505-03 4-87
Analog Modules
Dimensions and Weight Smoothing of the measured None / low/

values average/ high
(in millimeters) Basic execution time of the 190/166/144//46
module, in ms
Weight Approx. 272 g (8-channel-mode)
Basic execution time of the 101)
Supports clocked No module, in ms
operation (4-channel-mode)
Number of inputs 8 Suppression of interference, Limits of Error
Length of cable Interference suppression for

F = n x (f1 ± 1%) (f1 = interference frequency, n = 1, 2,
• Shielded max. 200 m ...)
• Common-mode > 100 dB
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC interference (Ucm < AC 60
electronics L+ V)
• Reverse polarity protection Yes • Series-mode interference >90 dB 3)

(peak value of interference
Isolation < rated value of input
range)
backplane bus Crosstalk between the inputs > 100 dB
• Between channels and Yes Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
power supply of the reference to the input range)
electronics
• Input voltage $0.1%
In groups of 2
• Input current $0.1%
Basic error (operational limit at 25 °C, referred to input

range)
• Between the inputs (ECM) 75 VDC / 60 VAC
• Voltage input $0.05%
• Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC
• Current input $0.05%
Minternal (UISO)
Temperature error (with $0.005%/K
Insulation tested with 500 VAC
reference to the input range)
Current consumption
Linearity error (with reference to $0.01%
• From the backplane bus max. 100 mA the input range)
• From the power supply L+ max. 200 mA Repeatability (in steady state at $0.01%
25 °C, referred to the input
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.0 W range)
Analog value generation Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Measuring principle Integrating Interrupts
Integration time/conversion • Hardware interrupt if the Programmable
time/ resolution (per channel) limit value is exceeded channels 0 – 7
• Parameters can be Yes • Hardware interrupt at end Parameters can be
assigned of cycle assigned
• Basic conversion time in 95/83/72/23 • Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be
ms (8-channel mode) assigned
• Basic conversion time in 101) Diagnostic functions Parameters can be
ms (4-channel mode) assigned
• Resolution including sign 16 bits • Group error display Red LED (SF)
• Noise suppression for All2)/50/60/400 • Diagnostics information Possible
frequency f1 read-out
in Hz

4-88 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Data for selecting a sensor • For measuring voltage Possible

Input range (rated values) / • For measuring current
input resistance
As two-wire transmitter Possible with separate
• Voltage $ 5 V / 2 MΩ supply for the
1 to 5 V / 2 MΩ transmitter
$ 10 V / 2 MΩ
• Current 0 to 20 mA / 250 Ω
4 to 20 mA / 250 Ω 1)
$20 mA / 250 Ω Interference frequency for 4-channel mode is “All”
2) Interference frequencies 50/60/400 Hz are designated as
Maximum input voltage for 35 VDC continuous; “All”
voltage input 75 VDC for max. 1 s 3) Series-mode rejection for
(destruction limit) (duty factor 1:20) 8-channel mode is reduced as follows:
Maximum input current for 40 mA 50 Hz > 70 dB
current input 60 Hz > 70 dB
(destruction limit) 400 Hz > 80 dB
50/60/400 Hz > 90 dB
Connection of the sensor
The mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits is set with STEP 7.
Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for parameterizing the SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits, in section 4.7.
Parameterization restrictions when using the analog input module SM 331;

AI 8 x 16 bits with PROFIBUS masters that only support DPV0.
When you use the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 16 bits in an
ET200M PROFIBUS slave system with a PROFIBUS master which is not an S7
master, certain parameters are not permitted. Masters that are not S7 masters do
not support hardware interrupts. So all the parameters associated with these
functions are deactivated. The deactivated parameters are hardware interrupt
enable, hardware restrictions and end-of-scan-cycle interrupt enable. All the other
parameters are permitted.

A5E00105505-03 4-89
Analog Modules

settings meter Type
Enable
• Hardware interrupt if Yes/no No Dynamic
the limit value is
exceeded
Module
• Hardware interrupt at Yes/no No Dynamic
end of cycle Yes/no
• Diagnostic interrupt No Dynamic
Hardware interrupt trigger
• Upper limit 32511 to –32512 – Dynamic Channel
• Lower limit –32512 to 32511 – Dynamic Channel
Diagnostics
• Group diagnostics Yes/no No Static Channel
• Wire-Break Check Yes/no No Channel
Measurement
• Module mode • 8 channels Yes Dynamic Module
• 4 channels No
• Interference 50 Hz Channel
Suppression 60 Hz group
400 Hz
50/60/400 Hz 50/60/400 Hz
• Smoothing • None None Dynamic Channel
• Low group
• Average
• High
• Measuring Method • Measuring Dynamic Channel
Range: group
Deactivated
Voltage • $5V $ 10 V
• 1 to 5 V
• $ 10 V
Current (4-wire • 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
transmitter) • 4 to 20 mA
• $ 20 mA

4-90 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x16 bits are arranged in groups of two inputs
each. You must assign the same parameters to both the inputs in a group. The
interrupt limits are the exception here.
Table 4-55 shows which channels of the isolated analog input module SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits are configured as a channel group. To set the parameters by means
of SFC in the user program, you need the numbers of the channel groups. Detailed
information on this can be found in Appendix A.
Table 4-55 Assignment of the channels of the isolated analog input module SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits to channel groups
Channels ... ... form one channel group each

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7
Operating states
The following modes are available for the isolated analog input module SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits:
• 8 channels
• 4 channels

A5E00105505-03 4-91
Analog Modules
4.19.2 8-channel mode
Description of the module cycle

In 8-channel mode, the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits
switches between the two channels in each group. As the module contains four
analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs simultaneously convert for
channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels have been converted,
all the ADCs simultaneously convert for the odd-numbered channels 1, 3, 5 and 7
(see Figure 4-35).
Start analog conversion

(simultaneous)
K0 K2 K4 K6
Scan time

(simultaneous)
K1 K3 K5 K7
Figure 4-35 8-channel mode cycle

4-92 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Scan time of the module

In the 8-channel mode of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits, the channel conversion time
depends on the selected interference frequency. When you set an interference
frequency of 50 Hz, the channel conversion time including communication time is
76 ms. When you set an interference frequency of 60 Hz, the channel conversion
time is 65 ms. When you set an interference frequency of 400 Hz, the channel
conversion time is reduced to 16 ms. When you set an interference frequency of
50, 60 and 400 Hz, the channel conversion time is 88 ms. The module must then
be switched over to the other channel of the group by means of opto-MOS relays.
Opto-MOS relays need 7 ms to switch and settle. Table 4-56 shows the scan times
of the module at certain interference frequencies.
Table 4-56 Scan times in 8-channel mode
Interference frequency Channel scan time Module scan time

(Hz) (ms) (All channels)
50 83 166
60 72 144
400 23 46
400/60/50 95 190
4.19.3 4-channel mode
Description of the module cycle

In 4-channel mode, the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits does not switch over between the
channels of the individual groups. As the module contains four analog/digital
converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4
and 6.

(simultaneous)
Scan time
K0 K2 K4 K6
Figure 4-36 4-channel mode cycle

A5E00105505-03 4-93
Analog Modules

In 4-channel mode, the channel conversion time including communication time of
the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits is 10 ms. As the module does not switch over between
the channels in a group, the channel scan time and the module
scan time are the same: 10 ms.

AI 8 x16 bits
Measuring Methods
• Current measurement (4-wire transmitter)
Unused Channels
• Current measurement, 4 to 20 mA: Connect the unused input in series with
an input of the same channel group. Ensure that a current sense resistor is
connected for each active and unused channel.
• Other ranges: Short the positive to the negative input of the channel.

4-94 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Wire–break check
The wire-break check is a module software function that is available for all the
voltage ranges and the current range of 4 to 20 mA.
• With the ± 5 V, 1 to 5 V or ± 10 V measuring ranges and an enabled wire-break
check, the isolated analog input module enters a wire-break in the diagnosis
when the process value achieves a positive full-scale deflection (32768). If you
enabled the diagnostic interrupt during configuration, the analog input module
also triggers a diagnostic interrupt.
If the diagnostic interrupt has not been enabled, the illuminated SF display is
the only indication that there is a wire-break. You must then analyze the
diagnosis bytes in the user program.
• With a measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and an enabled wire-break check, the
isolated analog input module enters wire-break in the diagnosis when the
process value falls below 3.6 mA. If you enabled the diagnostic interrupt during
configuration, the analog input module also triggers a diagnostic interrupt.
If the diagnostic interrupt has not been enabled, the illuminated SF display is
the only indication that there is a wire-break. You must then assess the
diagnosis bytes in the user program.
• If the wire-break check is not enabled, the isolated analog input module triggers
a diagnostic interrupt if the limit value for underflow is not reached.
Measuring ranges
You perform setting of the measuring ranges with the “measuring range” parameter
in STEP 7.
Table 4-57 Measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits
Method Selected Output Range Description

Voltage "5V You will find the digital
From 1 to 5 V analog values from
" 10 V Section 4.3.1 in the voltage
and current output ranges
Current (4-wire transmitter) From 0 to 20 mA
From 4 to 20 mA
" 20 mA

A5E00105505-03 4-95
Analog Modules
Short circuit to M or L
If you short an input channel to M or L, the module does not suffer any damage.
The channel continues to issue valid data; neither is a diagnosis reported.
Overflow, underflow and hardware interrupt limits

The diagnosis operating limits for overflow and underflow for some of the
measuring ranges differ from those given in section 4.3.1 of the manual. In some
cases, numerical methods in the module software for evaluating the process
variables prevent values up to 32511 being signaled.
Hardware interrupt limits must not be set to values greater than the smallest
possible limit value of the overflow or underflow operating limits for the
end-of-scan-cycle interrupt in section 4.3.1.
End-of-scan-cycle interrupt
By enabling the end-of-scan-cycle interrupt, you can synchronize a process with
the conversion cycle of the module. The interrupt occurs when the conversion of all
the enabled channels is complete.
Table 4-58 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from OB40 during a hardware
interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt
Content of the 4 bytes with

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Byte
additional information
Special 2 bits per channel to identify the range
analog
Upper limit exceeded
markers 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
in channel
Lower limit exceeded
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
in channel
End-of-scan-cycle 2
X
event
Unassigned bit 3

4-96 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
4.20 Analog input module

SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed; synchronous;
(6ES7331-7HF0x-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7331-7HF00-0AB0 resp.
6ES7331-7HF01-0AB0
Characteristics
The SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed has the following features:
• Measured-value resolution: 13 bits + sign
• Measuring method selectable per channel group:
– Voltage
– Current
• Arbitrary measuring range selection per channel group
• Programmable hardware interrupt
• Isolated against the load voltage (not for 2-wire transducers)

A5E00105505-03 4-97
Analog Modules
Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bit High Speed
Voltage measurement
Group error display – red
Current measurement
1 L+
SF Multiplexer Meas. range
24V
M0+
2
module M0* CH0
3
4 M1+
5 M1* CH1
Internal
6 M2+
supply
7 M2* CH2
8 M3+
9 M3– CH3
10 Mana
11 Mana
ADC 12 M4+
13 M4* CH4
Isolation 14 M5+
15 M5* CH5
16 M6+
Backplane SF 17 M6* CH6
bus M7+
18
interface
19 M7* CH7
2 M
0
Figure 4-37 Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed

4-98 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bit High Speed

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Measuring principle Instantaneous value
(in millimeters) conversion
Weight Approx. 230 g Integration time/conversion
time/ resolution (per
Data for Specific Module channel)
Supports clocked operation Yes • Parameters can be Yes
Number of inputs 8 assigned
Length of cable • Basic conversion time 52 s

per channel
• Resolution (incl. 14 bits
overrange)
electronics L +
• Noise suppression for None 400 60 50
frequency f1 in Hz
• Reverse polarity Yes • Basic execution time of 0.42 ms
protection the module
Power supply of the (independent of the
transmitters number of released
channels)
• Supply current max. 30 mA (per channel)
Suppression of interference, Limits of Error
• Short-circuit-proof Yes
Noise suppression for f = n (f1 " 1 %),
Isolation (f1 = interference frequency) n=1.2...
• Between channels and Yes • Common-mode > 80 dB
backplane bus interference
(UCM < 11 VSS)
• Series-mode > 40 dB
interference(peak value
power supply of the
of interference < rated
electronics
value of input range)
Permitted potential
Crosstalk between the > 65 dB
difference VDC 11/VAC 8 V inputs
• Between inputs and
MANA (UCM) Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
– At signal = 0 V
– Not for 2-wire • Voltage input "1V " 0.3 %
transmitter " 5V " 0.4 %
• Between the inputs VDC 11/VAC 8 V " 10 V " 0.3 %
(ECM)
1 to 5 V; " 0.4 %
Minternal (UISO) • Current input " 20 mA " 0.3 %
Insulation tested with 0 to 20 mA; " 0.3 %

• Channels against back 500 VDC 4 to 20 mA: " 0.3 %
plane bus and load
voltage L +
Current consumption
(without 2–wire
transducer)
module

A5E00105505-03 4-99
Analog Modules
Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, referred to input Data for Selecting a Sensor
range)
Input range (rated
• Voltage input "1V " 0.2 % values)/Input resistance
"5V " 0.25 % • Voltage "1 V /10 MΩ
" 10 V " 0.2 % "5V /100 kΩ
" 10 V /100 kΩ
1 to 5 V; " 0.25 %
1 to 5 V; /100 kΩ
• Current input " 20 mA " 0.2 %
• Current " 20 mA /50 Ω
0 to 20 mA; " 0.2 %
0 to 20 mA; /50 Ω
4 to 20 mA: " 0.2 % 4 to 20 mA: /50 Ω
Temperature error (with " 0.004 %/K Maximum input voltage for max. 20 V continuous;
reference to the input range) voltage input (destruction 75 V for max. 1 s
Linearity error (with " 0.03% limit) (duty factor 1:20)
reference to the input range) Maximum input current for 40 mA
Repeat accuracy (in the " 0.1 % current input (destruction
steady state at 25 C, limit)
referred to the input range) Connection of the sensor
Status, interrupts, diagnostics • For measuring voltage Possible
Interrupts • For measuring current
• Hardware interrupt Parameters can be Possible
• Diagnostic interrupt assigned As two-wire transmitter
Parameters can be Possible
assigned As four-wire transmitter
Diagnostic functions • Load of the 2–wire max. 820 Ω
• Group error display Red LED (SF) measurement
• Diagnostics information Possible transducer
read-out (at L+ = DC 24 V)
Characteristic linearization None
4.20.1 Synchronicity
Characteristics
Reproducible (i.e. same length) reaction times are achieved with the SIMATIC with
an equidistant DP bus cycle and the synchronization of the following free running
single cycles:
acyclic program branching.
• Free running cycle at the DP slave backplane bus.
• Free running cycle during the signal processing and conversion in the electronic
modules of the DP slave.
In this cycle the processing levels of a CPU (OB 61 to OB 64) and the
synchronous peripheral are synchronized. The I/O data are therefore transferred at
defined and consistent time intervals (clock synchronicity).

4-100 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Requirements
Module filtering mode: Synchronicity

In synchronous operation the following conditions apply:
Standard Mode
Filter and processing time TWE between reading the current value max. 625 s
and loading it into the transfer buffer
(the specified value for TWE applies, independent of the activation of
the diagnosis)
TDPmin 3.5 ms
Fast Mode (only possible with 6ES7331-7HF01-0AB0)

Filter and processing time TWE between reading in the current value max. 625 s
and allocation in the transfer buffer
(diagnosis not selectable)
TDPmin 1 ms
Note
By using “Fast Mode” the cycle of the DP system can be accelerated. However,
this is at the expense of the diagnosis: The diagnosis is switched off in this
operating mode.
Together with the calculation and transfer times required on the IM 153, the
specified value for TWE results in the minimum settable value of HW Config of
875 s for Ti.
The specified value for TDPmin is dependent on the extent of extension of the DP
slave/IM 153: If there are a number of different plugged in modules, the slowest
module determines the time TDPmin.
Note
In “Synchronous” mode, independent of the parameterization made in STEP 7, the
module always sets itself to “Integration time: no /parasitic frequency”. The
“hardware interrupt” functionality is not possible in “Synchronous” mode.

A5E00105505-03 4-101
Analog Modules
Calculation of the filter and processing time

Independent of the number parameterized channels, the same time conditions are
always valid. The time related to the clock signal for the reading of a specific
channel is calculated according to the formula:
TWE_CH = (Channel number +1) x 52 s + tv; tv = 119 to 209 s
TWE
A/D conversion internal processing (tv)
CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 CH0
52s 52s 52s 52s 52s 52s 52s 52s 209s
Figure 4-38 Calculation of the filter and processing time
Explanation of the mode of operation in synchronous operation

The module begins with the A/D conversion of channel 7 and saves this result
internally. Then channels 6...0 are converted sequentially at intervals of 52 s in
the same way. After a further internal processing time the result becomes available
to all converted channels at the backplane bus for collection by the CPU.
Further information
Further information on synchronicity can be found in the Online help of STEP 7, in
the manualLocal peripheral system ET 200M and in the manual Synchronicity.

4-102 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
4.20.2 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed
You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed by means
of measuring range modules on the module and in STEP 7.
Meas. range module

measuring method and the measuring range. You must then switch the 24 V
supply off and on at the front connector. The steps you have to perform to do this
are described in detail in the reference manual, Section 4.4.
The corresponding table in the reference manual, Section 4.20.3, tells you which
assignment you have to select for which measuring method and measuring range.
In addition, the necessary settings are embossed on the module.
Default settings for measuring range module

The measuring range modules are preset to “B” (voltage; " 10 V) when the
module is supplied.
To use the following preset measuring methods and measuring ranges, you only
have to change the measuring range module to the corresponding setting.
Parameter assignment in STEP 7 is not necessary.
Table 4-59 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed using Measuring
Range Modules
Measuring Range Measuring Method Measuring Range

Module Setting
A Voltage " 1 V*
B Voltage " 10 V
C Current, 4 to 20 mA
Four-wire transmitter
D Current, 4 to 20 mA
Two-wire transmitter
* You must short-circuit unused channels and connect them to MANA.
Parameter
analog modules in the reference manual, section 4.7.

A5E00105505-03 4-103
Analog Modules
Table 4-60 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed

Settings meter
Type
Enable
• Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No
Dynamic Module
Fast Mode (only settable Yes/no No Static Module
if the 331-7HF01 was
registered in
synchronous operation
in the properties of the
DP slave)
interrupt range.
Dynamic Channel
• Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 –
Diagnostics Channel
Static
• Group diagnostics Yes/no No group
Measurement
• Measuring Method Deactivated
U Voltage U
Channel or
Dynamic Channel
2DMU Current (2-wire transmitter) group
• Measuring Range Refer to the reference manual, section "10 V
4.20.3, for the measuring ranges of the
input channels that you can set.
• Interference none; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz 50 Hz
Suppression
Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed are arranged in four
groups of two. You can only ever assign parameters to one channel group.
Die SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed has a measuring range module for each
channel group.

4-104 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Table 4-61 Assignment of the channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed to
channel groups

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7

Diagnostics
parameter in Table 4-47 in the reference manual.

AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed
Measuring Methods
You perform the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module
and with the “measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.
Unused Channels
You must short-circuit unused channels and connect them to MANA. In this way,
you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog input module. Set the
“measuring method” parameter for unused channels to “disabled”.

A5E00105505-03 4-105
Analog Modules
Special characteristics of unused channels for some measuring ranges

• Current measurement, 2-wire transmitter:
There are two ways to use the channels:
a) Leave the unused input open and do not enable diagnostics for this
channel group. Otherwise, if diagnostics are enabled, the analog module
triggers a single diagnostic interrupt and the SF LED of the analog module
comes on.
b) Connect the unused input with a resistance of 1.5 to 3.3 kW. You may then
enable diagnostics for this channel group.
• Current measurement 4 to 20 mA, 4-wire transmitter: Connect the unused
input in series with an input of the same channel group.
Measuring ranges
You perform the setting of the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range
modules on the module and with the “measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.
Table 4-62 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed
Method Selected Measuring Range Measuring Range Description

(Type of Sensor) Module Setting
U: Voltage "1V A You will find the digitized
"5V B analog values in the
reference manual, section
1 to 5 V 4.3.1, in the voltage
" 10 V measuring range
4DMU: Current (4-wire 0 to 20 mA C
transmitter) You will find the digitized
4 to 20 mA analog values in the
" 20 mA reference manual, section
4.3.1, in the current
2DMU: Current (2-wire 4 to 20 mA D
measuring range
transmitter)
Default Settings
The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are the “voltage” measuring method
and the "”10 V” measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring
method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 331;
AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed with STEP 7.

4-106 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Special characteristics of the wire-break check for the 4 to 20 mA measuring

range
With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and enabled wire-break
check, the analog input module enters wire-break in the diagnosis when a current
falls below 3.6 mA.
If you have enabled diagnostics interrupt during configuration, the module
program.
With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and disabled wire-break
check and enabled diagnostic interrupt, the module triggers a diagnostic interrupt
when the underflow is reached.

A5E00105505-03 4-107
Analog Modules

(6ES7331-1KF01-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7331-1KF01-0AB0
Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits has the following characteristic
features:
• 8 inputs
• Measured-value resolution 12 bits + sign
• Measuring method selectable:
– Voltage
– Current
– Resistors
– Bulb resistor

4-108 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits

The following figure shows some examples of connections for the different types of
measurements on channels 4 to 7. Basically, these connection examples apply to
all channels (channel 0 to 7).
Connection example
1 Multiplexer 21
U+ U+
2 22
0 0 I+ I+
3 23
1 1 S– S–
Ch 0 V Ch 4
2 2 M+ 4 24 M+
5 25
3 3 M– M–
4 4 6 26
U+ U+
5 5 7 27
I+ I+
6 6 8
Logic Electrical 28
S– S–
7 7 Ch 1 and isolation Ch 5
9
M+ back- 29 M+ A
M– 10 plane ADC 30
M–
11 bus 31
U+ ac- U+
I+ 12 32
0 0 tiva- I+
1 1
S– 13 tion 33 S–
Ch 2 Ch 6
2 2 M+ 14 34
M+
Current mV
3 3 35
M– 15 M–
4 4 source
16 36
U+ U+
5 5
6 6
I+ 17 37 I+
18 38
7 7 S– S–
Ch 3 + 5 V from Ch 7
M+ 19 39
backplane bus M+
M– 20 40
Internal supply M–
Channel
number
Figure 4-39 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 13
bits
Note
When connecting the voltage and current sensors, make sure that you do not
exceed the maximum permitted common-mode voltage UCM of 2 V between the
inputs. So to prevent measuring errors, interconnect the individual M– terminals.
It is not necessary to interconnect the M– terminals when measuring resistors and
resistance temperature detectors.

A5E00105505-03 4-109
Analog Modules

(in millimeters)
Integration time/resolution
Weight Approx. 250 g (per channel)
Data for Specific Module • Programmable Yes
Supports clocked No • Noise suppression 50 60
operation for frequency f1 in Hz
Number of inputs 8 • Integration time in 60 50
• For resistance-type 8 milliseconds
sensor
• Basic conversion 66 55
Length of cable time including
Integration time in
milliseconds
max. 50 m at 50 mV
Additional conversion 66 55
Voltages, Currents, Potentials time for measuring
Constant current for resistance, in ms
resistance-type sensor • Resolution in bits (incl. 13 bits 13 bits
Overrange
• Resistance ther- 0.83 mA
mometer and Suppression of interference, Limits of Error
resistance meas-
urement 0 ... 600 Ω Noise suppression for f = n (f1 " 1 %),
(f1 = interference frequency) n = 1.2
• Resistance meas- 0.25 mA
urement 0 ... 6 kΩ • Common-mode > 86 dB
interference
Isolation (UCM < 2 V)
• Between channels and Yes • Series-mode noise > 40 dB
backplane bus (peak value of
noise < nominal
value of input
Permitted potential range)
difference
• Between the inputs 2.0 VDC inputs
(ECM)
• Between the inputs 75 VDC / 60 VAC

and Minternal (UISO)
Current consumption
• From the backplane max. 90 mA
bus

module

4-110 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with Temperature error (with " 0.006 %/K / 0.006 K/K
reference to the input range) reference to the input
range)
• Voltage input " 5 " 0.6 %
V " 10 V Linearity error (with " 0.1 % / 0.1 K
1 to 5 V reference to the input
0 to 10 V range)
" 50 mV " 0.5 % Repeat accuracy (in the " 0.1 % / " 0.1 K
" 500 mV steady state at 25 C,
"1 V referred to the input range)
• Current input " 20 mA " 0.5 % Status, interrupts, diagnostics

0 to 20 mA Interrupts None
4 to 20 mA
• Resistors 0 to 6 kΩ " 0.5 %
0 to 600 Ω " 0.5 % Data for Selecting a Sensor
• Resistance Pt 100 " 1.2 K Input range (rated

thermometer Ni 100 values)/Input resistance
Standard
• Voltage " 50 mV 100 kΩ
Pt 100 "1K " 500 mV
Ni 100 "1 V
Climate
"5V
Ni 1000, LG-Ni " 1 K " 10 V
1000 Standard
1 to 5 V;
Ni 1000 "1K 0 to 10 V
LG-Ni 1000
Climate • Current " 20 mA 50 Ω
0 to 20 mA;
Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, referred to input
range) 4 to 20 mA:
• Voltage input " 5 " 0.4 % • Resistors 0 to 6 kΩ 100 MΩ

V " 10 V 0 to 600 Ω
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V • Resistance Pt 100 100 MΩ
thermometer Ni 100
" 50 mV " 0.3 % Ni 1000
" 500 mV "1 LG-Ni 1000
V Standard /
Climate
• Current input " 20 mA " 0.3 %
0 to 20 mA Maximum input voltage for max. 30 V continuous
4 to 20 mA voltage input U+
(destruction limit)
• Resistors 0 to 6 kΩ " 0.3 %
0 to 600 Ω " 0.3 % Maximum input voltage for max. 12 V continuous;
voltage inputs M+, M-, S– 30 V for max. 1 s
• Resistance Pt 100 "1K
(destruction limit)
thermometer Ni 100
Standard Maximum input current for 40 mA
current input I+
Pt 100 " 0.8 K
(destruction limit)
Ni 100
Climate
Ni 1000 " 0.8 K

LG-Ni 1000
Standard
Ni 1000 LG-Ni " 0.8 K

1000
Climate

A5E00105505-03 4-111
Analog Modules
Connection of the Characteristic Programmable

sensor linearization
• For measuring Possible • For RTD Pt 100 Standard / Climate

voltage Ni 100 Standard / Climate
Ni 1000 Standard / Climate
• For measuring current LG-Ni 1000 Standard /
Climate
As two-wire Possible, with external
transmitter supply • Technical unit for Degrees Celsius,
temperature degrees Fahrenheit, Kelvin
As four-wire Possible
measurement
transmitter
•
For measuring
resistance
with two-conductor Possible

connection
with three-conductor Possible

connection
with four-conductor Possible

connection

4-112 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
4.21.1 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits
Parameter

Settings meter
Type
Measurement
U Voltage
I Current
R Resistors
RTD Bulb resistor
• Measuring Range Voltage
"50 mV; "500 mV; "1 V; "10 V
1 to 5 V;
"5 V; 0 to 10 V; "10 V
Current
0 to 20 mA; 4 to 20 mA; "20 mA "20 mA
Resistors
0 to 600 Ω; 0 to 6 kΩ 600 Ω
Bulb resistor (linear) Pt 100 Channel
Dynamic
Pt 100 Climate / Standard standard
Ni 100 Climate / Standard
Ni 1000 Climate / Standard
LG-Ni 1000 Climate / Standard
• Temperature Pt 100
coefficient 0.003850 ΩΩ/ °C (IST-90) 0.003850
Ni 100 / Ni 1000
0.006180 Ω/Ω/ °C
LG-Ni 1000
0.005000 Ω/Ω/ °C
• Interference 50 Hz; 60 Hz 50 Hz
Frequency
Suppression Module
• Temperature unit Degrees Celsius, degrees Degrees
Fahrenheit, Kelvin* Celsius
* only Pt 100 Standard, Ni 100 Standard, Ni 1000 Standard, LG-Ni 1000 Standard

A5E00105505-03 4-113
Analog Modules
4.21.2 Measuring Methods of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits
Measuring Methods
• Resistance test
Unused Channels

4-114 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules

(6ES7331-7KF02-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7331-7KF02-0AB0
Characteristics
features:
• Measured-value resolution; settable per group (depending on the integration
time set)
– 9 bits + sign
– 12 bits + sign
– 14 bits + sign
– Voltage
– Current
– Resistors
– Temperature
• Isolated against load voltage (except when at least one
coding key is inserted in position D)
Resolution
The resolution of the measured value is a direct function of the integration time
selected. In other words the longer the integration time for an analog input channel,
the more accurate the resolution of the measured value will be (see Technical
Specifications of the module and Table 4-6 on page 4-10).

A5E00105505-03 4-115
Analog Modules
Thermocouples, Resistance test

Voltage measurement
Current measurement
L+ 24V
SF Internal Current Multi- Meas. range M0 + CH0 M0 + CH0
supply source plexer module
M0* M0*
M1 + CH1 IC0 +
M1* IC0*
M2 + CH2 M1 + CH2
M2 * M1*
Int. M3 + CH3 IC1 +
T Comp. M3* IC1*
+ Ext. Comp +
compensation
None
Comp
Comp–/ Mana
AD M4 + CH4 M2 + CH4
C M4* M2*
Isolation M5 + CH5 IC2 +
M5* IC2*
M6 + CH6 M3 + CH6
Backplane SF M6 * M3*
bus
M7 + CH7 IC3 +
interface
M7* IC3*
M
M
Figure 4-40 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits
The input resistances depend on the measuring range selected (see Technical
Specifications).

4-116 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules

(in millimeters)
Weight Approx. 250 g time/ resolution (per
channel)
• Programmable Yes
Supports clocked operation No
• Integration time in 2.5 162/3 20 100
Number of inputs 8 milliseconds
• For resistance-type 4
sensor • Basic conversion time 3 17 22 102
including Integration
Length of cable max. 200 m time in milliseconds
• Shielded max. 50 m at 80 mV and Additional conversion 1 1 1 1
thermocouples time for measuring
Voltages, Currents, Potentials resistance, in ms
or
electronics L + Additional conversion 10 10 10 10
time for open-circuit
• Reverse polarity Yes monitoring, in ms
protection or
Power supply of the Additional conversion 16 16 16 16

transmitters time for measuring
resistance and
• Supply current max. 60 mA (per channel) open-circuit monitoring,
in ms
• Short-circuit-proof Yes
• Resolution in bits (incl. 9 12 12 14
Constant current for typ. 1.67 mA overrange) bits bits bits bits
resistance-type sensor
• Noise suppression for 400 60 50 10
Isolation frequency f1 in Hz
• Between channels and Yes • Basic execution time of 24 136 176 816
backplane bus the module, in ms (all
channels enabled)
power supply of the Smoothing of the measured None
electronics values
– Not for 2-wire
transmitter
Permitted potential
difference 2.5 VDC
MANA (UCM)
– At signal = 0 V
• Between the inputs 2.5 VDC

(ECM)
Minternal (UISO)
Current consumption
L+ (without two-wire
transmitter)
Power dissipation of the typ. 1 W
module

A5E00105505-03 4-117
Analog Modules

Noise suppression for F = n (f1 " 1 %), Interrupts
(f1 = interference frequency) • Hardware interrupt Programmable
• Common-mode > 70 dB when limit has been channels 0 and 2
interference exceeded
(UCM < 2.5 V) • Diagnostic interrupt Programmable
• Series-mode noise > 40 dB Diagnostic functions Programmable
(peak value of
noise < nominal value of • Group error display Red LED (SF)
input range) • Diagnostics information Possible
read-out
inputs Data for Selecting a Sensor
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with Input range (rated
reference to the input range) values)/Input resistance
• Voltage input 80 mV "1% • Voltage " 80 mV /10 MΩ

" 250 mV /10 MΩ
250 to 1000 " 0.6 %
mV " 500 mV /10 MΩ
"1000 mV /10 MΩ
2.5 to 10 V " 0.8 %
" 2.5 V /100kΩ
• Current input 3.2 to 20 mA " 0.7 % "5V /100kΩ
• Resistors 150Ω; 300Ω; " 0. 7 % 1 to 5 V; /100kΩ
600 Ω " 10 V /100kΩ
• Thermocouple Type E, N, J, " 1. 1 % • Current " 3.2 mA /25 Ω
K, L
" 10 mA /25 Ω
• Resistance Pt 100/ " 0. 7 % " 20 mA /25 Ω
thermometer Ni 100
0 to 20 mA; /25 Ω
Pt 100 " 0. 8 % 4 to 20 mA: /25 Ω
climate
• Resistors 150 Ω /10 ΜΩ
Basic error (operational limit at 25 C referred to input 300 Ω /10 ΜΩ
range)
600 Ω /10 ΜΩ
• Voltage input 80 mV " 0.7 %
• Thermocouples Type E, N, J, /10 ΜΩ
250 to 1000 " 0.4 % K, L
mV
• Resistance Pt 100, /10 ΜΩ
2.5 to 10 V " 0.6 % thermometer Ni 100
• Current input 3.2 to 20 mA " 0.5 % Maximum input voltage for max. 20 V continuous;
voltage input (destruction 75 V for max. 1 s
• Resistors 150Ω; 300Ω; " 0.5 % limit) (duty factor 1:20)
600 Ω
Maximum input current for 40 mA
• Thermocouple Type E, N, J, " 0.7 % current input (destruction
K, L limit)
• Resistance Pt 100/ " 0.5 %
thermometer Ni 100
Pt 100 " 0.6 %
climate
Temperature error (with " 0.005 %/K
Linearity error (with " 0.05 %
Repeatability (in steady " 0.05 %
state at 25 C referred to
input range)
Temperature error of internal "1%
compensation

4-118 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Connection of the sensor Characteristic linearization Programmable

• For measuring voltage Possible • for thermocouples Type E, N, J, K, L
• For measuring current • For RTD Pt 100

(standard, climate range)
As two-wire transmitter Possible Ni 100
As four-wire transmitter Possible (standard, climate range)
• For measuring Temperature compensation Programmable
resistance
With two-conductor Possible
• Internal temperature Possible
compensation
connection
With three-conductor Possible • External temperature Possible
connection compensation with
With four-conductor Possible compensating box
connection
• Compensation for 0 C Possible
• Load of the two-wire max. 820 Ω comparison point
transmitter temperature
• Technical unit for Degrees Celsius
temperature
measurement
You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits by means of

measuring range modules on the module and in STEP 7.
Meas. range module

measuring method and the measuring range. The steps you have to perform to do
this are described in detail in Section 4.4.
The corresponding table in Section 4.22.2 tells you which assignment you have to
select for which measuring method and measuring range. In addition, the
necessary settings are embossed on the module.

A5E00105505-03 4-119
Analog Modules

The measuring range modules are preset to “B” (voltage; " 10 V) when the
module is supplied.
Table 4-64 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits Using Measuring Range Modules

Module Setting
A Voltage " 1000 mV
B Voltage " 10 V
Parameter

Settings meter
Type
Enable

interrupt range.
• Upper limit value From 32511 to –32512 – Dynamic Channel
Diagnostics
Channel
Static
group
check

4-120 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Table 4-65 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits, continued

Settings meter
Type
Measurement
U Voltage
R-4L Resistance
(linear, four-conductor
connection)
TC-I Thermocouple Channel or
(internal comparison) Dynamic Channel
TC-E Thermocouple group
TC-IL Thermocouple
(linear, internal comparison)
TC-EL Thermocouple
(linear, external comparison)
• Measuring Range Refer to Section 4.22.2 for the "10 V
Suppression
Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits are arranged in four groups of two. You
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits has a measuring range module for
each channel group.
Table 4-66 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits to Channel Groups

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7

A5E00105505-03 4-121
Analog Modules
Special characteristic of channel groups with resistance measurement

If you use the resistance measurement method, there is only one channel per
channel group. The “2nd” channel of each group is used for current injection (IC).
The measured value is obtained by accessing the “1st” channel of the group. The
“2nd” channel of the group has the default carry value “7FFFH”.

Diagnostics

AI 8 x 12 bits
Measuring Methods
• Resistance test
• Temperature measurement
You perform the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module
Unused Channels
“measuring method” parameter for unused channels to “disabled”. In this way you
shorten the scan time of the module.
If you do not use the COMP input, you must short-circuit it also.

4-122 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules

comes on.
b) Connect the unused input with a resistance of 1.5 to 3.3 k. You may then
Special characteristic when all channels are disabled

If you disable all input channels of the module and enable diagnostics when
parameterizing the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 12 bits, the module does
not indicate that the “external auxiliary voltage” is missing.
Measuring ranges
modules on the module and with the “measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

U: Voltage " 80 mV A You will find the digitized
" 250 mV analog values in Section
4.3.1 in the voltage
" 500 mV
measuring range
" 1000 mV
" 2.5 V B
"5V
1 to 5 V
" 10 V
TC-I:thermocouple Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] A You will find the digitized
(internal compensation) Type E [NiCr-CuNi] analog values in Section
(thermovoltage 4.3.1 in " 80 mV the voltage
Type J [Fe-CuNi]
measurement) measuring range
Type K [NiCr-Ni]
TC-E: Thermocouple Type L [Fe-CuNi]
(external compensation)
(thermovoltage
measurement)

A5E00105505-03 4-123
Analog Modules
Table 4-67 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits, continued

2DMU: Current (2-wire 4 to 20 mA D You will find the digitized
transmitter) analog values in Section
4.3.1 in the current
4DMU: Current (4-wire " 3.2 mA C
measuring range
transmitter) " 10 mA
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
" 20 mA
R-4L: Resistors 150 A You will find the digitized
(four-conductor 300 analog values in Section
connection) 4.3.1 in the resistance
600
measuring range
TC-IL: Thermocouple Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] A You will find the digitized
(linear, internal Type E [NiCr-CuNi] analog values in Section
compensation) 4.3.1 in the temperature
Type J [Fe-CuNi]
(temperature range
measurement) Type K [NiCr-Ni]
The characteristics are
Type L [Fe-CuNi]
Fe-CuNi linearized:
TC-EL: Thermocouple
(linear, external • Pt 100 to DIN IEC 751
compensation) • Ni 100 according to IEC
(temperature DIN 43760
measurement) • Thermocouple to DIN
RTD-4L: Bulb resistor Pt 100 climate A 584, type L to
DIN 43710.
(linear, four-conductor Ni 100 climate
connection) Pt 100 standard
(temperature
Ni 100 standard
measurement)
Default Settings
and the “" 10 V” measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring
method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits
with STEP 7.
Wire-Break Check
The wire-break check is intended primarily for temperature measurements
(thermocouples and bulb resistors.

4-124 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules

range
falls below 3.6 mA.
program.
4.23 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

(6ES7331-7PF00-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7331-7PF00-0AB0
Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD has the following characteristic
features:
• 8 differential inputs for RTD resistance temperature detector in 4 channel
groups
• Optional setting of the resistance thermometer type per channel group

A5E00105505-03 4-125
Analog Modules
Use of the module in the distributed peripheral ET 200M

When you use the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD in the distributed peripheral ET 200M, you
must have one of the following IM 153 x:
• IM 153-1; ab 6ES7153-1AA03-0XB0, E 01
• IM 153-2; ab 6ES7153-2AA02-0XB0, E 05
• IM 153-2; ab 6ES7153-2AB01-0XB0, E 04
Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

L+ 1 L+ M- 21 L+
2 22
SF M0+ M4+
3 ADC ADC 23
M0- DC M4-
4 to 24
K0 K4
Ic0+ DC Ic4+
5 25
Ic0- Ic4-
6 26
M1+ 7 27 M5+
M1- M5-
8 28
K1 Ic5+ K5
Ic1+ 9 29
Ic1- DAC DAC
10 Ic5-
30
M2+ M6+
11 31
M2- ADC ADC M6-
12 32
K2 K6
Ic2+ Ic6+
13 33
Ic2- Back- Ic6-
14 34
plane
M3+ M7+
15 bus 35
ac-
M3- 16 36 M7-
tiva- K7
K3
Ic3+ tion Ic7+
17 37
Ic3- Ic7-
18 DAC DAC 38
19 39
M 20 40 M
Figure 4-41 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

4-126 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

(in millimeters)
Module filtering mode 8 channels, hardware
Integration/conversion time/
Data for Specific Module resolution (per channel)
Supports clocked No • Programmable Yes
operation • Basic conversion time in 80
Number of inputs 8 ms
Length of cable • Additional conversion time 185*

for measuring resistance,
• Shielded max. 200 m in ms
• Additional conversion time 100
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC for open-circuit monitoring,
electronics L+ in ms
• Reverse polarity protection Yes • Resolution including sign 16 bits
Constant measured current for max. 5 mA • Noise suppression 400 / 60 / 50

resistance-type sensor for interference frequency
f1 in Hz
Isolation
Smoothing of the measured None / low/
backplane bus
Conversion time (per channel) 100 ms
power supply of the Basic response time of module 200 ms
electronics (all channels enabled)
• Between the channels Yes Module filtering mode 8 channels, software
In groups of 2
Permitted potential difference resolution (per channel)
• Between the inputs (UCM ) 75 VDC / 60 VAC

• Programmable Yes

• Basic conversion time in 8 / 25 / 30
ms
Minternal (UISO)

• Additional conversion time 45 / 79 / 89*
for measuring resistance,
Current consumption in ms
• From the backplane bus max. 100 mA • Additional conversion time 20 / 37 / 42
• From the power supply L+ max. 240 mA for open-circuit monitoring,
in ms
• Resolution including sign 16 bits
• Noise suppres 400 / 60 / 50

sion for interference
frequency f1 in Hz

Conversion time (per channel) 20 / 37 / 42 ms
Basic response time of module 40 / 79 / 84 ms

(all channels enabled)

A5E00105505-03 4-127
Analog Modules
Module filtering mode 4 channels, hardware Linearity error (with reference to "0.02 %
the input range)
resolution (per channel) Repeat accuracy (in the steady "0.01 %
• Programmable Yes state at 25 °C, referred to the
input range)
• Basic conversion time in 3.3
ms Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Interrupts
• Additional conversion time 185*
for measuring resistance, • Hardware interrupt Programmable
in ms (channels 0 – 7)
• Additional conversion time 85** • Diagnostic interrupt Programmable
for open-circuit monitoring,
in ms Diagnostic functions Programmable
• Resolution including sign 16 bits • Group error display Red LED (SF)
• Noise suppres 400 / 60 / 50 • Diagnostic information can Possible

sion for interference be displayed
frequency f1 in Hz Data for Selecting a Sensor
Smoothing of the measured None / low/ Input range (rated values) input
values average/ high resistance
Basic response time of module 10 ms • Resistance thermometer Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500,
(all channels enabled) Pt 1000, Ni 100, Ni
120, Ni 200, Ni 500, Ni
1000, Cu 10
Noise suppression for f = n (f1 1%),
• Resistors 150, 300, 600
”(f1 = interference frequency) n = 1.2, etc.
Maximum input voltage for 35 VDC continuous;
• Common-mode > 100 dB voltage input (destruction limit) 75 VDC for max. 1 s
interference (duty factor 1:20)
(UCM < 60 VAC)
• Series-mode interference > 90 dB
(peak value of interference • For measuring resistance
< rated value of input
With two-conductor Possible (without
range)
connection resistance correction)
Crosstalk between the inputs > 100 dB
With three-conductor Possible
Operational limit (over entire temperature range, referred connection
to 0 to 60 C input range)
With four-conductor Possible
• Resistance thermometer "1.0 °C connection
• Resistors "0.1 % Characteristic linearization
Basic error (operational limit at 25°C, referred to input

• Resistance thermometer Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500,
Pt 1000, Ni 100, Ni
range)
120, Ni 200, Ni 500, Ni
• Resistance thermometer "0.5 °C 1000, Cu 10 (standard
and climatic range)
• Resistors "0.05 %
• Technical unit for Degrees Celsius;
Temperature error (with "0.005 %/K temperature measurement degrees Fahrenheit
* The resistance measurement for a three-conductor connection is performed every 5 minutes.

** Open-circuit monitoring in module filtering mode 4 Channels, Hardware is performed every 3 seconds.

4-128 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
4.23.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD
You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD in STEP 7.
Parameter
Parameterization restrictions when using the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD with

PROFIBUS masters that only support DPV0.
When you use the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD in an ET 200M
PROFIBUS slave system with a PROFIBUS master which is not an S7 master,
certain parameters are not permitted. Masters that are not S7 masters do not
support hardware interrupts. So all the parameters associated with these functions
are deactivated. The deactivated parameters are hardware interrupt enable,
hardware restrictions and end-of-scan-cycle interrupt enable. All the other
Table 4-68 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Settings meter
Type
Enable
Yes/no
No
Dynamic Module
• Hardware interrupt at Yes/no
end of cycle No
Trigger for hardware
interrupt
• Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 32767 Dynamic Channel
• Lower limit value –32512 to 32511 -32768
Diagnostics
Channel
Static
group
check

A5E00105505-03 4-129
Analog Modules
Table 4-68 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, continued

Settings meter
Type
Measurement
• Measuring Method Deactivated RTD-4L
R-4L Resistance
R-3L Resistance,
three-conductor connection
(linear, four-conductor Channel
connection) Dynamic
group
connection)
• Measuring Range Refer to Section 4.23.2 for the Pt 100
measuring ranges of the input climate
channels that you can set. 0.003850
(IPTS-68)
• Temperature unit Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit Degrees
Dynamic Module
Celsius
• Module filtering mode 8 channels hardware filter 8
Dynamic Module
filter
• Temperature Platinum (Pt) 0.003850
coefficient for 0,003850 / °C
temperature 0.003916 / °C
measurement with 0.003902 / °C
bulb resistor (RTD) 0.003920 / °C
0,003850 / °C (ITS-90) Channel
Dynamic
Nickel (Ni) group
0.006180 / °C
0.006720 / °C
Copper (Cu)
0.00427 / °C
• Interference 50/60/400 Hz; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz 50/60/400
Dynamic Channel
suppression* Hz
group
• Smoothing None None Dynamic Channel

Low group
Average
High
* 50/60/400 Hz programmable only for modes 8 or 4-Channel Hardware Filter Modes;
50 Hz, 60 Hz or 400 Hz programmable only for mode 8-Channel Hardware Filter Mode

4-130 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD are arranged in four groups of two. You
Table 4-69 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD to Channel Groups

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7
Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts upon limit

violation
You can set the upper and lower limits for each channel with hardware interrupts in
STEP 7.
Module filtering mode

The SM 331; AI 8 RTD operates in one of the following modes:
• “Hardware filter, 8 channels”
• “Software filter, 8 channels”
The operating mode affects the scan time of the module.

A5E00105505-03 4-131
Analog Modules
”Hardware filter 8 channels” mode

In “Hardware filter 8 channels” mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8 x RTD
switches over between the two channels in each group. As the module contains
four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert simultaneously
for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels have been
converted all the ADCs simultaneously convert for the odd-numbered channels 1,
3, 5 and 7 (see Figure 4-42).

(simultaneous)
K0 K2 K4 K6
Scan time

(simultaneous)
K1 K3 K5 K7
Figure 4-42 Hardware filter 8 channels scan time

In 8-channel hardware filter mode, the channel conversion time including the
communication time of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD is 85 ms. The
module must then be switched over to the other channel in the group by means of
opto-MOS relays. Opto-MOS relays need 12 ms to switch and settle. Each
channel needs a time of 97 ms, so that the scan time is exactly 194 ms.
Scan time = (tK + tU) x 2
Scan time = (85 ms + 12 ms) x 2
Scan time = 194 ms
tK: channel conversion time for one channel
tU: time for switching to the other channel in the channel group

4-132 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
”Software filter 8 channels” mode

In “Software filter 8 channels” mode, the analog/digital conversion occurs in exactly
the same way as in “hardware filter 8 channels” mode. That is to say, as the
module contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert
simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels are
converted, all the ADCs convert simultaneously for the odd-numbered channels 1,

(simultaneous)
K0 K2 K4 K6
Scan time

(simultaneous)
K1 K3 K5 K7
Figure 4-43 Software filter 8 channels scan time

The channel conversion time depends, however, on the programmed interference
frequency suppression. When you set an interference frequency of 50 Hz, the
channel conversion time including communication time is 30 ms. When you set an
interference frequency of 60 Hz, the channel conversion time is 25 ms. When you
set an interference frequency of 400 Hz, the channel conversion time is reduced to
8 ms. As with 8-channel hardware filter mode, the module must be switched over
by means of opto MOS relays with a time of 12 ms for switching to the other
channel of the group. This relationship is shown in the table that follows.

A5E00105505-03 4-133
Analog Modules
Table 4-70 Scan Times in “Software Filter, 8 Channels” Mode
Programmed Channel Scan Time* Module Scan Time (All

Interference Frequency Channels)
Suppression
50 Hz 42 ms 84 ms
60 Hz 37 ms 74 ms
400 Hz 20 ms 40 ms
* Channel scan time = channel conversion time + 12 ms switching time to the other channel
in the channel group
Scan time in “Hardware Filter, 4 Channels” mode

In this mode, the module does not switch between the channels of the different
groups. As the module contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the
ADCs convert simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6.

(simultaneous)
Scan time
K0 K2 K4 K6

communication time of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD is 10 ms. As
the module does not switch over between the channels in a group, the channel
scan time and the module scan time are the same: 10 ms.
Channel conversion time = channel scan time = module scan time = 10 ms

4-134 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Prolongation of the scan time with a wire-break check

The wire-break check is a software function of the module that is available in all
operating modes.
In the 8-channel hardware and software filter operating modes, the scan time
of the module is doubled, irrespective of the number of channels for which
wire-break has been enabled.
In the 4-channel hardware filter operating mode, the module interrupts
processing of the input data 170 ms and performs a wire-break check. In other
words, each wire-break check prolongs the scan time of the module by 170 ms.
Smoothing of the measured values

You fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog
values in Section 4.6.
Special characteristic with short-circuit to M or L

Diagnostics
4.23.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the

SM 331; AI 8 x RTD
Measuring Methods
• RTD 4-conductor measurement
• RTD 3-conductor measurement
• Resistor 4-conductor measurement
• Resistor 3-conductor measurement

A5E00105505-03 4-135
Analog Modules
Unused Channels
You must terminate an unused channel of an enabled channel group with a
nominal resistance in order to avoid diagnostic errors for the unused channel (refer
to the block diagram, Figure 4-41, for the connection).
In the “4-Channel Hardware Filter” operating mode, termination is not necessary
provided that you have disabled the unused channel groups. Channels 1, 3, 5 and
7 are not monitored in this mode.
Measuring ranges
in STEP 7.
Table 4-71 Measuring ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x RTD

Resistors: 150 You will find the digital analog values in
(Three-conductor/four-cond 300 Section 4.3.1
uctor terminal) 600
Resistance RTD Pt 100 climate
(Three-conductor/four-cond Pt 200 climate
uctor terminal) Pt 500 climate
Pt 1000 climate
Ni 100 climate
Ni 120 climate
Ni 200 climate
Ni 500 climate
Ni 1000 climate
Cu 10 climate
Pt 100 standard
Pt 200 standard
Pt 500 standard
Pt 1000 standard
Ni 100 standard
Ni 120 standard
Ni 200 standard
Ni 500 standard
Ni 1000 standard
Cu 10 standard

4-136 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules

The programmable limit values (triggers for hardware interrupt) differ for the AI 8
RTD from the range of values shown in Table 4-68.
can vary between the lower limits shown in the table below and 32511 (7EFFH).
values shown in the table below.

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Byte
analog
Upper limit exceeded in
markers 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
channel
Lower limit exceeded in
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
channel
End-of-scan-cycle event X 2
Unassigned bit 3

A5E00105505-03 4-137
Analog Modules
4.24 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

(6ES7331-7PF10-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7331-7PF10-0AB0
Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC has the following features:
• 8 differential inputs for thermocouples (TC) in 4 channel groups
• Optional setting of the thermocouple type per channel group
• Programmable reaction to open thermocouple

When you use the SM 331; AI 8 x TC in the distributed peripheral ET 200M, you
must have one of the following IM 153-x:
• IM 153-1; as of 6ES7153-1AA03-0XB0, E 01
• IM 153-2; as of 6ES7153-2AA02-0XB0, E 05
• IM 153-2; as of 6ES7153-2AB01-0XB0, E 04

4-138 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC
SF 1 L- M+ 21 L+
2 22
3 23
DC
4 to 24
DC
5 25
6 26
TC+0 TC+4
Channel 7 27
0 TC-4 K4
TC-0 8 28
TC+1 TC+5
Channel 9 29
1 ADC ADC TC-5 K5
TC-1
10 30
TC+2 TC+6
Channel 11 31
2 TC-2 ADC ADC K6
12 32 TC-6
TC+3 TC+7
Channel 13 Back- 33
3 TC-3 plane TC-7 K7
14 bus 34
inter- 35
KV+
15
face
16 36 KV-
Ext KV
lc+
17 37
Ext lc-
18 38
KV
19 39
20 40 M
Channel
number
Figure 4-45 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00105505-03 4-139
Analog Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

(in millimeters)
Data for Specific Module time/ resolution (per
channel)
Supports clocked No
operation • Programmable Yes
Length of cable • Basic conversion time in 95
• Shielded max. 100 m ms
Voltages, Currents, Potentials • Additional conversion 4

Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC monitoring, in ms
electronics L+
• Resolution including 16 bits
• Reverse polarity protection Yes sign
Constant measured current for typ. 0.7 mA • Noise suppression 400/60/50
resistance-type sensor for interference
frequency f1 in Hz
Isolation
Smoothing of the measured None / low/ average/ high
• Between channels and Yes values
backplane bus
Basic response time of 190 ms
• Between channels and Yes module (all channels
power supply of the enabled)
electronics
Module filtering mode 8 channels, software
In groups of 2 Integration time/conversion
Permitted potential difference channel)
• Between the inputs (UCM ) 75 VDC / 60 VAC • Programmable Yes
• Between MANA and 75 VDC 60 VAC • Basic conversion time in 23/72/83
Minternal (UISO) ms
Insulation tested with 500 VDC • Additional conversion 4
Current consumption monitoring, in ms
• From the backplane bus max. 100 mA • Resolution including 16 bits
• From supply voltage max. 240 mA sign
L+
• Noise suppression 400/60/50
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.0 W for interference
frequency f1 in Hz

values
Basic response time of 46/144/166 ms

module (all channels
enabled)

4-140 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Analog Value Generation (Cont’d) -230 °C to -200 °C ±3.0 °C

Measuring principle Integrating Type R +100 °C to +1769 °C ±1.5 °C
Module filtering mode 4 channels, hardware -50 °C to +100 °C ±1.8 °C
Integration time/conversion time/ resolution (per channel) Type S +100 °C to +1769 °C ±1.7 °C
• Programmable Yes -50 °C to +100 °C ±2.0 °C
• Basic conversion time in 1.0 Type B 4) +200 °C to +1820 °C ±2.3 °C
ms
+45 °C +200 °C ±2.5 °C
• Additional conversion 93 1)
time for open-circuit Type C +100 °C to +2315 °C ±2.3 °C
monitoring, in ms
0 °C +100 °C ±2.5 °C
• Resolution including 16 bits
Basic error (operational limit at 25°C, referred to input
sign
range)
• Noise suppression for 400/60/50
• Thermocouple
frequency f1 in Hz
Type T -200 °C to +400 °C ±0.2 °C
values -230 °C to -200 °C ±0.5 °C
Basic response time of 10 ms Type U -150 °C to +400 °C ±0.2 °C
enabled) -200 °C to -150 °C ±0.5 °C
Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Type E -200 °C to +1000 °C ±0.2 °C

Noise suppression for f = n (f1 ± 1%), -230 °C to -200 °C ±0.5 °C
(f1 = interference frequency) n = 1.2, etc.
Type J -150 °C to +1200 °C ±0.2 °C
interference (Ucm < 60 -210 °C to -150 °C ±0.5 °C
VAC)
Type L -150 °C to +900 °C ±0.2 °C
• Series-mode > 90 dB 2)
-200 °C to -150 °C ±0.5 °C
interference (peak value
of interference < rated Type K -200 °C to +1372 °C ±0.2 °C
-230 °C to -200 °C ±1.0 °C
inputs Type N -200 °C to +1300 °C ±0.2 °C
Operational limit (over entire temperature range, referred -230 °C to -200 °C ±1.0 °C
to 0 to 60 °C input range) Note: This limit does not cover
the error cold connection point3) Type R +100 °C to +1769 °C ±0.2 °C
• Thermocouple -50 °C to +100 °C ±0.5 °C
Type T -200 °C to +400 °C ±0.7 °C Type S +100 °C to +1769 °C ±0.2 °C
-230 °C to -200 °C ±1.0 °C -50 °C to +100 °C ±0.5 °C
Type U -150 °C to +400 °C ±0.9 °C Type B 4) +200 °C to +1820 °C ±0.3 °C
-200 °C to -150 °C ±1.2 °C +45 °C to +200 °C ±0.5 °C
Type E -200 °C to +1000 °C ±1.2 °C Type C +100 °C to +2315 °C ±0.3 °C
-230 °C to -200 °C ±1.5 °C 0 °C +100 °C ±0.5 °C
Type J -150 °C to +1200 °C ±1.4 °C
-210 °C to -150 °C ±1.7 °C
Type L -150 °C to +900 °C ±1.5 °C
-200 °C to -150 °C ±1.8 °C
Type K -200 °C to +1372 °C ±2.1 °C
-230 °C to -200 °C ±2.9 °C
Type N -200 °C to +1300 °C ±2.2 °C

A5E00105505-03 4-141
Analog Modules
Temperature error (with ±0.005%/K Data for Selecting a Sensor

Input ranges (rated values)/
Linearity error (with ± 0.02% input resistance
reference to the input range) • Thermocouples Type B, C, N, E, R, S, J, L,
Repeat accuracy (in the ±0.01% T, K, U
steady state at 25 °C, Maximum input voltage for 20 VDC continuous; 75
referred to the output range voltage input (destruction VDC for max. 1 s (duty
3)
limit) factor 1:20)
Status, interrupts, diagnostics Characteristic linearization Programmable
Interrupts Temperature compensation Programmable
• Hardware interrupt Programmable • Internal temperature Possible
(channels 0 to 7) compensation
• Diagnostic interrupt Programmable • External temperature Possible

compensation with
Diagnostic functions Programmable Pt 100
• Group error display Red LED (SF) • Compensation for 0°C Possible
• Diagnostics information Possible comparison point
read-out temperature
• Compensation for 50°C Possible
comparison point
temperature
• Technical unit for Degrees Celsius/
temperature degrees Fahrenheit
measurement
1) Open-circuit monitoring in 4 channels, Hardware operating mode is performed every 3 seconds.

2) Series-mode rejection in 8 channels, software mode is reduced as follows:
50 Hz > 70 dB
60 Hz > 70 dB
400 Hz > 80 dB
3) The operational limit comprises only the basic error of the analog input at Ta = 25 °C and the total
temperature error. The total error must cover the error for the compensation of the cold connection
point. Internal compensation of the cold connection point = max. 1.5 °C
External compensation of the cold connection point = accuracy of the used external RTD is +0.1 °C
External compensation of the cold connection point, where the connection point is held at 0 °C or 50
°C = accuracy of the connection point temperature control.
4) Because of the slight rise over the range of approx. 0 °C to 85 °C, the lack of compensation of the
comparison point temperature only has a negligible effect on a type B thermocouple. If there is no
compensation and the measuring method “Compensation to 0 °C” is set, the deviation in the type B
thermocouple duringtemperature measurement is: 200 °C to 1802 °C <0.5 °C

4-142 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
4.24.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x TC
You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC bits in STEP 7.
Parameter
Parameterization restrictions when using the analog input module SM 331;

AI 8 x TC with PROFIBUS masters that only support DPV0.
When you use the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC in an ET 200M
Table 4-73 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Settings meter
Type
Enable
Yes/no
No
Dynamic Module
• Hardware interrupt Yes/no
at end of cycle No
interrupt
• Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 32767 Dynamic Channel
• Lower limit value –32512 to 32511 -32768
Diagnostics
Channel
Static
group
check

A5E00105505-03 4-143
Analog Modules
Table 4-73 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC, continued

Settings meter
Type
Measurement
• Measuring Method Deactivated TC-IL
TC-IL Thermocouple
(linear, internal
comparison)
TC-EL Thermocouple
(linear, external
comparison)
TC-L00C Thermocouple (linear, ref. Channel
Dynamic
temperature 0°C) group
TC-L50C Thermocouple (linear, ref.
temperature 50°C)
• Measuring Range For the settable measuring ranges of Type K
the input channels, please refer to
the individual module description.
• Reaction to open Overflow; underflow Overflow
thermocouple
• Temperature unit Degrees Celsius; degrees Degrees Dynamic Module
Fahrenheit Celsius
• Module filtering 8 channels hardware filter 8 channels, Dynamic Module
mode 8 channels software filter hardware
4 channels hardware filter filter
• Interference 50/60/400 Hz; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 50/60/400 Dynamic Channel
suppression* Hz group
• Smoothing None None Dynamic Channel
Low group
Average
High

4-144 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC are arranged in four groups of two. You
Table 4-74 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC to Channel Groups

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7

violation
STEP 7.

The SM 331; AI 8 x TC operates in one of the following modes:
• “Software filter, 8 channels”

A5E00105505-03 4-145
Analog Modules
“Hardware filter 8 channels” mode

In 8-channel hardware filter mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC

(simultaneous)
K0 K2 K4 K6
Scan time

(simultaneous)
K1 K3 K5 K7
Scan time in the mode

communication time of analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC is 91 ms. The
opto-MOS relays. Opto-MOS relays need 7 ms to switch and settle. Each channel
needs a time of 98 ms, so that the scan time is exactly 196 ms.
Scan time = 196 ms

4-146 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
“Software filter 8 channels” mode

In 8-channel software filter mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC

(simultaneous)
K0 K2 K4 K6
Scan time

(simultaneous)
K1 K3 K5 K7
Figure 4-47 Software filter 8 channels scan time

A5E00105505-03 4-147
Analog Modules

In the 8-channel software filter mode of analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC, the
channel conversion time is guided by the interference frequency set. When you set
an interference frequency of 50 Hz, the channel conversion time including
communication time is 76 ms. When you set an interference frequency of 60 Hz,
the channel conversion time is 65 ms. When you set an interference frequency of
400 Hz, the channel conversion time is reduced to 16 ms. As with 8-channel
hardware filter mode, the module must be switched over by means of opto MOS
relays with a switchover time of 7 ms to the other channel of the group. Table 4-75
shows the scan time of the module at a certain interference frequency.
Table 4-75 Scan Times in “Software Filter, 8 Channels” Mode

Suppression
50 Hz 83 ms 166 ms
60 Hz 72 ms 144 ms
400 Hz 23 ms 46 ms

In 4-channel hardware filter mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC does
not switch over between the channels of the individual groups. As the module
contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert
simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6.

(simultaneous)
Scan time
K0 K2 K4 K6

4-148 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules

communication time of analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC is 10 ms. As the
module does not switch over between the channels in a group, the channel scan
time and the module scan time are the same: 10 ms.

operating modes.
In the 8-Channel Hardware and Software Filter operating mode prolongs the
scan time of the module by 4 ms, irrespective of the number of channels for which
In the 4-Channel Hardware Filter operating mode, the module interrupts

values in Section 4.6.

Diagnostics

A5E00105505-03 4-149
Analog Modules

AI 8 x TC
Measuring Methods
• Thermocouple, linearization with reference temperature 0 °C
• Thermocouple, linearization with reference temperature 50 °C
• Thermocouples, linearization with internal comparison
• Thermocouple, linearization with external comparison
Unused Channels
You must terminate an unused channel in an enabled channel group to avoid
diagnostic errors for the unused channel. To do this, short the Plus input and Minus
input of the channel.
Measuring ranges
in STEP 7.
Table 4-76 Measuring Ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x TC

TC-L00C: Type B You will find the digitized analog values
(thermocouple, linear, Type C in Section 4.3.1 in the temperature range
reference temperature
Type E
0 °C)
Type J
TC-L50C:
(thermocouple, linear, Type K
reference temperature Type L
50 °C) Type N
TC-IL: Type R
(thermocouple, linear,
internal compensation) Type S
TC-EL: Type T
(thermocouple, linear, Type U
external compensation)

4-150 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules

The programmable limit values (triggers for hardware interrupt) differ for the
AI 8 x TC from the range of values shown in Table 4-73.
can vary between the lower limits shown in the Table below and 32511 (7EFFH).
values shown in the tables below.
Table 4-77 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 x TC in °C
Thermo- Minimum Possible Minimum Possible

couple Upper Limit Value Lower Limit Value
in °C Dec. Hex. in °C Dec. Hex.
Type B 1820.1 18201 471AH 0 0 0
Type C --- --- --- --- --- ---
Type E --- --- --- --- --- ---
Type J 1200.1 12001 2EE1H <-210.0 <-2100
Type K 1372.1 13721 3599H <-270.0 <-2700
Type L 900.1 9001 2329H <-200.0 <-2000 < F830H

Type N --- --- --- --- --- ---
Type R, S 1769.1 1769.1 451BH -50.1 -501 FE0BH
Type T 400.1 4001 0FA1H <-270.0 <-2700
Type U 600.1 6001 1771H <-200.0 <-2000 < F830H

A5E00105505-03 4-151
Analog Modules
Table 4-78 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 x TC in °F
Thermo- Minimum Possible Minimum Possible

couple Upper Limit Value Lower Limit Value
in °F Dec. Hex. in °F Dec. Hex.
Type B 2786.6 27866 6CDAH 0 0 0
Type C --- --- --- --- --- ---
Type E --- --- -- --- --- --
Type J 2192.2 21922 55A2H <-346.0 <-3460
Type K 2501.8 25018 61BAH <454.0 <-4540 <EE44H

Type L 1652.2 16522 408AH <-328.0 <-3280 F330H
Type N --- --- --- --- --- ---
Type R, S 3216.4 3216.4 7DA4H -58.2 -582 FDBAH
Type T 752.2 7522 1062H <454.0 <-4540 <EE44H
Type U 1112.2 11122 2B72H <-328.0 <-3280

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Byte
Analog 2 bits per channel to identify the range
special
marker 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
channel
s
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
channel
Unassigned byte 3

4-152 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules

(6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0)

6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0

6AG1 331-7KB02-2AB0
Characteristics
features:
• Two inputs in one channel group
• Measured-value resolution (depending on the integration time set)
– 9 bits + sign
– 12 bits + sign
– 14 bits + sign
– Voltage
– Current
– Resistors
– Temperature
• One channel with limit monitoring
• Isolated against load voltage (except when at least one
coding key is inserted in position D)
Resolution
The resolution of the measured value is a direct function of the integration time
selected. In other words the longer the integration time for an analog input channel,
the more accurate the resolution of the measured value will be (see Technical
Specifications of the module and Table 4-6 on page 4-10).

A5E00105505-03 4-153
Analog Modules
Thermocouples, Resistance test

Fault indicator – red Voltage measurement
Current measurement
L+ 24V
SF Internal Current Multi- Meas. range M0 + CH0 M0 + CH0
supply source plexer module
M0* M0*
M1 + CH1 IC0 +
M1* IC0*
Internal
T compensation
+ External Comp +
compensation
None
Comp
Comp–/ Mana
ADC
Isolation
Backplane SF
bus
interface
M
Figure 4-49 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits
The input resistances depend on the measuring range selected (refer to the
technical specifications for the module).

4-154 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules

(in millimeters)
Weight Approx. 250 g time/ resolution (per
channel)
• Parameters can be Yes
Supports clocked operation No assigned
Number of inputs 2 • Integration time in 2.5 162/3 20 100
• For resistance-type 1 milliseconds
sensor
• Basic conversion time 6 34 44 204
Length of cable max. 200 m including Integration
• Shielded max. 50 m at 80 mV and time in milliseconds
thermocouples Additional conversion 1 1 1 1
Voltages, Currents, Potentials time for measuring
resistance, in ms
Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC or
electronics L +
Additional conversion 10 10 10 10
• Reverse polarity Yes time for open-circuit
protection monitoring, in ms
Power supply of the or
transmitters Additional conversion 16 16 16 16
• Supply current max. 60 mA (per channel) time for measuring
resistance and
• Short-circuit-proof Yes open-circuit monitoring,
in ms
Constant current for typ. 1.67 mA
resistance-type sensor • Resolution in bits (incl. 9 12 12 14
overrange) bits bits bits bits
Isolation
• Noise suppression for 400 60 50 10
• Between channels and Yes frequency f1 in Hz
backplane bus
• Basic response time of 6 34 44 204
• Between channels and Yes module, in ms (all
power supply of the channels enabled)
electronics
– Not for 2-wire Smoothing of the measured None
transmitter values
Permitted potential
difference 2.5 VDC
MANA (UCM)
– At signal = 0 V
Minternal (UISO)
Current consumption
• From the backplane bus max. 30 mA (without
L+ two-wire transmitter)
module

A5E00105505-03 4-155
Analog Modules

Noise suppression for f = n (f1 " 1 %), Interrupts
(f1 = interference frequency) n=1.2... • Hardware interrupt Programmable
• Common-mode > 70 dB when limit has been channel 0
interference exceeded
(UCM < 2.5 V) • Diagnostic interrupt Programmable
• Series-mode noise > 40 dB Diagnostic functions Programmable
(peak value of
noise < nominal value of • Group error display Red LED (SF)
input range) • Diagnostics information Possible
read-out
inputs Data for Selecting a Sensor
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with Input range (rated
reference to the input range) values)/Input resistance
• Voltage input 80 mV "1% • Voltage " 80 mV /10 MΩ
250 to 1000 " 0.6 % " 250 mV /10 MΩ

mV " 500 mV /10 MΩ
2.5 to 10 V " 0.8 % "1000 mV /10 MΩ

" 2.5 V /100kΩ
• Current input 3.2 to 20 mA " 0.7 %
"5V /100kΩ
• Resistors 150Ω; 300Ω; " 0, 7 % 1 to 5 V; /100kΩ
600 Ω
" 10 V /100kΩ
• Thermocouple Type E, N, J, " 1, 1 %
K, L • Current " 3.2 mA /25 Ω
" 10 mA /25 Ω
• Resistance Pt 100/ " 0, 7 %
thermometer Ni 100 " 20 mA /25 Ω
0 to 20 mA; /25 Ω
Pt 100 " 0, 8 %
climate 4 to 20 mA: /25 Ω
Basic error (operational limit at 25 C referred to input • Resistors 150 Ω /10 ΜΩ

range) 300 Ω /10 ΜΩ
• Voltage input 80 mV " 0.6 % 600 Ω /10 ΜΩ
250 to 1000 " 0.4 % • Thermocouples Type E, N, J, /10 ΜΩ

mV K, L
2.5 to 10 V " 0.6 % • Resistance Pt 100, /10 ΜΩ

thermometer Ni 100
• Current input 3.2 to 20 mA " 0.5 %
Maximum input voltage for max. 20 V continuous;
• Resistors 150Ω; 300Ω; " 0.5 % voltage input (destruction 75 V for max. 1 s
600 Ω limit) (duty factor 1:20)
• Thermocouple Type E, N, J, " 0.7 % Maximum input current for 40 mA
K, L current input (destruction
• Resistance Pt 100/ " 0.5 % limit)
thermometer Ni 100
Pt 100 " 0.6 %
climate
Linearity error (with " 0.05 %
Repeatability (in steady " 0.05 %
state at 25 C referred to
input range)
Temperature error of internal "1%
compensation

4-156 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Connection of the sensor Characteristic linearization Parameters can be

• For measuring voltage Possible • for thermocouples assigned
Type E, N, J, K, L
• For measuring current
• For RTD Pt 100
Possible (standard, climate range)
As two-wire transmitter Ni 100
Possible (standard, climate range)
As four-wire transmitter
Temperature compensation Parameters can be
• assigned
For measuring
resistance • Internal temperature Possible
Possible compensation
connection • External temperature Possible
Possible compensation with
With three-conductor
connection compensating box
With four-conductor • Compensation for 0 C Possible
connection comparison point
temperature
• Load of the two-wire max. 820 Ω
transmitter • Technical unit for Degrees Celsius
temperature
measurement
You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits by means of a

measuring range module on the module and in STEP 7.
Measuring range module

If necessary, the measuring range module must be replugged to change the
measuring method and the measuring range. The steps you have to perform to do
this are described in detail in Section 4.4.
The corresponding table in Section 4.25.2 tells you which assignment you have to
select for which measuring method and measuring range. In addition, the
necessary settings are embossed on the module.

The measuring range module is preset to “B” (voltage; " 10 V) when the module
is supplied.

A5E00105505-03 4-157
Analog Modules
Table 4-80 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits Using Measuring Range Module

Module Setting
A Voltage "1000 mV
B Voltage "10 V
Parameter

Settings meter
Type
Enable

interrupt
• Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 – Dynamic Channel
Diagnostics
Channel
Static
group
check

4-158 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Table 4-81 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits, continued

Settings meter
Type
Measurement
U Voltage
R-4L Resistance (four-conductor
connection)
(linear, four-conductor
connection)
TC-I Thermocouple Channel or
(internal comparison) Dynamic Channel
TC-E Thermocouple group
TC-IL Thermocouple
(linear, internal comparison)
TC-EL Thermocouple
(linear, external comparison)
• Measuring Range Refer to Section 4.25.2 for the "10 V
Suppression
Channel groups
The two channels of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits are combined
to a channel group. You can only ever assign parameters to the channel group.
The SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits has a measuring range module for the channel group 0.
Special characteristic of channel groups with resistance measurement

If you use the resistance measurement method, the analog input module has only
one channel. The “2nd” channel is used for current injection (IC).
The measured value is obtained by accessing the “1st” channel. The “2nd” channel
has the default carry value “7FFFH”.

You can set a hardware interrupt in STEP 7 for the channel group. Note, however,
that a hardware interrupt is set only for the first channel in the channel group in
each case – in other words, for channel 0.
Diagnostics

A5E00105505-03 4-159
Analog Modules

AI 2 x 12 bits
Measuring Methods
• Resistance test
• Temperature measurement
You perform the setting by means of the measuring range module on the module
Unused Channels
“measuring method” parameter for unused channels to “disabled”. In this way you
shorten the scan time of the module.
If you do not use the COMP input, you must short-circuit it also.

comes on.
b) Connect the unused input with a resistance of 1.5 to 3.3 k You may then
Measuring ranges
module on the module and with the “measuring method” parameter in STEP 7.

4-160 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules

U: Voltage " 80 mV A You will find the digitized analog
" 250 mV values in Section 4.3.1 in the
voltage measuring range
" 500 mV
" 1000 mV
" 2.5 V B
"5V
1 to 5 V
" 10 V
TC-I: Thermocouple Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] A You will find the digitized analog
(internal compensation) Type E [NiCr-CuNi] values in Section 4.3.1 in " 80 mV
(thermovoltage the voltage measuring range
Type J [Fe-CuNi]
measurement)
Type K [NiCr-Ni]
TC-E: Thermocouples Type L [Fe-CuNi]
(external compensation)
(thermovoltage
measurement)
2DMU: Current (2-wire 4 to 20 mA D You will find the digitized analog
transmitter) values in Section 4.3.1 in the
current measuring range
4DMU: Current (4-wire " 3.2 mA C
transmitter) " 10 mA
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
" 20 mA
R-4L: Resistors 150 A You will find the digitized analog
(four-conductor connection) 300 values in Section 4.3.1 in the
resistance measuring range
600
TC-IL: thermocouples Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] A You will find the digitized analog
(linear, internal Type E [NiCr-CuNi] values in Section 4.3.1 in the
compensation) temperature range
Type J [Fe-CuNi]
(temperature measurement) The characteristics are linearized:
Type K [NiCr-Ni]
• Pt 100 to DIN IEC 751
Type L [Fe-CuNi]
• Ni 100 according to IEC DIN
TC-EL: Thermocouples Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] A 43760
(linear, external Type E [NiCr-CuNi] • Thermocouple to DIN 584,
compensation) Type J [Fe-CuNi] type L to DIN 43710.
(temperature measurement)
Type K [NiCr-Ni]
Type L [Fe-CuNi]
RTD-4L: Bulb resistor Pt 100 climate A
(linear, four-conductor Ni 100 climate
connection) Pt 100 standard
Ni 100 standard

A5E00105505-03 4-161
Analog Modules
Default Settings
and the “" 10 V” measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring
method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 331; AI 8 12 bits
with STEP 7.
Wire-Break Check
The wire-break check is intended primarily for temperature measurements
(thermocouples and bulb resistors.

range
falls below 3.6 mA.
program.

4-162 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules

(6ES7332-5HF00-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7332-5HF00-0AB0
Characteristics
The analog input module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits has the following characteristic
features
• 8 Output channels
• The individual output channels can be programmed as
– Voltage outputs
– Current outputs
• Resolution 12 bits
• Isolated against backplane bus interface and load voltage

A5E00105505-03 4-163
Analog Modules
Terminal connection and block diagram of analog output module SM 332;

AO 8 x 12 bits
Voltage outputs
Fault indicator – red Voltage outputs
Current outputs Current outputs
DAC DAC
Internal
supply
Isolation
Backplane
bus
interface
Figure 4-50 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 12 bits

4-164 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits
Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 • Resolution including sign

(in millimeters)
• ± 10 V; ± 20 mA; 11 bits +
Weight Approx. 272 g 4 to 20 mA; 1 to 5 V sign
Data for Specific Module • 0 to 10 V; 0 to 20 mA; 12 bits
• Conversion time (per channel) max. 0.8 ms
Supports clocked No
operation Settling time
• For resistive load 0.2 ms
Number of inputs 8 3.3 ms
• For capacitive load
Length of cable • For inductive load 0.5 ms (1 mH)
• Shielded max. 200 m 3.3 ms (10 mH)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Suppression of interference, Limits of Error
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC • Crosstalk between the > 40 dB

• Reverse polarity protection Yes outputs
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
Isolation reference to the output range)
• Between channels and Yes • Voltage outputs ±0.5 %
backplane bus
• Current outputs ±0.6 %
power supply of the Basic error (operational limit at 25 °C referred to the
electronics output range)
• Between the channels No • Output voltage ± 0.4 %
• Between channels and load Yes • Output current ± 0.5 %
voltage L+
• Temperature error (with ±0.002 % /K
Permitted potential difference reference to the output
range)
• Between S– and MANA 3 VDC
(UCM) • Linearity error (with + 0.05 %
• Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC reference to the output
Minternal (UISO) range)
• Repeat accuracy (in the ±0.05 %
steady state at 25°C,
Current consumption referred to the output
range)
• Output ripple; band ± 0.05 %
• From supply voltage L+ (no max. 340 mA width 0 to 50 kHz (with
load) reference to the output
Power dissipation of the module typically 6.0 W range)

A5E00105505-03 4-165
Analog Modules
Status, interrupts, diagnostics Voltage outputs

Interrupts • Short-circuit protection Yes
• Diagnostic Interrupt Programmable • Short-circuit current max. 25 mA

Current outputs
Diagnostic functions Parameters can be
• Group error display assigned • No-load voltage max. 18 V
• Diagnostics information Red LED (SF) Destruction limit for

read-out Possible voltages/currents connected
from outside
• Voltage at outputs to MANA max. 18 V continuous;
Output ranges (rated values) 75 V for max. 1 s
• Voltage ± 10 V (mark-to-space ratio
0 to 10 V 1:20)
1 to 5 V
• Current max. 50 mA DC
• Current ± 20 mA
0 to 20 mA Connection of actuators
4 to 20 mA • For voltage output
Impedance (in the nominal Four-conductor connection Possible
output range)
• For current output
• For voltage outputs min. 1 kΩ Two-conductor connection Possible
– capacitive load max. 1 F
• For current outputs max. 500 Ω
– At UCM < 1 V max. 600 Ω
– For inductive load max. 10 mH
4.26.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits
Note
If the load voltage (L+) is switched off and on, this may result in incorrect output
values at the output for approx. 10 ms.
Parameter
You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values
in Table 4-42, on page 4-43.

4-166 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Assigning parameters to channels

You can configure each output channel of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits individually.
You can thus assign separate parameters for each output channel.
When you set the parameters with SFCs in the user program, the parameters are
assigned to channel groups. Every output channel of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits is
assigned to a channel group in this instance – in other words, for example output
channel 0 = channel group0.
Note
If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332; AO 8 x 12
bits is in operation, incorrect intermediate values may arise across the output.
Diagnostics

AO 8 x 12 bits
Connecting the analog outputs

You can connect the outputs as voltage or current outputs, or disable them. You
perform connection of the outputs with the “output type” parameter in STEP 7.
Unused Channels
So that unused output channels of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits remain
de-energized, you must set the “output type” parameter to “disabled” and leave the
terminal open.

A5E00105505-03 4-167
Analog Modules
Output ranges
You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7.
Table 4-83 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits
Selected Type of Output Output Range Description

Voltage 1 to 5 V You will find the digital
0 to 10 V analog values in Section
" 10 V 4.3.2 in the voltage and
current output ranges
Current From 0 to 20 mA
From 4 to 20 mA
" 20 mA
Default Settings
The default settings of the module are “Voltage” for the output type and “" 10 V”
for the output range. You can use this combination of output type and output range
without parameterizing the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits in STEP 7.
Wire-Break Check
The analog output module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits carries out a wire-break check
only for current outputs.
Short-circuit test
The analog output module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits carries out a short-circuit test
only for voltage outputs.

4-168 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
4.27 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bit;

synchronous; (6ES7332-7ND01-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7332-7ND01-0AB0
Characteristics
The analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 6 bits has the following characteristic
features:
• 4 outputs in 4 channel groups
– Voltage outputs
– Current outputs
• Resolution of 16 bits
• Supports the “parameter changing during the RUN” function
• Galvanic isolation between:
– Backplane bus interface and analog output channel
– The different analog output channels
– Analog output and L+, M
– Backplane bus interface and L+, M

A5E00105505-03 4-169
Analog Modules

AO 4 x 16 bit

Current Voltage
Outputs Outputs
1 L+
24 V
SF
Isolation
3 QI0 QV 0
4 S 0+
5 CH0 S 0 – CH0
6 MANA 0 M ANA 0
7 QI1 QV 1
8 S 1+
9 CH1 S 1 – CH1
MANA 1 M ANA 1
10
11 QI2 QV 2
12 S 2+
13 CH2 S 2 – CH2
Back-
plane 14 MANA 2 M ANA 2
bus
inter- 15 QI3 QV 3
face S 3+
16
17 CH3 S 3 – CH3
18 MANA 3 M ANA 3
M
20
Figure 4-51 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits
Note
Switching the rated load voltage (L+) off and on for approx. 10 ms can lead to
incorrect intermediate values at the output.

4-170 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bit

Dimensions and Weight • 0 to 20 mAV 14 bits
Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 • 4 to 20 mA 14 bits
(in millimeters)
Conversion time (per channel)
Weight Approx. 220 g • in standard operation max. 0.8 ms
Data for Specific Module • in clocked operation 1.6 ms
Supports clocked Yes Basic response time of module
operation (independent of number of
released channels)
Changing parameters during Yes
the RUN • in standard operation 3.2 ms
possible • in clocked operation 2.4 ms
• Behavior of the non outputs the last valid Settling time
parameterized outputs output value before the
parameterization
• For resistive load 0.2 ms
• For capacitive load 3.3 ms
Number of outputs 4
• For inductive load 0.5 ms (1 mH)
Length of cable 3.3 ms (10 mH)
• Shielded max. 200 m Suppression of interference, Limits of Error

Voltages, Currents, and Potentials Crosstalk between > 100 dB
outputs
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC
• Reverse polarity protection Yes Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
reference to the output range)
Isolation
• Voltage outputs "0.12%
backplane bus • Current outputs "0.18%
• Between channels and Yes Basic error (operational limit at 25° C, referred to output
power supply of the range)
electronics
• Voltage outputs
• Between the channels Yes " 10 V "0.02%
Permitted potential difference 0 to 10 V "0.02%
1 to 5 V "0.04%
• Between the outputs (ECM) 200 VDC / 120 VAC
• Current outputs
Minternal (UISO) " 20 mA "0.02%
0 to 20 mA; "0.02%
4 to 20 mA "0.04%
Current consumption
Temperature error (with
• From the backplane bus max. 100 mA reference to the output range)
• From the load voltage L+ max. 240 mA • Voltage outputs "0.0025% / K

(no load) • Current outputs "0.004% / K
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3 W Linearity error (with reference to "0.004%
the output range)
Analog value generation
Repeat accuracy (in the steady "0.002 %
Resolution state at 25° C, referred to the
(incl. sign) output range)
• "10 V 16 bits Output ripple; band width 0 to "0.05%
• 0 to 10 V 15 bits 50 kHz (with reference to the
output range)
• 1 to 5 V 14 bits
• " 20 mA 15 bits

A5E00105505-03 4-171
Analog Modules
Status, interrupts, diagnostics Voltage outputs

Interrupts • Short-circuit protection Yes
• Diagnostic interrupt Programmable • Short-circuit current max. 40 mA
Diagnostic functions Programmable Current outputs

• No-load voltage max. 18 V
Destruction limit against
• Diagnostic information Possible voltages/currents applied from
readable outside
Substitute value can be applied Yes, programmable • Voltage at outputs to MANA max. 15 V continuous
Data for Selecting an Actuator 75 VDC for no more than
0.1 s
Output ranges (rated values) (pulse duty factor 1 : 20)
• Voltage ±10 V • Current max. 50 mA DC
0 to 10 V
1 to 5 V Connection of actuators
• Current ±20 mA • For voltage output

0 to 20 mA – Four-conductor Possible
4 to 20 mA connection (measuring
circuit)
Load resistance (in the nominal
range of the output) • For current output
• For voltage outputs min. 1 kΩ – Two-conductor Possible
connection
– capacitive load max. 1 µF

– Inductive load max. 1 mH
4.27.1 Synchronicity
Characteristics
Reproducible (i.e. same length) reaction times are achieved with the SIMATIC with
an equidistant DP bus cycle and the synchronization of the following free running
single cycles:
acyclic program branching.
• Free running cycle at the DP-Slave back plane bus.
• Free running cycle during the signal conditioning and conversion in the
electronic modules of the DP-Slave.
In this cycle the processing levels of a CPU (OB 61 to OB 64) and the
synchronous peripheral are synchronized. The I/O data are therefore transferred at
defined and consistent time intervals (clock synchronicity).
Requirements

4-172 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Module filtering mode: Synchronicity

In synchronous operation the following conditions apply:
Processing and activation time TWA between reading the output 1.6 ms
value into the output buffer and loading it into the D/A converter for
the output
TDPmin 2.4 ms
Calculation of the filter and processing time

Independent of the number parameterized channels the same time conditions are
always valid.
TWA
Updating of the
D/A conversion and internal processing output
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH0
1400s 200s
TO
Figure 4-52 Calculation of the processing time and the time for updating the output
Explanation of the mode of operation in synchronous operation

During the time TO - TWA, the module reads the output data and saves the data
internally. After the internal processing time of each channel the results are written
in the individual D/A converters.
Further information
Further information on clock synchronicity can be found in the Online help of
STEP 7, in the manualLocal Peripheral System ET 200M and in the manual
Clock Synchronicity.

A5E00105505-03 4-173
Analog Modules
4.27.2 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bit
Note
When switching on and off the rated load voltage (L+), wrong intermediate values
can occur across the output for approximately 10 ms.
Parameter
in Table 4-42 in the reference manual.

Note
If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332;
AO 4 x 16 bits is in operation, incorrect intermediate values may arise across the
output.
Diagnostics
parameter in Table 4-47 in the reference manual.

4-174 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules

AO 4 x 16 bits

Unused Channels
terminal open.
Output ranges
Table 4-84 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332;

AO 4 x 16 bits

0 to 10 V analog values in section
" 10 V 4.3.2 in the reference
manual in the voltage and
From 4 to 20 mA
" 20 mA
Default Settings
Substitute values
You can configure the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits for the CPU operating mode STOP
as follows: Outputs De-energized, Hold Last Value or Inject Substitute Values. If
you inject substitute values, they must be within the output range.

A5E00105505-03 4-175
Analog Modules

(6ES7332-5HD01-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7332-5HD01-0AB0
Characteristics
features:
– Voltage outputs
– Current outputs

4-176 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules

AO 4 x 12 bits
Fault indicator – red Current Voltage

output outputs
L+
SF 24V
Internal DAC
supply QI0 QV0
S0 +
CH0 S0* CH0
MANA MANA
QI1 QV1
Isolation
S1 +
CH1 S1* CH1
MANA MANA
QI2 QV2
Backplane
SF S2 +
bus CH2 S2* CH2
interface MANA MANA
QI3 QV3
S3 +
CH3 S3* CH3
MANA MANA
M M
Figure 4-53 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits

A5E00105505-03 4-177
Analog Modules

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Resolution including sign
(in millimeters)
• " 10 V; " 20 mA; 11 bits + sign
Weight Approx. 220 g 4 to 20 mA; 1 to 5 V
Data for Specific Module • 0 to 10 V; 0 to 20 mA 12 bits
Supports clocked No Conversion time (per channel) max. 0.8 ms
operation
Settling time
Number of outputs 4 • For resistive load 0.2 ms
Length of cable • For capacitive load 3.3 ms
• Shielded max. 200 m • For inductive load 0.5 ms (1 mH)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials 3.3 ms (10 mH)
Rated load voltage L + 24 VDC Suppression of interference, Limits of Error

• Reverse polarity protection Yes Crosstalk between the outputs > 40 dB
Isolation Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
backplane bus • Voltage outputs " 0.5 %
• Between channels and Yes • Current outputs " 0.6 %
power supply of the Basic error (operational limit at 25° C, referred to output
electronics range)
• Between the channels No • Voltage outputs " 0.4 %
• Between channels and load Yes • Current outputs " 0.5 %
voltage L+
Permitted potential difference reference to the output range)
• Between S– and MANA 3 VDC Linearity error (with reference to " 0.05 %
(UCM) the output range)
• Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC Repeatability (in steady state at " 0.05 %
Minternal (UISO) 25 C, referred to output range)
Insulation tested with 500 VDC Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz " 0.05 %
(referred to output range)
Current consumption
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts
(no load) • Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be
assigned
Diagnostic functions Programmable
• Diagnostic information Possible
readable
Substitute value can be applied Yes, programmable

4-178 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Data for Selecting an Actuator Destruction limit against

voltages/currents applied from
Output ranges (rated values) outside
• Voltage ±10 V • Voltage at outputs to MANA max. 18 V continuous;
0 to 10 V 75 V for max. 1 s (duty
1 to 5 V factor 1:20)
• Current ±20 mA • Current max. 50 mA DC
0 to 20 mA
Load resistance (in the nominal • For voltage output

range of the output) – Four-conductor Possible
• For voltage outputs min. 1 kΩ connection (measuring
circuit)
– capacitive load max. 1 µF
• For current output
– Two-conductor Possible
– At UCM< 1V max. 600 connection
– Inductive load max. 10 mH
Voltage outputs
• Short-circuit protection Yes
• Short-circuit current max. 25 mA
Current outputs
Note
Parameter

A5E00105505-03 4-179
Analog Modules

Note
If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 12
bits is in operation, incorrect intermediate values may arise across the output.
Diagnostics

AO 4 x 12 bits

Unused Channels
terminal open.

4-180 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Output ranges

From 4 to 20 mA
" 20 mA
Default Settings
Wire-Break Check
Short-circuit test
The analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits carries out a short-circuit test
Substitute values
Special characteristic of substitute values for output ranges 1 to 5 V and

4 to 20 mA
The following special characteristic applies to output ranges 1 to 5 V and
4 to 20 mA:
You have to set the substitute value E500H for the output to become de-energized
(refer to Tables 4-35 and 4-37 on pages 4-26 and 4-27).

A5E00105505-03 4-181
Analog Modules

(6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0)

6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0

6AG1 332-5HB01-2AB0
Characteristics
features:
– Voltage outputs
– Current outputs

4-182 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits
Fault indicator – red Current Voltage

output outputs
L+
SF 24V
Internal DAC
supply QI0 QV0
S0 +
CH0 S0* CH0
MANA MANA
QI1 QV1
Isolation
S1 +
CH1 S1* CH1
MANA MANA
SF
Backplane
bus
interface
M M
Figure 4-54 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 12 bits

A5E00105505-03 4-183
Analog Modules

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Resolution including sign
(in millimeters)
• " 10 V; " 20 mA; 11 bits + sign
Weight Approx. 220 g 4 to 20 mA; 1 to 5 V
Data for Specific Module • 0 to 10 V; 0 to 20 mA 12 bits
Supports clocked No Conversion time (per channel) max. 0.8 ms
operation
Settling time
Length of cable • For capacitive load 3.3 ms
• Shielded max. 200 m • For inductive load 0.5 ms (1 mH)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials 3.3 ms (10 mH)
Rated load voltage L + 24 VDC Suppression of interference, Limits of Error

• Reverse polarity protection Yes Crosstalk between the outputs > 40 dB
Isolation Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
backplane bus • Voltage outputs " 0.5 %
• Between channels and Yes • Current outputs " 0.6 %
power supply of the Basic error (operational limit at 25° C, referred to output
electronics range)
• Between the channels No • Voltage outputs " 0.4 %
• Between channels and load Yes • Current outputs " 0.5 %
voltage L+
Permitted potential difference reference to the output range)
• Between S– and MANA 3 VDC Linearity error (with reference to " 0.05 %
(UCM) the output range)
• Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC Repeatability (in steady state at " 0.05 %
Minternal (UISO) 25 C, referred to output range)
Insulation tested with 500 VDC Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz " 0.05 %
(referred to output range)
Current consumption
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts
(no load) • Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be
assigned
Diagnostic functions Programmable
• Diagnostic information Possible
readable
Substitute value can be applied Yes, programmable

4-184 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Data for Selecting an Actuator Destruction limit against

Output ranges (rated values) outside
• Voltage ±10 V • Voltage at outputs to MANA max. 18 V continuous;
0 to 10 V 75 V for max. 1 s (duty
1 to 5 V factor 1:20)
• Current ±20 mA • Current max. 50 mA DC
0 to 20 mA
Load resistance (in the nominal • For voltage output

range of the output) – Two-conductor Possible
• For voltage outputs min. 1 kΩ connection Possible
– capacitive load max. 1 µF – Four-conductor
connection
• For current outputs max. 500 Ω (measuring circuit)
– At UCM< 1V max. 600 • For current output
– Inductive load max. 10 mH – Two-conductor Possible
Voltage outputs connection
• Short-circuit protection Yes

• Short-circuit current max. 25 mA
Current outputs
Note
Parameter

A5E00105505-03 4-185
Analog Modules

Note
If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332; AO
2 12 bits is in operation, incorrect intermediate values can arise across the
output.
Diagnostics

AO 2 x 12 bits

Unused Channels
terminal open.

4-186 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Output ranges

From 4 to 20 mA
" 20 mA
Default Settings
Wire-Break Check
Short-circuit test
The analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits carries out a short-circuit check
Substitute values
Special characteristic of substitute values for output ranges 1 to 5 V and

4 to 20 mA
The following special characteristic applies to output ranges 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20
mA:
You have to set the substitute value E500H for the output to remain de-energized
(refer to Tables 4-35 and 4-37 on pages 4-26 and 4-27).

A5E00105505-03 4-187
Analog Modules
4.30 Analog Input/Output Module SM334;

AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits; (6ES7334-0CE01-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7334-0CE01-0AA0
Characteristics
The analog input/output module SM 334: AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits has the following
characteristic features:
• Four inputs, two outputs
• Not parameterizable, setting of measurement and output type by means of
wiring
• Measuring range of 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA
• Output range of 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA
• Both voltage and current output options
• Non-isolated against the backplane bus interface
• Isolated from load voltage

4-188 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits
Select the measuring method of the input channels and the output type of the
output channels via the wiring.
L+
24V
Internal MV0 +
supply V
M0* CH0
Current measurement
A MI0 +
ADC MV1 +
V
M1* CH1
MI1 +
Voltage
A
MV2 +
V
M2* CH2
A MI2 +
MV3 +
V
Backplane M3*
bus MI3 + CH3
A
interface QV0
DAC V MANA CH0
Current outputs
MANA A QI0
QV1
Voltage
V MANA
CH1
MANA A QI1
M M
Figure 4-55 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input/Output Module SM 334;
AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits
Note
Note when connecting the SM 334 that:
• the analog chassis ground MANA (terminal 15 or 18) is connected to the
chassis ground M of the CPU and/or the interface module (IM). Use a wire
with a minimum cross-section of 1 mm2 for this.
If there is no ground connection between MANA and M, the module switches
off. Inputs are read with 7FFFH; outputs return a value of 0. If the module is run
without a ground connection for some time, it may be destroyed.
• The supply voltage for the CPU and/or the interface module (IM) must not
be connected with reversed polarity. Reverse polarity causes the
destruction of the module because MANA is subjected to an unauthorized high
potential (+24 V).

A5E00105505-03 4-189
Analog Modules
Technical specifications of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits
Dimensions and Weight Time constant of the input max. 0.8 ms

filter
(in millimeters) Basic execution time of the max. 5 ms
module (all channels enabled)
Analog Value Generation for the Outputs
Resolution including sign 8 bits
Supports clocked No
operation Conversion time (per channel) max. 500 s
Number of inputs 4 Settling time
• For capacitive load 3.0 ms
Length of cable
• For inductive load 0.3 ms
Suppression of interference, Limits of Error for the
Inputs
Rated load voltage L + 24 VDC
Noise suppression for f = n (f1 " 1 %)
Power rated voltage of the rated 24 VDC (f1 = interference frequency)
electronics voltage and rated
load voltage L+
interference (Upp
Isolation < 1 V)
• Between channels and No Crosstalk between the outputs > 50 dB

backplane bus
• Between channels and Yes reference to the input range)
power supply of the
electronics
• Voltage input " 0.9 %
• Current input " 0.8 %
Between the channels No
Basic error (operational limit at 25° C, referred to input
Permitted potential difference range)
• Between inputs and MANA 1 VDC • Voltage input " 0.7 %
(UCM)
• Current input " 0.6 %
• Between the inputs (ECM) 1 VDC
Insulation tested with 500 VDC reference to the input range)
Current consumption Linearity error (with reference to " 0.05 %

the input range)
Repeatability (in steady state at " 0.05 %
• From power supply and max. 110 mA 25 C referred to input range)
load voltage L+ (no load)
Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz " 0.05 %
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3 W (referred to output range)
Analog Value Generation for the Inputs
Measuring principle Instantaneous value
conversion
Integration/conversion time (per
channel)
• Parameters can be No
assigned
• Integration time in 500
milliseconds
• Basic conversion time 100
including Integration time in
milliseconds
• Resolution including sign 8 bits

4-190 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Data for Selecting an Actuator

Crosstalk between the outputs > 40 dB Output ranges (rated values)
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with • Voltage 0 to 10 V
reference to the output range) • Current 0 to 20 mA
• Voltage outputs "0.6 % Impedance (in the nominal
• Current outputs "1.0 % output range)
Basic error (operational limit at 25 C referred to the • For voltage outputs min. 5 k
output range) – capacitive load max. 1 F
• Voltage outputs "0.5 % • For current outputs max. 300
• Current outputs "0.5 % – Inductive load max. 1 m
Temperature error (with refe- "0.02 %/K Voltage outputs

rence to the output range) • Short-circuit protection Yes
Linearity error (with reference to " 0.05 % • Short-circuit current max. 11 mA
the output range) Current outputs
Repeat accuracy (in the steady " 0.05 % • No-load voltage max. 15 V
state at 25 C referred to the
output range) Destruction limit against
Output ripple (bandwidth " 0.05 % outside
referred to the output range)
• Voltage at outputs to MANA max. 15 V continuous;
Status, interrupts, diagnostics • Current
Interrupts None max. 50 mA DC
Diagnostic functions None Connection of actuators

• For voltage output
Two-conductor connection Possible
Input range (rated values)/Input
Four-conductor connection Not possible
resistance
(measuring circuit)
• Voltage 0 to 10 V/100 k
• Current 0 to 20 mA/50
Maximum input voltage for max. 20 V continuous; Two-conductor connection Possible
voltage input (destruction limit) 75 V for max. 1 s
(duty factor 1:20)
Maximum input current for 40 mA
current input (destruction limit)

As two-wire transmitter Not possible

A5E00105505-03 4-191
Analog Modules
4.30.1 Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits
The analog/output module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits is a non-isolated module.

You cannot program the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits.
Important information on connecting the module
Note
Note when connecting the SM 334 that:
• the analog chassis ground MANA (terminal 15 or 18) is connected to the
chassis ground M of the CPU and/or the interface module (IM). Use a wire
with a minimum cross-section of 1 mm2 for this.
If there is no ground connection between MANA and M, the module switches
off. Inputs are read with 7FFFH; outputs return a value of 0. If the module is run
without a ground connection for some time, it may be destroyed.
• the supply voltage for the CPU and/or the interface module (IM) must not
be connected with reversed polarity. Reverse polarity causes the
destruction of the module because MANA is subjected to an unauthorized high
potential (+24 V).
Addressing
The inputs and outputs of the module are addressed as of the initial module
address.
The address of a channel is obtained from the module start address and an
address offset.
Input Addresses
The following addresses apply to the inputs:
Chan- Address
nel
0 Initial module address
1 Module start address + 2 bytes address offset

4-192 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Output Addresses
The following channel addresses apply to the module outputs:
Chan- Address
nel
0 Initial module address
4.30.2 Measuring/output method and measuring/output range of the

SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits
You cannot program the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits.
Selecting the Measurement Method and the Type of Output

Select the measuring method of an input channel (voltage, current) by wiring the
input channel appropriately.
Select the type of output of an output channel (voltage, current) by wiring the
output channel appropriately.
Unused Channels
You must short-circuit unused input channels and you should connect them to
MANA. In this way, you obtain an optimum noise immunity for the analog module.
Unused output channels must be left open.
Measuring ranges
The SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits has the measuring ranges 0 to 10 V and 0 to 20
mA.
Unlike the other analog modules, the SM 334 has a lower resolution and no
negative measuring ranges. Take this into account when you read measured value
tables 4-10 and 4-14 on pages 4-13 and 4-15.
Output ranges
The SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits has the output ranges 0 to 10 V and 0 to 20 mA.
Unlike the other analog modules, the SM 334 has a lower resolution the analog
outputs do not have underranges. Take this into account when you read tables
4-35 and 4-37 on pages 4-26 and 4-27.

A5E00105505-03 4-193
Analog Modules
4.31 Analog Input/Output Module SM 334;

AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits; (6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0)

6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0

6AG1 334-0KE00-2AB0
Characteristics
The SM 334 has the following characteristic features:
• Four inputs in two groups
• 2 outputs (voltage outputs)
• Resolution of 12 bits + sign
• Measuring method selectable
– Voltage
– Resistors
– Temperature
• Isolated from load voltage

4-194 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Terminal connection and block diagram of the SM334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits
Voltage input Resistance test
L+ 24V
Current IC01+ CH0
source M0 +
Internal M0*
supply Multiplexer M1 + CH1
M1*
IC01*
MANA
IC23+
Back-
plane M2+ CH2
bus M2 +
inter-
face U
M2* M2*
M3 +
M3 + CH3
U M3* M3*
MANA IC23*
DAC QV0
V MANA CH0
MANA
QV1
V MANA CH1
MANA
M
M
Voltage
outputs
Figure 4-56 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits

A5E00105505-03 4-195
Analog Modules
Technical specifications of the SM334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits
Dimensions and Weight Analog Value Generation for the Inputs

(in millimeters)
Integration/conversion time (per
Weight Approx. 200 g channel)
Data for Specific Module • Parameters can be Yes
assigned
Supports clocked No
operation • Integration time in 162/3 20
milliseconds
Number of inputs 4
• For resistance-type sensor 4
• Basic conversion time 72 85
including Integration time in
Number of outputs 2 milliseconds
Shielded line length max. 100 m • Additional conversion time 72 85
for measuring resistance, in
ms
Rated load voltage L + 24 VDC
• Resolution in bits (incl.) 12 bits 12 bits
• Reverse polarity protection Yes overrange)
Supply voltage of the rated 24 VDC • Suppression of interference 60 50
electronics voltage and rated voltage for interference
load voltage L+ frequency f1 in Hertz
Power supply of the Smoothing of the measured Programmable,
transmitters values in 2 stages
• Short-circuit-proof Yes Time constant of the input 0.9 ms
filter
Constant measured current for
resistance-type sensor Basic response time of module 350 ms
• For PT 100 typ. 490 A
Analog Value Generation for the Outputs
• At 10 k at 105 A
Resolution (incl. Overrange 12 bits
Isolation
• Between channels and Yes Conversion time (per channel) 500 s
backplane bus Settling time
• Between channels and Yes • For resistive load max. 0.8 ms
power supply of the
electronics
• For capacitive load max. 0.8 ms
Between the channels No

• Between inputs and MANA 1V
(UCM)
• Between the inputs (ECM) 1V
Minternal-(UISO)
Current consumption
• From power supply and max. 80 mA
load voltage L+ (no load)

4-196 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Suppression of interference, Limits of Error for the Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Inputs
Interrupts None
Noise suppression for f = n (f1 " 1 %)
(f1 = interference frequency)
interference Input range (rated values)/Input
(Upp < 1 V) resistance
• Series-mode interference > 36 dB • Voltage 0 to 10 V 100 k
(peak value of interference
• Resistors 10 k 10 m
range) • Temperature PT 100 10 m
Crosstalk between the inputs > 88 dB Maximum input voltage for max. 20 V continuous;
voltage input (destruction limit) 75 V for max. 1 s
(duty factor 1:20)
• Voltage input 0 to 10 V "0.7 %
• Resistor input 10 k "3.5 %
• Temperature input Pt 100 "1%

• For measuring resistance
Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, referred to input
connection Possible
range)
With three-conductor Possible
• Voltage input 0 to 10 V "0.5 % connection
• Resistor input 10 k "2.8 % With four-conductor
• Temperature input Pt 100 "0.8 % connection
Temperature error (with "0.01 %/K Characteristic linearization Parameters can be

reference to the input range) assigned
Linearity error (with reference to "0.05 % • For RTD PT 100 (climate range)
the input range) User data in engineering Degrees Celsius
Repeat accuracy (in the steady " 0.05 % format
state at 25 C, referred to the Data for Selecting an Actuator
input range)
Output range (rated value)
• Voltage 0 to 10 V
Crosstalk between the outputs > 88 dB
Impedance (in the nominal output range)
reference to the output range) • For voltage outputs min. 2.5 k
• Voltage outputs "1.0 % – capacitive load max. 1.0 F
Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, referred to output Voltage outputs

range) • Short-circuit protection Yes
• Voltage outputs "0.85 % • Short-circuit current max. 10 mA
Temperature error (with "0.01 %/K Destruction limit for voltages/
reference to the output range) currents connected from
Linearity error (with reference to " 0.01 % outside
the output range) • Voltage at outputs to MANA max. 15 V continuous;
Repeat accuracy (in the steady " 0.01 % Connection of actuators
state at 25C, referred to the
output range) • For voltage output
Output ripple; band width 0 to " 0.1 % Two-conductor connection Possible

50 kHz (with reference to the Four-conductor connection Not possible
output range) (measuring circuit)

A5E00105505-03 4-197
Analog Modules
4.31.1 Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits
Note
Below the rated load voltage range, incorrect intermediate values occur at the
output when the rated load voltage supply (L+) is switched on/off.
STEP 7 V 4.0 tool for parameter assignment

The SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits is contained in the module catalog in STEP 7
V 4.0 or higher.
Parameter
4.31.2 Measuring/output method and measuring/output range of the

SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits
Connecting the inputs and outputs

You can connect the inputs as voltage, resistance or temperature measurement
inputs, or deactivate them.
You can connect the outputs as voltage, or disable them.
Perform connection of the inputs and outputs with the parameters “measuring
method” and “output method” in STEP 7.
Connection options for the input channels

You can connect the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits in the following combinations:
Channel Wiring Versions

Channels 0 • 2 x temperature or
and 1 • 2 x resistance
Channels 2 • 2 x voltage,
and 3 • 2 x resistance,
• 2 x temperature,
• 1 x temperature and 1 x voltage, or
• 1 x resistance and 1 x voltage

4-198 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules
Note
Simultaneous connection of a temperature sensor and a resistor to channels 0 and
1 and 2 and 3 is not allowed.
The reason common current source for both channels.
Unused Channels
Set the “measuring method” parameter for unused input channels to “disabled”. In
this way you shorten the scan time of the module.
You must short-circuit unused input channels and you should connect them to
MANA. In this way, you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog
input module.
So that unused output channels of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits remain
terminal open.
Measuring ranges
Use STEP 7 for programming the measuring ranges.
Table 4-87 Measuring ranges of the SM 334;AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits

U: Voltage 0 to 10 V You will find the digital
analog values in Section
R-4L: Resistance (four-conductor 10 k
4.3.1
connection)
RTD-4L: Bulb resistor Pt 100 climate
(linear, four-conductor connection)
Default settings of inputs

The default settings of the module are the “Bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor
connection)” measuring method and the “Pt 100 climate” measuring range. You
can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without
parameterizing the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits in STEP 7.

A5E00105505-03 4-199
Analog Modules
Output ranges
Use STEP 7 for programming the output ranges.
Table 4-88 Output ranges of the SM 334;AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits

analog values in Section
4.3.2 in the voltage output
range
Default settings of outputs

The default settings of the module are “Voltage” for the output type and “0 to 10 V”
for the output range. You can use this combination of measuring method and
measuring range without parameterizing the SM 334; AI4/AO 2 x 2 bits in STEP 7.

4-200 A5E00105505-03
Special Signal modules 5
In this Appendix

5.2 Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16; 5-3
(6ES7374-2XH01-0AA0)
5.3 Dummy Module DM 370; (6ES7370-0AA01-0AA0) 5-5
5.4 Position Decoder Module SM 338; POS-INPUT; 5-7
(6ES7338-4BC01-0AB0)

A5E00105505-03 5-1
Special Signal modules
5.1 Module Overview
Introduction
The following table summarizes the most important features of the signal modules
described in this chapter. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the
suitable module for your task.
Table 5-1 Special signal modules: Characteristics at a Glance
Module Simulator module Dummy module DM 370 Position decoder

Char- SM 374; IN/OUT 16 module
acter- SM 338; POS-INPUT
istics
Number of • max. 16 inputs or 1 slot reserved for 1 • 3 inputs for connection
inputs/outputs outputs non-parameterized of absolute value
module encoders (SSI)
• 2 digital inputs for
freezing the encoder
values
Suitable for... Simulation of: Placeholder for: Position decoding with up
• 16 inputs or • Interface Modules to 3 absolute value
encoders (SSI)
• 16 outputs or • Non-parameterized
signal modules Encoder types: Absolute
• 8 in– and outputs value encoder (SSI)
• Modules which occupy
with 13-bit, 21-bit or 25-bit
2 slots
message lengths
Data format: Gray code or
binary code
Supports clocked No No Yes
operation
Programmable No No No
diagnostics
Diagnostic No No Adjustable
interrupt
Special Features Function adjustable with When replacing the Absolute value encoders
screwdriver DM 370 with another with a monoflop time
module, the mechanical greater than 64s cannot
assembly and address be used on the SM 338
assignment/address
location of the entire
assembly remain
unchanged

5-2 A5E00105505-03
5.2 Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16;

(6ES7374-2XH01-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7374-2XH01-0AA0
Characteristics
The simulator module SM 374; IN/OUT 16 is distinguished by the following
features:
• Simulation of:
– 16 inputs or
– 16 outputs or
– 8 inputs and 8 outputs (each with the same start addresses!)
• Status displays for simulation of inputs and outputs
• Function adjustable with screwdriver
Note
Do not activate the switch for setting the function in RUN!
Configuration with STEP 7

The simulator module SM 374; IN/OUT 16 is not included in the module catalog of
STEP 7 i.e., the order number of the SM 374 is not recognized by STEP 7. You
must therefore “simulate” the function of the simulator module required for the
configuration as follows:
• If you want to use SM 374 with 16 inputs, enter the order number of a digital
input module with 16 inputs in STEP 7;
e.g.: 6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0
• If you want to use SM 374 with 16 outputs, enter the order number of a digital
output module with 16 outputs in STEP 7;
e.g.: 6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0
• If you want to use SM 374 with 8 inputs and 8 outputs, enter the order
number of a digital input/output module with 8 inputs and 8 outputs in STEP 7;
e.g.: 6ES7323-1BH02-0AA0

A5E00105505-03 5-3
Module view (without front door)
Switch for input status
Switch for setting the function
Channel number
Figure 5-1 Module view of the simulator module SM 374; IN/OUT 16
Technical specifications of the SM 374; IN/OUT 16
Dimensions and Weight Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Dimensions W x H x D 40 125 110 Current consumption from the max. 80 mA
Weight Approx. 190 g Power dissipation of the module type. 0.35 W
Data for Specific Module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Optional simulation of 16 inputs Status display yes, green LED per
16 outputs channel
8 in– and outputs
Interrupts No
Diagnostic functions No

5-4 A5E00105505-03
5.3 Dummy Module DM 370; (6ES7370-0AA01-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7370-0AA01-0AA0
Characteristics
The dummy module DM 370 reserves a slot for a non-parameterized module. They
can be used as placeholders for:
• Interface modules (without reservation of address space)
• Non-parameterized signal modules (with reservation of address space)
• Modules which occupy 2 slots (with reservation of address space)
When replacing the dummy module with another module from S7-300, the
mechanical assembly and the address assignment/address allocation of the entire
assembly remain unchanged.
Configuration with STEP 7

You must only configure the dummy module DM 370 with STEP 7 if the module of
the slot is to be reserved for a parameterized signal module. If the module is
reserving the slot for an interface module, the configuration cannot be carried out
with STEP 7.
Modules which occupy 2 slots

For modules which occupy 2 slots, you must plug in 2 dummy modules. Only the
dummy module in slot “x” reserves the address space (not the dummy module in
slot “x + 1”; for details of the procedure, see table 5-2).
A maximum of 8 modules may be plugged into a module carrier (SM/FM/CP). If
you, for example, reserve a slot for an 80 mm wide module with 2 dummy
modules, you may still plug in 7 other modules (SM/FM/CP) because the dummy
module only occupies the address space for 1 module.

A5E00105505-03 5-5
Module view
NA
A
Switch for address

assignment
Front View Rear view
Figure 5-2 Module view of the dummy module DM 370
Switch settings for address assignment

The following table shows how to set the switch on the rear side of the module
according to the module type.
Table 5-2 Meaning of the switch settings of the dummy module DM 370
Switch setting Meaning Use

The dummy module reserves one • Without active backplane bus:
slot. In configurations for which a purely
NA The module is not configured and physical single slot should be reserved,
does not occupy any address with electrical connection to the S7 300
A space. bus.
• With active backplane bus: No
The dummy module reserves one In configurations for which a slot with an
slot. address should be reserved.
NA The module must be configured
A and occupies 1 byte input address
space (with system default outside
the process image).

5-6 A5E00105505-03
Technical specifications of the DM 370
Dimensions and Weight Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 120 Current consumption from the ca. 5 mA
Weight Approx. 180 g Power loss typ. 0.03 W
5.4 Position Decoder Module SM 338; POS-INPUT;

(6ES7338-4BC01-0AB0)
Order number
6ES7338-4BC01-0AB0
Characteristics
The position decoder module SM 338; POS-INPUT is distinguished by the
following features:
• 3 inputs for the connection of maximum three absolute value encoders (SSI)
and 2 digital inputs to freeze the encoder values
• Direct reaction possible to encoder values in moving systems
• Processing of acquired encoder values of the SM 338 in user program
• Type of encoder value acquisition (see chapter 5.4.4) can be selected:
– Free running
– Clocked
• Non-isolated against the CPU
Supported encoder types

The following encoder types are supported by the SM 338; POS-INPUT:
• Absolute value encoder (SSI) with 13-bit message length
Supported data formats

The SM 338; POS-INPUT supports the gray code and binary code data formats.

A5E00105505-03 5-7
5.4.1 Synchronous Operation
Note
The basics of synchronous operation are described in a separate manual.
Hardware requirements
For the synchronous operation of the SM 338, you require:
• CPU which supports clocked operation
• DP master which supports the equidistant bus cycle
• Slave interface (IM 153-x) which supports synchronous operation
Characteristics
Depending on the system parameterization, the SM 338 works in either
non-synchronous or synchronous mode.
In synchronous operation, the data exchange between DP master and SM 338 is
synchronous to the PROFIBUS DP cycle.
In synchronous operation all 16 bytes of the checkback interface are consistent.
If synchronicity is lost due to faults or failure or delay of Global Control (GC), the
SM 338 goes back into synchronous operation in the next cycle without error
response.
If synchronicity is lost, the checkback interface is not updated.

5-8 A5E00105505-03
5.4.2 Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram
Connection to the
Fault indicator – red ground of the CPU
Voltage monito- Short-circuit 1 L+ 24V

SF ring protection
2 M
3 OD (Data)
S7–300 Backplane bus
4 OD (Data)
RS 422
5 OC (Clock)
SSI
6 OC (Clock)
7 1D (Data)
8 1D (Data)
9 1C (Clock)
SSI
Logic
10 1C (Clock)
11 2D (Data)
12 2D (Data)
13 2C (Clock)
SSI
14 2C (Clock)
15 DI 0 (Digital-
DI 0 16 DI 1 input)
DI 1 17 DC24V (encoder)
18 DC24V (encoder)
19 M (encoder)
20 M (encoder)
Twisted pair cables
Figure 5-3 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 338; POS-INPUT
Wiring rules
Please observe the following important rules of the wiring of the module:
• The ground of the encoder supply is connected non-isolated to the ground of
the CPU. Thus, connect pin 2 of the SM 338 (M) with low impedance with the
ground of the CPU.
• The encoder lines (pins 3 to 14) must be twisted pairs and shielded. Apply the
shield to both sides.
For the shield connection to the SM 338, use the shield connection element
(order number 6ES7390-5AA00-0AA0).
• If the output current (900 mA) of the encoder supply is exceeded, then you
must connect an external power supply.

A5E00105505-03 5-9
5.4.3 Functions of the SM 338; POS INPUT
5.4.4 Encoder value acquisition
The absolute value encoder transfers its encoder values in messages to the
SM 338. The transfer of the message is initiated by the SM 338.
• In non-synchronous operation, the encoder values are acquired while it is free
running.
• In synchronous operation the encoder values are acquired synchronized to the
PROFIBUS DP cycle at each Ti.
Free running encoder value acquisition

The SM 338 always initiates the transfer of a message after the end of the
parameterized monoflop time.
Asynchronous to these free running messages, the SM 338 processes the
acquired encoder values during the cycle of its updating rate (see Technical Data).
Thus, in the case of free running encoder value acquisition, encoder values of
different ages result. The difference between the maximum and minimum age is
the jitter (see Technical Data).
Synchronous encoder values acquisition

Synchronous encoder values acquisition is automatically set if, in the DP master
system, the equidistant bus cycle is activated and the DP Slave is synchronized to
the DP cycle.
The SM 338 initiates the transfer of a message in each PROFIBUS DP cycle
at the time Ti.
Synchronous to the PROFIBUS DP cycle, the SM 338 processes the transferred
encoder values.

5-10 A5E00105505-03
5.4.5 Gray/Dual Converter
In the Gray setting, the encoder values provided by the absolute value encoder in
gray code is converted into Dual code. In the Dual setting, encoder values
provided by the absolute value encoder remain unchanged.
Note
If you have selected the Gray setting, the SM 338 always converts the entire
encoder value (13, 21, 25 bits). As a result, preceding special bits affect the
encoder values and following bits could be falsified under certain circumstances.
5.4.6 Transferred Encoder Value and Normalization
The transferred encoder value contains the encoder position of the absolute value
encoder. Depending on the encoder used, additional bits which are located before
and after the encoder position are also transferred in addition to the encoder
position.
So that the SM 338 can detect the encoder position, make the following settings:
• Normalization, places (0..12), or
• Normalization, units / revolution
Normalization, places
The normalization determines the position of the encoder values in the checkback
interface.
• If “Places” = 1, 2....12, this indicates that the following non relevant bits in the
encoder values are removed and the encoder value is right justified in the
address range (see following example).
• If “Places” = 0, this indicates that the following bits are retained and available
for evaluation.
This can be useful if you use an absolute value encoder which transfers
information in the following bits (see manufacturer information) and you want to
evaluate these (see also chapter 5.4.5).
Parameter units / revolution

A maximum of 13 bits are available for the units/revolution. According to the
“Places” data, the resulting number of units/revolution is automatically displayed.

A5E00105505-03 5-11
Example of normalization of an encoder value

You are using a single-turn encoder with 29 units= 512 units/ revolution
(resolution/360°).
In STEP 7 you have set the following parameters:
• Absolute encoder: 13 bits
• Normalization: 4 places
• Units / revolution: 512
Before the normalization: cyclically acquired encoder values 100

31 Double data word
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 X X X X
Relevant bits 0
Transferred bits
After the normalization: encoder values 100

31 Double data word 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
Relevant bits
Result: Bits 0 to 3 (4 places, marked with “x”) are omitted.
5.4.7 Freeze Function
The freeze function “freezes” the current encoder values of the SM 338. The
freeze function is coupled to the digital inputs DI 0 and DI 1 of the SM 338.
The freeze is triggered by an edge change (rising edge) on DI 0 or DI 1. A frozen
encoder value is identified by the bit 31 (output address) being set. With a digital
input you can freeze one, two or three encoder values.
You must switch on the freeze function, i.e. set the corresponding parameters in
STEP 7 .
The encoder values are retained until the freeze function is ended and can thus be
evaluated dependent on the event.

5-12 A5E00105505-03
Ending the freeze function

The freeze function must be ended at every encoder input. You acknowledge the
function in the user program by setting the bit 0, 1 or 2 depending on the channel
with the STEP 7-Operation T PAB “xyz” (for a program example, see chapter
5.4.9).
After exiting, bit 31 of the corresponding encoder value is again deleted and the
encoder values are again updated. A renewed freezing of the encoder values is
again possible as soon as you have deleted the acknowledgment bit in the output
address of the module.
In synchronous operation the acknowledgment is processed at time To. From this
point in time a renewed freezing of the encoder values can take place via the
digital inputs.
Note
The freeze function is automatically acknowledged if you newly parameterize the
corresponding channel with different parameters (see 5.4.8 chapter).
If the parameters remain identical, the freeze function remains unaffected.
5.4.8 SM 338; POS-INPUT Parameterization
You parameterize the SM 338; POS-INPUT with STEP 7. You must perform
parameter assignment in STOP mode of the CPU.
As soon as you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the
programming device to the CPU. On a transition from STOP to ³ RUN mode, the
CPU then transfers the parameters to the SM 338.
The parameters cannot be changed by the user program.

A5E00105505-03 5-13
Parameters of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

settings for the SM 338 in the table below.
STEP 7 (default setting bold).
Table 5-3 Parameters of the SM 338; POS-INPUT
Parameter values Range Note

Enable Release parameter.
• Diagnosis interrupt Yes/no Affects all 3 channels.
Absolute value encoder none; 13 bits; 21 bits; 25 bits none: The encoder input is
(SSI) 1) switched off.
Code type 1) Gray; Binary Code provided by encoder.
Baud rate 1) ,3) 125 kHz; 250 kHz; 500 kHz; 1 MHz Data transfer rate of the SSI
position decoder. Observe the
relationship between the cable
length and baud rate (see
Technical Data)
Monoflop time 1),2),3) 16 s; 32 s; 48 s; 64 ms The monoflop time is the
minimum time interval between 2
SSI message frames.
The parameterized monoflop
time must always be greater than
the monoflop time of the absolute
value encoder.
Normalization Normalizing right justifies the
• Places 0 to 12 encoder values of the encoder
absolute; non-relevant places are
• Units / revolution 4) 2 to 8192
discarded.
Switching on freeze off; 0; 1 Designation of the digital input
whose rising edge causes a
freezing of the encoder value.
1) See technical data of the absolute value encoder
2) The monoflop time is the time interval between 2 SSI message frames. The parameterized monoflop
time must be greater than the monoflop time of the absolute value encoder (see technical data of the
manufacturer). The time 2 (1 / baud rate) is added to the value parameterized in HW config. At a
baud rate of 125 kHz with a parameterized monoflop time of 16 s, an effective monoflop time of 32 s
is actually achieved.
3) The following restriction applies to the monoflop time of the absolute value encoder:
(1 / baud rate) < Monoflop time of the absolute value encoder < 64 s + 2 (1 / baud rate)
4) to the power of two
Note
Please note that in non synchronous operation the baud rate and the monoflop
time affect the accuracy and actuality of the encoder values.
In synchronous operation the baud rate and the monoflop time affect the accuracy
of the freeze function.

5-14 A5E00105505-03
5.4.9 SM 338; POS-INPUT Addressing
Data range for the encoder values

The inputs and outputs of the SM 338 are addressed as of the initial module
address. The input and output address is determined at the configuration of the
SM 338 in STEP 7.
Input Addresses
Table 5-4 SM 338; POS-INPUT: Input Addresses
Encoder input Input address (from the configuration) + address offset

0 ”Initial module address”
1 ”Module start address” + 4 bytes address offset
2 ”Module start address” + 8 bytes address offset
Structure of the double data word

For each encoder input the double data word is made up as follows:
31 0
Encoder value in gray or binary code

Freeze
0 = encoder value is not frozen. The value is constantly updated.
1 = encoder value is frozen. The value remains constant until
acknowledgment.
Output Address
7 0
Initial module address
Acknowledging the freeze function:

Bit 0 = encoder input 0
Reading out data areas

You can read out the data areas in your user program with the STEP 7-Operation L
PED “xyz”.

A5E00105505-03 5-15
Example of access to encoder values and use of the freeze function

You want to read out and evaluate the value of the encoder at the encoder inputs.
The module start address is 256.
AWL Explanation
L PED 256 // Read encoder value in the address range for
encoder input 0
T MD 100 // Store encoder value in marker double word
U M 100.7 // Acquire and store freeze status for later
= M 99.0 // acknowledgment

encoder input 1

encoder input 2
L MB 99 // Load and acknowledge freeze condition

T PAB 256 // (SM 338: output address 256)
Afterwards you can further process the encoder values from the marker range MD
100, MD 104 and MD 108. The encoder value is contained in bits 0 to 30 of the
marker double word.

5-16 A5E00105505-03
5.4.10 Diagnosis of the SM 338; POS-INPUT
The SM 338 makes diagnostic messages available, i.e., all diagnostic messages
are always provided by the SM 338 without your assistance.

• The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnosis of the module and
• The SF LED on the module lights.
• If you have programmed “Enable Diagnostic Interrupt” in STEP 7 , a diagnostic
interrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called.

Diagnostic message via SF LED

The SM 338 indicate errors for you by means of their SF LED (group error LED).
The SF LED lights as soon as a diagnostic message is triggered by the SM 338. It
goes out when all errors have been rectified.
The group fault (SF) LED also lights up in case of external errors (short circuit of
encoder supply), independent of the operating status of the CPU (if power is on).
The SF LED lights up temporarily at startup during the self test of the SM 338.

A5E00105505-03 5-17
Diagnostic messages of the SM 338; POS INPUT

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the SM 338.
Table 5-5 Diagnostic messages of the SM 338; POS INPUT
Diagnostics Message LED Scope of the Diagno-

stics
Module problem SF Module
Internal malfunction SF Module
External malfunction SF Module
Channel error present SF Module
External auxiliary supply missing SF Module
Module not parameterized. SF Module
Wrong parameters SF Module
Channel information available SF Module
Time monitoring triggered SF Module
Channel error present SF Channel
(encoder input)
Configuring/parameter assignment error SF Channel
(encoder input)
External channel error (encoder fault) SF Channel
(encoder input)

5-18 A5E00105505-03
Causes of errors and remedial measures
Table 5-6 Diagnostics Messages of the SM 338, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures

Message
Module fault An error detected by the module has
occurred.
Internal error Module has detected an error within
the automation system.
External error Module has detected an error outside
of the automation system.
Channel error present Indicates that only specific channels
are faulty.
External auxiliary The power supply L+ to the module is Feed supply L+
supply missing missing
Module not Module requires information whether it Message present after network active
parameterized should work with parameters preset by until transfer of the parameters by the
the system or with your parameters. CPU complete; parameterize module if
necessary.
Wrong parameters One parameter or the combination of Reassign module parameter
parameters is not plausible
Channel information Channel error present; module can
present provide additional channel information.
Watchdog tripped Temporary high electromagnetic Eliminate interference
interference
Channel error present An error detected by the module has
occurred at the encoder input.
Configuration / Illegal parameter had been transferred Reassign module parameter
parameterization error to module
External channel error Broken wire in encoder cable, encoder Check connected encoder
(encoder error) cable not connected or encoder
defective.

A5E00105505-03 5-19
5.4.11 Interrupts of the SM 338; POS INPUT
Introduction
In this Section, the interrupt behavior of the SM 338; POS-INPUT is described.
The SM 338 can trigger diagnostic interrupts.
Enabling interrupts
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then incoming active error events (initial

5-20 A5E00105505-03
5.4.12 Technical Specifications of the 338; POS-INPUT
Dimensions and Weight Maximum repeat frequency 1 kHz

Dimensions B x H x T 40 x 125 x 120 Connection of a two–wire Possible
(mm) BEROS, type 2
Weight Approx. 235 g Shielded line length 600 m
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Unshielded line length 32 m
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
• Range 20.4 ... 28.8 V Interrupts
• Reverse polarity No • Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be
protection assigned
Isolation no, only against shield Status display of digital LED (green)
Permitted potential inputs
difference 1 VDC Group error/fault LED (red)
• between input Inaccuracy of the encoder value
(M connection) and Free running encoder value acquisition
central grounding point
of the CPU
• maximum age 1) (2 × Message duration)
+ monoflop time
Encoder supply
+ 580 s
• Output voltage L+ –0.8 V
• minimum age 1) Message duration
• Output current max. 900 mA, short + 130 s
circuit–proof
• Jitter Message duration
Current dissipation
+ monoflop time
• From the backplane max. 160 mA + 450 s
bus max. 10 mA Update rate Evaluation of the message
• From the load voltage every 450 s
L+ (no load)
Synchronous encoder value acquisition
module • Age Encoder value at time Ti
Encoder inputs POS INPUT 0 to 2
of the current
PROFIBUS DP cycle
Position decoding absolute
Inaccuracy of the frozen encoder value (freeze)
Difference signals for SSI according to RS422
data and SSI clock Free running encoder value acquisition
Data transfer rate and cable • 125 kHz max. 320 m • maximum age 1) (2 × Message duration)
length of absolute value • 250 kHz max. 160 m + monoflop time + 580
encoders (twisted pair and s
• 500 kHz max. 60 m
shielded) • minimum age 1) Message duration + 130
• 1 MHz max. 20 m s
Message duration of the 13 bits 21 bits 25 bits
SSI transmission
• Jitter Message duration +
monoflop time + 450 s
• 125 kHz 112 s 176 s 208 s
Synchronous encoder value acquisition
• 250 kHz 56 s 88 s 104 s
• Jitter Max (message
• 500 kHz 28 s 44 s 52 s
durationn + param.
• 1 MHz 14 s 22 s 26 s Monoflop time n)
Monoflop time2 16 s, 32 s, 48 s, 64 s
n = 0, 1, 2, (Channel)
Digital inputs DI 0, DI 1
Isolation no, only against shield 1) Age of the encoder values determined by the
Input voltage 0-Signal: –3 V ... 5 V transfer process and the processing
2) The following restriction applies to the monoflop
1-Signal: 11 V ... 30.2 V
Input current 0-Signal: v2 mA time of the absolute value encoder:
(quiescent current) (1 / baud rate) < Monoflop time of the absolute
1-Signal: 9 mA (typ.) value encoder < 64 s + 2 x (1 / baud rate)
Input delay 0 > 1: max. 300 s
1 > 0: max. 300 s

A5E00105505-03 5-21

5-22 A5E00105505-03
Interface Modules 6
Interface modules
In this chapter you will find the technical specifications and characteristic features
of the interface modules for the S7-300.
Contents
The following interface modules are described in this chapter:

6.2 Interface Module IM 360; (6ES7360-3AA01-0AA0) 6-3
6.3 Interface Module IM 361; (6ES7361 3CA01-0AA0) 6-5
6.4 Interface Module IM 365; (6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0) 6-7

A5E00105505-03 6-1
Interface Modules
6.1 Module Overview
Introduction
The following table summarizes the most important characteristics of the interface
modules described in this chapter. This overview is intended to make it easy to
choose the suitable module for your task.
Table 6-1 Interface Modules: Characteristics at a Glance
Module Interface Module IM 360 Interface Module IM 361 Interface Module IM 365
Char-
acter-
istics
Suitable for • 0 • 1 to 3 • 0 and 1
plugging into
S7-300 mounting
racks
Data transmission • From IM 360 to IM 361 • From the IM 360 to the • From IM 365 to IM 365
over the connecting IM 361 or from the IM via connecting cable
cable 386 361 to the IM 361 via 386
connecting cable 386
Distance • Max. 10 m • Max. 10 m • 1 m, permanently
between... connected
Special Features --- --- • Preassembled module

pair
• Install only signal
modules in rack 1
• IM 365 does not route
the communication
bus to subrack 1

6-2 A5E00105505-03
Interface Modules
6.2 Interface Module IM 360; (6ES7360-3AA01-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7360-3AA01-0AA0
Characteristics
The interface module IM 360 has the following characteristic features:
• Interface for rack 0 of the S7-300
• Data transfer from IM 360 to IM 361 over the connecting cable 368
• Maximum distance between IM 360 and IM 361 is 10 m (32.8 ft.)
Status and fault LEDs

The interface module IM 360 has the following status and fault LEDs.
LED Meaning Explanation

SF Group error/fault The LED lights up if
• the connecting cable is missing.
• IM 361 is switched off.

A5E00105505-03 6-3
Interface Modules
Front View
Figure 6-1 shows the front view of the interface module IM 360.
X1 OUT
SF
Front View
Figure 6-1 Front View of the Interface Module IM 360
Technical specification
The following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module
IM 360.
Dimensions and Weight

(in millimeters)
Length of cable
• Maximum length to 10 m
next IM
Current consumption
• From the backplane 350 mA
bus
Power loss typ. 2 W
Status and fault LEDs Yes

6-4 A5E00105505-03
Interface Modules
6.3 Interface Module IM 361; (6ES7361-3CA01-0AA0)
Order number
6ES7361-3CA01-0AA0
Characteristics
• 24 VDC power supply
• Interface for racks 1 to 3 of the S7-300
• Current output via the S7-300 backplane bus max. 0.8 A
• Data transfer from the IM 360 to the IM 361 or from the IM 361 to the IM 361
via connecting cable 368
• Maximum distance between IM 360 and IM 361 is 10 m (32.8 ft.)
• Maximum distance between IM 361 and IM 361 is 10 m
Status and fault LEDs

The interface module IM 361 has the following status and fault LEDs.
LED Meaning Explanation

SF Group error/fault The LED lights up if
• the connecting cable is
missing
• the series-connected
IM 361 is switched off
• the CPU is in the
POWER OFF state
5 VDC 5 VDC supply for the S7-300 –
backplane bus

A5E00105505-03 6-5
Interface Modules
Front View
X1 OUT
SF
5 VDC
M
L+
M
X2 IN

6-6 A5E00105505-03
Interface Modules
IM 361.
Dimensions and Weight

(in millimeters)
Weight 505 g
Length of cable
Maximum length to next IM 10 m
Current consumption
From 24 VDC 0.5 A
Power loss typ. 5 W
Current output
To backplane bus 0.8 A
Status and fault LEDs Yes
6.4 Interface Module IM 365; (6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0)

6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0

6AG1365-0BA01-2AA0
Characteristics
• Pre-assembled pair of modules for rack 0 and rack 1
• Total power supply of 1.2 A, of which up to 0.8 A can be used per rack.
• Connecting cable with a length of 1 m already permanently connected
• Install only signal modules in rack 1
• IM 365 does not forward the C bus to rack 1, i.e. you cannot plug FMs with a
C bus function in rack 1.

A5E00105505-03 6-7
Interface Modules
Front View
IM 365 IM 365
RECEIVE SEND
In rack 1 In rack 0
IM 365.
Dimensions and Weight Data for Specific Module

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 120 Length of cable
per rack (in millimeters) Maximum length to next IM 1m
Total weight 580 g Current consumption
From the backplane bus 100 mA
Power loss typ. 0.5 W
Current output max. 1.2 A
Per rack 0.8 A
Status and fault LEDs No

6-8 A5E00105505-03
RS 485 Repeater 7
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find a detailed description of the RS 485-Repeater.
Included in the description are:
• The purpose of the RS 485 repeater
• The maximum cable lengths possible between two RS 485 repeaters
• The functions of the individual operating elements and terminals
• Information about grounded and non-grounded operation
• Technical specifications and the block diagram
Further information
You will find further information on the RS 485 repeater in the manuals Hardware
and Installation in the Chapter “Configuring of an MPI or PROFIBUS-DP network”.
Diagnostic repeater
Compared to the RS 485 repeater, the diagnostic repeater has new characteristics:
Diagnostic function and modeling as the DP slave. For additional information, refer
to the Diagnostic Repeater for PROFIBUS-DP manual, order no.
6ES7972-0AB00-8xA0.
In this chapter

7.1 Application and Characteristics; 7-2
(6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)
7.2 Appearance of the RS-485 Repeater; (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0) 7-3
7.3 RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded Operation 7-4
7.4 Technical Specification 7-6

A5E00105505-03 7-1
RS 485 Repeater
7.1 Application and Characteristics;

(6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)
Order number
6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0
What is an RS 485 repeater?

The RS 485 repeater amplifies data signals on bus lines and interconnects bus
segments.
Application of the RS 485 repeater

You need an RS 485 repeater if:
• More than 32 nodes are connected to the bus
• Bus segments are to be operated non-grounded on the bus, or
• The maximum cable length of a segment is exceeded. (See table 7-1).
Table 7-1 Maximum Cable Length of a Segment
Baud Rate Max. Cable Length of a Segment (in m)

9.6 to 187.5 kbd 1000
500 kbaud 400
1.5 Mbaud 200
3 to 12 Mbaud 100
Rules
If you configure the bus with RS 485 repeaters:
• Up to 9 RS 485 repeaters can be connected in series.
• The maximum cable length between two nodes must not exceed the values in
Table 7-2.
Table 7-2 Maximum Cable Length between Two RS 485 Repeaters
Baud Rate Maximum Length of Cable between 2 Nodes (in m) with

RS 485 Repeater (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)
9.6 to 187.5 kbaud 10000
500 kbaud 4000
1.5 Mbaud 2000
3 to 12 Mbaud 1000

7-2 A5E00105505-03
RS 485 Repeater
7.2 Appearance of the RS 485 Repeater;

(6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)
The table below shows the appearance of the RS 485 repeater and lists its
functions.
Table 7-3 Description and Functions of the RS 485 Repeater
Repeater Design No. Function

Connection for the RS 485 repeater power supply (pin “M5.2” is
the ground reference, if you want to measure the voltage
10
24 VDC
L+ M PE M 5.2
difference between terminals “A2” and “B2”).
Shield clamp for the strain relief and grounding of the bus cable

of bus segment 1 or bus segment 2
Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 1

A1 B1 A1 B1
Terminating resistance for bus segment 1
ON Switch for OFF operating mode

11 (= isolate bus segments from each other – for example, for

DP1
PG
OFF
startup
OP 12
DP2
Terminating resistance for bus segment 2
ON
Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 2
SIEMENS
RS 485-REPEATER
A2 B2 A2 B2 Slide for mounting and removing the RS 485 repeater on the
standard rail
Interface for programming device/OP in bus segment 1

10 LED 24 V supply voltage
11 LED for bus segment 1
12 LED for bus segment 2

A5E00105505-03 7-3
RS 485 Repeater
7.3 RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and

Grounded Operation
Grounded or ungrounded
The RS 485 repeater is ...
• Grounded, if all other nodes in the segment are also operated with a grounded
potential
• Ungrounded, if all other nodes in the segment are operated with an ungrounded
potential
Note
The bus segment 1 is grounded if you connect a programming device to the
PG/OP socket of the RS 485 repeater. Ground connection is effected since the
MPI in the programming device is grounded and the PG/OP socket is connected
internally with bus segment 1 in the RS 485 repeater.
Grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater

For grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater, you must jump terminals “M” and
“PE” on the top of the RS 485 repeater.
Ungrounded operation of the RS 485 repeater

For ungrounded operation of the RS 485 repeater, “M” and “PE” on the top of the
RS 485 repeater must not be interconnected. In addition, the supply voltage of the
RS 485 repeater must be ungrounded.
Terminal connection diagram

In the case of a repeater configuration with ungrounded reference potential
(ungrounded operation), any interference currents and static charges are
discharged by means of an RC network integrated in the repeater (refer to
Figure 7-1) to the protective conductor.
PE
24 VDC
L+ M PE M 5.2
22 nF 10 MΩ
A1 B1 A1 B1
Ground bus
Figure 7-1 RC Network with 10 MΩ for Configuration with Ungrounded Reference

Potential

7-4 A5E00105505-03
RS 485 Repeater
Isolation between bus segments

Bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 are galvanically isolated from each other. The
PG/OP interface is connected internally to the port for bus segment 1. Figure 7-2
shows the front panel of the RS 485 repeater.
24 VDC
L+ M PE M 5.2
Terminals for bus segment 1

A1 B1 A1 B1
ON
PG/OP PG
DP1
interface OP
OFF
DP2
ON
Isolation SIEMENS
RS 485-REPEATER
A2 B2 A2 B2 Terminals for bus segment 2
Figure 7-2 Isolation between the Bus Segments
Amplification of the bus signals

The amplification of the bus signals takes place between the port for bus segment
1 or the PG/OP interface and the port for bus segment 2.

A5E00105505-03 7-5
RS 485 Repeater
7.4 Technical Specifications
Technical specifications of the RS 485 repeater
Technical Specification
Power supply
• Rated voltage 24 VDC
• Ripple 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
Current consumption at rated voltage
• Without node at PG/OP socket 100 mA
• Node at PG/OP socket (5 V/90 mA) 130 mA
• Node at PG/OP socket (24 V/100 mA) 200 mA
Isolation Yes, 500 VAC

Connection of fiber optic cables Yes, via repeater adapters
Redundancy operation No
Transmission rate (automatically detected by the repeater) 9.6 kbaud, 19.2 kbaud, 45.45 kbaud,
93.75 kbaud, 187.5 kbaud, 500 kbaud.
1.5 Mbaud. 3 Mbaud, 6 Mbaud, 12
Mbaud
Degree of protection IP 20
Weight (incl. packaging) 350 g
Pin assignment of the sub-D connector (PG/OP socket)
View Pin No. Signal Name Designation

1 – –
2 M24V Ground 24 V
5 3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B
9 4 RTS Request To Send
4
8 5 M5V2 Data reference potential (from station)
3
7 6 P5V2 Supply plus (from station)
2
6 7 P24V 24 V
1
8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A
9 – –

7-6 A5E00105505-03
RS 485 Repeater
Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater

• Bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 are galvanically isolated from each other.
• Bus segment 2 and the PG/OP socket are galvanically isolated from each
other.
• Signals are amplified
– between bus segment 1 and bus segment 2
– between PG/OP socket and bus segment 2
Segment 1 Segment 2
A1 A2
Logic
B1 B2
A1 A2
B1 B2
PG/OP- 5V 1M 5V 1M
socket
24V 24V
L+ (24 V) L+ (24 V)
M M
A1
B1 PE
5V M 5.2
M5 V
Figure 7-3 Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater

A5E00105505-03 7-7
RS 485 Repeater

7-8 A5E00105505-03
SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP
Connect TPA 8
In this chapter

8.2 Wiring Components 8-4
8.3 Wiring SIMATIC TOP Connect with Digital Modules 8-12
8.4 Wiring SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA with Analog Modules 8-20

Sections 8.1 and 8.2 apply to SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect
TPA.
Section 8.3 contains specific information on SIMATIC TOP connect and thus
supplements the preceding sections.
Section 8.4 contains specific information on SIMATIC TOP connect TPA and thus
supplements Sections 8.1 and 8.2.

A5E00105505-03 8-1
SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA
8.1 Module Overview
Introduction
“SIMATIC TOP connect” denotes components for wiring digital modules.
“SIMATIC TOP connect TPA” denotes components for wiring analog modules.
Wiring
Wiring with SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA is a fast and cost-effective alternative to
conventional wiring of the actuators and sensors directly at the front connector of
the module. When using these components, you wire actuators and sensors “in
situ” on one more terminal blocks. You establish the connection to the module by
means of a connecting cable (round-sheath ribbon cable).
Configuration of SIMATIC TOP connect with a S7-300

A SIMATIC TOP connect and a SIMATIC TOP connect TPA always consist of:
• A front connector module with flat ribbon connection ,
• One or more terminal blocks and
• One or more connecting cables with plug-and-socket connectors at ends

Figure 8-1 SIMATIC TOP connect on a S7-300

8-2 A5E00105505-03
Advantages
Use of SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA features the following advantages:
• Fast, low-cost wiring (the use of central terminal blocks is no longer necessary)
• Simple mounting of the components (front connector module, connecting cable,
terminal block)
• Each component can be replaced separately
• Connecting cable configurable without waste
• Wiring errors are drastically reduced
• Neat and tidy cabinet wiring
• The supply voltage for the module can be connected to components of
SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA
• Simplification of the terminals for M- and L+ connection
Range of modules
The table below lists all the modules which you can wire with SIMATIC TOP
connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA.
You will find a detailed list of the components of SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA
with their order numbers in Table 8-5 on page 8-12 and Table 8-13 on page 8-20.
Table 8-1 SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA: Connectable Modules
Component Front view of terminal block Wiring possible with module...

SM 321; DI 32 x DC 24 V
SIMATIC TOP SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V
connect SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; source input
SM 322; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
SM 322; DO 16 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A with diagnostic
interrupt
SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/2 A
SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
SM 331 analog input module; AI 2 x 12 bits
SIMATIC TOP SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits
connect TPA SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits
SM 332 analog output module; AO 2 x 12 bits
A B C D E F G H I K
SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits
Y YK K A A A A Z Z SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits
Y Z
SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits
SM 335; AI 4/AO 4 x 14 bits;

A5E00105505-03 8-3
8.2 Wiring Components
Introduction
to commission SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA successfully.
The sequence of steps is a suggestion but you can perform individual steps sooner
or later.
Sequence of steps for wiring
Table 8-2 Sequence of Steps for Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA
Step Procedure Refer to Section...

1. Cut connecting cable to length and terminate 8.2.1
2. Wire the front connector module 8.2.2 and 8.3 or 8.4
3. Connect the connecting cable to the terminal 8.2.3 and 8.3 or 8.4
block
4. Wire actuators/sensors to the terminal block 8.2.4
8.2.1 Cut the Connecting Cable to Length and Terminate
Maximum length of cable

The length of the connecting cable (round-sheath ribbon cable) between the
SIMATIC S7 and the terminal blocks must not be more than 30 m.
Using the connectors

You must attach connectors to either end of the round-sheath ribbon cable, for
connection to the front connector module and the terminal block.
Connect the round-sheath ribbon cable to connector

1. Cut the round-sheath ribbon cable to the length required and remove part of the
cable sheath at both ends.
You will find the length of the cable sheath that has to be removed in the
following table:

8-4 A5E00105505-03
external internal external internal

Cable sheath to ribbon ribbon ribbon ribbon
be removed cable cable cable cable
Cable end to ...
20-pin 40-pin
front front 20-pin 40-pin
connec- connec- front connector front connector
tor tor
... top connector of front
connector module 1 x 16 core 110 mm 115 mm
shielded/uns
... bottom connector of
hielded
front connector module 70 mm 75 mm
... top connector of front
connector module 95 mm 115 mm
... bottom connector of 2 x 16 core 95 mm 115 mm
front connector module unshielded
40 mm 75 mm
... socket of terminal 40 mm 100 mm
block
2. Thread the cable into the 16-pin connector.

It is important that you note the position of the details marked in the following
figure.
Triangle
Marked Core
Nose
Figure 8-2 Threading the Round-Sheath Ribbon Cable into the Connector
3. Clamp the end of the cable into the connector with the crimping tool.
4. Attach the strain relief device to the connector of the terminal block as follows:
– Fold back the cable over the connector
– Push the enclosed strain relief device over the cable
– Snap the strain relief device into place on the connector

A5E00105505-03 8-5
8.2.2 Wiring the Front Connector Module
Introduction
This chapter describes the principle of wiring the front connector modules. Note
also the special sections for SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect
TPA (Section 8.3 and 8.4, respectively). In those sections, you will find, among
other things, selection criteria for the front connector modules and specific
connection examples.
Using the front connector module

You require the front connector module to connect the connecting cable to the
module. In addition, you can connect the supply voltage of the module to the front
connector module.

8-6 A5E00105505-03
Wiring rules for connecting the supply voltage

The following table shows you what you have to consider when connecting the
module supply voltage to the terminal block or front connector module.
The terminals for the supply voltage are screws or spring-loaded terminals (refer to
Section 8.2.4 for handling spring-loaded terminals).
Table 8-3 Wiring Rules for Connecting the Supply Voltage
Rules for ... Terminal block Front connector

Spring-loaded Screw-type Up to 4 Up to 8
connection connection Terminals Terminals
Conductor
cross-sections suitable
for connection:
Solid conductors No No No
Stranded conductors
• Without end ferrules 0.25 to 1.5 mm2 0.25 to 0.25 to
1.5 mm2 0.75 mm2
• With end ferrules 0.25 to 1.5 mm2 0.25 to 0.25 to
1.5 mm2 0.75 mm2
No of conductors per 1 or combination of 2 conductors up to 1.5 mm2 (sum) in a common
terminal end ferrule
Max. diameter of ∅ 3.1 mm ∅ 3.1 mm ∅ 2.0 mm
conductor insulation
Length of conductor
insulation to be stripped
• Without insulation 11 mm 6 mm
collar 11 mm –
• With insulation collar
End ferrules to
DIN 46228
• Without insulation Model A; up to 12 mm Model A; up to 12 mm Model A; 5 to 7 mm long
collar long long –
• With insulation collar
– 0.25 to 1.0 mm2 Model E; up to 12 mm Model E; up to 12 mm
– 1.5 mm2 long long
Model E; 12 mm long Model E; 18 mm long

A5E00105505-03 8-7
Connect the connecting cable and the supply voltage to the front connector
module
1. Open the front door of the module.
2. Bring the front connector into the wiring position.
3. If necessary, connect the cables for the incoming supply of the module supply
voltage.
4. Insert the connecting cable into the front connector module as shown in the
following figure:
Figure 8-3 Inserting the Connecting Cable into the Front Connector Module
5. Twist every connecting cable 90 downwards and turn through one whole turn
to the extent possible.
Additional steps for wiring for 32-channel digital modules
Note
When using 32-channel digital modules, you must observe the assignment of the
supply connections to the connecting cable terminals and the assignment of the
connecting cable terminals to the address bytes of the module (refer to Figure 8-4
and Table 8-4).
6. Thread a strain relief assembly into the middle of the front connector. This
strain relief assembly is used to fix the connecting cables in the narrow cable
stowage area of the module.
7. Thread the strain relief assembly into the front connector.

8-8 A5E00105505-03
Front connector module for 32-channel digital modules

The following figure shows the front view of the front connector module for
32-channel digital modules.

Opening for the cable to be connected + Opening for the
_ screwdriver
+
_ Supply terminals
for
Supply terminals for

Supply terminals for
+
_ Supply terminals
+ for
Legend: _
Openings for strain relief

to : Terminals for connecting cable;
refer to Table 8-4 for the address assignment
Figure 8-4 Front connector module for 32-channel digital modules
Assignment of connecting cable terminals to address bytes of 32-channel digital

modules
Table 8-4 Assignment of Connecting Cable Terminals to Address Bytes of 32-Channel

Digital Modules
Refer to Address Assignment for

Figure 8-4:
Connecting Digital Input Digital Output Digital Input/Output
Cable Terminal Module Module Module

IB x QB x IB x
IB (x+1) QB (x+1) IB (x+1)
IB (x+2) QB (x+2) QB x
IB (x+3) QB (x+3) QB (x+1)

A5E00105505-03 8-9
8.2.3 Connecting the Connecting Cable to the Terminal Block
Introduction
A description of how to mount the terminal blocks is presented in the following.
Note also the special sections for SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP
connect TPA (Section 8.3 and 8.4, respectively). In those sections, you will find,
among other things, selection criteria for the different terminal blocks and specific
connection examples.
Mounting the terminal block and connecting cable

1. Attach the terminal block to a 35 mm standard rail in accordance with
EN 50 022.
2. Insert the connecting cable into the terminal block as shown in the following
figure:
Figure 8-5 Insert the connecting cable into the terminal block
8.2.4 Wiring Actuators/Sensors to the Terminal Block
Screw-type or spring-loaded terminals

To mount the signal leads of the actuators/sensors to the terminal block and the
supply lines to the terminal block and front connector module, you can choose
between screw-type and spring-loaded components.
The principle of spring-loaded components is dealt with in greater detail in the
following, since it allows fast and simple connection of the signal lines and supply
cables.

8-10 A5E00105505-03
Spring-loaded terminal block
Opening for the cable to

be connected
Opening for the

screwdriver for pressing
the spring-loaded contact
Figure 8-6 Spring-loaded terminal block
Caution
! The spring-loaded contact will be damaged, if you insert the screwdriver into the
opening for the cable.
Make sure that you insert the screwdriver only into the rectangular opening of the
terminal block.
Attaching the cable to the spring-loaded contact

Attach the cables to the spring-loaded contacts as follows:
1. Use a screwdriver to press down the spring-loaded terminal in the
rectangular opening and to hold it down.
2. Insert the cable into the round opening of the corresponding spring-loaded
terminal as far as it will go.
3. Remove the screwdriver from the spring-loaded terminal. The cable is held
by the spring-loaded contact.

Figure 8-7 Principle of Spring-Loaded Connections

A5E00105505-03 8-11
8.3 Wiring SIMATIC TOP Connect with Digital Modules
Introduction
For wiring the module with actuators/sensors using SIMATIC TOP connect, you
must first select the components as a function of the module and method of
connection (screw type or spring-loaded terminal, one-conductor, three-conductor
or 2A connection; relay).
8.3.1 SIMATIC TOP Connect Components and Selection Aid
Components
The following table contains all the component of SIMATIC TOP connect.
Table 8-5 Components of SIMATIC TOP connect
Components of SIMATIC TOP connect Order number

Terminal ... for one-conductor Spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7924-0AA00-0AB0
block connection 6ES7924-0AA00-0AA0
... for one-conductor Spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7924-0AA00-1AB0
connection (10 items) 6ES7924-0AA00-1AA0
... for three-conductor Spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7924-0CA00-0AB0
connection 6ES7924-0CA00-0AA0
... for three-conductor Spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7924-0CA00-1AB0
connection (10 items) 6ES7924-0CA00-1AA0
... for 2A modules Spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7924-0BB00-0AB0
6ES7924-0BB00-0AA0
... for 2A modules (10 items) Spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7924-0BB00-1AB0
6ES7924-0BB00-1AA0
... for relays Spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7924-0CD00-0AB0
6ES7924-0CD00-0AA0
Front for 32-channel modules Voltage supply via:
connector (refer to Figure 8-4) Spring-loaded terminals 6ES7921 3AA20-0AA0
for 16-channel modules Voltage supply via:
spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7921-3AA00-0AA0
6ES7921-3AB00-0AA0
for 16-channel 2A modules Voltage supply via:
spring-loaded screw-type 6ES7921-3AC00-0AA0
6ES7921-3AD00-0AA0
Connectors (plug-in connectors), set of 8 (insulation displacement 6ES7921-3BE10-0AA0
connectors)
Round-sheath Unshielded 30 m 6ES7923-0CD00-0AA0
ribbon cable 60 m 6ES7923-0CG00-0AA0
1 x 16
Shielded 30 m 6ES7923-0CD00-0BA0
60 m 6ES7923-0CG00-0BA0

8-12 A5E00105505-03
Table 8-5 Components of SIMATIC TOP connect, continued
Components of SIMATIC TOP connect Order number

Round-sheath Unshielded 30 m 6ES7923-2CD00-0AA0
ribbon cable 60 m 6ES7923-2CG00-0AA0
2 x 16
Crimping tool for 16-pin connector 6ES7928-0AA00-0AA0
Selection aid
In the following table you will find the components of SIMATIC TOP connect with
which you can wire the digital modules.
Table 8-6 Selection Table for SIMATIC TOP connect Components
Digital Modules Terminal block for... Front connector

module for...
One-con- Three-con- 2A Relays SM; 16 or 2A
ductor ductor module 32 modules
connection connection s channels
SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC – – –
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC – – –
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; – – –
source input
SM 322; DO 32 x – –
24 VDC/0.5 V
SM 322; DO 16 x – –
24 VDC/0.5 V
SM 322; DO 8 x – – –
24VDC/0.5 V; with diagnostic
interrupt
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A – – – –
SM 323; – – –
DI 16/DO 16 x 24VDC/ 0.5 A
SM323; – – –
DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A
One-conductor or three-conductor connection

With the three-conductor connection, you can optionally apply the supply voltage
for the module to the front connector module or to the terminal block. With the
one-conductor connection, this can only be done to the front connector module.
2A module connection
You require the following information on wiring 2A modules only when you want to
use the SM 322; 8 x DO 24 VDC/2 A with SIMATIC TOP connect.

A5E00105505-03 8-13
8.3.2 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for One-Conductor

Connection
Connection Notes
Table 8-7 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with One-Conductor Connection
Digital Modules Connection Notes

Supply Voltage Feed-In Additional Descrip-
jumper tion on
At front Add. At front required at terminal
connector ground connector power block not
only conn. at or terminal supply in line with
terminal block descrip-
block tion on SM
SM 321; DI 32 x DC 24 V – – – –
SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V – – – –
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; source – – – –
input
SM 322; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A – – – –
SM 322; DO 16 x DC 24 V/0.5 A – – – –
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A with – – –
diagnostic interrupt
SM 323; – – – –
DI 16/DO 16 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A – – – –
Assignments of the terminal block for one-conductor connection
Table 8-8 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for One-Conductor Connection
Front view of terminal block Assignments of the Terminals

Top row:
Terminals 0 to 7: inputs/outputs x.0 to x.7

8-14 A5E00105505-03
Connecting the power supply

Always connect the supply voltage to the front connector module Observe the
wiring rules in Table 8-3 on page 8-7.
In the following example, you must connect L+ to Plus of the upper terminal and M
to Minus of the lower terminal.
Connecting the terminal block for one-conductor connection
–
+
L+1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
M 20
–
+
Front connector
module
Terminal block Terminal block
Figure 8-8 Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a One-Conductor Connection

A5E00105505-03 8-15
8.3.3 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for Three-Conductor

Connection
Connection Notes
Table 8-9 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with Three-Conductor Connection

Supply Voltage Feed-In Additional Descrip-
jumper tion on
At front Add. At front required at terminal
connec- ground connector power block not
tor only conn. at or terminal supply in line with
terminal block descrip-
block tion on SM
SM 321; DI 32 x DC 24 V – – –
SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V – – –
SM 321; DI 16 x 4 VDC; source input – – –
SM 322; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A – – – –
SM 322; DO 16 x DC 24 V/0.5 A – – – –
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A with – –
diagnostic interrupt
SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A – – – –
SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A – – – –
Assignment of the terminal block for three-conductor connection
Table 8-10 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for Three-Conductor Connection

Top row:
Terminals 0to 7:inputs/outputs x.0 to x.7
Center row:
All terminals: M potential
Bottom row:
All terminals: L + potential

8-16 A5E00105505-03

Observe the wiring rules in Table 8-3 on page 8-7.
With some digital modules, two jumpers are generally required for connecting the
supply voltage (refer to Table 8-9 on page 8-16).
You can wire the jumpers either in the front connector or in the terminal block.
Irrespective of this, you must interconnect the two Plus terminals and the two
Minus terminals.
Connecting the terminal block for three-conductor connection
– +
L+ 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
M 20
–
+
Front connector
Jumper (1)
Terminal block Terminal block
Jumper (2)
Jumper (1) or jumper (2) required
Figure 8-9 Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a Three-Conductor Connection

A5E00105505-03 8-17
8.3.4 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for 2A Modules
You can use the terminal block for 2A modules to wire the SM 322;
8 x DO 24 VDC/2A.
Connection Notes
Table 8-11 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with 2A Module Connection

Supply Voltage Feed-In Add. Descr. on
jumper terminal
At front Add. At front
required block not
connector ground connector
for power in line with
only conn. at or terminal
supply descr. on
terminal block
SM
block
SM 322; DO 16 24 VDC/2 A – – –
Assignment of the Terminal Block for Connection of 2A Modules
Table 8-12 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for 2A Modules
Front view of terminal block Assignments of the Assignments of the

Terminals (left) Terminals (right)
Top row: Top row, on right:
Terminals 0 to 3: Terminals 0 to 3:
outputs x.0 to x.3 outputs x.4 to x.7
Center row: Center row, on right:
Terminals 0 to 3: Terminals 0 to 3:
potential M1 for x.0 to potential M2 for x.4 to
x.3 x.7
M1 M2
Bottom row: Bottom row:
two-terminal two-terminal
connection for M1 connection for M2

Please observe the following when connecting the power supply:
• Apply the wiring rules in Table 8-3 on page 8-7.
• Connect the supply voltage at the front connector module to the potential
terminals using separate cables.
• You must equip each terminal block with a cable for M1 or M2, in addition to the
connecting cable.
• Connect M1 or M2 via a separate line with the front connector and the terminal
block. You may jumper the potential of M1 and M2.

8-18 A5E00105505-03
Connection to terminal block for 2A modules
M
– + 1
1 L+ 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 M 10
2 L+ 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2 M 20
–
+ M
2
Front connector
Terminal
block
Figure 8-10 Wiring with Terminal Block for 2A Module

A5E00105505-03 8-19
8.4 Wiring SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA with Analog Modules
Introduction
For wiring the module with actuators/sensors using SIMATIC TOP connect TPA,
you must first select the components as a function of the method of connection
(screw-type or spring-loaded terminal).
8.4.1 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Components and Selection Aid
Components
The following table contains all the component of SIMATIC TOP connect TPA.
Table 8-13 Components for SIMATIC TOP connect TPA
Components of SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Order number

Terminal block Quantity: 1 Spring-loaded terminals 6ES7924-0CC00-0AB0
Screw-type terminals 6ES7924-0CC00-0AA0
Quantity: 10 Spring-loaded terminals 6ES7924-0CC00-1AB0
Screw-type terminals 6ES7924-0CC00-1AA0
Front connector Voltage supply via:
Spring-loaded terminals
Screw-type terminals 6ES7921-3AF00-0AA0
6ES7921-3AG00-0AA0
Connectors (plug-in connectors), set of 8 (insulation 6ES7921-3BE10-0AA0
displacement connectors)
Shielding plate for terminal block, set of 4 6ES7928-1BA00-0AA0
Terminal element for:
2 cables, each with a shield diameter of 2 to 6 mm 6ES7390-5AB00-0AA0
1 cable with a shield diameter of 3 to 8 mm 6ES7390-5BA00-0AA0
1 cable with a shield diameter of 4 to 13 mm 6ES7390-5CA00-0AA0
Round-sheath ribbon cable, shielded 30 m 6ES7923-0CD00-0BA0
∅ 8 mm 60 m 6ES7923-0CG00-0BA0
Crimping tool for 16-pin connector 6ES7928-0AA00-0AA0

8-20 A5E00105505-03
8.4.2 SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA Terminal Assignment and Terminal

Allocation
Terminal marking
On the TPA terminal block, the terminals are identified by letters. This simplifies
the allocation of the terminals on the analog module to the terminals on the
terminal block.
Terminal block assignment
Table 8-14 Terminal Assignment of the Terminal Block of SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

Terminals Z and Y can be used for multiplying arbitrary
potentials and signals.
A B C D E F G H I K
The terminals having identical letters are electrically
Y YK K A A A A Z Z interconnected, with the exception of terminals Z and
Y Z Z, and also Y and Y.
Multiplier terminal
The lower tier of terminals on the terminal block is designed as 2 x 5 multiplier
terminals.

A5E00105505-03 8-21
Terminal allocation of an analog module to SIMATIC TOP connect TPA
Terminal Terminal assignment on

number on terminal block TPA
module
Terminal block 1 Terminal block 2
1 1 Y Y
2 2 B
3 3 C
4 4 D
5 5 E
6 6 F
7 7 G
8 8 H
9 9 I
10 10 K K
11 11 A A
12 12 B
13 13 C
14 14 D
15 15 E
16 16 F
17 17 G
18 18 H
19 19 I
20 20 Z Z
Figure 8-11 Terminal Assignment of Analog Module to SIMATIC TOP connect TPA

8-22 A5E00105505-03
8.4.3 Connecting the Signal-Line Shield
Two options for connecting the shield

You can connect the signal line shield to ground as follows:
• On the analog module by means of a shield-support element
(refer to the manual Hardware and Installation for the S7-300 or the manual
Distributed I/O device ET 200M in the section on wiring)
• Directly to the terminal block by means of a shielding plate
Connecting the shield to the terminal block using a shielding plate

1. Before mounting, attach a shielding plate to the terminal block.
2. Mount the terminal block on the DIN rail.
(In the figure below, you can see that the shielding plate is applied to the rear of
the terminal block and thus there is a connection to the grounded rail.)
3. Place the signal-line shield with the shield terminals on the shielding plate.
Shield support for shield terminal and

Loosen connecting cable to analog module
shielding plate
Press down lightly on the

release to loosen the
shielding plate Terminal block
Shielding plate
Snap the
shielding plate Shield support fro shield terminal
into place and signal lines from
actuators/sensors
Snap the shielding plate into place at the rear of the terminal block.
Figure 8-12 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Terminal Block with Shielding Plate

A5E00105505-03 8-23
8.4.4 Connection Example
Connecting the load voltage supply

You can connect the load voltage supply of the analog module to the front
connector module. There are separate terminals on the front connector module for
the load voltage L+ and M. Observe the wiring rules in Table 8-3 on page 8-7.
Allocation of front connector to terminal block

The upper socket of the front connector module is the connection for terminal
block 1 and the lower socket of the front connector module is the connection for
terminal block 2.
Connection example
The illustration below shows an example of connecting the analog input module
SM 321; AI 8 x 12 bits in “Resistance Test” mode.
Resistance Terminal assignment

test on terminal block TPA
Terminal number Terminal Terminal
on module block 1 block 2
L+ L+ 1 Y Y
SF
M0 + CH0 2 B
M0* 3 C
IC0 + 4 D
IC0* 5 E
M1 + CH2 6 F
M1* 7 G
IC1 + 8 H
IC1* 9 I
Comp + 10 K K
Comp
Comp–/ Mana 11 A A
M2 + CH4 12 B
M2* 13 C
IC2 + 14 D
IC2* 15 E
M3 + CH6 16 F
M3* 17 G
IC3 + 18 H
IC3* 19 I
M M 20 Z Z
M
Figure 8-13 Example of Connecting SIMATIC TOP connect TPA to SM 321; AI 8 x 12 bits

8-24 A5E00105505-03
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A
In this chapter

A.1 How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User A-1
Program
A.2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules A-3
A.3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules A-5
A.4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules A-7
A.5 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD A-11
A.6 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC A-19
A.7 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits A-27
A.8 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits A-30
A.9 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules A-36
A.10 Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits A-39
A.11 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules A-41
A.1 How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the

User Program
Parameter assignment in the user program

You have already assigned parameters to the modules in STEP 7.
In the user program, you can use a SFC:
• To reassign parameters to the module and
• To transfer the parameters from the CPU to the addressed signal module

A5E00105505-03 A-1
Parameters stored in data records
The parameters of the signal modules are located in data records 0 and 1; for
some other analog input modules, in data record 128 as well.
Modifiable parameters
You can change the parameters of record 1 and pass them to the signal module
using SFC 55. The parameters set on the CPU are not changed when you do this!
You cannot modify the parameters of data record 0 in the user program.
SFCs for parameter assignment

The following SFCs are available for assigning parameters to the signal modules in
the user program:
Table A-1 SFCs for assigning Parameters to Signal Modules
SFC Identifier Application

No.
55 WR_PARM Transfer modifiable parameters (data record 1 and 28)
to the addressed signal module.
56 WR_DPARM Transfer parameters (data record 0, 1 or 128) from the
CPU to the addressed signal module.
57 PARM_MOD Transfer all parameters (data record 0, 1 and 128)
from the CPU to the addressed signal module.
Description of the parameters

The following sections contain all the modifiable parameters for the various module
classes. The parameters of the signal modules are described:
• In the on-line help of STEP 7
• In this reference manual
You will find the parameters that can be adjusted for the signal module
concerned in the specific sections for the different signal modules.
Further references
An in-depth description of the principle of assigning parameters to signal modules
in the user program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for that
purpose will be found in the STEP 7 manuals.

A-2 A5E00105505-03
Parameter Sets for Signal Modules
A.2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules
Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters you can set for digital input modules.
Note
For details of the parameters of parameterized digital input/output modules, see
the respective chapter of the module concerned.
• In STEP 7
• With SFB 53 “WRREC” (e. g. for GSD).
Table A-2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules
Parameter Data Record Parameters can be assigned

No. with ...
... SFC 55, ...
SFB 53 Programming
Device
Input delay No Yes
Diagnosis of missing sensor supply 0 No Yes
Diagnosis of broken wire No Yes
Hardware interrupt enable Yes Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes
1
Hardware interrupt with rising edge Yes Yes
Hardware interrupt with falling edge Yes Yes
Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1,
you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.

A5E00105505-03 A-3
Data record 1 structure
The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the
digital input modules.
You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to “1”.
7 6 0
Byte 0
Diagnostics interrupt enable

Hardware interrupt enable
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 1 Hardware interrupt
on rising edge at channel group 0

on falling edge at channel group 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 2 Hardware interrupt

Byte 3 Not relevant
Figure A-1 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Input Modules

A-4 A5E00105505-03
A.3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules
Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters you can set for digital output modules.
Note
For details of the parameters of parameterized digital input/output modules, see
the respective chapter of the module concerned.
• In STEP 7
• With SFB 53 “WRREC” (e. g. for GSD).
Table A-3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules

No. with ...
... SFC 55, ...
SFB 53 Programming
Device
Diagnosis of missing load voltage L+ No Yes
Diagnosis of broken wire No Yes
0
Diagnosis of short–circuit to M No Yes
Diagnosis of short–circuit to L+ No Yes
Behavior on CPU STOP 1 Yes Yes
Enable substitute value “1” Yes Yes
Note

A5E00105505-03 A-5
digital output modules.
You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to “1”.
7 6 1 0
Byte 0
Behavior on CPU STOP
Hold last valid value
Apply substitute value
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 1 Substitute value
Enable substitute value 1 on channel 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 2 Substitute value

Byte 3 Not relevant
Figure A-2 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules
Note
You should only enable the parameters in byte 0, “Hold last valid value” and
“Enable substitute value” as an alternative.

A-6 A5E00105505-03
A.4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules
Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters you can set for analog input modules.
• In STEP 7
The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to
the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals).
Table A-4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
Diagnostics: Group diagnostics No Yes
Diagnostics: With wire-break check No Yes
Temperature unit 0 No Yes
Temperature coefficient No Yes
Smoothing No Yes
Limit value interrupt enable Yes Yes
Cycle end interrupt enable Yes Yes
Interference Suppression Yes Yes
1
Measuring Method Yes Yes
Measuring Range Yes Yes
Upper limit value Yes Yes
Lower limit value Yes Yes
Note

A5E00105505-03 A-7
analog input modules.
You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 and 1 to “1”.
7 6 2 0
Byte 0
Cycle end interrupt enable

Limit value interrupt enable
Byte 1 Interference suppression
Channel group 0
Channel group 1
Channel group 2 See Table A-5
Channel group 3
7 4 3 0
Byte 2 Measurement channel group 0
Measuring
See Table A-6
Measuring Method Range
Byte 6 High-Order Byte Upper limit value channel

Byte 7 Low-Order Byte group 0; channel 0
Byte 8 High-Order Byte Lower limit value channel
Byte 10 High-Order Byte Upper limit value channel
Byte 12 High-Order Byte Lower limit value channel
Note: For the channel groups, only one limit value
for channel 1 is ever set.
Figure A-3 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules
Note
The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation
(see Chapter 4). Please observe the range limits when setting the limit values.

A-8 A5E00105505-03
Interference frequency suppression

The table below contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in
byte 1 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-3). You must count the resulting
integration time separately for each channel!
Table A-5 Codes for Interference Suppression of the Analog Input Modules
Interference Suppression Integration Code

Time
400 Hz 2.5 ms 2#00
60 Hz 16.7 ms 2#01
50 Hz 20 ms 2#10
10 Hz 100 ms 2#11
Measuring methods and measuring ranges

The table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the
analog input modules and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 5
of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-3).
Note
Please note that a measuring range module may need to be reconnected,
depending on the measuring range (see Chapter 4)!
Table A-6 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules
Measuring Code Measuring Range Code

Method
Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000
Voltage 2#0001 " 80 mV 2#0001
" 250 mV 2#0010
" 500 mV 2#0011
"1V 2#0100
" 2.5 V 2#0101
"5V 2#0110
1 to 5 V 2#0111
0 to 10 V 2#1000
" 10 V 2#1001
" 25 mV 2#1010
" 50 mV 2#1011

A5E00105505-03 A-9
Table A-6 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules

Method
Four-wire 2#0010 " 3.2 mA 2#0000
transmitter " 10 mA 2#0001
0 to 20 mA 2#0010
4 to 20 mA 2#0011
" 20 mA 2#0100
" 5 mA 2#0101
Two-wire 2#0011 4 to 20 mA 2#0011
transmitter
Resistance, 2#0100 150 2#0010
four-conductor 300 2#0100
connection 600 2#0110
10 k 2#1001
Resistor 2#0110 52 to 148 2#0001
four-conductor 250 2#0011
connection; 100 400 2#0101
compensation 700 2#0111
Thermal 2#1000 Pt 100 climate 2#0000
resistance + lineari Ni 100 climate 2#0001
zation Pt 100 standard range 2#0010
four-conductor Pt 200 standard range 2#0011
connection Pt 500 standard range 2#0100
Pt 1000 standard range 2#0101
Ni 1000 standard range 2#0110
Pt 200 climate 2#0111
Ni 1000 climate 2#1001
Ni 100 standard range 2#1011
Thermocouples 2#1010 Type B [PtRh – PtRh] 2#0000
internal Type N [NiCrSi – NiSi] 2#0001
comparison Type E [NiCr – CuNi] 2#0010
Type R [PtRh –Pt] 2#0011
Thermocouples 2#1011
Type S [PtRh –Pt] 2#0100
external
Type J [Fe – CuNi IEC] 2#0101
comparison
Type L [Fe – CuNi] 2#0110
Thermocouples 2#1101 Type T [Cu – CuNi] 2#0111
+ linearization Type K [NiCr – Ni] 2#1000
internal Type U [Cu –Cu Ni] 2#1001
comparison
Thermocouples 2#1110
+ linearization
external
comparison

A-10 A5E00105505-03
A.5 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD
Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters which you can set for analog input
module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD.
• In STEP 7
Table A-7 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
0
1
Temperature unit Yes Yes
Module filtering mode Yes Yes
Temperature coefficient Yes Yes
128
Smoothing Yes Yes
Note

A5E00105505-03 A-11
The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for SM 331;
AI 8 xRTD. You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to “1”.
7 6 2 0
Byte 0
Temperature unit 0: degrees Celsius

1: degrees Fahrenheit
Bytes 1 to 13 are not assigned
Figure A-4 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

A-12 A5E00105505-03

AI 8 x RTD.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Module filtering mode (refer to Table A-8)
Byte 0
Channel group 0
Channel group 1
(refer to Table A-9)
Channel group 2
Channel group 3
Byte 2
Measuring method, channel group 0

Byte 3
Measuring range, channel group 0

Byte 4
Temperature coefficient, channel group 0

Smoothing, channel group 0
Byte 5

Byte 6

Byte 7

Figure A-5 Data Record 128 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 RTD

A5E00105505-03 A-13
Byte 8

Byte 9

Byte 10

Byte 11

Byte 12

Byte 13

Byte 14 High Byte Upper limit value

channel group 0;
Byte 15 Low Byte channel 0
Byte 16 High Byte Lower limit value
channel group 0;
Upper limit value

Byte 18 High Byte
channel group 0;
Byte 20 Lower limit value

High Byte
channel group 0;
Figure A-6 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (Continued)

A-14 A5E00105505-03

channel group 1;

channel group 1;
Upper limit value

Byte 26 High Byte channel group 1;
channel 3
Byte 27 Low Byte
Lower limit value

channel group 2;
channel group 2;
Upper limit value

Byte 34 High Byte
channel group 2

High Byte
channel group 2;

channel group 3;
channel group 3;
Upper limit value

Byte 42 High Byte
channel group 3;

High Byte
channel group 3;
Figure A-7 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (Continued)
Note

A5E00105505-03 A-15
Operating modes of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD
The table below contains the codes for the different operating modes, which you
enter in byte 0 of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5).
Table A-8 Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD
Module filtering mode Code

8 channels hardware filter 2#00000000
8 channels software filter 2#00000001
Interference frequency suppression of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

byte 1 of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5). Note that the settings 50 Hz, 60 Hz
and 400 Hz only apply to 8-channel software filter mode. The setting 50, 60 and
400 Hz only applies to 8-channel and 4-channel hardware filter mode.
Table A-9 Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD
Interference Suppression Code

400 Hz 2#00
60 Hz 2#01
50 Hz 2#10
50/60/400 Hz 2#11
Measuring methods and measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

module and its codes. You must enter these codes in the corresponding bytes of
data record 128 (refer to Figure A-3).
Table A-10 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD
Measuring Method Code Measuring Range Code

Resistance, four-conductor 2#0100 150 2#0010
600 2#0110
Resistance, three-conductor 2#0101 150 2#0010
600 2#0110

A-16 A5E00105505-03
Table A-10 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, continued

Thermal 2#1000 Pt 100 climate 2#00000000
resistance + linearization Ni 100 climate 2#00000001
four-conductor connection Pt 100 standard 2#00000010
Ni 100 standard 2#00000011
Pt 500 standard 2#00000100
Pt 1000 standard 2#00000101
Ni 1000 standard 2#00000110
Pt 200 climate 2#00000111
Pt 500 climate 2#00001000
Pt 1000 climate 2#00001001
Ni 1000 climate 2#00001010
Pt 200 standard 2#00001011
Ni 120 standard 2#00001100
Ni 120 climate 2#00001101
Cu 10 climate 2#00001110
Cu 10 standard 2#00001111
Ni 200 standard 2#00010000
Ni 200 climate 2#00010001
Ni 500 standard 2#00010010
Ni 500 climate 2#00010011
Thermal resistance + 2#1001 Pt 100 climate 2#00000000
linearization three-conductor Ni 100 climate 2#00000001
connection Pt 100 standard 2#00000010
Ni 100 standard 2#00000011
Pt 500 standard 2#00000100
Pt 1000 standard 2#00000101
Ni 1000 standard 2#00000110
Pt 200 climate 2#00000111
Pt 500 climate 2#00001000
Pt 1000 climate 2#00001001
Ni 1000 climate 2#00001010
Pt 200 standard 2#00001011
Ni 120 standard 2#00001100
Ni 120 climate 2#00001101
Cu 10 climate 2#00001110
Cu 10 standard 2#00001111
Ni 200 standard 2#00010000
Ni 200 climate 2#00010001
Ni 500 standard 2#00010010
Ni 500 climate 2#00010011

A5E00105505-03 A-17
Temperature coefficient of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD
The table below contains the codes for the temperature coefficient which you enter
in the corresponding byte of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5).
Table A-11 Codes of Temperature Coefficients of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD
Temperature coefficient Code

Pt0.003850 Ω/Ω/°C (IPTS-68) 2#0000
Pt0.003916 Ω/Ω/°C 2#0001
Pt0.003902 Ω/Ω/°C 2#0010
Pt0.003920 Ω/Ω/°C 2#0011
Pt0.003850 Ω/Ω/°C (ITS-90) 2#0100
Ni 0.006180 Ω/Ω/°C 2#1000
Ni 0.006720 Ω/Ω/°C 2#1001
Cu0.00427 Ω/Ω/°C 2#1100
Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

The table below contains the codes for all smoothing modes, which you enter in
the corresponding byte of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5).
Table A-12 Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD
Smoothing Code
None 2#00
Low 2#01
Average 2#10
High 2#11

A-18 A5E00105505-03
A.6 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC
Parameters
module SM 331; AI 8 x TC.
• In STEP 7
Table A-13 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
0
1
128
Reaction to open thermocouple Yes Yes
128
Smoothing Yes Yes
Note

A5E00105505-03 A-19
The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC.
You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to “1”.
7 6 2 0
Byte 0
Temperature unit 0: degrees Celsius

1: degrees Fahrenheit
Figure A-8 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A-20 A5E00105505-03

AI 8 x TC.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Module filtering mode (refer to Table A-14)
Byte 0
Channel group 0
Channel group 1
Channel group 2
Channel group 3
Byte 2

Byte 3

Byte 4
Smoothing, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-18)

Reaction with open thermocouple, channel group 0
Byte 5

Byte 6

Byte 7

Figure A-9 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00105505-03 A-21
Byte 8

Byte 9

Byte 10

Byte 11

Byte 12

Byte 13


channel group 0;
channel group 0;
Upper limit value

Byte 18 High Byte
channel group 0;

High Byte
channel group 0;
Figure A-10 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC (Continued)

A-22 A5E00105505-03

channel group 1;

channel group 1;
Upper limit value

channel 3
Byte 27 Low Byte
Lower limit value

channel group 2;
channel group 2;
Upper limit value

Byte 34 High Byte
channel group 2

High Byte
channel group 2;

channel group 3;
channel group 3;
Upper limit value

Byte 42 High Byte
channel group 3;

High Byte
channel group 3;
Figure A-11 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC (Continued)
Note

A5E00105505-03 A-23
Operating modes of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC
The table below contains the codes for the different operating modes, which you
enter in byte 0 of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-9).
Table A-14 Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC
Module filtering mode Code

8 channels software filter 2#00000001
Interference frequency suppression of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

byte 1 of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-9). Note that the settings 400 Hz,
60 Hz and 50 Hz only apply to 8-channel software filter mode. The setting 50, 60
and 400 Hz only applies to 8-channel and 4-channel hardware filter mode.
Table A-15 Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8 x TC

400 Hz 2#00
60 Hz 2#01
50 Hz 2#10
50/60/400 Hz 2#11

A-24 A5E00105505-03
Measuring methods and measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

module and its codes. You must enter these codes in the corresponding bytes of
data record 128 (refer to Figure A-3).
Table A-16 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC
Measuring Method Code Measuring Code

Range
Thermocouple, linear, 2#1010 B 2#0000
reference temperature 0 °C N 2#0001
E 2#0010
R 2#0011
S 2#0100
J 2#0101
L 2#0110
T 2#0111
K 2#1000
U 2#1001
C 2#1010
Thermocouple, linear, 2#1011 B 2#0000
reference temperature 50 °C N 2#0001
E 2#0010
R 2#0011
S 2#0100
J 2#0101
L 2#0110
T 2#0111
K 2#1000
U 2#1001
C 2#1010
Thermocouple, linear, internal comparison 2#1101 B 2#0000
N 2#0001
E 2#0010
R 2#0011
S 2#0100
J 2#0101
L 2#0110
T 2#0111
K 2#1000
U 2#1001
C 2#1010
Thermocouple, linear, external comparison 2#1110 B 2#0000
N 2#0001
E 2#0010
R 2#0011
S 2#0100
J 2#0101
L 2#0110
T 2#0111
K 2#1000
U 2#1001
C 2#1010

A5E00105505-03 A-25
Reaction to open thermocouple of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC
The table below contains the codes for the reactions to an open thermocouple,
which you enter in the corresponding byte of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-9).
Table A-17 Codes of Reaction to Open Thermocouple of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC
Reaction to open thermocouple Code

Overflow 2#0
Underflow 2#1
Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

The table below contains the codes for all smoothing modes, which you enter in
the corresponding byte of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-9).
Table A-18 Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC
Smoothing Code
None 2#00
Low 2#01
Average 2#10
High 2#11

A-26 A5E00105505-03
A.7 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits

analog input module.
You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte to “1”.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 0 Temperature measurement
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 2 Measuring method and measuring range channel 0
Measuring Range
Measuring Method
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 10 Temperature coefficient channel 0 and 1
Channel 1, 3, 5, 7
Channel 0, 2, 4, 6
Figure A-12 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

A5E00105505-03 A-27
Temperature measurement
The table below contains the codes for the different temperature measurements,
which you enter in byte 0 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-12).
Table A-19 Codes for temperature measurement of the analog input module
Temperature unit for linearization Code

Degrees Celsius 2#0000 0000
Degrees Fahrenheit 2#0000 1000
Kelvin 2#0001 0000

byte 1 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-12). You must work out the resulting
integration time separately for each module!
Table A-20 Codes for Interference Suppression of the Analog Input Module
Interference Suppression Integration Time Code

60 Hz 50 ms 2#01
50 Hz 60 ms 2#10

analog input module and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 13
Note
Please note that the analog input module must be wired in accordance with the
measuring range and at the front connector correspondingly!
Table A-21 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Module

Method
Voltage 2#0001 " 50 mV 2#1011
" 500 mV 2#0011
"1V 2#0100
"5V 2# 0110
1 to 5 V 2#0111
0 to 10 V 2#1000
" 10 V 2#1001

A-28 A5E00105505-03
Table A-21 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Module

Method
Current 2#0010 0 to 20 mA 2#0010
4 to 20 mA 2#0011
" 20 mA 2#0100
Resistors 2#0101 600 Ω 2#0110
6 kΩ 2#1000
Bulb resistor 2#1001 Pt 100 Climate 2#0000
(linear) Pt 100 Standard 2#0010
Ni 100 Climate 2#0001
Ni 100 Standard 2#0011
Ni 1000 / LG-Ni 1000 Climate 2#1010
Ni 1000 / LG-Ni 1000 Standard 2#0110
Temperature coefficient
The table below contains the codes for the temperature coefficient which you enter
in the corresponding byte of data record (refer to Figure A-12).
Table A-22 Codes for temperature measurement of the analog input module
Temperature coefficient Measuring Range Code

Pt0.003850 Ω/Ω/°C (ITS-90) Pt 100 2#0100
Ni 0.006180 Ω/Ω/°C Ni 100 / Ni 1000 2#1000
Ni 0.005000 Ω/Ω/°C LG-Ni 1000 2#1010

A5E00105505-03 A-29
A.8 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits
Parameters
Table A-23contains all the parameters which you can set for the isolated analog
input module SM 331; AI 8 x bits. This comparison indicates which methods you
can use for the configuration of the individual parameters:
• SFC 55 “WR_PARM”
• STEP 7 programming device
The parameters that you have set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the
module by means of SFC 56 or SFC 57.
Table A-23 Parameters for the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits
Data Record Configurable with...

Parameter
No. ... SFC 55 ...programming device
Diagnostics: With wire-break 0 No Yes
check
Diagnostics interrupt enable 1 Yes Yes
Module mode Yes Yes
128
Smoothing Yes Yes
Note

A-30 A5E00105505-03

Figure A-13 shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the isolated
analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits.
You can activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to “1”.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
Byte 0

Figure A-13 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

A5E00105505-03 A-31
Figure shows the structure of data record 128 for the parameters of the isolated
analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
Module mode (see Table A-24)
Byte 0
Byte 1 Interference
frequency suppression
Channel group 0
Channel group 1
Refer to Table A-25
Channel group 2
Channel group 3
Byte 2

Byte 3

Byte 4

Byte 5

Byte 6

Byte 7

Figure A-14 Data record 128 for parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

A-32 A5E00105505-03
Byte 8

Byte 9

Byte 10

Byte 11

Byte 12

Byte 13

Upper limit value

channel 0
Byte 15 Low Byte
channel group 0;
Upper limit value

Byte 18 High Byte
channel group 0;

channel group 0;
Figure A-15 Data record 128 for SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits (continued)

A5E00105505-03 A-33
Upper limit value
channel 2
Byte 23 Low Byte
channel group 1;
Upper limit value

channel 3
Byte 27 Low Byte
channel group 1;
Upper limit value

Byte 30 High Byte
channel group 2;

channel group 2;
Upper limit value

Byte 34 High Byte
channel group 2

channel group 2;

channel group 3;
channel group 3;
High Byte Upper limit value

Byte 42
channel group 3;

channel group 3;
Figure A-16 Data record 128 for parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits (continued)
Note

A-34 A5E00105505-03
Module modes
Table A-24 contains the codes for the module modes, which you enter in byte 0 of
data record 128 (see Figure A-14).
Table A-24 Codes for the modes of SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits
Module mode Code

8 channels 2#00000000
4 channels 2#00000001
Interference suppression
Table A-25 contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in byte
1 of data record 128 (see Figure A-14). Note that 4-channel mode only functions if
interference frequency suppression of 50, 60 and 400 Hz is set.
Table A-25 Codes for interference frequency suppression of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits

400 Hz 2#00
60 Hz 2#01
50 Hz 2#10
50, 60 and 400 Hz 2#11

Table A-26 contains all the measuring ranges for the isolated analog input module
SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits. Table A-26 also shows the codes for measuring methods
and measuring ranges. You must enter these codes in accordance with the
required measuring range in the relevant byte of data record 128
(see Figure A-14).
Table A-26 Codes for the measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x16 bits
Voltage 2#0001 ±5V 2#0110
1 to 5 V 2#0111
± 10 V 2#1001
Current (4-wire transmitter) 2#0002 0 to 20 mA 2#0010
4 to 20 mA 2#0011
± 20 mA 2#0100
Settings for input smoothing

Table A-27 contains all the smoothing settings for the isolated analog input module
SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits. According to the smoothing required, you must enter these
codes in the corresponding byte of data set 128 (see imag eA-14.

A5E00105505-03 A-35
Table A-27 Codes for the smoothing mode settings of the SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits
Smoothing mode setting Code

None 2#00
Low 2#01
Average 2#10
High 2#11
A.9 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules
Parameters
Table A-28 contains all the parameters you can set for analog output modules..
The comparison shows:
• Which parameters you can change with STEP 7 and
• Which parameters you can change with SFC 55 “WR_PARM”.
The parameters which you set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module
with SFCs 56 and 57.
Table A-28 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
Diagnostics: Group diagnostics 0 No Yes
Behavior on CPU STOP Yes Yes
Output type 1 Yes Yes
Output Range Yes Yes
Substitute value Yes Yes
Note

A-36 A5E00105505-03

analog output modules.
You activate the diagnostics interrupt enable by setting the corresponding bit in
byte 0 to “1”.
7 6 0
Byte 0
7 3 2 1 0
Byte 1 Behavior on CPU STOP
Channel group 0
Channel group 1 0 = Outputs
Channel group 2 de-energized
Channel group 3 1 = Hold last value
7 4 3 0
Byte 2 Output channel group 0
Output Range
Output type Refer to Table A-29
Byte 6 High-Order Byte

Substitute value channel
Byte 7 Low-Order Byte
group 0
group 1
group 2
group 3
Figure A-17 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

A5E00105505-03 A-37
Setting substitute values
Note
For output ranges 4 to 20 mA and 1 to 5 V you must set the substitute value
E500H so that the output remains de-energized (refer to Tables 4-35 and 4-37 on
pages 4-26 and 4-27).
The representation of the substitute values corresponds to the analog value
representation. You should observe the relevant range limits when setting the
substitute values.
Output methods and output ranges

The table below contains all the output methods and output ranges of the analog
output modules and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 5 of
data record 1 (refer to FigureA-17).
Table A-29 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Output Modules
Output type Code Output Range Code

Voltage 2#0001 1 to 5 V 2#0111
0 to 10 V 2#1000
" 10 V 2#1001
Current 2#0010 0 to 20 mA 2#0010
4 to 20 mA 2#0011
" 20 mA 2#0100

A-38 A5E00105505-03
A.10 Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits
Parameters
Table A-28 contains all the parameters that you can set for the analog output
module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits. The comparison shows:
• Which parameters you can change with STEP 7 and
• Which parameters you can change with SFC 55 “WR_PARM”.
The parameters which you set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module
with SFCs 56 and 57.
Table A-30 Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits.

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
Diagnostics: Group diagnostics 0 No Yes
Behavior on CPU STOP Yes Yes
1
Output type Yes Yes
Note

A5E00105505-03 A-39
The diagram below shows the structure of data record 1 of the parameters of the
SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits.
You activate the diagnostics interrupt enable by setting the corresponding bit in
byte 0 to “1”.
7 6 0
Byte 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 1 Behavior on CPU STOP
Channel 4 Channel 0
Channel 5 Channel 1 0 = Outputs
Channel 6 Channel 2 de-energized
Channel 7 Channel 3 1 = Hold last value
7 4 3 0
Byte 2 Output channel 0
Output Range
Output type See Table A-31
Figure A-18 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

A-40 A5E00105505-03
Output method and output range

The following table contains all the output methods and output ranges of the
SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits , with their coding. You must enter these codes in bytes 2
to 9 of data record 1 (refer to FigureA-18).
Table A-31 Codes for the output ranges of the analog output module SM332;
AO 8 x 12 bits
Output type Code Output range Code
Voltage 2#0001 1 to 5 V 2#0111
0 to 10 V 2#1000
± 10 V 2#1001
Current 2#0010 0 to 20 mA 2#0010
4 to 20 mA 2#0011
± 20 mA 2#0100
A.11 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules
Parameters
The table below contains all the parameters you can set for analog input/output
modules.
• In STEP 7
Table A-32 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
Integration Time 1 Yes Yes
Output type Yes Yes

A5E00105505-03 A-41
analog input/output modules.
You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 and 1 to “1”.
7 0
Byte 0 Not relevant
7 0
Byte 1 Reset Time
Set the same parameters for
all channels.
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
7 4 3 0
Byte 2 Meas. channel 0
Measuring Measuring
Method Range
7 4 3 0
Output type Output Range
Byte 8
: : Not relevant
Byte 13
Figure A-19 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules

A-42 A5E00105505-03

analog input/output modules and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes
2 to 5 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-19).
Table A-33 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules

Voltage 2#0001 0 to 10 V 2#1000
Resistance, four-conductor connection 2#0100 10 k 2#1001
Thermal resistance + linearization 2#1000 Pt 100 climate 2#0000
four-conductor connection
Output methods and output ranges

The table below contains all the output methods and output ranges of the analog
input/output modules and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 6 and 7
Table A-34 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules
Output type Code Output Range Code

Voltage 2#0001 0 to 10 V 2#1000

A5E00105505-03 A-43
A-44 A5E00105505-03
Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules B
In this Appendix

B.1 Evaluating Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the B-1
User Program
B.2 Structure and Content of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 to 7 B-2
B.3 Channel-Specific Diagnostic Data from Byte 7 B-5
B.4 Diagnostic data of the SM 338; POS-INPUT B-7
B.1 Evaluating Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the

User Program
In this Appendix
This Appendix describes the structure of the diagnostic data in the system data.
You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to evaluate the diagnostics
data of the signal module in the STEP 7 user program.
Diagnostic data are contained in data records

The diagnostic data of a module can be up to 16 bytes long and are contained in
data records 0 and 1:
• Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data that describe the current
status of a programmable logic controller.
• Data record 1 contains the four bytes of diagnostic data that are also contained
in data record 0 and as many as 12 bytes of module specific diagnostic data.
Further references
An in-depth description of the principle of evaluating the diagnostic data of signal
modules in the user program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for
that purpose will be found in the STEP 7 manuals.

A5E00105505-03 B-1
B.2 Structure and Content of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 to 7
The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data are
described below. The following general rule applies: When an error occurs, the bit
concerned is set to “1”.
Bytes 0 and 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 0
Module problem
Internal malfunction
External malfunction
Channel error present
External auxiliary supply missing
Front connector missing
Module not parameterized.
Incorrect parameter in the module
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 1 0 0
Module type (see Table B-1)

Channel information available
User information available
Figure B-1 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data
Module types
The following table contains the IDs of the module classes (bits 0 to 3 in byte 1).
Table B-1 Codes of the Module Types
Code Module Type

0101 Analog module
0110 CPU
1000 Function module
1100 CP
1111 Digital module

B-2 A5E00105505-03
Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules
Bytes 2 and 3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 2 0
Memory module or measuring range module

(for analog modules) incorrect or missing
Communication fault
Operating status 0: RUN
1: STOP
Scan time-out
Module-internal supply voltage failure
Battery empty
Complete backup supply failure
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 3 0
Rack failure
Processor failure
EPROM error
RAM error
ADC/DAC error
Fuse blown
Hardware interrupt lost
Figure B-2 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostics Data

A5E00105505-03 B-3
Bytes 4 to 7
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 4
Channel type
B#16#70: Digital input
B#16#71: Analog input
B#16#72: Digital output
B#16#73: Analog output
Further channel type available?
0: no
1: yes
7 0
Byte 5 Number of diagnostics bits that
the module outputs per channel
7 0
Byte 6 Number of channels of the same
type in one module
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 7
Channel error channel 0 / channel group 0

...
...
...
...
Channel
... error channel 6 / channel group 6
Figure B-3 Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostics Data

B-4 A5E00105505-03
B.3 Channel-Specific Diagnostic Data from Byte 8
From byte 8 up to byte 15, data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic
data. The figures below show the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel
or a channel group of the specific module. The following general rule applies:
When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to “1”.
You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the
section called “Diagnostics of the Modules”.
Digital input channel of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC; with hardware and

diagnostic interrupts
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0
Configuring/parameter assignment error

Ground fault
Short-circuit to L+
Short-circuit to M
Wire-break
Sensor supply missing
Figure B-4 Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Input Channel of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC
Digital output channel of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; with diagnostic

interrupt
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0

Ground fault
Short-circuit to L+
Short-circuit to M
Wire-break
Overtemperature
Figure B-5 Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Output Channel of the SM 322;
DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

A5E00105505-03 B-5
Analog input channel of the SM 331 modules with diagnostics capability
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Common mode error
Short-circuit to L+
Short-circuit to M
Wire-break
Reference channel error
Underflow
Overflow
Figure B-6 Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Input Channel of a SM 331 with Diagnostics
Capability
Analog output channel of the SM 332 modules with diagnostics capability
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0

Common mode error
Short-circuit to L+
Short-circuit to M
Wire-break
Figure B-7 Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Output Channel of a SM 332 with Diagnostics
Capability

B-6 A5E00105505-03
B.4 Diagnostic Data of the SM 338; POS-INPUT
The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for position
detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT are described below. The following general
rule applies: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to “1”.
Section 5.4 includes a description of possible error causes and appropriate
remedies.
Bytes 0 and 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 0 0 0
Module problem
Internal malfunction
External malfunction
Channel error present
Module not parameterized.
Incorrect parameter in the module
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 1 0 0 0
Module class 05H

Channel information available
Figure B-8 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT

A5E00105505-03 B-7
Bytes 2 to 7
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 2 0
Scan time-out
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 3 Not relevant
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 4 0
Channel type
79H: SM POS-INPUT
7 0
Byte 5 Number of diagnostics bits that the module
outputs per channel: 8 bits long
7 0
Byte 6 Number of channels of the same
type in one module: 3 channels
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 7 0 0 0 0 0
Channel error, channel 0

Figure B-9 Bytes 2 and 7 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT
Bytes 8 to 10
From byte 8 up to byte 10, data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic
data. The figure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel
of the SM 338; POS-INPUT.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
Configuration/parameterization error
(internal channel error)
Encoder error (external channel error)
Figure B-10 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 338; POS-INPUT

B-8 A5E00105505-03
Dimension Drawings C
Introduction
In this appendix you will find the dimension drawings for the most important
components of an S7-300. The specifications in these dimension drawings are
required for dimensioning the S7-300 configuration. The dimensions of an S7-300
configuration must be taken into account when installing an S7-300 in cabinets,
switchgear rooms, etc. This appendix does not contain any dimension drawings of
the CPUs of the S7-300 or M7-300 or of the IM 153-1. These dimension drawings
are contained in the relevant manuals.
Contents
In this appendix, you will find the dimension drawings of the following S7-300
components.

C.1 Dimension Drawings of the Rails C-2
C.2 Dimension Drawings of the Power Supply Modules C-8
C.3 Dimension Drawings of the Interface Modules C-13
C.4 Dimension Drawings of the Signal Modules C-13
C.5 Dimension Drawings for Accessories C-15

A5E00105505-03 C-1
C.1 Dimension Drawings of the Rails
483 mm standard rail

Figure C-1 shows the dimension drawing of the 483 mm standard rail.
8.7 465.2
163.9 155
7
24
19
35
15 11
482.6
Figure C-1 Dimension Drawing of the 483 mm Standard Rail

15 20 25 = 500
25
5.2
24
19
35
15 18
530

C-2 A5E00105505-03
Dimension Drawings

15 32 25 = 800
25
5.2
24
19
35
15 18
830

24
19
35
15 2000

A5E00105505-03 C-3
160 mm rail
Figure C-5 shows the dimension drawing of the 160 mm rail.
32.5
7
M6
57.2
122
10
10 140 6
160 15
Figure C-5 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 160 mm Standard Width
482.6 mm rail
Figure C-6 shows the dimension drawing of the 482.6 mm rail.
32.5
M6
57.2
122
10
8.3 466 6
482.6 15
Figure C-6 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 482.6 mm Standard Width

C-4 A5E00105505-03
Dimension Drawings
530 mm rail
32.5
7
M6
57.2
122
10
15 500 6
530 15
830 mm rail
32.5
M6
57.2
122
10
15 800 6
830 15

A5E00105505-03 C-5
2000 mm rail
122
2000 6
15
Figure C-9 Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Rail

C-6 A5E00105505-03
Dimension Drawings
Rail for “Insert and Remove” function

Figure C-10 shows the dimension drawing of the rail for the “Insert and Remove”
function with active bus module, S7-300 module and explosion-proof partition. The
rail is 482.6 mm or 530 mm long.
Explosion-proof
partition
S7-300 module
166
152
Active bus module
59
Rail for the ”Insert
and Remove”
function
122
125
155
Figure C-10 Complete Dimension Drawing of a Rail for “Insert and Remove” Function with Active
Bus Module, S7-300 Module and Explosion-proof Partition

A5E00105505-03 C-7
Bus modules (Expansion buses)
Figure C-11 shows the dimension drawing of the active bus module for the “Insert
and Remove” function.
Bus modules
BM PS/IM (...7HA)
BM IM/IM (...7HD)
BM 2 40 (...7HB)
BM 1 80 (...7HC)
97
92
Figure C-11 Dimension Drawing of the Active Bus Modules
C.2 Dimension Drawings of the Power Supply Modules
PS 307; 2 A
Figure C-12 shows the dimension drawing of the PS 307; 2 A power supply
module.
127.5
50 120
125
Figure C-12 Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A

C-8 A5E00105505-03
Dimension Drawings
PS 307; 5A
module.
127.5
80 120
125

A5E00105505-03 C-9
PS 307; 10 A
module.
127.5
200 120
125

C-10 A5E00105505-03
Dimension Drawings
PS 307; 5 A with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP

Figures C-15 and C-16 show the dimension drawings of the configuration of a
power supply module PS 307; 5 A with the CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Observe
the dimensions that result from the use of the power connector for wiring the
PS 307; 5 A with the CPU.
132
27
68
Figure C-15 Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A with CPUs
313/314/315/315-2 DP. Front View

A5E00105505-03 C-11
PS 307; 5 A with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP
Figure C-16 shows the dimension drawing of the power supply module PS 307; 5 A
with the CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP in the side view.
130
120
125
6 13
Figure C-16 Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A with CPUs
313/314/315/315-2 DP. Side View

C-12 A5E00105505-03
Dimension Drawings
C.3 Dimension Drawings of the Interface Modules
IM 360
Figure C-17 shows the dimension drawing of the interface module IM 360.
40 120
125
Figure C-17 Interface Module IM 360
IM 361
Figure C-18 shows the dimension drawing of the interface module IM 361.
80 120
125

A5E00105505-03 C-13
IM 365
Figure C-19 shows the dimension drawing of interface module IM 365.
40 120
125
9
120
125

C-14 A5E00105505-03
Dimension Drawings
C.4 Dimension Drawings of the Signal Modules
Signal Module
Figure C-20 shows the dimension drawing of the signal module.
A signal module might look slightly different than the example below. The
dimensions however are always the same.
40 120
130
Figure C-20 Signal Module 125

A5E00105505-03 C-15
C.5 Dimension Drawings for Accessories
Shield connecting element

Figure C-21 shows the dimension drawing of the shield connecting element in
connection with two signal modules.
120
190
40
80
Figure C-21 2 Signal Modules with Shield Connecting Element

C-16 A5E00105505-03
Dimension Drawings
SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-tier

Figure C-22 shows the dimension drawing of the 3-tier SIMATIC TOP connect.
35
70
60 40.5
35.5
Figure C-22 SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-tier

35
70
60 40.5
35.5

A5E00105505-03 C-17
35
55
52 40.5
35.5
RS 485 repeater on standard rail

Figure C-25 shows the dimension drawing of the RS 485 repeater on the standard
rail.
45 73
128
125
Figure C-25 RS 485 Repeater on Standard Rail

C-18 A5E00105505-03
Dimension Drawings
RS 485 repeater on S7-300 rail

Figure C-26 shows the dimension drawing of the RS 485 repeater on the S7-300
rail.
45 70
125
Figure C-26 RS 485 repeater on S7-300 rail

A5E00105505-03 C-19
C-20 A5E00105505-03
Spare Parts and Accessories for
S7-300 Modules D
Spare parts
Table D-1 lists all the parts you can order separately or later for S7-300
programmable controllers.
Table D-1 Accessories and Spare Parts
S7-300 Parts Order number

Bus connector 6ES7390-0AA00-0AA0
Power connector between power supply unit 6ES7390-7BA00-0AA0
and CPU
Labeling strip (Qty 10)
• For 8/16-channel modules 6ES7392-2XX00-0AA0
• For 32-channel modules 6ES7392-2XX10-0AA0
Labeling strips to be printed
• For 16-channel modules (petrol) 6ES7392-2AX00-0AA0
(light beige) 6ES7392-2BX00-0AA0
(yellow) 6ES7392-2CX00-0AA0
(red) 6ES7392-2DX00-0AA0
• For 32-channel modules (petrol) 6ES7392-2AX10-0AA0
(light beige) 6ES7392-2BX10-0AA0
(yellow) 6ES7392-2CX10-0AA0
(red) 6ES7392-2DX10-0AA0
• Instructions for printing labeling strips with www.siemens.de/automation/csi/
artwork product
Contribution ID No.: 11978022
Slot numbering label 6ES7912-0AA00-0AA0
Front connector 20-pin
• Screw-type Connection 6ES7392-1AJ00-0AA0
• Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7392-1BJ00-0AA0
Front connector 40-pin
• Screw-type Connection 6ES7392-1AM00-0AA0
Front connector for 2 flat ribbon terminals
• Screw-type Connection 6ES7921-3AB00-0AA0
• Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7921-3AA00-0AA0

A5E00105505-03 D-1
Table D-1 Accessories and Spare Parts, continued
S7-300 Parts Order number

Front connector for 4 flat ribbon terminals
• Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7921-3AA20-0AA0
SIMATIC TOP connect, 1-tier, with
• Screw-type Connection 6ES7924-0AA00-0AA0
• Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7924-0AA00-0AB0
• Screw-type Connection 6ES7924-0BB00-0AA0
• Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7924-0BB00-0AB0
• Screw-type Connection 6ES7924-0CA00-0AA0
• Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7924-0CA00-0AB0
Round-sheath ribbon cable (16-pin)
• Unshielded 30 m 6ES7923-0CD00-0AA0
• Unshielded 60 m 6ES7923-0CG00-0AA0
• Shielded 30 m 6ES7923-0CD00-0BA0
• Shielded 60 m 6ES7923-0CG00-0BA0
Plug-in connectors, 16-pin, set of 8 (insulation 6ES7921-3BE10-0AA0
displacement connectors)
Shield connecting element 6ES7390-5AA00-0AA0
Shield connection terminals for
• 2 cables, each with a shield diameter of 2 6ES7390-5AB00-0AA0
to 6 mm
• 1 cable with a shield diameter of 3 to 8 6ES7390-5BA00-0AA0
mm
• 1 cable with a shield diameter of 4 to 13 6ES7390-5CA00-0AA0
mm
Measuring range module for analog modules 6ES7974-0AA00-0AA0
Fuse set for 120/230 VAC digital output 6ES7973-1HD00-0AA0
modules (contains 10 fuses and 2 fuse
carriers)
Interconnecting cable between IM 360 and
IM 361 or IM 361 and IM 361
• 1m 6ES7368-3BB01-0AA0
• 2.5 m 6ES7368-3BC51-0AA0
• 5m 6ES7368-3BF01-0AA0
• 10 m 6ES7368-3CB01-0AA0

D-2 A5E00105505-03
Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic
Sensitive Devices (ESD) E
Introduction
In this appendix, we explain
• what is meant by “electrostatic sensitive devices”
• the precautions you must observe when handling and working with electrostatic
sensitive devices.
Contents
This chapter contains the following sections on electrostatic sensitive devices:

E.1 What is ESD? E-2
E.2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons E-3
E.3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge E-4
Damage

A5E00105505-03 E-1
E.1 What is ESD?
Definition
All electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ICs or components.
Due to their design, these electronic elements are very sensitive to overvoltages
and thus to any electrostatic discharge.
The abbreviation ESD has been introduced for these Electrostatic Sensitive
Devices/Modules. The designation ESD is used internationally for electrostatic
sensitive device.
Electrostatic sensitive devices are labeled with the following symbol:
Caution
! Electrostatic sensitive devices are subject to voltages that are far below the
voltage values that can still be perceived by human beings. These voltages are
present if you touch a component or the electrical connections of a module without
previously being electrostatically discharged. In most cases, the damage caused
by an overvoltage is not immediately noticeable and results in total damage only
after a prolonged period of operation.

E-2 A5E00105505-03
Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)
E.2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons
Charging
Every person with a non-conductive connection to the electrical potential of its
surroundings can be charged electrostatically.
Figure E-1 shows you the maximum values for electrostatic voltages which can
build up on a person coming into contact with the materials indicated in the figure.
These values are in conformity with the specifications of IEC 801-2.
Voltage in kV
(kV)
16 1 Synthetic material
15
14 2 Wool
13
3 Antistatic material,
12 for example, wood
11 1 or concrete
10
9
8
7
6
5
4 2
3
2
3
1
5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Relative air
humidity in %
Figure E-1 Electrostatic Voltages which Can Build up on a Person

A5E00105505-03 E-3
E.3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge
Damage
Ensure sufficient grounding

Make sure that the personnel, working surfaces and packaging are sufficiently
grounded when handling electrostatic sensitive devices. You thus avoid
electrostatic charging.
Avoid direct contact

You should touch electrostatic sensitive devices only if it is unavoidable
(for example, during maintenance work). Hold modules without touching the pins of
components or printed conductors. In this way, the discharged energy cannot
affect the sensitive devices.
If you have to carry out measurements on a module, you must discharge your
body before you start the measurement by touching grounded metallic parts. Use
grounded measuring devices only.

E-4 A5E00105505-03
List of Abbreviations F
Abbreviation Explanation
AC Alternating current
ADC Analog-to digital converter
AI Analog input
AO Analog output
PLC Programmable logic controller
COMP Compensating terminal
CP Communications processor
CPU Central processing unit of a PLC
DAC Digital-to-analog converter
DB Data block
DC Direct current
DI Digital input
DO Digital output
ESD Electrostatic sensitive devices
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EPROM Erasable programmable read-only memory
EWS Apply substitute value
FB Function block
FC Function
FEPROM Flash erasable programmable read only memory
ES Encoder supply
I+ Measuring lead for current input
IC Constant-current lead
KV Shunt comparison
L+ Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
LWH Hold last valid value
FOC Fiber-optic cable
M Ground terminal
M+ Measuring lead (positive)
M– Measuring lead (negative)
MANA Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
MPI Multipoint interface

A5E00105505-03 F-1
OB Organization block
OP Operator panel
OS Operator system
PIQ Process-image output table
PII Process-image input table
Programming Programming device
device
PS Power supply
QI Analog output current
QV Analog output voltage
RAM Random access memory
RL Load impedance
S+ Detector lead (positive)
S– Detector lead (negative)
SF ”Group error” error LED
SFB System function block
SFC System function
SM Signal module
PLC Programmable logic control
SSI Synchronous serial interface
TD Text display
U+ Measuring lead for voltage input
UCM Common mode voltage
Uiso Potential difference between MANA and local ground
Sign Sign

F-2 A5E00105505-03
Glossary
Address
An address denotes a specific operand or address area; examples of this are:
input I 12.1; memory word MW 25; data block DB 3.
Aggregate current→
Sum of the currents of all output channels on a digital output module.
Backplane bus →
→ The backplane bus is a serial data bus that is used by the modules to com-
municate with each other and to supply them with the voltage they require. The
interconnection of the modules is established by the bus connector.
Basic conversion time

Time for the actual encoding of a channel (integration time) plus the required
times for the internal control; i. e. after this time a channel is completely pro-
cessed.
Basic error limit

The basic error limit is the operational limit at 25 °C, referred to the rated range
of the analog module.
Basic response time

Time which an analog input/output module requires for a cycle if all channels are
released; it corresponds to the “number of all channels x basic conversion time”.
Bus
A bus is a transmission medium that interconnects several nodes. Data transmis-
sion can be serial or parallel, and be performed over electric conductors or fiber-
optic cables.
Bus segment
A bus segment is a self-contained section of a serial bus system. Bus segments
are interconnected by means of →repeaters.

A5E00105505-03 Glossary-1
Glossary
CiR
Equipment changes in running operations (Configuration in RUN)
Common mode voltage

A voltage that is common to all inputs/outputs of a group and is measured be-
tween this group and any reference point (usually to ground).
Communication processor
Programmable module for communication tasks, such as networking, point-to-
point connection.
Comparison point
When using thermocouples on analog input modules: point of known tempera-
ture (for example, → compensating box).
Compensating box
Compensating boxes can be used for measuring temperatures with thermocou-
ples on analog input modules. The compensating box is a compensation circuit
for compensating temperature fluctuations at the → Comparison point.
Complete restart
When a CPU starts up (say, when the mode selector switch is moved from
STOP to RUN or when the mains supply is turned on), OB 100 (Restart) is pro-
cessed before cyclic programming processing (OB 1).
With a complete restart, the → Process input image is read in and the STEP 7
user program is processed, starting with the first instruction in OB1.
Configure
Select and put together different components on a programmable logic controller
and install the requisite software and adapt to the specific use (for example, by
assigning parameters to the modules).
CP
→Communications processor
CPU
The CPU (central processing unit) is a CPU module of the →programmable
logic controller that stores and runs the user program. It contains the operating
system, memory, processing unit and communication interface.

Glossary-2 A5E00105505-03
Glossary
Default setting
The default setting is a sensible basic setting that is used whenever no other
value is used.
Destruction limit
Limit of permitted input voltage / input current.
If this limit is exceeded, the measuring accuracy may deteriorate. If the destruc-
tion limit is exceeded by a vast amount, this may destroy the internal measuring
circuit.
Diagnostic buffer
The diagnostic buffer is a buffered memory area in the CPU which stores the
diagnostics events in the order in which they occurred.
For troubleshooting, the user can read out the exact error cause in STEP 7
(PLC –> Module State) from the diagnostic buffer.
Diagnostic data
All the diagnostics events that occurred are collected in the CPU and entered in
the → Diagnostic buffer. If there is an error OB, it is started.
Diagnostic Interrupt
Modules with diagnostics capability report system errors by means of diagnostic
interrupts to the → CPU. The operating system of the CPU calls OB 82 in the
course of a diagnostic interrupt.
Diagnostics
Generic term for → System diagnostics, process error diagnosis and user-de-
fined diagnostics.
Direct access
A direct access is the direct accessing of the CPU by means of the → Backplane
bus to modules while avoiding the → Process image.
Encoder absolute
An encoder absolute determines the path traveled during position detection by
reading a numerical value. In the case of encoders absolute with a serial inter-
face (SSI), path information is transferred synchronously and serially according
to the SSI protocol (synchronous serial interface).

Glossary
Equipotential bonding
Electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor), which brings the bodies
of electrical resources and foreign conductive bodies to an identical or approxi-
mately identical potential in order to avoid interfering or hazardous voltages be-
tween these bodies.
FREEZE
Parameter in STEP 7 for position detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT. The
FREEZE function is a control command for freezing current encoder values of
the SM 338 to the instantaneous value.
Ground
The conductive ground whose electric potential can be set equal to zero at every
point.
In the proximity of grounding electrodes, the ground can have a potential differing
from zero. The term “reference ground” is frequently used to describe such cir-
cumstances.
Ground, to
To ground means connect an electrically conductive part by means of a ground-
ing system to the grounding electrode (one or more conductive parts having a
very good contact to ground).
Hardware interrupt
A hardware interrupt is triggered by interrupt-triggering modules as a result of a
certain event in the process (overshooting or undershooting of a limit value; a
module has completed the cyclic conversion of its channels).
The hardware interrupt is reported to the CPU. In accordance with the priority of
this interrupt, the →Organization block assigned to it is scanned.

The module retains the last value read out before STOP mode.
Input delay
Parameter in STEP 7 for digital input modules. The input delay is used to sup-
press injected interference. Interfering pulses from 0 ms to the set input delay
are suppressed.
The set input delay is subject to a tolerance, which can be taken from the techni-
cal specifications of the module. A high input delay suppresses long interfering
pulses, whereas a low input delay suppresses short ones.
The permissible input delay depends on the length of the cable between the en-
coder and the module. For example, a high input delay has to be set for long un-
shielded supply conductors to the encoder (longer than 100m).

Glossary
Integration time
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The integration time is the in-
verse value of the → Interference frequency suppression in ms.
Interface, multipoint
→ MPI

Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The frequency of the AC net-
work can interfere with the measured value, especially with measurements in low
voltage ranges and with thermocouples. This parameter is used by the user to
specify the prevailing line frequency on his system.
Interrupt
The SIMATIC S7 is familiar with 28 different run-time level, which govern running
of the user program. These run-time levels include interrupts such as hardware
interrupts, among other things. When an interrupt occurs, the operating system
automatically calls an assigned organization block in which the user can program
the reaction he wants (for example, in an FB).
Interrupt, diagnostic
→ Diagnostic Interrupt
Interrupt, end-of-scan-cycle interrupt

→ Hardware interrupt
Interrupt, hardware
→ Hardware interrupt
Linearity error
The linearity error identifies the maximum deviation of the measured/output value
from the ideal linear relationship between the measuring/output signal and the
digital value. The data is a percentage and relates to the rated range of the ana-
log module.
Logic block
In a SIMATIC S7 context, a logic block is a block that contains a part of the
STEP 7 user program. By contrast, a data block only contains data. There are
the following logic blocks: organization blocks (OBs), function blocks (FBs), func-
tions (FCs), system function block (SFBs), system functions (SFCs).

Glossary
Measuring range module

Measuring range modules are plugged into the analog input modules for adapta-
tion to different measuring ranges.

By operating mode we mean:
1. The selection of an operating mode of the CPU using the mode switch or the
PG
2. The type of program execution in the CPU
3. A parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules
Monoflop time
Parameter in STEP 7 for position detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT. The
monoflop time is the time interval between 2 SSI message frames (→ Encoder
absolute).
MPI
The multipoint interface (MPI) is the programmer port of the SIMATIC S7. It is
used to access programmable modules ((CPUs, CPs), text displays and operator
panel from a central point. The nodes on the MPI can communicate with each
other.
Non-isolated
In the case of non-isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the
control and load circuit are electrically connected.
Normalizing
Parameter in STEP 7 for position detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT.
Normalizing right justifies the encoder value of the → encoder absolute; non-rel-
evant places are discarded.
OB
→ Organization block
Operational limit
The operational limit is the measuring or output error of the analog module over
the entire temperature range, referred to the rated range of the analog module.

Glossary
Optically isolated
With optically isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the con-
trol and load circuit are galvanically isolated; for example, by an optocoupler,
contact assembly or repeater. Input/output circuits can be connected to common
potential.
Organization block
Organization blocks (OBs) form the interface between the operating system of
the CPU and the user program. The order in which the user program is pro-
cessed is defined in the organization blocks.
Parameters
1. Tag of a → Logic block
2. Tag for setting the characteristics of a module (one or more per module).
When delivered to the customer, each module has a practical basic setting for its
parameters, which the user can modify in STEP 7.
Process image
The signal states of the digital input and output modules are stored in the CPU in
process image.
A distinction is made between the process-image of inputs and of outputs. The
process input image (PII) is read by the input modules before the operating sys-
tem scans the user program. The process output image (PIQ) is transferred to
the output modules at the end of program scanning.
Product status
Products having an identical order number are distinguished by their product sta-
tus. The product status is incremented for upwards compatible extensions, modi-
fications due to production reasons (use of new component parts and compo-
nents) and troubleshooting.
Programming device
→Programming device
Programming device
A programming device (PG) is a personal computer in a specific industry-stan-
dard and compact design. A PG is completely equipped for programming
SIMATIC programmable logic controllers.
Reaction to open thermocouple

Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules when using Thermocouples. This
parameter defines whether “Overflow” (7FFF0H0) or “Underflow” (80000H0) is
output by the module in the event of an open thermocouple.

Glossary
Reference potential
Potential from the point of view of which the voltages of the involved circuits are
analyzed and measured.
Repeat accuracy
The repeat accuracy identifies the maximum deviation among the measured/out-
put values that then occurs, when the same input signal is again applied or the
same input value specified. The repeat accuracy relates to the rated range of the
module and applies to the settled temperature state.
Repeater
Equipment for the amplification of bus signals and connection of →bus seg-
ments over long distances.
Resolution
With analog modules, the number of bits which represent the digitized analog
value in binary. Resolution depends on the module and with analog input mod-
ules on the →integration time. The precision of the resolution of a measured
value increases with the length of the integration time. The resolution can be as
many as 16 bits, including sign.
Retentivity
Data areas in data blocks, and also timers, counters and memory markers are
retentive when their contents are not lost upon a complete restart or POWER
DOWN.
Scan time
The scan time is the time required by the → CPU to scan the → user program
once.
Segment
→ Bus segment
SFC
→ System function
Signal module
Signal modules (SM) form the interface between the process and the program-
mable logic controller. There are input modules, output modules, input/output
modules (both digital and analog).

Glossary
Smoothing
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The measured values are
smoothed by digital filtering. For specific modules it is possible to choose be-
tween no, low, medium and high smoothing. The higher the smoothing, the
greater is the time constant of the digital filter.
STARTUP
The STARTUP mode is transvered during the transition from STOP mode to
RUN mode. STARTUP can be triggered by the → Mode switch or following pow-
er-on or by means of an operator input on the programming device. With the
S7-300 and M7-300, a → Complete restart is performed.
Status mode
The SIMATIC S7 programmable logic controllers are familiar with the following of
status modes: STOP, → STARTUP, RUN and STOP.
Substitute value
Substitute values are values that can be output to the process when signal out-
put modules have failed or be used in the user program instead of a process
value when signal input modules have failed.
The substitute values can be assigned parameters by the user in STEP 7 (old
value retained, substitute value 0 or 1). They are values which the output(s) have
to output in the event of a CPU STOP.
System diagnostics
System diagnostics is the detection, analysis and reporting of errors that occur
within the programmable logic controller. Examples of such errors are: program
errors or failures on modules. System errors can be indicated with LED displays
or in STEP 7.
System function
A system function (SFC) is a function that is integrated in the operating system
of the CPU a function that can be triggered in the STEP 7 user program, if nec-
essary.
Temperature coefficient
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules when measuring temperatures
with a resistance thermometer (RTD). The temperature coefficient you select
depends on the resistance thermometer being used (to DIN standard).
Temperature error
The temperature error identifies the drift of the measured/output value caused by
the change in the ambient temperature of the analog module. It is specified as a
percentage per Kelvin and relates to the rated range of the analog module.

Glossary
Temperature errors of internal compensation

The temperature error of internal compensation only occurs during thermocouple
measurement. It identifies the additional error which is to be taken into account
and added to the actual temperature error when “internal comparison” mode is
selected. The data is either given as a percentage relative to the physical rated
range of the analog module or as an absolute value in °C.
Two-conductor/three-conductor/four-conductor connection
Method of connection to the module – for example, of resistance thermometers/
resistors to the front connector of the analog input module or of loads at the volt-
age output of an analog output module.
Two-wire transmitter/four-wire transmitter

Kind of transmitter (two-wire transmitter: supply (via terminals of the analog input
module; 4-wire transmitter: supply via separate terminals of the transmitter)
Ungrounded
Without galvanic connection to ground
User program
The user program contains all the statements, tags and data for signal process-
ing used to control a system or a process. It is assigned to a programmable
module (CPU, FM, for example) and can be structured in smaller units (blocks).
Wire-break
Parameter in STEP 7. A wire-break test is used for monitoring the connection
from the input to the encoder and from the output to the actuator. With wire-
break, the module detects a flow of current at the appropriately parameterized
input/output.

Glossary-10 A5E00105505-03
Index
Numbers potential difference, 4-45
reaction with open thermocouple, 4-41
2-wire transmitters, 4-52
SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits, 4-115
SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed, 4-97
SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits, 4-86
A SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, 4-125
Absolute value encoder (SSI), SM 338; SM 331; AI 8 x TC, 4-138
POS-INPUT, 5-14 smoothing of analog input values, 4-42
Accessories, D-1 structure of data record 1, A-8
Active bus module, dimension drawing, C-8 temperature coefficient, 4-42
Actuator connection, to analog output module, temperature unit, 4-41
4-66 underflow, 4-74
Address, Glossary-1 wire-break, 4-73, 4-74
Addressing, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-15 wire-break check, 4-40
Aggregate current, Glossary-1 Analog Input Module
Ambient conditions SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits, 4-153
mechanical, 1-10, 1-16 SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits, 4-77
SIPLUS S7-300-modules, 1-16 Analog input modules
Analog functions, STEP 7 blocks, 4-1 causes of errors and remedies, 4-73
Analog Input Module, SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits, diagnostic messages, 4-72
4-108 Analog input modules, SM 331,
Analog input module channel-specific diagnostic data, B-6
common-mode error, 4-73 Analog input/module, structure of data record
configuring error, 4-73 1, A-42
connecting resistance thermometers, 4-53 Analog input/output module
connecting resistors, 4-53 integration time, 4-44
connecting sensor, 4-45 measurement, 4-44
connecting thermocouple, 4-58 measuring method, 4-44
diagnostic interrupt, 4-40 measuring range, 4-44
diagnostic message in measured value, output range, 4-44
4-72 output type, 4-44
diagnostics, 4-40 parameters, 4-44, A-41
group diagnostics, 4-40 SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits, 4-188
interference frequency suppression, 4-42, Analog Input/Output Module , SM 334; AI 4/AO
A-9 2 x 12 bits, 4-194
isolated, 4-45 Analog module
limit value, 4-40 assigning parameters, 4-39
load voltage missing, 4-73 behavior, 4-31
measurement, 4-41 Determination of measuring error/output
measuring method, 4-41 error, 4-34
measuring methods and measuring ranges, diagnostics, 4-71
A-9 dimension drawing, C-15
measuring range, 4-41 group error LED, 4-72
module filtering mode, 4-41 interrupts, 4-75
non-isolated, 4-45 sequence of steps for commissioning, 4-8
Overflow, 4-74 SF LED, 4-72
parameter assignment error, 4-73 supply voltage failure, 4-32
parameters, 4-40, A-7 Analog output channel, conversion time, 4-37

A5E00105505-03 Index-1
Index
Analog Output Module, SM 332; Auxiliary supply missing, SM 338; POS-INPUT,

AO 2 x 12 bits, 4-182 5-19
Analog output module
connecting loads and actuators, 4-66
connecting loads to current output, 4-70 B
connecting loads to voltage output, 4-67
Backplane bus, Glossary-1
diagnostic interrupt, 4-43
Backup battery, 1-9
diagnostic messages, 4-73
shipping and storage conditions, 1-8
diagnostics, 4-43
Basic conversion time, Glossary-1
group diagnostics, 4-43
Basic error limit, 4-34
isolated, 4-66
Basic response time, Glossary-1
load voltage missing, 4-74
Battery. See backup battery
M short-circuit, 4-74
Baud rate, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-14
non-isolated, 4-66
Behavior, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-29
output methods and output ranges, A-38
Bus segment, Glossary-1
output range, 4-43
Bytes 0 and 1
output type, 4-43
of diagnostic data, B-2
parameter assignment error, 4-74
of diagnostic data for SM 338; POS-INPUT,
parameters, 4-43
B-7
response with CPU-STOP, 4-43
Bytes 2 and 3, of diagnostic data, B-3
setting substitute values, A-38
Bytes 2 to 7, of diagnostic data for SM 338;
settling time, 4-38
POS-INPUT, B-8
SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits, 4-176
Bytes 4 to 7, of diagnostic data, B-4
SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bit, 4-169
Bytes 8 to 10, of diagnostic data for SM 338;
SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits, 4-163
POS-INPUT, B-8
structure of data record 1, A-37
analog output module, response time, 4-38
Analog output modules
causes of errors and remedies, 4-74 C
parameters, A-36 Cables, for analog signals, 4-45, 4-66
Analog output modules, SM 332, Causes of error and remedial action, SM 322;
channel-specific diagnostic data, B-6 DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79
Analog value Causes of error and remedial measures,
conversion, 4-9 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31
sign, 4-9 Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures,
Analog value representation, 4-9 SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19
binary representation of input ranges, 4-12 Causes of errors and remedies
binary representation of output ranges, 4-24 analog input module, 4-73
for current measuring ranges, 4-14–4-17 analog output module, 4-74
for current output ranges, 4-27–4-30 CE, Approval, 1-2
for resistance type transmitters, 4-15 Channel error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19
for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors, Channel information present, SM 338;
4-16, 4-17, 4-19, 4-20, 4-21, 4-22, 4-23 POS-INPUT, 5-19
for RTD resistance temperature detectors, Channel-specific diagnostics, B-5
4-18 Climatic conditions, 1-11
for voltage measuring ranges, 4-13–4-15 Code type, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-14
for voltage output ranges, 4-26–4-29 Commissioning analog modules, sequence of
Analog-to-digital conversion, 4-35 steps, 4-8
Approval Commissioning digital modules, sequence of
CE, 1-2 steps, 3-10
CSA, 1-3 Common mode voltage, Glossary-2
FM, 1-4 Common-mode error, analog input module,
Shipbuilding, 1-4 4-73
UL, 1-3 Communication processor, Glossary-2
Approvals, Standards, 1-2 Comparison point, 4-62, Glossary-2

Index-2 A5E00105505-03
Index
Compensating box, 4-59 channel-specific, for SM 321;

connecting, 4-61 DI 16 x 24 VDC, B-5
Compensation channel-specific, for SM 322;
external, 4-59 DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, B-5
internal, 4-59, 4-61 channel-specific, for SM 338; POS-INPUT,
Complete restart, Glossary-2 B-8
Configuration error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 data record, B-1
Configure, Glossary-2 SM 338; POS-INPUT, B-7
Configuring error, analog input module, 4-73 Diagnostic data for SM 338; POS-INPUT,
Conversion time bytes 0 and 1, B-7
analog input channels, 4-35 Diagnostic data of SM 338; POS-INPUT
analog output channel, 4-37 Bytes 2 to 7, B-8
Converting, analog values, 4-9 Bytes 8 to 10, B-8
CP, Glossary-2 Diagnostic interrupt
CPU, Glossary-2 analog input module, 4-40
CSA, Approval, 1-3 analog output module, 4-43
Current sensors, connecting, 4-51 of analog modules, 4-75
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-27, 3-32
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-76, 3-80
D SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-20
Diagnostic messages, 3-12, 4-71, 5-17
Data record, for diagnostic data, B-1
of analog input modules, 4-72
Data record 1
of analog output modules, 4-73
analog input module configuration, A-8
reading out, 3-13, 4-72, 5-17
analog output module configuration, A-37
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-78
Configuration SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits, A-40
Diagnostics
digital input module configuration, A-4
analog input module, 4-40
digital output module configuration, A-6
analog output module, 4-43
structure for SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits, A-27
of analog modules, 4-71
structure for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-12
of digital modules, 3-12
structure for SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-20
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-27, 3-29
structure of analog input/output module,
system, Glossary-9
A-42
Diagnostics entry, 4-32
Structure of digital input-/output module,
Digital Input Module
3-120
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed, 3-20
Data record 128
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; source input,
structure for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-13
3-34
structure for SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-21
SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24, 3-18
Data records, for parameters, A-2
Digital input module
Default setting, Glossary-3
SM 321; DI 16 x UC 24/48 V, 3-36
Degree of protection, 1-12
SM 321; DI 32 x 120/230 VAC ISOL, 3-44
IP 20, 1-12
Destruction limit, Glossary-3
Digital Input Module
Diagnosis, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-17, 5-18
SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V; with process and
Diagnosis interrupt release, SM 338;
POS-INPUT, 5-14
SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 48-125, 3-38
Diagnostic buffer, Glossary-3
SM 321; DI 32 x VDC 24, 3-13
Diagnostic data, Glossary-3
SM 321; DI 8 x VAC 120/230, 3-42
bytes 0 and 1, B-2
Digital input module
bytes 2 and 3, B-3
SM 321; DI 16 x AC 120/230 V, 3-40
bytes 4 to 7, B-4
SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC, 3-16
channel-specific, B-5
Digital input modules, parameters, A-3
channel-specific, for analog input modules
Digital Input/Output Module, SM 323;
of SM 331, B-6
DI 8/DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A, 3-113
channel-specific, for analog output modules
Digital input-/output module
of SM 332, B-6

A5E00105505-03 Index-3
Index
SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, EPROM error

3-110 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31
SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79
parameterizable, 3-116 Equipotential bonding, Glossary-4
Structure of data record 1, 3-120 Error, of an analog module, 4-34
Digital module Extended environmental conditions, 1-14
assigning parameters, 3-11 External auxiliary voltage missing, SM 321;
diagnostics, 3-12 DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31
dimension drawing, C-15
group error LED, 3-13
sequence of steps for commissioning, 3-10 F
SF LED, 3-13
FM, Approval, 1-4
Digital Output Module
Four-conductor connection, 4-54, Glossary-10
SM 322; DO 32 x VAC 120/230/1 A , 3-49
Four-wire transmitter, Glossary-10
SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A with
Four-wire transmitters, 4-52
FREEZE, Glossary-4
Digital output module
Freeze-function, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-12,
parameters, A-5
5-14
SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High
Fuse blown
Speed, 3-56
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31
SM 322; DO 32 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL ,
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79
3-87
SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-46
Digital Output Module G
SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC, 3-59 Ground, Glossary-4
SM 322; DO 16 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 3-53 Grounded operation, RS 485 repeater, 7-4
SM 322; DO 16 x VAC 120/230/1 A, 3-66 Group diagnostics
SM 322; DO 8 x VAC 120/230/2 A , 3-84 analog input module, 4-40
SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 48–125/1,5 A , 3-81 analog output module, 4-43
Digital output module , SM 322; Group error LED
DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A, 3-69 analog module, 4-72
Dimension drawing, active bus module, C-8 digital module, 3-13
Dimension drawings, C-1 Group fault-LED, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-17
analog module, C-15
digital module, C-15
IM 361, C-13 H
interface module, C-13
Hardware interrupt, Glossary-4
power supply module PS 307, C-8
End of scan cycle, 4-76
PS 307, C-8
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-27, 3-32
rail, C-2
when limit exceeded, 4-75
RS 485 repeater, C-18
Hardware interrupt lost, SM 321; DI 16 x 24
shield connecting element, C-16
DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31, 3-33
signal module, C-15
Hold last value, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5
SIMATIC TOP connect, C-17
A, 3-76
Direct access, Glossary-3
Dummy module , DM 370, 5-5
I
E Identifiers for Australia, 1-4
IEC 61131, 1-4
Electromagnetic compatibility, 1-6
IM 360
Encoder absolute, Glossary-3
encoder error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19
interface module, 6-3
Environmental conditions, 1-9
IM 361, interface module, 6-5
extended, 1-14

Index-4 A5E00105505-03
Index
IM 365 Logic block, Glossary-5

dimension drawing, C-14 LWH, Glossary-4
Interface Module , 6-7
Input delay, Glossary-4
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-27 M
Insulation test, 1-12
M short-circuit, analog output module, 4-74
Integration time, Glossary-5
Measurement
analog input/output module, 4-44
Interface module, 6-1
Measuring method
IM 360, 6-3
analog input channels, 4-28
IM 361, 6-5
analog input module, 4-41, A-9
Interface Module , IM 365, 6-7
Interference
SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits, A-28
pulse-shaped, 1-6
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-16
sinusoidal, 1-7
SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-25
Interference frequency suppression,
Measuring range
Glossary-5
SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits, A-28
SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits, A-28
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-16
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-16
SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-24
SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-25
Internal auxiliary voltage missing, SM 321;
Measuring range module, 4-28
DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31
replugging, 4-29
Internal compensation, Temperature error,
Measuring ranges, analog input channels, 4-28
Glossary-10
Measuring sensors, isolated, 4-46
Internal error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19
Module Classes, ID, B-2
Interrupt, Glossary-5
Module fault, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19
Interrupt-triggering channels, SM 321;
Module filtering mode, Glossary-6
DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-33
Interrupts
Module not parameterized, SM 321;
enabling, 3-32, 3-80, 4-75, 5-20
DI 16 x DC 24 V , 3-31
of analog modules, 4-75
Module overview, 4-3
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-32
digital modules, 3-4
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-80
SIMATIC TOP connect/...TPA, 8-2
SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-20
special signal modules, 5-2
IP 20, 1-12
Modules, shipping and storage conditions, 1-8
Isolated measuring sensors, 4-46
Monoflop time, Glossary-6
connecting, 4-46
SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-14
MPI, Glossary-6
L
Lack of encoder supply, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 N
VDC, 3-31
No external auxiliary voltage, SM 322;
Limit value, analog input module, 4-40
DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79
Linearity error, Glossary-5
No internal auxiliary voltage, SM 322;
Load connection, to analog output module,
DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79
4-66
No load voltage L+, SM 322; DO 8 x 24
Load connection to current output, to analog
VDC/0.5 A, 3-76, 3-79
output module, 4-70
Non-isolated, Glossary-6
Load connection to voltage output, to analog
Non-isolated sensors, 4-48
output module, 4-67
connecting, 4-48
Load voltage missing
Normalization, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-11,
5-14

A5E00105505-03 Index-5
Index
Normalizing, Glossary-6 6ES7322-1HF01-0AA0, 3-96

6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0, 3-106
6ES7322-1HH01-0AA0, 3-93
O 6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0, 3-87
6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0, 3-59
OB, Glossary-7
6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0, 3-100
OB 40, 3-32, 4-75
6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0, 3-72
start information, 4-76
6ES7323-1BH01-0AA0, 3-113
OB 82, 3-32, 3-80, 4-75
6ES7323-1BL00-0AA0, 3-110
Operating conditions, 1-9
6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0, 3-116
Operating mode
6ES7331-1KF01-0AB0, 4-108
of CPU, 4-31
6ES7331-7HF00-0AB0, 4-97
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-16
6ES7331-7HF01-0AB0, 4-97
SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-24
6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0, 4-153
operational limit, 4-34, Glossary-6
6ES7331-7KF02-0AB0, 4-115
Optically isolated, Glossary-7
6ES7331-7NF00-0AB0, 4-77
Order number
6ES7331-7NF10-0AB0, 4-86
6AG1 321-1BH02-2AA0, 3-18
6ES7331-7PF00-0AB0, 4-125
6AG1 321-1BL00-2AA0, 3-13
6ES7331-7PF10-0AB0, 4-138
6AG1 321-1CH20-2AA0, 3-38
6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0, 4-182
6AG1 321-1FF01-2AA0, 3-42
6ES7332-5HD01-0AB0, 4-176
6AG1 321-7BH01-2AB0, 3-22
6ES7332-5HF00-0AB0, 4-163
6AG1 322-1BH01-2AA0, 3-53
6ES7332-7ND01-0AB0, 4-169
6AG1 322-1CF00-2AA0, 3-81
6ES7334-0CE01-0AA0, 4-188
6AG1 322-1FF01-2AA0, 3-84
6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0, 4-194
6AG1 322-1HF10-2AA0, 3-106
6ES7338-4BC01-0AB0, 5-7
6AG1 322-8BF00-2AB0, 3-72
6ES7360-3AA01-0AA0, 6-3
6AG1 323-1BH01-2AA0, 3-113
6ES7361 3CA01-0AA0, 6-5
6AG1 331-7KB02-2AB0, 4-153
6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0, 6-7
6AG1 332-5HB01-2AB0, 4-182
6ES7370-0AA01-0AA0, 5-5
6AG1 334-0KE00-2AB0, 4-194
6ES7374-2XH01-0AA0, 5-3
6AG1 365-0BA01-2AA0, 6-7
6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0, 7-2
6ES7305-1BA80-0AA0, 2-2
Organization block (OB), Glossary-7
6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0, 2-6
Output analog values, STEP 7 blocks, 4-1
6ES7307-1EA00-0AA0, 2-9
Output method, analog output module, A-38
6ES7307-1EA80-0AA0, 2-9
Output range
6ES7307-1KA00-0AA0, 2-14
6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0, 3-18
analog output module, 4-43, A-38
6ES7321-1BH10-0AA0, 3-20
Output type
6ES7321-1BH50-0AA0, 3-34
6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0, 3-13
6ES7321-1CH00-0AA0, 3-36
Overflow, analog input module, 4-74
6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0, 3-38
6ES7321-1EL00-0AA0, 3-16
6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0, 3-42
6ES7321-1FF10-0AA0, 3-44 P
6ES7321-1FH00-0AA0, 3-40 Parameter assignment
6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0, 3-22 for analog modules, 4-39
6ES7322-1BF01-0AA0, 3-69 for digital modules, 3-11
6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0, 3-53 in user program, A-1
6ES7322-1BH10-0AA0, 3-56 Parameter assignment error
6ES7322-1BL00-0AA0, 3-46 analog input module, 4-73
6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0, 3-81 analog output module, 4-74
6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0, 3-84 Parameterization error, SM 338; POS-INPUT,
6ES7322-1FH00-0AA0, 3-66 5-19
6ES7322-1FL00-0AA0, 3-49

Index-6 A5E00105505-03
Index
Parameterization missing, SM 338; Reaction to open thermocouple, SM 331;

POS-INPUT, 5-19 AI 8 x TC, A-26
Parameters, Glossary-7 Read analog values, STEP 7 blocks, 4-1
analog input module, 4-40, A-7 Reference junction temperature with
analog input/output module, 4-44, A-41 thermocouples, compensating, 4-59
analog output module, 4-43 Reference potential, Glossary-8
analog output modules, A-36 Relay output module
data records, A-2 SM 322; DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC, 3-93
digital input modules, A-3 SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A, 3-100
digital output module, A-5 Relay Output Module , SM 322; DO 8 x Rel.
dynamic, 3-11, 4-39 VAC 230/5 A, 3-106
modifying in user program, 3-11, 4-39 Relay output module , SM 322; DO 8 x Rel.
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-27 230 VAC, 3-96
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-76 Repeat accuracy, Glossary-8
SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, Repeater, Glossary-8
parameterizable, 3-119 See RS 485-Repeater
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-11 Resistance thermometer connection, to
SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-19 analog input module, 4-53
SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits, A-39 Resistor connection, to analog input module,
SM 338; POS-INPUT , 5-14 4-53
static, 3-11, 4-39 Resolution, 4-9, Glossary-8
Parameters, wrong Response time, 4-38
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31 Response with CPU-STOP, analog output
SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 module, 4-43
PARM_MOD, SFC 57, A-2 Retentivity, Glossary-8
Pin assignment, RS 485 repeater, 7-6 RS 485 repeater
POS-Input module SM 338, 5-7 Appearance, 7-3
Position decoder module, SM 338; application, 7-2
POS-INPUT, 5-7 definition, 7-2
Potential difference, with analog input modules, dimension drawing, C-18
4-45 grounded operation, 7-4
Power supply module, 2-1 rules, 7-2
dimension drawing, C-8 ungrounded operation, 7-4
PS 305 2 A, 2-2 RS 485-Repeater, 7-1
PS 307 10 A, 2-14 grounded, 7-4
PS 307 2 A, 2-6 ungrounded, 7-4
PS 307 5 A, 2-9
Process image, Glossary-7
Product status, Glossary-7 S
Programming device (PG), Glossary-7
Scan time, Glossary-8
Protection class, 1-12
analog input channels, 4-35
PS 307, dimension drawing, C-8
analog output channels, 4-37
Pulse edge, 3-27
Screw-type terminals, SIMATIC TOP
Pulse-shaped interference, 1-6
connect/...TPA, 8-10
Sensor connection, to analog input module,
4-45
R Sensors, non-isolated, 4-48
Radio interference, emission of, 1-7 Settling time, 4-38
Rail for the ”Insert and Remove” function, SF LED
dimension drawing, C-7 analog module, 4-72
Rails, dimension drawing, C-2 digital module, 3-13
RAM error SF-LED, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-17
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31 SFC, Glossary-8, Glossary-9
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79 SFC 51, 3-32, 3-80, 4-75
Rated voltages, 1-13 SFC 55 WR_PARM, A-2

A5E00105505-03 Index-7
Index
SFC 56 WR_DPARM, A-2 internal auxiliary voltage missing, 3-31

SFC 57 PARM_MOD, A-2 interrupts, 3-32
SFC 59, 3-32, 3-80, 4-75 lack of encoder supply, 3-31
Shield connecting element, dimension drawing, redundant encoder supply, 3-24
C-16 voltage type, 3-27
Shipbuilding, Approval, 1-4 watchdog, 3-31
Short-circuit to L+, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC
VDC/0.5 A, 3-76, 3-79 causes of error and remedial measures,
Short-circuit to M, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 3-31
A, 3-76, 3-79 diagnostic interrupt, 3-27
Sign, analog value, 4-9 hardware interrupt, 3-27, 3-32
Signal module, Glossary-8 hardware interrupt lost, 3-31, 3-33
dimension drawing, C-15 interrupt-triggering channels, 3-33
SIMATIC TOP connect parameters, wrong, 3-31
components, 8-12 RAM error, 3-31
connection for 2A modules, 8-18 SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V
dimension drawing, C-17 Resistive circuit of the encoder, 3-24
one-conductor connection, 8-14 Synchronous operation, 3-26
selecting components, 8-13 SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V , Module not
three-conductor connection, 8-16 parameterized, 3-31
wiring 32-channel digital modules, 8-8 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A
SIMATIC TOP connect TPA apply substitute value ”1”, 3-76
component selection, 8-20 causes of error and remedial action, 3-79
connection example, 8-24 channel-specific diagnostic data, B-5
multiplier terminal, 8-21 diagnostic interrupt, 3-76, 3-80
shield connection, 8-23 diagnostic messages, 3-78
terminal allocation to analog module, 8-22 EPROM error, 3-79
terminal assignment, 8-21 fuse blown, 3-79
SIMATIC TOP connect/...TPA hold last value, 3-76
advantages of using, 8-3 interrupts, 3-80
components, 8-3 no external auxiliary voltage, 3-79
Configuration, 8-2 no internal auxiliary voltage, 3-79
connecting cable, 8-4 no load voltage L+, 3-76, 3-79
connectors, 8-4 parameters, 3-76
mounting terminal block and connecting RAM error, 3-79
cable, 8-10 short-circuit to L+, 3-76, 3-79
screw-type terminals, 8-10 short-circuit to M, 3-76, 3-79
spring-loaded terminals, 8-10 substitute value application, 3-76
wiring, 8-4 watchdog, 3-79
wiring actuators/sensors to terminal block, wire-break, 3-76, 3-79
8-10 SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A,
wiring rules, 8-7 parameterizable, Parameters, 3-119
wiring the front connector module, 8-6 SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bit, Parasitic frequency
wiring with modules..., 8-3 suppression, A-29
Simulator module, SM 374; IN/OUT 16, 5-3 SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits
Sinusoidal interference, 1-7 Interference frequency suppression, A-28
SIPLUS S7-300-modules, 1-14 Measuring methods and measuring ranges,
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC A-28
channel-specific diagnostic data, B-5 structure of data record 1, A-27
diagnostic interrupt, 3-32 SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed,
diagnostics, 3-27 Synchronous operation, 4-101
EPROM error, 3-31 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD
external auxiliary voltage missing, 3-31 interference frequency suppression, A-16
fuse blown, 3-31 operating modes, A-16
input delay, 3-27 parameters, A-11

Index-8 A5E00105505-03
Index
smoothing, A-18 Watchdog tripped, 5-19

structure of data record 1, A-12 Wrong parameters, 5-19
structure of data record 128, A-13 Smoothing, Glossary-9
Temperature coefficient, A-18 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-18
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD x 24 bits, measuring SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-26
methods and measuring ranges, A-16 Smoothing analog input values, 4-36
SM 331; AI 8 x TC Smoothing of analog input values, analog input
interference frequency suppression, A-24 module, 4-42
measuring methods and measuring ranges, Spare parts, D-1
A-25 Spring-loaded terminals, SIMATIC TOP
operating modes, A-24 connect/...TPA, 8-10
parameters, A-19 Standards and approvals, 1-2
reaction to open thermocouple, A-26 Startup, Glossary-9
smoothing, A-26 Status mode, Glossary-9
structure of data record 1, A-20 STEP 7 blocks, for analog functions, 4-1
structure of data record 128, A-21 Substitute value, Glossary-9
SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits, Synchronous analog output module, A-38
operation, 4-173 Substitute value ”1” application, SM 322; DO 8
SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-76
Parameters, A-39 Substitute value application, SM 322; DO 8 x
Structure of data record 1, A-40 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-76
SM 338 Supply voltage failure, of the analog module,
Encoder value acquisition, 5-10 4-32
Free running encoder value acquisition, Synchronous operation
5-10 SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V, 3-26
POS-Input module, 5-7 SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed, 4-101
Synchronous operation, 5-8 SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits, 4-173
SM 338; POS-INPUT SM 338, 5-8
Absolute value encoder (SSI), 5-14 System diagnostics, Glossary-9
Addressing, 5-15 System function (SFC), Glossary-9
Auxiliary supply missing, 5-19
Baud rate, 5-14
Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures, T
5-19
Technical specifications, RS 485 repeater, 7-6
Channel error, 5-19
Temperature coefficient, Glossary-9
Channel information present, 5-19
channel-specific diagnostic data, B-8
SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bit, A-29
Code type, 5-14
SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-18
Configuration error, 5-19
Temperature error, Glossary-9
Diagnosis, 5-17
Temperature errors of internal compensation,
Diagnosis interrupt release, 5-14
Glossary-10
diagnostic data, B-7
Temperature measurement, SM 331; AI 8 x 13
Diagnostic interrupt, 5-20
bit, A-28
encoder error, 5-19
Temperature unit, Analog input module, 4-41
External error, 5-19
Test voltages, 1-12
Freeze-function, 5-12, 5-14
Thermo emf, 4-58
Group fault-LED, 5-17
Thermocouple
Internal error, 5-19
design, 4-58
Interrupts, 5-20
open, reaction to, Glossary-7
Module fault, 5-19
principle of operation, 4-58
Monoflop time, 5-14
Thermocouple connection, to analog input
Normalization, 5-11, 5-14
module, 4-58
Parameterization error, 5-19
Three-conductor connection, 4-54,
Parameterization missing, 5-19
Glossary-10
SF-LED, 5-17
Two-conductor connection, 4-55, Glossary-10

A5E00105505-03 Index-9
Index
Two-wire transmitter, Glossary-10 W

Watchdog
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-31
U SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-79
UL, Approval, 1-3 Watchdog tripped, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19
Underflow, analog input module, 4-74 Wire-break, Glossary-10
Ungrounded operation, RS 485 repeater, 7-4 Analog input module, 4-73
Use in an industrial environment, 1-5 analog input module, 4-74
Use in residential environments, 1-5 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-76, 3-79
Use of the ET 200 / S7-300 in Zone 2, 1-17 wire-break check, analog input module, 4-40
User program, Glossary-10 WR_DPARM, SFC 56, A-2
parameter assignment in, A-1 WR_PARM, SFC 55, A-2
V
Vibrations, 1-10
Voltage sensors, connecting, 4-50
Voltage type, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-27

Index-10 A5E00105505-03
Product Information on the Manual
Edition 12.2004
w S7-300 Programmable Controller; Module Specifications, as of Edition 02/2004

(A5E00105505)
w ET 200M Distributed I/O Device Signal Modules for Process Automation,

as of Edition 10/2004 (A5E00085262)
w S7-300, ET 200M Programmable Controller, Modules with Intrinsically-Safe

Signals, as of Edition 08/2003 (A5E00172008)
Introduction
Parameterizable signal modules of the S7-300 product family mentioned in this
product information document can be reparameterized online using
STEP7 HWCONFIG in RUN mode of the CPU.
In other words, the module parameters can be changed without switching the CPU
to STOP mode or affecting other modules.
The following prerequisites must be met in order to use this function:
• STEP7 as of Version 5.2
• Distributed use of the S7-300 modules described in the S7-400 programmable
controller (CPUs as of V3.1 or CP 443-5 extended as of V5.0).
• Use of the ET 200M with the IM 153-2 as of 6ES7153-2BA00-0XB0 or
6ES7153-2BB00-0XB0
• Use of the IM 157 as of 6ES7157-0AA82-0XA00
You will find a detailed description of the prerequisites and principles of operation in
the manual Modifying the System during Operation via CiR
(visit http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support and enter
the entry ID: 14044916).
Copyright 2004 by Siemens AG

A5E00201782-03
Reparameterization steps in RUN mode
Observe the reparameterization steps described in the above manual.
Note the peculiarities of certain modules described in the table.
Example 1:
To change a measuring range for modules, proceed as follows:
1. Change the user program so that the channel to be reparameterized is no
longer evaluated, and download it to the CPU.
2. Change the measuring range for the module in HWCONFIG, and download the
changed configuration to the CPU.
3. Adapt the user program to the changed channel, and download it to the CPU.
Example 2:
When reparameterizing certain modules (see the table), you should ensure that
there is no pending diagnostic event (e.g. a wire break message) before carrying
out reparameterization, since otherwise it may happen in some cases that outgoing
diagnostic events are no longer reported. As a result, the SF LEDs on the CPU,
IM, or module will continue to shine, for example, although the reparameterized
module is working correctly. If such a situation does arise, however, the module
must be removed and then plugged in again.

2 A5E00201782-03
Notes on the table
There is a separate table for each manual that describes the technical
specifications of the signal modules of the S7-300 product family.
The “Behavior of the Inputs/Outputs” column indicates the behavior of the
inputs/outputs when reparameterization is carried out in RUN mode, provided they
are not affected by reparameterization.
Behavior of the Peculiarities when reparameterizing

Module inputs/outputs
S7-300 module specifications
6ES7 321-7BH00-0AB0
6ES7 321-7BH80-0AB0
SM 321; DI 16 DC 24 V; Supply the last valid
with hardware interrupt and process value before ---
diagnostic interrupt parameterization
6ES7 321-7BH01-0AB0
SM 321; DI 16 DC 24 V;
with hardware interrupt and
diagnostic interrupt, clocked
6ES7 322-8BF00-0AB0
6ES7 322-8BF80-0AB0
SM 322; DO 8 DC 24 V/
0.5 A; with diagnostic
Output the last valid
interrupt
output value before ---
6ES7 322-5FF00-0AB0 parameterization
SM 322;DO 8 AC 120/230V/
2A ISOL
6ES7 322-5GH00-0AB0
SM 322;
DO 16 UC 24/48V
6ES7 322-5HF00-0AB0
SM 322;
DO 8 Rel. AC 230V/5A
6ES7 331-7NF00-0AB0 SF LED shines:
SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit If there was a pending diagnosis before
reparameterization,
p , the SF LEDs (on( the
6ES7 331-7NF10-0AB0 C
CPU, IM, or module)) may still be shining
Supply the last valid although there is no longer a pending
SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit process value before diagnosis and the module is working
parameterization correctly
correctly.
6ES7 331-7PF00-0AB0
Remedy:
SM 331; AI 8 RTD
• Only reparameterize when there is no
pending diagnosis on the module,
module or
6ES7 331-7PF10-0AB0
• Remove the module, and then plug it in
SM 331; AI 8 TC again

A5E00201782-03 3
6ES7 332-5HD01-0AB0 SF LED shines:
SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit If there was a pending diagnosis before
reparameterization, the SF LEDs (on the
CPU, IM, or module) may still be shining
Output the last valid
although there is no longer a pending
output value before
diagnosis and the module is working
parameterization
t i ti
6ES7 332-5HB01-0AB0 correctly.
6ES7 332-5HB81-0AB0 Remedy:
SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit • Only reparameterize when there is no
pending diagnosis on the module, or
again
6ES7 332-5HF00-0AB0 ---
SM 332; AO 8 12 Bit
6ES7 332-7ND00-0AB0
6ES7 332-7ND01-0AB0 ---
SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit

ET 200M signal modules for process automation (PCS7)
6ES7 321-7TH00-0AB0 Supply the last valid SF LED shines:
SM 321; DI 16 NAMUR process value (including If there was a pending diagnosis before
the value status) before reparameterization, the SF LEDs (on the
parameterization CPU, IM, or module) may still be shining
correctly.
Remedy:
6ES7 322-8BH00-0AB0 Output the last valid • Only reparameterize when there is no
SM 322; DO 16 DC 24 output value before pending diagnosis on the module, or
V/0,5A parameterization
again

4 A5E00201782-03
S7-300, ET 200, I/O modules with intrinsically-safe signals
6ES7 321-7RD00-0AB0 Supply the last valid SF LED shines:
SM 321; DI 4 NAMUR process value before If there was a pending diagnosis before
parameterization reparameterization, the SF LEDs (on the
correctly.
Remedy:
again
6ES7 322 5RD00-0AB0 Output the last valid
SM 322; DO 4 15V/20mA output value before
parameterization
6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0 ---
SM 322; DO 4 24V/10mA
6ES7 331-7RD00-0AB0
SM 331; AI 4 0/4...20mA ---
6ES7 331-7SF00-0AB0 Supply the last valid ---
process value before
SM 331; AI 8 TC/4 RTD
parameterization
6ES7 331-7TB00-0AB0
SM 331; AI 2 0/4...20mA
HART ---
6ES7 332-5RD00-0AB0 SF LED shines:
SM 332; AO 4 0/4...20mA If there was a pending diagnosis before
reparameterization, the SF LEDs (on the
Output the last valid diagnosis and the module is working
output value before correctly.
parameterization
Remedy:
again
6ES7 332-5TB00-0AB0
SM 332; AO 2 0/4...20mA ---
HART

A5E00201782-03 5
6 A5E00201782-03
Product Information
SIMATIC S7-300
X 2
Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit as of Version 3 4
New Analog Output Module Available

The S7-300 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 × 16 Bit has been added to the
S7-300 family. The order number for this module is 6ES7 332-7ND02-0AB0.
This product information includes details about the characteristics and technical
specifications of the Analog Output module SM 332; AO 4 × 16 Bit. Refer to the
S7-300 Installation and Hardware Manual for more information about the S7-300
product family.
You will also learn:
S How to start up the analog output module
S The output ranges available for the analog output module
S How to configure the analog output module
Additional Assistance
For assistance in answering technical questions, for training on this product, or for
ordering, contact your Siemens distributor or sales office.
Copyright by Siemens AG 2004

A5E0033348892-01
Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit; (6ES7 332-7ND02-0AB0)
Order No.
6ES7 332-7ND02-0AB0
Characteristic Features
The Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 × 16 Bit has the following characteristic
features:
S 4 outputs in 4 channel groups
S Individual output channels can be programmed as
– voltage outputs
– current outputs
S Resolution of 16 bits
S Supports clocked operation
S Programmable diagnostics
S Programmable diagnostic interrupt
S Programmable substitute value output
S Galvanic Isolation between:
– backplane bus interface and analog output channels
– the different analog output channels
– analog output and L+, M
– backplane bus interface and L+, M
Product Information S7–300 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 Bit

2 A5E0033348892-01
Terminal Connection Diagram
Figure 1 shows the analog terminal connection diagram and the wiring diagram for
the Output Analog Module SM 332 AO 4 × 16 Bit.
The detailed technical specifications for this analog output module are on the
following page.
Fault Indicator – red

Current Voltage
Outputs Outputs
SM332 1 L+
AO 4x16 BIT SF 24 V
Galvanic Isolation
3 QI0 QV 0
4 S 0+
5 CH0 S 0 – CH0
6 MANA 0 M ANA 0
7 QI1 QV 1
Internal
8 S 1+
supply
9 CH1 S 1 – CH1
10 MANA 1 M ANA 1
11 QI2 QV 2
12 S 2+
13 CH2 S 2 – CH2
14 MANA 2 M ANA 2
15 QI3 QV 3
Back– S 3+
plane 16
bus 17 CH3 S 3 – CH3
IM
18 MANA 3 M ANA 3
M
20
M
332–7ND02–0AB0
Figure 1 Connection Diagram of Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 Bit
Note
Switching the rated load voltage (L+) on and off, can cause wrong intermediate
values at the output for approximately 10 ms.

A5E0033348892-01
3
Hazardous Location Information
“Power, input and output (I/O) wiring must be in accordance with Class I, Division 2
wiring methods [Article 501-4 (b) of the National Electric Code, NFPA 70] and in
accordance with the authority having jurisdiction.”
Peripheral equipment must be suitable for the location it is used in.
The equipment must be suitable for use in Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, and D
Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only.
Warning
! Explosion Hazard
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Div. 2 Hazardous Locations.
Different or lesser quality components may cause an explosion or other hazardous situation,
which could result in death or serious injury, and/or damage to equipment.
To avoid potentially hazardous situations, always use the appropriate components.
Warning
! Explosion Hazard
Never disconnect equipment before powering off or before ascertaining that the area is
nonhazardous. Disconnecting equipment before powering off or in a hazardous area may cause
an explosion, which could result in death or serious injury, and/or damage to equipment.
To avoid potentially hazardous situations, always power off equipment and assure that the area
is nonhazardous before disconnecting.

4 A5E0033348892-01
Dimensions and Weight Analog Value Generation
Dimensions W × H × D (in 40 × 125 × 117 Resolution including sign
millimeters) S ± 10 V 16 bits
Weight Approx. 220 g S 0 to 10 V 15 bits
Data for Specific Module S 1 to 5 V 14 bits
Supports clocked operation Yes

S ± 20 mA 16 bits
Number of outputs 4
S 0 to 20 mA 15 bits
S 4 to 20 mA 15 bits
Length of cable
S Shielded max. 200 m Conversion time (per
channel)
S In standard mode < 200 ms
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC S In clocked mode 640 ms
electronics L+
S Reverse polarity Yes Basic response time of
protection module (all channels
enabled)
Isolation S In standard mode < 800 ms
S Between channels and Yes S In clocked mode 750 ms
backplane bus
S Between channels and Yes Settling time
power supply of the S For resistive load 0.2 ms
electronics
S For capacitive load 3.3 ms
S Between the channels Yes
S For inductive load 0.5 ms
(1 mH)
Permitted potential
difference S For inductive load 3.3 ms
(10 mH)
S Between the outputs DC 200 V/AC 120 V
(ECM)
S Between MANA and DC 200 V/AC 120 V
Minternal (EISO)
Insulation tested with DC 1500 V
Current consumption
S From the backplane bus max. 120 mA
S From the power supply max. 290 mA
L+
module

A5E0033348892-01
5
Crosstalk between the > 100 dB Interrupts
outputs S Diagnostics interrupt Parameters can be
Operational limit (in the assigned
entire temperature Diagnostics functions Parameters can be
range, with reference to assigned
the output range)
S Group error display Red LED (SF)
S Voltage output ±0.12%
S Diagnostics information Possible
S Current output ±0.18% can be displayed
Basic error
(operational limit at Substitute value can be Yes. Parameters
25° C, with reference to applied can be assigned
the output range) Data for Selecting an Actuator
S Voltage output Output ranges (rated
± 10 V ± 0.02% values)
0 to 10 V ± 0.02% S Voltage ± 10 V
1 to 5 V ± 0.04% 0 to 10 V
1 to 5 V
S Current output
S Current ± 20 mA
± 20 mA ± 0.02% 0 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA ± 0.02% 4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA ± 0.04% Load resistance (in the
nominal range of the
Temperature error (with output)
reference to the output
range) S For voltage outputs min. 1 kΩ
S Voltage output ± 0.0025% / K Capacitive load max. 1 µF
S Current output ± 0.004% / K S For current outputs max. 500 Ω
Inductive load max. 1 mH
Linearity error (with ± 0.004%
Voltage output
range) S Short-circuit protection Yes
Repeatability (in steady ±0.002%

S Short-circuit current max. 40 mA
state at 25° C, with
Current output
range) S No-load voltage max. 18 V
Output ripple; bandwidth ±0.05%

0 to 50Khz (with
range)

6 A5E0033348892-01
Destruction limit against
voltages/currents applied
from outside
S Voltage to the outputs max. 15 V
against MANA continuous; 75 V for
max. 1 s (pulse duty
factor 1:20)
S Current max. DC 50 mA
Connection of actuators Possible

S For voltage output
Four–conductor
connection (measuring
circuit)
S For current output Possible
Two–conductor
connection
Synchronous Operation
Characteristics
Reproducible response times (i.e., of equal length) are achieved in SIMATIC with
an equidistant DP bus cycle and synchronization of the following individual
asynchronous cycles:
S Asynchronous cycle of the user program. Cycle length can vary, due to
acyclical program branches.
S Asynchronous, variable DP cycle on the PROFIBUS subnet
S Asynchronous cycle on the DP slave backplane bus
S Asynchronous cycle during signal conditioning and conversion in the electronic
modules of the DP slaves
With equidistance, the DP cycle operates in the same clock cycle, with the same
length. The execution levels of a CPU (OB61 to OB64) and the synchronous I/O
are synchronized with this clock cycle. Thus, I/O data are transferred in defined,
constant time intervals (synchronous operation). The maximum “jitter” is "50 µs.
Requirements
S The DP master and DP slave must support synchronous operation. You must
have Step 7 Version 5.2 or higher.

A5E0033348892-01
7
Operating Mode: Synchronous Operation
The following conditions are applicable for synchronous operation:
Table 1 Conditions for Synchronous Operation
Processing and activation time TWA between read in 750ms

of output value in the transfer buffer and loading in
the output DAC
TDPmin 1100ms
Diagnostic interrupt 4 x TDP, max
Processing and Output Update Time

The same time conditions are always applicable, irrespective of the number of
channels programmed.
TWA
D/A-Conversion and Internal Processing Output Update

CH3
CH2
CH1
CH0
640ms 110ms
TO
Figure 2 Calculation of the Processing Time and Output Update Time
Description of the Method of Functioning in Synchronous Operation

At time T0 – TWA, the module reads in the output data and saves the data
internally. Following internal processing time for each channel, the results are
written to each D/A converter.
Additional Information
You will find additional information about synchronous operation in the STEP 7
online Help, the ET 200M Distributed I/O System manual and the Synchronous
Operation Manual.

8 A5E0033348892-01
Starting Up the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit
Parameter Assignment
The Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 × 16 Bit is set using one of the following
methods.
S With STEP 7 (see the STEP 7 User Manual)
S In the user program by means of SFCs (see the STEP 7 System and Standard
Functions Reference Manual)
Note
If you modify output ranges when the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16
Bit is in operation, intermediate values can appear at the output.
Default Setting
The Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 × 16 Bit has default settings for the type
of output, diagnostics, interrupts, etc. (see Table 1).
These default settings apply if you do not re-initialize the module with STEP 7.

A5E0033348892-01
9
Table 1 Parameters and Default Settings for the Analog Output Module
SM 332 AO 4 x 16 Bit.
Parameter SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit Parameter Scope

Type
Value Range Default
Settings
Enable
S Diagnostics interrupt Yes/No No Dynamic Module
Diagnostics
S Channel Diagnostics Yes/No No Static Channel
Response with CPU-STOP LWH Hold last value ASS Dynamic Channel
ASS
Output de-energized
Output
S Output Type Deactivated U Dynamic Channel
Voltage
Current
S Output Range 0 to 20 mA ± 10 V Dynamic Channel
4 to 20 mA
± 20 mA
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
± 10 V
Parameter Assignment in the User Program

You can configure each output channel of the SM 332; AO 4 × 16 Bit individually.
This allows you to assign individual parameters for each output channel. When you
set the parameters in the user program, the parameters are assigned to channel
groups. Each output channel of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 × 16 Bit
is then assigned to one channel group, i.e. output channel 0 = channel group 0.
Unused Output Channels

To ensure the unused output channels of the Analog Output Module SM 332;
AO 4 × 16 Bit are not active. You must deactivate them and leave them open.
Deactivate the output channel using the “Output” parameter block when you
program with STEP 7.
Substitute Values
You can configure the SM 332; AO 4 × 16 Bit for the CPU operating mode STOP

10 A5E0033348892-01
Output Ranges for the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 Bit
Analog Outputs
You can use the outputs of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 × 16 Bit as:
S Voltage outputs
S Current outputs
Set the outputs group-wise, using STEP 7 for programming the output type.
Output Ranges
Set the output ranges for the voltage and/or current outputs with STEP 7.
Table 2 lists all the possible output ranges for the Analog Output Module SM 332;
AO 4 × 16 Bit.
Table 2 Output Ranges for Analog Output Module
Selected Type Description Output Range

of Output
Voltage Table 3 and Table 4 show the digital 1 to 5V
analog values in the analog output 0 to 10 V
range. ± 10 V
Current Table 3 and Table 4 show the digital 0 to 20 mA
analog values in the analog output 4 to 20 mA
measuring range. ± 20 mA
Default Settings
The default settings of the module are “Voltage” for the output type and
“± 10 V” for the output range. You can use this combination of output type and
output range without parameterizing the SM 332; AO 4 × 16 Bit in STEP 7.

A5E0033348892-01
11
Analog Value Representation of the Output Ranges for the Analog Output
Module SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit
Introduction
The tables in this section contain the digitized analog values for the various output
ranges of the analog output module.
How to Read the Output-Value Tables

Tables 3 and 4 contain the digital analog values for the various ouput ranges.
Since the binary representation for the analog values is always the same, these
tables only contain the output values and the units.
Voltage and Current Output Ranges

Table 3 shows the representation of the digitized output value:
S For the voltage output ranges ±10 V and
S For the current output range ± 20 mA.
Table 3 Representation of the Digital Output Value of the Analog Output Module
(Voltage and Current Output Ranges)
System Word Units Output Range

Output Range
Range ± 20 mA
Decimal Hexadecimal ± 10 V
Overflow 32767 7FFFH 0.0000 0.0000

Overrange 32511 7EFFH 11.7589 23.515
: : : :
27649 6C01H 10.0004 20.0007
Nominal Range 27648 6C00H 10.00 20.000
20736 5100H 7.5 14.998
: : : :
–20736 AF00H –7.5 –14.998
–27648 9400H –10.00 –20.000
Underrange –27649 93FFH –10.0004 –20.0007
: : : :
–32512 8100H –11.7589 –23.515
Underflow –32768 8000H 0.0000 0.0000

12 A5E0033348892-01
Table 4 shows the representation of the digitized output value:
S For the voltage output ranges 1 to 5 V, 0 to10 V and
S For the current output ranges 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Table 4 Representation of the Digital Output Value of the Analog Output Module
(Voltage and Current Output Ranges)
System Word Units Output Output Output Output

Range Range Range Range Range
Decimal Hexadecimal 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
Overflow 32767 7FFFH 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Overrange 32511 7EFFH 5.8794 11.7589 23.515 22.810
: : : : : :
27649 6C01H 5.0002 10.0004 20.0007 20.0005
Nominal 27648 6C00H 5.000 10.00 20.000 20.000
Range 20736 5100H 4.000 7.50 14.998 16.000
: : : : : :
0 0H 1.000 0.000 0.000 4.000

Under- –1 FFFFH 0.9999 0.0000 0.0000 3.9995
range : : : : : :
–6912 E500H 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Underflow –32768 8000H 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000

A5E0033348892-01
13
14 A5E0033348892-01
s
SIMATIC
Product Information
01/2005
Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area
Language Titel Page
Deutsch Einsatz der Baugruppen/Module im explosionsgeschützten Bereich Zone 2 3
English Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 5
Français Utilisation des modules / coupleurs dans la zone à risque d'explosion 2 7
Español Aplicación de los módulos / tarjetas en áreas con peligro de explosión, zona 2 9
Italiano Impiego delle unità/moduli nell'area a pericolo di esplosione zona 2 11
Nederlands Gebruik van de componenten/modulen in het explosief gebied zone 2 13
Dansk Brug af komponenter/moduler i det eksplosionsfarlige område zone 2 15
Suomi Rakenneryhmien/moduulien käyttö räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla, vyöhyke 2 17
Svenska Användning av komponentgrupperna/modulerna i explosionsriskområde zon 2 19
Português Uso de grupos construtivos/módulos em área exposta ao perigo de explosão 2 21
Ελληνικά Χρήση των δοµικών συγκροτηµάτων/µονάδων σε επικίνδυνη για έκρηξη περιοχή, ζώνη 2 23
Česky Použití konstrukčních skupin / modulů v prostředí s nebezpečím výbuchu Zóna 2 25
Estnisch Sõlmede/moodulite kasutamine plahvatusohtliku piirkonna tsoonis 2 27
Latviski Ierīču/moduļu pielietojums sprādzienbīstamas teritorijas zonā 2 29
Lietuviška Konstrukcinių grupių/modulių panaudojimas sprogioje 2 zonos aplinkoje 31
Magya A főegységek/modulok alkalmazása a 2. zóna robbanásveszélyes környezetben 33
Malti Tqegħid tal-Komponenti / Modules fiż-Żona 2, fejn hemm Riskju ta' Splużjoni 35
Polski Zastosowanie grup konstrukcyjnych / modułów w 2 strefie zagrożenia wybuchem 37
Slovensky Použitie konštrukčných skupín / modulov v prostredí s nebezpečenstvom výbuchu zóny 2 39
Slovensko Uporaba sklopov/modulov v eksplozivno ogroženem območju cone 2 41
Türkçe Patlama tehlikesi olan Alan 2 bölgesinde ünite gruplarının/modüllerin kullanılması 43
Copyright © Siemens AG 2005

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area
2 A5E00352937-02
Deutsch
Einsatz der Baugruppen/Module im explosions-

gefährdeten Bereich Zone 2
Zone 2
Explosionsgefährdete Bereiche werden in Zonen eingeteilt. Die Zonen werden
nach der Wahrscheinlichkeit des Vorhandenseins einer explosionsfähigen
Atmosphäre unterschieden.
Zone Explosionsgefahr Beispiel
2 explosive Gasatmosphäre tritt Bereiche um Flanschverbindungen mit
nur selten und kurzzeitig auf Flachdichtungen bei Rohrleitungen in
geschlossenen Räumen
sicherer nein • außerhalb der Zone 2
Bereich • Standardanwendungen von dezentraler
Peripherie
Nachfolgend finden Sie wichtige Hinweise für die Installation der

Baugruppen/Module im explosionsgefährdeten Bereich.
Weitere Informationen
Weitere Informationen zu den Baugruppen/Modulen finden Sie im dazugehörigen
Handbuch.
Fertigungsort / Zulassung
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 nach EN 50021 : 1999

Prüfnummer: siehe Tabelle
Fertigungsort Baugruppen/Module Prüfnummer

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S Fehlersichere Module ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg
S7-300 KEMA 02
Germany
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Buskopplung DP/PA
Diagnoserepeater
S7-300 Fehlersichere Baugruppen
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D S7-400 KEMA 03
Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 ATEX 1125X
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
TS Adapter II ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X
Hinweis
Baugruppen/Module mit der Zulassung II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 dürfen nur in
SIMATIC-Systemen der Gerätekategorie 3 eingesetzt werden.
Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 3

A5E00352937-02
Deutsch
Instandhaltung
Für eine Reparatur müssen die betroffene Baugruppen/Module an den
Fertigungsort geschickt werden. Nur dort darf die Reparatur durchgeführt werden.
Besondere Bedingungen
1. Baugruppen/Module müssen in einen Schaltschrank oder ein metallisches
Gehäuse eingebaut werden. Diese müssen mindestens die Schutzart IP 54
(nach EN 60529) gewährleisten. Dabei sind die Umgebungsbedingungen zu
berücksichtigen, in denen das Gerät installiert wird. Für das Gehäuse muss
eine Herstellererklärung für Zone 2 vorliegen (gemäß EN 50021).
2. Wenn am Kabel bzw. an der Kabeleinführung dieses Gehäuses unter Betriebs-
bedingungen eine Temperatur > 70 °C erreicht wird oder wenn unter Betriebs-
bedingungen die Temperatur an der Aderverzweigung > 80 °C sein kann,
müssen die Temperatureigenschaften der Kabel mit den tatsächlich
gemessenen Temperaturen übereinstimmen.
3. Die eingesetzten Kabeleinführungen müssen der geforderten IP-Schutzart und
dem Abschnitt 7.2 (gemäß EN 50021) entsprechen.
4. Alle Geräte, einschließlich Schalter etc., die an den Ein- und Ausgängen von
SIMATIC-Systemen angeschlossen werden, müssen für den Explosionsschutz
Typ EEx nA oder EEx nC genehmigt sein.
5. Es müssen Maßnahmen getroffen werden, dass die Nennspannung durch
Transienten um nicht mehr als 40 % überschritten werden kann.
6. Umgebungstemperaturbereich: 0° C bis 60° C
7. Innerhalb des Gehäuses ist an einem nach dem Öffnen gut sichtbaren Platz ein
Schild mit folgender Warnung anzubringen:
! Warnung
Das Gehäuse darf nur kurze Zeit geöffnet werden, z. B. für visuelle Diagnose.
Betätigen Sie dabei keine Schalter, ziehen oder stecken keine Baugruppen und
trennen keine elektrischen Leitungen (Steckverbindungen).
Diese Warnung kann unberücksichtigt bleiben, wenn bekannt ist, dass keine
explosionsgefährdete Atmosphäre herrscht.
Liste der zugelassenen Baugruppen/Module

Die Liste mit den zugelassenen Baugruppen/Module finden Sie im Internet:
unter der Beitrags-ID 13702947.
4 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

A5E00352937-02
English
Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous

Area
Zone 2
Hazardous areas are divided up into zones. The zones are distinguished according
to the probability of the existence of an explosive atmosphere.
Zone Explosion Hazard Example
2 Explosive gas atmosphere Areas around flange joints with flat
occurs only seldom and for a gaskets in pipes in enclosed spaces
short time
Safe area No • Outside zone 2
• Standard distributed I/O applications
Below you will find important information on the installation of the

subassemblies/modules in a hazardous area.
Further Information
You will find further information on the subassemblies/modules in the
corresponding manual.
Production Location / Certification
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 to EN 50021 : 1999

Test number: see table below
Production Location Subassemblies/Modules Test Number

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET-200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S fault-tolerant modules ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg S7-300 KEMA 02
Germany ET-200M ATEX 1096X
DP/PA bus interface
Diagnostics repeater
S7-300 fault-tolerant modules
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X
Note
Subassemblies/modules with II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 certification can only be
used in SIMATIC systems rated as category 3 equipment.

A5E00352937-02
English
Maintenance
If repair is necessary, the affected subassemblies/modules must be sent to the
production location. Repairs can only be carried out there.
Special Conditions
1. Subassemblies/modules must be installed in a cabinet or metal housing. These
must comply with the IP 54 degree of protection as a minimum. The
environmental conditions under which the equipment is installed must be taken
into account. There must be a manufacturer's declaration for zone 2 available
for the housing (in accordance with EN 50021).
2. If a temperature of > 70 °C is reached in the cable or at the cable entry of this
housing under operating conditions, or if a temperature of > 80 °C can be
reached at the junction of the conductors under operating conditions, the
temperature-related properties of the cables must correspond to the
temperatures actually measured.
3. The cable entries used must comply with the required IP degree of protection
and Section 7.2 (in accordance with EN 50021).
4. All devices (including switches, etc.) that are connected to the inputs and
outputs of SIMATIC systems must be approved for EEx nA or EEx nC explosion
protection.
5. Steps must be taken to ensure that the rated voltage through transients cannot
be exceeded by more than 40 %.
6. Ambient temperature range: 0° C to 60° C
7. A sign containing the following warning must be put up inside the housing in an
easily visible position when the housing is opened:
Warning
! The housing can only be opened for a short time (e.g. for visual diagnostics). If
you do this, do not operate any switches, remove or install any modules or
disconnect any electrical cables (plug-in connections).
You can disregard this warning if you know that the atmosphere is not hazardous
(i.e. there is no risk of explosion).
List of Approved Subassemblies/Modules

You will find the list of approved subassemblies/modules under the ID 13702947
on the Internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/.

A5E00352937-02
Français
Utilisation des modules / coupleurs dans la zone à

risque d'explosion 2
Zone 2
Les environnements à risque d'explosion sont répartis en zones. Les zones se
distinguent par la probabilité de présence d'une atmosphère explosive.
Zone Risque d'explosion Exemple
2 Formation rare et brève d'une Environnement de raccords à joints plats
atmosphère gazeuse explosive dans le cas de conduites dans des locaux
fermés
Zone sûre Non • A l'extérieur de la zone 2
• Utilisation standard de périphérie
décentralisée
Vous trouverez ci-après des remarques importantes pour l'installation de la station

de périphérie décentralisée des modules / coupleurs dans la zone à risque
d'explosion.
Informations complémentaires
Des informations complémentaires sur les modules / cartouches se trouvent dans
le manuel correspondant.
Lieu de fabrication / Homologation
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 selon EN 50021 : 1999

Numéro de contrôle : voir tableau
Lieu de fabrication Modules / coupleurs Numéro de
contrôle
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 Modules à sécurité intrinsèque ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg ET 200S
Germany
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Couplage de bus DP/PA
Répéteur de diagnostic
Modules à sécurité intrinsèque
S7-300
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
Français
Nota
Les modules / coupleurs homologués II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 ne peuvent
être utilisés que dans des systèmes SIMATIC de catégorie 3.
Entretien
Si une réparation est nécessaire, le module / coupleur concerné doit être expédié
au lieu de production. La réparation ne doit être effectuée qu'en ce lieu.
Conditions particulières
1. Les modules / coupleurs doivent être installés dans une armoire ou un boîtier
métallique. Ceux-ci doivent assurer au moins l'indice de protection IP 54. Il faut
alors tenir compte des conditions d'environnement dans lesquelles l'appareil est
installé. Le boîtier doit faire l’objet d’une déclaration de conformité du fabricant
pour la zone 2 (selon EN 50021).
2. Si dans les conditions d’exploitation, une température > 70 °C est atteinte au
niveau du câble ou de l’entrée du câble dans ce boîtier, ou bien si la
température au niveau de la dérivation des conducteurs peut être > 80 °C, les
capacités de résistance thermique des câbles doivent corespondre aux
températures effectivement mesurées.
3. Les entrées de câbles utilisées doivent avoir le niveau de protection IP exigé et
être conformes au paragraphe 7.2 (selon EN 50021).
4. Tous les appareillages (y compris les interrupteurs, etc.) raccordés aux entrées
et sorties de systèmes SIMATIC doivent être homologués pour la protection
antidéflagrante type EEx nA ou EEx nC.
5. Il faut prendre des mesures pour que la tension nominale ne puisse pas être
dépassée de plus de 40% sous l’influence de transitoires.
6. Plage de température ambiante : 0° C à 60° C
7. A l’intérieur du boîtier, il faut placer, à un endroit bien visible après ouverture,
une plaquette comportant l’avertissement suivant :
Avertissement
! Ouvir le boîtier le moins longtemps possible, par exemple pour effectuer un
diagnostic visuel. Ce faisant, n’actionnez aucun commutateur, ne déconnectez
aucun module et ne débanchez pas de câbles électriques (connexions).
Le respect de cet avertissement n’est pas impératif s’il est certain que
l’environnement ne présente pas de risque d’explosion.
Liste des modules / coupleurs homologués

Vous trouverez sur Internet la liste des modules / coupleurs homologués :
référence ID 13702947.

A5E00352937-02
Español
Aplicación de los módulos / tarjetas en áreas con

peligro de explosión, zona 2
Zona 2
Las áreas con peligro de explosión se clasifican en zonas. Las zonas se
diferencian según la probabilidad de la existencia de una atmósfera capaz de sufrir
una explosión.
Zona Peligro de explosión Ejemplo
2 La atmósfera explosiva de gas Áreas alrededor de uniones abridadas con juntas
sólo se presenta rara vez y muy planas en tuberías en locales cerrados
brevemente
Área segura no • fuera de la zona 2
• Aplicaciones estándar de la periferia
descentralizada
A continuación encontrará importantes informaciones para la instalación de los

módulos / tarjetas en áreas con peligro de explosión.
Otras informaciones
Encontrará otras informaciones relativas a los módulos / tarjetas en el Manual
correspondiente.
Lugar de fabricación / Homologación
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 según norma EN 50021 : 1999

Número de comprobación: véase tabla
Lugar de fabricación Módulos / tarjetas Número de

comprobación

Werner-von-Siemens- Grupos ET 200S a prueba de fallos ATEX 1238 X
Straße 50
S7-300 KEMA 02
92224 Amberg
ET 200M ATEX 1096 X
Germany
Acoplamiento de bus DP/PA
Repetidor de diagnóstico
Grupos S7-300 a prueba de fallos

Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. ATEX 1125 X
50 76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
TS Adapter ATEX 1228 X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03

ATEX 1226 X

A5E00352937-02
Español
Nota
Los módulos / tarjetas con la homologación II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 pueden
utilizarse únicamente en los sistemas SIMATIC de la categoría de equipo 3.
Mantenimiento
Para una reparación se ha de remitir el módulo / tarjeta afectado al lugar de
fabricación. Sólo allí se puede realizar la reparación.
Condiciones especiales
1. Los módulos / tarjetas se han de montar en un armario eléctrico de distribución
o en una carcasa metálica. Éstos deben garantizar como mínimo el grado de
protección IP 54 (conforme a EN 60529). Para ello se han de tener en cuenta
las condiciones ambientales, en las cuales se instala el equipo. La caja deberá
contar con una declaración del fabricante para la zona 2 (conforme a
EN 50021).
2. Si durante la operación se alcanzara una temperatura > 70° C en el cable o la
entrada de cables de esta caja o bien una temperatura > 80° C en la
bifurcación de hilos, deberán adaptarse las propiedades térmicas de los cables
a las temperaturas medidas efectivamente.
3. Las entradas de cable utilizadas deben cumplir el grado de protección IP
exigido y lo expuesto en el apartado 7.2 (conforme a EN 50021).
4. Todos los dispositivos –inclusive interruptores, etc.– conectados a las entradas
y salidas de sistemas SIMATIC deben estar homologados para la protección
contra explosiones del tipo EEx nA o EEx nC.
5. Es necesario adoptar las medidas necesarias para evitar que la tensión
nominal pueda rebasar en más del 40 % debido a efectos transitorios.
6. Margen de temperatura ambiente: 0° C hasta 60° C
7. Dentro de la caja deberá colocarse en un lugar perfectamente visible tras su
apertura un rótulo con la siguiente advertencia:
! Precaución
Abrir la caja sólo brevemente, p.ej. para el diagnóstico visual. Durante este
tiempo Ud. no deberá activar ningún interruptor, desenchufar o enchufar módulos
ni separar conductores eléctricos (conexiones enchufables).
Esta advertencia puede ignorarse si Ud. sabe que en la atmósfera existente no
hay peligro de explosión.
Lista de los módulos / tarjetas homologados

En la internet hallará Ud. una lista con los módulos / tarjetas homologados:
bajo el ID de asignación 13702947.

A5E00352937-02
Italiano
Impiego delle unità/moduli nell'area a pericolo di

esplosione zona 2
Zona 2
Le aree a pericolo di esplosione vengono suddivise in zone. Le zone vengono
distinte secondo la probabilità della presenza di un'atmosfera esplosiva.
Zona Pericolo di esplosione Esempio
2 L'atmosfera esplosiva si Aree intorno a collegamenti a flange con
presente solo raramente e guarnizioni piatte nelle condotte in ambienti
brevemente chiusi
Area sicura No • Al di fuori della zona 2
• Applicazioni standard di periferia
decentrata
Qui di seguito sono riportate delle avvertenze importanti per l'installazione delle
unità/moduli nell'area a pericolo di esplosione.
Ulteriori informazioni
Ulteriori informazioni sulle unità/moduli si trovano nel corrispondente manuale.
Luogo di produzione / Omologazione
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 secondo EN 50021 : 1999

Numero di controllo: vedi tabella
Luogo di produzione Unità/moduli Numero di controllo

Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 Unità ad elevata sicurezza ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg ET 200S
Germany
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Accoppiamento di bus DP/PA
Repeater di diagnostica
Unità ad elevata sicurezza
S7-300

76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03

ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
Italiano
Avvertenza
Le unità/moduli con l'omologazione II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 possono essere
impiegati solo nei sistemi SIMATIC della categoria di apparecchiature 3.
Manutenzione
Per una riparazione, le unità/i moduli interessati devono essere inviati al luogo di
produzione. La riparazione può essere effettuata solo lì.
Condizioni particolari
1. Le unità/i moduli devono essere montati in un armadio elettrico o in un
contenitore metallico. Questi devono assicurare almeno il tipo di protezione
IP 54. In questo caso bisogna tenere conto delle condizioni ambientali nelle
quali l'apparecchiatura viene installata. Per il contenitore deve essere presente
una dichiarazione del costruttore per la zona 2 (secondo EN 50021).
2. Se nei cavi o nel loro punto di ingresso in questo contenitore viene raggiunta in
condizioni di esercizio una temperatura > 70 °C o se in condizioni di esercizio la
temperatura nella derivazione dei fili può essere > 80 °C, le caratteristiche di
temperatura dei cavi devono essere conformi alla temperatura effettivamente
misurata.
3. Gli ingressi dei cavi usati devono essere conformi al tipo di protezione richiesto
e alla sezione 7.2 (secondo EN 50021).
4. Tutte le apparecchiature, inclusi interruttori, ecc. che vengono collegati agli
ingressi/uscite di sistemi SIMATIC, devono essere stati omologati per la
protezione da esplosione tipo EEx nA o EEx nC.
5. Devono essere prese delle misure per evitare che la tensione nominale possa
essere superata per più del 40% da parte di transienti.
6. Campo termico ambientale: da 0° C a 60° C
7. All’interno del contenitore va apportata, in un luogo ben visibile dopo l’apertura,
una targhetta con il seguente avvertimento:
! Attenzione
Il contenitore può rimanere aperto solo per breve tempo, ad esempio per una
diagnostica a vista. In tal caso non azionare alcun interruttore, non disinnestare o
innestare unità e non staccare connessioni elettriche (connettori).
Non è necessario tenere conto di questo avvertimento se è noto che non c’è
un’atmosfera a rischio di esplosione
Elenco delle unità/moduli omologati

L'elenco con le unità/moduli omologati si trova in Internet al sito:
all’ID di voce 13702947.

A5E00352937-02
Nederlands
Gebruik van de componenten/modulen in het explosief

gebied zone 2
Zone 2
Explosieve gebieden worden ingedeeld in zones. Bij de zones wordt
onderscheiden volgens de waarschijnlijkheid van de aanwezigheid van een
explosieve atmosfeer.
Zone Explosiegevaar Voorbeeld
2 Een explosieve gasatmosfeer Gebieden rond flensverbindingen met
treedt maar zelden op en voor pakkingen bij buisleidingen in gesloten
korte duur vertrekken
Veilig neen • Buiten de zone 2
gebied • Standaardtoepassingen van decentrale
periferie
Hierna vindt u belangrijke aanwijzingen voor de installatie van de
componenten/modulen in het explosief gebied.
Verdere informatie
In het bijhorende handboek vindt u verdere informatie over de
componenten/modulen
Productieplaats / Vergunning
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 conform EN 50021 : 1999

Keuringsnummer: zie tabel
Productieplaats Componenten/modulen Keuringsnummer

Werner-von-Siemens- ET 200S tegen fouten ATEX 1238X
Strasse 50 beveiligde componenten
92224 Amberg
S7-300 KEMA 02
Germany
ET 200 M ATEX 1096X
Buskoppeling DP/PA
Diagnoserepeater
S7-300 tegen fouten beveiligde
componenten

76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03

ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
Nederlands
Opmerking
Componenten/modulen met de vergunning II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 mogen
slechts worden gebruikt in SIMATIC-systemen van de apparaatcategorie 3.
Instandhouding
Voor een reparatie moeten de betreffende componenten/modulen naar de plaats
van vervaardiging worden gestuurd. Alleen daar mag de reparatie worden
uitgevoerd.
Speciale voorwaarden
1. Componenten/modulen moeten worden ingebouwd in een schakelkast of in een
behuizing van metaal. Deze moeten minstens de veiligheidsgraad IP 54
waarborgen. Hierbij dient rekening te worden gehouden met de
omgevingsvoorwaarden waarin het apparaat wordt geïnstalleerd. Voor de
behuizing dient een verklaring van de fabrikant voor zone 2 te worden
ingediend (volgens EN 50021).
2. Als aan de kabel of aan de kabelinvoering van deze behuizing onder
bedrijfsomstandigheden een temperatuur wordt bereikt > 70 °C of als onder
bedrijfsomstandigheden de temperatuur aan de adervertakking > 80 °C kan
zijn, moeten de temperatuureigenschappen van de kabel overeenstemmen met
de werkelijk gemeten temperaturen.
3. De aangebrachte kabelinvoeringen moeten de vereiste IP-veiligheidsgraad
hebben en in overeenstemming zijn met alinea 7.2 (volgens EN 50021).
4. Alle apparaten, schakelaars enz. inbegrepen, die worden aangesloten op de in-
en uitgangen van SIMATIC-systemen, moeten zijn goedgekeurd voor de
explosiebeveiliging type EEx nA of EEx nC.
5. Er dienen maatregelen te worden getroffen, zodat de nominale spanning door
transiënten met niet meer dan 40 % kan worden overschreden.
6. Omgevingstemperatuurbereik: 0° C tot 60° C
7. Binnen de behuizing dient op een na het openen goed zichtbare plaats een
bord te worden aangebracht met de volgende waarschuwing:
! Waarschuwing
De behuizing mag slechts voor korte tijd worden geopend, bijv. voor een visuele
diagnose. Bedien hierbij geen schakelaar, trek of steek geen modulen en
ontkoppel geen elektrische leidingen (steekverbindingen).
Deze waarschuwing kan buiten beschouwing blijven, indien bekend is dat er
geen explosieve atmosfeer heerst.
Lijst van de toegelaten componenten/modulen

De lijst met de toegelaten componenten/modulen vindt u in het internet:
onder de bijdrage-ID 13702947.

A5E00352937-02
Dansk
Brug af komponenter/moduler i det eksplosionsfarlige

område zone 2
Zone 2
Eksplosionsfarlige områder inddeles i zoner. Zonerne adskiller sig indbyrdes efter
hvor sandsynligt det er, at der er en eksplosiv atmosfære.
Zone Eksplosionsfare Eksempel
2 Eksplosiv gasatmosfære Områder rundt om flangeforbindelser med
optræder kun sjældent og varer flade pakninger ved rørledninger i lukkede
kort rum
Sikkert Nej • Uden for zone 2
område • Standardanvendelser decentral periferi
I det følgende findes vigtige henvisninger vedr. installation af komponenter/moduler

i det eksplosionsfarlige område.
Yderligere informationer
Yderligere informationer om komponenterne/modulerne findes i den pågældende
manual.
Produktionssted / Godkendelse
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 efter EN 50021 : 1999

Kontrolnummer: se tabel
Produktionssted Komponenter/moduler Kontrolnummer
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S fejlsikre ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg komponenter
Germany
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Buskobling DP/PA
Diagnoserepeater
S7-300 fejlsikre komponenter

76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X
Bemærk
Komponenter/moduler med godkendelsen II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 må kun
monteres i SIMATIC-systemer for udstyrskategori 3.

A5E00352937-02
Dansk
Vedligeholdelse
Hvis de pågældende komponenter/moduler skal repareres, bedes De sende dem
til produktionsstedet. Reparation må kun udføres der.
Særlige betingelser
1. Komponenterne/modulerne skal monteres i et kontrolskab eller et metalkabinet.
Disse skal mindst kunne sikre beskyttelsesklasse IP 54. I denne forbindelse
skal der tages højde for de omgivelsestemperaturer, i hvilke udstyret er
installeret. Der skal være udarbejdet en erklæring fra fabrikanten for kabinettet
for zone 2 (iht. EN 50021).
2. Hvis kablet eller kabelindføringen på dette hus når op på en temperatur på
> 70 °C under driftsbetingelser eller hvis temperaturen på åreforegreningen kan
være > 80 °C under driftsbetingelser, skal kablernes temperaturegenskaber
stemme overens med de temperaturer, der rent faktisk måles.
3. De benyttede kabelindføringer skal være i overensstemmelse med den
krævede IP-beskyttelsestype og afsnittet 7.2 (iht. EN 50021).
4. Alle apparater, inkl. kontakter osv., der forbindes med ind- og udgangene til
SIMATIC-systemerne, skal være godkendt til eksplosionsbeskyttelse af
type EEx nA eller EEx nC.
5. Der skal træffes foranstaltninger, der sørger for, at den nominelle spænding via
transienter ikke kan overskrides mere end 40 %.
6. Omgivelsestemperaturområde: 0° C til 60° C
7. I kabinettet skal der anbringes et skilt, der skal kunne ses, når kabinettet åbnes.
Dette skilt skal have følgende advarsel:
Advarsel
! Kabinettet må kun åbnes i kort tid, f.eks. til visuel diagnose. Tryk i denne
forbindelse ikke på kontakter, træk eller isæt ikke komponenter og afbryd ikke
elektriske ledninger (stikforbindelser).
Der skal ikke tages højde for denne advarsel, hvis man ved, at der ikke er nogen
eksplosionsfarlig atmosfære.
Liste over godkendte komponenter/moduler

Listen med de godkendte komponenter/moduler findes på internettet:
under bidrags-ID 13702947.

A5E00352937-02
Suomi
Rakenneryhmien/moduulien käyttö
räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla, vyöhyke 2
Vyöhyke 2
Räjähdysvaarannetut alueet jaetaan vyöhykkeisiin. Vyöhykkeet erotellaan
räjähdyskelpoisen ilmakehän olemassa olon todennäköisyyden mukaan.
Vyöhyke Räjähdysvaara Esimerkki
2 Räjähtävä kaasuilmakehä Alueet putkistojen lattatiivisteillä varustuilla
ilmaantuu vain harvoin ja laippaliitoksilla suljetuissa tiloissa
lyhytaikaisesti
turvallinen ei • vyöhykkeen 2 ulkopuolella
alue • Hajautetun ulkopiirin vakiosovellukset
Seuraavasta löydätte tärkeitä ohjeita rakenneryhmien/moduulien asennukseen

räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla.
Lisätietoja
Lisätietoja rakenneryhmiin/moduuleihin löydätte niihin kuuluvista ohjekirjasta.
Valmistuspaikka / Hyväksyntä
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 EN 50021 mukaan: 1999

Tarkastusnumero: katso taulukko
Valmistuspaikka Rakenneryhmät/moduulit Tarkastusnumero
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S läpi-iskuvarmat ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg rakenneryhmät
Germany
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Väyläkytkin DP/PA
Dignoositoistin
S7-300 läpi-iskuvarmat
rakenneryhmät
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X
Ohje
Rakenneryhmät/moduulit hyväksynnän II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 kanssa
saadaan käyttää ainoastaan laitekategorian 3 SIMATIC-järjestelmissä.

A5E00352937-02
Suomi
Kunnossapito
Korjausta varten täytyy kyseinen rakenneryhmä/moduuli lähettää
valmistuspaikkaan. Korjaus voidaan suorittaa ainoastaan siellä.
Erityiset vaatimukset
1. Rakenneryhmät/moduulit täytyy asentaa kytkentäkaappiin tai metalliseen
koteloon. Näiden täytyy olla vähintään kotelointiluokan IP 54 mukaisia. Tällöin
on huomioitava ympäristöolosuhteet, johon laite asennetaan. Kotelolle täytyy
olla valmistajaselvitys vyöhykettä 2 varten (EN 50021 mukaan).
2. Kun johdolla tai tämän kotelon johdon sisäänviennillä saavutetaan > 70 °C
lämpötila tai kun käyttöolosuhteissa lämpötila voi piuhajaotuksella olla > 80 °C,
täytyy johdon lämpötilaominaisuuksien vastata todellisesti mitattuja lämpötiloja.
3. Käytettyjen johtojen sisäänohjauksien täytyy olla vaaditun IP-kotelointiluokan ja
kohdan 7.2 (EN 50021 mukaan) mukaisia.
4. Kaikkien laitteiden, kytkimet jne. mukaan lukien, jotka liitetään SIMATIC-
järjestelmien tuloille ja lähdöille, täytyy olla hyväksyttyjä tyypin EEx nA tai
EEx nC räjähdyssuojausta varten.
5. Toimenpiteet täytyy suorittaa, ettei nimellisjännite voi transienttien kautta ylittyä
enemmän kuin 40 %.
6. Ympäristölämpötila-alue: 0° C ... 60° C
7. Kotelon sisälle, avauksen jälkeen näkyvälle paikalle, on kiinnitettävä kilpi, jossa
on seuraava varoitus:
! Varoitus
Kotelo saadaan avata ainoastaan lyhyeksi ajaksi, esim. visuaalista diagnoosia
varten. Älä tällöin käytä mitään kytkimiä, vedä tai liitä mitään rakenneryhmiä,
äläkä erota mitään sähköjohtoja (pistoliittimiä).
Tätä varoitusta ei tarvitse huomioida, kun on tiedossa, että minkäänlaista
räjähdysvaarannettua ilmakehää ei ole olemassa.
Hyväksyttyjen rakenneryhmien/moduulien lista

Lista hyväksytyistä rakennesarjoista/moduuleista löytyy internetistä osoitteesta:
käyttäjätunnuksella 13702947.

A5E00352937-02
Svenska
Användning av komponentgrupperna/modulerna i
explosionsriskområde zon 2
Zon 2
Explosionsriskområden delas in i zoner. Zonerna delas in enligt sannolikheten att
en atmosfär med explosionsfara föreligger.
Zon Explosionsfara Exempel
2 Explosiv gasatmosfär uppstår Områden kring flänsförbindelser med
endast sällan eller kortvarigt packningar vid rörledningar i slutna
utrymmen
Säkert Nej • Utanför zon 2
område • Standardanvändning av decentral
periferi
Nedan följer viktiga anvisningar om installationen av

komponentgrupperna/modulerna i ett explosionsriskområde.
Ytterligare information
Ytterligare information om komponentgrupperna/modulerna finner du i tillhörande
handbok.
Tillverkningsort / Godkännande
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 enligt EN 50021 : 1999

Kontrollnummer: se tabell
Tillverkningsort Komponentgrupper/ Kontrollnummer
moduler
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S Felsäkra ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg
komponentgrupper
Germany
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Busskoppling DP/PA
Diagnosrepeater
S7-300 Felsäkra
komponentgrupper
76187 Karlsruhe S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
Svenska
Anvisning
Komponentgrupper/moduler med godkännande II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 får
endast användas i SIMATIC-system i apparatgrupp 3.
Underhåll
Vid reparation måste den aktuella komponentgrupperna/modulerna insändas till
tillverkaren. Reparationer får endast genomföras där.
Särskilda villkor
1. Komponentgrupperna/modulerna måste monteras i ett kopplingsskåp eller
metallhus. Dessa måste minst vara av skyddsklass IP 54. Därvid ska
omgivningsvillkoren där enheten installeras beaktas. För kåpan måste en
tillverkardeklaration för zon 2 föreligga (enligt EN 50021).
2. Om en temperatur på > 70°C uppnås vid husets kabel resp kabelinföring under
driftvillkor eller om temperaturen vid trådförgreningen kan vara > 80°C under
driftvillkor, måste kabelns temperaturegenskaper överensstämma med den
verkligen uppmätta temperaturen.
3. De använda kabelinföringarna måste uppfylla kraven i det krävda IP-
skyddsutförandet och i avsnitt 7.2 (enligt EN 50021).
4. Alla apparater, inklusive brytare osv, som ansluts till in- och utgångarna på
SIMATIC-system, måste vara godkända för explosionsskydd av typ EEx nA
eller EEx nC.
5. Åtgärder måste vidtas så, att märkspänningen ej kan överskridas med mer än
40 % genom transienter.
6. Omgivningstemperatur: 0° C till 60° C
7. När huset öppnats ska en skylt med följande varning monteras på ett tydligt
synligt ställe huset:
! Varning
Huset får endast öppnas under kort tid, t ex för visuell diagnos. Använd därvid
inga brytare, lossa eller anslut inga enheter och frånskilj inga elektriska ledningar
(insticksanslutningar).
Ingen hänsyn måste tas till denna varning om det är säkert att det inte råder
någon explosionsfarlig atmosfär.
Lista över godkända komponentgrupper/moduler

Lista över godkända komponentgrupper/moduler finns på Internetadressen:
under bidrags-ID 13702947.

A5E00352937-02
Português
Uso de grupos construtivos/módulos em área exposta

ao perigo de explosão 2
Zona 2
As áreas expostas ao perigo de explosão são divididas em zonas. As zonas são
diferenciadas de acordo com a probabilidade da existência de uma atmosfera
explosiva.
Zona Perigo de explosão Exemplo
2 Só raramente e por um breve Áreas em torno de ligações flangeadas
período de tempo surgem com vedações chatas em tubulações em
atmosferas explosivas recintos fechados
Área segura não • fora da zona 2
• Aplicações descentralizadas de
periferia descentralizada
A seguir, o encontrará avisos importantes para a instalação de grupos

construtivos/ módulos em área exposta ao perigo de explosão.
Mais informações
Para obter mais informações sobre grupos construtivos/módulos, consulte o
respectivo manual.
Local de produção / Licença
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 seg. EN 50021 : 1999

Número de ensaio: veja a tabela
Local de produção Grupos N° de ensaio

construtivos/módulos
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S Grupos construtivos ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg protegidos contra erro
Alemanha
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Acoplador bus DP/PA
Repetidor de diagnóstico
S7-300 Grupos construtivos
protegidos contra erro
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Alemanha
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
Português
Aviso
Os grupos construtivos/módulos com a licença II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 só
podem ser aplicados em sistemas SIMATIC da categoria de aparelho 3.
Reparo
Os grupos construtivos/módulos em questão devem ser remetidos para o local de
produção a fim de que seja realizado o reparo. Apenas lá deve ser efetuado o
reparo.
Condições especiais
1. Os grupos construtivos/módulos devem ser montados em um armário de
distribuição ou em uma caixa metálica. Estes devem garantir no mínimo o tipo
de protecção IP 54. Durante este trabalho deverão ser levados em
consideração as condições locais, nas quais o aparelho será instalado. Para a
caixa deverá ser apresentada uma declaração do fabricante para a zona 2 (de
acordo com EN 50021).
2. Caso no cabo ou na entrada do cabo desta carcaça sob as condições
operacionais seja atingida uma temperatura de > 70 °C, ou caso sob condições
operacionais a temperatura na ramificação do fio poderá atingir > 80 °C, as
caraterísticas de temperatura deverão corresponder às temperaturas realmente
medidas.
3. As entradas de cabo utilizadas devem corresponder ao tipo exigido de
protecção IP e à seção 7.2 (de acordo com o EN 50021).
4. Todos os aparelhos, inclusive as chaves, etc., que estejam conectadas em
entradas e saídas dos sistemas SIMATIC devem possuir a licença para a
protecção de explosão do tipo EEx nA ou EEx nC.
5. Precisam ser tomadas medidas para que a tensão nominal através de
transitórios não possa ser ultrapassada em mais que 40 %.
6. Área de temperatura ambiente: 0° C até 60° C
7. No âmbito da carcaça deve ser colocada, após a abertura, em um ponto bem
visível uma placa com a seguinte advertência:
! Advertência
A carcaça deve ser aberta apenas por um breve período de tempo, por ex. para
diagnóstico visual. Não acione nenhum interruptor, não retire ou conecte nenhum
módulo e não separe nenhum fio elétrico (ligações de tomada).
Esta advertência poderá ser ignorada caso se saiba que não há nenhuma
atmosfera sujeita ao perigo de explosão.
Lista dos grupos construtivos/módulos autorizados

A lista com os grupos construtivos/módulos autorizados encontram-se na Internet:
sob o número de ID 13702947.

A5E00352937-02
Ελληνικά
Χρήση των δοµικών συγκροτηµάτων/µονάδων σε

επικίνδυνη για έκρηξη περιοχή, ζώνη 2
Ζώνη 2
Οι επικίνδυνες για έκρηξη περιοχές χωρίζονται σε ζώνες. Οι ζώνες διαφέρουν
σύµφωνα µε την πιθανότητα ύπαρξης ενός ικανού για έκρηξη περιβάλλοντος.
Ζώνη Κίνδυνος έκρηξης Παράδειγµα
2 Εκρηκτικό περιβάλλον αερίου Περιοχές γύρω από φλαντζωτές
παρουσιάζεται µόνο σπάνια και συνδέσεις µε τσιµούχες σε σωληνώσεις σε
για σύντοµο χρονικό διάστηµα κλειστούς χώρους
Ασφαλής όχι • Εκτός της ζώνης 2
περιοχή • Τυπικές εφαρµογές αποκεντρωµένης
περιφέρειας
Στη συνέχεια θα βρείτε σηµαντικές υποδείξεις για την εγκατάσταση των δοµικών
συγκροτηµάτων/µονάδων σε επικίνδυνη για έκρηξη περιοχή.
Επιπλέον πληροφορίες
Επιπλέον πληροφορίες για τα δοµικά συγκροτήµατα/µονάδες θα βρείτε στο
αντίστοιχο εγχειρίδιο.
Τόπος κατασκευής / Άδεια
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 σύµφωνα µε το πρότυπο

EN 50021 : 1999
Αριθµός ελέγχου: βλέπε πίνακα
Τόπος κατασκευής ∆οµικά συγκροτήµατα/µονάδες Αιθµ. ελέγχου

ET 200S Ασφαλή σε περίπτωση ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg
Germany βλάβης δοµικά συγκροτήµατα
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Σύζευξη διαύλου DP/PA
Επαναλήπτης διάγνωσης
S7-300 Ασφαλή σε περίπτωση
βλάβης δοµικά συγκροτήµατα
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03

ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
Ελληνικά
Υπόδειξη
Τα δοµικά συγκροτήµατα/οι µονάδες µε την άδεια II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6
επιτρέπεται να τοποθετηθούν µόνο σε συστήµατα αυτοµατισµού SIMATIC της
κατηγορίας συσκευής 3.
Συντήρηση
Για µια επισκευή πρέπει να σταλθούν τα αντίστοιχα δοµικά συγκροτήµατα/µονάδες
στον τόπο κατασκευής. Μόνο εκεί επιτρέπεται να γίνει η επισκευή.
Ιδιαίτερες προϋποθέσεις
1. Τα δοµικά συγκροτήµατα/µονάδες πρέπει να ενσωµατωθούν σε ένα ερµάριο
ζεύξης ή σε ένα µεταλλικό περίβληµα. Αυτά πρέπει να εξασφαλίζουν το
λιγότερο το βαθµό προστασίας IP 54 (κατά EN 60529). Σε αυτήν την
περίπτωση πρέπει να ληφθούν υπόψη οι περιβαλλοντικές συνθήκες, στις
οποίες θα εγκατασταθεί η συσκευή. Για το περίβληµα πρέπει να προβλέπεται
δήλωση του κατασκευαστή για τη ζώνη 2 (σύµφωνα µε το πρότυπο EN 50021).
2. Εάν στο καλώδιο ή στην είσοδο του καλωδίου αυτού του περιβλήµατος κάτω
από συνθήκες λειτουργίας η θερµοκρασία ξεπεράσει τους 70 °C ή όταν κάτω
από συνθήκες λειτουργίας η θερµοκρασία στη διακλάδωση του σύρµατος
µπορεί να είναι µεγαλύτερη από 80 °C, πρέπει οι θερµοκρασιακές ιδιότητες των
καλωδίων να ταυτίζονται µε τις πραγµατικά µετρηµένες θερµοκρασίες.
3. Οι χρησιµοποιούµενες εισόδοι καλωδίων πρέπει να συµµορφώνονται µε το
βαθµό προστασίας IP 54 στην ενότητα 7.2 (σύµφωνα µε το πρότυπο
EN 50021).
4. Όλες οι συσκευές, συµπεριλαµβανοµένων διακοπτών κ.α., που συνδέονται στις
εισόδους και εξόδους των συστηµάτων SIMATIC, πρέπει να φέρουν εγκριµένη
προστασία κατά έκρηξης τύπου EEx nA ή EEx nC.
5. Πρέπει να ληφθούν µέτρα, να µην µπορεί να γίνει υπέρβαση της ονοµαστικής
τάσης µέσω αιφνίδιας µεταβολής της τάσης πάνω από 40 %.
6. Περιοχή θερµοκρασίας περιβάλλοντος: 0° C έως 60° C
7. Πρέπει να τοποθετηθεί µέσα στο περίβληµα σε ευδιάκριτο σηµείο µετά το
άνοιγµα µία πινακίδα µε την ακόλουθη προειδοποίηση:
! Προειδοποίηση
Το περίβληµα επιτρέπεται να ανοίγει µόνο για µικρό χρονικό διάστηµα, π.χ. για τη
διενέργεια οπτικής διάγνωσης. Μην κάνετε χρήση διακοπτών, µην τραβάτε ή
εµβυσµατώνετε δοµικά συγκροτήµατα και µη διαχωρίζετε ηλεκτροφόρους
αγωγούς (εµβσυµατώσιµες συνδέσεις).
Η προειδοποίηση αυτή δε χρειάζεται να ληφθεί υπ’ όψιν, εάν είναι γνωστό ότι δεν
υφίσταται ατµόσφαιρα παρουσιάζουσα κίνδυνο έκρηξης.
Κατάλογος των εγκεκριµένων δοµικών συγκροτηµάτων/µονάδων

Η λίστα µε τα εγκριµένα δοµικά συγκροτήµατα/µονάδες υπάρχει στο διαδίκτυο:
µε τον κωδικό συνδροµής 13702947.
A5E00352937-02
Česky
Použití konstrukčních skupin / modulů v prostředí s

nebezpečím výbuchu Zóna 2
Zóna 2
Oblasti s nebezpečím výbuchu jsou rozděleny do zón. Zóny jsou rozlišeny podle
pravděpodobnosti výskytu explosivní atmosféry.
Zóna Nebezpečí exploze Příklad
2 Explosivní plynová atmosféra Oblasti kolem přírubových spojů s
se vyskytuje pouze zřídka a plochým těsněním u potrubí v uzavřených
krátkodobě prostorech
Bezpečná není • Mimo zónu 2
oblast • Standardní aplikace necentrálních
periferií
Dále naleznete důležité pokyny pro instalaci konstrukčních skupin/modulů v

oblastech s nebezpečím výbuchu.
Další informace
Další informace ke konstrukčním skupinám/modulům naleznete v příslušné
příručce.
Místo výroby / Registrace
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 dle EN 50021 : 1999

Zkušební číslo: viz tabulka
Místo výroby Konstrukční skupiny/Moduly Kontrolní číslo

Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S Konstrukční skupiny ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg odolné proti chybám
Germany
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Spojka sběrnice DP/PA
Diagnostické translační relé
S7-300 Konstrukční skupiny odolné
proti chybám
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
Česky
Upozornění
Konstrukční skupiny/Moduly s osvědčením II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 smějí být
použity pouze v systémech SIMATIC, přístrojové kategorie 3.
Údržba
K opravě musí být příslušné konstrukční skupiny/moduly zaslány do výrobního
místa. Oprava smí být provedena pouze zde.
Zvláštní podmínky
1. Konstrukční skupiny/moduly musí být zabudovány v rozvaděči nebo kovovém
krytu. Ty musí minimálně zajišťovat druh ochrany IP 54 (dle EN 60529). Přitom
je nutno respektovat okolní podmínky, v nichž je přístroj instalován. Pro kryt
musí být k dispozici prohlášení výrobce pro zónu 2 (dle EN 50021).
2. Pokud je na kabelu popř. kabelovém vedení tohoto krytu dosaženo za
provozních podmínek teploty > 70 °C, nebo když za provozních podmínek
může být na kabelových větvích teplota > 80 °C, musí teplotní vlastnosti kabelu
souhlasit se skutečně naměřenými teplotami.
3. Použité kabelové přívody musí odpovídat požadovanému druhu ochrany IP a
odstavci 7.2 (dle EN 50021).
4. Všechny přístroje, včetně spínačů atd. napojených na vstupy a výstupy systémů
SIMATIC, musí mít osvědčení vůči výbuchu typu EEx nA nebo EEx nC.
5. Musí být provedena opatření k zamezení přechodného překročení jmenovitého
napětí, nepřesahující více než 40 %.
6. Rozsah teploty okolí: 0° C do 60° C
7. Uvnitř krytu je nutno na dobře viditelném místě po otevření připevnit štítek s
následujícím varováním:
! Varování
Kryt smí být otevřen pouze krátce, např. pro vizuální diagnostiku. Nepoužívejte
přitom žádný spínač, nevytahujte ani nezasunujte žádné konstrukční skupiny a
neoddělujte žádná elektrická vedení (konektorové spoje).
Toto varování nemusíte respektovat, pokud je známo, že se na místě nevyskytuje
explozivní atmosféra.
Seznam konstrukčních skupin/modulů s osvědčením

Seznam konstrukčních skupin/modulů s osvědčením naleznete na Internetu:
pod identifikací příspěvku ID 13702947.

A5E00352937-02
Estnisch
Sõlmede/moodulite kasutamine plahvatusohtliku

piirkonna tsoonis 2
Tsoon 2
Plahvatusohtlikud piirkonnad jagatakse tsoonideks. Tsoone eristatakse vastavalt
plahvatusohtliku keskkonna esinemise tõenäosusele.
Tsoon Plahvatusoht Näide
2 üldine plahvatav keskkond Piirkonnad lamedate rõngastihenditega
esineb ainult harva ja torustike äärikliidete ümbruses suletud
lühiajaliselt ruumides
ohutu ei • väljaspool tsooni 2
piirkond • Mittstsentraalse välisseadme
standardsed rakendused
Järgnevalt leaite Te olulisi juhiseid sõlmede/moodulite paigaldamiseks

plahvatusohtlikus piirkonnas.
Täiendav info
Üksikasjalik info sõlmede/moodulite kohta on toodud seadme juurde kuuluvas
käsiraamatus.
Valmistamiskoht / Kasutusluba
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 vastavalt standardile EN 50021 : 1999

Katsetusnumber: vaadake tabelit
Valmistamiskoht Sõlmed/moodulid Katsetusnumber

Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S Rikkekindlad sõlmed ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg
S7-300 KEMA 02
Germany
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Siinühendus DP/PA
Diagnostikarepiiter
S7-300 Rikkekindlad sõlmed
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X
Juhis
Sõlmi/mooduleid kasutusloaga II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 tohib kasutada ainult
SIMATIC-süsteemides, mille seadmeklass on 3.

A5E00352937-02
Estnisch
Korrashoid
Parandamiseks tuleb sõlmed/moodulid saata valmistamiskohta. Parandustöid tohib
teha ainult seal.
Eritingimused
1. Sõlmed/moodulid tuleb monteerida jaotuskarpi või metallkorpusesse. Need
peavad tagama kaitseastme vähemalt IP 54 (vastavalt standardile EN 60529).
Seejuures peab arvesse võtma seadme paigaldamise keskkonna tingimusi.
Korpuse jaoks peab tsooni 2 jaoks olema tootja juhis (vastavalt standardile
EN 50021).
2. Kui selle korpuse kaabli juures või kaabelvaheliku (kaabelsisestuse) juures
töötingimustes saavutatakse temperatuur > 70 °C või, kui töötingimustes
temperatuur soone hargnemiskoha juures võib olla > 80 °C, peavad kaabli
termilised omadusd olema vastavuses tegelikult mõõdetud temperatuuridega.
3. Kasutatavad kaabelvahelikud (kaabelsisestused) peavad vastama nõutud IP-
kaitseastmele ja osas 7.2 toodud nõuetele (vastavalt standardile EN 50021).
4. Kõik seadmed, kaasa arvatud lülitid, jt., mis SIMATIC-süsteemide sisendite ja
väljundite külge ühendatakse, peavad võimaldama plahvatuskaitse
tüüpi EEx nA või EEx nC.
5. Peab rakendama abinõusid, et nimipinget üleminekute tõttu ei saaks ületatada
üle 40 %.
6. Ümbritseva keskkona temperatuurivahemik: 0° C kuni 60° C
7. Korpuse sisse tuleb sellisesse kohta, mis pärast avamist on hästi nähtav, panna
silt järgmise hoiatusega:
! Ettevaatust
Korpust tohib avada ainult lühikeseks ajals, näiteks visuaalse diagnostika jaoks.
Seejuures ärge kasutage ühtegi lülitit ega võtke välja ega pange sisse ühtegi
sõlme ega lahutage ühtegi elektrijuhet (pistikühendused).
Seda hoiatust võib mitte arvesse võtta, kui on teada, et ei esine mingit
plahvatusohtlikku keskkonda.
Lubatud sõlmede/moodulite loetelu

Lubatud sõlmede/modulite loetelu leiate Te internetist:
lisas-ID 13702947.

A5E00352937-02
Latviski
Ierīču/moduļu pielietojums sprādzienbīstamas

teritorijas zonā 2
Zona 2
Sprādzienbīstamās teritorijas ir sadalītas zonās. Šīs zonas atšķir pēc
sprādzienbīstamas atmosfēras pastāvēšanas iespējamības.
Zona Sprādzienbīstamība Piemērs
2 eksplozīva gāzes atmosfēra Teritorijas ap atloku savienojumiem ar
izveidojas reti un uz īsu laiku plakaniem blīvējumiem uz cauruļvadiem
slēgtās telpās
droša nē • Ārpus zonas 2
teritorija • Decentralizētas perifērijas ierīces
standartlietojumi
Turpmāk atrodamas svarīgas norādes par ierīču/moduļu uzstādīšanu

sprādzienbīstamajā zonā.
Turpmāka informācija
Turpmāka informācija par ierīcēm/moduļiem ir atrodama attiecīgajā rokasgrāmatā.
Izgatavošanas vieta / Atļauja
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 saskaņā ar EN 50021 : 1999

Pārbaudes numurs: skatīt tabulu
Izgatavošanas vieta Ierīces/moduļi Pārbaudes

numurs
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg
S7-300 KEMA 02
Germany
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Kopnes savienotājs DP/PA
Diagnostikas atkārtotājs
S7-300 Pret kļūdām aizsargātas
ierīces
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
Latviski
Norāde
Ierīces/moduļi ar atļauju II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 var tikt pielietotas tikai
3.kategorijas SIMATIC sistēmās.
Tehniskā apkope
Attiecīgu ierīču/moduļu remontam tie ir jānosūta ražotājam. Remontu drīkst veikt
tikai tur.
Īpaši apstākļi
1. Ierīces/moduļi jāiebūvē sadales skapī vai metāla korpusā. Tiem jānodrošina
aizsardzības līmenis ne mazāks kā IP 54 (saskaņā ar EN 60529). Turklāt,
ierīces uzstādīšanā jāievēro apkārtējas vides apstākļi. Korpusam ir
nepieciešams izgatavotāja apliecinājums zonai 2 (saskaņā ar EN 50021).
2. Ja uz kabeļa vai šī korpusa kabeļu ievades ekspluatācijas apstākļos tiek
sasniegta temperatūra > 70 °C vai ja ekspluatācijas apstākļos uz kabeļa
atzariem var būt temperatūra > 80 °C, kabeļu temperatūras īpašībām jāatbilst
faktiski nomērītām temperatūrām.
3. Pielietojamām kabeļu ievadēm jāatbilst nepieciešamajam aizsardzības veidam
IP un sadaļai 7.2 (saskaņā ar EN 50021).
4. Visām ierīcēm, ieskaitot pārslēgus utt., kas tiek pieslēgti pie SIMATIC sistēmu
ievadēm un izvadēm, jābūt atļaujām EEx nA vai EEx nC tipa
sprādzienaizsardzībai.
5. Nepieciešams veikt pasākumus, lai pārejas spriegums nepārsniegtu nominālo
spriegumu vairāk kā par 40 %.
6. Apkārtējas temperatūras diapazons: 0° C līdz 60° C
7. Korpusa iekšpusē, vietā, kas ir labi redzama, atverot to, ir jāizvieto plāksne ar
sekojošo brīdinājumu:
! Brīdinājums
Korpusu var atvērt tikai īslaicīgi, piemēram, vizuālai diagnostikai. Pie tam
nenospiediet nekādus slēdžus, neievietojiet un neizņemiet nekādas ierīces un
nepārtrauciet elektriskās līnijas (spraudsavienojumus).
Šis brīdinājums var tikt neņemts vērā, ja ir zināms, ka nepastāv sprādzienbīstama
atmosfēra.
Pieļaujamo ierīču/moduļu saraksts

Pieļaujamo ierīču/moduļu saraksts ir atrodams Internetā:
zem datu ID 13702947.

A5E00352937-02
Lietuviška
Konstrukcinių grupių/modulių panaudojimas

sprogioje 2 zonos aplinkoje
Zona 2
Sprogi aplinka yra apibūdinama keliomis zonomis. Zonos skirstomos pagal galimos
sprogios terpės atsiradimo tikimybę.
Zona Sprogimo pavojus Pavyzdys
2 sprogi atmosfera būna retai ir Uždarų patalpų vamzdynuose - flanšo su
trumpai tarpikliais sujungimų vietose
saugioji nėra • ne zonoje 2
sritis • Standartinė periferinė sistema
Toliau pateikiamas informacija apie konstrukcinių grupių ir modulių montavimą

sprogioje aplinkoje.
Papildoma informacija
Papildomos informacijos apie konstrukcines grupes/modulius rasite eksploatacijos
vadove.
Pagaminimo vieta / Saugos reikalavimai
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 pagal EN 50021 : 1999

Patikros numeris: žiūr. lentelėje
Pagaminimo vieta Konstrukcinės grupės/moduliai Patikros

numeris
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S nuo trukdžių apsaugotos ATEX 1238X
92224 Ambergas konstrukcinės grupės
Vokietija
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Magistralinė jungtis DP/PA
Diagnozės retransliatorius
S7-300 nuo trukdžių apsaugotos
konstrukcinės grupės
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Vokietija
ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
Lietuviška
Nuoroda
Konstrukcines grupes/modulius, kurių leidimas eksploatuoti yra II 3 G
EEx nA II T3 .. T6 galima naudoti tik 3 kategorijos sistemose "SIMATIC".
Priežiūra
Esant gedimams, konstrukcinę grupę/modulį išsiųskite gamintojui. Tik jis gali
kvalifikuotai suremontuoti įtaisą.
Specialiosios sąlygos
1. Konstrukcines grupes/modulius montuokite jungimo spintoje arba metaliniame
korpuse. Korpuso ar jungimo spintos saugos klasė turi būti mažiausiai "IP 54"
(pagal EN 60529). Būtina atsižvelgti į kitas aplinkos sąlygas. Norint korpusą
eksploatuoti zonoje 2, būtinas gamintojo pažymėjimas (pagal EN 50021).
2. Jei korpuso kabelio arba kabelio prijungimo temperatūra pakyla daugiau nei
70 °C arba laidų atšakoje temperatūra padidėja daugiau nei 80 °C, reikia
naudoti kabelius, kurių terminės savybės atitinka išmatuotas temperatūros
vertes.
3. Kabelių sujungimai turi būti saugos klasės IP ir atitikti 7.2 skyriaus (pagal
EN 50021) reikalavimus.
4. Visi prietaisai, įskaitant ir jungiklius, jungiami sistemų "SIMATIC" įeigose ir
išeigose, turi būti tipo "EEx nA" arba "EEx nC" - apsaugoti nuo sprogimo.
5. Būtina imtis priemonių, kad pereinamųjų grandžių vardinė įtampa neviršytų
40 %.
6. Leistina aplinkos temperatūra: 0° C iki 60° C
7. Atidarę korpusą, jo viduje gerai matomoje vietoje, įtaisykite lentelę su įspėjimu:
Įspėjimas
! Korpusą` atidaryti tik trumpam laikui, pvz., patikrai. Neliesti jungiklių,
konstrukcinių grupių neištraukti ir nekišti, neatjungti elektrinių sujungimų
(kištukinių sujungimų).
Šio įspėjimo galima nepaisyti, kai yra žinoma, jog darbinė aplinka yra nesprogi.
Leistinų konstrukcinių grupių/modulių sąrašas

Leistinų konstrukcinių grupių/modulių sąrašą rasite interneto puslapyje:
įvedę kodą 13702947.

A5E00352937-02
Magya
A főegységek/modulok alkalmazása a 2. zóna

robbanásveszélyes környezetben
2. zóna
A robbanásveszélyes környezeteket zónákba sorolják be. A robbanásveszélyes
légkör előfordulásának valószínűsége alapján különböztetik meg a zónákat.
Zóna Robbanásveszély Példa
2 robbanásveszélyes gázat zárt helységekben elhelyezett
tartalmazó légkör csak ritkán és csővezetékeknél a lapos tömítéssel
rövid ideig lép fel rendelkező karimás kötések
környezetében
biztonságos nem • a 2. zónán kívül
környezet • a decentrális periféria készülékek
standard alkalmazásai
A következőkben fontos utasításokat talál a főegységek/modulok telepítéséhez a

robbanásveszélyes környezetbe.
További információk
A további információkat a főegységekhez/modulokhoz megtalálja a hozzátartozó
kézikönyvben.
Gyártási hely / Engedélyezés
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 az EN 50021 : 1999 szerint

Ellenőrző szám: lásd a táblázatot
Gyártási hely Főegységek/modulok Ellenőrző szám

Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S hibabiztos főegységek ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg
S7-300 KEMA 02
Germany
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
DP/PA buszcsatoló
Diagnózisrepeater
S7-300 hibabiztos főegységek
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
Magya
Utasítás
Az II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 engedélyezéssel rendelkező
főegységeket/modulokat alkalmazhatja csak a 3. felszerelés-kategóriába tartozó
SIMATIC rendszerekbe.
Karbantartás
Javítás esetén küldje az érintett főegységeket/modulokat a gyártási helyre. Csak itt
hajthatják végre a javítást.
Különleges feltételek
1. A főegységeket/modulokat egy kapcsolószekrénybe vagy egy fém házba kell
beszerelni. Ezeknek kell biztosítaniuk legalább az IP 54 védettségi fokozatot
(EN 60529 szerint). Itt figyelembe kell venni azokat a környezeti feltételeket,
amelyek fellépnek a készülék telepítésekor. A házhoz meg kell legyen a gyártói
nyilatkozat a 2. zónához (az EN 50021 szerint).
2. Ha a jelen ház kábelén ill. kábelvezetésen üzemi feltételek mellett a
hőmérséklet > 70 °C, vagy ha az üzemi feltételek mellett a hőmérséklet > 80 °C
az érelágazásokon, akkor meg kell egyezzenek a kábel hőmérsékleti
tulajdonságai a ténylegesen mért hőmérsékletekkel.
3. Az alkalmazott kábelvezetések meg kell feleljenek a követelt IP védettségi
fokozatnak és a 7.2. bekezdésnek (EN 50021 szerint).
4. Minden készülék, kapcsolót stb. beleértve, amelyeket a SIMATIC rendszerek
be- és kimeneteire csatlakoztattak, engedélyezve kell legyen az EEx nA vagy
EEx nC típusú robbanásvédelemhez.
5. Intézkedéseket kell hozni, hogy a tranziensek ne lépjék túl a névleges
feszültséget több mint 40 %-al.
6. Környezeti hőmérséklet tartomány: 0° C ... 60° C
7. A házon belül -a nyitáskor jól látható helyen- helyezzen el egy táblát a
következő figyelmeztetéssel:
Figyelmeztetés
! A házat csak rövid ideig szabad nyitani, pl. optikai diagnózishoz. Eközben ne
működtessen egy kapcsolót sem, ne húzzon ki vagy dugjon be egy főegységet
sem és ne válasszon le villamos vezetékeket (dugós csatlakozók).
Ez a figyelmeztetés mellőzhető, ha tudott, hogy nem áll fenn robbanásveszélyes
légkör.
A megengedett főegységek/modulok listája

A megengedett főegységek/modulok listáját megtalálja az interneten:
a 13702947 cikk azonosító szám alatt.

A5E00352937-02
Malti
Tqegħid tal-Komponenti / Modules fiż-Żona 2, fejn

hemm Riskju ta' Splużjoni
Żona 2
Sezzjonijiet fejn hemm riskju ta' splużjoni jitqassmu f'żoni. Tagħmel distinzjoni bejn
żona u oħra skond il-probabbiltà li jkun hemm ambjent li jista' jwassal għal
splużjoni.
Żona Periklu ta' Splużjoni Eżempju
2 ambjent gassuż li jista' jisplodi Żoni madwar flanġ ġojnts b'gaskits ċatti
jfeġġ rarament u għal żmien f'kanni ġewwa spazji magħluqin
qasir
żona ż- le • barra miż-żona 2
żgura • użu normali ta' devices periferali
deċentralizzati
Issib hawn taħt indikazzjonijiet importanti għall-installazzjoni ta' komponenti /

modules fiż-żona fejn hemm riskju ta' splużjoni.
Aktar Tagħrif
Aktar tagħrif fuq il-komponenti / modules jinstab fil-manwal ikkonċernat.
Post ta' Manifattura / Approvazzjoni
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 skond EN 50021 : 1999

Numru taċ-Ċertifikat: ara t-tabella
Post ta' Manifattura Komponenti / Modules Numru taċ-

Ċertifikat
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S modules ma jistgħux ifallu ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg
S7-300 KEMA 02
Germany
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
bus coupling DP/PA
Ripetitur ta' dijanjosi
S7-300 modules ma jistgħux ifallu
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
TS Adapter ATEX 1228X
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X
Nota
Komponenti / modules bl-approvazzjoni II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 jistgħu
jintużaw biss ġewwa sistemi SIMATIC tal-kategorija 3.
A5E00352937-02
Malti
Manutenzjoni
Fil-każ li jkun hemm bżonn ta' tiswija, il-komponenti / modules ikkonċernati
għandhom jintbagħtu fil-post ta' manifattura. It-tiswijiet jistgħu jsiru biss f'dan il-post.
Kundizzjonijiet Speċjali
1. Komponenti / modules għandhom jiġu mmontati ġewwa swiċċ kabinett jew
kaxxa tal-metall. Dawn iridu jiggarantixxu protezzjoni mill-inqas tat-tip IP 54
(skond EN 60529). Inti u tagħmel hekk, trid taħseb għall-kundizzjonijiet
ambjentali ta' waqt l-installazzjoni tad-device. Irid ikun hemm dikjarazzjoni tal-
manifatturier għall-kaxxa għaż-żona 2 (skond EN 50021).
2. Jekk fil-kejbil, jew fil-kaxxa mad-daħla għall-kejbil, tintlaħaq temperatura ta'
aktar minn 70 °C taħt kundizzjonijiet ta' ħidma, jew jekk fil-post fejn jinfirdu l-
wajers jista' jkun li hemm temperatura ta' aktar minn 80 °C, il-kejbil irid ikollu
proprjetajiet ta' temperatura xierqa għat-temperaturi tabilħaqq imkejlin.
3. Id-daħliet għall-kejbil li jintużaw iridu jikkonformaw mat-tip ta' protezzjoni IP
mitlub u t-taqsima 7.2 (skond EN 50021).
4. Id-devices kollha, swiċċijiet etc. inklużi, li jitqabbdu ma' l-inputs u l-outputs ta'
sistemi SIMATIC, iridu jkunu approvati għal protezzjoni kontra splużjoni tat-tip
EEx nA jew EEx nC.
5. Iridu jittieħdu miżuri biex il-vultaġġ nominali ma jitqabbiżx b'aktar minn 40%
minħabba transitorji.
6. Varjazzjoni tat-temperatura ambjentali: 0° C sa 60° C
7. Għandha titqiegħed tabella bit-twissija li ġejja ġewwa l-kaxxa, f'post li jidher sew
wara li tinfetaħ il-kaxxa:
Twissija
! Il-kaxxa tista' tinfetaħ biss għal żmien qasir, per eżempju għal dijanjosi viżwali. Inti
u tagħmel hekk, ma tista' tmiss l-ebda swiċċ, ddaħħal jew tneħħi l-ebda module u
tneħħi l-ebda kejbil elettriku (konnessjonijiet li tipplaggjahom).
Tista' ma tagħtix każ ta' din it-twissija meta taf li m'hemmx riskju ta' splużjoni fl-
ambjent.
Lista ta' Komponenti / Modules Approvati

Issib il-lista ta' komponenti / modules approvati fl-internet:
bin-numru ta' identifikazzjoni 13702947.

A5E00352937-02
Polski
Zastosowanie grup konstrukcyjnych / modułów w 2

strefie zagrożenia wybuchem
Strefa 2
Otoczenie zagrożone wybuchem dzielone jest na strefy. Strefy dzielą się ze
względu na stopień prawdopodobieństwa powstania atmosfery stwarzającej
możliwość powstania wybuchu.
Strefa Niebezpieczeństwo eksplozji Przykład
2 atmosfera gazowa z miejsca wokół łącz w kanałach
zagrożeniem wybuchem technicznych z opaskami przy
występuje rzadko i na krótki przewodach instalacyjnych w
okres czasu pomieszczeniach zamkniętych
obszar nie • poza 2 strefą
bezpieczny • standardowe zastosowanie
decentralnych urządzeń peryferyjnych
Dalej znajdą Państwo informacje dotyczące instalacji grup konstrukcyjnych /

modułów w otoczeniu zagrożonym wybuchem.
Pozostałe informacje
Dalsze informacje dotyczące grup konstrukcyjnych / modułów znajdą państwo w
odpowiedniej instrukcji.
Miejsce produkcji / Rejestracja
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 stosownie do EN 50021 : 1999

Nr testu: zobacz tabela
Miejsce produkcji Grupy konstrukcyjne / moduły Nr testu

Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S grupy konstrukcyjne ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg odporne na uszkodzenia
Niemcy
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Zbierające łącze sprzężające
DP/PA
powtarzacz diagnozy
S7-300 grupy konstrukcyjne
odporne na uszkodzenia
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Niemcy
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
Polski
Uwaga
Grupy konstrukcyjne / moduły zarejestrowane jako II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6
wolno stosować jedynie w systemach SIMATIC o 3 kategorii urządzenia.
Konserwacja
W celu naprawy należy odpowiednie grupy konstrukcyjne / moduły przesłać do
miejsca produkcji. Jedynie serwis producenta jest upoważniony do dokonywania
napraw.
Warunki szczególne
1. Grupy konstrukcyjne / moduły muszą zostać zamontowane do skrzynki
ochronnej lub metalowej puszki ochronnej. Muszą one spełniać wymagania co
najmniej stopnia IP 54 (stosownie do EN 60529). Należy brać pod uwagę
warunki otoczenia, w którym urządzenie będzie instalowane. Należy posiadać
oświadczenie producenta dopuszczające puszkę do użytku w strefie 2
(stosownie do EN 50021).
2. W przypadku, gdyby na przewodzie tej puszki podczas pracy temperatura
mogła przekroczyć > 70 °C, lub żyła przewodu mogłaby osiągnąć temperaturę
> 80 °C, właściwości cieplne przewodu muszą zostać dobrane do takich
wartości.
3. Wszystkie stosowane przewody muszą odpowiadać właściwemu stopniowi
ochrony IP oraz warunkom określonym w punkcie 7.2 (stosownie do EN
50021).
4. Wszystkie urządzenia włączając w to przełączniki itp., które podłączane są do
wejść lub wyjść systemów SIMATIC muszą być dopuszczone do ochrony
przeciw wybuchom typu EEx nA lub EEx nC.
5. Muszą zostać spełnione takie warunki, aby napięcie miana w przejściach nie
mogło przekroczyć więcej niż 40 %.
6. Temperatura otoczenia: od 0° C do 60° C
7. W puszce w dobrze widocznym po otwarciu miejscu należy umieścić
ostrzeżenie następującej treści:
Uwaga
! Puszkę wolno otworzyć jedynie na krótki okres czasu na przykład w celu kontroli
optycznej. Nie wolno przy tym naciskać na żaden z przełączników, nie wolno
wyciągać ani montować żadnej grupy konstrukcyjnej ani też odłączać żadnych
przewodów elektrycznych (łącza wsuwkowe).
Powyższego ostrzeżenia nie trzeba przestrzegać jeśli wiadomo jest, iż na miejscu
nie ma zagrożenia wybuchem.
Lista dopuszczonych grup konstrukcyjnych / modułów

Wykaz dopuszczonych grup konstrukcyjnych / modułów znajduje się na stronie
internetowej:
w części ID 13702947.

A5E00352937-02
Slovensky
Použitie konštrukčných skupín / modulov v prostredí s

nebezpečenstvom výbuchu zóny 2
Zóna 2
Prostredia s nebezpečenstvom výbuchu sa rozdeľujú do zón. Zóny sa rozlišujú
podľa pravdepodobnosti prítomnosti atmosféry so schopnosťou výbuchu.
Zóna Nebezpečenstvo explózie Príklad
2 plynová atmosféra s priestory okolo prírubových spojov s
nebezpečenstvom výbuchu sa plochými tesneniami pri potrubných
vyskytuje len zriedka a vedeniach v uzavretých priestoroch
krátkodobo
bezpečná nie • mino zóny 2
oblasť • štandardné použitia decentrálnej
periférie
Ďalej nájdete dôležité pokyny pre inštaláciu konštrukčných skupín / modulov v

prostredí s nebezpečenstvom výbuchu.
Ďalšie informácie
Ďalšie informácie ku konštrukčným skupinám / modulom nájdete v príslušnej
príručke.
Miesto vyhotovenia / Osvedčenie
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 podľa EN 50021 : 1999

Číslo skúšky : pozri tabuľka
Miesto vyhotovenia Konštrukčné skupiny / moduly Číslo skúšky
Siemens AG, divízia A&D ET 200S KEMA 01
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S konštrukčné skupiny ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg odolné voči poruchám
Nemecko
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Zbernicový väzbový člen DP/PA
opakovač diagnózy
S7-300 konštrukčné skupiny
odolné voči poruchám
Siemens AG, divízia A&D S7-400 KEMA 03
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Nemecko
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
Slovensky
Upozornenie
Konštrukčné skupiny / moduly s osvedčením II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 sa smú
používať len v systémoch SIMATIC kategórie zariadenia 3.
Údržba
Za účelom opravy sa musia príslušné konštrukčné skupiny / moduly zaslať na
miesto vyhotovenia. Oprava sa smie vykonávať len na tomto mieste !
Špeciálne podmienky
1. Konštrukčné skupiny / moduly sa musia vmontovať do spínacej skrine alebo do
kovového puzdra schránky. Tie musia zabezpečovať druh ochrany minimálne
IP 54 (podľa EN 60529). Pritom je potrebné zohľadniť podmienky prostredia, do
ktorého sa bude zariadenie inštalovať. V prípade puzdra musí existovať
vyhlásenie výrobcu pre zónu 2 (podľa EN 50021).
2. V prípade, že na kábli, prípadne na káblovom prívode tohto puzdra presiahne
teplota pri prevádzkových podmienkach hodnotu > 70 °C, alebo ak na vetve žily
môže byť pri prevádzkových podmienkach teplota > 80 °C, musia tepelné
vlastnosti kábla vyhovovať skutočne nameraným hodnotám.
3. Všetky použité káblové prívody musia zodpovedať požadovanému druhu
ochrany IP a odseku 7.2 (podľa EN 50021).
4. Všetky zariadenia, vrátane prepínača, atď., ktoré sa pripoja na vstupy a výstupy
systémov SIMATIC, musia byť schválené pre ochranu voči výbuchu
typu EEx nA alebo EEx nC.
5. Musia sa splniť také opatrenia, aby sa menovité napätie cez prechody nemohlo
prekročiť o viac ako 40 %.
6. Rozsah okolitých teplôt: 0° C až 60° C
7. V puzdre je na dobre viditeľné miesto po otvorení potrebné umiestniť štítok s
nasledovnou výstrahou:
Výstraha
! Puzdro sa môže otvoriť len počas krátkej doby, napríklad pre vizuálnu diagnózu.
Nestlačte pritom žiadny prepínač, nevytiahnite alebo nezasuňte žiadnu
konštrukčnú skupinu a neoddeľte žiadne elektrické vedenia (zástrčkové
spojenia).
Túto výstrahu si nemusíte všímať v takom prípade, ak je známe, že sa na mieste
nevyskytuje atmosféra s nebezpečenstvom výbuchu.
Zoznam dovolených konštrukčných skupín / modulov

Zoznam dovolených konštrukčných skupín / modulov sa nachádza na internete :
v článku ID 13702947.

A5E00352937-02
Slovensko
Uporaba sklopov/modulov v eksplozivno ogroženem

območju cone 2
Cona 2
Eksplozivno ogrožena območja se delijo na cone. Cone se ločijo po verjetnosti
prisotnosti eksplozivne atmosfere.
Cona Nevarnost eksplozije Primer
2 eksplozivna zmes plinov v Območja okoli prirobnih spojev z ploskimi
atmosferi je redka in traja le tesnili pri cevnih napeljavah v zaprtih
kratko. prostorih.
sigurno ne • izven cone 2
območje • Standardna uporaba decentralne
periferije.
Sledijo pomembni napotki o inštalaciji sklopov/modulov v eksplozivno ogroženem

območju.
Nadaljnje informacije
Nadaljnje informacije o sklopih/modulih najdete v priloženem priročniku.
Mesto izdelave / Dovoljenje - Atest
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 po EN 50021 : 1999

kontrolna številka: glej tabelo
Mesto izdelave Sklopi/moduli kontrolna

številka:
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S Sklopi varovani proti ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg okvari
Germany
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
bus vezava DP/PA
Diagnozni repeater
S7-300 Sklopi varovani proti okvari
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X
Opozorilo
Sklopi/moduli z dovoljenjem II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 se lahko uporabijo samo
v SIMATIC-Sistemih kategorije 3 .
A5E00352937-02
Slovensko
Vzdrževanje
V primeru popravila pošljete sklope/module na kraj izdelave. Popravila lahko
izvajajo samo na tem naslovu!
Posebni pogoji
1. Sklopi/moduli se morajo vgraditi v elektro omaro ali metalno ohišje.
Omara/ohišje mora zadostiti varovanju IP 54 (po EN 60529). Pri tem je
potrebno upoštevati tudi pogoje okolice, v kateri se naprava nahaja. Ohišje
mora imeti izjavo (atest) proizvajalca za uporabo v coni 2 (po EN 50021).
2. Če na kablu oz. uvodnici tega ohišja v režimu obratovanja temperatura doseže
vrednost > 70 °C ali če doseže na razcepih vodnikov v obratovanju temperatura
vrednost > 80 °C, se morajo temperaturne lastnosti kablov skladati z dejansko
namerjenimi.
3. Uporabljene uvodnice morajo ustrezati predpisani IP zaščiti in poglavju 7.2 (po
EN 50021).
4. Vse naprave, vključno s stikali itd., ki so priklopljene na vhodih oz. izhodih
sistemov SIMATIC, morajo biti odobrene za zaščito proti eksplozijam tipa
EEx nA ali EEx nC.
5. Zagotoviti se mora, da nazivna napetost ne prekorači več kot 40% pri
tranzienci (preklopih, vklopih,...).
6. Temperaturno območje okolice: 0° C do 60° C
7. V notranjosti ohišja, na odprtem dobro vidljivem mestu, se pritrdi napis z
naslednjim opozorilom:
Opozorilo
! Ohišje se lahko odpre samo za kratek čas, npr. za vizualno diagnozo. Pri tem ne
vklapljajte/izklaplajte stikal, sklopov ali električnih vodnikov (vtičnih spojev).
Opozorilo ne velja, kadar je znano, da ni eksplozivne atmosfere.
Seznam dovoljenih sklopov/modulov

Seznam dovoljenih sklopov/modulov najdete na internetu na spletni strani:
pod ID prispevka 13702947.

A5E00352937-02
Türkçe
Patlama tehlikesi olan Alan 2 bölgesinde ünite

gruplarının/modüllerin kullanılması
Alan 2
Patlama tehlikesi olan bölgeler alanlara ayrılır. Alanlar, patlayabilecek atmosfere
sahip ortam ihtimaline göre farklı derecelere ayrılır.
Alan Patlama tehlikesi Örnek
2 Patlayıcı gaz atmosferi sadece Kapalı alanlardaki boru bağlantılarında
nadir ve kısa bir süre için söz yassı contalı flanş bağlantıları civarındaki
konusu bölgeler
Güvenli hayır • Alan 2 haricinde
bölge • Merkezi olmayan periferi standart
uygulamaları
Aşağıda, ünite gruplarının/modüllerin patlama tehlikesi olan bölgelerde kurulması

için önemli bilgiler bulacaksınız.
Daha başka bilgiler

Ünite grupları/modüller hakkında daha fazla bilgi için ilgili kılavuza bakınız.
İmalat yeri / Lisans
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 EN 50021 standartına göre: 1999

Test numarası: bkz. Tablo
İmalat yeri Ünite grupları/Modüller Kontrol

numarası
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S Hataya karşı emniyetli ATEX 1238X
92224 Amberg ünite grupları
Germany
S7-300 KEMA 02
ET 200M ATEX 1096X
Bus kuplajı DP/PA
Diyagnoz repeater ünitesi
S7-300 Hataya karşı emniyetli
ünite grupları
76187 Karlsruhe
S7-300 CP KEMA 03
Germany
SIMATIC NET KEMA 03
ATEX 1226X

A5E00352937-02
Türkçe
Bilgi
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 lisanslı ünite grupları/modüller sadece 3 numaralı
cihaz kategorisine ait SIMATIC sistemlerine kullanılabilir.
Bakım ve koruma
Bir onarım gerekli olması halinde, ilgili ünite grupları/modüller imalat yerine
gönderilmelidir. Onarım sadece orada yapılabilir ve yapılmalıdır.
Özel koşullar
1. Ünite grupları/modüller bir şalter dolabı içine veya metal kasa içine monte
edilmelidir. Bu kasalar en az IP 54 (EN 60529 standartına göre) koruma türüne
ait olmalıdır. Burada, cihazın kurulduğu çevre koşulları dikkate alınmalıdır.
Kullanılacak kasa için, alan 2 için geçerli bir üretici beyanı mevcut olmalıdır
(EN 50021 standartına istinaden).
2. Kabloda ya da bu kasanın kablo girişindeki işletme koşullarında sıcaklık > 70 °C
oluyorsa veya işletme koşullarında kablo telleri (damarları) ayrılma noktasında
sıcaklık > 80 °C olma ihtimali varsa, kablonun sıcaklık ile ilgili özellikleri,
gerçekten ölçülmüş sıcaklıklara uygun olmalıdır.
3. Kullanılmış olan kablo girişleri, talep edilen IP koruma türüne ve bölüm 7.2
(EN 50021 standartına göre) dahilindeki taleplere uygun olmalıdır.
4. SIMATIC sistemlerinin giriş ve çıkışlarına bağlanan tüm cihazlar (şalterler vs.
dahil) için, EEx nA veya EEx nC patlamaya karşı koruma tipine istinaden izin
alınmış olmalıdır.
5. Nominal gerilimin transiyentlerden (hatlardaki dalgalanmalardan dolayı ani
gerilim ve akım değişiklikleri) dolayı azami %40 aşılması için gerekli önlemler
alınmalıdır.
6. Çevre sıcaklığı aralığı: 0° C ile 60° C arasında
7. Kasa dahilinde, açıldıktan sonra iyi görülebilen bir yere aşağıdaki uyarı
takılmalıdır:
! İkaz
Kasa sadece kısa bir süre açılmalıdır, örn. görsel diyagnoz için. Herhangi bir
şaltere basmayınız, herhangi bir ünite grubunu çekip çıkarmayınız veya
takmayınız, elektrik hatlarını (soket bağlantıları) ayırmayınız.
Eğer patlama tehlikesi söz konusu olan bir atmosfer olmadığı biliniyorsa, işbu
ikaz göz ardı edilebilir.
İzin verilmiş olan ünite gruplarının/modüllerin listesi

İzin verilmiş olan ünite gruplarının/modüllerin listesi için internete bakınız:
Doküman ID 13702947.

A5E00352937-02
Product Information
SIMATIC S7-300
X2
Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD Release 3 4
New analog input module available

The S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD has been added to the
S7-300 family. The order number for this module is 6ES7 331-7PF01-0AB0.
specifications of analog input module SM 331; AI 8 RTD. Refer to the S7-300
Installation and Hardware Manual for more information about the S7-300 product
family.
S How to start up analog input module SM 331; AI 8 RTD
S The measuring ranges available for analog input module
SM 331; AI 8 RTD
S How to configure analog input module SM 331; AI 8 RTD
Additional assistance
Copyright 2004 by Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

A5E00400156-01
Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD (6ES7 331-7PF01-0AB0)
Order no.
6ES7 331-7PF01-0AB0
Characteristic features
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 RTD has the following characteristic
features:
S 8 differential inputs for RTD resistance temperature detector in 4 channel
groups
S Optional setting of the resistance thermometer type per channel group
S Rapid measured value updating for up to 4 channels
S Measured-value resolution 15 bits + sign (independent of integration time)
S 8 channels with limit monitoring
S Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded
S Programmable end-of-scan-cycle interrupt
S Isolated against the backplane bus interface
S Fully compatible with predecessor module SM 331-7PF00
S Includes Russian GOST RTD characteristics
Special feature
When operated in an ET200M distributed I/O configuration, the analog input
module SM 331; AI 8 RTD can only be used in the ET200M distributed I/O
configuration with the following versions of the IM153 (or later)
S IM153-1 6ES7 153-1AA03-0XB0 V.1
S IM153-2 6ES7 153-2AA02-0XB0 V.5
6ES7 153-2AB01-0XB0 V.4
Product Information S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

2 A5E00400156-01
Terminal connection diagram
Figure 1 shows the terminal connection diagram and the 4-wire wiring diagram for
the SM331; AI 8 RTD Module.
The detailed technical specifications for this analog input module are on the
following page.
1 L M 21 L+
2 22
M0+ M4+
3 ADC ADC 23
M0– DC M4–
4 to 24
CH0 CH4
Ic0+ DC Ic4+
5 25
Ic0– Ic4–
6 26
M1+ 7 27 M5+
M1– M5–
8 28
CH1 Ic5+ CH5
Ic1+ 9 29
Ic1– DAC DAC
10 Ic5–
30
M2+ M6+
11 31
M2– ADC ADC M6–
12 32
CH2 CH6
Ic2+ Logic Ic6+
13 and 33
Ic2– back Ic6–
14 34
plane
M3+ bus M7+
15 interface 35
M3– 16 36 M7–
CH3 CH7
Ic3+ Ic7+
17 37
Ic3– Ic7–
18 DAC DAC 38
19 39
20 40 M
Figure 1 Connection Diagram of Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD

A5E00400156-01 3
Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

(in millimeters)
Data for Specific Module resolution (per channel)
Supports clocked No S Programmable Yes
operation S Basic conversion time in 80
Number of inputs 8 ms
Length of cable S Additional conversion time 100*

for measuring 3L
S Shielded max. 200 m resistance, in ms
S Additional conversion time 0
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC for open-circuit monitoring,
electronics L+ in ms
S Reverse polarity protection Yes S Resolution including sign 16 bits
Constant measured current for max. 5 mA S Noise suppression 400 / 60 / 50

resistance-type sensor for interference frequency
f1 in Hz
Isolation
S Between channels and Yes
backplane bus
Conversion time (per channel) 100 ms
S Between channels and Yes
power supply of the Basic response time of module 200 ms
electronics (all channels enabled)
S Between the channels Yes Module filtering mode 8 channels, software
In groups of 2
Permitted potential difference resolution (per channel)
S Between the inputs (UCM ) 75 VDC / 60 VAC

S Programmable Yes
S Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC

S Basic conversion time in 8 / 25 / 30
ms
Minternal (UISO)

S Additional conversion time 25 / 43 / 48*
for measuring 3L
Current consumption resistance, in ms
S From the backplane bus max. 100 mA S Additional conversion time 0
S From the power supply L+ max. 240 mA for open-circuit monitoring,
in ms
S Resolution including sign 16 bits
S Noise suppression 400 / 60 / 50

for interference frequency
f1 in Hz

Conversion time (per channel) 25 / 43 / 48 ms
Basic response time of module 50 / 86 / 96 ms


4 A5E00400156-01
Module filtering mode 4 channels, hardware Basic error (operational limit at 25°C, referred to input
range)
resolution (per channel) S Resistance thermometer
S Programmable Yes Pt 50, Pt 100, Pt 200, "0.5 °C
Pt 500, Pt 1000, Ni 100,
S Basic conversion time in 3.3
ms Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500, Ni
1000, Cu 50, Cu 100,
S Additional conversion time 100*
Pt 10, Cu 10
for measuring 3L "1.0 °C
resistance, in ms S Resistors "0.05 %
S Additional conversion time 100** Temperature error (with
for open-circuit monitoring, reference to the input range)
in ms
S Resistance thermometer "0.015 °C/K
S Resolution including sign 16 bits S Resistors "0.005 %/K
S Noise suppres 400 / 60 / 50
Linearity error (with reference to
sion for interference
the input range)
frequency f1 in Hz
S Resistance thermometer "0.2 °C
S Resistors "0.02 %
Basic response time of module 10 ms Repeat accuracy (in the steady

(all channels enabled) state at 25 °C, referred to the
input range)
Suppression of interference, Limits of Error S Resistance thermometer "0.2 °C
Noise suppression for f = n (f1 1%), S Resistors "0.01 %
”(f1 = interference frequency) n = 1.2, etc.
S Common-mode > 100 dB
interference Interrupts
(UCM < 60 VAC) S Hardware interrupt Programmable
(channels 0 – 7)
S Series-mode interference > 90 dB
(peak value of interference S Diagnostic interrupt Programmable
range) Diagnostic functions Programmable
Crosstalk between the inputs > 100 dB S Group error display Red LED (SF)
Operational limit (over entire temperature range, referred S Diagnostic information can Possible
to 0 to 60 _C input range) be displayed
S Resistance thermometer
Pt 50, Pt 100, Pt 200, "1.0 °C
Pt 500, Pt 1000, Ni 100,
Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500, Ni
1000, Cu 50, Cu 100,
Pt 10, Cu 10 "2.0 °C
S Resistors "0.1 %

A5E00400156-01 5
Input range (rated values) input
resistance
S Resistance thermometer Pt 10, Pt 50, Pt 100,
Pt 200, Pt 500,
Pt 1000, Ni 100,
Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500,
Ni 1000, Cu 10, Cu 50,
Cu 100,
S Resistors 150, 300, 600 W
Maximum input voltage for 35 VDC continuous;
voltage input (destruction limit) 75 VDC for max. 1 s
(duty factor 1:20)
S For measuring resistance

connection
With three-conductor Possible***
connection
With four-conductor Possible

connection
Characteristic linearization
S Resistance thermometer Pt 10, Pt 50, Pt 100,
Pt 200, Pt 500,
Pt 1000, Ni 100,
Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500,
Ni 1000, Cu 10, Cu 50,
Cu 100 (standard and
climatic range)
S Technical unit for Degrees Celsius;
temperature measurement degrees Fahrenheit
* The resistance measurement for a three-conductor connection is performed every 5 minutes.

** Open-circuit monitoring in module filtering mode 4 Channels, Hardware is performed every 3 seconds.
*** Maximum lead resistance for 3-wire sensor measurements for PT 10 and Cu 10 RTD elements is 10 W. For all other RTD
elements. The maximum lead resistance for 3-wire sensor measurements is 20 W.

6 A5E00400156-01
Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD
You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD:

S With STEP 7 (see the STEP 7 User Manual) or
S In the user program by means of SFCs (see the STEP 7 System and Standard
Functions Reference Manual)
Parameterization restrictions when using the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD with

PROFIBUS masters that only support DPV0.
When you use the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD in an ET 200M
Table 1 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

Settings meter
Type
Enable
Yes/no
S Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no
No
S Hardware interrupt No
Dynamic Module
S Hardware interrupt at Yes/no
end of cycle No
interrupt
S Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 32767 Dynamic Channel
S Lower limit value –32512 to 32511 -32768
Diagnostics
S Group diagnostics Yes/no No
Channel
Static
group
S With wire-break Yes/no No
check

A5E00400156-01 7
Table 1 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, continued

Settings meter
Type
Measurement
S Measuring Method Deactivated RTD-4L
R-4L Resistance
R-3L Resistance,
(three-conductor connection)
RTD-4L Temperature resistor
(linear, four-conductor Channel
connection) Dynamic
group
RTD-3L Temperature resistor
connection)
S Measuring Range Refer to the section on measuring Pt 100
ranges of the input channels that you climatic
can set. 0.003850
(IPTS-68)
S Temperature unit Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit Degrees
Dynamic Module
Celsius
S Module filtering mode 8 channels hardware filter 8
Dynamic Module
filter
S Temperature Platinum (Pt) 0.003850
coefficient for 0.003850 W/W/ °C (IPTS-68)
temperature 0.003916 W/W/ °C
measurement with 0.003902 W/W/ °C
bulb resistor (RTD) 0.003920 W/W/ °C
0.003850 W/W/ °C (ITS-90)
0.003910 W/W/ °C
Nickel (Ni)
Channel
0.006170 W/W/ °C Dynamic
group
0.006180 W/W/ °C
0.006720 W/W/ °C
0.005000 W/W/ °C (LG Ni 1000)
Copper (Cu)
0.004260 W/W/ °C
0.004270 W/W/ °C
0.004280 W/W/ °C
S Interference 50/60/400 Hz; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz 50/60/400
Dynamic Channel
suppression* Hz
group
S Smoothing None None Dynamic Channel

Low group
Average
High

8 A5E00400156-01
Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD are arranged in four groups of two. You
Table 2 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD to Channel Groups

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7

violation
STEP 7.

The SM 331; AI 8 RTD operates in one of the following modes:
S “Hardware filter, 8 channels”
S “Software filter, 8 channels”

A5E00400156-01 9
”Hardware filter 8 channels” mode
In “Hardware filter 8 channels” mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8 x RTD
3, 5 and 7 (see Figure 2).

(simultaneous)
K0 K2 K4 K6
Scan time

(simultaneous)
K1 K3 K5 K7
Figure 2 Hardware filter 8 channels scan time

communication time of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD is 84 ms. The
opto-MOS relays. Opto-MOS relays need 16 ms to switch and settle. Each
channel needs a time of 100 ms, so that the scan time is exactly 200 ms.
Scan time = 200 ms

10 A5E00400156-01
”Software filter 8 channels” mode
In “Software filter 8 channels” mode, the analog/digital conversion occurs in exactly
the same way as in “hardware filter 8 channels” mode. That is to say, as the
module contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert
simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6. Once the even-numbered channels are
converted, all the ADCs convert simultaneously for the odd-numbered channels 1,

(simultaneous)
K0 K2 K4 K6
Scan time

(simultaneous)
K1 K3 K5 K7
Figure 3 Software filter 8 channels scan time

The channel conversion time depends, however, on the programmed interference
frequency suppression. When you set an interference frequency of 50 Hz, the
channel conversion time including communication time is 32 ms. When you set an
interference frequency of 60 Hz, the channel conversion time is 27 ms. When you
set an interference frequency of 400 Hz, the channel conversion time is reduced to
9 ms. As with 8-channel hardware filter mode, the module must be switched over
by means of opto MOS relays with a time of 16 ms for switching to the other
channel of the group. This relationship is shown in the table that follows.

A5E00400156-01 11
Table 3 Scan Times in “Software Filter, 8 Channels” Mode

Suppression
50 Hz 48 ms 96 ms
60 Hz 43 ms 86 ms
400 Hz 25 ms 50 ms
Scan time in “Hardware Filter, 4 Channels” mode

In this mode, the module does not switch between the channels of the different
groups. As the module contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the
ADCs convert simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6.

(simultaneous)
Scan time
K0 K2 K4 K6

communication time of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD is 10 ms. As
the module does not switch over between the channels in a group, the channel
scan time and the module scan time are the same: 10 ms.

12 A5E00400156-01
The wire-break check is a hardware function of the module that is available in all
operating modes.
In the 8-channel hardware and software filter operating modes, the scan time
of the module is unchanged, irrespective of the number of channels for which
In the 4-channel hardware filter operating mode, the module interrupts

values in Section 4.6 of the SIMATIC Programmable Logic Controller S7-300
Module Data Reference Manual .

Diagnostics
parameter in Section 4.16 of the SIMATIC Programmable Logic Controller S7-300
Module Data Reference Manual .

A5E00400156-01 13
Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD
Measuring Methods
S RTD 4-conductor measurement
S RTD 3-conductor measurement
S Resistor 4-conductor measurement
S Resistor 3-conductor measurement
Unused Channels
You must terminate an unused channel of an enabled channel group with a
nominal resistance in order to avoid diagnostic errors for the unused channel (refer
to the block diagram, Figure 1, for the connection).
Measuring ranges
in STEP 7.
Table 4 Measuring ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x RTD
Method Selected Measuring Range

Deactivated Deactivated
Resistance, four-conductor 150 W
connection 300 W
600 W
Resistance, three-conductor 150 W
connection 300 W
600 W

14 A5E00400156-01

Thermal resistance Pt 100 Climatic
+linearization Ni 100 Climatic
four-conductor Pt 100 Standard
connection Ni 100 Standard
Pt 500 Standard
Pt 1000 Standard
Ni 1000 Standard
Pt 200 Climatic
Pt 500 Climatic
Pt 1000 Climatic
Ni 1000 Climatic
Pt 200 Standard
Ni 120 Standard
Ni 120 Climatic
Cu 10 Climatic
Cu 10 Standard
Ni 200 Standard
Ni 200 Climatic
Ni 500 Standard
Ni 500 Climatic
Pt 10 GOST Climatic
Pt 10 GOST Standard
Pt 50 GOST Climatic
Pt 50 GOST Standard
Pt 100 GOST Climatic
Pt 100 GOST Standard
Cu 10 GOST Climatic
Cu 10 GOST Standard
Cu 50 GOST Climatic
Cu 50 GOST Standard
Cu 100 GOST Climatic
Cu 100 GOST Standard
Ni 100 GOST Climatic
Ni 100 GOST Standard

A5E00400156-01 15
Thermal resistance Pt 100 Climatic
+linearization Ni 100 Climatic
three-conductor Pt 100 Standard
connection Ni 100 Standard
Pt 500 Standard
Pt 1000 Standard
Ni 1000 Standard
Pt 200 Climatic
Pt 500 Climatic
Pt 1000 Climatic
Ni 1000 Climatic
Pt 200 Standard
Ni 120 Standard
Ni 120 Climatic
Cu 10 Climatic
Cu 10 Standard
Ni 200 Standard
Ni 200 Climatic
Ni 500 Standard
Ni 500 Climatic
Pt 10 GOST Climatic
Pt 10 GOST Standard
Pt 50 GOST Climatic
Pt 50 GOST Standard
Cu 10 GOST Climatic
Cu 10 GOST Standard
Cu 50 GOST Climatic
Cu 50 GOST Standard
Cu 100 GOST Climatic
Cu 100 GOST Standard
Ni 100 GOST Climatic
Ni 100 GOST Standard

16 A5E00400156-01
Table 5 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from OB40 during a hardware

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Byte
analog
l
markers 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
channel
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
channel
Unassigned bit 3
Wiring Diagrams
Figure 5 shows the wiring diagrams for 4-wire and 3-wire sensor elements. When
you use a 3-wire sensor, ensure you insert the jumper between M+ and Ic+.
Incorrect wiring results in unpredictable module behavior.
M+
M+ Jumper M+ to Ic+
M–
M–
Ic+ Ic+
Ic– Ic–
4-Wire Wiring 3-Wire Wiring
Figure 5 4-Wire and 3-Wire Wiring Diagram
Unused Input Channels

In order to reduce unnecessary wiring, use STEP 7 to deactivate unused channel
groups of the SM331; AI 8 RTD module (see Table 1).
You must terminate an unused channel within an activated group to eliminate
diagnostic errors for the unused input. Figure 5 shows how to attach a nominal
resistor for the selected input range to terminate the unused input.
When you operate in the 4 Channel Hardware Module Mode, no channel
termination is required if you deactivate the unused input channel groups.
Channels 1, 3, 5 and 7 are not monitored during this module mode of operation.

A5E00400156-01 17
Analog Value Representation of the Measuring Ranges of the Analog
Input Module SM 331: AI 8 RTD
Introduction
The tables in this section contain the digitized analog values for the various
measuring ranges of the analog input module. See table 6 through table 17.
How to Read the Measured-Value Tables

tables only contain the measured values and the units.
Resistance-Type Sensors Measuring Ranges

Table 6 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for
resistance-type sensors with the measuring ranges 150 Ω, 300 Ω, and 600 Ω.
Table 6 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Type Transmitters from 150 W to 600 W
System Resistance-Type Transmitter Range

Dec. Hex. 150 W 300 W 600 W
32767 7FFF 177.77 W 355.54 W 711.09 W Overflow
32512 7F00 150.01 W 300.01 W 600.02 W
32511 7EFF 176.38 W 352.77 W 705.53 W Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 150 W 300 W 600 W
20736 5100 112.5 W 225 W 450 W
1 1 5.43 mW 10.85 21.70 Rated range
mW mW
0 0 0W 0W 0W
(negative values physically Underrange

not possible)

18 A5E00400156-01
Pt Standard Temperature Ranges
Table 7 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the standard
temperature range of the Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500 and Pt 1000 sensors. In addition,
GOST Pt 0.003850 (ITS-90) 10, 50, 100, and 500 temperature ranges are
represented.
Table 7 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors

Pt 10, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000

standard standard
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit decimal (1 digit decimal
=0.15C) =0.1 5F)
> 1000.0 32767 7FFFH > 1832.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1000.0 10000 2710H 1832.0 18320 4790H
850.1 8501 2135H 1562.1 15621 3D05H
850.0 8500 2134H 1562.0 15620 3D04H
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H
–200.1 –2001 F82FH –328.1 –3281 F32FH
–243.0 –2430 F682H –405.4 –4054 F02AH
< –243.0 –32768 8000H < –405.4 –32768 8000H Underflow

A5E00400156-01 19
Pt Climatic Temperature Ranges
Table 8 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the climatic
temperature range of the Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500 and Pt 1000 sensors. In addition,
GOST Pt 10, 50, 100, and 500 temperature ranges are represented.

Pt 10, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000

climatic climatic
0.015C) 0.015F)
155.00 15500 3C8CH 311.00 31100 797CH
130.01 13001 32C9H 266.01 26601 67E9H
130.00 13000 32C8H 266.00 26600 67E8H
–120.00 –12000 D120H –184.00 –18400 B820H
–120.01 –12001 D11FH –184.01 –18401 B81FH
–145.00 –14500 C75CH –229.00 –22900 A68CH
< –145.00 –32768 8000H < –229.00 –32768 8000H Underflow
Ni Standard Temperature Ranges

temperature range of the Ni 100, Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500 and Ni 1000 sensors.

Ni100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000

standard standard
0.15C) 0.15F)
295.0 2950 B86H 563.0 5630 15FEH
250.1 2501 9C5H 482.1 4821 12D5H
250.0 2500 9C4H 482.0 4820 12D4H
–60.0 –600 FDA8H –76.0 –760 FD08H
–60.1 –601 FDA7H –76.1 –761 FD07H
–105.0 –1050 FBE6H –157.0 –1570 F9DEH
< –105.0 –32768 8000H < –157.0 –32768 8000H Underflow

20 A5E00400156-01
Ni Climatic Temperature Ranges
temperature range of the Ni 100, Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500 and Ni 1000 sensors.

Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000

climatic climatic
0.015C) 0.015F)
295.00 29500 733CH 327.66 32766 7FFEH
250.01 25001 61A9H 280.01 28001 6D61H
250.00 25000 61A8H 280.00 28000 6D60H
–60.00 –6000 E890H –76.00 –7600 E250H
–60.01 –6001 E88FH –76.01 –7601 E24FH
–105.00 –10500 D6FCH –157.00 –15700 C2ACH
< –105.00 –32768 8000H < –157.00 –32768 8000H Underflow
Cu Standard Temperature Ranges

temperature range of the Cu 10 sensor.
Table 11 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature

Detectors Cu 10
standard standard
0.015C) 0.015F)
312.0 3120 C30H 593.6 5936 1730H
260.1 2601 A29H 500.1 5001 12D5H
260.0 2600 A28H 500.0 5000 1389H
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H
–200.1 –2001 F82FH –328.1 –3281 F32FH
–240.0 –2400 F6A0H –400.0 –4000 F060H
< –240.0 –32768 8000H < –400.0 –32768 8000H Underflow

A5E00400156-01 21
Cu Climatic Temperature Ranges
Table 12 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the climatic
temperature range of the Cu 10 sensor. In addition, GOST Cu 10, 50, and 100
temperature ranges are represented.

Detectors Cu 10, 50, 100
climatic climatic
0.015C) 0.015F)
180.00 18000 4650H 327.66 32766 7FFEH
150.01 15001 3A99H 280.01 28001 6D61AH
150.00 15000 3A98H 280.00 28000 6D60H
–50.00 –5000 EC78H –58.00 –5800 E958H
–50.01 –5001 EC77H –58.01 –5801 E957H
–60.00 –6000 E890H –76.00 –7600 E250H
< –60.00 –32768 8000H < –76.00 –32768 8000H Underflow
Pt 0.003910 GOST Standard Temperature Ranges

Table 13 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the GOST
standard temperature range of the Pt 10, 50, 100, 500 sensors.
Table 13 Analog value representation for GOST RTD Resistance Temperature

Detectors Pt 10, 50, 100, 500

standard standard
(1 digit decimal (1 digit decimal
=0.15C) =0.15F)
> 1295.0 32767 7FFFH > 2363.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1295.0 12950 3296H 2363.0 23630 5CE4H
1100.1 11001 2AF9H 2012.1 20121 4E99H
1100.0 11000 2AF8H 2012.0 20120 4E98H
–260.0 –2600 F5D8H –436.0 –4360 EEF8H
–260.1 –2601 F5D7H –436.1 –4361 EEF7H
–273.2 –2732 F554H –459.7 –4597 EE0BH
< –273.2 –32768 8000H < –459.7 –32768 8000H Underflow

22 A5E00400156-01
Ni GOST Standard Temperature Ranges
standard temperature range of the Ni 100 sensor.

Detector Ni100
Ni 100 Units Ni 100 Units

standard standard
0.15C) 0.15F)
212.4 2124 084CH 414.3 4143 102FH
180.1 1801 0709H 356.1 3561 0DE9H
180.0 1800 0708H 356.0 3560 0DE8H
–60.0 –600 FDA8H –76.0 –760 FD08H
–60.1 –601 FDA7H –76.1 –761 FD07H
–105.0 –1050 FBE6H –157.0 –1570 F9DEH
< –105.0 –32768 8000H < –157.0 –32768 8000H Underflow
Ni GOST Climatic Temperature Ranges

climatic temperature range of the Ni 100 sensor.

Detector Ni 100
Ni 100 Units Ni 100 Units

climatic climatic
0.15C) 0.15F)
212.40 21240 52F8H 327.66 32766 7FFEH
180.01 18001 4651H 280.01 28001 6D61H
180.00 18000 4650H 280.00 28000 6D60H
–60.00 –6000 E890H –76.00 –7600 E250H
–60.01 –6001 E88FH –76.01 –7601 E24FH
–105.00 –10500 D6FCH –157.00 –15700 C2ACH
< –105.00 –32768 8000H < –157.00 –32768 8000H Underflow

A5E00400156-01 23
Cu 0.00426 GOST Standard Temperature Ranges
standard temperature range of the Cu 10, 50, 100, 500 sensors.
Table 16 Analog Value Representation for GOST RTD Resistance Temperature

Detectors Cu 10, 50, 100, 500
Cu xx0 Units Cu xx0 Units

standard standard
0.15C) 0.015F)
240.0 2400 0960H 464.0 4640 1220H
200.1 2001 07D1H 392.1 3921 0F51H
200.0 2000 07D0H 392.0 3920 0F50H
–50.0 –500 FE0CH –58.0 –580 FDBCH
–50.1 –501 FE0BH –58.1 –581 FDBBH
–60.0 –600 FDA8H –76.0 –760 FD08H
< –60.0 –32768 8000H < –76.0 –32768 8000H Underflow
Cu 0.00428 GOST Standard Temperature Ranges

standard temperature range of the Cu 10, 50, 100, 500 sensors.

Detectors Cu 10, 50, 100, 500
Cu xx0 Units Cu xx0 Units

standard standard
0.15C) 0.015F)
240.0 2400 0960H 464.0 4640 1220H
200.1 2001 07D1H 392.1 3921 0F51H
200.0 2000 07D0H 392.0 3920 0F50H
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H
–200.1 –2001 F82FH –328.1 –3281 F32FH
–240.0 –2400 F6A0H –405.4 –4054 F02AH
< –240.0 –32768 8000H < –405.4 –32768 8000H Underflow

24 A5E00400156-01
Parameter Sets for Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD
Parameter assignment in the user program

You have already assigned parameters to the modules in STEP 7.
In the user program, you can use a SFC:
S To reassign parameters to the module and
S To transfer the parameters from the CPU to the addressed modules
Parameters stored in data records

The parameters of the AI 8 x RTD module are located in data records 0 and 1; for
some other analog input modules, in data record 128 as well.
Modifiable parameters
You can change the parameters of record 1 and pass them to the module using
SFC 55. The parameters set on the CPU are not changed when you do this!
You cannot modify the parameters of data record 0 in the user program.
SFCs for parameter assignment

The following SFCs are available for assigning parameters to the AI 8 x RTD
module in the user program:
Table 18 SFCs for assigning Parameters to Signal Modules
SFC Identifier Application

No.
55 WR_PARM Transfer modifiable parameters (data record 1 and 28)
to the addressed signal module.
56 WR_DPARM Transfer parameters (data record 0, 1 or 128) from the
57 PARM_MOD Transfer all parameters (data record 0, 1 and 128)
from the CPU to the addressed signal module.
Description of the parameters

The following sections contain all the modifiable parameters for the AI 8 x RTD
module. The parameters of the AI 8 x RTD modules are described:
S In the on-line help of STEP 7
S In this Product Information document.
You will find the parameters that can be adjusted for the signal module
concerned in the specific sections for the different signal modules.

A5E00400156-01 25
Parameters of Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD
Parameters
module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD.
S In STEP 7
S With SFC 55 “WR_PARM”
Table 19 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD

No. with ...
... SFC 55 ...
Programming
Device
0
1
Temperature coefficient Yes Yes
128
Smoothing Yes Yes
Note

26 A5E00400156-01
Structure of Data Record 1
Figure 6 shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the Analog
Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
Byte 0
Celsius / Fahrenheit
Diagnostics enable
Byte 1 Unused
Byte 2 Unused
Byte 3 Unused
Byte 4 Unused
Byte 5 Unused
Byte 6 Unused
Byte 7 Unused
Byte 8 Unused
Byte 9 Unused
Byte 10 Unused
Byte 11 Unused
Byte 12 Unused
Byte 13 Unused
Figure 6 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD

A5E00400156-01 27
Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
Module Mode (See Table 20)
Byte 0
Interference frequency
Byte 1 suppression
Channel group 0
Channel group 1
(See Table 21)
Channel group 2
Channel group 3
Byte 2
Measurement Type, Group 0

(see Table 22)
Byte 3
Measurement Range, Group 0

(see Table 22)
Byte 4
Alpha Selection, Group 0

(see Table 23)
Smoothing, Group 0
(see Table 24)
Byte 5

(see Table 22)
Byte 6

(see Table 22)
Byte 7

(see Table 23)
Smoothing, Group 1
(see Table 24)
Figure 7 Data Record 128 for Parameters of the Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8 RTD

28 A5E00400156-01
Byte 8

(see Table 22)
Byte 9

(see Table 22)
Byte 10

(see Table 23)
Smoothing, Group 2
(see Table 24)
Byte 11

(see Table 22)
Byte 12

(see Table 22)
Byte 13

(see Table 23)
Smoothing, Group 3
(see Table 24)

Group 0;
Byte 15 Low Byte Channel 0
Group 0;
Upper limit value

Byte 18 High Byte
Group 0;

High Byte
Group 0;
(continued)

A5E00400156-01 29
Group 1;

Group 1;
Upper limit value

Byte 26 High Byte Group 1;
Channel 3
Byte 27 Low Byte
Lower limit value

Group 2;
Group 2;
Upper limit value

Byte 34 High Byte
Group 2;

High Byte
Group 2;

Group 3;
Group 3;
Upper limit value

Byte 42 High Byte
Group 3;

High Byte
Group 3;
(continued)
The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation.
Observe the range limits when setting the limit values.

30 A5E00400156-01
Module Mode
Table 20 contains the codes for the various module operating modes that you enter
in byte 0 of data record 128 (see Figure 7).
Table 20 Codes for the module modes of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD
Module Mode Code

8 Channel Hardware Filtering 2#00000000
8 Channel Software Filtering 2#00000001
Interference Frequency Suppression

Table 21 contains the codes for the various frequencies that you enter in record
128 (see Figure 7). Note that the 50 Hz, 60 Hz, and 400 Hz selections are for the 8
Channel Software Filtering module mode only. The 50, 60, and 400 Hz selection is
for the 8 Channel and 4 Channel Hardware Filtering module modes only.
Table 21 Codes for the Interference Frequency Suppression of Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8 RTD
Interference Frequency Suppression Code

400 Hz 2#00
60 Hz 2#01
50 Hz 2#10
50, 60, and 400 Hz 2#11
Measurement Type and Measurement Range

Table 22 contains all the measuring ranges for the Analog Input Module SM 331;
AI 8 RTD. Table 22 also shows the codes for the measurement types and the
measuring range. You must enter these codes, according to the measuring range
desired, in the appropriate bytes of data record 128 (see Figure 7).
Method Selected Code Measuring Range Code

(Hex) (Hex)
Deactivated 0x0 Deactivated 0x00
Resistance, four-conductor 150 W 0x02
connection 0x4 300 W 0x04
600 W 0x06
Resistance, three-conductor 150 W 0x02
connection 0x5 300 W 0x04
600 W 0x06

A5E00400156-01 31

(Hex) (Hex)
Thermal resistance 0x8 Pt 100 Climatic 0x00
+linearization Ni 100 Climatic 0x01
four-conductor Pt 100 Standard 0x02
connection Ni 100 Standard 0x03
Pt 500 Standard 0x04
Ni 1000 Standard 0x06
Pt 200 Climatic 0x07
Ni 1000 Climatic 0x0A
Pt 200 Standard 0x0B
Ni 120 Standard 0x0C
Ni 120 Climatic 0x0D
Cu 10 Climatic 0x0E
Cu 10 Standard 0x0F
Ni 200 Climatic 0x11
Pt 10 GOST Climatic 0x14
Pt 10 GOST Standard 0x15
Pt 500 GOST Climatic 0x1A
Pt 500 GOST Standard 0x1B
Cu 10 GOST Climatic 0x1C
Cu 10 GOST Standard 0x1D
Cu 50 GOST Climatic 0x1E
Cu 50 GOST Standard 0x1F
Cu 100 GOST Climatic 0x20
Cu 100 GOST Standard 0x21
Ni 100 GOST Climatic 0x22
Ni 100 GOST Standard 0x23

32 A5E00400156-01
(Hex) (Hex)
Thermal resistance 0x9 Pt 100 Climatic 0x00
+linearization Ni 100 Climatic 0x01
three-conductor Pt 100 Standard 0x02
connection Ni 100 Standard 0x03
Ni 1000 Climatic 0x0A
Pt 200 Standard 0x0B
Ni 120 Standard 0x0C
Ni 120 Climatic 0x0D
Cu 10 Climatic 0x0E
Cu 10 Standard 0x0F
Pt 500 GOST Climatic 0x1A
Pt 500 GOST Standard 0x1B
Cu 10 GOST Climatic 0x1C
Cu 10 GOST Standard 0x1D
Cu 50 GOST Climatic 0x1E
Cu 50 GOST Standard 0x1F
Cu 100 GOST Climatic 0x20
Cu 100 GOST Standard 0x21
Ni 100 GOST Climatic 0x22
Ni 100 GOST Standard 0x23

A5E00400156-01 33
Resistance-type Thermometer Alpha Selection
Table 23 contains all the alpha selections for the resistance-type thermometer
measuring range of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD. You must enter
these codes, according to the measuring range desired, in the appropriate bytes of
data record 128 (see Figure 7).
Table 23 Codes for the Alpha Selection of the Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8 RTD
Alpha Selection Code

Pt 0.003850 Ω/Ω/°C (IPTS-68) 2#0000
Pt 0.003916 Ω/Ω/°C 2#0001
Pt 0.003902 Ω/Ω/°C 2#0010
Pt 0.003920 Ω/Ω/°C 2#0011
Pt 0.003850 Ω/Ω/°C (ITS-90) 2#0100
Pt 0.003910 Ω/Ω/°C 2#0101
Ni 0.006170 Ω/Ω/°C 2#0111
Ni 0.006180 Ω/Ω/°C 2#1000
Ni 0.006720 Ω/Ω/°C 2#1001
Ni 0.005000 Ω/Ω/°C (LG Ni 1000) 2#1010
Cu 0.004260 Ω/Ω/°C 2#1011
Cu 0.004270 Ω/Ω/°C 2#1100
Cu 0.004280 Ω/Ω/°C 2#1101
Input Smoothing Selection

Table 24 contains all the smoothing selections for the Analog Input Module SM
331; AI 8 RTD. You must enter these codes, according to the measuring range
Table 24 Codes for the Smoothing Selection of the Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8 RTD
Smoothing Selection Code

None 2#00
Weak 2#01
Medium 2#10
Strong 2#11

34 A5E00400156-01
Product Information
SIMATIC S7-300
X 2
Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC as of Version 3 4
New Analog Input Module Available

The S7-300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC has been added to the
S7-300 family. The order number for this module is 6ES7 331-7PF11-0AB0.
specifications of analog input module SM 331; AI 8×TC. Refer to the S7-300
Installation and Hardware Manual for more information about the S7-300 product
family.
S How to start up the analog input module
S The measuring ranges available for the analog input module
S How to configure the analog input module
Additional Assistance
Copyright 2005 by Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

A5E00455107-01
Characteristic Features and Technical Specifications of the Analog Input
Module SM 331; AI 8×TC
Order No.
6ES7 331-7PF11-0AB0
Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC has the following features:
S 8 differential inputs for thermocouples (TC) in 4 channel groups
S Optional setting of the thermocouple type per channel group
S Rapid measured value updating for up to 4 channels
S Measured-value resolution 15 bits + sign (independent of integration time)
S 8 channels with limit monitoring
S Programmable hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded
S Programmable end-of-scan-cycle interrupt
S Programmable reaction to open thermocouple
S Isolated against the backplane bus interface
S Fully compatible with predecessor module 6ES7 331-7PF10-0AB0
S Added support for Russian GOST thermocouple characteristics, TXK/XK(L)

When you use the SM 331; AI 8 x TC in the distributed peripheral ET 200M, you
must have one of the following IM 153-x:
S IM 153-1; as of 6ES7153-1AA03-0XB0, E 01
S IM 153-2; as of 6ES7153-2AA02-0XB0, E 05
S IM 153-2; as of 6ES7153-2AB01-0XB0, E 04
Product Information S7--300 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

2 A5E00455107-01
Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC
Fault indicator -- red
SF 1 L- M+ 21 L+
2 22
3 23
DC
4 to 24
DC
5 25
6 26
TC+0 TC+4
Channel 7 27
0 TC-4 K4
TC-0 8 28
TC+1 TC+5
Channel 9 29
1 ADC ADC TC-5 K5
TC-1
10 30
TC+2 TC+6
Channel 11 31
2 TC-2 ADC ADC K6
12 32 TC-6
TC+3 TC+7
Channel 13 Back- 33
3 TC-3 plane TC-7 K7
14 bus 34
inter- 35
KV+
15
face
16 36 KV-
Ext KV
lc+
17 37
Ext lc-
18 38
KV
19 39
20 40 M
Channel
number
Figure 1 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00455107-01 3
Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

(in millimeters)
Data for Specific Module time/ resolution (per
channel)
Supports clocked No
operation S Programmable Yes
Length of cable S Basic conversion time in 95
S Shielded max. 100 m ms
Voltages, Currents, Potentials S Additional conversion 4

Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC monitoring, in ms
electronics L+
S Resolution including 16 bits
S Reverse polarity protection Yes sign
Constant measured current for typ. 0.7 mA S Noise suppression 400/60/50
resistance-type sensor for interference
frequency f1 in Hz
Isolation
S Between channels and Yes values
backplane bus
Basic response time of 190 ms
S Between channels and Yes module (all channels
power supply of the enabled)
electronics
Module filtering mode 8 channels, software
S Between the channels Yes
In groups of 2 Integration time/conversion
Permitted potential difference channel)
S Between the inputs (UCM ) 75 VDC / 60 VAC S Programmable Yes
S Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC S Basic conversion time in 23/72/83
Minternal (UISO) ms
Insulation tested with 500 VDC S Additional conversion 4
Current consumption monitoring, in ms
S From the backplane bus max. 100 mA S Resolution including 16 bits
S From supply voltage max. 240 mA sign
L+ S Noise suppression 400/60/50
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3.0 W for interference
frequency f1 in Hz

values
Basic response time of 46/144/166 ms

enabled)

4 A5E00455107-01
Analog Value Generation (Cont’d) Type N -150 °C to +1300 °C ±2.2 °C
Measuring principle Integrating -200 °C to -150 °C ±3.0 °C
Module filtering mode 4 channels, hardware Type R +100 °C to +1769 °C ±1.5 °C
Integration time/conversion time/ resolution (per channel) -50 °C to +100 °C ±1.8 °C
S Programmable Yes Type S +100 °C to +1769 °C ±1.7 °C
S Basic conversion time in 1.0 -50 °C to +100 °C ±2.0 °C
ms
Type B 4) +800 °C to +1820 °C ±2.3 °C
S Additional conversion 93 1)
time for open-circuit +200 °C +800 °C ±3.8 °C
monitoring, in ms
Type C +100 °C to +2315 °C ±2.3 °C
S Resolution including 16 bits
0 °C +100 °C ±2.5 °C
sign
Type --150 °C to +800 °C ±1.0 °C
S Noise suppression for 400/60/50
frequency f1 in Hz Txk/xk(L) --200 °C --150 °C ±1.5 °C
Smoothing of the measured None / low/ average/ high Basic error (operational limit at 25°C, referred to input
values range)
Basic response time of 10 ms S Thermocouple
enabled) Type T -200 °C to +400 °C ±0.5 °C
Suppression of interference, Limits of Error -230 °C to -200 °C ±1.0 °C

Noise suppression for f = n× (f1 ± 1%), Type U -150 °C to +600 °C ±0.5 °C
(f1 = interference frequency) n = 1.2, etc.
-200 °C to -150 °C ±1.0 °C
S Common-mode > 100 dB
interference (Ucm < 60 Type E -200 °C to +1000 °C ±0.5 °C
VAC)
-230 °C to -200 °C ±1.0 °C
S Series-mode > 90 dB 2)
Type J -150 °C to +1200 °C ±0.5 °C
interference (peak value
of interference < rated -210 °C to -150 °C ±1.0 °C
Type L -150 °C to +900 °C ±0.5 °C
inputs -200 °C to -150 °C ±1.0 °C
Operational limit (over entire temperature range, referred Type K -150 °C to +1372 °C ±0.5 °C
to 0 to 60 °C input range) Note: This limit does not cover
the error cold connection point3) -220 °C to -150 °C ±1.0 °C
S Thermocouple Type N -150 °C to +1300 °C ±0.5 °C
Type T -200 °C to +400 °C ±0.7 °C -200 °C to -150 °C ±1.0 °C
-230 °C to -200 °C ±1.5 °C Type R +100 °C to +1769 °C ±0.5 °C
Type U -150 °C to +600 °C ±0.9 °C -50 °C to +100 °C ±1.0 °C
-200 °C to -150 °C ±1.2 °C Type S +100 °C to +1769 °C ±0.5 °C
Type E -200 °C to +1000 °C ±1.2 °C -50 °C to +100 °C ±1.0 °C
Type B 4) +800 °C to +1820 °C ±1.0 °C

-230 °C to -200 °C ±1.5 °C
Type J -150 °C to +1200 °C ±1.4 °C +200 °C to +800 °C ±2.0 °C
-210 °C to -150 °C ±1.7 °C Type C +100 °C to +2315 °C ±0.5 °C
Type L -150 °C to +900 °C ±1.5 °C 0 °C +100 °C ±1.0 °C
-200 °C to -150 °C ±1.8 °C Type --150 °C to +800 °C ±0.5 °C
Type K -150 °C to +1372 °C ±2.1 °C Txk/xk(L) --200 °C --150 °C ±1.0 °C
-220 °C to -150 °C ±2.9 °C

A5E00455107-01 5
Temperature error (with ±0.005%/K Data for Selecting a Sensor
Input ranges (rated values)/
Linearity error (with ± 0.02% input resistance
reference to the input range) S Thermocouples Type B, C, N, E, R, S, J, L,
Repeat accuracy (in the ±0.01% T, K, U, Txk/xk(L)
steady state at 25 °C, Maximum input voltage for 20 VDC continuous; 75
referred to the output range voltage input (destruction VDC for max. 1 s (duty
3)
limit) factor 1:20)
Status, interrupts, diagnostics Characteristic linearization Programmable
Interrupts Temperature compensation Programmable
S Hardware interrupt Programmable S Internal temperature Possible
(channels 0 to 7) compensation
S Diagnostic interrupt Programmable S External temperature Possible

compensation with
Diagnostic functions Programmable Pt 100 (0.003850)
S Group error display Red LED (SF) S Compensation for 0°C Possible
S Diagnostics information Possible comparison point
read-out temperature
S Compensation for 50°C Possible
comparison point
temperature
S Technical unit for Degrees Celsius/
temperature degrees Fahrenheit
measurement
1) Open-circuit monitoring in 4 channels, Hardware operating mode is performed every 3 seconds.

2) Series-mode rejection in 8 channels, software mode is reduced as follows:
50 Hz > 70 dB
60 Hz > 70 dB
400 Hz > 80 dB
3) The operational limit comprises only the basic error of the analog input at Ta = 25 °C and the total
temperature error. The total error must cover the error for the compensation of the cold connection
point. Internal compensation of the cold connection point = max. 1.5 °C
External compensation of the cold connection point = accuracy +0.1 °C of the used external RTD.
External compensation of the cold connection point, where the connection point is held at 0 °C or 50
°C = accuracy of the connection point temperature control.
4) Because of the slight rise over the range of approx. 0 °C to 85 °C, the lack of compensation of the
comparison point temperature only has a negligible effect on a type B thermocouple. If there is no
compensation and the measuring method “Compensation to 0 °C” is set, the deviation in the type B
thermocouple duringtemperature measurement is: 200 °C to 1802 °C <0.5 °C

6 A5E00455107-01
Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8×TC
You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC bits in STEP 7.
Parameter
analog modules in Section 4.7 of the SIMATIC Programmable Logic Controllers
S7--300 Module Data Manual.
Parameterization restrictions when using the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC

with PROFIBUS masters that only support DPV0.
When you use the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC in an ET 200M
Table 1 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Settings meter
Type
Enable
Yes/no
S Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no
No
S Hardware interrupt No
Dynamic Module
S Hardware interrupt Yes/no
at end of cycle No
interrupt
S Upper limit value 32511 to --32512* 32767 Dynamic Channel
S Lower limit value --32512 to 32511* -32768
Diagnostics
S Group diagnostics Yes/no No
Channel
Static
group
S With wire-break Yes/no No
check
* These values are within overrange and underrange limits. See Tables 7 through 17.

A5E00455107-01 7
Table 1 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC, continued

Settings meter
Type
Measurement
S Measuring Method Deactivated TC-IL
TC-IL Thermocouple
(linear, internal
comparison)
TC-EL Thermocouple
(linear, external
comparison)
TC-L00C Thermocouple (linear, ref. Channel
Dynamic
temperature 0°C) group
TC-L50C Thermocouple (linear, ref.
temperature 50°C)
S Measuring Range For the settable measuring ranges of Type K
the input channels, please refer to
the individual module description.
S Reaction to open Overflow; underflow Overflow
thermocouple
S Temperature unit Degrees Celsius; degrees Degrees Dynamic Module
Fahrenheit Celsius
S Module filtering 8 channels hardware filter 8 channels, Dynamic Module
mode 8 channels software filter hardware
4 channels hardware filter filter
S Interference 50/60/400 Hz; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 50/60/400 Dynamic Channel
suppression* Hz group
S Smoothing None None Dynamic Channel
Low group
Average
High

8 A5E00455107-01
Channel groups
The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC are arranged in four groups of two. You
Table 2 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC to Channel Groups

Channel 0
Channel group 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel group 1
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel group 2
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel group 3
Channel 7
Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts upon limit violation
STEP 7.

The SM 331; AI 8 x TC operates in one of the following modes:
S “Software filter, 8 channels”

A5E00455107-01 9
In 8-channel hardware filter mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC

(simultaneous)
K0 K2 K4 K6
Scan time

(simultaneous)
K1 K3 K5 K7
Scan time in the mode

communication time of analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC is 91 ms. The
opto-MOS relays. Opto-MOS relays need 7 ms to switch and settle. Each channel
needs a time of 98 ms, so that the scan time is exactly 196 ms.
Scan time = 196 ms

10 A5E00455107-01
“Software filter 8 channels” mode
In 8-channel software filter mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC

(simultaneous)
K0 K2 K4 K6
Scan time

(simultaneous)
K1 K3 K5 K7
Figure 4 Software filter 8 channels scan time

A5E00455107-01 11
In the 8-channel software filter mode of analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC, the
channel conversion time is guided by the interference frequency set. When you set
an interference frequency of 50 Hz, the channel conversion time including
communication time is 76 ms. When you set an interference frequency of 60 Hz,
the channel conversion time is 65 ms. When you set an interference frequency of
400 Hz, the channel conversion time is reduced to 16 ms. As with 8-channel
hardware filter mode, the module must be switched over by means of opto MOS
relays with a switchover time of 7 ms to the other channel of the group. Table 3
shows the scan time of the module at a certain interference frequency.
Table 3 Scan Times in “Software Filter, 8 Channels” Mode

Suppression
50 Hz 83 ms 166 ms
60 Hz 72 ms 144 ms
400 Hz 23 ms 46 ms

In 4-channel hardware filter mode, the analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC does
not switch over between the channels of the individual groups. As the module
contains four analog/digital converters (ADC), all four of the ADCs convert
simultaneously for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6.

(simultaneous)
Scan time
K0 K2 K4 K6

12 A5E00455107-01
communication time of analog input module SM331; AI 8 x TC is 10 ms. As the
module does not switch over between the channels in a group, the channel scan
time and the module scan time are the same: 10 ms.

operating modes.
In the 8-Channel Hardware and Software Filter operating mode prolongs the
scan time of the module by 4 ms, irrespective of the number of channels for which
In the 4-Channel Hardware Filter operating mode, the module interrupts

values in Section 4.6 of the SIMATIC Programmable Logic Controllers S7--300
Module Data Manual.

Diagnostics
parameter in Table 4--46, on page 4--72 of the SIMATIC Programmable Logic
Controllers S7--300 Module Data Manual.

A5E00455107-01 13
Connecting Thermocouples
Design of thermocouples
A thermocouple consists of a pair of sensors and the necessary installation and
connecting parts. The thermocouple consists of two wires of dissimilar metals or
metal alloys soldered or welded together at the ends.
There are different types of thermocouple, depending on the composition of the
material used -- for example, K, J, N thermocouples. The measuring principle of all
thermocouples is the same, irrespective of their type.
Measuring junction
Thermocouple with positive or negative limbs
Connecting point
Compensating leads
Reference junction
Leads
Point at which thermo-e. m. f. is measured
°C
Figure 6 Design of Thermocouples
Principle of Operation of Thermocouples

If the measuring point is subjected to a temperature different from that of the free
ends of the thermocouple (point of connection), a voltage, the thermo emf, occurs
at the free ends. The magnitude of the thermo-e.m.f. generated depends on the
difference between the temperature at the measuring junction and the temperature
at the free ends, as well as on the material combination used for the thermocouple.
Since a thermocouple always measures a temperature difference, the free ends
must be kept at a known temperature at a reference junction in order to determine
the temperature of the measuring junction.
The thermocouples can be extended from their point of connection to the reference
junction by means of compensating wires. These compensating wires consist of
the same material as the thermocouple wires. The supply leads are copper wire.
Note: Make sure these wires are connected with the correct polarity, otherwise
there will be considerable measuring errors.

14 A5E00455107-01
Compensation of the reference junction temperature
You can compensate for the effects of temperature fluctuations at the reference
junction by means of compensating leads.
There are several options for you to choose from for acquiring the reference
junction temperature in order to obtain an absolute temperature value from the
difference in temperature between the reference junction and measuring point.
You can use internal or external compensation, depending on where you want the
reference junction to be.
Table 4 Options for Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature
Option Explanation
No compensation If you want to acquire only the difference in temperature
between the measuring point and the reference junction.
Internal compensation If you employ internal compensation, the internal
(refer to Figure 7 for connection) temperature (thermocouple internal comparison) of the
module is used for comparison purposes.
External compensation with resistance You can acquire the reference temperature by means of a
thermometer for acquisition of the reference resistance thermometer and have it calculated by the
junction temperature module for any thermocouple.
(refer to Figure 8 and LEERER MERKERfor
connection)
Theory of operation of internal compensation

With internal compensation, you can establish the reference point across the
terminals of the analog input modules. In this case, you must run the
compensating lines right up to the analog module. The internal temperature sensor
acquires the temperature of the module and supplies a compensation voltage.
Note that internal compensation is not as accurate as external compensation.

A5E00455107-01 15
meanings:
M--: Measuring lead (negative)
IC+: Positive connection of constant current output
IC-: Negative connection of constant current output
COMP+: Compensating terminal (positive)
COMP -- : Compensating terminal (negative)
M: Ground terminal
P5V: Module logic power supply
KV +/KV --: Connections to the shunt comparison
Note

16 A5E00455107-01
Connection of thermocouples with internal compensation
Connect the thermocouples to the inputs of the module, either directly or by means
of compensating lines. Each channel group can use a thermocouple type
supported by the analog module independently of the other channel groups.
L+
Thermocouple M
M+
K0 M--
Logic
. ADC
. Backplane
. bus
M+
K7 M--
Compensating leads
(same material as
thermocouple)
Figure 7 Connection of Thermocouples with Internal Compensation to an

Isolated AI
Connecting thermocouples with temperature compensation to the

SM 331; AI 8 x TC
All 8 inputs are available as measurement channels when the thermocouples are
connected via reference junctions that are controlled at 0 °C or 50 °C.
L+
Copper M
wire
M+
K0 M-
.
Reference junction .
Logic
controlled at ADUs Backplane

.
0_C or 50_C bus
M+
K6 M-
M+
K7 M-
Figure 8 Connecting thermocouples via a reference junction to the

SM 331; AI 8 x TC

A5E00455107-01 17
Connecting thermocouples with resistance thermometer to the
SM 331; AI 8 x TC
With this type of compensation, the reference junction terminal temperature is
determined by a bulb resistor sensor with a temperature range of -25 °C to 85 °C.
Copper L+
wire M
KV+
K0 KV--
Thermo- P5V
couples ADC
KV+
Logic
K7 KV--
Backplane
KV+ bus
Compensating KV--
leads (same Pt 100
material as IC+ M internal
thermocouple) IC --
Ref. junction
Figure 9 Connecting thermocouples with external compensation via resistance thermometers to the
SM 331; AI 8 x TC

18 A5E00455107-01
Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8×TC
Measuring Methods
S Thermocouple, linearization with reference temperature 0 °C
S Thermocouple, linearization with reference temperature 50 °C
S Thermocouples, linearization with internal comparison
S Thermocouple, linearization with external comparison
Unused Channels
You must terminate an unused channel in an enabled channel group to avoid
diagnostic errors for the unused channel. To do this, short the Plus input and Minus
input of the channel.
Measuring ranges
in STEP 7.
Table 5 Measuring Ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x TC

TC-L00C: Type B You will find the digitized analog values
(thermocouple, linear, Type C in Section 4.3.1 in the temperature range
reference temperature of the SIMATIC Programmable Logic
Type E
0 °C) Controllers S7--300 Module Data Manual
Type J
TC-L50C:
(thermocouple, linear, Type K
reference temperature Type L
50 °C) Type N
TC-IL: Type R
(thermocouple, linear,
internal compensation) Type S
TC-EL: Type T
(thermocouple, linear, Type U
external compensation) Type Txk/xk(l)

A5E00455107-01 19
Table 6 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from OB40 during a hardware

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Byte
Analog 2 bits per channel to identify the range
special
i l
marker 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0
channel
s
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
channel
Unassigned byte 3

20 A5E00455107-01
Analog Value Representation of the Measuring Ranges of the Analog
Input Module SM 331: AI 8×TC
Introduction
The tables in this section contain the digitized analog values for the various
measuring ranges of the analog input module. See Table 7 through Table
LEERER MERKER.
How to Read the Measured-Value Tables

tables only contain the measured values and the units.
Analog value representation for thermocouples type B
Table 7 Analog value representation for thermocouples type B
Units Units
Type
T pe B Type
T pe B Range
in °C decimal hexa- in °F decimal hexa-
decimal decimal
2070.0 20700 50DCH 3276.6 32766 7FFEH
1821.0 18210 4722H 2786.6 27866 6CDAH
1820.0 18200 4718H 2786.5 27865 6CD9H
0.0 0 0000H 32.0 320 0140H
--120.0 --1200 FB50H --184.0 --1840 F8D0H
< --120.0 --32768 8000H < --184.0 --32768 8000H Underflow

A5E00455107-01 21
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type C
Table 8 Analog value representation for thermocouples type C
Units Units
Type
T pe C Type
T pe C Range
decimal decimal
2500.0 25000 61A8H 3276.6 32766 7FFEH
2315.1 23151 5A6FH 2786.6 27866 6CDAH
2315.0 23150 5A6EH 2786.5 27865 6CD9H
0.0 0 0000H 32.0 320 0140H
0.1 --1 FFFFH 31.9 319 013FH
--120.0 --1200 FB50H --184.0 --1840 F8D0H
< --120.0 --32768 8000H < --184.0 --32768 8000H Underflow
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type E
Table 9 Analog value representation for thermocouples type E
Units Units
Type E Type E Range
decimal decimal
> 1200.0 32767 7FFFH > 2192,0 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1200.0 12000 2EE0H 2192.0 21920 55A0H
1000.1 10001 2711H 1833.8 18338 47A2H
1000.0 10000 2710H 1832.0 18320 4790H
--270.0 --2700 F574H --454.0 --4540 EE44H
< --270.0 < --2700 <F574H < --454.0 < --4540 <EE44H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or
of a sensor error in the negative range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple
type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of FB70H and outputs 8000H.

22 A5E00455107-01
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type J
Table 10 Analog value representation for thermocouples type J
Units Units
Type
T pe J Type
T pe J Range
decimal decimal
> 1450.0 32767 7FFFH > 2642,0 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1450.0 14500 38A4H 2642.0 26420 6734H
1201.0 12010 2EEAH 2193.8 21938 55B2H
1200.0 12000 2EE0H 2192.0 21920 55A0H
--210.0 --2100 F7CCH --346.0 --3460 F27CH
< --210.0 < --2100 <F7CCH < --346.0 < --3460 <F27CH Underflow
... of F31CH and outputs 8000H. ... of EA0CH and outputs 8000H.
Analog value representation for thermocouples type K
Table 11 Analog value representation for thermocouples type K
Units Units
Type
T pe K Type
T pe K Range
decimal decimal
1622.0 16220 3F5CH 2951.6 29516 734CH
1373.0 13730 35A2H 2503.4 25034 61CAH
1372.0 13720 3598H 2501.6 25061 61B8H
--270.0 --2700 F574H --454.0 --4540 EE44H
< --270.0 < --2700 < F574H < --454.0 < --4540 <EE44H Underflow
... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H.

A5E00455107-01 23
Analog value representation for thermocouples type L
Table 12 Analog value representation for thermocouples type L
Units Units
Type
T pe L Type
T pe L Range
decimal decimal
1150.0 11500 2CECH 2102.0 21020 521CH
901.0 9010 2332H 1653.8 16538 409AH
900.0 9000 2328H 1652.0 16520 4088H
--200.0 --2000 F830H --328.0 --3280 F330H
< --200.0 < --2000 < F830H < --328.0 < --3280 <F330H Underflow
... of F380H and outputs 8000H. ... of EAC0H and outputs 8000H.
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type N
Table 13 Analog value representation for thermocouples type N
Units Units
Type
T pe N Type
T pe N Range
decimal decimal
1550.0 15500 3C8CH 2822.0 28220 6E3CH
1300.1 13001 32C9H 2373.8 23738 5CBAH
1300.0 13000 32C8H 2372.0 23720 5CA8H
--270.0 --2700 F574H --454.0 --4540 EE44H
< --270.0 < --2700 < F574H < --454.0 < --4540 <EE44H Underflow

24 A5E00455107-01
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type R, S
Table 14 Analog value representation for thermocouples type R, S
Units Units
Types R,
R S Types R,
R
decimal hexa- S decimal hexa- Range
in °C decimal in °F decimal

2019.0 20190 4EDEH 3276.6 32766 7FFEH
1770.0 17770 4524H 3218.0 32180 7DB4H
1769.0 17690 451AH 3216.2 32162 7DA2H
--50.0 --500 FE0CH --58.0 --580 FDBCH
--51.0 --510 FE02H --59.8 --598 FDAAH
--170.0 --1700 F95CH --274.0 --2740 F54CH
< --170.0 --32768 8000H < --274.0 --32768 8000H Underflow
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type T
Table 15 Analog value representation for thermocouples type T
Units Units
Type T Type T Range
decimal decimal
540.0 5400 1518H 1004.0 10040 2738H
: : : Overrange
401.0 4010 0FAAH
400.0 4000 0FA0H 752.0 7520 1D60H
--270.0 --2700 F574H --454.0 --4540 EE44H
< --270.0 < --2700 <F574H < --454.0 < --4540 <EE44H Underflow

A5E00455107-01 25
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type U
Table 16 Analog value representation for thermocouples type U
Units Units
Type
T pe U Type
T pe U Range
decimal decimal
850.0 8500 2134H 1562.0 15620 2738.0H
601.0 6010 177AH 1113.8 11138 2B82H
600.0 6000 1770H 1112.0 11120 2B70H
--200.0 --2000 F830H --328.0 --3280 F330H
< --200.0 < --2000 <F830H < --328.0 < --3280 <F330H Underflow
... of F380H and outputs 8000H. ... of EAC0H and outputs 8000H.
Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type TXK/XKL GOST
Table 17 Analog value representation for thermocouples type TXK/XKL GOST
Units Units
Type Type
TXK/XKL decimal hexa- TXK/XKL decimal hexa- Range
in °C decimal in °F decimal

1050.0 10500 2904H 1922.0 19220 4B14H
800.1 8001 1F41H 1472.1 14721 3981H
800.0 8000 1F40H 1472.0 14720 3980H
: : : : : :
0.0 0 0000H 32.0 320 0140H Rated range
: : : : : :
--200.0 --2000 F830H --328.0 --3280 F330H
< --200.0 --32768 8000H < --328.0 --32768 8000H Underflow

26 A5E00455107-01
Parameter Sets for Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC
Parameter Assignment in the User Program

You have already set the parameters for the S7-300 module using STEP 7. You
can use an SFC in the user program to change the AI 8×TC module dynamic
parameters. You can also use an SFC in the user program to transfer the
parameters from the CPU to the addressed module.
Parameters Stored in Data Records

The parameters for the AI 8×TC module are stored in three data records: records
0, 1 and 128.
Modifiable Parameters
You can change the parameters of record 1 and/or record 128 and pass them to
the AI 8×TC module using SFC 55. This does not change the parameters set on
the CPU. You cannot change the S7-300 parameters of record 0 in the user
program.
The following section shows an overview of the parameters that are stored in
records 0, 1, and 128 for the AI 8×TC module.
SFCs for Parameter Assignment

The following SFCs are available for assigning the parameters for the AI 8×TC
module in the user program.
Table 18 SFCs for Assigning Module Parameters
SFC No. Identifier Application

Transfer modifiable parameters (record 1 and 128) to
55 WR_PARM
the addressed signal module.
Transfer parameters (records 0, 1 or 128) from the
56 WR_DPARM
Transfer all parameters (records 0, 1, and 128) from
57 PARM_MOD
the CPU to the addressed signal module.
Description of the Parameters

The following section contains all the modifiable parameters for the AI 8×TC
module.
The parameters for the AI 8×TC module are described in this Product Information
document and in the online help of STEP 7.

A5E00455107-01 27
Parameters of Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC
Parameters
Table 19 contains all the parameters that you can set for the Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8×TC. The comparison shows:
S Parameters you can change using STEP 7.
S Parameters you can change using SFC 55 “WR_PARM”.
The parameters you set using STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module using
SFCs 56 and 57.
Table 19 Parameters for the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC
Data Record Configurable with...

Parameter
No. ...SFC 55 ...Programming Device
Diagnostics: Group 0 No Yes
Diagnostics: with wire-break 0 No Yes
Limit value interrupt enable 1 Yes Yes
Diagnostic interrupt enable 1 Yes Yes
End of cycle interrupt enable 1 Yes Yes
Measurement units 1 Yes Yes
Module Mode 128 Yes Yes
Interference frequency 128 Yes Yes
suppression
Measurement type 128 Yes Yes
Measurement range 128 Yes Yes
Measurement smoothing 128 Yes Yes
Measurement TC burnout 128 Yes Yes
Upper limit value 128 Yes Yes
Lower limit value 128 Yes Yes
Note: Before you can enable the diagnostic interrupt in record 1 in the user program, you must first
enable the diagnostics in record 0 with STEP 7.

28 A5E00455107-01
Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
Byte 0
Celsius / Fahrenheit
Diagnostics enable
Byte 1 Unused
Byte 2 Unused
Byte 3 Unused
Byte 4 Unused
Byte 5 Unused
Byte 6 Unused
Byte 7 Unused
Byte 8 Unused
Byte 9 Unused
Byte 10 Unused
Byte 11 Unused
Byte 12 Unused
Byte 13 Unused
Figure 10 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC

A5E00455107-01 29
Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
Module Mode (See Table 20)
Byte 0
Interference frequency
Byte 1 suppression
Channel group 0
Channel group 1
(See Table 21)
Channel group 2
Channel group 3
Byte 2

(see Table 22)
Byte 3

(see Table 22)
Byte 4
Smoothing, Group 0
(see Table 23)
TC Burnout Selection, Group 0

(see Table 24)
Byte 5

(see Table 22)
Byte 6

(see Table 22)
Byte 7
Smoothing, Group 1
(see Table 23)

(see Table 24)

30 A5E00455107-01
Byte 8

(see Table 22)
Byte 9

(see Table 22)
Byte 10
Smoothing, Group 2
(see Table 23)
(see Table 24)
Byte 11

(see Table 22)
Byte 12

(see Table 22)
Byte 13
Smoothing, Group 3
(see Table 23)

(see Table 24)

Group 0;
Group 0;
Upper limit value

Byte 18 High Byte
Group 0;

High Byte
Group 0;
(continued)

A5E00455107-01 31
Group 1;

Group 1;
Upper limit value

Channel 3
Byte 27 Low Byte
Lower limit value

Group 2;
Group 2;
Upper limit value

Byte 34 High Byte
Group 2;

High Byte
Group 2;

Group 3;
Group 3;
Upper limit value

Byte 42 High Byte
Group 3;

High Byte
Group 3;
(continued)
The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation.
Observe the range limits when setting the limit values.

32 A5E00455107-01
Module Mode
Table 20 contains the codes for the various module operating modes that you enter
in byte 0 of data record 128 (see Figure 11).
Table 20 Codes for the module modes of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8×TC
Module Mode Code

8 Channel Software Filtering 2#00000001
Interference Frequency Suppression

Table 21 contains the codes for the various frequencies that you enter in byte 1 of
data record 128 (see Figure 11). Note that the 50 Hz, 60 Hz, and 400 Hz
selections are for the 8 Channel Software Filtering module mode only. The 50, 60,
and 400 Hz selection is for the 8 Channel and 4 Channel Hardware Filtering
module modes only.
Table 21 Codes for the Interference Frequency Suppression of Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8×TC
Interference Frequency Suppression Code

400 Hz 2#00
60 Hz 2#01
50 Hz 2#10
50, 60, and 400 Hz 2#11

A5E00455107-01 33
Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC
Table 22 contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the module
and its codes. You must enter these codes in the corresponding bytes of data
record 128 (see Figure 11).
Table 22 Codesforthe MeasuringRangesoftheSM331;AI 8×TC

Measurement Type Code Measurement Range Code
Thermocouple, 2#1010 B 2#0000
linearization, reference N 2#0001
temperature 0° C E 2#0010
R 2#0011
S 2#0100
J 2#0101
L 2#0110
T 2#0111
K 2#1000
U 2#1001
C 2#1010
TXK/XK(L) 2#1011
linearization, reference N 2#0001
temperature 50° C E 2#0010
R 2#0011
S 2#0100
J 2#0101
L 2#0110
T 2#0111
K 2#1000
U 2#1001
C 2#1010
TXK/XK(L) 2#1011
linearization, internal N 2#0001
comparison E 2#0010
R 2#0011
S 2#0100
J 2#0101
L 2#0110
T 2#0111
K 2#1000
U 2#1001
C 2#1010
TXK/XK(L) 2#1011
linearization, external N 2#0001
comparison E 2#0010
R 2#0011
S 2#0100
J 2#0101
L 2#0110
T 2#0111
K 2#1000
U 2#1001
C 2#1010
TXK/XK(L) 2#1011

34 A5E00455107-01
Input Smoothing Selection
Table 23 contains all the smoothing selections for the Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8×TC. You must enter these codes, according to the smoothing option
Table 23 Codes for the Smoothing Selection of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI
8×TC

None 2#00
Weak 2#01
Medium 2#10
Strong 2#11
TC Burnout Selection
Table 24 contains all the TC burnout selections for the Analog Input Module
SM 331; AI 8×TC. You must enter these codes, according to the TC burnout
selection desired, in the appropriate bytes of data record 128 (see Figure 11).
Table 24 Codes for the TC Burnout Selection of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI
8×TC

Upscale 2#0
Downscale 2#1

A5E00455107-01 35
36 A5E00455107-01
TAB
TAB
s
Contents
Preface 1
Guide to the S7-300
SIMATIC Documentation 2
Installation Order 3
S7-300 Automation System,
4
Hardware and Installation: S7-300 Modules
CPU 31xC and CPU 31x Configuring 5
Installation Manual Installation 6
Wiring 7
Addressing 8
Commissioning 9
Maintenance 10
Testing Functions, Diagnostics 11

and Fault Elimination
Appendix 12
Glossary 13
Index
This manual is part of the documentation

package with the order number:
6ES7398-8FA10-8BA0
Edition 06/2003
A5E00105492-03
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices intended to ensure personal safety, as well as to protect the products and
connected equipment against damage. These notices are highlighted by the symbols shown below and
graded according to severity by the following texts:
Danger
! indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper
Warning
! indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper
Caution
! indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a
particular part of the documentation.
Qualified Personnel
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons
are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground and to tag circuits, equipment, and
systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Correct Usage
Note the following:
Warning
! This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the
technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers
which have been approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed
correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
Trademarks
SIMATIC®, SIMATIC HMI® and SIMATIC NET® are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG.
Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks
might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners.
Copyright © Siemens AG 2002 All rights reserved Disclaimer of Liability

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with
contents is not permitted without express written authority. the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However,
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary
are reserved. corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for
improvement are welcomed.
Siemens AG
Bereich Automation and Drives
Geschaeftsgebiet Industrial Automation Systems ©Siemens AG 2003
Postfach 4848, D- 90327 Nuernberg Technical data subject to change.
&RQWHQWV
3UHIDFH
*XLGHWRWKH6'RFXPHQWDWLRQ
,QVWDOODWLRQ2UGHU
60RGXOHV
&RQILJXULQJ
5.1 Summary of the Content ...................................................................................5-1
5.2 Basic Principles of Planning ..............................................................................5-2
5.3 Component Dimensions ....................................................................................5-4
5.4 Arranging Modules on a Single Rack ................................................................5-7
5.5 Arranging Modules on Multiple Racks...............................................................5-8
5.6 Selection and installation of cabinets ..............................................................5-11
5.7 Example: Selecting a Cabinet .........................................................................5-14
5.8 Electrical Assembly, Protective Measures, and Grounding ............................5-16
5.8.1 Grounding concept and overall structure ........................................................5-16
5.8.2 Installing an S7-300 with Grounded Reference Potential ...............................5-18
5.8.3 Configuring an S7-300 with Ungrounded Reference Potential
(Not CPU 31xC)...............................................................................................5-19
5.8.4 Isolated or Non-Isolated Modules?..................................................................5-20
5.8.5 Grounding Measures .......................................................................................5-23
5.8.6 Overview: Grounding.......................................................................................5-26
5.9 Selecting the Load Power Supply ...................................................................5-28
5.10 Planning Subnets ............................................................................................5-30
5.10.1 Extending and Networking Subnets ................................................................5-30
5.10.2 Basic Principles of MPI, DP and PtP Subnets ................................................5-32
5.10.3 Interfaces.........................................................................................................5-35
5.10.4 Network Components ......................................................................................5-38
5.10.5 Cable Length ...................................................................................................5-41
5.10.6 Sample Networks ............................................................................................5-43
,QVWDOODWLRQ
6.1 Installing an S7-300...........................................................................................6-1
6.2 Installing the rail.................................................................................................6-3
6.3 Installing Modules on the Rail ...........................................................................6-7
6.4 Label the modules .............................................................................................6-9
S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 iii
&RQWHQWV
:LULQJ
7.1 Wiring ................................................................................................................7-1
7.2 Connecting the Protective Conductor to the Rail ..............................................7-4
7.3 Adjusting the Power Supply Module to the Mains Voltage ...............................7-5
7.4 Wiring the Power Supply Module and the CPU ................................................7-6
7.5 Wiring Front Connectors ...................................................................................7-8
7.6 Inserting Front Connectors into Modules ........................................................7-12
7.7 Labeling the Module I/O ..................................................................................7-13
7.8 Connecting Shielded Cables to the Shielding Contact Element .....................7-14
7.9 Wiring the Bus Connector ...............................................................................7-17
$GGUHVVLQJ
8.1 Addressing.........................................................................................................8-1
8.2 Slot-Defined Addressing of Modules .................................................................8-1
8.3 User-Defined Addressing of Modules ...............................................................8-3
8.4 Addressing Signal Modules...............................................................................8-3
8.5 Addressing the Integrated I/O of the CPU.........................................................8-6
8.6 Consistent Data .................................................................................................8-8
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
9.1 In this Chapter ...................................................................................................9-1
9.2 Commissioning Procedure ................................................................................9-1
9.3 Commissioning Checklist ..................................................................................9-4
9.4 Commissioning the Modules .............................................................................9-6
9.4.1 Connecting the PG ............................................................................................9-6
9.4.2 Inserting/Replacing a Micro Memory Card (MMC)..........................................9-10
9.4.3 Initial Power On ...............................................................................................9-12
9.4.4 Resetting Memory via the Mode Selector Switch of the CPU .........................9-13
9.4.5 Formatting the Micro Memory Card (MMC) ....................................................9-16
9.4.6 Starting SIMATIC Manager .............................................................................9-17
9.4.7 Monitoring and controlling I/Os........................................................................9-18
9.5 Commissioning PROFIBUS DP ......................................................................9-22
9.5.1 Commissioning PROFIBUS DP ......................................................................9-22
9.5.2 Commissioning the CPU as DP Master ..........................................................9-23
9.5.3 Commissioning the CPU as DP Slave ............................................................9-26
9.5.4 Direct Data Exchange .....................................................................................9-32
0DLQWHQDQFH
10.1 In this Chapter .................................................................................................10-1
10.2 Operating System Back-Up.............................................................................10-1
10.3 Updating the Operating System ......................................................................10-3
10.4 Module replacement........................................................................................10-4
10.5 Digital output module AC 120/230 V: Replacing the fuses .............................10-9
iv A5E00105492-03
&RQWHQWV
7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ
11.1 In this Chapter .................................................................................................11-1
11.2 Overview: Testing Functions ...........................................................................11-1
11.3 Overview: Diagnostics .....................................................................................11-4
11.4 Diagnostic options with STEP 7 ......................................................................11-6
11.5 Diagnostics with LEDs.....................................................................................11-7
11.6 Diagnostics of DP CPUs ...............................................................................11-12
11.6.1 Diagnostics of DP CPUs Operating as DP Master........................................11-12
11.6.2 Reading slave diagnostic data ......................................................................11-15
11.6.3 Interrupts on the DP Master ..........................................................................11-21
11.6.4 Structure of the Slave Diagnostic Data when the CPU is used as
an Intelligent Slave ........................................................................................11-22
$SSHQGL[
12.1 Assembly .........................................................................................................12-1
12.1.1 General Rules and Regulations for S7-300 Operation....................................12-1
12.2 Protection against Electromagnetic Interference ............................................12-3
12.2.1 Basic Points for System Installations Conforming with EMC Requirements...12-3
12.2.2 Five Basic Rules for Ensuring EMC ................................................................12-5
12.2.3 EMC Compatible Installation of PLC ...............................................................12-7
12.2.4 Examples of an EMC Compatible Installation .................................................12-9
12.2.5 Shielding of Cables .......................................................................................12-12
12.2.6 Equipotential bonding....................................................................................12-13
12.2.7 Cable Routing inside Buildings......................................................................12-15
12.2.8 Outdoor cable routing ....................................................................................12-17
12.3 Lightning and Surge Voltage Protection........................................................12-18
12.3.1 In the following sections ... ............................................................................12-18
12.3.2 Lightning Protection Zone Concept ...............................................................12-18
12.3.3 Rules for the Transition Point between Lightning Protection
Zones 0 <-> 1 ................................................................................................12-20
12.3.4 Rules for the Transition Points between Lightning Protection
Zones 1 <-> 2 and Higher .............................................................................12-22
12.3.5 Sample of a Surge Protection Circuit for Networked S7-300 PLCs ..............12-25
12.3.6 1 How to Protect Digital Output Modules against Inductive Surge Voltage ..12-27
12.4 Safety of electronic control equipment ..........................................................12-29
*ORVVDU\
,QGH[

A5E00105492-03 v
&RQWHQWV
)LJXUHV
1-1 Information Landscape of S7-300 ................................................................1-3

1-2 Additional Documentation ............................................................................1-4
1-3 SIMATIC Technical Support.........................................................................1-5
3-1 Installing an S7 system ................................................................................3-1
5-1 Modules in an S7-300 ..................................................................................4-1
4-1 Horizontal and vertical installation................................................................5-3
4-2 Shielding contact element ............................................................................5-5
4-3 Clearance .....................................................................................................5-6
4-4 Rack with eight signal modules ....................................................................5-8
4-5 Full assembly using racks ..........................................................................5-10
4-6 Power loss dissipated.................................................................................5-15
4-7 CPU with grounded reference potential (as supplied) ...............................5-18
4-8 Creating an ungrounded reference potential on a CPU.............................5-19
4-9 Configuration with isolated modules ..........................................................5-21
4-10 Configuration with non-isolated modules ...................................................5-22
4-11 Grounding concept for the S7-300 with CPU 31xC ...................................5-26
4-12 Grounding concept for the S7-300 (excluding CPU 31xC) ........................5-27
4-13 Example: S7-300 with load power supply from PS 307 .............................5-29
4-14 Example of an MPI subnet .........................................................................5-43
4-15 Example: Maximum distances in the MPI subnet ......................................5-44
4-16 Example of a PROFIBUS subnet ...............................................................5-45
4-17 Example: CPU 314C-2 DP as MPI and PROFIBUS nodes .......................5-46
4-18 Example of PG access across network boundaries (routing) ....................5-47
4-19 Installing the terminating resistors in an MPI subnet .................................5-48
6-1 Holes for mounting the 2 m rail ....................................................................6-4
6-2 Free space required for an S7-300 installation ............................................6-6
6-3 Inserting slot numbers in modules .............................................................6-10
7-1 connecting the protective conductor to the rail ............................................7-4
7-2 Setting the mains voltage selector switch for the PS 307 ............................7-5
7-3 Wiring the power supply module and the CPU ............................................7-7
7-4 Move the front connector into wiring position.............................................7-10
7-5 Slide the labeled strips into the front panel ................................................7-13
7-6 Shielding contact element underneath two signal modules .......................7-15
7-7 Connecting 2-wire cables to the shielding contact element.......................7-16
7-8 Bus connector: Enabled and disabled terminating resistor........................7-18
8-1 S7-300 slots and the associated module start addresses ...........................8-2
8-2 Addresses of the I/O of digital modules .......................................................8-4
8-3 I/O Addresses of a digital module in Slot 4 ..................................................8-5
8-4 I/O addresses of an analog module in Slot 4 ...............................................8-6
9-1 Connecting a PG to an S7-300 ....................................................................9-6
9-2 Connecting a PG to multiple S7-300 PLCs ..................................................9-7
9-3 Connecting a PG to a subnet .......................................................................9-8
9-4 PG connected to an ungrounded S7-300.....................................................9-9
9-5 Insert the micro memory card into the CPU ...............................................9-11
9-6 Using the mode selector switch to reset the memory ................................9-14
9-7 Intermediate memory in a DP CPU operating as a DP slave ....................9-29
9-8 Direct data exchange with CPUs 31x-2 DP/31xC-2 DP.............................9-33
10-1 Unlocking the front connector and removing the module...........................10-5
10-2 Removing the front connector coding pin...................................................10-6
10-3 Installing a new module..............................................................................10-7
10-4 Inserting the front connector ......................................................................10-8
10-5 Location of fuses in the digital output module 120/230 VAC ...................10-10
vi A5E00105492-03
&RQWHQWV
11-1 Principle of forcing in S7-300 CPUs...........................................................11-3

11-2 Diagnostics with CPU 31x-2.....................................................................11-12
11-3 Diagnostic addresses for DP masters and DP slaves .............................11-13
11-4 Diagnostic address for the receiving station with direct data exchange ..11-15
11-5 Diagnostic addresses for DP masters and DP slaves .............................11-19
11-6 Structure of slave diagnostic data ............................................................11-22
11-7 Structure of the ID-specific diagnostics for CPU 31x-2............................11-25
11-8 Structure of the module status .................................................................11-26
11-9 Structure of the interrupt status................................................................11-27
11-10 Bytes y+4 to y+7 for a diagnostic interrupt (operating status
change by intelligent slave) ......................................................................11-28
11-11 Bytes y+4 to y+7 for the diagnostic interrupt (SFB 75) ............................11-29
12-1 Possible paths of electromagnetic interference .........................................12-3
12-2 Example of an EMC compatible cabinet installation ..................................12-9
12-3 Example of EMC compatible wall-mounting ............................................12-11
12-4 Mounting cable shielding..........................................................................12-13
12-5 Equipotential bonding...............................................................................12-14
12-6 Lightning protection zones of a building...................................................12-19
12-7 Sample circuit for networked S7-300 PLCs .............................................12-25
12-8 EMERGENCY-OFF relay contact in the output circuit.............................12-27
12-9 Circuit for coils operated with DC voltage ................................................12-28
12-10 Circuit for coils operated with AC voltage ................................................12-28
A5E00105492-03 vii
&RQWHQWV
7DEOHV
2-1 Influence of the ambient conditions on the automation system (AS)............2-1

2-2 Electrical isolation .........................................................................................2-1
2-3 Communication between sensors/actuators and the automation system ....2-2
2-4 Use of centralized and decentralized peripherals .........................................2-2
2-5 Configuration consisting of the central processing unit (CPU) and
expansion modules (EMs)............................................................................2-2
2-6 CPU performance .........................................................................................2-2
2-7 Communication .............................................................................................2-3
2-8 Software ........................................................................................................2-3
2-9 Supplementary features ................................................................................2-3
5-1 Components of an S7-300: ...........................................................................4-2
4-1 Rails - overview .............................................................................................5-4
4-2 Module width .................................................................................................5-4
4-3 Shielding terminals - overview ......................................................................5-5
4-4 Interface modules - Overview .......................................................................5-8
4-5 Types of cabinet ..........................................................................................5-13
4-6 Choice of cabinets.......................................................................................5-15
4-7 VDE specifications for the installation of a PLC system .............................5-17
4-8 Protective grounding measures ..................................................................5-23
4-9 Connection of the load voltage reference potential ....................................5-25
4-10 Connection of the load voltage reference potential....................................5-26
4-11 Connection of the load voltage reference potential....................................5-27
4-12 Characteristics of load power supply units.................................................5-28
4-13 Nodes on the subnet ..................................................................................5-32
4-14 MPI/PROFIBUS DP addresses..................................................................5-33
4-15 MPI addresses of CPs/FMs in an S7-300 ..................................................5-34
4-16 Possible interface operating modes for CPU 317-2 DP.............................5-36
4-17 The following devices may be connected ..................................................5-37
4-18 Available bus cables...................................................................................5-38
4-19 Marginal conditions for wiring interior bus cables ......................................5-39
4-20 Bus connector ............................................................................................5-39
4-21 RS 485 repeater .........................................................................................5-40
4-22 PG patch cord ............................................................................................5-40
4-23 Permitted cable lengths in an MPI subnet segment...................................5-41
4-24 Permitted cable lengths in a PROFIBUS subnet segment.........................5-41
4-25 Stub cable lengths per segment.................................................................5-42
6-1 Module accessories ......................................................................................6-2
6-2 Installation tools and materials......................................................................6-3
6-3 Mounting holes for rails .................................................................................6-5
6-4 Slot numbers for S7 modules........................................................................6-9
7-1 Wiring accessories ........................................................................................7-1
7-2 Conditions for connecting the PS and CPU ..................................................7-2
7-3 Wiring conditions for front connectors...........................................................7-3
7-4 Assignment of front connectors to modules..................................................7-8
7-5 Assignment of front connectors to modules................................................7-10
7-6 Wiring the front connector ...........................................................................7-11
7-7 Assigning the labeling strips to modules .....................................................7-13
7-8 Assigning the shielding diameter to shielding terminals .............................7-14
8-1 Integrated inputs and outputs on the CPU 312C ..........................................8-6
8-2 Integrated inputs and outputs on the CPU 313C ..........................................8-7
8-3 Integrated inputs and outputs on the CPU 313C-2 PtP/DP ..........................8-7
8-4 Integrated inputs and outputs on the CPU 314C-2 PtP/DP ..........................8-8
viii A5E00105492-03
&RQWHQWV
9-1 Recommended commissioning procedure - part I: Hardware ......................9-2

9-2 Recommended commissioning procedure - part II: software .......................9-3
9-3 Possible causes for the CPU memory reset request ..................................9-13
9-4 Procedure for resetting the CPU memory...................................................9-13
9-5 Operations in the CPU during a memory reset ...........................................9-15
9-6 Software requirements ................................................................................9-22
9-7 DP address areas of the CPUs ...................................................................9-23
9-8 Event recognition by CPUs 31x-2 DP/31xC-2 DP as the DP master .........9-25
9-9 Event recognition for CPUs 31x-2 DP/31xC-2 DP as the DP slave............9-28
9-10 Configuration example for the address areas in intermediate memory .....9-29
10-1 Back-up of operating system on MMC .......................................................10-2
10-2 Updating the operating system with MC/MMC...........................................10-3
11-1 The differences between forcing and modifying variables .........................11-3
11-2 Status and error displays ...........................................................................11-7
11-3 Evaluation of the SF LED (software error) .................................................11-8
11-4 Evaluation of the SF LED (hardware error)................................................11-9
11-5 The BUSF, BUSF1 and BUSF2 LEDs .....................................................11-10
11-6 The BUSF LED lights up. .........................................................................11-11
11-7 The BUSF LED flashes ............................................................................11-11
11-8 Event recognition by CPUs 31x-2 as the DP master ...............................11-14
11-9 Evaluation in the DP master of RUN to STOP transitions by the
DP slave ...................................................................................................11-14
11-10 Reading the diagnostic information using STEP 5 and STEP 7
in the masters system ..............................................................................11-16
11-11 Event recognition by CPUs 31x-2 acting as the DP slave .......................11-20
11-12 Evaluation of RUN to STOP transitions in the DP master/DP slave........11-20
11-13 Structure of station status 1 (byte 0) ........................................................11-23
11-16 Structure of the master PROFIBUS address (byte 3) ..............................11-24
11-17 Structure of the vendor ID (byte 4, 5).......................................................11-24
12-1 Starting the system after specific events....................................................12-1
12-2 Mains voltage .............................................................................................12-2
12-3 Protection against external electrical interference .....................................12-2
12-4 Protection against external electrical interference .....................................12-2
12-5 Coupling mechanisms ................................................................................12-4
12-6 Key to example 1......................................................................................12-10
12-7 Routing cables inside buildings................................................................12-15
12-8 High-voltage protection of cables with surge voltage protection
components ..............................................................................................12-21
12-9 Surge voltage protection components for lightning protection
zones 1 <-> 2 ...........................................................................................12-23
12-10 Surge voltage protection components for lightning protection
zones 2 <-> 3 ...........................................................................................12-24
12-11 Example of a lightning-protected structure (key to figure above) ............12-26
A5E00105492-03 ix
&RQWHQWV
x A5E00105492-03

3UHIDFH

3XUSRVHRIWKLVPDQXDO
To get you started, this manual contains the information you will need to plan,
assemble, wire up, address and commission a S7-300.
You will then get to know the tools you can use to diagnose and eliminate errors in
hardware and software.
%DVLFNQRZOHGJHUHTXLUHG
To understand this manual you will require a general knowledge of automation
technology, backed up by a knowledge of the STEP 7 basic software. You may find
it useful to read the Programming with STEP 7 V5.1 manual first.
6FRSHRIWKHPDQXDO
This manual is applicable to the following CPUs and hardware and software
versions:
&38 &RQYHQWLRQ 2UGHU1R $VRIYHUVLRQ

7KH&38VDUHUHIHUUHG )LUPZDUH +DUGZDUH
WRLQWKLVPDQXDODV
IROORZV
CPU 312C CPU 31xC 6ES7312-5BD01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 313C 6ES7313-5BE01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 313C-2 PtP 6ES7313-6BE01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 313C-2 DP 6ES7313-6CE01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 314C-2 PtP 6ES7314-6BF01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 314C-2 DP 6ES7314-6CF01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 312 CPU 31x 6ES7312-1AD10-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 314 6ES7314-1AF10-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 315-2 DP 6ES7315-2AG10-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 317-2 DP 6ES7317-2AJ10-0AB0 V2.1.0 01
1RWH
This manual describes all modules available at the time of publication.
We reserve the right to enclose Product Information for new modules or new
versions of modules containing up-to-date information.
A5E00105492-03 1-1
3UHIDFH
$SSURYDOV
The SIMATIC S7-300 product series has the following approvals:
• Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
• Canadian Standards Association: CSA C22.2 No. 142, (Process Control
Equipment)
• Factory Mutual Research: Approval Standard Class Number 3611
&(PDUN
The SIMATIC S7-300 product series conforms to the requirements and safety
specifications of following EU directives:
• EU directive 73/23/EWE "Low-voltage directive"
• EU directive 89/336/EEC "EMC directive“
&WLFNPDUN
The SIMATIC S7-300 product series is compliant with AS/NZS 2064 (Australia).
6WDQGDUGV
The SIMATIC S7-300 product series is compliant with the requirements and criteria
for IEC 61131-2.
1-2 A5E00105492-03
3UHIDFH
'RFXPHQWDWLRQUHTXLUHG
This manual is part of the documentation package for the S7-300.
Reference Manual
CPU Specifications: CPU 312 IFM to 318-2 DP Description of the operation, the functions and the
technical data of the CPU
CPU Specifications: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
Manual
CPU 31xC: Technological Functions Description of the individual technological functions:

- Positioning
Examples - Counting
- Point-to-point connection
- Control
The CD contains examples of the technological
functions.
Installation Manual
S7-300 Automation System, Configuration, installation, wiring, network and

Hardware and Installation: commissioning descriptions of a S7-300
CPU 312 IFM - 318-2 DP
S7-300 Automation System,

Hardware and Installation:
CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
Reference Manual
S7-300 Programmable Controller Function descriptions and the technical data of the
Module Specifications signal modules, power supply modules and the
interface modules
Instruction List
List of stored instructions of the CPUs and their
CPU 312 IFM to 318-2 DP execution times.
List of executable blocks (OBs/SFCs/SFBs) and their
CPU 31xC, CPU 31x execution times.
IM 151-7 CPU, BM 147-1 CPU, BM 147-2 CPU
Getting Started
Getting Starteds take you through each - CPU 31x: Commission

commissioning step up to a functioning
application by running through a - CPU 31xC: Commission
concrete example.
- CPU 314C: Positioning with Analog Output
The following Getting Starteds are available - CPU 314C: Positioning with Digital Output
to you:
- CPU 31xC: Counting
- CPU 31xC: Point-to-Point Connection
- CPU 31xC: Controlling
Figure 1-1 Information Landscape of S7-300
A5E00105492-03 1-3
3UHIDFH
You also require the following manuals in addition to this documentation package:
Reference Manual System Software for

S7-300/400 System and Standard Functions
Reference Manual Description of the SFCs, SFBs and OBS of the CPU.
part of the STEP 7 documentation package You can also find the description in the
STEP 7 Online Help.
Figure 1-2 Additional Documentation
)XUWKHUVXSSRUW
If you still have questions about how to use the products described in this manual,
then please contact your local Siemens dealer.
http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner
7UDLQLQJ&HQWHU
We can provide training courses to help you get started with your S7-300 PLC.
Please contact your local Training Center or the Central Training Center in
Nuremberg, D-90327, Germany
Phone +499 (911) 895-3200..
http://www.sitrain.com
6,0$7,&GRFXPHQWDWLRQRQWKH,QWHUQHW
Public documentation is available on the Internet at:
Use the quick search of the Knowledge Manager to find your required
documentation. If you have questions or suggestions concerning the
documentation, you can post them on the forum, and they will be answered
quickly.
1-4 A5E00105492-03
3UHIDFH
6,0$7,&7HFKQLFDO6XSSRUW
In addition to your local dealer, you can also contact one of three Support Centers:
Johnson City
Nuernberg
Beijing
Figure 1-3 SIMATIC Technical Support
:RUOGZLGH (Nuremberg)
7HFKQLFDO6XSSRUW
Local time: 0:00 to 24:00 / 365

days a year
Phone: +49 (0) 180 5050 222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050 223
E-mail: adsupport@siemens.com
GMT: +1:00
(XURSH$IULFD (Nuremberg) $PHULFD (Johnson City) $VLD$XVWUDOLD (Beijing)
$XWKRUL]DWLRQ 7HFKQLFDO6XSSRUWDQG 7HFKQLFDO6XSSRUWDQG
Local time: Mo.-Fr. 8:00 to 17:00 $XWKRUL]DWLRQ $XWKRUL]DWLRQ
Phone: +49 (0) 180 5050-222 Local time: Mo.-Fr. 8:00 to 17:00 Local time: Mo.-Fr. 8:00 to 17:00
Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223 Phone: +1 (0) 770 740 3505 Phone: +65 (0) 740-7000
E-mail: adsupport@siemens.com Fax: +1 (0) 770 740 3699 Fax: +65 (0) 740-7001
GMT: +1:00 E-Mail: isd- E-mail:

callcenter@sea.siemens.com simatic.hotline@sea.siemens.com.sg
GMT: -5:00 GMT: +8:00
Technical Support and Authorization personnel generally speak both German and English.
A5E00105492-03 1-5
3UHIDFH
6HUYLFH 6XSSRUWRQWKH,QWHUQHW
We offer you our complete knowledge base online on the Internet as a supplement
to our documentation.
There you can find:
• Up-to-date product information (What's new), FAQs (Frequently Asked
Questions), Downloads, Tips and Tricks.
• Our Newsletter always offers you the latest information on your products.
• The Knowledge Manager finds the documents you require.
• Users and specialists all over the world share their experience in our Forum.
• You can find your local service partner for Automation & Drives in our Partner
Database.
• Information relating to on-site service, repairs, spare parts and lots more is
available to you in the "Service" section.
1-6 A5E00105492-03


,QWKLV&KDSWHU
you will find a guide to the documentation for the S7-300.
6HOHFWLQJDQGFRQILJXULQJ
Table 2-1 Influence of the ambient conditions on the automation system (AS)
,QIRUPDWLRQRQ LVDYDLODEOHLQ
What provisions do I have to make for PLC Chapter &RQILJXULQJ0RXQWLQJGLPHQVLRQVRI
installation space? PRGXOHVand 0RXQWLQJPRXQWLQJWKHUDLO, in the
,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
How do environmental conditions influence the $SSHQGL[RIWKH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
PLC?
Table 2-2 Electrical isolation
Which modules can I use if electrical isolation is Chapter &RQILJXULQJ(OHFWULFDODVVHPEO\
required between sensors/actuators? SURWHFWLYHPHDVXUHVDQGJURXQGLQJLQWKH
,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
Reference Manual 0RGXOH'DWD
When do I need to isolate the potential of individual Chapter &RQILJXULQJ(OHFWULFDODVVHPEO\
components? SURWHFWLYHPHDVXUHVDQGJURXQGLQJLQWKH
How do I wire that? ,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
Chapter :LULQJLQWKH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
When do I need to isolate the potential of specific Chapter &RQILJXULQJ&RQILJXULQJDVXEQHWLQWKH
stations? ,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
How do I wire that? Chapter :LULQJLQWKH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
A5E00105492-03 2-1
Table 2-3 Communication between sensors/actuators and the automation system
Which module is suitable for my sensor/actuator? for CPU: in applicable &38'DWDReference
Manual
for signal modules: 0RGXOH'DWDReference Manual
How many sensors/actuators can I connect to the for CPU: in applicable &38'DWDReference
module? Manual
for signal modules: 0RGXOH'DWDReference Manual
To connect my sensors/actuators to the PLC, how Chapter :LULQJ:LULQJIURQWFRQQHFWRUVLQWKH
do I wire the front connector ? ,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
When do I require expansion modules (EM), and Chapter &RQILJXULQJRSWLRQDOH[SDQVLRQVDQG
how are they connected? QHWZRUNLQJLQWKH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
How do I mount modules in module racks / on Chapter 0RXQWLQJ0RXQWLQJPRGXOHVRQDUDLOLQ
profile rails? WKH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
Table 2-4 Use of centralized and decentralized peripherals
Which range of modules do I want to use? for local I/O / expansion modules (EMs): 0RGXOH
'DWDReference Manual
for distributed I/Os / PROFIBUS DP: Manual of the
relevant I/O device, e.g. 0DQXDO(7%
Table 2-5 Configuration consisting of the central processing unit (CPU) and expansion modules (EMs)
Which rack / rail is best suited to my application? Chapter &RQILJXULQJLQWKH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
Which Interface modules (IM) do I need to connect Chapter &RQILJXULQJ$UUDQJLQJPRGXOHVRQ
EMs to the CPU? PXOWLSOHUDFNVLQWKH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
What is the right power supply (PS) for my Chapter &RQILJXULQJLQWKH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
application?
Table 2-6 CPU performance
Which memory concept is best suited for my in applicable &38'DWDReference Manual
application?
How do I insert and remove Micro Memory Cards? Chapter &RPPLVVLRQLQJ5HPRYLQJ,QVWDOOLQJ0LFUR
0HPRU\&DUGVLQWKH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
Which CPU meets my requirements on ,QVWUXFWLRQOLVW; Reference Manual &38'DWD
performance ?
How fast is the response / processing time of the in applicable &38'DWDReference Manual
CPU?
Which technological functions are implemented? 7HFKQRORJLFDOIXQFWLRQVManual
How can I use these technological functions? 7HFKQRORJLFDOIXQFWLRQVManual
2-2 A5E00105492-03
Table 2-7 Communication
Which principles do I have to take into account? &RPPXQLFDWLRQZLWK6,0$7,&Manual
Which options and resources are available on the in applicable &38'DWDReference Manual
CPU ?
How do I optimize communication with the help of the respective manual
communication processors (CPs)?
Which type of communication network is best Chapter &RQILJXULQJ&RQILJXULQJDVXEQHWLQWKH
suited to my application? ,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
&RPPXQLFDWLRQZLWK6,0$7,&Manual
How do I network the individual components? Chapter &RQILJXULQJ and ZLULQJLQWKH,QVWDOODWLRQ
0DQXDO
Table 2-8 Software
Which software do I require for my S7-300 system? Chapter 7HFKQLFDO6SHFLILFDWLRQ; applicable &38
'DWDReference Manual
Table 2-9 Supplementary features
How do I implement operator control and for text-based display units: the relevant device
monitoring? manual
(Human Machine Interface) for OPs: the relevant device manual
for WinCC: the relevant device manual
How can I integrate process control modules? for PCS 7: the respective device manual
What options are offered by redundant and fail-safe Manual 6+5HGXQGDQW6\VWHPV; Manual
systems? )DLOVDIH6\VWHPV
A5E00105492-03 2-3
2-4 A5E00105492-03

,QVWDOODWLRQ2UGHU

,QWKLV&KDSWHU
We will show you the sequence of steps you must follow to install your SIMATIC-
S7 system.
We shall then go on to explain the basic rules that you should follow, and how you
can modify an existing system.
3URFHGXUHIRULQVWDOOLQJDQ6V\VWHP
Configuration
Installation
Wiring
Should a subnet
YES Network
be created?
NO
Addressing
Installation completed,
continue with commissioning
Figure 3-1 Installing an S7 system
A5E00105492-03 3-1
,QVWDOODWLRQ2UGHU
%DVLFUXOHVIRUWURXEOHIUHHRSHUDWLRQRI6
An S7 system can be used in many different ways, so we can only provide basic
rules for the electrical and mechanical installation in this section.
You must at least keep to these basic rules if you want your S7 system to operate
correctly.
0RGLI\LQJWKHVWUXFWXUHRIDQH[LVWLQJ6V\VWHP
If you want to modify the configuration of an existing system at a later time,
proceed using the steps indicated above.
1RWH
If you want to install a signal module at a later time, consult the relevant
information for the respective module.
&URVVUHIHUHQFH
Also note the description of your specific module in the 6,0$7,&63/&V
manual and the0RGXOH'DWD5HIHUHQFH0DQXDO.
3-2 A5E00105492-03

60RGXOHV

:KLFKPRGXOHVFDQ\RXXVHWRFUHDWHDQ6"
An S7-300 consists of several modules. The following diagram illustrates a
possible configuration:
1 2 3
SF
BUSF
DC5V
FRCE
RUN
STOP
4
SF
BUSF
DC5V
FRCE
RUN
STOP
Figure 4-1 Modules in an S7-300
7KHGLDJUDP WKHIROORZLQJPRGXOHVRIDQ6
LOOXVWUDWHVXQGHU
QXPEHU
Power supply (PS)
Central processing unit (CPU)
The example in the figure shows a CPU 31xC with integrated I/O.
Signal module (SM)
PROFIBUS bus cable
Cable for connecting a programming device (PG)
A5E00105492-03 4-1
60RGXOHV
A programming device (PG) is used to program the S7-300 PLC. Use a PG cable
to connect the PG and the CPU.
Several S7-300 CPUs can communicate with one another and with other
SIMATIC S7 PLCs via the PROFIBUS cable. You can connect several S7-300s
using a PROFIBUS bus cable.
6PRGXOHV
There is a whole range of components available for creating and using an S7-300.
The table below shows the major modules and their functions.
Table 4-1 Components of an S7-300:
&RPSRQHQWV )XQFWLRQ ,OOXVWUDWLRQ

Rail This is the rack for an S7-300
Accessory:
Shielding contact element
Power supply (PS) This converts the line voltage

(120/230 VAC) to 24 VDC
operating voltage and is used to
supply the S7-300 and 24 VDC
load circuits
4-2 A5E00105492-03
60RGXOHV

CPU This runs the user program, SIEMENS
Accessory: supplies 5 V to the S7-300

Front connectors (for CPUs with backplane bus; communicates
integrated peripherals) with other nodes of an MPI
network via the MPI interface.
Additional properties of specific
CPUs:
e.g., CPU 31xC
• DP master or DP slave in a
PROFIBUS subnet SIEMENS
• Technological functions
• Point-to-point connection
e.g., CPU 312, 314, or 315-2 DP
BF1 SF
BF2
DC5V
FRCE
RUN
STOP
RUN
STOP
MRES
e.g., CPU 317-2 DP

Signal modules (SM) They match different process
(Digital input modules, digital signal levels to the S7-300.
output modules, digital I/O
modules, analog input modules,
analog output modules, analog
I/O modules)
Accessory:
Front connectors
Function modules (FM) These perform time-critical and
Accessory: memory-intensive process signal
Front connectors processing tasks, such as
positioning or regulation.
A5E00105492-03 4-3
60RGXOHV

Communication processor (CP). This performs communication for
Accessory: the CPU, e.g. CP 342-5 DP
Connecting cable connection to PROFIBUS DP
SIMATIC TOP connect Use for wiring the digital I/O

Accessory: modules
Front connector module with
ribbon cable terminals
Interface module (IM) Connects the individual rows in
Accessory: an S7-300
Connecting cable
PROFIBUS cable with bus Connect the nodes of an MPI or

connector PROFIBUS subnet to one
another
PG cable Connects a PG/PC to a CPU
RS485 repeater Used to amplify the signals in an

MPI or PROFIBUS subnet and
for coupling segments of an MPI
or PROFIBUS subnet
Programming device (PG) or PC You will need a PG to configure,

with the STEP 7 software set parameters, program and test
package your S7-300
4-4 A5E00105492-03

&RQILJXULQJ

6XPPDU\RIWKH&RQWHQW
,QWKLV&KDSWHU
we will provide you with all the information you need
• Mechanical configuration of an S7-300
• Electrical configuration of an S7-300
• Considerations for networking
)XUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQRQQHWZRUNLQJ
For information on network topics we recommend the &RPPXQLFDWLRQZLWK
6,0$7,&Manual. This manual contains important notes on networking for
SIMATIC professionals as well as the basics for newcomers.
&URVVUHIHUHQFH
Information on ambient conditions is in the Appendix: see $PELHQW&RQGLWLRQV
Information on special protective measures is in the Appendix: see (OHFWULFDO
3URWHFWLYH0HDVXUHV
A5E00105492-03 5-1
&RQILJXULQJ
%DVLF3ULQFLSOHVRI3ODQQLQJ
,PSRUWDQWLQIRUPDWLRQDERXWSODQQLQJ
:DUQLQJ
2SHQHTXLSPHQW
The modules that make up an S7-300 are regarded as open equipment. This
means that you must always install the S7-300 in a cubicle, cabinet or electrical
control room that can only be accessed using a key or tool. Only trained or
authorized personnel are allowed access to such cubicles, cabinets or electrical
operating rooms.
&DXWLRQ
Depending on the field of application, the operation of an S7-300 in a plant or
system is defined by special rules and regulations . Note the safety and accident
prevention regulations relating to specific applications, e.g. machine protection
directives. This chapter and the appendix *HQHUDOUXOHVDQGUHJXODWLRQVRQ6
RSHUDWLRQ provide an overview of the most important rules you need to consider
when integrating an S7-300 into a plant or a system.
&HQWUDOXQLW&8DQGH[SDQVLRQPRGXOH(0

An S7-300 PLC consists of a central unit (CU) and – if required – one or multiple
expansion modules (EMs).
The rack containing the CPU is referred to as the central unit (CU). Racks
equipped with modules form the expansion modules (EMs) connected to the
system's CU.
:KHQVKRXOG,XVHH[SDQVLRQPRGXOHV"
You can use EMs if the number of CU slots is insufficient for your application.
When using EMs, you might require further power supply modules in addition to
the extra racks and interface modules (IM). When using interface modules you
must ensure compatibility of the partner stations.
0RGXOHUDFNV
The rack for your S7-300 is a rail. You can use this rail to mount all modules of
your S7-300 system.
5-2 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
+RUL]RQWDODQGYHUWLFDOLQVWDOODWLRQ
You can mount an S7-300 either vertically or horizontally. The following ambient air
temperatures are permitted:
• Vertical installation: from 0 °C to 40 °C
• Horizontal installation: from 0 °C to 60 °C.
Always install the CPU and power supply on the left or at the bottom.
SM
SM
SM
SM 2
SF
SM
SIEMENS
BUSF
DC5V
FRCE
RUN
STOP
SM PS CPU SM SM SM SM SM SM SM SM 3
SM
SM
CPU
SIEMENS
FRCE
STOP
BUSF
DC5V
RUN
SF
PS
Figure 5-1 Horizontal and vertical installation
7KHGLDJUDPLOOXVWUDWHVXQGHUQXPEHU
Vertical installation of an S7-300
Horizontal installation of an S7-300
Rail
)XUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQ
• the selection and dimensions of rails (racks) can be found in Chapter 0RGXOH
GLPHQVLRQV
• connections and interfaces (IMs) are found in Chapter $UUDQJLQJPRGXOHVRQ
PXOWLSOHUDFNV
• the most important rules on S7-300 operation are found in the Appendix
*HQHUDOUXOHVDQGUHJXODWLRQVRQ6RSHUDWLRQ
A5E00105492-03 5-3
&RQILJXULQJ
&RPSRQHQW'LPHQVLRQV
/HQJWKRIWKHUDLOV
The following rails are available.
Table 5-1 Rails - overview
5DLOOHQJWK 8VDEOHOHQJWKIRUPRGXOHV 2UGHU1R

160 mm 120 mm ES7 390-1AB60-0AA0
482.6 mm 450 mm ES7 390-1AE80-0AA0
530 mm 480 mm ES7 390-1AF30-0AA0
830 mm 780 mm ES7 390-1AJ30-0AA0
2,000 mm cut to length if required ES7 390-1BC00-0AA0
In contrast to other rails, the 2-meter rail is not equipped with any fixing holes.
These must be drilled, allowing optimal adaptation of the 2-meter rail to your
application.
,QVWDOODWLRQGLPHQVLRQVRIPRGXOHV
Table 5-2 Module width
0RGXOH :LGWK
Power supply PS 307, 2 A 50 mm
CPU The installation dimensions are listed in
the Technical Data section of your &38
'DWD5HIHUHQFH0DQXDO.
Analog I/O modules 40 mm
Digital I/O modules 40 mm
Simulator module SM 374 40 mm
Interface modules IM 360 and IM 365 40 mm
Interface module IM 361 80 mm
• Module height: 125 mm

• Module height with VKLHOGLQJFRQWDFWHOHPHQW: 185 mm
• Maximum mounting depth: 130 mm
• Maximum mounting depth of a CPU with an inserted DP connector with angled
cable outlet: 140 mm
• Maximum mounting depth with open hinged front panel (CPU): 180 mm
Dimensions of other modules such as CPs, FMs etc. are found in the relevant
manuals.
5-4 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
6KLHOGLQJFRQWDFWHOHPHQW
The direct contact between the shielding contact element and the rail makes it
easy for you to connect all shielded cables of your S7 modules to ground.
Figure 5-2 Shielding contact element
Shielding terminals
Bracket
Mount the bracket (Order No. 6ES5 390-5AA0-0AA0) to the rail using the two
screw bolts. If you use a shielding contact element, the specified dimensions apply
from the lower edge of the module.
• Width of the shielding contact element: 80 mm
• Number of mountable shielding terminalsper shielding contact element: max 4
Table 5-3 Shielding terminals - overview
&DEOHZLWKVKLHOGLQJGLDPHWHU 6KLHOGLQJWHUPLQDORUGHUQR
Cable shielding diameter 2 mm to 6 mm 6ES7 390-5AB00-0AA0
Cable shielding diameter 3 mm to 8 mm 6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0
Cable shielding diameter 4 mm to 13 mm 6ES7 390-5CA00-0AA0
A5E00105492-03 5-5
&RQILJXULQJ
5HTXLUHGFOHDUDQFHV
You must maintain the clearance shown in the figure in order to provide sufficient
space to install the modules and to dissipate the heat generated by the modules.
The S7-300 assembly on multiple racks shown in the figure below specifies the
clearance between racks and adjacent components, cable ducts, cabinet walls etc.
For example, if you wire your modules using a cable duct, the clearance between
the bottom edge of the shielding contact element and the cable duct must be 40
mm.
40 mm
CPU SM SM SM
40 mm 2
1 200 mm + a
40 mm a
PS CPU SM SM
20 mm 20 mm
40 mm
Figure 5-3 Clearance
.H\WRQXPEHUVLQWKHILJXUH
Wiring using a cable duct
Clearance between cable channel and bottom edge of shielding contact element
must be 40 mm
5-6 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
$UUDQJLQJ0RGXOHVRQD6LQJOH5DFN
$UH\RXXVLQJRQHRUPRUHUDFNV"
The number of racks you need will depend on your application.
5HDVRQVIRUXVLQJDVLQJOHUDFN
• Compact, space-saving use of all your modules
• Centralized use of your modules
• Fewer signals to be processed
5HDVRQVIRUGLVWULEXWLQJPRGXOHVEHWZHHQVHYHUDOUDFNV
• More signals to be processed
• Insufficient slots available
7LS:
If you opt for installation on a single rack, insert a dummy module to the right of the
CPU (order no.: 6ES7 370-0AA01-0AA0). This gives you the option of inserting a
second rack for your application in the future, simply by replacing the dummy
module with an interface module and without having to reinstall and rewire the first
rack.
5XOHV$UUDQJLQJPRGXOHVRQDVLQJOHUDFN
The following rules apply to single-rack module installations:
• No more than eight modules (SM, FM, CP) may be installed to the right of the
CPU.
• All modules mounted on a rack must not consume more than a total of 1.2 A
from the S7-300 backplane bus.
7KHSRZHUFRQVXPSWLRQRIPRGXOHV
is listed under the technical data, e.g. 60RGXOH'DWD5HIHUHQFH0DQXDOor in
the 5HIHUHQFH0DQXDOfor your CPU
A5E00105492-03 5-7
&RQILJXULQJ
([DPSOH
The figure below shows the arrangement of eight signal modules in an S7-300
assembly.
SF
SIEMENS
BUSF
DC5V
FRCE
RUN
STOP
PS CPU SM1 SM2 SM3 SM4 SM5 SM6 SM7 SM8
Figure 5-4 Rack with eight signal modules
VHHDOVR
Arranging Modules on Multiple Racks
$UUDQJLQJ0RGXOHVRQ0XOWLSOH5DFNV
([FHSWLRQV
With CPU 312 and CPU 312C, only a single-row configuration on a rack is
possible.
8VLQJLQWHUIDFHPRGXOHV
If you are planning a structure distributed between multiple racks then you will
need interface modules (IM). Interface modules route the backplane bus of an
S7-300 to the next rack.
The CPU is always located on rack 0.
Table 5-4 Interface modules - Overview
&KDUDFWHULVWLFV 7ZRRUPRUHURZV /RZFRVWURZFRQILJXUDWLRQ

Send IM in rack 0 IM 360 IM 365
Order No.: 6ES7 360-3AA01-0AA0 Order No.: 6ES7 365-0AB00-0AA0
Receive IM in rack 1 to 3 IM 361 IM 365 (hardwired to send IM 365)
Order No.: 6ES7 361-3CA01-0AA0
Maximum number of 3 1
expansion modules
Length of the connecting 1 m (6ES7 368-3BB01-0AA0) 1 m (hardwired)
cables 2.5 m (6ES7 368-3BC51-0AA0)
5 m (6ES7 368-3BF01-0AA0)
10 m (6ES7 368-3CB01-0AA0)
Remarks - Rack 1 can only receive signal
modules; total current load is limited
to 1.2 A, whereby the maximum for
rack 1 is 0.8 A
These restrictions do not apply to
operation with interface modules
IM 360/IM 361
5-8 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
5XOHV$UUDQJLQJPRGXOHVRQPXOWLSOHUDFNV
Please note the following points if you wish to arrange your modules on multiple
racks:
• The interface module always uses slot 3 (slot 1: power supply; slot 2: CPU, slot
3: interface module)
• It is always on the left before the first signal module.
• No more than 8 modules (SM, FM, CP) are permitted per rack.
• The number of modules (SM, FM, CP) is limited by the permitted current load
on the S7-300 backplane bus. The total power consumption must not exceed
1.2 A per row.
1RWH
The power consumption of the individual modules is given in the 0RGXOH'DWD
5HIHUHQFH0DQXDO
5XOHV,QWHUIHUHQFHSURRILQVWDOODWLRQRIWKHFRQQHFWLRQ
Special shielding and grounding measures are not required if you interconnect the
CU and EM using suitable interface modules (Send IM and Receive IM).
However, you must ensure that
• all racks are interconnected with low impedance,
• the racks of a grounded assembly are grounded in a star pattern,
• the contact springs on the racks are clean and not bent, thus ensuring that
interference currents are dissipated.
A5E00105492-03 5-9
&RQILJXULQJ
([DPSOHRIDIXOODVVHPEO\
The figure shows the arrangement of modules in an S7-300 assembly on 4 racks.
4 IM SM1 SM2 SM3 SM 4 SM5 SM6 SM7 SM8
5 6
3 PS IM SM1 SM2 SM3 SM 4 SM5 SM6 SM7 SM8
2 PS IM
IM SM1 SM2 SM3 SM 4 SM5 SM6 SM7 SM8
1 PS CPU IM
IM SM1 SM2 SM3 SM 4 SM5 SM6 SM7 SM8
Figure 5-5 Full assembly using racks
Rack 0 (central unit)
Rack 1 (expansion module)
Connection cable 368
Restriction for CPU 31xC: when this CPU is used, you must not insert Signal Module 8 on Rack 4.
5-10 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
6HOHFWLRQDQGLQVWDOODWLRQRIFDELQHWV
5HDVRQVIRULQVWDOOLQJDQ6LQDFDELQHW
You should install your S7-300 in a cabinet when any of the following apply:
• If you plan a larger system
• You are using your S7-300s in an environment subject to interference or
contamination
• In order to meet UL/CSA requirements, which require installation in cabinets
6HOHFWLQJDQGGLPHQVLRQLQJFDELQHWV
Take the following criteria into account:
• Ambient conditions at the cabinet's place of installation
• The specified mounting clearance for racks (rails)
• Total power loss of all components in the cabinet
The ambient conditions (temperature, humidity, dust, chemical influence, explosion
hazard) at the cabinet's place of installation determine the degree of protection
(IP xx) required for the cabinet.
5HIHUHQFHIRUGHJUHHVRISURWHFWLRQ
Further information on degree of protection can be found in IEC 529 and
DIN 40050.
7KHFDELQHW
VSRZHUGLVVLSDWLRQ
The power dissipation capability of a cabinet depends on its type, ambient
temperature and on the internal arrangement of devices.
5HIHUHQFHIRUSRZHUORVV
Siemens catalogs NV21 and ET1 contain more detailed information about power
dissipation.
A5E00105492-03 5-11
&RQILJXULQJ
6SHFLILFDWLRQVIRUFDELQHWGLPHQVLRQV
Note the following specifications when you determine the dimensions of a cabinet
suitable for an S7-300 installation:
• Space required for racks (rails)
• Minimum clearance between the racks and cabinet walls
• Minimum clearance between the racks
• Space required for cable ducts or fans
• Position of the stays
:DUQLQJ
Modules may get damaged if exposed to inadmissible ambient temperatures.
5HIHUHQFHIRUDPELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHV
Information on permissible ambient temperatures is in the Appendix: see $PELHQW
&RQGLWLRQV
5-12 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
2YHUYLHZRIW\SLFDOFDELQHWW\SHV
The table below gives you an overview of the commonly used cabinet types. It
shows you the applied principle of heat dissipation, the calculated maximum power
loss and the degree of protection.
Table 5-5 Types of cabinet
2SHQFDELQHWV &ORVHGFDELQHWV
Enclosed Increased Natural convection Forced convection Forced convection
ventilation via enclosed with rack fan, with heat
natural convection ventilation improvement of exchanger, internal
natural convection and external
auxiliary ventilation
Mainly inherent Higher heat Heat dissipation Heat dissipation Heat dissipation by
heat dissipation, dissipation with only across the only across the heat exchange
with a small portion increased air cabinet wall; only cabinet wall. between heated
across the cabinet movement. low power losses Forced convection internal air and
wall. permitted. In most of the interior air cool external air.
cases heat improves heat The increased
concentration dissipation and surface of the
develops at the top prevention of heat pleated profile of
of the cabinet concentration. the heat exchanger
interior. wall and forced
convection of
internal and
external air provide
good heat
dissipation.
Degree of Degree of Degree of Degree of Degree of
protection IP 20 protection IP 20 protection IP 54 protection IP 54 protection IP 54
Typical power dissipation under following marginal conditions:
• Cabinet size: 600 mm x 600 mm x 2,200 mm
• Difference between the outer and inner temperature of the cabinet is 20 °C (for other temperature
differences refer to the temperature charts of the cabinet manufacturer)
up to 700 W up to 2,700 W (with up to 260 W up to 360 W up to 1,700 W
fine filter up to
1,400 W)
A5E00105492-03 5-13
&RQILJXULQJ
([DPSOH6HOHFWLQJD&DELQHW
,QWURGXFWLRQ
The sample below clearly shows the maximum permitted ambient air temperature
at a specific power loss for different cabinet designs.
$VVHPEO\
The following device configuration should be installed in a cabinet:
• Central unit, 150 W
• Expansion modules, each with 150 W
• Load power supply under full load, 200 W
This results in a total power loss of 650 W.
3RZHUORVVGLVVLSDWHG
The diagram in the figure below shows guide values for the permitted ambient air
temperature of a cabinet with the dimensions 600 mm x 600 mm x 2,000 mm,
depending on power loss. these values only apply if you maintain the specified
installation and clearance dimensions for racks (rails).
5-14 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
Ambient temperature in °C
60
50
1
40
30 2
1
3
20
200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
Loss of heat in W
Figure 5-6 Power loss dissipated
&XUYH &DELQHW7\SH
Closed cabinet with heat exchanger (heat exchanger size 11/6 (920 mm x 460
mm x 111 mm)
Cabinet with through-ventilation by natural convection
Closed cabinet with natural convection and forced ventilation by equipment
fans
5HVXOW
From the diagram we can see that the following ambient temperatures are
obtained for a total power loss of 650 W:
Table 5-6 Choice of cabinets
&DELQHWGHVLJQ 0D[LPXPSHUPLWWHGDPELHQW
WHPSHUDWXUH
Closed with natural convection and forced ventilation Operation not possible
(Curve 3)
Open with through-ventilation (Curve 2) approx. 38 °C
Closed with heat exchanger (Curve 1) approx. 45 °C
If you install the S7-300 horizontally, you can use the following types of cabinet:
• open, with closed ventilation
• closed, with heat exchanger
VHHDOVR
Selection and installation of cabinets
A5E00105492-03 5-15
&RQILJXULQJ
(OHFWULFDO$VVHPEO\3URWHFWLYH0HDVXUHVDQG*URXQGLQJ
*URXQGLQJFRQFHSWDQGRYHUDOOVWUXFWXUH
,QWKLV&KDSWHU
This section contains information about the overall configuration of an S7-300 on a
grounded incoming supply (TN-S network):
• Circuit-breaking devices, short-circuit and overload protection to VDE 0100 and
VDE 0113
• Load power supplies and load circuits
• Grounding concept
1RWH
An S7-300 can be used in many different ways, so we can only describe the basic
rules for the electrical installation in this document. You must observe at least
these basic rules if you want your S7-300 to operate free of trouble.
'HILQLWLRQ*URXQGHGSRZHUVXSSO\3(1
The neutral is grounded in a grounded power supply system (PEN). A single short-
circuit to ground between a live conductor or a grounded part of the system trips
the protective devices.
5-16 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
6SHFLILHGFRPSRQHQWVDQGSURWHFWLYHPHDVXUHV
A number of components and protective measures are prescribed for plant
installations. The type of components and the degree of compulsion pertaining to
the protective measures will depend on the VDE specification applicable to your
particular plant.
The table below shows components and protective measures.
Table 5-7 VDE specifications for the installation of a PLC system
&RPSDUH 9'( 9'(

Disconnecting devices for (1) ... Part 460: ... Part 1:
control systems, sensors Master switch Circuit breaker
and actuators
Short-circuit/overload (2) ... Part 725: ... Part 1:
protection: Single-pole fusing of • In the case of a grounded
In groups for sensors and circuits secondary circuit: Provide
actuators single-pole protection
• Otherwise: Provide all-
pole protection
Load power supply for AC (3) Electrical isolation by Electrical isolation by
load circuits with more than transformer transformer mandatory
five electromagnetic devices recommended
1) This column refers to the numbers in the diagram in the Summary diagram: Grounding
section.
&URVVUHIHUHQFH
Additional information on protective measures is in the Appendix.
VHHDOVR
General Rules and Regulations for S7-300 Operation
A5E00105492-03 5-17
&RQILJXULQJ
,QVWDOOLQJDQ6ZLWK*URXQGHG5HIHUHQFH3RWHQWLDO
,QWURGXFWLRQ
In an S7-300 configuration with grounded reference potential occurring interference
current is dissipated to the ground conductor/ to ground. A grounding slide contact
is used for this except with CPU 31xC.
1RWH
Your CPU already is supplied complete with a grounded reference potential,
so if you wish to install an S7-300 with grounded reference potential, then you do
not need to make any changes to your CPU.
*URXQGHGUHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDORIWKH&38[
The diagram illustrates an S7-300 configuration with ungrounded reference
potential.
L+ M 10M <100 nF
M
M 2
3
Figure 5-7 CPU with grounded reference potential (as supplied)
Grounding slide contact in grounded state
Ground of internal CPU circuitry
Rail
1RWH
If you configure an S7-300 with grounded reference potential, you must not pull out
the grounding slide contact.
5-18 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
&RQILJXULQJDQ6ZLWK8QJURXQGHG5HIHUHQFH3RWHQWLDO
1RW&38[&
,QWURGXFWLRQ
If you install an S7-300 with ungrounded reference potential, any interference
currents that occur are dissipated via an RC system to the ground conductor/local
ground integrated into the CPU.
1RWH
An S7-300 with a CPU 31xC cannot be configured ungrounded.
$SSOLFDWLRQ
In extended systems, the S7-300 may require configuration with grounded
reference potential due to ground-fault monitoring. This is the case, for example, in
chemical industry and power stations.
8QJURXQGHGUHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDORI&38DQG'3
The diagram illustrates an S7-300 configuration with floating reference potential
L+ M 10M <100 nF
M
1 2
M
Figure 5-8 Creating an ungrounded reference potential on a CPU
If you implement an ungrounded reference potential in your CPU: Use a
screwdriver with 3.5 mm blade width and push the grounding slide contact forwards
in the direction of the arrow until it snaps into place.
Ground of internal CPU circuitry
Rail
A5E00105492-03 5-19
&RQILJXULQJ
1RWH
If at all possible, set up the ungrounded reference potential before mounting on the
rail.
If you have already installed and wired up the CPU, you may have to detach the
connection to the MPI interface before you pull out the grounding slide contact.
,VRODWHGRU1RQ,VRODWHG0RGXOHV"
,VRODWHGPRGXOHV
When isolated modules are installed, the reference potentials of the control circuit
(Minternal) and load circuit (Mexternal) are electrically isolated.
$SSOLFDWLRQ
Use isolated modules for:
• All AC load circuits
• DC load circuits with separate reference potential
Examples:
– DC load circuits whose sensors have different reference potentials (for
example if grounded sensors are located at some considerable distance
from the control system and no equipotential bonding is possible)
– DC load circuits with grounded positive pole (L+) (battery circuits).
,VRODWHGPRGXOHVDQGJURXQGLQJFRQFHSW
You can use isolated modules, regardless of whether or not the control system's
reference potential is grounded.
5-20 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
([DPSOH&38[&
The figure below shows a sample configuration of a CPU 31xC with isolated
modules. The connection is automatically generated for the CPU 31xC (1).
PS S7-300 CPU DI DO
U internal
Data
M internal
1 µP
L1 L+
L1
M
N
N
PE
Ground bus
in cabinet
L+ L1
M external N
AC 230 V load
DC 24 V load power supply
power supply
Figure 5-9 Configuration with isolated modules
A5E00105492-03 5-21
&RQILJXULQJ
1RQLVRODWHGPRGXOHV
When non-isolated modules are installed, the reference potentials of the control
circuit (Minternal) and analog circuit (Manalog) are not electrically isolated.
([DPSOH
For operation with an SM 334 AI 4/AO 2 analog I/O module you must connect one
of the grounding terminals Manalog to the CPU's chassis ground.
The figure below shows a sample configuration of an S7-300 CPU with non-
isolated modules.
PS S7-300 CPU 4AI/2AO

U internal
Data
M internal
µP
L1 L+
L1
D D
N M A A
N
PE M Manalog
+ +
2
1 mm
Ground bus V
A
in cabinet
L+
M external
DC 24 V load power supply
Figure 5-10 Configuration with non-isolated modules
5-22 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
*URXQGLQJ0HDVXUHV
%RQGLQJ
Low-resistance connections to ground reduce the risk of electric shock in case of a
short-circuit or system fault. Low-impedance connections (large surface, large-
surface contact) reduces the effects of interference on the system or the emission
of interference signals. Here, effective shielding of cables and devices is also a
significant contribution.
:DUQLQJ
All protection class 1 devices, and all larger metal parts, must be connected to
protective ground. This is the only way to ensure that the system user is protected
from electrical shock. It also deflects interference which is emitted from external
power supply cables and signal cables to cables connected to I/O devices.
0HDVXUHVIRUSURWHFWLYHJURXQGLQJ
The table below shows an overview of the most important measures for protective
grounding.
Table 5-8 Protective grounding measures
'HYLFH 0HDVXUHV
Cabinet/mounting Connection to central ground (e.g. equipotential bus line) via
structure cables with protective conductor quality
Rack / rail Connection to central ground with cable of minimum cross-
2
section of 10 mm , if the rails are not installed in the cabinet
and not interconnected with larger metallic parts.
Module None
I/O Device Grounding via Schuko plug
Sensors and actuators Grounding in accordance with regulations applying to the
system
A5E00105492-03 5-23
&RQILJXULQJ
5XOH*URXQGWKHFDEOHVKLHOGLQJ
You should always connect both ends of the cable shielding to ground/functional
ground, since this is the only way to achieve good interference suppression in the
higher frequency range.
If you connect only one end of the shielding (that is, at one or the other end of the
cable) to ground, you will merely achieve an attenuation in the lower frequency
range. One-sided shielding connections could be more favorable in situations
• not allowing the installation of an equipotential bonding conductor,
• if analog signals (some mA or µA) are transmitted,
• or if foil shielding is used (static shielding).
1RWH
Potential differences between two grounding points might cause an
equipotential current flow across shielding connected at both ends. In this case
you should install an additional equipotential bonding conductor..
&DXWLRQ
Always avoid the flow of operating current to ground.
'HWDLOVRQFDEOHVKLHOGLQJDQGHTXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ
are found in the Appendix under the same topic.
5XOH*URXQGWKHORDGFLUFXLWV
You should always ground the load circuits. This common reference potential
(earth) ensures proper functioning.
7LSQRWYDOLGIRU&38[&:
If you want to locate a fault to ground, provide your load power supply (Terminal L-
or M) or the isolating transformer with a removable connection to the protective
conductor (see 2YHUYLHZ*URXQGLQJNumber 4).
5-24 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
&RQQHFWLQJWKHUHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDORIWKHORDGYROWDJH
Numerous output modules require an additional load voltage for switching control
devices.
The table below shows how to connect the load voltage reference potential Mexternal
for the various configuration versions.
Table 5-9 Connection of the load voltage reference potential
,QVWDOODWLRQ 1RQLVRODWHGPRGXOHV ,VRODWHGPRGXOHV 5HPDUNV

grounded Connect Mexternal with M Connect or do not connect -
on the CPU Mexternal to the common
grounding line
ungrounded Connect Mexternal with M Connect or do not connect Ungrounded
on the CPU Mexternal to the common installation with
grounding line CPU31xC not possible
A5E00105492-03 5-25
Configuring
5.8.6 Overview: Grounding
CPU 31xC
The figure below shows you the complete assembly of an S7-300 with CPU 31xC
with a power supply from TN-S mains.
Apart from powering the CPU, the PS 307 also supplies the load current for the
24 VDC modules.
Note: The arrangement displayed does not correspond with the physical
arrangement; it was merely selected to give you a clear overview.
L1 Low-voltage distribution
L2
L3 e. g. TN-S system (3 x 400 V)
N
PE
Cabinet
1
PS CPU SM
Rail
41
µP
L1 L+
M
N
Signal modules
Ground bus in cabinet

3
2
AC
AC
AC 24 to 230 V load circuit for
AC modules
2
AC
DC DC 5 to 60 V load circuit for
non-isolated DC modules
2
AC
DC
DC 5 to 60 V load circuit for
isolated DC modules
Figure 5-11 Grounding concept for the S7-300 with CPU 31xC
The diagram illustrates under number

(1) Main switch
(2) Short-circuit/overload protection
(3) Load power supply (galvanic isolation)
(4) This connection is automatically generated for the CPU 31xC
5-26 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
$OO&38VH[FHSW&38[&
The figure below shows you the complete assembly of an S7-300 with TN-S mains
supply (does not apply to CPU 31xC).
24 VDC modules.
Note: The arrangement displayed does not correspond with the physical
arrangement; it was merely selected to give you a clear overview.
L1
L3 e. g. TN-S system (3 x 400 V)
N
PE
Cabinet
1
PS CPU SM
Rail
µP
L1 L+
M
N M
5
Signal modules

3
2
AC
AC
AC 24 to 230 V load circuit for AC modules
2
AC
4 non-isolated DC modules
2
AC
isolated DC modules
Figure 5-12 Grounding concept for the S7-300 (excluding CPU 31xC)
Main switch
Short-circuit/overload protection
Load power supply (galvanic isolation)
Disconnectable connection to protective conductor in order to localize ground faults
Grounding slide contact of the CPU (not CPU 31xC)
A5E00105492-03 5-27
&RQILJXULQJ
6HOHFWLQJWKH/RDG3RZHU6XSSO\
7DVNRIORDGSRZHUVXSSO\
The load power supply feeds the input and output circuits (load circuits), and the
sensors and actuators.
&KDUDFWHULVWLFVRIORDGSRZHUVXSSO\XQLWV
You will have to adapt the load power supply unit to your specific application. The
following table compares the various load power supply units and their
characteristics to help you make your choice:
Table 5-12 Characteristics of load power supply units
0DQGDWRU\IRU &KDUDFWHULVWLFVRIWKHORDG 5HPDUNV

SRZHUVXSSO\
Modules requiring voltage Protective separation These characteristics apply
supplies of ≤ 60 VDC or ≤ 25 to Siemens power supplies
VAC. of the series PS 307 and to
24 VDC load circuits SITOP power (series 6EP1).
Output voltage tolerances: -

20.4 V to 28.8 V
24 VDC load circuits 40.8 V to 57.6 V
48 VDC load circuits 51 V to 72 V
60 VDC load circuits
5HTXLUHPHQWVIRUORDGSRZHUVXSSOLHV
It must provide an extra-low voltage of ≤ 60 VDC and be safely isolated from
mains. Safe isolation from mains can be realized, for example, in accordance with
VDE 0100 Part 410 / HD 384-4-41 / IEC 364-4-41 (as functional extra-low voltage
with safe isolation) or VDE 0805 / EN 60950 / IEC 950 (as safety extra-low voltage
SELV) or VDE 0106 Part 101.
+RZWRGHWHUPLQHORDGFXUUHQW
The required load current is determined by the sum load current of all sensors and
actuators connected to the outputs.
In case of short-circuit the DC outputs are briefly loaded with twice to three times
the rated output current before the clocked electronic short-circuit protection comes
into effect. Thus, you must consider this increased short-circuit current when
selecting your load power supply unit. Uncontrolled load power supplies usually
provide this excess current. With controlled load power supplies - especially for low
output power (up to 20 A) - you must ensure that the supply can handle this excess
current.
5-28 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
([DPSOH6ZLWKORDGSRZHUVXSSO\IURP36
The figure below shows the overall S7-300 configuration (load power supply unit
and grounding concept), with TN-S mains supply.
24 VDC modules.
1RWH
The arrangement of supply connections displayed does not correspond with the
physical arrangement; it was merely selected to give you a clear overview.
L1
L3
N e. g. TN-S system (3 x 400 V)
PE
Cabinet
PS S7-300 CPU SM
Rail
µP
L1 L+
M
N M
Signal modules
DC 24 V load circuit for DC modules
Figure 5-13 Example: S7-300 with load power supply from PS 307
A5E00105492-03 5-29
&RQILJXULQJ
3ODQQLQJ6XEQHWV
([WHQGLQJDQG1HWZRUNLQJ6XEQHWV
2YHUYLHZ6XEQHWVZLWK6,0$7,&
SIMATIC offers the following subnets, according to different automation levels
(process, cell, field and actuator/sensor level ):
• Multi-Point Interface (MPI)
• PROFIBUS
• Point-to-point communication (PtP)
• Industrial Ethernet
• Actuator/Sensor Interface (ASI)
0XOWL3RLQW,QWHUIDFH03,
$YDLODELOLW\,QDOOWKH&38VGHVFULEHGLQWKLVGRFXPHQW
MPI is a small subnet with just a few nodes at the field/cell level. It is a multipoint-
capable interface in SIMATIC S7/M7 and C7, intended for operation as PG
interface for networking just a few CPUs or for exchanging small volumes of data
with PGs.
MPI always retains the last configuration of the transmission rate, node number
and highest MPI address, even after memory reset, voltage failure or deletion of
the CPU parameter configuration.
352),%86
$YDLODELOLW\&38VZLWK'3LQWKHLUQDPHKDYHD'3LQWHUIDFH
HJ&38'3
PROFIBUS in the SIMATIC open, multivendor communication system represents
the network at the cell and field level.
PROFIBUS is available in two versions:
1. PROFIBUS DP field bus for fast cyclic data exchange, and PROFIBUS-PA for
the intrinsically safe area.
2. The cell level as PROFIBUS (FDL or PROFIBUS-FMS) for fast data exchange
with communication partners equipped with equal rights.
However, you can also implement PROFIBUS DP and PROFIBUS-FMS with
communication processors (CP).
5-30 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
3RLQWWRSRLQWFRPPXQLFDWLRQ3W3
$YDLODELOLW\&38VZLWK3W3LQWKHLUQDPHKDYHD3W3LQWHUIDFHDVDVHFRQG
LQWHUIDFHHJ&38&3W3
Point-to-Point communication is no subnet in the common sense, because only two
stations are interconnected.
For this type of communication you require PtP communication processors (CP).
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
,PSOHPHQWDWLRQXVLQJFRPPXQLFDWLRQSURFHVVRUV&3
Industrial Ethernet in an open multivendor communication system represents the
SIMATIC network at the process and cell level. Industrial Ethernet is suitable for
fast and high-volume data exchange and offers offsite networking options via
gateway.
With S7-300 CPUs, you can implement Industrial Ethernet connections only with
the help of communication processors.
$FWXDWRUVHQVRULQWHUIDFH$6,
,PSOHPHQWDWLRQXVLQJFRPPXQLFDWLRQSURFHVVRUV&3
The ASI, or actuator/sensor interface, represents a subnet system on the lowest
process level for automation systems. It is used especially for networking digital
sensors and actuators. The maximum data volume is 4 bit per slave station.
With S7-300 CPUs, you can connect to an ASI only with the help of communication
processors.
6DPHFRQILJXUDWLRQIRU03,DQG352),%86'3
For your MPI network configuration, we recommend you use the same network
components as in a PROFIBUS DP network configuration. The same configuration
rules apply in this case.
)XUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQ
on communication can be found in the &RPPXQLFDWLRQZLWK6,0$7,&manual.
A5E00105492-03 5-31
&RQILJXULQJ
%DVLF3ULQFLSOHVRI03,'3DQG3W36XEQHWV
03,352),%86'33W3
These subnets are the most frequently used for S7-300 CPUs, so they are
discussed in detail below.
&RQYHQWLRQ'HYLFH 1RGH
In the following, all networked devices are referred to as nodes.
6HJPHQW
A segment is a bus link between two terminating resistors. A segment can include
up to 32 nodes. It is also limited by the permitted line length, depending on the
transmission rate.
7UDQVPLVVLRQUDWH
These maximum transmission rates are possible:
• MPI
– CPU 317-2 DP: 12 Mbps
– All other CPUs: 187.5 Kbps
• PROFIBUS DP: 12 Mbps
• PtP:
– Half duplex: 38.4 Kbps
– Full duplex: 19.2 Kbps
1XPEHURIQRGHV
Maximum possible number of nodes per subnet:
Table 5-13 Nodes on the subnet
3DUDPHWHUV 03, 352),%86'3 3W3

1)
Number 127 126 2
Addresses 0 to 126 0 to 125 -
Remarks Default: 32 addresses of those: -
Reserved are: 1 Master (reserved)
• address 0 for PG 1 PG connection (address 0
• address 1 for OP reserved)
124 slaves or other masters
1)
Note the CPU-specific maximum specifications in the CPU manual.
5-32 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
03,352),%86'3DGGUHVVHV
To ensure that all nodes can intercommunicate, you must assign them an address:
• In the MPI network: an “MPI address“
• In the PROFIBUS DP network: a “PROFIBUS DP address“
On the PG you can specify individual MPI/PROFIBUS addresses for each one of
the nodes (on some of the PROFIBUS DP slaves this is also possible per selector
switch).
'HIDXOW03,352),%86'3DGGUHVVHV
The table below shows you the factory setting of the MPI/PROFIBUS DP
addresses and the highest default MPI/PROFIBUS DP addresses for the devices.
Table 5-14 MPI/PROFIBUS DP addresses
1RGH 'HIDXOW 'HIDXOWKLJKHVW03, 'HIDXOWKLJKHVW

GHYLFH 03,352),%86 DGGUHVV 352),%86'3DGGUHVV
'3DGGUHVV
PG 0 32 126
OP 1 32 126
CPU 2 32 126
5XOHV$VVLJQLQJ03,352),%86'3DGGUHVVHV
Note the following rules before assigning MPI/PROFIBUS addresses:
• All MPI/PROFIBUS addresses in a subnet must be unique.
• The highest MPI/PROFIBUS address must be ≥ of the physical
MPI/PROFIBUS address, and it must be identical for each node. (Exception:
Connecting a PG to multiple nodes; refer to the next Chapter).
A5E00105492-03 5-33
&RQILJXULQJ
'LIIHUHQFHVLQWKHFDVHRI03,DGGUHVVHVRI&3V)0VLQDQ6
Table 5-15 MPI addresses of CPs/FMs in an S7-300
2SWLRQV ([DPSOH
Example: SF
BUSF
CPU CP CP SM
DC5V
FRCE
An S7-300 CPU and 2 CPs in one unit.

RUN
STOP
You have two options for assigning MPI

addresses of CPs/FMs installed in one
unit:
CPU CP CP
)LUVWRSWLRQThe CPU adopts the CP MPI address MPI MPI
MPI addresses you specify in STEP 7. address address.
+x +y
6HFRQGRSWLRQThe CPU automatically MPI address MPI MPI
determines the MPI addresses of the CPs address address
in their configuration as follows: MPI +1 +2
address of CPU; MPI address +1; MPI
address +2.
(Default)
6SHFLDOIHDWXUHV&38'3 This CPU uses only one MPI address,
including the CPs connected.
5HFRPPHQGDWLRQVIRUWKH03,DGGUHVVQ
Reserve MPI address “0“ for a service PG or “1“ for a service OP. You can later
connect them temporarily to the subnet. Also, assign other MPI addresses to
PGs/OPs operating on the MPI subnet.
Recommended MPI address for the CPU in case of replacement or service:
Reserve MPI address “2” for the CPU. This prevents duplication of MPI addresses
after you connect a CPU with default settings to the MPI subnet (for example,
when replacing a CPU). That is, you must assign an MPI address greater than “2”
to CPUs on the MPI subnet.
5HFRPPHQGHG352),%86DGGUHVVQ
Reserve PROFIBUS address “0” for a service PG that you can subsequently
connect briefly to the PROFIBUS subnet if required. Therefore, assign unique
PROFIBUS addresses to PGs integrated in the PROFIBUS subnet.
5-34 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
352),%86'3(OHFWULFDOFRQGXFWRURUILEHURSWLFFDEOH"
Use fiber optic cables instead of copper conductors if you want your field bus to
cover greater distances regardless of the transmission rate and be insensitive to
external noise fields.
(TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ
For information on what to take into account relating to equipotential bonding when
you configure your network, refer to the corresponding chapter in the appendix.
$OVRQRWH
the section referring to communication in the relevant CPU manual.
,QWHUIDFHV
03,LQWHUIDFH
$YDLODELOLW\,QDOOWKH&38VGHVFULEHGLQWKLVGRFXPHQW
The MPI (Multipoint Interface) represents the CPU's interface for PG/OP
connections or for communication in an MPI subnet.
The typical (default) baud rate for all CPUs is 187.5 Kbps. You can also set the
rate to 19.2 Kbps for communication with an S7-200. Other baud rates are only
possible with CPU 317-2 DP (up to 12 Mbps).
The CPU broadcasts its bus parameter configuration via the MPI interface (e.g. the
transmission rate). This allows a PG, for example, to acquire the correct
parameters and automatically connect to an MPI subnet.
1RWH
In RUN mode you may only connect PGs to the MPI subnet.
Other stations (e.g.. OP, TP, ...) should not be connected to the MPI subnet while
the PLC is in run mode. Otherwise, transferred data might be corrupted as a result
interference or global data packages be lost.
A5E00105492-03 5-35
&RQILJXULQJ
352),%86'3LQWHUIDFH
$YDLODELOLW\&38W\SHVZLWKWKH'3LQWKHLUQDPH
The PROFIBUS-DP interface is mainly used to connect distributed I/O.
PROFIBUS DP allows you to create large, extended subnets, for example.
The PROFIBUS DP interface can be configured as either master or slave, and
offers a transmission speed of up to 12 Mbps.
The CPU sends its bus parameters (e.g. the baud rate) to the PROFIBUS DP
interface (if it is used as the master). A programming device, for example, can then
automatically retrieve the correct parameters and connect to a PROFIBUS subnet.
In your configuration, you can disable this bus parameter broadcast.
CPU 317-2 DP has two DP interfaces: The first interface is an MPI/DP interface
that you can reconfigure as a PROFIBUS interface in STEP 7.
Table 5-16 Possible interface operating modes for CPU 317-2 DP
03,'3LQWHUIDFH; 352),%86'3LQWHUIDFH;
• MPI • Not assigned
• DP master • DP master
1) 1
• DP slave • DP slave
1)
Excluded: DP slave at both interfaces simultaneously
1RWH
)RUWKH'3LQWHUIDFHLQVODYHPRGH
If you have disabled the Commissioning / Test mode check box in the DP interface
properties in STEP 7, the baud rate you have set will be ignored, and the master's
baud rate will be used automatically, The routing function is then no longer
possible over this interface.
&URVVUHIHUHQFH
For information on the new DPV1 functionality, see the section with the same
name in the &38'DWD5HIHUHQFH0DQXDO&38[&DQG&38[.
3W3LQWHUIDFH
$YDLODELOLW\&38W\SHVZLWKWKHLGHQWLILHU3W3
You can use the PtP (Point to Point) interface on your CPU to connect external
devices such as a barcode reader, printer, etc. to a serial port. Baud rates of up to
19.2 Kbps for full duplex (RS 422) and up to 38.4 Kbps for half duplex (RS 485) are
possible.
The following PtP communication drivers are installed in the CPUs:
• ASCII driver
• 3964(R) Protocol
• RK 512 (only CPU 314C-2 PtP)
5-36 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
:KLFKGHYLFHVFDQ,FRQQHFWWRZKLFKLQWHUIDFH"
Table 5-17 The following devices may be connected
03, 352),%86'3 3W3

• PG/PC • PG/PC • Devices equipped with a
• OP/TP • OP/TP serial port, e.g. barcode
readers, printers, etc.
• S7-300/400 with MPI • DP slaves
interface • DP master
• S7-200 • Actuators/Sensors
(19.2 Kbps only)
• S7-300/400 with
PROFIBUS-DP
interface
)XUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQ
Further information on specific connections can be found in the &RPPXQLFDWLRQ
ZLWK6,0$7,& manual.
Details on PtP communication is found in the 7HFKQRORJLFDO)XQFWLRQV Manual.
A5E00105492-03 5-37
&RQILJXULQJ
1HWZRUN&RPSRQHQWV
352),%86EXVFDEOH
For PROFIBUS DP or MPI networking we offer you the following bus cables for
diverse fields of application:
Table 5-18 Available bus cables
%XVFDEOH 2UGHU1R
PROFIBUS cable 6XV1 830-0AH10
PROFIBUS cable, halogen-free 6XV1 830-0CH10
PROFIBUS underground cable 6XV1 830-3AH10
PROFIBUS trailing cable 6XV1 830-3BH10
PROFIBUS cable with PUR sheath for 6XV1 830-0DH10
environments subject to chemical and
mechanical stress
PROFIBUS bus cable with PE sheath for 6XV1 830-0BH10
the food and beverages industry
PROFIBUS bus cable for festooning 6XV1 830-3CH10
3URSHUWLHVRI352),%86FDEOHV
The PROFIBUS cable is a shielded twisted-pair cable with copper conductors. It is
used for line transmission in accordance with US Standard EIA RS485.
The table below lists the characteristics of these bus cables.
Table 5-19 Characteristics of the bus cables for PROFIBUS
&KDUDFWHULVWLFVRIWKHEXVFDEOHVIRU 9DOXHV
352),%863URSHUWLHV
Impedance level approx. 135 Ω to 160 Ω (f = 3 MHz to 20 MHz)
Loop resistance ≤ 115 Ω/km
Effective capacitance 30 nF/km
Attenuation 0.9 dB/100 m (f = 200 kHz)
2 2
permitted conductor cross-sections 0.3 mm to 0.5 mm
permitted cable diameter 8 mm ± 0.5 mm
5-38 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
:LULQJEXVFDEOHV
When wiring PROFIBUS cables, you must not
• twist,
• stretch
• or compress them.
When wiring indoor bus cables, also maintain the following marginal conditions
(dA = outer cable diameter):
Table 5-20 Marginal conditions for wiring interior bus cables
&KDUDFWHULVWLFV &RQGLWLRQ
Bending radius (one-off) ≥ 80 mm (10 x dA)
Bending radius (multiple times) ≥ 160 mm (20 x dA)
permitted temperature range during installation -5 °C to +50 °C
Shelf and stationary operating temperature range -30 °C to +65 °C
&URVVUHIHUHQFH
If you want to use fiber optic cable cables for PROFIBUS, you can find further
information on this topic in the SIMATIC NET, PROFIBUS Networks Manual.
56EXVFRQQHFWRU
Table 5-21 Bus connector
7\SH 2UGHU1R
RS485 bus connector, up to 12 Mbps,
with 90° cable exit,
without PG interface, 6ES7 972-0BA11-0XA0
with PG interface 6ES7 972-0BB11-0XA0
Fast Connect RS485 bus connector, up to 12 Mbps,
with 90° cable exit, with insulation displacement technology
, without PG interface, 6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0
RS485 bus connector up to 12 Mbps
with 35° cable exit (not for CPU 31xC, 312, 314, and 315-2
DP
without PG interface 6ES7 972-0BA40-0XA0
$SSOLFDWLRQ
You require these bus connectors to connect the PROFIBUS cable to an MPI or
PROFIBUS-DP interface
You do QRW require a bus connector for:
• DP slaves with degree of protection IP 65 (e.g. ET 200C)
• RS485 repeater.
A5E00105492-03 5-39
&RQILJXULQJ
56UHSHDWHU
Table 5-22 RS 485 repeater
7\SH 2UGHU1R
RS485 repeater 6ES7 972-0AA00-0XA0
3XUSRVH
An RS485 repeater amplifies data signals on bus lines and interconnects bus
segments.
You require this RS485 Repeater in the following situations:
• for operation with more than 32 network nodes
• when interconnecting a grounded and an ungrounded segment
• when exceeding the maximum line length in a segment
7KHPD[LPXPFDEOHOHQJWKVIRU565HSHDWHUV
... can be found in the Chapter &DEOHOHQJWKV.
/RQJHUFDEOHOHQJWKV
If you want to implement cable lengths above those permitted in a segment, you
must use RS485 repeaters. The maximum cable length possible between two
RS485 repeaters corresponds to the cable length of a segment (see the following
Chapter). Please note that these maximum cable lengths only apply if no other
node is interconnected between the two RS485 repeaters. You can connect up to
nine RS485 repeaters in series.
Please note that you have to add the RS485 repeater when you determine the
number of nodes in your subnet, even if it is not assigned its own MPI/PROFIBUS
address.
7HFKQLFDOGDWDDQGLQVWDOODWLRQLQVWUXFWLRQVDUHIRXQG
... in the RS485 Repeater product information.
3*SDWFKFRUG
Table 5-23 PG patch cord
7\SH 2UGHU1R
PG patch cord 6ES7 901-4BD00-0XA0
5-40 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
6WXEFDEOHV
If bus nodes are connected to a bus segment via stub cables (e.g. PG via a normal
PG cable), then you must consider the maximum possible length of the stub cable.
You can use a PROFIBUS bus cable with bus connector as the stub cable for up to
3 Mbps.
Use the patch cord to connect the PG or PC when operating above 3 Mbps. In your
bus configuration you can use multiple PG patch cords with this order no. Do not
use other types of stub cable.
7KHPD[LPXPFDEOHOHQJWKVIRU3*SDWFKFRUGV
... can be found in the Chapter &DEOHOHQJWKV.
&DEOH/HQJWK
03,VXEQHWVHJPHQW
You can implement cable lengths of up to 50 m in an MPI subnet segment. This
50 m applies from the first node to the last node in the segment.
Table 5-24 Permitted cable lengths in an MPI subnet segment
7UDQVPLVVLRQUDWH 6&38VQRQLVRODWHG &38'3

03,LQWHUIDFHZLWKRXW&38
'3
19.2 kbps 50 m 1,000 m
187.5 kbps
1.5 Mbps - M 200
3.0 Mbps M 100
6.0 Mbps
12.0 Mbps
6HJPHQWLQWKH352),%86VXEQHW
The cable length in a segment of a PROFIBUS subnet depends on the
transmission rate.
Table 5-25 Permitted cable lengths in a PROFIBUS subnet segment
7UDQVPLVVLRQUDWH 0D[LPXPFDEOHOHQJWKLQDVHJPHQW
9.6 kbps to 187.5 kbps 1,000 m
500 kbps M 400
1.5 Mbps M 200
3 Mbps to 12 Mbps M 100
A5E00105492-03 5-41
&RQILJXULQJ
/RQJHUFDEOHOHQJWKV
If you want to implement cable lengths above those permitted in a segment, you
must use RS485 repeaters. Information on this topic can be found in the
RS485 repeater product information.
/HQJWKRIWKHVWXEFDEOHV
If bus nodes are connected to a bus segment via stub cables (e.g. PG via a normal
PG cable), then you must consider the maximum possible length of the stub cable.
The following table lists the maximum permitted lengths of stub cables per
segment:
Table 5-26 Stub cable lengths per segment
7UDQVPLVVLRQUDWH 0D[OHQJWKRIVWXE 1XPEHURIQRGHVZLWKVWXEFDEOHOHQJWK

FDEOHVSHUVHJPHQW RI
PRUP 0
9.6 kbps to 93.75 M 96 32 32
kbps
187.5 kbps M 75 32 25
500 kbps M 30 20 10
1.5 Mbps M 10 6 3
1) 1) 1)
3 Mbps to 12 Mbps
1)
At 3 Mbps and higher, use the PG patch cord (Order No. 6ES7 901-4BD00-0XA0) to
connect the PG or PC. You can use multiple PG patch cords of this number in an
installation. Do not use any other type of stub cable.
5-42 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
6DPSOH1HWZRUNV
([DPSOH,QVWDOOLQJDQ03,VXEQHW
The figure below shows you the block diagram of an MPI subnet.
S7-300 3 S7-300 3 S7-300 3 S7-300

SF
BUSF
2 PG 3
DC5V
FRCE
RUN
STOP
PS CPU PS CPU
CPU PS CPU
CPU PS CPU
CPU CP
2
OP 27
MPI addr. 2 MPI addr. 1 MPI addr. 3 MPI addr. 4 MPI addr. 5 MPI addr. 6 MPI addr. 7
PROFIBUS 4
1
3 S7-300 3 S7-300 3 S7-300

3
PS CPU
CPU PS CPU
CPU PS CPU
CPU FM
OP 27 OP 27
MPI addr. 13 MPI addr. 12 MPI addr. 11 MPI addr. 10 MPI addr. 8 MPI addr. 9
1
MPI addr. 0
PG
Figure 5-14 Example of an MPI subnet
Terminating resistor inserted
S7-300 and OP 27 have subsequently been connected to the MPI subnet using their MPI default
address.
CPU 31xC, 312, 314, 315-2 DP
You can also assign MPI addresses of CPs/FMs for these CPUs.
CPU 317-2 DP
CPs and FMs do not have their own MPI address in this CPU.
In addition to the MPI address, the CP also has a PROFIBUS address (7 in this case).
Connected via a stub cable using the default MPI address for commissioning/maintenance only
A5E00105492-03 5-43
&RQILJXULQJ
([DPSOH0D[LPXPGLVWDQFHVLQWKH03,VXEQHW
The figure below shows you:
• a possible MPI Subnet configuration
• maximum distances possible in an MPI subnet
• the principle of “Line extension“ using RS485 repeaters
3 S7-300 3 S7-300 3 S7-300 1

PG
PS CPU
CPU PS CPU
CPU PS CPU
CPU RS 485-
OP 27 Repeater
MPI addr. 3 MPI addr. 4 MPI addr. 5 MPI addr. 6 MPI addr. 7
1 1
PG 2
MPI addr. 0 max. 1000 m
max. 50 m
3 S7-300 3 S7-300 1
PS CPU
CPU PS CPU
CPU RS 485-
OP 27 OP 27 Repeater
MPI addr. 11 MPI addr. 10 MPI addr. 9 MPI addr. 8
1 1
max. 50 m
Figure 5-15 Example: Maximum distances in the MPI subnet
PG connected by means of a stub cable for maintenance purposes
5-44 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
([DPSOH,QVWDOOLQJD352),%86VXEQHW
The figure below shows you the block diagram of a PROFIBUS subnet.
3 S7-300 3 3 S7-300
CPU
31x-2 DP
PS CPU PS ET
CPU200M PS ET
CPU200M PSPSCPU
CPU
ET 200 M
DP-CPU PS ET
CPU200M
MASTER S5-95U
1
MPI addr. 3 PROFIBUS PROFIBUS PROFIBUS PROFIBUS PROFIBUS PROFIBUS
addr. 2 addr. 3 addr. 4 addr. 5 addr. 6 addr. 7
MPI addr. 0
PG 2
PS ET
CPU200M CPU
ET 200B ET 200B CPU
ET 200B CPU
ET 200B
1
PROFIBUS
1 PROFIBUS PROFIBUS PROFIBUS PROFIBUS
addr. 12 addr. 11 addr. 10 addr. 9 addr. 8
Figure 5-16 Example of a PROFIBUS subnet
A5E00105492-03 5-45
&RQILJXULQJ
([DPSOH&38&'3DV03,DQG352),%86QRGH
The figure below shows you an assembly with a CPU 314C-2 DP integrated in an
MPI subnet and also operated as DP master in a PROFIBUS subnet.
S7-300
PG
S5-95U
CPU
PS CPU
1 DP addr. 7
MPI addr. 0 1
MPI addr. 2
2
S5-95U
DP addr. 6
S7-300
PS CPU
S5-95U
MPI addr. 3 DP addr. 5
S7-300 CPU
with DP interface
S7-300 as DP master
1
CPU
PS CPU CPU
PS DP-CPU RS 485-
OP 27 ET200M ET200M Repeater
MPI addr. 4 MPI addr. 5 1 DP addr. 2 DP addr. 3 DP addr. 4
S7-300 MPI addr. 6
CPU
PS CPU ET200M ET200M
OP 27 9
DP addr. 9 DP addr. 8
1 MPI addr. 8 MPI addr. 7
ET200B ET200B
1
DP addr. 10 DP addr. 11
MPI subnet PROFIBUS subnet
Figure 5-17 Example: CPU 314C-2 DP as MPI and PROFIBUS nodes
PG connected via a stub cable for maintenance or commissioning purposes
5-46 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
([DPSOH3*DFFHVVDFURVVQHWZRUNERXQGDULHVURXWLQJ
With a programming device you can access all modules across network
boundaries.
Requirements
• You are using STEP 7 Version 5.0 or higher.
Note: for STEP 7 requirements on utilized CPUs, refer to technical
specifications.
• You must assign the PG/PC to a network in your STEP 7 project (SIMATIC
Manager, assigning a PG/PC).
• The network boundaries must be bridged by modules with routing capability.
• After having configured all networks in NETPRO, you have initiated a new
compilation for all stations and downloaded the configuration to every module
capable of routing. This also applies to all changes made in the network.
Thus, every router knows all possible paths to a target station.
PG/PC 3
S7-400 S7-400
PS CPU416
CPU PS CPU
CPU417
MPI (2)
MPI (1) S7-300 S7-300
CPU PS CPU
CPU
PS CPU
31x-2 DP
PG/PC 1
PROFIBUS-DP
ET200
CPU
PG/PC 2
Figure 5-18 Example of PG access across network boundaries (routing)
1RWH
)RU&38VZLWK'3LQWHUIDFHRQO\
If these CPUs are operated as I-slaves and you want to use the routing function,
you must activate the Commissioning/Test Mode functionality in the Properties -
DP Interface for DP Slave in STEP 7.
A5E00105492-03 5-47
&RQILJXULQJ
,QIRUPDWLRQRQURXWLQJFDQEHIRXQGLQWKH
• &38'DWD5HIHUHQFH0DQXDOfor your CPU
• In the &RPPXQLFDWLRQZLWK6,0$7,& manual.
([DPSOH7HUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRULQWKH03,VXEQHW
The figure below shows you an example of an MPI subnet and where to install the
terminating resistor.
The figure below illustrates where the terminating resistors must be connected in
an MPI subnet. In this example, the programming device is connected via a stub
cable during commissioning or maintenance only.
S7-300 PG
PSPSCPU
CPU
ET 200 M
CPU
S7-300 S7-300 1 S7-300

RS 485-
PSPSCPU
CPU
ET 200 M PSPSCPU
CPU
ET 200 M Repeater PSPSCPU
CPU
ET 200 M
OP 27 OP 27
1 1
2
PG
Installing Figure 5-19 the terminating resistors in an MPI subnet
5-48 A5E00105492-03
&RQILJXULQJ
:DUQLQJ
Disturbance of data traffic might occur on the bus.
A bus segment must always be terminated at both ends with the terminating
resistor. This, for example, is not the case if the last slave with bus connector is off
power.
Since the bus connector draws its power from the station, the terminating resistor
has no effect.
Please make sure that power is always supplied to stations on which the
terminating resistor is active.
As an alternative, you can also use the PROFIBUS Terminator as active bus
termination.
A5E00105492-03 5-49
&RQILJXULQJ
5-50 A5E00105492-03

,QVWDOODWLRQ

,QVWDOOLQJDQ6
,QWKLV&KDSWHU
we shall explain the steps required for the mechanical assembly of an S7-300.
1RWH
Note the installation guidelines and notes on safety in this manual when mounting,
commissioning and operating S7-300 systems.
2SHQFRPSRQHQWV
S7-300 modules are "Open Components" according to IEC 61131-2 and
EU directive 73/23/EEC (Low-Voltage directive), and to UL/CSA Approval an "open
type".
In order to conform with specifications on safe operation relating to mechanical
strength, inflammability, stability and touch-protection, the following alternative
installation modes are prescribed:
• Installation in a suitable cubicle
• Installation in a suitable cabinet
• Installation in an appropriately equipped and closed operating area
Access to these areas must only be possible with a key or tool. Only trained or
authorized personnel is allowed access to these cubicles, cabinets or electrical
operating rooms.
A5E00105492-03 6-1
,QVWDOODWLRQ
$FFHVVRULHVLQFOXGHG
Installation accessories are included with the module package. The appendix
contains a list of accessories and spare parts together with the corresponding
order numbers.
Table 6-1 Module accessories
0RGXOH $FFHVVRULHVLQFOXGHG 'HVFULSWLRQ

CPU 1 x Slot number label For assigning slot numbers
Inscription labels for the MPI address and
Firmware Version (all CPUs)
for labeling of integrated
inputs and outputs (CPU
31xC only)
Tip: Templates for labeling
strips are available on the
Internet at
http://www.ad.siemens.de/cs
info under article ID
11978022.
Signal module (SM) 1 bus connector For electrical interconnection
Function Module (FM) of modules
1 labeling strip for labeling module I/O
Internet at
info under article ID 406745.
Communication module (CP) 1 bus connector For electrical interconnection
of modules
1 inscription label for labeling the connection to
(only CP 342-2) the PLC interface
Internet at
info under article ID 406745.
Interface module (IM) 1 x Slot number label (only For assigning slot numbers
IM 361 and IM 365) on racks 1 to 3
6-2 A5E00105492-03
,QVWDOODWLRQ
7RROVDQGPDWHULDOUHTXLUHG
For your S7-300 installation you require the tools and materials listed in the table
below.
Table 6-2 Installation tools and materials
<RXUHTXLUH IRU
cutting the 2 m rail to length Standard tool
scribing and drilling holes on the 2 m rail Standard tool, 6.5 mm diameter drill bit
screw-mounting the rail wrench or screwdriver, matching the
selected fixing screws
diverse M6 screws (length depends on the
place of installation) with nuts and spring
lock washers
screw-fastening the modules on the rail screwdriver with 3.5 mm blade width
(cylindrical design)
pulling out the grounding slide contact in the screwdriver with 3.5 mm blade width
floating state (cylindrical design)
,QVWDOOLQJWKHUDLO
,QWURGXFWLRQ
rails are available in two versions:
• Ready-to-use, in four standard lengths (with 4 holes for fixing screws and
1 ground conductor bolt)
• Meter rail
This may be shortened to any length if unusual size attachments are required. It
has no holes for fixing screws and no ground conductor screw.
5HTXLUHPHQW
You have prepared the 2 m rail for installation.
A5E00105492-03 6-3
,QVWDOODWLRQ
3UHSDULQJWKHPUDLOIRULQVWDOODWLRQ
1. Cut the 2 m rail to the required length.
2. Mark out:
– four bores for the fixing screws (for dimensions refer to "Dimensions for
fixing holes")
– one hole for the protective conductor bolt.
3. If the length of your rail exceeds 830 mm, you must stabilize it by providing
additional holes for fixing it with more screws.
Mark out these holes along the groove in the middle section of the rail (see the
Figure below). The pitch should be approx. 500 mm.
+0.2
4. Drill the marked holes to a diameter of 6.5 mm for M6 screws.
5. Attach an M6 screw for fixing the ground conductor.
2 3
1
5
Figure 6-1 Holes for mounting the 2 m rail
Hole for ground conductor screw
Groove for drilling additional holes for mounting screws
Hole for mounting screw
Additional hole for mounting screw
Hole for mounting screw
6-4 A5E00105492-03
,QVWDOODWLRQ
'LPHQVLRQRIWKHPRXQWLQJKROHV
The mounting hole dimensions for the rail are shown in the table below.
Table 6-3 Mounting holes for rails
³6WDQGDUG´UDLO PUDLO
32.5
32,5 mm
mm
32.5 mm
57.2 mm
57,2 mm
57.2 mm
ca. ca.
500 mm 500 mm
15 mm _ _ 15 mm _ _
a b
Length of rail Dimension a Dimension b –

160 mm 10 mm 140 mm
482.6 mm 8.3 mm 466 mm
530 mm 15 mm 500 mm
830 mm 15 mm 800 mm
)L[LQJVFUHZV
You can use the following type of screw to mount the rails:
)RU 7\SHRIVFUHZ 'HVFULSWLRQ

Lateral fixing screws Cylindrical head screw M6 to Choose a suitable screw
ISO 1207/ISO 1580 length for your assembly.
(DIN 84/DIN 85) You also need size 6.4
M6 hexagonal head screw to washers to ISO 7092
ISO 4017 (DIN 4017) (DIN 433)
additional fixing screws Cylindrical head screw M6 to
(only 2 m rail) ISO 1207/ISO 1580
(DIN 84/DIN 85)
A5E00105492-03 6-5
,QVWDOODWLRQ
,QVWDOOLQJWKHUDLO
1. When you mount the rails, allow sufficient space for mounting modules and heat
elimination (at least 40 mm above and below the modules. See the figure
below).
2. Mark up the mounting holes on the mounting surface. Drill the holes to a
+0,2
diameter of 6.5 mm.
3. Screw on the rail (M6 screws).
1RWH
Take care to create a low-impedance connection between the rail and a
mounting surface which is a grounded metal plate or equipment mounting plate.
In the case of varnished or anodized metals, for instance, use a suitable
contacting agent or contact washers.
40 mm
SIEMENS
20 20
mm mm
40 mm
Figure 6-2 Free space required for an S7-300 installation
6-6 A5E00105492-03
,QVWDOODWLRQ
,QVWDOOLQJ0RGXOHVRQWKH5DLO
5HTXLUHPHQWIRULQVWDOOLQJWKHPRGXOH
• Configuration of the automation system is complete.
• The rail is installed.
2UGHURIWKHPRGXOHV
Snap the modules onto the rail, starting at the left and in the following order:
1. Power supply module
2. CPU
3. signal modules, function modules, communication modules, interface modules
1RWH
If you install SM 331 analog input modules, please check EHIRUH installation
whether you have to reposition the measuring range submodules at the side of the
module. See Chapter 4 on analog modules in the 0RGXOH'DWD Reference Manual.
1RWH
If you want to create the S7-300 with a floating reference potential, you must
establish this state on the CPU, ideally before you attach it to the rail. The section
entitled &UHDWLQJDQ6ZLWKIORDWLQJUHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDO contains the
necessary instructions.
A5E00105492-03 6-7
,QVWDOODWLRQ
,QVWDOODWLRQVWHSV
The steps for installing the modules are described below.
1. Plug the bus connectors into the CPU and

signal/function/communication/interface
modules.
One bus connector is included per
module, but not for the CPU.
• Always start at the CPU when you plug CPU
in the bus connectors. Here, take the
bus connector of the "last" module in
the row.
• Insert the bus connectors into the
other modules.
The "last" module is not equipped with
a bus connector.
2. Lower each module onto the rail in the 1
intended order , slide each module in 2
turn to the module on the left ), and pivot
the module down into place .
CPU
3
3. Attach the modules with screws until
hand-tight.
CPU
6-8 A5E00105492-03
,QVWDOODWLRQ
/DEHOWKHPRGXOHV
$VVLJQLQJVORWQXPEHUV
After installation, you should assign a slot number to each module. This makes it
easier to assign the modules in the configuration table in 67(3. The table below
shows the slot number assignment.
Table 6-4 Slot numbers for S7 modules
6ORWQXPEHU 0RGXOH 5HPDUNV

1 Power supply (PS) –
2 CPU –
3 Interface module (IM) To the right of the CPU
4 1st signal module To the right of the CPU or IM
5 2nd signal module –
6 3rd signal module –
7 4th signal module –
A5E00105492-03 6-9
,QVWDOODWLRQ
,QVHUWLQJVORWQXPEHUV
1. Hold the corresponding slot number in front of the relevant module.
2. Insert the pin into the opening on the module (1).
3. Press the slot number into the module (2). The slot number breaks off from the
wheel.
The figure below illustrates this procedure. The slot number labels are included
with the CPU.
PS CP
U
Figure 6-3 Inserting slot numbers in modules
6-10 A5E00105492-03

:LULQJ

:LULQJ
,QWKLV&KDSWHU
we shall explain the procedures for wiring an S7-300.
$FFHVVRULHVUHTXLUHG
To wire the S7-300, you require the accessories listed in the table below.
Table 7-1 Wiring accessories
$FFHVVRULHV 'HVFULSWLRQ
Front connector for the connection of system
sensors/actuators to the S7-300
Labeling strips for labeling the module I/O
Shielding contact element, shielding for connecting cable shielding
terminals (matching the shielding diameter)
A5E00105492-03 7-1
:LULQJ
7RROVDQGPDWHULDOUHTXLUHG
To wire the S7-300, you require the tools and materials listed in the table below.
:LULQJWRROVDQGPDWHULDOV<RXUHTXLUH IRU
connecting the protective conductor to the Wrench (size 10)
rail Protective conductor cable (cross-
2
section ≥ 10 mm ) with M6 cable lug
M6 nut, washer, spring lock washer
Adjusting the power supply module to mains Screwdriver with a blade width of 4.5 mm
voltage
Wiring the power supply module and the Screwdriver with a blade width of 3.5 mm,
CPU side-cutter, wire stripping tool
Flexible cable, e.g. sheathed flexible cable
2
3 x 1.5 mm
If required, wire end ferrules to DIN 46228
Wiring the front connector Screwdriver with a blade width of 3.5 mm,
side-cutter, wire stripping tool
2 2
Flexible cable 0.25 mm to 0.75/1.5 mm
If required, shielded cables
If required, wire end ferrules to DIN 46228
%ULHIRYHUYLHZRIWKHSRZHUVXSSO\PRGXOHDQG&38
Table 7-2 Conditions for connecting the PS and CPU
&RQQHFWDEOHFDEOHV WR36DQG&38
solid conductors No
flexible conductors
2 2
• Without wire end ferrule 0.25 mm to 2.5 mm
2 2
• With wire end ferrule 0.25 mm to 1.5 mm
2
Number of conductors per terminal 1 conductor, or 2 conductors up to 1.5 mm
(total) in a common wire end ferrule
Diameter of the conductor insulation max. 3.8 mm
Stripped length 11 mm
Wire end ferrules to DIN 46228
• Without insulating collar Version A, 10 mm to 12 mm length
• With insulating collar Version E, up to 12 mm length
7-2 A5E00105492-03
:LULQJ
%ULHIRYHUYLHZRIIURQWFRQQHFWRUV
Table 7-3 Wiring conditions for front connectors
&RQQHFWDEOHFDEOHV )URQWFRQQHFWRU
20-pin 40-pin
solid conductors No No
flexible conductors
2 2 2 2
• Without wire end 0.25 mm to 1.5 mm 0.25 mm to 0.75 mm
ferrule 2
0.25 mm to 1.5 mm
2 2
0.25 mm to 0.75 mm
2
• With wire end ferrule • Potential supply: 1.5 mm

2
Number of conductors per 1 conductor, or 2 conductors 1 conductor, or 2 conductors

2 2
terminal up to 1.5 mm (total) in a up to 0.75 mm (total) in a
common wire end ferrule common wire end ferrule
Diameter of the conductor max. 3.1 mm • max. 2.0 mm for
insulation 40 conductors
• max. 3.1 mm for 20
conductors
Stripped length 6 mm 6 mm
Wire end ferrules to DIN
46228
• Without insulating Version A, 5 mm to 7 mm Version A, 5 mm to 7 mm
collar length length
• With insulating collar Version E, up to 6 mm long Version E, up to 6 mm long
A5E00105492-03 7-3
:LULQJ
&RQQHFWLQJWKH3URWHFWLYH&RQGXFWRUWRWKH5DLO
5HTXLUHPHQW
The rail is fixed to the mounting surface.
&RQQHFWLQJWKHSURWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
1. Connect the protective conductor to the rail,
using the M6 protective conductor bolt.
2
Minimum cross-section of the protective conductor: 10 mm .
The figure below shows how the protective conductor must be bonded to the rail.
Figure 7-1 connecting the protective conductor to the rail
1RWH
Always ensure a low-impedance connection of the protective conductor. You can
achieve this by bonding a cable with low impedance and as short as possible to a
large contact surface.
For example, if the S7-300 is mounted on a hinged frame you must use a flexible
ground strap.
7-4 A5E00105492-03
:LULQJ
$GMXVWLQJWKH3RZHU6XSSO\0RGXOHWRWKH0DLQV9ROWDJH
,QWURGXFWLRQ
You can operate the S7-300 power supply on 120 VAC or on 230 VAC. Factory
setting for PS 307 is always 230 VAC.
6HWWLQJWKHPDLQVYROWDJHVHOHFWRUVZLWFK
Check to see whether the selector switch is set to the correct mains voltage.
You can change the selector switch setting as follows:
1. Remove the protective cap with a screwdriver.
2. Set the selector switch to the available line voltage.
3. Replace the cover.
PS CPU
Figure 7-2 Setting the mains voltage selector switch for the PS 307
Remove protective cap with screwdriver.
Set selector switch to mains voltage
A5E00105492-03 7-5
:LULQJ
:LULQJWKH3RZHU6XSSO\0RGXOHDQGWKH&38
5HTXLUHPHQW
The modules are mounted on the rail.
36DQG&38ZLULQJ

1RWH
The PS 307 power supply module is equipped with two additional DC 24 V
connections (L+ and M) for the supply of I/O modules.
1RWH
The power supply connection of your CPU can be inserted and removed.
:DUQLQJ
You may come into contact with live wires if the power supply module and any
additional load power supply units are connected to the mains.
You should therefore disconnect the S7-300 from the power supply before starting
the wiring. Only use ferrules with insulating collars to press-fit onto the ends of the
cables. Once you have wired the modules, close all the front panels. You can then
switch on the S7-300 again.
7-6 A5E00105492-03
:LULQJ
1. Open the front panel to the PS 307 power supply module and CPU.
2. Open the strain relief on the PS 307.
3. Strip the power cable to a length of 11 mm and connect it to L1, N and to the
ground conductor terminal of the PS 307.
4. Screw-tighten the strain relief again.
5. Now, wire the power supply and CPU.
The power supply connection of the CPUs can be inserted and removed.
Strip the connecting cables for the CPU power supply to a length of 11 mm.
Connect the lower terminals M and L+ on the PS 307 to terminals M and L+ on
the CPU.
:DUQLQJ
Reversing the polarity of the M and L+ terminals trips the internal fuse on your
CPU. Always connect the M terminal of the power supply and CPU and the L+
terminal of the power supply and CPU to one another.
6. Close the front panel.

The figure below illustrates the procedures described above.
DC 24 V
230V
L1
N
L+
M
L+
M L+
M
1
3
230 V/120 V
2
Figure 7-3 Wiring the power supply module and the CPU
Strain relief of the power supply
Connection cables between the power supply and CPU
Removable power supply connection
A5E00105492-03 7-7
:LULQJ
1RWH
The PS 307 power supply module is equipped with two additional DC 24 V
connections (L+ and M) for the supply of I/O modules.
:LULQJ)URQW&RQQHFWRUV
,QWURGXFWLRQ
The front connector is used to connect the sensors and actuators of your system to
the S7-300 PLC. Wire the sensors and actuators to this front connector and then
plug it into the module.
)URQWFRQQHFWRUYHUVLRQV
Front connectors come in 20-pin and 40-pin versions, each with screw contacts or
spring terminals. 40-pin front connectors are required for CPUs 31xC and
32-channel signal modules.
You must use the following front connectors, depending on the module:
Table 7-4 Assignment of front connectors to modules
0RGXOH )URQWFRQQHFWRUVZLWK )URQWFRQQHFWRUVZLWK

VFUHZWHUPLQDOV2UGHU VSULQJWHUPLQDOV2UGHU
1R 1R
Signal modules 6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0 6ES7 392-1BJ00-0AA0
(not 32-channel),
Function modules,
Communication module
CP 342-2
Signal modules 6ES7 392-1AM00-0AA0 6ES7 392-1BM01-0AA0
(32-channel) and
CPU 31xC
7HUPLQDWLRQZLWKVSULQJWHUPLQDOV
To terminate a conductor in a front connector with spring terminals, simply insert
the screwdriver vertically into the opening with the red opening mechanism, insert
the wire into the terminal and remove the screwdriver.
7-8 A5E00105492-03
:LULQJ
:DUQLQJ
You can damage the spring-based opening mechanism of the front connector if the
screwdriver slips sideways or if you insert the wrong size of screwdriver. Always
slide a suitable screwdriver vertically into the desired opening until it reaches the
stop. This will ensure that the spring terminal is fully open.
7LS
There is a separate opening for test probes up to 2 mm in diameter to the left of the
opening for the screwdriver.
5HTXLUHPHQW
The modules (SM, FM, CP 342-2) are mounted on the rail.
A5E00105492-03 7-9
:LULQJ
3UHSDULQJWKHIURQWFRQQHFWRUDQGWKHFDEOHV

:DUQLQJ
You may come into contact with live wires if the power supply module and any
additional load power supply units are connected to the mains.
You should therefore disconnect the S7-300 from the power supply before starting
the wiring. Once you have wired the modules, close all the front panels. You can
then switch on the S7-300 again.
1. Switch off the power supply.

2. Open the front panel.
3. Move the front connector into wiring position.
Slide the front connector into the signal module until it latches. The front
connector still protrudes from the module in this position.
Advantage of the wiring position: Easy wiring.
In this wiring position the front connector does not contact the module.
4. Strip the leads to a length of 6 mm.
5. Crimp on the cable end sleeves, e.g. for terminating 2 conductors on 1 terminal.
2
PS CPU
32
Figure 7-4 Move the front connector into wiring position
Table 7-5 Assignment of front connectors to modules
Switched-off power supply (PS)
Opened module
Front connector in wiring position
7-10 A5E00105492-03
:LULQJ
:LULQJWKHIURQWFRQQHFWRU
Table 7-6 Wiring the front connector
6WHS SLQIURQWFRQQHFWRU SLQIURQWFRQQHFWRU

1. Thread the accompanying strain relief for -
the cable line into the front connector.
2. Do you want to exit the cables at the bottom of the module?
,I\HV
Starting at terminal 20, work your way down Starting at terminal 40 or 20, wire the connector,
to terminal 1. working in alternating passes from terminals 39,
19, 38, 18 etc. until you have reached
terminals 21 and 1.
,IQRW
Starting at terminal 1, work your way up to Starting at terminal 1 or 21, wire the connector,
terminal 20. working in alternating passes from terminals 2,
22, 3, 23 etc. until you have reached
terminals 20 and 40.
3. )URQWFRQQHFWRUVZLWKVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
Screw-tighten unused terminals also.
4. - Place the accompanying strain relief around the
cable line and the front connector.
5. Pull the strain relief for the cable line tight. Push in the strain relief to the left to improve
utilization of the available cable space.
-
1
2
12
1
1
13 14
The work step numbers are shown in the figure above

Thread the strain relief. to Wire the terminals.
Wire the terminals. Tighten the strain relief.
A5E00105492-03 7-11
:LULQJ
,QVHUWLQJ)URQW&RQQHFWRUVLQWR0RGXOHV
5HTXLUHPHQW
The front connectors are completely wired.
,QVHUWLQJWKHIURQWFRQQHFWRU

,QVHUWLQ ZLWKSLQIURQWFRQQHFWRU ZLWKSLQIURQWFRQQHFWRU
JWKH
IURQW
FRQQHFW
RU6WHS
1. Push in the unlocking mechanism on top Tighten the mounting screw in the
of the module. center of the connector.
Keeping the locking mechanism
pressed, insert the front connector into This pulls the front connector
the module. completely into contact with the
Provided the front connector is seated module.
correctly in the module, the unlocking
mechanism automatically returns to
initial position when you release it.
1RWH
When you insert the front connector into the module, an encoding mechanism
engages in the front connector, thus ensuring that the connector can only be
inserted in modules of the same type.
2. Close the front panel. Close the front panel.
1
1
2
PS C
3
PU
PS C
PU 1
2
The work step numbers are shown in the figure above

Keep unlocking mechanism pressed. Tighten mounting screw.
Insert front connector. You can now close the front panel
Then close the front door.
7-12 A5E00105492-03
:LULQJ
/DEHOLQJWKH0RGXOH,2
,QWURGXFWLRQ
The labeling strips are used to document the assignment between inputs/outputs of
the modules and the sensors/actuators of your plant.
You must use the labeling strips, depending on the module:
Table 7-7 Assigning the labeling strips to modules
0RGXOH /DEHOLQJVWULS
2UGHU1R
Signal modules (not 32-channel), 6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0
Function modules,
Communication module CP 342-2
Signal modules (32-channel) 6ES7 392-2XX10-0AA0
/DEHOLQJDQGLQVHUWLQJODEHOLQJVWULSV
1. Label the strips with the addresses of the sensors/actuators.
2. Slide the labeled strips into the front panel.
PS CPU
Figure 7-5 Slide the labeled strips into the front panel
7LS
Templates for labeling strips are available on the Internet at
http://www.ad.siemens.de/csinfo under article ID 11978022.
A5E00105492-03 7-13
:LULQJ
&RQQHFWLQJ6KLHOGHG&DEOHVWRWKH6KLHOGLQJ&RQWDFW(OHPHQW
$SSOLFDWLRQ
Using the shielding contact element, you can easily ground all shielded cables of
S7 modules, due to the direct contact of the shielding contact element to the rail.
'HVLJQRIWKHVKLHOGLQJFRQWDFWHOHPHQW
The shielding contact element consists of:
• a bracket for screw-mounting (with two screws) it onto the rail
(Order No.: 6ES5 390-5AA00-0AA0) and
• the shielding terminals.
You must use the following shielding terminals, depending on the shielding
diameter of your cables:
Table 7-8 Assigning the shielding diameter to shielding terminals
&DEOHZLWKVKLHOGLQJGLDPHWHU 6KLHOGLQJWHUPLQDO2UGHU1R
2 cables each one with a shielding diameter of 2 to 6 6ES7 390-5AB00-0AA0
mm
1 cable with a shielding diameter of 3 to 8 mm 6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0
1 cable with a shielding diameter of 4 to 13 mm 6ES7 390-5CA00-0AA0
The shielding contact element width is 80 mm. It provides termination space in two
rows, each one for 4 shielding terminals.
0RXQWLQJWKHVKLHOGLQJFRQWDFWHOHPHQW
1. Push the two screw bolts of the fixing bracket into the guide on the underside of
the rail.
2. Position the bracket underneath the modules whose shielded cables are to be
terminated.
3. Screw-tighten the bracket onto the rail.
4. The shielding terminal is equipped with a slotted web underneath. Place the
shielding terminal at this position onto the edge of the bracket (see figure
below). Push the shield terminal down and swing it into the desired position.
7-14 A5E00105492-03
:LULQJ
The two rows of the shielding contact element allow you install a maximum of
4 shielding terminals.
PS CP
U
1
3
2
Figure 7-6 Shielding contact element underneath two signal modules
Bracket of shielding contact element
Edge of bracket where the shielding terminal(s) must be placed.
Shielding terminals
7HUPLQDWLQJFDEOHV
Only one or two shielded cables can be terminated per shielding terminal (see the
figure below). The cable is clamped in at the stripped cable shielding.
1. Strip the cable shielding to a length of at least 20 mm.
2. Clamp in the stripped cable shielding underneath the shielding contact clamp.
Push the shielding clamp towards the module (1) and feed the cable through
underneath the clamp (2).
A5E00105492-03 7-15
:LULQJ
If you need more than four shielding terminals, start wiring at the rear row of the
shielding contact element.
PS CP
U
Figure 7-7 Connecting 2-wire cables to the shielding contact element
Magnified view of shielding terminal
Wiring of shielding terminal
7LS
For your connection to the front connector, leave a sufficient cable length behind
the shielding terminal. This allows you to disconnect the front connector, e.g. for
repairs, without having to open the shielding contact element.
7-16 A5E00105492-03
:LULQJ
:LULQJWKH%XV&RQQHFWRU
,QWURGXFWLRQ
You need to network the nodes if you want to create a multiple-node subnet. The
components you require here are listed in the Chapter &RQILJXULQJ&RQILJXULQJD
6XEQHW.
Information on how to wire the bus connector can be found in the article below.
:LULQJWKHEXVFDEOHWRWKHEXVFRQQHFWRU
%XVFRQQHFWRUZLWKVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
1. Strip the bus cable.
Details on stripped lengths are found in the product information included with
the bus connector.
2. Open the bus connector housing.
3. Insert the green and the red wire into the screw-terminal block.
Note that you always have to connect the same wires to the same terminal (e.g.
always wire green to terminal A and red to terminal B).
4. Press the cable sheath into the clamp. Take care that the bare shielding
contacts the shielding contact surface.
5. Screw-tighten the wire terminals.
6. Close the bus connector housing.
)DVW&RQQHFWEXVFRQQHFWRU
1. Strip the bus cable.
Details on stripped lengths are found in the product information included with
the bus connector.
2. Open the strain relief of the bus connector.
3. Insert the green and red wire into the open contacting covers.
Note that you always have to connect the same wires to the same terminal (e.g.
always wire green to terminal A and red to terminal B).
4. Close the contacting cover.
This presses the wires down into the insulation displacement terminals .
5. Screw-tighten the strain relief. Take care that the bare shielding contacts the
shielding contact surface.
1RWH
Use a bus connector with a 90° cable exit.
A5E00105492-03 7-17
:LULQJ
,QVHUWLQJWKHEXVFRQQHFWRULQWRWKHPRGXOH
1. Insert the wired bus connector into the module.
2. Screw-tighten the bus connector on the module.
3. If the bus connector is at the start or end of a segment, you have to enable the
terminating resistor (Switch position "ON" see figure below)
1RWH
6ES7 972-0BA30-0XA0 bus connectors are not equipped with a terminating
resistor. You cannot connect it at the beginning or end of a segment.
Please make sure during start-up and normal operation that power is always
supplied to stations where the terminating resistor is active.
Terminating resistance switched on Terminating resistance switched off
on on
off off
On
On
Off
Off
Figure 7-8 Bus connector: Enabled and disabled terminating resistor
5HPRYLQJEXVFRQQHFWRUV
With a looped-through bus cable, you can unplug the bus connector from the
PROFIBUS-DP interface at any time, without interrupting data communication on
the network.
3RVVLEOHGDWDWUDIILFHUURUV
:DUQLQJ
Data traffic error might occur on the bus!
A bus segment must always be terminated at both ends with the terminating
resistor. This, for example, is not the case if the last slave with bus connector is off
power. Since the bus connector draws its power from the station, the terminating
resistor has no effect.
Please make sure that power is always supplied to stations on which the
terminating resistor is active.
7-18 A5E00105492-03

$GGUHVVLQJ

$GGUHVVLQJ
,QWKLV&KDSWHU
shows you the options for addressing specific module channels.
6ORWEDVHGDGGUHVVLQJ
Slot-based addressing is the default setting, that is, 67(3 assigns each slot
number a defined module start address.
8VHUGHILQHGDGGUHVVLQJ
With user-defined addressing, you can assign any module address from the
address area managed by the CPU.
6ORW'HILQHG$GGUHVVLQJRI0RGXOHV
,QWURGXFWLRQ
In slot-based addressing (default addressing), a module start address is allocated
to each slot number This is a digital or analog address, depending on the type of
module. This section shows you which module start address is assigned to which
slot number. You need this information to determine the start addresses of the
installed modules.
0D[LPXPDVVHPEO\DQGWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJPRGXOHVWDUWDGGUHVVHV
The figure below shows you an S7-300 assembly on four racks and the optional
slots with their module start addresses.
The input and output addresses for I/O modules start from the same module start
address.
1RWH
With the CPU 31xC, you cannot insert any modules in Slot 11 of Rack 3. The
address area is reserved for the integrated I/O.
A5E00105492-03 8-1
$GGUHVVLQJ
Not with CPU 31xC
Rack 3 IM SM SM SM SM SM SM SM SM
(EG)
Slot number 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
BG initial address digital 96 100104 108 112 116 120 124
BG initial address analog 640 656 672 688 704 720 736 752
Rack 2
(EG) IM SM SM SM SM SM SM SM SM
Slot number 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
BG initial address digital 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 92
Rack 1
IM SM SM SM SM SM SM SM SM
(EG)
Slot number 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
SF
SIEMEN S
BUSF
DC5V
FRCE
RUN
Rack 0
STOP
(ZG) PS CPU IM SM SM SM SM SM SM SM SM
Slot number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Figure 8-1 S7-300 slots and the associated module start addresses
8-2 A5E00105492-03
$GGUHVVLQJ
8VHU'HILQHG$GGUHVVLQJRI0RGXOHV
8VHUGHILQHGDGGUHVVLQJ
User-defined addressing means that you can assign an address of your choice to
any module (SM/FM/CP). The addresses are assigned in 67(3. Here, you
specify the module start address that forms the basis for all other addresses of the
module.
$GYDQWDJHVRIXVHUGHILQHGDGGUHVVLQJ
• Optimization of the address areas available, since “address gaps” will not occur
between the modules.
• When creating standard software, you can program addresses which are
independent of the relevant S7-300 configuration.
$GGUHVVLQJ6LJQDO0RGXOHV
,QWURGXFWLRQ
This section shows you how to address signal modules. You need this information
in order to be able to address the channels of the signal modules in your user
program.
$GGUHVVHVRIGLJLWDOPRGXOHV
The address of an input or output of a digital module consists of a byte address
and a bit address.
Example: ,
This example consists of: input ,, byte address , and bit address
A5E00105492-03 8-3
$GGUHVVLQJ
The byte address depends on the module start address.

The bit address is the number printed on the module.
Insert the first digital module into slot 4 so that it has default start address 0. The
start address of every subsequent digital module will be incremented by 4 per slot
(see diagram under 6ORWEDVHGPRGXOHDGGUHVVLQJ
The figure below shows you how the addresses of the individual channels of a
digital module are obtained.
0
1
2
3 Byte address:
4 start address of modules
5
6
7
0
1
2
3 Byte address:
4 start address of modules + 1
5
6
7
Bit address
Figure 8-2 Addresses of the I/O of digital modules
8-4 A5E00105492-03
$GGUHVVLQJ
$QH[DPSOHIRUGLJLWDOPRGXOHV
The example in the figure below shows which default addresses are obtained if a
digital module is inserted in slot 4 (that is, when the module start address is 0).
Slot number 3 has not been assigned since there is no interface module in the
example.
0 Address 0.0
1 Address 0.1
2
3
4 :
5 :
6
7 Address 0.7
:
PS CPU SM :
0 Address 1.0
1 Address 1.1
2
3
4 :
5 :
6
7 Address 1.7
Slot 1 2 4
number
Figure 8-3 I/O Addresses of a digital module in Slot 4
$GGUHVVHVRIWKHDQDORJPRGXOHV
The address of an analog input or output channel is always a word address.
The channel address depends on the module start address.
Insert the first analog module into slot 4 so that it has default start address 256.
The start address of every subsequent analog module will be incremented by 16
per slot (see diagram under 6ORWEDVHGPRGXOHDGGUHVVLQJ
An analog I/O module has the same start addresses for its input and output
channels.
A5E00105492-03 8-5
$GGUHVVLQJ
$QH[DPSOHIRUDQDORJPRGXOHV
The example in the figure below shows you which default channel addresses are
obtained if an analog module is inserted in slot 4. As you can see, the input and
output channels of an analog I/O module are addressed starting at the same
address, namely the module start address.
Slot number 3 has not been assigned since there is no interface module in the
example.
SM (analog module)
SF
SIEMENS Inputs
BUSF
DC5V
FRCE
Channel 0: address 256
RUN Channel 1: address 258
STOP
:
:
Outputs
PS CPU SM Channel 0: address 256
Channel 1: address 258
:
:
Slot 1 2 4
number
Figure 8-4 I/O addresses of an analog module in Slot 4
$GGUHVVLQJWKH,QWHJUDWHG,2RIWKH&38
&38&
The integrated inputs and outputs of this CPU have the following addresses:
Table 8-1 Integrated inputs and outputs on the CPU 312C
,QSXWV2XWSXWV 'HIDXOWDGGUHVVHV 5HPDUNV

10 digital inputs 124.0 to 125.1 All digital inputs can be programmed
of those are 8 Inputs for as interrupt input.
technological functions:
124.0 to 124.7 Optional technological functions:
6 digital outputs 124.0 to 124.5 • Counting
of those are 2 Inputs for • Frequency measurement
124.0 to 124.1 • Pulse width modulation
8-6 A5E00105492-03
$GGUHVVLQJ
&38&
The integrated inputs and outputs of this CPU have the following addresses:
Table 8-2 Integrated inputs and outputs on the CPU 313C

125.4 to 125.6
• Counting
16 digital outputs 124.0 to 125.7
• Frequency measurement
of those are 3 Inputs for
technological functions: • Pulse width modulation
124.0 to 124.2
4 +1 analog inputs 752 to 761
2 Analog outputs 752 to 755
&38&3W3DQG&38&'3
The integrated inputs and outputs of these CPUs have the following addresses:
Table 8-3 Integrated inputs and outputs on the CPU 313C-2 PtP/DP

125.4 to 125.6
• Counting
16 digital outputs 124.0 to 125.7
• Frequency measurement
of those are 3 Inputs for
technological functions: • Pulse width modulation
124.0 to 124.2
A5E00105492-03 8-7
$GGUHVVLQJ
&38&3W3DQG&38&'3
The integrated inputs and outputs of these CPUs have the following addresses:
Table 8-4 Integrated inputs and outputs on the CPU 314C-2 PtP/DP

16 digital outputs 124.0 to 125.7 • Counting
of those are 4 Inputs for • Frequency measurement
124.0 to 124.3 • Pulse width modulation
4 +1 analog inputs 752 to 761 • Positioning
2 Analog outputs 752 to 755
5HPDUNV
You cannot influence outputs with transfer instructions if they are assigned to
technological functions.
I/O not configured for technological functions can be used as standard I/O.
&RQVLVWHQW'DWD
&RQVLVWHQWGDWD
The table below illustrates the points to consider with respect to communication
LQD'3PDVWHUV\VWHPif you want to transfer I/O areas with "Total length"
consistency.
&38'3&38'3&38[&
The address area of consistent data in the process image is automatically updated.
To read and write consistent data, you can also use SFC 14 and SFC 15.
If the address area of consistent data is not in the process image, you must use SFC 14
and SFC 15 to read and write consistent data.
Direct access to consistent areas is also possible (e.g. L PEW or T PAW).
You can transfer a maximum of 32 bytes of consistent data.
8-8 A5E00105492-03

&RPPLVVLRQLQJ

,QWKLV&KDSWHU
,QWKLV&KDSWHU
There are notes on commissioning which you should take into account in order to
avoid personal injury or damage to machines.
1RWH
Since your commissioning phase is determined primarily by your application, we
can only offer you general information, without claiming completeness of this topic.
&URVVUHIHUHQFH
Note the information about commissioning provided in the descriptions of your
plant section and equipment.
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ3URFHGXUH
5HTXLUHPHQWV
To utilize the full functional scope of the CPUs, you require
• STEP 7 V 5.1 + SP 4 and higher for CPUs 31xC, 312, 314, and 316-2 DP
• STEP 7 V 5.2 + SP 1 and higher for CPU 317-2 DP
• S7-300 is installed
• S7-300 is wired
• With networked S7-300:
– MPI/PROFIBUS addresses are configured
– The segments are terminated with active terminating resistors
A5E00105492-03 9-1
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
5HFRPPHQGHGSURFHGXUH3DUW,+DUGZDUH
With its modular structure and many different upgrade options, the S7-300 can be
very large and extremely complex. It is therefore inappropriate to initially start up
an S7-300 with multiple racks and all inserted (installed) modules. Rather, we
recommend a step-by-step commissioning procedure.
We recommend the following initial commissioning procedure for an S7-300:
Table 9-1 Recommended commissioning procedure - part I: Hardware
7DVNV 5HPDUNV ,QIRUPDWLRQFDQEH

IRXQGLQ
an installation and wiring - in the following Chapter
check according to
checklist
Disabling connections to This prevents negative effects on your system as -
drive aggregates and a result of program errors.
control elements 7LS Redirecting output data from your outputs to
a data block, allows you to check the status of the
outputs at any time
Preparing the CPU Connecting the PG in the Chapter &RQQHFWLQJ
WKH3*
Central unit (CU): Commission the CU with inserted power supply in Chapter ,QLWLDO3RZHU
commission the CPU module and CPU. 2Q
and power supply, check First, switch on the expansion modules (EMs)
the LEDs which are equipped with an auxiliary power
supply module and then switch on the power
supply module of the CD.
Check the LED displays on both modules. in Chapter 7HVWLQJ
)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFV
DQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ
Initialize the CPU and - in Chapter 5HVHWWLQJ&38
check the LEDs PHPRU\
CU: Insert further modules into the CU and Reference Manual
commission all other commission them in succession. 0RGXOH'DWD
modules
Expansion module (EM): If required, interconnect the CU and the EMs: Chapter 0RXQWLQJ
Connecting Insert only one Send IM into the CU and the
matching receiver IM into the EM.
EM: Insert further modules into the EMs and See above.
Commissioning commission them in succession.
9-2 A5E00105492-03
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
5HFRPPHQGHGSURFHGXUH3DUW,,6RIWZDUH
Table 9-2 Recommended commissioning procedure - part II: software
7DVNV 5HPDUNV ,QIRUPDWLRQFDQEH

IRXQGLQ
• Switch on the PG - in the 67(3
and start SIMATIC Programming Manual
Manager
• Download the
configuration and the
program to the CPU
Testing the I/O Helpful functions are here: • in the 67(3
• Monitoring and modifying of variables Programming Manual
• Testing with program status • in Chapter 7HVWLQJ

)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFV
• Force DQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ
• Modifying outputs in STOP mode (PO enable)
7LS Test the signals at the inputs and outputs
using the simulation module SM 374, for
example.
Commission PROFIBUS - in Chapter &RPPLVVLRQLQJ
DP or other networks 352),%86'3
Connect the outputs Commissioning the outputs successively. -
'DQJHU
Proceed step-by-step. Do not go to the next step unless you have completed the
previous one without error/error message.
5HVSRQVHWRHUURUV
React to errors as follows:
• Check the system with the help of the Checklist in the chapter below.
• Check the LED displays on all modules. Notes on their significance can be
found in the chapters describing the relevant modules.
• If required, remove individual components to trace the error.
,PSRUWDQWQRWHVDUHDOVRIRXQG
in Chapter 7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQVGLDJQRVWLFVDQGIDXOWHOLPLQDWLRQ
VHHDOVR
Commissioning Checklist
A5E00105492-03 9-3
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ&KHFNOLVW
,QWURGXFWLRQ
After you have mounted and wired your S7-300, we recommend you check all
previous steps once again.
The checklist tables below are a guide for your examination of the S7-300. They
also provide cross-references to chapters containing further information on the
relevant topic.
0RGXOHUDFNV
3RLQWVWREH([DPLQHG 6+DUGZDUHDQG
,QVWDOODWLRQ&KDSWHUV
Are the rails mounted firmly to the wall, in the frame or in Configuring, Installation
the cabinet?
Have you maintained free space required? Configuring, Installation
Are the cable ducts installed properly? Configuring
Is the air convection OK? Installation
&RQFHSWRIJURXQGLQJDQGFKDVVLVJURXQG
Have you established a low-impedance connection Configuring, Appendix
(large surface, large contact area) to local ground?
Are all racks (rails) properly connected to reference Configuring, Wiring, Appendix
potential and local ground (electrical connection or
isolated operation)?
Are all grounding points of electrically connected Configuring, Appendix
modules and of the load power supply units connected
to reference potential ?
0RGXOHLQVWDOODWLRQDQGZLULQJ
Are all modules properly inserted and screwed in? Installation
Are all front connectors properly wired, plugged, screw- Installation, Wiring
tightened or latched to the correct module?
9-4 A5E00105492-03
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
0DLQVYROWDJH
3RLQWVWREHH[DPLQHG 6 6HH

+DUGZDUHDQG UHIHUHQFH
,QVWDOODWLRQ PDQXDO
&KDSWHUV 6HFWLRQ
Is the correct mains voltage set for all component? Wiring Module
Specifications
3RZHUVXSSO\PRGXOH
3RLQWVWREHH[DPLQHG 6 6HH

+DUGZDUHDQG UHIHUHQFH
,QVWDOODWLRQ PDQXDO
&KDSWHUV 6HFWLRQ
Is the mains plug wired correctly? Wiring -
Is mains voltage connected? - -
A5E00105492-03 9-5
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
&RPPLVVLRQLQJWKH0RGXOHV
&RQQHFWLQJWKH3*
5HTXLUHPHQW
The programming device must be equipped with an integrated MPI interface or an
MPI card in order to connect it to an MPI.
&DEOHOHQJWK
For information on possible cable lengths refer to the Chapter &RQILJXULQJ&DEOH
/HQJWKV.
&RQQHFWLQJD3*WRDQ6
1. Connect the PG to the MPI interface of your CPU using a preassembled PG
cable. Alternatively, you can produce the connecting leads with PROFIBUS
cable and bus connectors yourself (refer to Chapter :LULQJ&RQQHFWLQJ%XV
&RQQHFWRUV). The figure below illustrates the connection between PG and CPU
SF
SIEMENS
BUSF
DC5V
FRCE
RUN
STOP
PS CPU SM
MPI
PG
Figure 9-1 Connecting a PG to an S7-300
9-6 A5E00105492-03
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
&RQQHFWLQJWKH3*WRVHYHUDOQRGHV
6WDWLRQDU\3*
1. Use bus connectors to connect a stationary PG in the MPI subnet to the other
nodes of the MPI subnet.
The following picture illustrates two networked S7-300s which are connected to
one another using bus connectors.
PS CPU SM
PG
2
1
SF
SIEMENS
BUSF
DC5V
FRCE
RUN
ST OP
PS CPU SM
Figure 9-2 Connecting a PG to multiple S7-300 PLCs
PROFIBUS bus cable
Connector with inserted terminating resistor
A5E00105492-03 9-7
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
3*IRUFRPPLVVLRQLQJRUPDLQWHQDQFH
1. Use a stub cable to connect the commissioning and maintenance PG to the
other subnet nodes. The bus connector of these nodes must be equipped with a
PG socket.
The figure below shows the interconnection of two networked S7-300 and a PG.
PS CPU SM
PG 1
SF
SF
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
BUSF
BUSF
DC5V
DC5V
FRCE
FRCE
RUN
RUN
ST OP
STOP
PS CPU SM
Figure 9-3 Connecting a PG to a subnet
Stub cable used to create connection between PG and CPU
Inserted terminating resistor of bus connector
PROFIBUS bus cable used to network the two CPUs
9-8 A5E00105492-03
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
03,DGGUHVVHVIRUVHUYLFH3*V
If there is no stationary PG, we recommend:
To connect it to an MPI subnet with "unknown" node addresses, set the following
addresses on the service PG:
• MPI address: 0
• Highest MPI address: 126.
Using 67(3, you then determine the highest MPI address in the MPI subnet and
adapt the highest MPI address in the PG to that of the MPI subnet.
&RQQHFWLQJ3*VWRXQJURXQGHGQRGHVRIDQ03,VXEQHWQRWZLWK&38V[&
&RQQHFWLQJD3*WRXQJURXQGHGQRGHV
Always connect an ungrounded PG to ungrounded MPI subnet nodes or S7-300
PLCs.
&RQQHFWLQJDJURXQGHG3*WRWKH03,
You want to operate with ungrounded nodes. If the MPI at the PG is grounded, you
must interconnect the nodes and the PG with an RS485 repeater. You must
connect the ungrounded nodes to bus segment 2 if the PG is connected to bus
segment 1 (terminals A1 B1) or to the PG/OP interface (refer to Chapter 7 in the
0RGXOH'DWD Reference Manual).
The figure below shows an RS485 repeater as interface between grounded and
ungrounded nodes of an MPI subnet.
PS CPU
PG
Bus segment 2 Bus segment 1

(signals ungrounded) (signals grounded)
Figure 9-4 PG connected to an ungrounded S7-300
A5E00105492-03 9-9
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
,QVHUWLQJ5HSODFLQJD0LFUR0HPRU\&DUG00&
6,0$7,&0LFUR0HPRU\&DUG00&DVPHPRU\PRGXOH

Your CPU uses a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC) as a memory module. You
can set up the MMC as a load memory or a portable data medium.
1RWH
An inserted MMC is imperative for CPU operation.
1RWH
If the CPU is set to RUN and you remove the MMC, the CPU will STOP and
request a memory reset.
&DXWLRQ
Data on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be corrupted if you remove the card
during write access. In this case you might have to insert the MMC memory in your
PG to delete it, or you format the card in the CPU.
Never remove an MMC in RUN mode. Always remove when power is off or when
the CPU is in STOP state and when the is not writing to the card. Disconnect the
communication lines if you are not sure whether or not the PG is performing write
functions (e.g. load/delete function block).
:DUQLQJ
Make sure that the MMC to be inserted contains the proper user program for the
CPU (system). An incorrect user program can lead to serious consequences in
your process.
9-10 A5E00105492-03
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
,QVHUWLQJUHSODFLQJWKH0LFUR0HPRU\&DUG00&
1. Switch the CPU to STOP mode.
2. Is an MMC already inserted?
If yes, ensure that no write operations are running on the PG (such as loading a
block). If you cannot ensure this state, disconnect all communication lines of the
CPU.
Now, push in the ejector and remove the MMC.
To you to remove the micro memory card, the module slot has an ejector device
(see the &38'DWDReference Manual, figure in the chapter entitled (OHPHQWV
DQG$VVHPEO\RIWKH&38).
Use a small screwdriver or ball-point pen to remove the MMC.
3. Insert the ("new") MMC into the MMC slot with the bevelled edge of the MMC
pointing towards the ejector.
4. Gently insert the MMC into the CPU until the MMC clicks into place.
5. Reset the memory of the CPU VHH5HVHWWLQJ0HPRU\YLD0RGH6HOHFWRURI
&38
CPU
Figure 9-5 Insert the micro memory card into the CPU
,QVHUWLQJDQGUHPRYLQJDQ00&ZKHQ&38SRZHULVVZLWFKHGRII
If you replace MMCs while the power is switched off, the CPUs
• will recognize a physically identical MMC with changed content
• a new MMC with the same content as the old MMC
After POWER ON, they request a memory reset.
&URVVUHIHUHQFH
Refer also to the section on SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC) in the CPU Data
Manual, Chapter &RQILJXUDWLRQDQG&RPPXQLFDWLRQ)XQFWLRQVRID&38[&.
A5E00105492-03 9-11
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
,QLWLDO3RZHU2Q
5HTXLUHPHQWV
• You must have installed and wired up the S7-300.
• The MMC is inserted in the CPU.
• Your CPU's mode selector switch must be set to STOP.
,QLWLDOSRZHUXSIRUD&38ZLWKPLFURPHPRU\FDUG00&
Switch on the PS 307 power supply module.
5HVXOW
• The 24 VDC LED on the power supply module is lit.
• The 5 VDC LED on the CPU
– is lit.
– The STOP LED flashes at 2 Hz when the CPU executes an automatic
memory reset.
– The STOP LED is lit after memory reset.
9-12 A5E00105492-03
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
5HVHWWLQJ0HPRU\YLDWKH0RGH6HOHFWRU6ZLWFKRIWKH&38
:KHQGR\RXUHVHW&38PHPRU\"
You must reset CPU memory,
• Before you download a (completely) new user program to the CPU
• If the CPU requests memory reset with its STOP LED flashing at 0.5 Hz
intervals Possible reasons for this request are listed in the table below .
Table 9-3 Possible causes for the CPU memory reset request
&DXVHVRID&38UHTXHVWWRUHVHW 5HPDUNV
PHPRU\
The MMC has been replaced -
RAM error in CPU -
The main memory is too small, that is, CPU with MMC inserted: A further memory reset
all blocks of the user program on an is requested.
MMC cannot be loaded. Additional information on MMC behavior after a
Attempts to load faulty blocks; e.g. if memory reset can be found in the &38'DWD
the wrong instruction was Reference Manual, 0HPRU\FRQFHSWchapter.
programmed.
+RZWRUHVHWPHPRU\
There are two ways to reset CPU memory:
0HPRU\UHVHWZLWKWKHPRGHVHOHFWRU 0HPRU\UHVHWZLWK3*
VZLWFK
... is described in this Chapter. ... only possible if the CPU is in STOP mode
(see 67(32QOLQH+HOS).
&38PHPRU\UHVHWZLWKWKHPRGHVHOHFWRUVZLWFK
The table below shows the steps required for resetting CPU memory.
Table 9-4 Procedure for resetting the CPU memory
6WHS 5HVHWWLQJ&38PHPRU\
1. Turn the key to STOP position
2. Turn the key to MRES position. Hold the key in this position until the STOP LED
lights up for the second time and remains on (this takes 3 seconds). Then
release the key.
3. You must turn the key to MRES position again within 3 seconds and hold it
there until the STOP LED flashes (at 2 Hz). You can now release the switch.
When the CPU has completed memory reset, the STOP LED stops flashing and
remains lit.
The CPU has reset the memory.
A5E00105492-03 9-13
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
The procedure described in the table above is only required if the user wishes to
reset the CPU memory without being requested by the CPU to reset the memory
(STOP LED flashing slowly). If the CPU prompts you for a memory reset, you only
have to turn the mode selector briefly to MRES position to initiate the memory reset
operation.
STOP
LED
on
off t
3s
max. 3 s
min. 3 s
CPU
1 2 3
Figure 9-6 Using the mode selector switch to reset the memory
If following a successful memory reset operation, the CPU prompts you for another
memory reset, the MMC may need to be reformatted in certain cases (VHH
)RUPDWWLQJD0LFUR0HPRU\&DUG00&).
6723/('GRHVQRWIODVKGXULQJWKHPHPRU\UHVHW
What should I do if the STOP LED does not flash during the memory reset or if
other LEDs are lit (Exception: BATF LED)?
1. You must repeat steps 2 and 3.
2. If the CPU still does not reset memory, evaluate the diagnostic buffer of the
CPU.
9-14 A5E00105492-03
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
:KDWKDSSHQVLQWKH&38GXULQJPHPRU\UHVHW"
Table 9-5 Operations in the CPU during a memory reset
(YHQW $FWLRQLQ&38
CPU activities 1. The CPU deletes the entire user program in the main memory.
2. The CPU deletes the retentive data.
3. The CPU tests its own hardware.
4. The CPU copies the sequence-relevant content of the MMC (load memory) to
the main memory.
7LS If the CPU cannot copy the MMC and prompts you for a memory reset:
• Remove the MMC
• Reset CPU memory
Read the diagnostic buffer.
Memory contents The user program is transferred from the MMC to the main memory again and the
after reset memory utilization is displayed accordingly.
What's left? Data in the diagnostics buffer.
You can read the diagnostic buffer with the PG (see 67(32QOLQH+HOS).
• The MPI parameters (MPI address and highest MPI address, transmission rate,
configured MPI addresses of CPs/FMs in an S7-300).
• The same also applies to the CPU 317-2 DP, if the MPI/DP interface of the CPU
was assigned as a DP interface (PROFIBUS address, highest PROFIBUS
address, baud rate, setting as active or passive interface).
Content of elapsed time counter
6SHFLDOIHDWXUH;LQWHUIDFHSDUDPHWHU
MPI parameters (or DP parameters in the case of MPI/DP interfaces) have a
special setting for memory reset. The table below describes which interface
parameters are valid after the memory reset.
0HPRU\UHVHW 03,SDUDPHWHUV
With MMC inserted MPI parameter on the MMC or integrated
read-only load memory are valid. If this
location does not contain parameter data
(SDB), the previously set parameters stay
valid.
Without micro memory card (MMC) inserted ... are retained and valid.
A5E00105492-03 9-15
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
)RUPDWWLQJWKH0LFUR0HPRU\&DUG00&
<RXPXVWIRUPDWWKH00&LQWKHIROORZLQJFDVHV
• Module type of MMC is not a user module.
• MMC has not yet been formatted.
• MMC is defective.
• Content of MMC is invalid.
The content of the MCC was identified as invalid.
• The /RDGXVHUSURJUDP operation was aborted by a power OFF.
• The 3URPPLQJoperation was aborted by a power OFF.
• Error during evaluation of module content during memory reset.
• Error during formatting, or formatting could not be performed.
If one of these errors has occurred, the CPU prompts you for another memory
reset after a memory reset operation has been performed. The card content is
retained until the MMC is formatted, except when the Load user program or
promming operations are interrupted by a power OFF.
The MMC is only formatted if a reason for formatting exists (see above) and not, for
example, when you are prompted for a memory reset after a module replacement.
In this case, a switch to MRES triggers a normal memory reset for which the
module content remains valid..
8VHWKHIROORZLQJVWHSVWRIRUPDW\RXU00&
If the CPU is prompting you for a memory reset (slow flashing of STOP LED),
format the MMC using the following switch inputs:
1. Turn the switch to MRES position and hold it there until illumination of the STOP
LED is steady (about 9 seconds).
2. Release the switch within the next 3 seconds and then turn it to MRES position
again. The STOP-LED now flashes during the formatting.
1RWH
Make sure to perform the steps in the specified time. Otherwise, the MMS will not
be formatted and will instead return to the memory reset prompt state.
9-16 A5E00105492-03
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
6WDUWLQJ6,0$7,&0DQDJHU
,QWURGXFWLRQ
SIMATIC Manager is a GUI for online/offline editing of S7 objects (projects, user
programs, blocks, hardware Stations and Tools).
The SIMATIC Manager lets you
• manage projects and libraries,
• call STEP 7 Tools,
• access the PLC (AS) online,
• edit Memory Cards.
6WDUWLQJ6,0$7,&0DQDJHU
After installation, the Windows desktop displays the 6,0$7,&0DQDJHU icon and in
the Start menu under 6,0$7,& it displays the program item 6,0$7,&0DQDJHU.
1. Start SIMATIC Manager with a double-click on the icon or via Start menu (same
as with all other Windows applications).
8VHULQWHUIDFH
A corresponding editing tool pops up when you open the relevant objects. Double-
click on a program block starts the program editor; the block can be edited (object-
oriented start).
2QOLQH+HOS
The Online Help for the active window is always called with the F1 function key.
A5E00105492-03 9-17
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
0RQLWRULQJDQGFRQWUROOLQJ,2V
7KHWRRO0RQLWRULQJDQG&RQWUROOLQJD9DULDEOH
The STEP 7 tool "Monitoring and Controlling a Variable" lets you
• monitor program variables in any format,
• edit the status or data of variables in the CPU (controlling).
&UHDWHDYDULDEOHWDEOH
You have two options for creating a variable table (VAT):
• in the ladder diagram/sequential function chart/statement list editor via menu
item 3/&!0RQLWRUFRQWUROYDULDEOH
This table is also available directly online
• in SIMATIC Manager with the %ORFNVcontainer open via menu item ,QVHUWQHZ
REMHFW!9DULDEOHWDEOH
This table created offline can be saved for future retrieval. You can also test it
after switching to online mode.
9$7VWUXFWXUH
In the VAT, every address to be monitored or modified (e.g. inputs, outputs)
occupies one row.
The meaning of the VAT columns is as follows:
&ROXPQWH[W 7KLVILHOG
Operand contains the absolute address of the variable
Symbol contains the symbolic descriptor of the variable
This is identical to the specification in the Symbol Table.
Symbol comment shows the symbol comment of the Symbol Table
Status format contains the default format setting, e.g. HEX
You can change the format as follows:
• Right-click on the format field. The Format List pops up.
or
• Left-click on the format field until the desired format appears
Status value shows the content of the variable at the time of update
Control value is used to enter the new variable value (control value)
9-18 A5E00105492-03
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
0RQLWRULQJYDULDEOHV
You have two options for monitoring variables:

• updating the status values once via menu item 9DULDEOH!8SGDWHVWDWXV
YDOXHV
or
• continuous update of status values via menu item 9DULDEOH!0RQLWRU
&RQWUROOLQJYDULDEOHV
To control variables, proceed as follows:
1. Left-click the field &RQWUROYDOXH of the relevant variable.
2. Enter the control value according to the data type.
3. To update control values once, select the menu item 9DULDEOH!(QDEOH
FRQWUROYDOXHV.
or
Enable control values permanently via menu item 9DULDEOH!&RQWURO.
4. In the 0RQLWRU test function, verify the control value entry in the variable.
,VWKHFRQWUROYDOXHYDOLG"
You can disable the control value entered in the table. An invalid value is displayed
same as a comment. You can re-enable the control value.
Only valid control values can be enabled.
6HWWLQJWKHWULJJHUSRLQWV
7ULJJHUSRLQWV
• The "Trigger point for monitoring" determines the time of update for values of
variables to be monitored.
• The "Trigger point for controlling" determines the time for assigning the control
values to the variables to be controlled.
A5E00105492-03 9-19
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
7ULJJHUFRQGLWLRQ
• The "Trigger condition for monitoring" determines whether to update values
once when the trigger point is reached or continuously every time the trigger
point is reached.
• The "Trigger condition for controlling" determines whether to assign control
values once or permanently to the variable to be controlled.
You can customize the trigger points using the tool "Monitor and control variable" in
menu item 9DULDEOH!6HW7ULJJHUstart.
6SHFLDOIHDWXUHV
• If "Trigger condition for monitoring" is set to RQFH, the menu items 9DULDEOH!
8SGDWHVWDWXVYDOXHor9DULDEOH!0RQLWRU have the same effect, namely a
single update.
• If "Trigger condition for controlling" is set to RQFH, the menu items 9DULDEOH!
8SGDWHFRQWUROYDOXHor9DULDEOH!&RQWURO have the same effect, namely a
one-time assignment.
• If trigger conditions are set toSHUPDQHQW, the said menu items have different
effects as described above.
• If monitoring and controlling is set to the same trigger point, monitoring is
executed first.
• With some CPU versions (e.g. CPU 314-1AE03) values are not assigned at
every cycle when SHUPDQHQWFRQWUROis set.
Remedy: Use the testing function)RUFH.
6DYLQJ2SHQLQJWKH9DULDEOH7DEOH
6DYLQJWKH9$7
1. After you abort or complete a test phase, you can save the variable table to
memory. The name of a variable table starts with the letters VAT, followed by a
number from 0 to 65535; e.g. VAT5.
2SHQLQJWKH9$7
1. Select the menu item 7DEOH!2SHQ.
2. Select the project name in the2SHQdialog.
3. In the project window below, select the relevant program and mark the %ORFNV
container.
4. In the block window, select the desired table.
5. Confirm with2..
9-20 A5E00105492-03
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
(VWDEOLVKLQJDFRQQHFWLRQWRWKH&38
The variables of a VAT represent variable quantities of a user program. In order to
monitor or control variables it is required to establish a connection to the relevant
CPU. Every variable tables can be linked to another CPU.
In menu item 3/&!&RQQHFWWR, establish a connection to one of the following
CPUs:
• configured CPU
• directly connected CPU
• available CPU ...
The table below lists the display of variables.
&38V 7KH&38YDULDEOHVDUHGLVSOD\HG
configured CPU in their S7 program (Hardware Station) in which the VAT is
stored.
directly connected CPU that is connected directly to the PG.
available CPU. that is selected in the dialog window.
Menu item 3/&!&RQQHFWWR!$YDLODEOH&38 is
used to establish a connection to any CPU available on
the network.
&RQWUROOLQJRXWSXWVLQ&386723PRGH
The function(QDEOH32 switches off output disable for the peripheral outputs
(PO), thus enabling control of the PO in CPU STOP mode.
In order to enable the POs, proceed as follows:
1. In menu item 7DEOH!2SHQWKHYDULDEOHWDEOH9$7, open the VAT that
contains the PO you want to control, or activate the window containing the
corresponding VAT.
2. To control the PO of the active VAT, select the CPU connection in menu
command 3/&!&RQQHFWWR.
3. Use menu command 3/&!2SHUDWLQJ0RGH to open the 2SHUDWLQJ0RGH
dialog and switch the CPU to STOP mode.
4. Enter your values in the "Control value" column for the PO you want to control.
Example:
PO: POB 7 control value: 2#0100 0011
POW 2 W#16#0027
POD 4 DW#16#0001
5. Use menu item 9DULDEOH!(QDEOH32 to switch to "Enable PO" mode.
A5E00105492-03 9-21
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
6. Control the PO via menu item 9DULDEOH!(QDEOHFRQWUROYDOXHV. "Enable PO“

mode remains active until switched off again via 9DULDEOH!(QDEOH32.
"Enable PO" is also terminated when the connection to the PG goes down.
7. Return to step 4 if you want to specify new values.
1RWH
For example, a message pops up to indicate CPU mode transition from STOP
to RUN or START-UP.
A message also pops up indicating that the "Enable PO" function is selected
while the CPU is in RUN mode.
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ352),%86'3
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ352),%86'3
5HTXLUHPHQWV
Requirement for commissioning a PROFIBUS DP network is:
• A PROFIBUS DP network has been created.
• In 67(3, you have configured the PROFIBUS DP network and you have
assigned all network nodes a PROFIBUS DP address and memory area (see
the Manual 6,0$7,&67(39[&RQILJXULQJKDUGZDUHDQGFRQQHFWLRQVZLWK
67(39[).
• Note that you must also set address switches in some of the DP slaves (see the
description of the relevant DP slave).
• Software requirements are shown in the table below, depending on the CPU:
Table 9-6 Software requirements
&38 2UGHU1R 6RIWZDUHUHTXLUHG

313C-2DP 6ES/313-6CE00-0AB0 67(3 V 5.1 or later + SP 4
314C-2DP 6ES7314-6CF00-0AB0 &20352),%86 V 5.0 or later
315-2 DP 6ES7315-2AG10-0AB0 67(3 V 5.1 or later + SP 4
317-2 DP 6ES7317-2EJ10-0AB0 67(3 V 5.2 + SP 1 or later
9-22 A5E00105492-03
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
'3DGGUHVVDUHDVRIWKH&38V
Table 9-7 DP address areas of the CPUs
$GGUHVVDUHD &'3&'3 '3 '3

DP address area 1024 bytes 2048 bytes 8192 bytes
for I/O
Number of those in the I/O Bytes 0 to 127 Bytes 0 to 127 Bytes 0 to 255
process image
'3GLDJQRVWLFDGGUHVVHV occupy 1 byte per DP master and DP slave in the input

address area. For example, at these addresses DP standard diagnostics can be
called for the relevant node (LADDR parameter of SFC 13). The DP diagnostic
addresses are specified in your configuration. If you do not specify any DP
diagnostic addresses, 67(3 assigns these DP diagnostic addresses, starting at
the highest byte address downwards .
In the case of a CPU 31xC-2 DP or CPU 31x-2 DP assigned as a master, two
different diagnostic addresses must be assigned for S7 slaves.
• Diagnostic address of the slave (address for slot 0)
At this address all slave events are reported in the DP master (station
representative), e.g. station failure.
• Diagnostic address of the module (address for slot 2)
At this address all module (e.g. CPU 313C-2 DP as I-Slave) events are reported
in the master (OB82). With a CPU as DP-Slave, for example, diagnostic
interrupts for operating mode transitions are reported at this address.
&RPPLVVLRQLQJWKH&38DV'30DVWHU
5HTXLUHPHQWVIRUFRPPLVVLRQLQJ
• The PROFIBUS subnet has been configured.
• The DP slaves are ready for operation (see relevant DP slave manual).
• If the MPI/DP interface is a DP interface, you must configure the interface as a
DP interface (CPU 317-2 DP only).
• You must configure the CPU as DP master prior to commissioning. That is, in
67(3 you must:
– configure the CPU as a DP master,
– assign a PROFIBUS address to the CPU,
– assign a master diagnostic address to the CPU,
– integrate the DP slaves into the DP master system.
A5E00105492-03 9-23
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
Is the DP CPU a DP slave?

If so, you will find that DP slave in the PROFIBUS-DP catalog as DOUHDG\
FRQILJXUHGVWDWLRQ. In the DP master, assign a slave diagnostic address to
this DP slave CPU. You must interconnect the DP master with the DP slave
CPU and specify the address areas for data exchange with the DP slave
CPU.
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
Commission the DP CPU as a DP master in the PROFIBUS subnet as follows:
1. Download the configuration of the PROFIBUS subnet created with 67(3
(preset configuration) to the DP CPU using the PG.
2. Switch on all of the DP slaves.
3. Switch the DP CPU from STOP to RUN.
6WDUWXSRI'3&38DVD'30DVWHU
During start-up, the DP CPU checks the configured preset configuration of its DP
master system against the actual configuration.
If preset configuration = actual configuration, the CPU switches to RUN mode.
If the preset configuration ≠ to the actual configuration, the configuration of
parameter VWDUWXSLISUHVHWFRQILJXUDWLRQzDFWXDOFRQILJXUDWLRQ determines
the start-up behavior of the CPU.
6WDUWXSZLWKSUHVHWFRQILJXUDWLRQz 6WDUWXSZLWKSUHVHWFRQILJXUDWLRQz
DFWXDOFRQILJXUDWLRQ \HV'HIDXOW DFWXDOFRQILJXUDWLRQ QR
VHWWLQJ
DP CPU switches to RUN. DP CPU remains in STOP mode, and the
(BUSF LED flashes if any of the DP slaves BUS LED flashes after the set 0RQLWRULQJ
cannot be addressed) WLPHIRUWUDQVIHURISDUDPHWHUVWR
PRGXOHV.
The flashing BUSF LED indicates that at
least one DP slave cannot be accessed. In
this case, check whether all DP slaves are
switched on or correspond with your
configuration, or read out the diagnostic
buffer with 67(3.
9-24 A5E00105492-03
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
5HFRJQL]LQJWKHRSHUDWLQJVWDWHRI'3VODYHV(YHQWUHFRJQLWLRQ
The table below shows how the DP CPU operating as a DP master recognizes
operating mode transitions of a CPU operating as a DP slave or data exchange
interruptions.
Table 9-8 Event recognition by CPUs 31x-2 DP/31xC-2 DP as the DP master
(YHQW :KDWKDSSHQVLQWKH'3PDVWHU"
Bus failure interrupt • Call of OB86 with the message 6WDWLRQIDLOXUH
(short-circuit, (coming event; diagnostic address of the DP slave assigned to
connector the DP master)
unplugged)
• with I/O access: Call of OB122
(I/O access error)
DP slave: • Call of OB82 with the message 0RGXOHHUURU
RUN → STOP (incoming event; diagnostic address of the DP slave assigned to
the DP master; Variable OB82_MDL_STOP=1)
DP slave: • Call of OB82 with the message 0RGXOH2.
STOP → RUN (outgoing event; diagnostic address of the DP-Slave assigned to
the DP master; Variable OB82_MDL_STOP=0)
7LS:
When commissioning the CPU as DP master, always program OB82 and OB86.
This helps you to recognize and evaluate data exchange errors or interruption.
3URJUDPPLQJVWDWXVFRQWUROYLD352),%86
As an alternative to the MPI interface, you can program the CPU or execute the
PG's status and control functions via the PROFIBUS-DP interface.
1RWH
The use of Status and Control function via the PROFIBUS-DP interface extends
the DP cycle.
&RQVWDQWEXVF\FOHWLPH
As of 67(3 V 5.x you can configure equidistant lengths for PROFIBUS subnet
(constant bus cycle time) bus cycles. Details on constant bus cycle time are found
in the 6WHS2QOLQH+HOS.
A5E00105492-03 9-25
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
6WDUWXSRIWKH'3PDVWHUV\VWHP
&38['3[&'3LVD'3PDVWHU
Customize the start-up monitoring time for DP slaves in parameter 0RQLWRULQJWLPHIRU
SDUDPHWHUWUDQVIHUWRPRGXOHV.
That is, the DP slaves must start up within the set time and be configured by the CPU (as
DP master).
352),%86DGGUHVVRIWKH'3PDVWHU
For the DP CPU, you must QRWset as a PROFIBUS address.
&RPPLVVLRQLQJWKH&38DV'36ODYH
5HTXLUHPHQWVIRUFRPPLVVLRQLQJ
• The DP master is configured and programmed.
• If the MPI/DP interface of CPU 317-2 DP is to be operated as DP interface, you
must configure the interface accordingly.
• Prior to commissioning, you must assign and configure the DP CPU as a DP
slave. That is, in 67(3 you must:
– "switch on" the CPU as DP slave,
– assign a PROFIBUS address to the CPU,
– assign a slave diagnostic address to the CPU,
– specify whether the DP master is an S7 DP master or another DP master,
– specify the address areas for data exchange with the DP master.
• All other DP slaves are programmed and configured.
&URVVUHIHUHQFH
Information on changing over to a CPU 31xC, 312, 314, 315-2 DP, and 317-2DP
can be found in the applicable section in the&38'DWD[&DQG[Reference
Manual
9-26 A5E00105492-03
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
*6')LOHV
If you are working on an IM 308-C or third party system, you require a GSD file in
order to be able to configure the DP CPU as a DP slave in a DP master system.
&20352),%86 as of V 4.0 includes this GSD file.
When working with an older version or another configuration tool, you can
download the GSD file under:
• Internet URL http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi/gsd
or
• via modem from the 66&(Interface &HQWHU Fürth, Germany; Phone number
(0911) 737972.
1RWH
This note is applicable to CPU 31xC-2 DP, CPU 315-2 DP, and CPU 317-2 DP. If
you wish to use the CPU as a standard slave via the GSD file, then you must not
tick the Commissioning / Test mode check box under the DP interface properties
when you configure this slave CPU in STEP 7.
&RQILJXUDWLRQDQGSDUDPHWHUDVVLJQPHQWPHVVDJHIUDPH
67(3 assists you during configuration and parameter assignment of the DP
CPU. Should you require a description of the configuration and parameter
assignment frame, in order to use a bus monitor for example, you can find it on the
Internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/csinfo under article ID 1452338.
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
Commission the DP CPU as a DP slave in the PROFIBUS subnet as follows:
1. Switch on power, but hold the CPU in STOP mode.
2. First, switch on all other DP masters/slaves.
3. Now switch the CPU to RUN mode.
6WDUWXSRI'3&38DVD'3VODYH
When the DP-CPU is switched to RUN mode, two mutually independent operating
mode transitions are executed:
• The &38 switches from STOP to RUN mode.
• At the 352),%86'3LQWHUIDFH the CPU starts data transfer with the DP
master.
A5E00105492-03 9-27
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
5HFRJQL]LQJWKH2SHUDWLQJ6WDWHRIWKH'3PDVWHU(YHQW5HFRJQLWLRQ
The table below shows how the DP CPU operating as a DP slave recognizes
operating state transitions or data exchange interruptions.
Table 9-9 Event recognition for CPUs 31x-2 DP/31xC-2 DP as the DP slave
(YHQW :KDWKDSSHQVLQWKH'3VODYH"
Bus failure interrupt • Call of OB86 with the message 6WDWLRQIDLOXUH
(short-circuit, (coming event; diagnostic address of the DP slave, assigned to
connector the DP slave)
unplugged)
• with I/O access: Call of OB122
(I/O access error)
DP master. • Call of OB82 with the message 0RGXOHHUURU
RUN → STOP (coming event; diagnostic address of the DP slave, assigned to
the DP slave; Variable OB82_MDL_STOP=1)
DP master • Call of OB82 with the message 0RGXOH2.
STOP → RUN (outgoing event; diagnostic address of the DP slave, assigned to
7LS:
When commissioning the CPU as DP slave, always program OB82 and OB86. This
helps you to recognize and evaluate the respective operating states or data
exchange errors.
3URJUDPPLQJVWDWXVFRQWUROYLD352),%86
As an alternative to the MPI interface, you can program the CPU or execute the
PG's status and control functions via the PROFIBUS-DP interface. To do so, you
must enable these functions when configuring the CPU as a DP slave in 67(3.
This is not required for CPU 300 C.
1RWH
The use of Status and Control function via the PROFIBUS-DP interface extends
the DP cycle.
'DWDWUDQVIHUYLDLQWHUPHGLDWHPHPRU\
The DP-CPU operating as a DP slave provides an intermediate memory for the
PROFIBUS DP. All data exchange between the CPU as DP slave and the DP
master takes place via this intermediate memory. You can configure up to
32 address areas for this function.
9-28 A5E00105492-03
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
That is, the DP master writes its Data to these intermediate memory address areas
and the CPU reads these data in the user program, and vice versa.
DP master CPU as DP slave
Transfer memory I/Q I/Q

in the address
area
PROFIBUS
Figure 9-7 Intermediate memory in a DP CPU operating as a DP slave
$GGUHVVDUHDVLQLQWHUPHGLDWHPHPRU\
In 67(3, configure the I/O address areas:
• You can configure up to 32 I/O address areas.
• Maximum length per address area is 32 bytes.
• You can configure a maximum of 244 input bytes and 244 outputs bytes.
The table below shows the principle of address areas. You can also find this figure
in the 67(3 configuration.
Table 9-10 Configuration example for the address areas in intermediate memory
7\SH 0DVWHU 7\SH 6ODYH /HQJW 8QLW &RQVLVWHQF\

DGGUHVV DGGUHVV K
1 E 222 A 310 2 Byte Unit
2 A 0 E 13 10 Word Total length
:
32
Address areas in the Address areas in the These address area parameters
DP master CPU DP slave CPU must be identical for DP master and
DP slave
A5E00105492-03 9-29
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
6DPSOHSURJUDP
Below you will see a small sample program for data exchange between DP master
and DP slave. The addresses used in the example are found in the table above.
,QWKH'3VODYH&38 ,QWKH'3PDVWHU&38
L 2 //Data pre-
T MB 6 processing in
the
L IB 0
DP slave
T MB 7
L MW 6 // Forward data
T PQW 310 to the
DP master
L PIB 222 // processing data
received
T MB 50
in the DP master
L PIB 223
.
L B#16#3
+ I
T MB 51
L 10 //Data preparation in
DP master
+ 3
T MB 60
CALL SFC 15 //Send data to
DP slave
LADDR:= W#16#0
RECORD:= P#M60.0 Byte 20
RET_VAL:=MW 22
CALL SFC 14 //receive data
LADDR:=W#16#D from DP master
RET_VAL:=MW 20
RECORD:=P#M30.0 byte 20
L MB 30 //Reprocess
received data
L MB 7
+ I
T MW 100
9-30 A5E00105492-03
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
:RUNLQJZLWKLQWHUPHGLDWHPHPRU\
Note the following rules when working with intermediate memory:
• Assignment of address areas:
– Input data of DP slaves are DOZD\V output data of the DP master
– Output data of DP slaves are DOZD\V input data of the DP master
• The user can define these addresses. In the user program, access data with
load/transfer instructions or with SFC 14 and SFC 15. You can also specify
addresses from the input/output process image (refer to Chapter $GGUHVVLQJ
8VHUGHILQHG$GGUHVVLQJRI0RGXOHV).
• The lowest address of specific address areas is their respective area start
address.
• The length, unit and consistency of the address areas for DP master and DP
slave must be identical.
1RWH
Assign addresses from the DP address area of the DP CPU for the intermediate
memory.
You must not assign addresses specified for the intermediate memory again for
the I/O modules on the DP CPU. When using consistent data areas in
intermediate memory, note the section on &RQVLVWHQW'DWD in Chapter
$GGUHVVLQJ.
6'3PDVWHU
If you use an IM 308-C as a DP master and the DP CPU as a DP slave, the
following applies to the exchange of consistent data.
You must program FB192 in IM 308-C to enable exchange of consistent data
between a DP master and the DP slave. With the FB192, the data of the DP CPU
are only output or read out in a consistent block.
6DV'3PDVWHU
If you set up an AG S5-95 as a DP master, you must also set its bus parameters
for the DP CPU as a DP slave.
'DWDWUDQVIHULQ6723PRGH
The DP slave CPU goes into STOP mode: Data in CPU intermediate memory are
overwritten with "0". That is, the DP master reads "0".
The DP master goes into STOP mode: Actual data in CPU intermediate memory is
maintained and can still be read by the CPU.
352),%86DGGUHVV
For the DP CPU, you must QRWset as a PROFIBUS address.
A5E00105492-03 9-31
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
'LUHFW'DWD([FKDQJH
5HTXLUHPHQW
In 67(3 V 5.x or later, you can configure "Direct data exchange" for PROFIBUS
nodes. CPUs 31x-2 DP/31xC-2 DP can participate in direct data exchange both as
a sending or receiving station.
'HILQLWLRQ
"Direct data exchange" is a special communication relationship between
PROFIBUS-DP nodes.
Characteristic of direct data exchange is that PROFIBUS DP nodes "listen" on the
bus for data a DP slave returns to its DP master. This mechanism allows "Listening
stations" (receivers) direct access to modified input data of remote DP slaves.
$GGUHVVDUHDV
In your 67(3 configuration of the relevant peripheral input addresses, specify
which address area of the receiving station is to receive data requested from the
sending station.
A CPU 31x-2 DP/31xC-2 DP can operate as a:
• DP slave sending station
• receiving station, as DP slave or DP master, or as CPU not integrated in a
master system.
9-32 A5E00105492-03
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
([DPSOH
The sample in the figure below shows the relationships you can configure for direct
data exchange. In the figure, all DP masters DP slaves are a CPU 31x-2 DP/31xC-
2 DP respectively. Note that other DP slaves (ET 200M, ET 200X, ET 200S) can
only operate as sending station.
DP master DP master
system 1 system 2
CPU CPU
CPU DP master 1 DP master 2
PROFIBUS
DP slave 3 CPU DP slave 5

CPU CPU
DP slave 4
DP slave 1 DP slave 2
Figure 9-8 Direct data exchange with CPUs 31x-2 DP/31xC-2 DP
A5E00105492-03 9-33
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
9-34 A5E00105492-03

0DLQWHQDQFH

,QWKLV&KDSWHU
0DLQWHQDQFH RSHUDWLQJV\VWHPEDFNXSXSGDWHUHSODFHPHQWRIPRGXOHVDQG
IXVHV
S7-300 is a maintenance-free automation system.
Thus, by maintenance we mean
• Back-up of operating system on a Micro Memory Card (MMC)
• Update of operating system by MMC
• Replacement of modules
• Replacement of the fuses in digital output modules
,QWKLV&KDSWHU
we show you how to back up or update your operating system and to replace
modules, the back-up/rechargeable battery and the 120/230 VAC fuse of the digital
output module.
2SHUDWLQJ6\VWHP%DFN8S
,QZKLFKVLWXDWLRQVVKRXOG,EDFNXSWKHRSHUDWLQJV\VWHP"
In some cases, we recommend that you back up your CPU's operating system:
For example, you might want to replace the CPU in your plant with a CPU from
store. In this case, you should make sure that the CPU from store has the same
operating system that is used in the plant.
We also recommend that you create a back-up copy of the operating system for
emergency situations.
A5E00105492-03 10-1
0DLQWHQDQFH
:KLFK&38VDOORZPHWREDFNXSWKHRSHUDWLQJV\VWHP"
You can back up the operating system as of the following CPU versions:
&38 2UGHU1R )LUPZDUH 5HTXLUHG00&

312 from 6ES7312-1AD10-0AB0 V 2.0.0 or later MMC ≥ 2 MB
314 from 6ES7314-1AF10-0AB0 V 2.0.0 or later MMC ≥ 2 MB
315-2 DP from 6ES7315-2AG10-0AB0 V 2.0.0 or later MMC ≥ 4 MB
312C from 6ES7312-5BD00-0AB0 V 1.0.0 or later MMC ≥ 2 MB
313C from 6ES73133-5BE00-0AB0 V 1.0.0 or later MMC ≥ 2 MB
313C-2DP from 6ES73133-6CE00-0AB0 V 1.0.0 or later MMC ≥ 4 MB
313C-2 PtP from 6ES73133-6BE00-0AB0 V 1.0.0 or later MMC ≥ 2 MB
314C-2DP from 6ES7314-6CF00-0AB0 V 1.0.0 or later MMC ≥ 4 MB
314C-2 PtP from 6ES7314-6BF00-0AB0 V 1.0.0 or later MMC ≥ 2 MB
317-2 DP from 6ES7317-2AJ10-0AB0 V 2.1.0 or later MMC ≥ 4 MB
%DFNXSRIRSHUDWLQJV\VWHPRQ0LFUR0HPRU\&DUG
How to back up the operating system:
Table 10-1 Back-up of operating system on MMC
6WHS $FWLRQUHTXLUHG &385HVSRQVH

1. Insert new micro memory card into The CPU requests memory reset
the CPU
2. Turn the mode selector switch to -
MRES position and hold it there.
3. POWER OFF / POWER ON. Hold ... the STOP, RUN and FRCE LEDs start
the mode selector switch in MRES flashing.
position until ...
4. Mode selector switch to STOP -
position.
5. Mode selector switch briefly to • CPU starts backing up operating
MRES position, then let it return to system on the MMC.
STOP. • All LEDs are lit during the back-up.
• After completion of the backup, the
STOP LED flashes. The CPU
prompts you for a memory reset.
6. Remove Micro Memory Card. -
10-2 A5E00105492-03
0DLQWHQDQFH
8SGDWLQJWKH2SHUDWLQJ6\VWHP
,QZKLFKVLWXDWLRQVVKRXOG,XSGDWHWKHRSHUDWLQJV\VWHP"
After (compatible) function expansions or after an enhancement of operating
system performance the operating system should be upgraded to the latest version
(update).
:KHUHGR,JHWWKHODWHVWYHUVLRQRIWKHRSHUDWLQJV\VWHP"
You can obtain the latest operating system versions from your Siemens partner or
from the Internet (Siemens home page; Automation and Drives, Customer
Support).
7LSEDFNXS\RXURSHUDWLQJV\VWHPEHIRUH\RXXSGDWHLW
If you back up your operating system on a blank MMC before the update, you can
reload the "old" operating system if any problems occur.
8SGDWLQJWKH2SHUDWLQJ6\VWHP
How to update the operating system (OS):
Table 10-2 Updating the operating system with MC/MMC
6WHS $FWLRQUHTXLUHG &385HVSRQVH

1. Transfer update files to a blank -
MMC using STEP 7 and your
programming device.
2. De-energize the CPU and insert -
an MMC containing the operating
system update.
3. POWER ON. • The CPU detects the MMC with the
operating system update automatically
and starts the operating system update.
• All LEDs are lit during OS update.
• After completion of the operating system
update, the STOP LED flashes. The
CPU prompts you for a memory reset.
4. De-energize the CPU and -
remove the MMC containing the
operating system update.
A5E00105492-03 10-3
0DLQWHQDQFH
0RGXOHUHSODFHPHQW
5XOHVIRU,QVWDOODWLRQDQG:LULQJ
The table below shows you points to follow when wiring, installing or removing of
S7-300 modules.
5XOHVJRYHUQLQJ 3RZHUVXSSO\ &38 60)0&3

Blade width of screwdriver 3.5 mm (cylindrical model)
Tightening torque
• Attaching modules to the rail from 0.8 N/m to 1.1 N/m from 0.8 N/m to
• Connecting cables 1.1 N/m
from 0.5 N/m to 0.8 N/m –
POWER OFF when replacing the Yes Yes
...
S7-300 operating mode when – STOP
replacing ...
Load voltage OFF when Yes Yes
replacing the ...
,QLWLDO6LWXDWLRQ
The module you want to replace is still installed and wired. You want to install the
same type of module.
:DUQLQJ
Disturbances can corrupt data if you insert or remove S7-300 modules while data
is being transferred via MPI. Do not replace S7-300 modules while there is data
traffic on the MPI. If you are not certain whether or not data transfer is active on the
MPI, unplug the connector on the MPI before you replace the module.
10-4 A5E00105492-03
0DLQWHQDQFH
5HPRYLQJDPRGXOH60)0&3
Remove the module as follows:
6WHS SLQIURQWFRQQHFWRU SLQIURQWFRQQHFWRU

1. Switch the CPU to STOP.
2. Switch off the load voltage to the module.
3. Remove the labeling strip from the module.
5. Unlock the front connector and remove it.
Press down the unlocking Remove the fixing screw from the middle
mechanism with one hand and with of the front connector. Pull the front
the other hand, pull out the front connector out, holding it at the grips.
connector at the grips.
6. Undo the module fixing screw(s).
7. Swing the module out.
3
1
PS
CPU
2
Figure 10-1 Unlocking the front connector and removing the module
7KLVILJXUHLOOXVWUDWHVWKHVWHSVGHVFULEHG
Remove labeling strips.
Open module.
Press unlocking mechanism/loosen mounting screw, and pull out front connector.
Remove mounting screw of module and tilt module out.
A5E00105492-03 10-5
0DLQWHQDQFH
5HPRYLQJWKHIURQWFRQQHFWRUFRGLQJSLQIURPWKHPRGXOH
Before you start installing the new module, remove the upper part of the front
connector coding pin from this module.
Reason: This part is already inserted in the wired front connector.
Figure 10-2 Removing the front connector coding pin
10-6 A5E00105492-03
0DLQWHQDQFH
,QVWDOOLQJDQHZPRGXOH
Install the new module as follows:
1. Install new module of same type.
2. Pivot the module down into place.
3. Screw-tighten the module.
4. Slide the labeling strips into the module.
1
4
PS C
PU
3 2
Figure 10-3 Installing a new module
7KHILJXUHLOOXVWUDWHVWKHGHVFULEHGVWHSV
Lower module onto rail.
Tilt module down.
Screw the module in tightly.
Insert labeling strips.
5HPRYLQJWKH)URQW&RQQHFWRU&RGLQJ
If you want to take a "used" front connector to wire another module, you can
remove its coding mechanism:
Simply push out the front connector coding with a screwdriver.
This upper part of the coding key must then be plugged back into the old module.
A5E00105492-03 10-7
0DLQWHQDQFH
3XWWLQJD1HZ0RGXOHLQWR6HUYLFH
Proceed as follows to put the new module into service:
2. Reinstall the front connector.
3. Close the front panel.
4. Switch the load voltage back on.
5. Set the CPU to RUN mode again.
2
PS CPU
Figure 10-4 Inserting the front connector
7KHILJXUHLOOXVWUDWHVWKHGHVFULEHGVWHSV
Move the front connector into operating position
Close front panel.
%HKDYLRURI6DIWHUPRGXOHUHSODFHPHQW
After module replacement the CPU switches to run mode, provided no error has
occurred. If the CPU maintains STOP status, you can view the cause of error with
67(3 (refer to the 67(3 User Manual).
10-8 A5E00105492-03
0DLQWHQDQFH
'LJLWDORXWSXWPRGXOH$&95HSODFLQJWKHIXVHV
)XVHVIRU'LJLWDO2XWSXWV
the digital outputs of the following digital output modules are short-circuit protected
by individual fusing of the channel groups:
• Digit output module SM 322; DO 16 × A 120 V
• Digit output module SM 322; DO 8 × A 120 230 V
6\VWHPFKHFN
Eliminate the causes of fuse tripping.
5HSODFHPHQWIXVHV
If replacement is required, you can use the following fuses:
• 8 A, 250 V fuse
– Wickmann 19 194-8 A
– Schurter SP001.013
– Littlefuse 217.008
• Fuse holder
– Wickmann 19 653
:DUQLQJ
Improper handling of digital output modules could result in injury or damage
to property.
Under the covers on the right side of the module, there are dangerous
voltages > 25 VAC or > 60 VDC.
Before opening these covers, ensure that the front connector of the module
is removed or that the module is disconnected from the supply voltage.
:DUQLQJ
Improper handling of front connectors could result in injury or damage to
property.
When you remove the front connector during operation, beware of
dangerous live voltage > 25 VAC or > 60 VDC across the pins.
If the front connector is wired to such voltages, hot swapping of modules
must always be carried out by skilled or instructed electrical staff, in order to
avoid unintentional contact with the module pins.
A5E00105492-03 10-9
0DLQWHQDQFH
3RVLWLRQRIWKH)XVHV
Digital output modules are equipped with 1 fuse per channel group. The fuses are
located at the left side of the digital output module. The figure below shows you the
location of the fuses on digital output modules.
1
1
Figure 10-5 Location of fuses in the digital output module 120/230 VAC
5HSODFLQJIXVHV
The fuses are located at the left side of the module. Replace the fuses as follows:
1. Switch the CPU to STOP.
2. Switch off the load voltage of the digital output module.
3. Remove the front connector from the digital output module.
4. Loosen the fixing screw of the digital output module.
5. Swing out the digital output module.
6. Remove the fuse holder from the digital output module ).
7. Replace the fuse.
8. Screw the fuse holder back into the digital output module.
9. Reinstall the digital output module.
10-10 A5E00105492-03


,QWKLV&KDSWHU
,QWURGXFWLRQ
This Chapter helps you to get acquainted with tools you can use to carry out the
following tasks:
• Hardware/software error diagnostics.
• Elimination of hardware/software errors.
• Testing the hardware/software - for example, during commissioning.
1RWH
It would go beyond the scope of this manual to provide detailed descriptions of all
the tools you can use for diagnostics, testing and troubleshooting functions.
Further notes are found in the relevant hardware/software manuals.
2YHUYLHZ7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV
6RIWZDUHWHVWLQJIXQFWLRQV0RQLWRULQJDQGPRGLI\LQJRIYDULDEOHVVLQJOHVWHS
PRGH
STEP 7 offers you the following testing functions you can also use for diagnostics:
• Monitoring and modifying of variables
Can be used for PG/PC monitoring of specific CPU or user program variables.
You can also declare permanent values for the variables.
• Testing with program status
You can test your program by viewing the program status of each function
(result of logical links, status bit) or the data of specific registers in real-time
mode.
For example, if you have selected the programming language LAD in STEP 7
for your presentation, the color of the symbol will indicate a closed switch or an
active circuit.
A5E00105492-03 11-1
1RWH
The STEP 7 testing function with program status extends the CPU cycle time!
In STEP 7 you can customize the maximum permitted increase in cycle time
(not for CPU 318-2 DP). In this case, set process mode for the CPU parameters
in STEP 7.
• Single-step mode
When testing in single-step mode, you can process your program instructions in
sequence (= single-step) and set break points. This is only possible in testing
mode and not in process mode.
7HVWLQJIXQFWLRQVRIWKHVRIWZDUH)RUFLQJYDULDEOHV
The Force function can be used to declare permanent values in specific variables
of a user program or CPU (also: inputs and outputs) which cannot be overwritten
subsequently by the user program.
For example, you can use it to jumper sensors or switch outputs permanently,
irrespective of the user program.
'DQJHU
This could result in severe injury or even death, and damage to property.
Incorrect use of the Force function could result in death or severe injury, and
damage to machinery or even the entire plant.
Always follow the safety instructions in the 67(3PDQXDOV.
'DQJHU
)RUFLQJZLWK6&38V
The force values in the process image of the LQSXWVcan overwritten by write
commands (such as T IB x, = I x.y, Copy with SFC, etc.) and by read I/O
commands (such as L PIW x) in the user program, or by write PG/OP functions!
2XWSXWV initialized with forced values only return the forced value if not accessed
by the user program via peripheral write instructions (e.g. TPQB x) or by PG/OP
write functions!
Always ensure that forced values in the I/O process image cannot be overwritten
by the user program or PG/OP functions!
11-2 A5E00105492-03
With S7-300 CPUs, forcing is the same as "cyclical modify"
Execute force Execute force

job for inputs job for inputs
PIQ PII PIQ PII

Besy User program Besy
transfer transfer transfer transfer
Forced value
overwritten by
Forced value T PQW! Forced value
Execute force T PQW Execute force

job for outputs job for outputs
OS: operating system execution
Figure 11-1 Principle of forcing in S7-300 CPUs
7KHGLIIHUHQFHVEHWZHHQIRUFLQJDQGPRGLI\LQJYDULDEOHV
Table 11-1 The differences between forcing and modifying variables
&KDUDFWHULVWLFVIXQFWLRQ )RUFLQJ 0RGLI\LQJ9DULDEOHV

Memory bit (M) - Yes
Timers and counters (T, C) - Yes
Data Blocks (DB) - Yes
Inputs and outputs (I, Q) Yes Yes
Peripheral Inputs (PI) - -
Peripheral Outputs (PO) - Yes
User program can overwrite modify/force Yes Yes
values
Maximum number of force values 10 -
&URVVUHIHUHQFH
Details on test functions of the software are found in the 67(32QOLQH+HOS and
in the 67(33URJUDPPLQJ0DQXDO.
A5E00105492-03 11-3
2YHUYLHZ'LDJQRVWLFV
,QWURGXFWLRQ
System errors can occur especially in the &RPPLVVLRQLQJ phase. Tracking these
errors might be a time-consuming effort, since they can occur likewise on hardware
and on software side. Here, the multitude of testing functions ensures
commissioning without problems.
1RWH
Faults GXULQJRSHUDWLRQ are almost always caused by hardware errors or damage.
7\SHVRIHUURU
Errors the S7 CPUs can recognize and to which you can react with the help of
organization blocks (OBs) can be split into the following two categories:
• Synchronous errors: Errors you can relate to a specific point in the user
program (e.g. error when accessing a peripheral module).
• Asynchronous errors: Errors you can QRW relate to a specific point in the user
program (e.g. cycle time exceeded, module error).
(UURU+DQGOLQJ
Programming with foresight and, above all, knowledge and proper handling of
diagnostic tools puts you into an advantageous position in error situations:
• You can reduce the effects of errors.
• It makes it easier for you to locate errors (e.g. by programming error OBs).
• You can limit downtimes.
'LDJQRVWLFVZLWK/('GLVSOD\
SIMATIC S7 hardware offers diagnostics with LEDs.
These LEDs are implemented in three colors:
• Green LEDs report regular operation (e.g. supply voltage is applied).
• Yellow LEDs indicate special operating states (e.g. "Force" is active).
• Red LEDs report errors (e.g. bus error)
A flashing LED also indicates a special event (e.g. memory reset).
&URVVUHIHUHQFH
Notes on diagnostics with LEDs are found in the Chapter below.
Notes on diagnostics of I/O modules capable of diagnostics are found in the
relevant Manual.
11-4 A5E00105492-03
'LDJQRVWLFEXIIHU
If an error occurs, the CPU writes the cause of error to the diagnostic buffer. In
67(3 you can read the diagnostic buffer with your PG. This location holds error
information in plain text.
Other modules capable of diagnostics can be equipped with their own diagnostic
buffer. In 67(3(HW Config > Hardware diagnostics) you can read out his buffer
on your PG.
Diagnosable modules without diagnostic buffer write their error information to the
CPU's diagnostic buffer.
When an error or an interrupt event occurs, (e.g. time-of-day interrupt), the CPU
switches to STOP mode, or you can react in the user program via error/interrupt
OBs. This would be OB82 in the above example.
'LDJQRVWLFVZLWKV\VWHPIXQFWLRQV
If the following CPUs are used, we recommend that you use the more user-friendly
SFB 54 RALRM (called in diagnostic OB82) to evaluate the diagnostics from
centralized or distributed modules or DP slaves:
• CPU 31xC, FW Version V 2.0.0 and higher
• CPU 312, FW Version V 2.0.0 and higher
• CPU 314, FW Version V 2.0.0 and higher
• CPU 315-2 DP, FW Version V 2.0.0 and higher
• CPU 317-2 DP, FW Version V 2.1.0 and higher
Further options for diagnostics with system functions are listed below:
• Using SFC 51 "RDSYSST" to read an SSL partial list or an extract thereof.
• Reading the diagnostic data (Slave diagnostics) of a DP slave, using SFC 13
"DPNRM_DG"
Every DP slave provides slave diagnostic data according to EN 50 170 Volume
2, PROFIBUS. You can use SFC 13 DPNRM_DG" to read these diagnostic
data. Error information is stored in hex code. Refer to the relevant module
manual for information on the meaning of the read code.
For example, the entry of the value 50H (= dual 0101 0000) in byte 7 of the
slave diagnostics for the distributed I/O module ET 200B indicates a faulty fuse
or missing load voltage in channel group 2 and 3.
• Reading a data record with SFC 59 "RD_REC"
You can use SFC 59 "RD_REC" (read record) to read a specific data record
from the addressed module. Data records 0 and 1 are especially suitable for
reading diagnostic information from a diagnosable module.
Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data describing the current state of
a signal module. Data record 1 contains the 4 bytes of diagnostic data also
stored in data record 0, plus module-specific diagnostic data.
• Reading out the start information of the current OB, using SFC 6 "RD_SINFO"
Error information is also found in the start information of the relevant error OB.
You can use SFC 6 "RD_SINFO" (read start information) to read the start
information of the OB that was last called and not yet processed completely,
and of the start-up OB that was last called.
A5E00105492-03 11-5
'LDJQRVWLFRSWLRQVZLWK67(3
7KH+DUGZDUHGLDJQRVWLFVIXQFWLRQ
Locate the cause of a module error by viewing the online information on the
module. You can locate the cause of an error in the user program cycle with the
help of the diagnostic buffer and of the stack content. You can also check whether
a user program will run on a specific CPU.
Hardware diagnostics give you an overview of the PLC status. In an overview
symbols can display the error status of every module. A double-click on the faulty
module opens detailed error information. The scope of this information depends on
the specific module. You can view the following information:
• Display of general information on the module (e.g. order No., version,
designation) and module status (e.g. error).
• Display of module errors (e.g. channel error) in the central I/O and DP slave.
• Display of messages from the diagnostic buffer.
For CPUs you can also view the following module status information:
• Cause of an error in the user program cycle.
• Display of the cycle time (longest, shortest and last cycle).
• Options and utilization of MPI communication.
• Display of performance data (number of possible /IOs, memory bits, counters,
timers and blocks).
Details on diagnostic options in STEP 7 and procedures are found in the
3URJUDPPLQJZLWK67(3 Manual and in the +:&RQILJ2QOLQH+HOS.
11-6 A5E00105492-03
'LDJQRVWLFVZLWK/('V
,QWURGXFWLRQ
Diagnostics with LEDs is an initial tool for error localization. Usually you evaluate
the diagnostic buffer for further error localization.
The buffer contains plain text information on the error that has occurred. For
example, the number of the appropriate error OB is located there. If you generate
this information, you can prevent the CPU from switching to STOP mode.
)RUIXUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQRQVWDWXVDQGHUURUGLVSOD\V
see the 6WDWXVDQGHUURUGLVSOD\V section of the appropriate &38'DWDReference
Manual.
6WDWXVDQGHUURUGLVSOD\VRIDOO&38V
Table 11-2 Status and error displays
/(' 'HVFULSWLRQ
6) 9'& )5&( 581 6723
PRGH
LED LED LED LED off LED off CPU power supply missing.
off off off Remedy:
Check whether the power supply module is connected to
mains and switched on.
Check whether the CPU is connected to the power supply
module and switched on.
LED On X (see LED off On The CPU is in STOP mode.
off the Remedy: Start the CPU.
descri
ption)
On On X LED off On The CPU is in STOP mode as a result of error.
Remedy: refer to the tables below, evaluate the SF LED
X On X LED off Flashes The CPU requests memory reset.
(0.5 Hz)
X On X LED off Flashes The CPU executes memory reset.
(2 Hz)
X On X Flashes On The CPU is in start-up mode.
(2 Hz)
X On X Flashes On The CPU was halted by a programmed break point.
(0.5 Hz) For details refer to the Programming Manual 3URJUDPPLQJ
ZLWK67(3.
On On X X X Hardware or software error
Remedy: refer to the tables below, evaluate the SF LED
X X On X X You have activated the Force function
For details refer to the Programming Manual 3URJUDPPLQJ
ZLWK67(3.
'HVFULSWLRQRIVWDWXV;
This status has no effect on the current CPU function.
A5E00105492-03 11-7
Table 11-3 Evaluation of the SF LED (software error)
3RVVLEOH(UURUV UHVSRQVHRIWKH&38 5HPHGLHV

TOD interrupt is enabled and Calls OB85. CPU Load OB 10 (OB number is
triggered. However, a does not STOP if apparent from the diagnostic
matching block is not OB85 is loaded. buffer).
loaded.
(Software/configuration
error)
Start time of the enabled Calls OB80. CPU Disable the TOD interrupt before
TOD interrupt was jumped, does not STOP if you set the time-of-day with SFC
e.g. by advancing the OB80 is loaded. 29.
internal clock.
Delay interrupt triggered by Calls OB85. CPU Load OB20 or OB21 (CPU 317-2
SFC 32. However, a does not STOP if DP only) (OB number is apparent
matching block is not OB85 is loaded. from diagnostic buffer).
loaded.
error)
Process interrupt is enabled Calls OB85. CPU Load OB40 (OB number is
and triggered. However, a does not STOP if apparent from the diagnostic
matching block is not OB85 is loaded. buffer).
loaded.
error)
Status alarm is generated, Calls OB85. CPU Load OB55
but the appropriate OB55 is does not STOP if
not loaded. OB85 is loaded.
Update alarm is generated, Calls OB85. CPU Load OB56
but the appropriate OB 56 is does not STOP if
not loaded. OB85 is loaded.
Vendor-specific alarm is Calls OB85. CPU Load OB57
generated, but the does not STOP if
appropriate OB57 is not OB85 is loaded.
loaded.
Attempt to access a missing Calls OB85. CPU Generate OB 85, the start
or faulty module. (Software does not STOP if information of the OB contains the
or hardware error) OB85 is loaded or, if address of the relevant module.
OB80 is loaded, the Replace the relevant module or
cycle time is eliminate the program error.
exceeded a second
time without being
triggered again.
The cycle time was Calls OB80. CPU Extension of the cycle time
exceeded. Probably too does not STOP if it is (STEP 7 - Hardware configuration),
many interrupt OBs called OB80 is loaded or changing the program structure.
simultaneously. called for a second Remedy: if required, retrigger cycle
time. time monitoring via SFC 43
11-8 A5E00105492-03

Programming error Calls OB121. CPU Eliminate the programming error.
• Block not loaded does not STOP if The STEP 7 testing function helps
OB121 is loaded. you to locate the error.
• Wrong block number
• Wrong timer/counter
number
• Read/write access to
wrong area
• Etc.
I/O access error Calls OB122. CPU Check module addressing in HW
An error has occurred when does not STOP if Config or whether a module/DP
module data was accessed OB122 is loaded. slave has failed.
Global data communication Calls OB87. CPU Check global data communication
error, e.g. insufficient length does not STOP if in STEP 7. If required, correct the
of the DB for global data OB87 is loaded. DB size.
communication.
Table 11-4 Evaluation of the SF LED (hardware error)

A module was removed or CPU goes into STOP Screw-tighten the modules and
inserted during operation. restart the CPU.
A diagnosable module Calls OB82. CPU response to the diagnostic event,
reports a diagnostic does not STOP if depending on the module's
interrupt. OB82 is loaded. configuration.
Attempt to access a missing Call of OB85, if Generate OB85, the start
or faulty module. Loose access was attempted information of the OB contains the
connector (Software or during update of the address of the relevant module.
hardware error). process image (here, Replace the relevant module,
the OB85 call must be tighten the plug or eliminate the
enabled accordingly in program error.
the parameters). Call
of OB122 with direct
I/O access. CPU
switches to STOP if
the OB is not loaded.
MMC is defective. The CPU goes into Replace MMC, reset CPU
STOP mode and memory, retransfer program, and
requests memory change CPU to RUN mode.
reset.
Tip: You can use SFC 39 to disable all interrupts and asynchronous error events.
Tip on OB32 and OB35: You can set the times in watchdog OB32 and OB35,
starting from 1 ms.
A5E00105492-03 11-9
1RWH
The shorter the selected watchdog interrupt period, the more likely it is that
watchdog interrupt errors will occur. You must take into account the operating
system times of the CPU in question, the user program runtime and extension of
the cycle time by active PG functions, for example.
&URVVUHIHUHQFH
Details on the OBs and on SFCs required for their evaluation can be found in the
67(32QOLQH+HOS and in the Manual 6\VWHP6RIWZDUHIRU66\VWHP
DQG6WDQGDUG)XQFWLRQV.
6WDWXVDQGHUURUGLVSOD\RI'3FRPSOLDQW&38V
Table 11-5 The BUSF, BUSF1 and BUSF2 LEDs
/(' 'HVFULSWLRQ
6) 9'& %86) %86) %86)
On On On/ - - PROFIBUS DP interface error.
flashe Remedy: Refer to the table below
s
On On - On/ X Error at the first PROFIBUS DP interface of CPU 317-2
flashes DP.
Remedy: Refer to the table below
On On - X On/flash Error at the second PROFIBUS DP interface of CPU 317-2
es DP.
Remedy: Refer to the table below
Description of status X:
The LED can assume the status On or Off, but this status has no effect on the
current CPU function. For example, the states Force On or Off do not influence the
STOP status of the CPU
11-10 A5E00105492-03
Table 11-6 The BUSF LED lights up.
3RVVLEOH(UURUV 5HVSRQVHRIWKH&38 5HPHGLHV

• Bus fault (hardware fault). Calls OB86 (when CPU is in RUN • Check the bus cable for short
• DP interface error. mode). CPU switches to STOP if or interruption.
OB86 is not loaded. • Evaluate the diagnostic data.
• Different transmission rates in
multiple DP master mode. Reconfigure, or correct the
configuration.
• If the DP slave interface is
active or there is a bus short-
circuit on the master.
• For a passive DP slave
interface: baud rate search,
i.e. there are currently no
other active nodes on the bus
(e.g. a master)
Table 11-7 The BUSF LED flashes

The CPU is the DP master/active Calls OB86 (when CPU is in RUN Ensure that the bus cable is
slave: mode). CPU switches to STOP if connected to the CPU and that
• Failure of a connected station OB86 is not loaded. the bus is not interrupted.
• At least one of the configured Wait until the CPU has started. If
slaves cannot be accessed. the LED does not stop flashing,
check the DP slaves or evaluate
• Incorrect configuration the diagnostic data for the DP
slaves.
The CPU is the DP slave Calls OB86 (when CPU is in RUN • Check the CPU.
CPU 31x was programmed mode). • Check to make sure that the
incorrectly. Possible causes: CPU switches to STOP if OB86 is bus connector is properly
• The response monitoring time not loaded. inserted.
has expired. • Check for interruptions in the
• PROFIBUS DP bus cable to the DP master.
communication is interrupted. • Check configuration data and
• Wrong PROFIBUS address. the parameters.
• Incorrect configuration
A5E00105492-03 11-11
'LDJQRVWLFVRI'3&38V
'LDJQRVWLFVRI'3&38V2SHUDWLQJDV'30DVWHU
'LDJQRVWLFVHYDOXDWLRQLQWKHXVHUSURJUDP
The figure below illustrates the procedure for evaluating the diagnostics in the user
program.
Diagnostic event
OB82 is called
Evaluation with Evaluation with SFB54

SFC13 or SFC51 (simplest method)
Read out OB82_MDL_ADDR and For the diagnostics of the affected components:
OB82_IO_FLAG
(=Identification I/O module) Call SFB54
MODE=1 set.
Bit 0 of OB82_IO_FLAG entered Diagnostic data is entered into the TINFO
as bit 15 in OB82_MDL_ADDR. and AINFO parameters
Result: diagnostic address
"OB82_MDL_ADDR*"
For the diagnostics of the For the diagnostics of the affected modules:
entire DP slave: Call SFC 51
Call SFC13 Enter the diagnostic address

"OB82_MDL_ADDR*" into the INDEX parameter.
Enter the diagnostic address
"OB82_MDL_ADDR*" into Enter ID W#16#00B3 (= diagnostic data of a
the LADDR parameter. module) into the SZL_ID parameter.
Note:
SFC 13 is asynchronous, i. e. it can be
called several times until it enters the
BUSY mode = 0.
First call into OB82,

finish processing in the cycle.
Figure 11-2 Diagnostics with CPU 31x-2
11-12 A5E00105492-03
'LDJQRVWLFDGGUHVVHV
With CPU 31x-2 you assign diagnostic addresses for the PROFIBUS DP. Make DP
diagnostic addresses are assigned to the DP master and to the DP slave sure
during configuration.
CPU as DP master CPU as DP slave
PROFIBUS DP
During configuration you must specify three diagnostic addresses:
• Slave diagnostic address DP interface diagnostic address

(from the master) (from the slave)
• Slot 2 Diagnostic Address
of the Slave (from the master)
Figure 11-3 Diagnostic addresses for DP masters and DP slaves
&RQILJXUDWLRQRI'30DVWHU &RQILJXUDWLRQRI'36ODYH

During configuration of the DP master, you During configuration of the DP slave, you
assign two different diagnostic addresses for also specify a diagnostic address assigned
an I-slave: one diagnostic address for Slot 0 to the DP slave (in the associated project of
and one diagnostic address for Slot 2. The the DP slave).
two addresses have the following functions: Hereinafter, this diagnostic address is
• The diagnostic address for slot 0 reports referred to as DVVLJQHGWRWKH'3VODYH.
in the master all events relating to the This diagnostic addresses is used by the DP
complete slave (station representative), slave to obtain information on the status of
e.g. station failure. the DP master or a bus interruption.
• The diagnostic address for slot 2 is used
to report events that affect this slot. For
example, if the CPU is acting as an
intelligent slave, it returns the diagnostic
interrupts for operating state transitions.
Hereinafter, these diagnostic addresses are
referred to as DVVLJQHGWRWKH'3PDVWHU.
These diagnostic addresses are used by the
DP master to obtain information on the
status of the DP slave or a bus interruption.
A5E00105492-03 11-13
(YHQWUHFRJQLWLRQ
The table below shows how CPU 31x-2 operating as DP master recognizes
operating mode transitions of a CPU operating as DP slave or data exchange
interruptions.
Table 11-8 Event recognition by CPUs 31x-2 as the DP master
Bus failure interrupt • Calls OB86 with the message 6WDWLRQIDLOXUH(incoming
(short-circuit, event; diagnostic address of Slot 0 of the DP slave that is
connector unplugged) assigned to the DP master)
• with I/O access: Call of OB122 (I/O access error)
DP slave: RUN → • Call of OB82 with the message 0RGXOHHUURU
STOP (incoming event; diagnostic address of Slot 2 of the DP slave
that is assigned to the DP master; Variable
OB82_MDL_STOP=1)
DP slave: STOP → • Call of OB82 with the message 0RGXOH2.
RUN (outgoing event; diagnostic address of Slot 2 of the DP slave
that is assigned to the DP master; Variable
OB82_MDL_STOP=0)
(YDOXDWLRQLQWKHXVHUSURJUDP
The table below shows how you can, for example, evaluate RUN to STOP
transitions of the DP slave in the DP master.
Table 11-9 Evaluation in the DP master of RUN to STOP transitions by the DP slave
,QWKH'3PDVWHU ,QWKH'3VODYH&38['3

Diagnostic addresses: (Example) Diagnostic addresses: (Example)
Master diagnostic address = Slave diagnostic address =
Slave diagnostic address = Master diagnostic address = irrelevant
(Slot 0 of slave)
(Diagnostic) address for "Slot 2"=
(Slot 2 of slave)
The CPU calls OB82 with the following ← CPU: RUN -> STOP
information: The CPU generates a DP slave
• OB82_MDL_ADDR:= diagnostics message frame
• OB82_EV_CLASS:=B#16#39 (incoming
event)
• OB82_MDL_DEFECT: = Module error
Tip: The CPU diagnostic buffer also contains
this information
In the user program you should also include
SFC 13 "DPNRM_DG" for reading out DP
slave diagnostic data.
11-14 A5E00105492-03
5HDGLQJVODYHGLDJQRVWLFGDWD
The slave diagnostic data is compliant with EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.

Depending on the DP master, diagnostic data for all DP slaves conforming to
standard can be read with 67(3.
'LDJQRVWLFDGGUHVVHVZLWKGLUHFWGDWDH[FKDQJH
You assign a diagnostic address to the receiving station when directly exchanging
data:
CPU 31x-2 as sender CPU 31x-2 as receiver
PROFIBUS
Diagnostic address
Figure 11-4 Diagnostic address for the receiving station with direct data exchange
The figure illustrates how you specify a diagnostic address assigned to the receiver
in the receiver during configuration. This diagnostic addresses is used by the
receiver to obtain information on the status of the sender or a bus interruption.
A5E00105492-03 11-15
5HDGLQJRXWWKHGLDJQRVWLFGDWD
The table below shows you how the various DP master systems can read
diagnostic information from a slave.
Table 11-10 Reading the diagnostic information using STEP 5 and STEP 7 in the masters system
3/&ZLWK'3PDVWHU %ORFNVRUUHJLVWHUVLQ $SSOLFDWLRQ )XUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQ

67(3
SIMATIC S7/M7 “DP slave diagnostics” Displaying slave Found under the
register diagnostic data as plain keyword +DUGZDUH
text on a STEP 7 user GLDJQRVWLFV in the STEP
interface 7 Online Help and in the
3URJUDPPLQJ67(3
Manual
SFC 13 “DP NRM_DG” Reading slave 6\VWHPDQG6WDQGDUG
diagnostic data )XQFWLRQVReference
(stored in the data area Manual
of the user program)
SFC 51 “RDSYSST” Reading SSL sublists. In 6\VWHPDQG6WDQGDUG
the diagnostic interrupt, )XQFWLRQVReference
call SFC 51 with the Manual
system status list ID
W#16#00B4 and read
out the SSL of the slave
CPU.
SFB 54 "RALRM" Reading additional 6\VWHPDQG6WDQGDUG
interrupt information )XQFWLRQVReference
from a DP slave or a Manual
centralized module from
the relevant OB.
SFC 59 “RD_REC” Reading data records of 6\VWHPDQG6WDQGDUG
the S7 diagnosis (stored )XQFWLRQVReference
in the data area of the Manual
user program)
FB 125/FC 125 Evaluating slave On the Internet URL
diagnostic data http://www.ad.siemens.d
e/simatic-cs, Article ID
387 257
SIMATIC S5 with IM FB 192 “IM308C” Reading slave Manual 'LVWULEXWHG,2
308-C operating as DP diagnostic data (stored 6\VWHP(7
master in the data area of the
user program)
SIMATIC S5 with S5- FB 230 “S_DIAG”
95U PLC operating as
DP master
11-16 A5E00105492-03
([DPSOHRIUHDGLQJVODYHGLDJQRVWLFGDWDXVLQJ)%,0&
Here you will find an example of how to use FB192 to read out DP slave
diagnostic data in the 192 67(3 user program.
$VVXPSWLRQVUHJDUGLQJWKH67(3XVHUSURJUDP
For this 67(3 user program it is assumed that:
• The IM 308-C operating as DP master uses page frame 0 to 15 (number 0 of IM
308-C).
• The DP slave has the PROFIBUS address 3.
• Slave diagnostics data should be stored in DB 20. Here you can also use any
other data block.
• Slave diagnostic data has a length of 26 bytes.
67(3XVHUSURJUDP
67/ 'HVFULSWLRQ
:A DB 30
:SPA FB 192
Name :IM308C
DPAD : KH F800 Default address area of IM 308-C
IMST : KY 0, 3 //IM no. = 0, PROFIBUS address of the DP slave = 3
FCT : KC SD //Function: Read slave diagnosis
GCGR : KM 0 //not evaluated
TYP : KY 0, 20 //S5 data area: DB 20
STAD : KF +1 //Diagnostic data as of data word 1
LENG : KF 26 //Length of diagnostic data = 26 bytes
ERR : DW 0 //Error code storage in DW 0 of DB 30
([DPSOHRIUHDGLQJRXW6GLDJQRVWLFGDWDZLWK6)&³5'5(&´
Here you will find an example of how to use SFC 59 in the 67(3 user program
to read S7 diagnostics data records for a DP slave. The process of reading the
slave diagnostics is similar to SFC 13.
A5E00105492-03 11-17
$VVXPSWLRQVUHJDUGLQJWKH67(3XVHUSURJUDP
For this 67(3 user program it is assumed that:
• Diagnostic data for the input module at address 200H is to be read.
• Data record 1 is to be read out.
• Data record 1 is to be stored in DB 10.
67(3XVHUSURJUDP
67/ 'HVFULSWLRQ
CALL SFC 59
REQ :=TRUE //Request to read

IOID :=B#16#54 //Identifier of the address area, here the I/O input
LADDR:= W#16#200 //Logical address of the module
RECNUM :=B#16#1 //Data record 1 is to be read
RET_VAL :=MW2 //An error code is output if an error occurs
BUSY :=MO.0 //Read operation not finished
RECORD :=P# DB10.DBX 0.0 BYTE 240 //DB 10 is target area for the read data record 1
1RWH
Data is only returned to the target area if BUSY is reset to 0 and if no negative
RET_VAL has occurred.
11-18 A5E00105492-03
'LDJQRVWLFDGGUHVVHV
With CPU 31x-2 you assign diagnostic addresses for the PROFIBUS DP. Make DP
diagnostic addresses are assigned to the DP master and to the DP slave sure
during configuration.
CPU as DP master CPU as DP slave
PROFIBUS DP
During configuration you must specify three diagnostic addresses:
• Slave diagnostic address DP interface diagnostic address

(from the master) (from the slave)
• Slot 2 Diagnostic Address
of the Slave (from the master)
Figure 11-5 Diagnostic addresses for DP masters and DP slaves
&RQILJXUDWLRQRI'30DVWHU &RQILJXUDWLRQRI'36ODYH
During configuration of the DP master, you During configuration of the DP slave, you
assign two different diagnostic addresses for also specify a diagnostic address assigned
an I-slave: one diagnostic address for Slot 0 to the DP slave (in the associated project of
and one diagnostic address for Slot 2. The the DP slave).
two addresses have the following functions: Hereinafter, this diagnostic address is
• The diagnostic address for slot 0 reports referred to as DVVLJQHGWRWKH'3VODYH.
in the master all events relating to the This diagnostic addresses is used by the DP
complete slave (station representative), slave to obtain information on the status of
e.g. station failure. the DP master or a bus interruption.
• The diagnostic address for slot 2 is used
to report events that affect this slot. For
example, if the CPU is acting as an
intelligent slave, it returns the diagnostic
interrupts for operating state transitions.
Hereinafter, these diagnostic addresses are
referred to as DVVLJQHGWRWKH'3PDVWHU.
These diagnostic addresses are used by the
DP master to obtain information on the
status of the DP slave or a bus interruption.
A5E00105492-03 11-19
(YHQWUHFRJQLWLRQ
The table below shows how CPU 31x-2 operating as DP slave recognized
operating state transitions or data exchange interruptions.
Table 11-11 Event recognition by CPUs 31x-2 acting as the DP slave
Bus failure interrupt (short- • Calls OB86 with the message 6WDWLRQIDLOXUH(incoming
circuit, connector unplugged) event; diagnostic address of the DP slave, assigned to
the DP slave)
• with I/O access: Call of OB122 (I/O access error)
DP master: RUN → STOP • Calls OB82 with the message 0RGXOHHUURU(incoming
event; diagnostic address of the DP slave assigned to
DP master: STOP → RUN • Call of OB82 with the message 0RGXOH2.(outgoing
event; diagnostic address of the DP slave, assigned to
(YDOXDWLRQLQWKHXVHUSURJUDP
The table below shows you how you can, for example, evaluate RUN-STOP
transitions of the DP master in the DP slave (see also the previous table).
Table 11-12 Evaluation of RUN to STOP transitions in the DP master/DP slave
,QWKH'3PDVWHU ,QWKH'3VODYH
Diagnostic addresses: (Example) Diagnostic addresses: (Example)
Master diagnostic address = Slave diagnostic address =
Slave diagnostic address in the master Master diagnostic address = irrelevant
system=
(Slot 0 of slave)
(Diagnostic) address for "Slot 2"=
(Slot 2 of slave)
CPU: RUN " STOP → The CPU calls OB82 with the following
information:
• OB82_MDL_ADDR:=422
• OB82_EV_CLASS:=B#16#39 (incoming
event)
• OB82_MDL_DEFECT: = Module error
Tip: The CPU diagnostic buffer also
contains this information
11-20 A5E00105492-03
,QWHUUXSWVRQWKH'30DVWHU
,QWHUUXSWVZLWK6'3PDVWHU
3URFHVVLQWHUUXSWVE\,6ODYHZLWK6)&
If the CPU 31x-2 is used as the DP slave, you can trigger a process interrupt on
the DP master from the user program.
When you call SFC 7 “DP_PRAL”, you trigger an OB40 in the user program on the
DP master. The SFC 7 allows you to forward interrupt information to the DP master
in a double word. This information can then be evaluated in the
OB40_POINT_ADDR variable in the OB40. The interrupt information can be freely
programmed as required. The 6\VWHP6RIWZDUHIRU66\VWHPDQG
6WDQGDUG)XQFWLRQV - Reference Manual contains a detailed description of SFC 7
“DP_PRAL”.
6HWWLQJXVHUGHILQHGLQWHUUXSWVE\,6ODYHVZLWKWKH6)%
In the CPU 31x-2 operated as a DP slave, you can trigger user-defined interrupts
from the DP master from the user program. SFB 75 "SALRM" is used to send a
process or diagnostic interrupt from a slot in the transfer area (virtual slot) to the
associated DP master from the user program on an intelligent slave. This starts the
associated OB on the DP master.
Interrupt-specific additional information may be sent at the same time. You can
read all this additional information in the DP master using SFB 54 "RALRM".
,QWHUUXSWVZLWKDQRWKHU'3PDVWHU
When CPU 31x-2 operates with another DP master, an image of these interrupts is
created in the device-specific diagnostic data of CPU 31x-2. You must post-
process the relevant diagnostic events in the DP master's user program.
1RWH
Before you can evaluate diagnostic and process interrupts using the device-
specific diagnostics function on another DP master, you must make sure that:
The DP master is able to store the diagnostic messages, i.e. the diagnostic
messages should be stored in a ring buffer on the DP master. For example, if the
DP master can not store diagnostic messages, only the last incoming diagnostic
message would be stored.
In your user program, you must query the relevant bits in device-specific diagnostic
data. Here you must take the PROFIBUS DP cycle time into account, for example,
to be able to query these bits at least once and in synchronism to bus cycle time.
With an IM 308-C operating as DP master you cannot utilize process interrupts in

device-specific diagnostics, because only incoming events are reported rather than
outgoing events.
A5E00105492-03 11-21
6WUXFWXUHRIWKH6ODYH'LDJQRVWLF'DWDZKHQWKH&38LVXVHGDV
DQ,QWHOOLJHQW6ODYH
6WUXFWXUHRIWKHGLDJQRVWLFVPHVVDJHIUDPH
The figure below shows the structure of the diagnostics message frame for slave
diagnostics.
Byte 0
Byte 1 Station status 1 to 3
Byte 2
Byte 3 Master PROFIBUS address
Byte 4 High byte

Manufacturer ID
Byte 5 Low byte
Byte 6 Module diagnostics

.
to (length depends on the number of the
. configured areas of the intermediate
Byte x-1
. memory 1 )
Byte x Modul status (device-specific diagnostics)

to .
(length depends on the number
Byte y-1
. of the configured address areas)
.
Byte y Interrupt status (device-specific diagnostics)

to .
(length depends on interrupt type)
Byte z
.
.
1 Exception: if the DP master is wrongly configured,

the DP slave will interprete 35 configured address areas
(46H in byte 6)
Figure 11-6 Structure of slave diagnostic data
11-22 A5E00105492-03
6WDWLRQVWDWXV
Table 11-13 Structure of station status 1 (byte 0)
%LW 'HVFULSWLRQ 5HPHG\

0 DP slave cannot be addressed by DP master. • Is the correct DP address set on the DP
slave?
• Is the bus connector in place?
• Does the DP slave have power?
• Correct configuration of the RS485
Repeater?
• Perform a reset on the DP slave.
1 DP slave is not ready for data exchange. • Wait for the slave to complete start-up.
2 Configuration data sent by DP master to the DP • Was the software set for the correct
slave is inconsistent with slave configuration. station type or DP slave configuration?
3 Diagnostic interrupt, generated by a RUN to • You can read the diagnostic data.
STOP transition on the CPU or by the SFB 75
Diagnostic interrupt, generated by a STOP to
RUN transition on the CPU or by the SFB 75
4 Function not supported; e.g. changing the DP • Check configuration data.
address at software level
5 This bit is always “0”. • -
6 DP slave type inconsistent with software • Was the software set for the right station
configuration. type? (parameter assignment error)
7 DP slave was configured by a DP master other • The bit is always 1 if, for example, you are
than the master currently accessing the slave. currently accessing the DP slave via PG or
a different DP master.
The configuring master's DP address is
located in the ”Master PROFIBUS address”
diagnostics byte.
6WDWLRQ6WDWXV
%LW 'HVFULSWLRQ
0 The DP slave requires new parameters and configuration.
1 A diagnostic message was received. The DP slave cannot resume operation until the error
has been cleared (static diagnostic message).
2 This bit is always ”1” if a DP slave exists with this DP address.
3 The watchdog monitor is enabled on this DP slave.
4 DP slave has received control command "FREEZE".
5 DP slave has received control command "SYNC".
6 This bit is always "0".
7 DP slave is disabled, that is, it has been excluded from cyclic processing.
A5E00105492-03 11-23
6WDWLRQ6WDWXV
%LW 'HVFULSWLRQ
0 to 6 These bits are always “0”
7 The incoming diagnostic messages exceeds the memory capacity of the DP slave.
The DP master cannot write all diagnostic messages sent by the DP slave to its diagnostic
buffer.
0DVWHU352),%86DGGUHVV
The "Master PROFIBUS address" diagnostic byte stores the DP address of the DP
master:
• that has configured the DP slave and
• has read and write access to the DP slave.
Table 11-16 Structure of the master PROFIBUS address (byte 3)
%LW 'HVFULSWLRQ
0 to 7 DP address of the DP master that has configured the DP slave and has read/write access to
that DP slave.
FFH: DP slave was not configured by a DP master
YHQGRU,'
The vendor ID contains a code specifying the DP slave's type.
Table 11-17 Structure of the vendor ID (byte 4, 5)
%\WH %\WH 9HQGRU,'IRUWKH&38

80H EEH CPU 315-2 DP
80H F0H CPU 317-2 DP
80H D0H 313C-2-DP
80H D1H 314C-2-DP
11-24 A5E00105492-03
0RGXOHGLDJQRVWLFV
Module diagnostics indicate the configured address area of intermediate memory
that has received an entry.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte 6 0 1
Length of the module diagnostics incl. byte 6

(dependent on the number of configured
address areas up to 6 byte)
Code for module diagnostics
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte 7
Preset ≠ actual configuration

Preset ≠ actual configuration or Slave CPU in STOP
Preset ≠ actual configuration
Entry for 1st configured address area
Entry for 2nd configured address area
Entry for 3rd configured address area
Entry for 4th configured address area
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte 8
Entry for 6th to 13th configured address area

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte 9
Entry for 14th to 21st configured address area
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte 10
Entry for 22nd to 29th configured address area

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte 11 0 0 0 0 0

Entry for 31st configured address area
Entry for 32nd configured address area
Figure 11-7 Structure of the ID-specific diagnostics for CPU 31x-2
A5E00105492-03 11-25
0RGXOHVWDWXV
The module status reflects the status of the configured address areas, and
provides detailed ID-specific diagnostics with respect to the configuration. Module
status starts with module diagnostics and consists of a maximum of 13 bytes.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte x 0 0
Length of module status incl. byte x (max. 13 bytes)

Code for device-related diagnostics
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte x+1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Status type: module status
2H = module status
Code for status message
Byte x+2 0H always "0"

Byte x+3 0H always "0"
7 6
Byte x+4 0 0 0 0
CPU slot
1st configured address area
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte x+5
2nd configured address area

3rd configured address area
00B: Module ok.;
4th configured address area
valid data
01B: Module fault;
invalid data
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (defective mode)
Byte x+6 10B: Wrong module:
invalid data
6th configured address area 11B: No module:
7th configured address area invalid data
.
.
.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte y-1 0 0

31st configured address area
32nd configured address area
Figure 11-8 Structure of the module status
11-26 A5E00105492-03
,QWHUUXSWVWDWXV
The interrupt status of module diagnostics provides details on a DP slave. The
maximum length of module diagnostics starting at byte y is 20 bytes.
The following figure describes the structure and content of the bytes for a
configured address area of intermediate memory.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte y 0 0
Length of the device-related diagnostics incl. byte y

(max. 20 bytes)
Code for device-related diagnostics
Byte y +1 01H: Code for diagnostics interrupt

02H: Code for process interrupt
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte y +2 Slot No.
2 = CPU
4...35 = No. of the configured address area
of the intermediate memory
Byte y +3 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 = No additional information

on diagnostic status
01 = Incoming diagnostics
(there is at least 1 error)
Only for
10 = Outgoing diagnostics
diagnostic
11 = Outgoing diagnostics,
interrupt
but there are still
Byte y +4 disturbances
to
Byte y +7 Diagnostics or interrupt data

.
.
.
Byte z
Example on byte y+2

CPU = 02H
1. Address area = 04H
2. Address area = 05H
etc.
Figure 11-9 Structure of the interrupt status
A5E00105492-03 11-27
6WUXFWXUHRIWKHLQWHUUXSWGDWDIRUDSURFHVVLQWHUUXSWIURPE\WH\
When a process interrupt occurs (code 02H for process interrupt in byte y+1), 4
bytes of interrupt information after byte y+4 are transferred. These 4 bytes were
transferred to the intelligent slave using SFC 7 "DP_PRAL“ or SFC 75 "SALRM“
when the process interrupt for the master was generated.
6WUXFWXUHRIWKHLQWHUUXSWGDWDZKHQDGLDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSWLVJHQHUDWHGLQ
UHVSRQVHWRDQRSHUDWLQJVWDWXVFKDQJHE\WKHLQWHOOLJHQWVODYHDIWHUE\WH\
Byte y+1 contains the code for a diagnostic interrupt (01H). The diagnostic data
contains the 16 bytes of status information from the CPU. The figure below shows
the allocation of the first four bytes of diagnostic data. The next 12 bytes are
always 0.
The data in these bytes corresponds to the contents of data record 0 of diagnostic
data in 67(3 (in this case, not all bits are used).
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte y + 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0: Module o.k.
1: Module fault
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte y + 5 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
Identifier for the intermediate

memory address area
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte y + 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0: Operating mode RUN

1: Operating mode STOP
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte y + 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note: byte y + 8 to byte y + 19 are always 0.
Figure 11-10 Bytes y+4 to y+7 for a diagnostic interrupt (operating status change by intelligent slave)
11-28 A5E00105492-03
6WUXFWXUHRIWKHLQWHUUXSWGDWDZKHQDGLDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSWLVJHQHUDWHGE\6)%
RQWKHLQWHOOLJHQWVODYHDIWHUE\WH\
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.
Byte y +4 0: Module o.k.
0
1: Module fault
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no. Note the SFB 75 usage description

Byte y +5
Note that this diagnostic data has a
fixed meaning in the S7 context.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.
Byte y +6 You will find more information in the
STEP 7 Online Help or in the
Reference Manual System Software
for S7-300/400 System and Standard
Functions in the Diagnostic Data
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no. chapter.
Byte y +7
.
.
.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.
Byte y +19
Figure 11-11 Bytes y+4 to y+7 for the diagnostic interrupt (SFB 75)
A5E00105492-03 11-29
11-30 A5E00105492-03

$SSHQGL[

$VVHPEO\
*HQHUDO5XOHVDQG5HJXODWLRQVIRU62SHUDWLRQ
,QWURGXFWLRQ
In view of the many and versatile S7-300 applications, this chapter can only
describe the basic rules on its electrical configuration. You must observe at least
these basic rules if you want your S7-300 to operate free of trouble.
(0(5*(1&<2))GHYLFHV
EMERGENCY-OFF devices to IEC 204 (corresponds to VDE 113) must remain
effective in all operating modes of the plant or system.
6WDUWXSRIWKHV\VWHPDIWHUVSHFLILFHYHQWV
The following table shows you what you have to observe when starting up a plant
again following specific events.
Table 12-1 Starting the system after specific events
,IWKHUHLV :KDWPXVWQRWKDSSHQ
Restart following a voltage dip or power No dangerous operating states may occur. If
failure, necessary, force EMERGENCY-OFF.
Start-up after releasing the EMERGENCY An uncontrolled or undefined start-up must
OFF device: be avoided.
A5E00105492-03 12-1
$SSHQGL[
0DLQVYROWDJH
The following table shows you what to watch with respect to the mains voltage.
Table 12-2 Mains voltage
,QWKHFDVHRI LV
For stationary systems or systems without Installation of a mains disconnect switch or
all-pole mains disconnect switch a fuse in the building installation system.
For load power supplies, power supply The set rated voltage range must
modules correspond to the local power supply
voltage.
For all circuits of the S7-300 Rated mains voltage fluctuation/deviation
must lie within the permitted tolerance (refer
to Technical Data of S7-300 modules).
9'&3RZHU6XSSO\
The table below shows what you must observe in connection with the 24 VDC
power supply.
Table 12-3 Protection against external electrical interference
,QWKHFDVHRI 0HDVXUHVWRWDNH
Buildings External lightning Install lightning protection
protection (e.g. lightning conductors).
24 VDC power supply cables, Internal lightning
signal cables protection
24 VDC Power Supply Safe (electrical) extra-low voltage isolation
3URWHFWLRQDJDLQVWH[WHUQDOHOHFWULFDOLQWHUIHUHQFH
The table below shows how you must protect your system against electrical
interference or faults.
Table 12-4 Protection against external electrical interference
,QWKHFDVHRI 0DNHVXUHWKDW
All plants or system with an S7-300 the plant or system is connected to a
installation protective conductor for the suppression of
electromagnetic interference.
Supply/signal/bus cables The conductor routing and installation is
correct.
Signal and bus cables a cable/conductor break does not result in
undefined plant or system states.
,QIRUPDWLRQRQ(0&DQGVXUJHSURWHFWLRQ
can be found in the following Chapters.
12-2 A5E00105492-03
$SSHQGL[
3URWHFWLRQDJDLQVW(OHFWURPDJQHWLF,QWHUIHUHQFH
%DVLF3RLQWVIRU6\VWHP,QVWDOODWLRQV&RQIRUPLQJZLWK(0&
5HTXLUHPHQWV
'HILQLWLRQ(0&
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) describes the capability of electrical
equipment to operate free of errors in a given electromagnetic environment,
without being subject to external influence and without influencing external devices
in any way.
,QWURGXFWLRQ
Although your S7-300 and its components are developed for an industrial
environment and high electromagnetic compatibility, you should draw up an EMC
installation plan before you install the controller under consideration of all possible
interference sources.
3RVVLEOHHIIHFWVRILQWHUIHUHQFH
Electromagnetic noise can influence a PLC in various ways:
• Electromagnetic fields having a direct influence on the system
• Interference via bus signals (PROFIBUS DP etc.)
• Interference coupling via the system wiring
• Interference influencing the system via the power supply and/or protective
ground
The figure below shows the likely paths of electromagnetic interference.
Electromagnetic
fields
Bus signal PS CPU SM SM SM SM SM SM SM SM Process wiring
Protective earth Power supply module
Figure 12-1 Possible paths of electromagnetic interference
A5E00105492-03 12-3
$SSHQGL[
&RXSOLQJPHFKDQLVPV
Depending on the emitting media (line or isolated) and the distance between the
interference source and the device, four different coupling mechanisms can
influence the PLC.
Table 12-5 Coupling mechanisms
&RXSOLQJ &DXVH 7\SLFDOLQWHUIHUHQFHVRXUFHV

PHFKDQLVPV
Electrical Galvanic or mechanical • Clocked devices (influence on the
coupling coupling always occurs when network due to converters and
two circuits use one common third-party power supply modules)
cable. • Starting motors
• Potential differences on component
enclosures with common power
supply
• Static discharge
Capacitive Capacitive or electrical • Interference coupling due to
coupling coupling occurs between parallel routing of signal cables
conductors connected to • Static discharge of the operator
different potentials.
• Contactors
The coupling effect is
proportional to voltage
change over time.
Inductive Inductive or magnetic • Transformers, motors, arc welding
coupling coupling occurs between two devices
current circuit loops. Current • Power supply cables routed in
flow in magnetic fields parallelism
induces interference voltages.
The coupling effect is • Switched cable current
proportional to current change • High-frequency signal cable
over time.
• Coils without suppression circuit
Radio frequency Radio frequency coupling • Neighboring transmitters (e.g. radio
coupling occurs when an phones)
electromagnetic wave • Sparking (sparkplugs, collectors of
reaches a conductor system. electrical motors, welding devices)
This wave coupling induces
currents and voltages.
12-4 A5E00105492-03
$SSHQGL[
)LYH%DVLF5XOHVIRU(QVXULQJ(0&
,I\RXFRPSO\ZLWKWKHVHVILYHEDVLFUXOHV
you can ensure EMC in many cases!
5XOH/DUJHDUHDJURXQGLQJ
When you install the automation equipment, make sure that surfaces of inactive
metal parts are well bonded to chassis ground (see the following sections).
• Bond all passive metal parts to chassis ground, ensuring large area and low-
impedance contact.
• When using screw connections on varnished or anodized metal parts, support
contact with special contact washers or remove the protective insulating finish
on the points of contact.
• Wherever possible, avoid the use of aluminum parts for ground bonding.
Aluminum oxidizes very easily and is therefore less suitable for ground bonding.
• Create a central connection between chassis ground and the equipotential
grounded/protective conductor system.
5XOH3URSHUFDEOHURXWLQJ
Ensure proper cable routing when you wire your system (see the section below on
,QGRRURXWGRRUFDEOHURXWLQJ).
• Sort your wiring system into groups (high-voltage/power supply/signal/data
cables).
• Always route high-voltage, signal or data cables through separated ducts or in
separate bundles.
• Install the signal and data cables as close as possible to grounded surfaces
(e.g. supporting beans, metal rails, steel cabinet walls ).
A5E00105492-03 12-5
$SSHQGL[
5XOH0RXQWLQJWKHFDEOHVKLHOGLQJ
Take care that all cable shielding is properly fastened (refer to the section on
6KLHOGLQJRIFDEOHV).
• Always use shielded data cable. Always connect both ends of the shielding to
ground on a large area.
• Analog cables must always be shielded. For the transmission of low-amplitude
signals it might prove to be more efficient to have only one side of the shielding
connected to ground.
• Directly behind the cable entry in the cabinet or enclosure, terminate the
shielding on a large area of the shielding/protective ground bar and fasten it
with the help of a cable clamp. Then, route the cable to the module; however,
do not connect the shielding once again to ground in this place.
• Connections between the shielding/protective ground busbar and the
cabinet/enclosure must be of a low impedance.
• Always install shielded data cables in metal/metallized connector housings.
5XOH6SHFLDO(0&PHDVXUHV
Some special applications might require special EMC measures (refer to the
section on +RZWRSURWHFWGLJLWDORXWSXWPRGXOHVDJDLQVWLQGXFWLYHVXUJHYROWDJH).
• Connect anti-surge elements to all inductive devices not controlled by S7-300
modules.
• For cabinet or cubicle lighting in the immediate range of your controller, use
incandescent lamps or interference suppressed fluorescent lamps .
5XOH+RPRJHQHRXVUHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDO
Create a homogeneous reference potential and ground electrical equipment
whenever possible (refer to the section on (TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ).
• Route your equipotential conductors over a wide area if potential differences
exist or are expected between your system components.
• Make sure you carefully direct your grounding measures. Grounding measures
protect the controller and its functions.
Form a star circuit to connect the equipment in your system and the cabinets
containing central/expansion units to the grounding/protective conductor system.
This prevents the formation of ground loops.
12-6 A5E00105492-03
$SSHQGL[
VHHDOVR
Grounding concept and overall structure
Shielding of cables
Outdoor cable routing
Cable Routing inside Buildings
EMC Compatible Installation of PLC
(0&&RPSDWLEOH,QVWDOODWLRQRI3/&
,QWURGXFWLRQ
Quite often it is the case that interference suppression measures are not taken until
corruption of user signals is detected after the controller is actually in operation.
Frequently, the causes of such interference are found in inadequate reference
potentials as a result of faulty installation. This section shows you how to avoid
such errors.
,QDFWLYHPHWDOSDUWV
Inactive parts are referred to as electrically conductive elements, separated from
active elements by a basic insulating and only subject to electrical potential if an
error occurs.
,QVWDOODWLRQDQGJURXQGERQGLQJRILQDFWLYHPHWDOSDUWV
Bond all inactive metal parts to a large-surface ground when you install the S7-300.
Proper ground bonding ensures a homogeneous reference potential for the
controller and reduces the effect of interference coupling.
The ground connection establishes an electrically conductive interconnection of all
inactive parts. The sum of all interconnected inactive parts is referred to as chassis
ground.
This chassis ground must never develop a hazardous potential even if a fault
occurs. Therefore, chassis ground must be connected to the protective conductor
using cables with an adequate conductor cross-section. To avoid ground loops,
physically separate chassis ground elements (cabinets, parts of the building
construction or machine) must be bonded to the protective conductor system in a
star circuit.
A5E00105492-03 12-7
$SSHQGL[
2EVHUYHWKHIROORZLQJIRUJURXQGFRQQHFWLRQ
• In the same way as with active elements, exercise meticulous care to
interconnect inactive metal elements.
• Always make sure that you have a low-impedance interconnection between
metal elements (e.g. large and highly conductive contact surface).
• The protective insulating finish on varnished or anodized metal elements must
be pierced or removed. Use special contact washers or completely remove the
finish on the point of contact.
• Protect your connecting elements against corrosion (e.g. with a suitable grease)
• Interconnect moving chassis ground elements (e.g. cabinet doors) with flexible
ground straps. Always use short ground straps with a large surface (the surface
is decisive for the diversion of high-frequency currents).
12-8 A5E00105492-03
$SSHQGL[
([DPSOHVRIDQ(0&&RPSDWLEOH,QVWDOODWLRQ
,QWURGXFWLRQ
Below you can find two examples of an EMC compatible PLC installation.
6DPSOH(0&FRPSDWLEOHFDELQHWLQVWDOODWLRQ
The figure below shows a cabinet installation with the measures described above
(bonding of inactive metal parts to chassis ground and connecting the cable
shielding to ground). This sample applies only to grounded operation. Note the
points in the figure when you install your system.
2
1
4
5
6
7
Figure 12-2 Example of an EMC compatible cabinet installation
A5E00105492-03 12-9
$SSHQGL[
.H\WRH[DPSOH
The numbers in the following list refer to the numbers in the figure above.
Table 12-6 Key to example 1
1R 'HVFULSWLRQ ([SODQDWLRQ

1 Ground straps If no large-surface metal-to-metal connections are available,
you must either interconnect inactive metal parts (e.g. cabinet
doors or mounting plates) or bond them to chassis ground using
ground straps. Use short ground straps with a large surface.
2 Supporting bars Interconnect the supporting bars on a large area to the cabinet
walls (metal-to-metal connection).
3 Mounting the rail The mounting bar and rack must be interconnected with large-
area metal-to-metal connections.
4 Signal cables Connect the shielding of signal cables on a large area of the
protective conductor/additional shielding busbar and fasten
them with cable clamps.
5 Cable clamp The cable clamp must cover a large area of the shielding braid
and ensure good contact.
6 Shielding busbar Interconnect the shielding busbar on a large surface with the
supporting bars (metal-to-metal connection). The cable
shielding is terminated on the busbar.
7 Protective Interconnect the protective conductor busbar on a large surface
conductor busbar with the supporting bars (metal-to-metal connection).
Interconnect the protective conductor busbar and the protective
ground system, using a separate cable (minimum cross-section
2
10 mm ).
8 Cable to the Interconnect the cable on a large area with the protective
protective ground ground system (equipotential ground).
system
(equipotential
ground)
([DPSOH(0&FRPSDWLEOHZDOOPRXQWLQJ
When operating your S7 in a low-noise environment that conform with permitted
ambient conditions (see Appendix $PELHQWFRQGLWLRQV), you can also mount your
S7 in frames or to the wall.
Interference coupling must be diverted to large metal surfaces. Therefore, always
mount standard profile/shielding/protective conductor rails on metal parts of the
construction. Steel sheet panels reference potential surfaces have been found
especially suitable for wall-mounting.
Provide a shielding busbar for connecting your cable shielding. This shielding
busbar can also be used as protective ground bar.
12-10 A5E00105492-03
$SSHQGL[
1RWHWKHIROORZLQJSRLQWVRQIUDPHZDOOPRXQWLQJ
• When mounting on varnished or anodized metal parts, use special contact
washers or remove the insulating layers.
• Provide a large-surface and low-impedance metal-to-metal connection for
fastening the shielding/protective protective ground bar.
• Always touch-protect live mains conductors.
The figure below shows an example of EMC compatible wall-mounting of an S7.
PS
CPU
Figure 12-3 Example of EMC compatible wall-mounting
A5E00105492-03 12-11
$SSHQGL[
6KLHOGLQJRI&DEOHV
3XUSRVHRIWKHVKLHOGLQJ
A cable is shielded to attenuate the effects of magnetic, electrical and
electromagnetic interference on the cable.
2SHUDWLQJSULQFLSOH
Interference currents on cable shielding is diverted to ground conductive
interconnection between the shielding and the cabinet. To avoid interference as a
result of these currents, it is imperative to provide a low-impedance connection to
the protective conductor.
6XLWDEOHFDEOHV
Whenever possible, use cables equipped with a shielding braid. Shielding density
should be at least 80%. Avoid cables with film shielding, because the film can be
easily damaged by tensile or pressure stress, thus reducing its shielding effect.
+DQGOLQJRIWKHVKLHOGLQJ
Note the following points on handling the shielding:
• Always use metal clamps to mount shielding braid. The clamps must contact a
large area of the shielding and provide appropriate contact force.
• Directly behind the cabinet's cable entry, terminate the shielding on a shielding
bus. Then, route the cable to the module; however, do not connect the shielding
once again to ground in this place.
• In installations outside of cabinets (e.g. for wall-mounting) you can also
terminate the shielding on a cable duct.
12-12 A5E00105492-03
$SSHQGL[
The figure below shows some options for mounting shielded cables, using cable
clamps.
Figure 12-4 Mounting cable shielding
3RWHQWLDOGLIIHUHQFHV
Potential differences can occur between separate system elements. This can result
in high equipotential currents, e.g. if the cable shielding is terminated at both ends
and grounded to different system components.
The cause of potential difference can be differences in the power supplies.
:DUQLQJ
Cable shielding is not suitable for equipotential bonding. Always use the prescribed
2
cables (e.g. with a cross-section of 16 mm ). When installing MPI/DP networks,
provide a sufficient conductor cross-section. Otherwise, interface hardware might
get damaged or even be destroyed.
A5E00105492-03 12-13
$SSHQGL[
(TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJFRQGXFWRU
To reduce potential differences and ensure proper functioning of your electronic
equipment, you must install equipotential bonding conductors.
Note the following points on the use of equipotential bonding conductors:
• The lower the impedance of an equipotential bonding conductor, the more
effective is equipotential bonding.
• When shielded signal cables interconnect two system components and the
shielding is connected on both ends to ground/protective conductors, the
impedance of the additional equipotential bonding conductor must not exceed
10% of the shielding impedance.
• Determine the cross-section of your equipotential bonding conductor on the
basis of the maximum equalizing current that will flow through it. The
equipotential bonding conductor cross-section that has proven best in practice
2
is 16 mm .
• Always use equipotential bonding conductors made of copper or galvanized
steel. Always connect the cables on a large surface to the equipotential
busbar/protective conductor and protect it against corrosion.
• Route your equipotential bonding conductor to minimize the area between the
equipotential bonding conductor and signal lines as far as possible (see the
figure below).
Figure 12-5 Equipotential bonding
12-14 A5E00105492-03
$SSHQGL[
&DEOH5RXWLQJLQVLGH%XLOGLQJV
,QWURGXFWLRQ
Inside buildings (inside and outside cabinets), clearances must be maintained
between groups of different cables to achieve the necessary electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC). The table contains information on the general rules governing
clearances to enable you to choose the right cables.
+RZWRUHDGWKHWDEOH
To find out how to run two cables of different types, proceed as follows:
1. Look up the type of the first cable in column 1 (Cables for ...).
2. Look up the type of the second cable in the corresponding field in column 2
(and cables for ...).
3. Note the applicable directives in column 3 (Run ...).
Table 12-7 Routing cables inside buildings
&DEOHVIRU DQGFDEOHVIRU 5XQ

• Bus signals, shielded • Bus signals, shielded In common bundles or cable
(PROFIBUS) (PROFIBUS) ducts
• Data signals, shielded • Data signals, shielded
(programming devices, (programming devices,
operator panels, printers, operator panels, printers,
counter inputs, etc.) counter inputs, etc.)
• Analog signals, shielded • Analog signals, shielded
• DC voltage (≤ 60 V), • DC voltage (≤ 60 V),
unshielded unshielded
• Process signals (≤ 25 V), • Process signals (≤ 25 V),
shielded shielded
• AC voltage (≤ 25 V), • AC voltage (≤ 25 V),
unshielded unshielded
• Monitors (coaxial cable) • Monitors (coaxial cable)
• DC voltage (> 60 V and In separate bundles or cable
≤ 400 V), unshielded ducts (no minimum clearance
• AC voltage (> 25 V and necessary)
≤ 400 V), unshielded
• DC and AC voltage (> 400 V), LQVLGHFDELQHWV
unshielded In separate bundles or cable
ducts (no minimum clearance
necessary)
RXWVLGHFDELQHWV
On separate cable racks with a
clearance of at least 10 cm
A5E00105492-03 12-15
$SSHQGL[
&DEOHVIRU DQGFDEOHVIRU 5XQ

• DC voltage (> 60 V and • Bus signals, shielded In separate bundles or cable
≤ 400 V), unshielded (PROFIBUS) ducts (no minimum clearance
• AC voltage (> 25 V and • Data signals, shielded necessary)
≤ 400 V), unshielded (programming devices,
operator panels, printers,
counter inputs, etc.)
• Analog signals, shielded
• DC voltage (≤ 60 V),
unshielded
• Process signals (≤ 25 V),
shielded
• AC voltage (≤ 25 V),
unshielded
• Monitors (coaxial cable)
• DC voltage (> 60 V and In common bundles or cable
≤ 400 V), unshielded ducts
• AC voltage (> 25 V and
≤ 400 V), unshielded
• DC and AC voltage (> 400 V), LQVLGHFDELQHWV
unshielded In separate bundles or cable
ducts (no minimum clearance
necessary)
RXWVLGHFDELQHWV
clearance of at least 10 cm
DC and AC voltage (> 400 V), • Bus signals, shielded LQVLGHFDELQHWV
unshielded (PROFIBUS) In separate bundles or cable
• Data signals, shielded ducts (no minimum clearance
(programming devices, necessary)
operator panels, printers, RXWVLGHFDELQHWV
counter inputs, etc.)
• Analog signals, shielded clearance of at least 10 cm
• DC voltage (≤ 60 V),
unshielded
• Process signals (≤ 25 V),
shielded
• AC voltage (≤ 25 V),
unshielded
• Monitors (coaxial cable)
• DC and AC voltage (> 400 V), In common bundles or cable
unshielded ducts
ETHERNET ETHERNET In common bundles or cable
ducts
Others In separate bundles or cable
ducts with a clearance of at least
50 cm
12-16 A5E00105492-03
$SSHQGL[
2XWGRRUFDEOHURXWLQJ
5XOHVIRU(0&FRPSDWLEOHFDEOHURXWLQJ
The same EMC compatibility rules apply both for indoor and outdoor routing of
cables. The following also applies:
• Running cables on metal cable trays.
• Electrical connection of the joints of cable trays/ducts.
• Ground the cable carriers.
• If necessary, provide adequate equipotential bonding between connected
devices.
• Take the necessary (internal and external) lightning protection and grounding
measures in as far as they are applicable to your particular application.
5XOHVIRUOLJKWQLQJSURWHFWLRQRXWVLGHEXLOGLQJV
Run your cables either:
• in metal conduits grounded at both ends, or
• in concrete cable ducts with continuous end-to-end armoring.
2YHUYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQHTXLSPHQW
An individual appraisal of the entire plant is necessary before any lightning
protection measures are taken.
$GGLWLRQDOLQIRUPDWLRQRQOLJKWQLQJSURWHFWLRQ
can be found in the Lightning and surge voltage protection section.
A5E00105492-03 12-17
$SSHQGL[
/LJKWQLQJDQG6XUJH9ROWDJH3URWHFWLRQ
,QWKHIROORZLQJVHFWLRQV
we show you solutions for the protection of your S7-300 against damage as a
result of surge voltage.
2YHUYLHZ
Failures are very often the result of surge voltage caused by:
• Atmospheric discharge or
• Electrostatic discharge.
We will begin by showing you what the theory of surge protection is based on: the
lightning protection zones concept.
At the end of this section, you will find rules for the transition points between
individual lightning protection zones.
1RWH
This section can only provide information on the protection of a PLC against surge
voltage.
However, complete surge protection is guaranteed only if the whole surrounding
building is designed to provide protection against overvoltage. This applies
especially to constructional measures for the building at the planning stage.
If you wish to obtain detailed information on surge protection, we therefore
recommend you contact your Siemens partner or a company specialized in
lightning protection.
/LJKWQLQJ3URWHFWLRQ=RQH&RQFHSW
3ULQFLSDOO\RIWKH/LJKWQLQJSURWHFWLRQ]RQHFRQFHSWWR,(&
',19'(7
The principle of the lightning protection zone concept states that the volume to be
protected against overvoltage, for example, a manufacturing hall, is subdivided into
lightning protection zones in accordance with EMC directives (see Figure ).
The specific lightning protection zones are formed by the following measures:
Lightning protection of the building exterior (field side) Lightning protection zone 0
Shielding
• Buildings Lightning protection zone 1
• Rooms and/or Lightning protection zone 2
• Devices Lightning protection zone 3
12-18 A5E00105492-03
$SSHQGL[
(IIHFWVRIWKH/LJKWQLQJ6WULNH
Direct lightning strikes occur in lightning protection zone 0. Lightning strike
generates high-energy electromagnetic fields which can be reduced or eliminated
from one lightning protection zone to the next by suitable lightning protection
elements/measures.
2YHUYROWDJH
In lightning protection zones 1 and higher, a lightning strike might additionally
cause overvoltage as a result of switching operations, coupling etc.
%ORFNGLDJUDPRIWKHOLJKWQLQJSURWHFWLRQ]RQHV
The figure below shows a block diagram of the lightning protection zone concept
for a detached building.
Lightning-protection zone 0 (field side)
External Building shield

lightning Lightning-protection zone 1 (Steel reinforcing)
protection
Room shield
Lightning-prot. zone 2 (Steel reinforcing)

Line in
power
Lightning- Device shield
system
protection (Metal casing)
zone 3
Device
Non-electric
Metal line (metallic)
part
Internal
line
Line in information system Lightning-

protection equal
Local potential
equal
Figure 12-6 Lightning protection zones of a building
A5E00105492-03 12-19
$SSHQGL[
3ULQFLSOHRIWKHWUDQVLWLRQSRLQWVEHWZHHQOLJKWQLQJSURWHFWLRQ]RQHV
At the transitions points between lightning protection zones, you must take
measures to prevent surges being conducted downstream.
The principle of the lightning protection zone concept also specifies that all cables
which are capable of carrying lightning current (!) and installed at the transition
points of lightning protection zones must be included in the equipotential bonding
system.
Conductors and cables capable of carrying lightning current are:
• Metal pipes (e.g. water, gas and heat)
• Power cables (for example, mains voltage, 24 V supply)
• Data cables (for example, bus cable).
5XOHVIRUWKH7UDQVLWLRQ3RLQWEHWZHHQ/LJKWQLQJ3URWHFWLRQ
=RQHV!
5XOHVIRUWUDQVLWLRQSRLQW!/LJKWQLQJSURWHFWLRQHTXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ
The following measures are suitable for lightning protection equipotential bonding
at the transition between lightning protection zones 0 <-> 1:
• Use grounded, spiraled, current-conducting metal straps or metal braiding as a
cable shield at both ends, for example, NYCY or A2Y(K)Y.
• Install cables in one of the following media:
– in continuous metal pipes that are grounded at both ends, or
– in continuously armored concrete ducts or
– on closed metal cable trays grounded at both ends.
– Use fiber optic cables instead of metal conductors.
12-20 A5E00105492-03
$SSHQGL[
$GGLWLRQDO0HDVXUHV
If you cannot take measures as described above, you must install a high-voltage
protection for your system between the 0 <-> 1 transition points with a lightning
conductor. The table below contains the components you can use for high-voltage
protection of your plant.
Table 12-8 High-voltage protection of cables with surge voltage protection components
&RQVHF &DEOHVIRU HTXLSWUDQVLWLRQSRLQW! 2UGHU1R

QR ZLWK
1 3-phase TN-C system 1x DEHNbloc/3 900 110*
lightning conductor, phase 5SD7 031
L1/L2/L3 to PEN
3-phase TN-S system 1x DEHNbloc/3 900 110*
L1/L2/L3 to PE
1x DEHNbloc/1 900 111*
lightning conductor, N to PE 5SD7 032
3-phase TT system 1x DEHNbloc/3 900 110*
L1/L2/L3 to N
1x DEHNgap B/n 900 130*
N-PE lightning conductor, N
to PE
AC TN-S system 2x DEHNbloc/1 900 111*
L1 +N to PE
AC TN-C system 1x DEHNbloc/1 900 111*
lightning conductor, phase L 5SD7 032
to PEN
AC TT system 1x DEHNbloc/1 900 111*
to N
1x DEHNgap B/n 900 130*
N-PE lightning conductor, N
to PE
2 24 VDC Power Supply 1x Blitzductor VT Lightning 918 402*
conductor,
type A D 24 V -
3 MPI bus cable, RS485, RS232 1x Blitzductor CT lightning 919 506* and
(V.24) conductor, type B 919 510*
4 Inputs/outputs of digital modules DEHNrail 24 FML 909 104*
24 V
5 24 VDC power supply module 1x Blitzductor VT 918 402*
lightning conductor, type AD 900 111*
24 V - 5SD7 032
6 Inputs/outputs of digital modules 2x DEHNbloc/1 lightning 900 111*
and 120/230 VAC power supply conductor 5SD7 032
7 Inputs/outputs of analog modules 1x Blitzductor CT lightning 919 506* and
up to 12 V +/- conductor, type B 919 510*
* You can order these components directly from:
DEHN + SÖHNE
GmbH + Co. KG
Elektrotechnische Fabrik
Hans-Dehn-Str. 1
D-92318 Neumarkt
A5E00105492-03 12-21
$SSHQGL[
5XOHVIRUWKH7UDQVLWLRQ3RLQWVEHWZHHQ/LJKWQLQJ3URWHFWLRQ
=RQHV!DQG+LJKHU
5XOHVIRUWUDQVLWLRQSRLQWV!DQGKLJKHUORFDOHTXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ
The following measures must be taken on all transition points 1 <-> 2 and higher:
• Set up local equipotential bonding at each subsequent lightning protection zone
transition.
• Include all lines (also metal conduits, for example) in the local equipotential
bonding of all subsequent lightning protection zone transition points.
• Include all metal installations located within the lightning protection zone in the
local equipotential bonding (for example, metal part within lightning protection
zone 2 at transition 1 <-> 2).
$GGLWLRQDO0HDVXUHV
We recommend fine-wire fusing for following elements:
• All 1 <-> 2 and greater lightning protection zone transitions
• All cables that run within a lightning protection zone and are longer than 100 m
/LJKWQLQJSURWHFWLRQHOHPHQWIRUWKH9'&SRZHUVXSSO\PRGXOH
Always use the Blitzductor VT, type AD 24 V SIMATIC for the 24 VDC power
supply module of the S7-300. All other surge protection components do not meet
the required tolerance range of 20.4 V to 28.8 V of the S7-300 power supply.
/LJKWQLQJ&RQGXFWRUIRU6LJQDO0RGXOHV
You can use standard surge protection components for the digital I/O modules.
However, please note that these only permit a maximum of 26.8 V for a rated
voltage of 24 VDC. If the tolerance of your 24 VDC power supply is higher, use
surge protection components with 30 VDC rating.
You can also use Blitzductor VT, type AD 24 V. Note that input current can
increase if negative input voltages are generated.
12-22 A5E00105492-03
$SSHQGL[
/RZYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQHOHPHQWVIRU!
For the transition points between lightning protection zones 1 <-> 2 we recommend
the surge protection components listed in the table below. This low-voltage
protection must be used in S7-300 for CE compliance.
Table 12-9 Surge voltage protection components for lightning protection zones 1 <-> 2
&RQVHF &DEOHVIRU HTXLSWUDQVLWLRQSRLQW 2UGHU1R

QR !ZLWK
1 3-phase TN-C system 3x DEHNguard 275 surge 900 600*
arresters 5SD7 030
3-phase TN-S system 4x DEHNguard 275 surge 900 600*
arresters 5SD7 030
3-phase TT system 3x DEHNbloc/275 surge arrester, 900 600*
phase L1/L2/L3 to N 5SD7 030
1x DEHNgap C N-PE surge 900 131*
arrester, N to PE
AC TN-S system 2x DEHNguard 275 surge 900 600*
arresters 5SD7 030
AC TN-C system 1x DEHNguard 275 surge 900 600*
arresters 5SD7 030
AC TT system 1x DEHNguard 275 900 600*
surge arrester, phase L to N 5SD7 030
1x DEHNgap C, N-PE surge 900 131*
arrester, N to PE
2 24 VDC Power Supply 1x Blitzductor VT, type AD 24 V - 918 402*
3 Bus cable
• MPI, RS485 • Blitzductor CT surge 919 506* and
arrester, type MD/HF 919 570*
• RS232 (V.24) 1x • per conductor pair
Surge arrester Blitzductor 919 506* and
CT type ME 15 V 919 522*
4 Inputs of digital modules 1x Low-voltage surge arrester 919 993*
DC 24 V , type FDK 2 60 V
5 Outputs of digital 1x Low-voltage surge arrester 919 991*
modules 24 V
6 Inputs/outputs of digital 2x Surge arrester
modules
• 120 VAC • DEHNguard 150 900 603*
• 230 VAC • DEHNguard 275 900 600*
7 Inputs of analog 1x Blitzductor CT surge arrester, 919 506* and
modules up to 12 V +/- type MD 12 V 919 541*
DEHN + SÖHNE
GmbH + Co. KG
Hans-Dehn-Str. 1
D-92318 Neumarkt
A5E00105492-03 12-23
$SSHQGL[
/RZYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQHOHPHQWVIRU!
For the transition points between lightning protection zones 2 <-> 3 we recommend
the surge protection components listed in the table below. This low-voltage
protection must be used in S7-300 for CE compliance.
Table 12-10 Surge voltage protection components for lightning protection zones 2 <-> 3
&RQVHF &DEOHVIRU HTXLSWUDQVLWLRQSRLQW 2UGHU1R

QR !ZLWK
1 3-phase TN-C system 3x DEHNguard 275 surge 900 600*
arresters 5SD7 030
3-phase TN-S system 4x DEHNguard 275 surge 900 600*
arresters 5SD7 030
3-phase TT system 3x DEHNbloc/275 surge arrester, 900 600*
phase L1/L2/L3 to N 5SD7 030
arrester, N to PE
AC TN-S system 2x DEHNguard 275 surge 900 600*
arresters 5SD7 030
AC TN-C system 1x DEHNguard 275 surge 900 600*
arresters 5SD7 030
AC TT system 1x DEHNguard 275 900 600*
surge arrester, phase L to N 5SD7 030
arrester, N to PE
2 24 VDC Power Supply 1x Blitzductor VT, type AD 24 V - 918 402*
3 Bus cable
• MPI, RS485 • Blitzductor CT surge 919 506* and
arrester, type MD/HF 919 570*
• RS232 (V.24) 1x • per conductor pair
low-voltage surge protection 919 995*
FDK 2 12 V
4 Inputs of digital modules
• 24V DC 1x Low voltage protection 919 993*
, type FDK 2 60 V, on insulated
rail
2x Surge arrester
• 120 VAC • DEHNrail 120 FML 901 101*
• 230 VAC • DEHNrail 230 FML 901 100*
5 Outputs of digital 1x Low-voltage protection 919 991*
modules 24 V FDK 2 D 5 24
6 Outputs of analog 1x Low-voltage protection 919 995*
modules up to 12 V +/- , type FDK 2 12 V, on insulated
rail connected with M- of the
power supply for the modules.
DEHN + SÖHNE
GmbH + Co. KG
Hans-Dehn-Str. 1
D-92318 Neumarkt
12-24 A5E00105492-03
$SSHQGL[
6DPSOHRID6XUJH3URWHFWLRQ&LUFXLWIRU1HWZRUNHG
63/&V
6DPSOHFLUFXLW
The sample in the figure below shows you how install an effective surge protection
for 2 networked S7-300 PLCs:
Lightning-protection zone 0, field side
L1 L3 PE
L2 N Lightning-protection zone 1
2 2
Switchgear cubicle 1 Switchgear cubicle 2
Lightning-protection zone 2 Lightning-protection zone 2
SV CPU SM 4 SV CPU SM 4
MPI MPI
4 4
1
3 5 2 5
PE 10 mm2 PE 10 mm
6 6
3
3
Figure 12-7 Sample circuit for networked S7-300 PLCs
A5E00105492-03 12-25
$SSHQGL[
&RPSRQHQWVLQSUHYLRXVILJXUH
The table below explains consecutive numbers in the figure above:
Table 12-11 Example of a lightning-protected structure (key to figure above)
&RQVHF &RPSRQHQWV 'HVFULSWLRQ

QR
IURP
ILJXUH
DERYH
1 lightning arrestor, depending on the mains High-voltage protection against
system, e.g. TN-S system: direct lightning strike and surge
1 piece DEHNbloc/3, voltage as of transition 0 <-> 1
Order No.: 900 110* and
1 piece DEHNbloc/1,
Order No.: 900 111*
2 surge arresters, High-voltage surge protection at
2 pieces DEHNguard 275; transition 1 <-> 2
Order No.: 900 600*
3 Surge arrester, Low-voltage surge protection for
Blitzductor CT type MD/HF; RS485 interfaces at transition
Order No.: 919 506* and 919 570* 1 <> 2
4 Digital input modules: Low-voltage surge protection,
FDK 2 D 60 V; Order No.: 919 993* signal modules I/O at transition
Digital output modules: FDK 2 D 5, 24 V; 1 <-> 2
Order No.: 919 991*
Analog modules:
MD 12 V Blitzductor CT;
Order No.: 919 506 and 919 541
5 Bus cable shielding mounting device with Discharge of interference current
EMC spring clamp on the basic unit of
Blitzductor CT; Order No.: 919 508*
6 Cable for equipotential bonding: 16 sq. Standardization of reference
mm potentials
7 Blitzductor CT, Type B for building High-voltage surge protection for
transitions; RS485 interfaces at transition 0 <-
Order No.: 919 506* and 919 510* >1

DEHN + SÖHNE
GmbH + Co. KG
Hans-Dehn-Str. 1
D-92318 Neumarkt
12-26 A5E00105492-03
$SSHQGL[
+RZWR3URWHFW'LJLWDO2XWSXW0RGXOHVDJDLQVW,QGXFWLYH6XUJH
9ROWDJH
,QGXFWLYHVXUJHYROWDJH
Overvoltage occurs when inductive devices are switched off. Examples are relay
coils and contactors.
,QWHJUDWHGVXUJHDUUHVWHU
S7-300 digital output modules are equipped with an integrated surge arrester.
$GGLWLRQDORYHUYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQ
Inductive devices require additional surge arresters only in following cases:
• If SIMATIC output circuits can be switched off by additionally installed contacts
(e.g. relay contacts).
• If the inductive loads are not controlled by SIMATIC modules
Note: Request information on relevant surge protection rating from the supplier of
inductive devices.
([DPSOH
The figures illustrates an output circuit requiring additional overvoltage protectors.
PS CPU SM SM SM SM SM SM
Contact in the output circuit
Inductivity requires circuiting
Figure 12-8 EMERGENCY-OFF relay contact in the output circuit
Refer also to the rest of the information in this section.
A5E00105492-03 12-27
$SSHQGL[
&LUFXLWIRUFRLOVRSHUDWHGZLWK'&YROWDJH
The figure below shows DC-operated coils equipped with diode or Zener diode
circuit.
with diode with Zener diode
+ +
- -
Figure 12-9 Circuit for coils operated with DC voltage
Diode/Zener diode circuits have the following characteristics:

• Opening surge voltage can be totally avoided.
The Zener diode has a higher switch-off voltage capacity.
• High switch-off delay (6 to 9 times higher than without protective circuit).
The Zener diode switches off faster than a diode circuit.
&LUFXLWIRUFRLOVRSHUDWHGZLWK$&YROWDJH
The figure shows coils operated with AC voltage and varistor or RC circuit.
with varistor with RC element
~ ~
~ ~
Figure 12-10 Circuit for coils operated with AC voltage
The characteristics of varistor circuits are:

• The amplitude of the opening surge is limited rather than attenuated.
• The surge rise-ratio remains the same
• Short off-delay.
The characteristics of RC circuits are:
• Amplitude and steepness of the opening surge are reduced.
• Short off-delay.
12-28 A5E00105492-03
$SSHQGL[
6DIHW\RIHOHFWURQLFFRQWUROHTXLSPHQW
,QWURGXFWLRQ
The notes below apply independent of the type or manufacturer of the electronic
control.
5HOLDELOLW\
Maximum reliability of SIMATIC devices and components is achieved by
implementing extensive and cost-effective measures during development and
manufacture:
This includes the following:
• Use of high-quality components;
• Worst-case design of all circuits;
• Systematic and computer-aided testing of all components;
• Burn-in of all large-scale integrated circuits (e.g. processors, memory, etc.);
• Measures preventing static charge when handling MOS ICs;
• Visual checks at different stages of manufacture;
• Continuous heat-run test at elevated ambient temperature over a period of
several days;
• Careful computer-controlled final testing;
• Statistical evaluation of all returned systems and components to enable the
immediate initiation of suitable corrective measures;
• Monitoring of major control components, using on-line tests (watchdog for the
CPU, etc.).
These measures are referred to in safety technology as basic measures. They
prevent or rectify a large proportion of possible faults.
A5E00105492-03 12-29
$SSHQGL[
5LVNV
In all cases where the occurrence of failures can result in material damage or injury
to persons, special measures must be taken to enhance the safety of the
installation - and therefore also of the situation. System-specific and special
regulations exist for such applications. They must be observed on installing the
control system (e.g. VDE 0116 for burner control systems).
For electronic control equipment with a safety function, the measures that have to
be taken to prevent or rectify faults are based on the risks involved in the
installation. As of a certain degree of hazard the basic measures mentioned above
are no longer sufficient. That is, additional measures (e.g. redundant
configurations, tests, checksums etc.) must be implemented and certified for the
control equipment (DIN VDE 0801). The prototype of the fail-safe PLC S5-95F was
tested by TÜV (German Institute for Technological Surveillance), BIA and G EM III;
several certificates have been granted. Thus, it is suitable in the same way as the
previously tested fail-safe PLC S5-115F to control and monitor safety-relevant
system areas.
6SOLWWLQJWKHJURXSLQWRVDIHW\UHOHYDQWDUHDVDQGDUHDVZKLFKDUHQRWVDIHW\
UHOHYDQW
Most plants contain equipment performing safety-relevant operations (e.g.
EMERGENCY-OFF switch, protective gates, two-hand controls). To avoid the need
to examine the entire controller from the aspect of safety, WKHFRQWUROOHULVXVXDOO\
GLYLGHGLQWRDQDUHDWKDWLVVDIHW\UHOHYDQWDQGDQDUHDWKDWLVQRWVDIHW\
UHOHYDQW In the non-safety--related area, no special demands are placed on the
safety of the control equipment because any failure in the electronics will have no
effect on the safety of the installation. In the safety-relevant area, however, it is
only allowed to operate controllers or circuits compliant with corresponding
regulations.
The following divisions are common in practical situations:
• For control equipment with few safety-related functions (e.g. machine controls)
The conventional PLC is responsible for machine control, whereas safety-
related functions are implemented with a fail-safe mini PLC (e.g. S5-95F).
• For controllers with balanced areas (e.g. chemical installations, cable cars)
The non-secure area is implemented with a conventional PLC, while the secure
area requires a tested, fail-safe controller (S7-300F, S7-400F, S7-400FH,
S5-115F or several S5-95Fs).
The entire installation is implemented with a fail-safe control system.
• For control equipment with mainly safety-relevant functions (e.g. burner control
systems)
The entire control system is implemented with fail-safe technology.
,PSRUWDQW,QIRUPDWLRQ
The instructions in the operating manual MUST be followed, even if the electronic
control equipment has been configured for maximum design safety - e.g. with a
multi-channel structure. Incorrect handling can render measures intended to
prevent dangerous faults ineffective, or generate additional sources of danger.
12-30 A5E00105492-03

*ORVVDU\

$FFXPXODWRU
The Æ CPU uses the accumulator registers as intermediate memory for load,
transfer, comparison, calculation and conversion operations.
$GGUHVV
An address represents the ID for a specific address or address range. Example:
Input I12.1; Memory bit word MW25; Data block DB3.
$QDORJ0RGXOH
Analog modules convert process values (e.g. temperature) into digital values, so
that they can be processed by the central processing unit, or convert digital values
into analog manipulated variables.
%DFNSODQH%XV
The backplane bus is a serial data bus. It supplies power to the modules and is
also used by the modules to communicate with each other. Bus connectors
interconnect the modules.
EDFNXS0HPRU\
The back-up memory provides a back-up of memory areas for the Æ CPU without
a back-up battery. It backs up a configurable number of timers, counters, memory
bits, data bytes and retentive timers, counters, memory bits and data bytes).
%XV
A bus is a communication medium connecting several nodes. Data can be
transferred via serial or parallel circuits, that is, via electrical conductors or fiber
optic.
%XVVHJPHQW
A bus segment is a self-contained section of a serial bus system. Bus segments
are interconnected using repeaters.
A5E00105492-03 13-1
*ORVVDU\
&KDVVLVJURXQG
Chassis ground is the totality of all the interconnected passive parts of a piece of
equipment on which dangerous fault-voltage cannot occur.
&ORFNPHPRU\ELWV
Memory bit which can be used to generate clock pulses in the user program
(1 byte per memory bit).
1RWH
Note in the case of S7-300 CPUs that the clock memory byte is not overwritten in
the user program.
&RGH%ORFN
A SIMATIC S7 code block contains part of the 67(3 user program. (In contrast:
a Æ Data Block (DB) only contains data.)
&RPPXQLFDWLRQSURFHVVRU
Communication processors are modules for point-to-point and bus communication.
&RPSUHVV
The programming device online function “Compress” is used to align all valid
blocks contiguously in the RAM of the CPU at the start of the user memory. This
eliminates all gaps which arose when blocks were deleted or modified.
&RQILJXUDWLRQ
Assignment of modules to racks/slots and (e.g. for signal modules) addresses.
&RQVLVWHQWGDWD
Data whose contents are related and which should not be separated are known as
consistent data.
For example, the values of analog modules must always be handled consistently,
that is the value of an analog module must not be corrupted by reading it out at two
different times.
&RXQWHUV
Counters are part of CPU --> system memory. The content of "Counter cells" can
be modified by 67(3 instructions (e.g. up/down count).
13-2 A5E00105492-03
*ORVVDU\
&3
--> Communication processor
&38
Central processing unit of the S7 programmable controller with open and closed-
loop control systems, memory, operating system and interface for programming
device.
&38RSHUDWLQJV\VWHP
The CPU OS organizes all functions and processes of the CPU which are not
associated to a specific control task.
&\FOH7LPH
The term cycle time describes the time required by a Æ CPU to run through a
Æ user program on
'DWDEORFN
Data blocks (DB) are data areas in the user program which contain user data.
Global data blocks can be accessed by all code blocks while instance data blocks
are assigned to a specific FB call.
'DWDVWDWLF
Static data is data which can only be used within a function block. The data is
saved in an instance data block belonging to the function block. The data stored in
the instance data block is retained until the next function block call.
'DWDWHPSRUDU\
Temporary data is local data of a block that is stored in the L stack during block
execution and no longer available after execution.
'HOD\,QWHUUXSW
Æ Interrupt, Delay
'LDJQRVWLFEXIIHU
The diagnostic buffer is a buffered memory area in the CPU in which diagnostic
events are stored in the order of their occurrence.
S7-300 Automation Systems, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 13-3
*ORVVDU\
'LDJQRVWLF,QWHUUXSW
Modules capable of diagnostics operations report detected system errors to the
Æ CPU via diagnostic interrupts.
'LDJQRVWLFV
Æ System Diagnostics
'3PDVWHU
A Æ master which behaves in accordance with EN 50170, Part 3 is known as a
DP master.
'3VODYH
A Æ slave operated on PROFIBUS with PROFIBUS-DP protocol and in
accordance with EN 50170, Part 3 is referred to as DP slave.
'39
The designation DPV1 means the extended functions of the acyclical services (to
include new interrupts, for example) provided by the DP protocol. The DPV1
functionality has been incorporated into IEC 61158/EN 50170, volume 2,
PROFIBUS.
(OHFWULFDOO\LVRODWHG
The reference potential of the control and on-load power circuits for isolated I/Os is
galvanically separated; e.g. by optocouplers, relay contact or transformer.
Input/output circuits can be connected to a common potential.
Electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor) which gives the bodies of
electrical equipment and external conducting bodies the same or approximately the
same potential, in order to prevent disturbing or dangerous voltages from being
generated between these bodies.
(UURUGLVSOD\
One of the possible responses of the operating system to a Æ runtime error is to
display the error. The other possible responses are: Æ error response in the user
program, CPU STOP.
13-4 A5E00105492-03
*ORVVDU\
(UURUKDQGOLQJYLD2%
When the operating system detects a specific error (e.g. access error with
67(3), it calls a dedicated organization block (Error OB) that determines
subsequent CPU response.
(UURUUHVSRQVH
Response to a Æ runtime error. The operating system can respond in the following
ways: transition of the PLC to STOP mode, call of an organization block in which
the user can program an error response or display.
([WHUQDOSRZHUVXSSO\
Power supply for the signal and function modules and the I/O connected to them.
)%
Æ Function Block
)&
Æ Function
)ODVK(3520
FEPROMs are the same as electrically erasable EEPROMS in that they can retain
data in the event of a power failure, but they can be erased much more quickly
(FEPROM = Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory). They are used on
Æ Memory Cards.
)ORDWLQJSRWHQWLDO
No galvanic connection to ground.
)25&(
The Force function is used to assign fixed values to certain variables from a user
program or CPU (including I/Os).
In this context, please note the limitations listed in the 2YHUYLHZRIWKHWHVW
IXQFWLRQVsection in the chapter entitled 7HVWIXQFWLRQVGLDJQRVWLFVDQG
WURXEOHVKRRWLQJin the 6,QVWDOODWLRQmanual
)XQFWLRQ
According to IEC 1131-3 a function is a Æ code block that contains no Æ statical
data. A function allows parameters to be passed in the user program. Functions
are therefore suitable for programming frequently occurring complex functions,
e.g. calculations.
A5E00105492-03 13-5
*ORVVDU\
)XQFWLRQEORFN
According to IEC 1131-3, a function block is a Æ code block that contains Æ static
data. An FB allows parameters to be passed in the user program. Function blocks
are therefore suitable for programming complex functions, e.g. closed-loop
controls, mode selections, which are repeated frequently.
)XQFWLRQDOJURXQGLQJ
Grounding which has the sole purpose of safeguarding the intended function of
electrical equipment. With functional grounding you short-circuit interference
voltage which would otherwise have an unacceptable impact on equipment.
*'FLUFXLW
A GD circle encompasses a number of CPUs which exchange data by means of
global data communication and which are used as follows:
• One CPU broadcasts a GD packet to the other CPUs.
• One CPU sends and receives a GD packet from another CPU.
A GD circuit is identified by a GD circuit number.
*'(OHPHQW
A GD element is generated by assigning shared Æ global data. It is identified by a
unique global data ID in the global data table.
*'SDFNHW
A GD packet can consist of one or more GD objects which are transmitted together
in a frame.
*OREDOGDWD
Global data can be addressed by any Æ code block (FC, FB, OB). Individually,
these are markers M, inputs I, outputs Q, timers, counters, and data blocks DB.
Global data can be accessed with either absolute or symbolic access.
*OREDOGDWDFRPPXQLFDWLRQ
Global data communication is a procedure used to transfer Æ global data between
CPUs (without CFBs).
*URXQG
The conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any
point.
Ground potential can be different to zero in the area of grounding electrodes. The
term “reference ground” is frequently used to describe this situation.
13-6 A5E00105492-03
*ORVVDU\
*URXQGWR
To ground means to connect an electrically conducting component to the
grounding electrode (one or more conducting components which have a very good
contact with the earth) across a grounding system.
*6'ILOHGHYLFHPDVWHUILOH
The device master file (GSD file) stores all slave specific properties. The GSD file
format is specified in EN 50170,Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
,QVWDQFHGDWDEORFN
A DB is automatically generated and assigned to every function block in the
67(3 user program. The values of the input, output and in/out parameters are
stored in the instance data block, together with local block data.
,QWHUIDFHPXOWLSRLQW
Æ MPI
,QWHUUXSW
The CPU's Æ operating system knows 10 different priority classes for controlling
user program execution. These priority classes include interrupts, such as process
interrupts. When an interrupt is triggered, the operating system automatically calls
an assigned OB. In this OB the user can program the desired response (for
example in an FB).
,QWHUUXSW'HOD\
The delay interrupt belongs to one of the priority classes when processing
programs in SIMATIC S7. It is started on expiration of a time generated in the user
program. A corresponding organization block is then executed.
,QWHUUXSWGLDJQRVWLF
Æ Diagnostic interrupt
,QWHUUXSW3URFHVV
Æ Process interrupt
,QWHUUXSWVWDWXV
A status interrupt can be generated by a DPV1 slave and causes OB55 to be
called on the DPV1 master. For detailed information on OB55, see the 5HIHUHQFH
0DQXDO6\VWHPVRIWZDUHIRU66\VWHPDQG6WDQGDUG)XQFWLRQV"
A5E00105492-03 13-7
*ORVVDU\
,QWHUUXSWWLPHRIGD\
The time-of-day interrupt belongs to one of the priority classes in SIMATIC S7
program processing. It is generated depending on a specific date (or daily) and
time-of-day (e.g. 9:50 or hourly, or every minute). A corresponding organization
block is then executed.
,QWHUUXSWXSGDWH
An update interrupt can be generated by a DPV1 slave and causes OB 56 to be
called on the DPV1 master. For detailed information on OB 56, see the 5HIHUHQFH
0DQXDO6\VWHPVRIWZDUHIRU66\VWHPDQG6WDQGDUG)XQFWLRQV"
,QWHUUXSWYHQGRUVSHFLILF
A vendor-specific interrupt can be generated by a DPV1 slave. It causes OB57 to
be called on the DPV1 master.
Detailed information on OB 57 can be found in the 5HIHUHQFH0DQXDO6\VWHP
6RIWZDUHIRU66\VWHPDQG6WDQGDUG)XQFWLRQV"
,QWHUUXSWZDWFKGRJ
A watchdog interrupt is generated periodically by the CPU in a configurable time
pattern. A corresponding Æ organization block is then executed.
/RDGPHPRU\
Load memory is part of the CPU. It contains objects generated by the programming
device. It is implemented either as a plug-in Memory Card or permanently
integrated memory.
/RFDOGDWD
Æ Data, temporary
0DLQPHPRU\
Work memory is a RAM memory in the Æ CPU accessed by the processor during
user program execution.
0DVWHU
Masters in possession of the Æ Token can send/request data to/from other nodes
(= active node).
13-8 A5E00105492-03
*ORVVDU\
0HPRU\ELWV
Memory bits are part of the CPU's Æ system memory. They store intermediate
results of calculations. They can be accessed in bit, byte, word or doubleword
units.
0HPRU\&DUG0&
Memory Cards are memory media for CPUs and CPs. They are implemented in the
form of Æ RAM or Æ FEPROM. An MC differs from an Æ Micro Memory Card only
in its dimensions (MC is approximately the size of a credit card).
0LFUR0HPRU\&DUG00&
Micro Memory Cards are memory media for CPUs and CPs. Its smaller dimensions
form the only difference compared to the Æ Memory Card.
0RGXOH3DUDPHWHUV
Module parameters are values which can be used to control the response of the
module. A distinction is made between static and dynamic module parameters.
03,
This interface is capable of multipoint communication (MPI). It forms part of the
SIMATIC S7 PG interface. It enables multiple-node operation (PGs, text-based
displays, OPs) on one or several PLCs. Each node is identified by a unique
address (MPI address).
03,DGGUHVV
Æ MPI
1HVWLQJGHSWK
One block can be called from another by means of a block call. Nesting depth is
defined as the number of simultaneously called Æ code blocks.
1RQLVRODWHG
The reference potential of the control and on-load power circuits for non-isolated
I/Os is electrically interconnected.
2%
Organization Blocks
A5E00105492-03 13-9
*ORVVDU\
2%SULRULW\
The CPU Æ operating system distinguishes between different priority classes, e.g.
cyclic program execution, program execution controlled by process interrupt. Each
priority class is assigned Æ organization blocks (OB) in which the S7 user can
program a response. The OBs have different standard priorities which determine
the order in which they are executed or interrupted in the event that they are
activated simultaneously.
2SHUDWLQJPRGH
SIMATIC S7 PLC operating modes are: STOP, Æ START-UP, RUN.
2UJDQL]DWLRQ%ORFNV
Organization blocks (OBs) form the interface between CPU operating system and
the user program. The processing sequence of the user program is defined in the
organization blocks.
3DUDPHWHUV
1. Variable of a 67(3 code block
2. Variable for declaring module response (one or several per module). All modules
have a suitable basic factory setting which can be customized in 67(3.
There are Æ static parameters and Æ dynamic parameters
3DUDPHWHUVG\QDPLF
Unlike static parameters, dynamic parameters of modules can be changed during
operation by calling an SFC in the user program, for example limit values of an
analog signal input module.
3DUDPHWHUVVWDWLF
Unlike dynamic parameters, static parameters of modules cannot be changed by
the user program. You can only modify these parameters by editing your
configuration in 67(3, e.g. modification of input delay parameters of a digital
signal input module.
3*
Æ Programming device
3/&
An automation system in the context of SIMATIC S7 Æ is a programmable logic
controller.
13-10 A5E00105492-03
*ORVVDU\
3/&
Æ Programmable controller
3ULRULW\FODVV
The S7 CPU operating system provides up to 26 priority classes (or "Program
execution levels"). Specific OBs are assigned to these classes. The priority classes
determine which OBs interrupt other OBs. If a priority class includes several OBs,
they do not interrupt each other, but are executed sequentially.
3URFHVV,PDJH
The process image is part of CPU Æ system memory. At the start of cyclic program
execution, the signal states at the input modules are written to the process image
of the inputs. At the end of cyclic program execution, the signal status of the
process image of the outputs is transferred to the output modules.
3URFHVVLQWHUUXSW
A process interrupt is triggered by interrupt-triggering modules as a result of a
specific event in the process. The process interrupt is reported to the CPU. The
assigned Æ organization block is then processed, according to interrupt priority.
3URGXFWYHUVLRQ
The product version identifies differences between products which have the same
order number. The product version is incremented when forward-compatible
functions are enhanced, after production-related modifications (use of new
parts/components) and for bug fixes.
352),%86'3
The PLC distributes controls for digital, analog and intelligent modules as well as a
wide range of field devices to EN 50170, part 3, for example, drives or valve
blocks, to processes at external locations - even across distances exceeding
23 km.
The modules and field devices are connected to the programmable controller via
the PROFIBUS-DP fieldbus and addressed in the same way as centralized I/Os.
3URJUDPPLQJGHYLFH
Programming devices are essentially personal computers which are compact,
portable and suitable for industrial applications. They are equipped with special
hardware and software for SIMATIC PLCs.
A5E00105492-03 13-11
*ORVVDU\
3URJUDPPDEOHFRQWUROOHU
Programmable controllers (PLCs) are electronic controllers whose function is
saved as a program in the control unit. The configuration and wiring of the unit are
therefore independent of the function of the control system. The PLC has a
computer structure; it consists of the Æ CPU (Central Processing Unit) with
memories, I/O modules and internal bus system. The I/Os and the programming
language are oriented to control engineering needs.
5$0
RAM (Random Access Memory) is a semiconductor read/write memory.
5HIHUHQFHJURXQG
Æ Ground
5HIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDO
Potential with reference to which the voltages of participating circuits are observed
and/or measured.
5HWHQWLYLW\
A memory area is retentive if its contents are retained even after a power failure
and a change from STOP to RUN. The non-retentive area of memory markers,
timers and counters is reset following a power failure and a transition from the
STOP mode to the RUN mode.
The following can be made retentive:
• flag bits
• S7 timers
• S7 counters
• Data areas
5HVWDUW
On CPU startup (e.g. after is switched from STOP to RUN mode via selector switch
or with POWER ON), OB100 (restart) is initially executed, prior to cyclic program
execution (OB1). On restart, the input process image is read in and the 67(3
user program is executed, starting at the first instruction in OB 1.
5XQWLPHHUURU
Errors occurred in the PLC (that is, not in the process itself) during user program
execution.
13-12 A5E00105492-03
*ORVVDU\
6FDQUDWH
The reduction rate determines the send/receive frequency for Æ GD packets on
the basis of the CPU cycle.
6)%
Æ System function block
6)&
Æ System function
6HJPHQW
Æ Bus Segment
6LJQDOPRGXOH
Signal modules (SM) form the interface between the process and the PLC. There
are digital and analog I/O modules (input/output module, digital or analog).
(input/output module, analog)
6ODYH
A slave may only exchange data with the Æ Master on request.
67$5783
A STARTUP routine is executed at the transition from STOP to RUN mode. Can be
triggered by the Æ mode selector switch or after power on, or by an operator action
on the programming device. An S7–300 performs Æ a restart.
67(3
Programming language for developing user programs for SIMATIC S7 PLCs.
6XEVWLWXWHYDOXH
Substitute values are configurable values which output modules transfer to the
process when the CPU switches to STOP mode.
In the event of an input access error, a substitute value can be written to the
accumulator instead of the input value which could not be read (SFC 44).
A5E00105492-03 13-13
*ORVVDU\
6\VWHP'LDJQRVWLFV
System diagnostics refers to the detection, evaluation and signaling of errors which
occur within the PLC, for example, program errors or module errors. System errors
can be displayed with LED indicators or in 67(3.
6\VWHPIXQFWLRQ
A system function (SFC) is a Æ function integrated in the operating system of the
CPU that can be called, as required, in the STEP 7 user program.
6\VWHP)XQFWLRQV%ORFN
A System Function Block (SFB) is a Æ function block integrated in the CPU
operating system. If required, it can be called in the STEP 7 user program.
6\VWHPPHPRU\
The system memory (RAM) is integrated on the central processing unit. System
memory contains the address areas (e.g. timers, counters, memory bits) and the
data areas required internally by the --> operating system (e.g. buffers for
communication).
6\VWHPVWDWHOLVW
The system status list contains data describing the current status of an S7-300.
You can always use this list to obtain an overview of:
• The S7-300 configuration
• The current CPU configuration and the configurable signal modules
• Current status and processes in the CPU and configurable signal modules.
7HUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRU
A terminating resistor is used to terminate data links in order to prevent reflections.
7LPHU
Æ Timer
7LPHUV
Timers are part of CPU Æ system memory. The content of “timer cells” is
automatically updated by the operating system, asynchronously to the user
program. 67(3 instructions are used to define the exact function of the timer
cells (for example on-delay) and initiate their execution (e.g. start).
13-14 A5E00105492-03
*ORVVDU\
7LPHRIGD\LQWHUUXSW
Æ Interrupt, Time-of-day
7RNHQ
Bus access rights
7UDQVPLVVLRQUDWH
Data transfer rate (in bps)
8VHU3URJUDP
The SIMATIC system distinguishes between the Æ CPU operating system and
user programs. The latter are created with Æ 67(3 programming software, using
optional programming languages (LAD and STL). User programs are stored in
code blocks. data is stored in data blocks.
8VHUPHPRU\
User memory contains Æ code and Æ data blocks of the user program. The user
memory can be integrated in the CPU or can be provided on plug-in memory cards
or memory modules. However, user programs are always executed from Æ CPU
main memory.
9DULVWRU
voltage-dependent resistor
:DWFKGRJ,QWHUUXSW
Æ Interrupt, Watchdog
A5E00105492-03 13-15
*ORVVDU\
13-16 A5E00105492-03

,QGH[
$ &
Accessories cabinet
wiring 7-1 Selecting and dimensioning 5-11
Accessories 6-2 Cabinet
Accumulator 13-1 dimensions 5-12
Actuator/sensor interface 5-31 power loss dissipated 5-14
Address 13-1 types 5-13
addresses Cable lengths
analog modules 8-5 longer 5-42
Addresses maximum 5-40
Digital modules 8-3 MPI subnet 5-41
technological functions 8-6 PROFIBUS subnet 5-41
Addressing stub cables 5-42
slotbased 8-1 Cable routing inside buildings 12-15
slot-based 8-1 Cable shielding 12-12
user-defined 8-1, 8-3 ground 5-24
Analog Module 13-1 Cables
analog modules preparing 7-10
addresses 8-5 Central unit 5-2
Arrangement Chassis ground 13-2
of modules 5-7 Clearances 5-6
Asynchronous error 11-4 Code Block 13-2
commissioning
% Recommended procedure with the
Backplane Bus 13-1 hardware 9-2
Back-up Commissioning
operating system 10-2 checklist 9-4
back-up memory 13-1 CPU 31x-2 DP as DP master 9-23
Basic knowledge required 1-1 CPU 31x-2 DP as DP slave 9-26
Bus 13-1 CPU 31xC-2 DP as DP master 9-23
Backplane 13-1 CPU 31xC-2 DP as DP slave 9-26
Bus cables PROFIBUS DP 9-22
wiring rules 5-39 response to errors 9-3
Bus connector 5-39 software requirement 9-1
connecting the bus cable 7-17 using the software 9-3
connecting to module 7-18 Compress 13-2
removing 7-18 Configuration 13-2
setting the terminating resistor 7-18 Connecting
Bus connectors PG 9-6
plugging 6-8 sensors and actors 7-8
Bus segment 13-1 spring terminals 7-8
Bus termination 5-49 Connecting actors 7-8
BUSF Connecting cables
LED 11-10 for interface modules 5-8
BUSF1 Connecting sensors 7-8
LED 11-10 Consistent data 8-8, 13-2
BUSF2 controlling and monitoring variables
LED 11-10 Controlling outputs in CPU STOP mode
9-21
A5E00105492-03 1
*ORVVDU\
Counters 13-2 DP slave 13-4

CPU DPV1 13-4
operating system 13-3
resetting CPU memory 9-13 (
wiring 7-7 Electrically isolated 13-4
CPU 313C-2 DP EMC
commissioning as a DP master 9-24 definition 12-3
commissioning as DP-Slave 9-27 EMC correct grounding 12-7
CPU 314C-2 DP EMC error-free installation 12-7
commissioning as a DP master 9-24 EMC grounded installation, example 12-9
commissioning as DP slave 9-27 Equipotential bonding 13-4
CPU 315-2 DP Equipotential bonding - lightning protection
commissioning as a DP master 9-24 12-20
commissioning as DP slave 9-27 Equipotential bonding conductor 5-24
CPU 316-2 DP Error
commissioning as DP slave 9-27 asynchronous 11-4
CPU 317-2 DP synchronous 11-4
commissioning as a DP master 9-24 Error display 13-4
CPU 318-2 DP Error displays
commissioning as DP slave 9-27 DP-compliant CPUs 11-10
Cycle time 13-3 Error handling 11-4
Error response 13-5
'
error-free operation of a S7-300 12-1
data Event recognition 11-14, 11-20
static 13-3 Expansion module 5-2
Data
consistent 13-2 )
temporary 13-3 Floating potential 13-5
Data block 13-3 Force 13-5
Default addressing 8-1 Forcing 11-2
Delay Interrupt 13-7 Front connector
Device-related diagnostics 11-27 encoding 7-12
Diagnostic addresses inserting 7-12
when directly exchanging data 11-15 preparing 7-10
Diagnostic addresses 11-13, 11-19 wiring 7-3, 7-11
Diagnostic buffer 11-5, 13-3 front connector coding
Diagnostic Interrupt 13-4 remove from front connector 10-7
Diagnostics front connector coding pin
as DP slave 11-15 remove from module 10-6
configured address area 11-25 Full assembly 5-10
device-related 11-27 Function
System 13-14 FC 13-5
with "hardware diagnostics" 11-6 Function block
Diagnostics FB 13-6
as DP-Master 11-12 Functional grounding 13-6
with LEDs 11-7 Further support 1-4
with system functions 11-5
Digital modules *
Addresses 8-3
GD circuit 13-6
digital output module
GD element 13-6
replacement fuses 10-9
GD packet 13-6
replacing fuses 10-10
Global data 13-6
Dimensions
Ground 13-6, 13-7
of modules 5-4
ground conductor
Direct data exchange 9-32
fixing the ground conductor 6-4
DP master 13-4
Grounding concept 5-20
interrupts 11-21
2 A5E00105492-03

GSD file (device master file) 13-7 Load circuits

ground 5-24
+ Load current
Highest MPI address 5-33 determining 5-28
Highest PROFIBUS DP address 5-33 load memory 13-8
Load voltage
, connecting the reference potential of the
load voltage 5-25
Inscription labels 6-2
Local data 13-8
installation
Local equipotential bonding 12-22
horizontal 5-3
vertical 5-3 0
Installation
arranging modules 5-7 Main memory 13-8
grounded reference potential 5-18 Mains voltage selector switch 7-5
in cabinets 5-11 Material
ungrounded reference potential 5-19 required 6-3
Installing memory
the module 10-7 System 13-14
the modules 6-8 User 13-15
Installing EMC plants 12-3 Memory
Instance data block 13-7 back-up 13-1
Interface modules Load 13-8
connecting cables 5-8 main 13-8
interfaces Memory bits 13-9
MPI interface 5-35 Memory Card
Which devices can I connect to which backing up operating system 10-2
interface? 5-37 Memory reset
Interfaces with mode selector 9-13
PROFIBUS DP interface 5-36 Micro Memory Card
PtP interface 5-36 backing up operating system 10-2
Intermediate memory 9-28 inserting 9-10
Internet 1-6 replacing 9-10
interrupt Mode selector
Process 13-11 memory reset with 9-13
Update interrupt 13-8 Modifying
Interrupt 13-7 of variables 11-1
Delay 13-7 module
diagnostic 13-4 Installing 10-7
on the DP master 11-21 removing 10-5
status interrupt 13-7 replacing 10-4
time-of-day 13-8 Module
vendor-specific interrupt 13-8 arrangement 5-7, 5-9
watchdog- 13-8 dimensions 5-4
Interrupt, time-of-day 13-8 installation 6-8
Interrupt, watchdog 13-8 labeling 7-13
start addresses 8-1
/ Module diagnostics 11-25
Module Parameters 13-9
labeling strips
module replacement
assignment to modules 7-13
controlling 10-4
inserting 7-13
Modules
LED 11-10
isolated 5-20
Lightning protection equipotential bonding
non-isolated 5-20
12-20
Monitor and control variable
Lightning protection zone concept 12-18
Setting the trigger points 9-19
Load
monitor and control variables
from PS 307 5-29
controlling variables 9-19
A5E00105492-03 3
*ORVVDU\
Monitoring Point-to-Point
of variables 11-1 maximum baud rate 5-32
monitoring and controlling variables maximum possible number of nodes
Establishing a connection to the CPU 5-32
9-21 Point-to-point communication 5-31
Opening the VAT 9-20 Potential differences 5-24, 12-13
Saving the VAT 9-20 Power on
Monitoring and controlling variables requirements 9-12
monitoring variables 9-19 Power supply
Mountable shielding terminals 5-5 grounded 5-16
MPI 13-9 Power supply module
maximum baud rate 5-32 selecting mains voltage 7-5
maximum possible number of nodes power up
5-32 initial 9-12
MPI Subnet 5-30 priority
MPI address OB 13-10
default 5-33 Priority class 13-11
highest 5-33 Process Image 13-11
recommendations 5-34 process interrupt 13-11
rules 5-33 Product version 13-11
MPI and PROFIBUS subnet 5-46 PROFIBUS bus cable 5-38
MPI interface 5-35 PROFIBUS address
MPI subnet recommendation 5-34
example 5-43 PROFIBUS and MPI subnet 5-46
maximum distances 5-44 PROFIBUS bus cable
segment 5-41 properties 5-38
terminating resistor 5-48 PROFIBUS DP 13-11
commissioning 9-22
1 Direct data exchange 9-32
Nesting depth 13-9 maximum baud rate 5-32
Noise maximum possible number of nodes
electromagnetic 12-3 5-32
Non-isolated 13-9 PROFIBUS DP address
highest 5-33
2 rules 5-33
PROFIBUS DP addresses
OB 13-10
default 5-33
OB priority 13-10
PROFIBUS DP interface 5-36
Open components 6-1
PROFIBUS DP subnet 5-30
Operating mode 13-10
PROFIBUS subnet
Operating system
cable lengths 5-41
back-up 10-2
example 5-45
back-up on Memory Card 10-2
PROFIBUS Terminator 5-49
back-up on Micro Memory Card 10-2
Protect digital output modules from
CPU 13-3
inductive surge 12-27
updating 10-3
protective conductor
Organization Blocks 13-10
connecting to the rail 7-4
Outdoor routing of cables 12-17
Protective ground
3 measures 5-23
Protective measures
Parameters 13-10 for overall system 5-17
Module 13-9 PtP interface 5-36
PG Purpose of this documentation 1-1
access across network boundaries 5-47
connecting 9-6
ungrounded installation 9-9
via stub cable to subnet 9-8
4 A5E00105492-03

SIMATIC Manager 9-17

5 start 9-17
rail SINEC L2-DP 13-11
ground conductor 6-4 single-step mode 11-1
preparing 6-4 Slave diagnostics
Rail reading 11-15
connecting the protective conductor 7-4 reading, example 11-17
mounting hole dimensions 6-5 structure 11-22
rails slot number
fixing screws 6-5 assign 6-9
versions 6-3 insert 6-10
Rails Slot number label 6-2
length 5-4 Slot-based addressing 8-1
Reference potential Start-up 13-13
grounded 5-18 CPU 31x-2 DP as a DP master 9-24
ungrounded 5-19 CPU 31x-2 DP as a DP slave 9-27
Repeater CPU 31xC-2 DP as a DP master 9-24
RS485 5-40 CPU 31xC-2 DP as a DP slave 9-27
replacing Station status 11-23
module 10-4 Status display
replacing DP-compliant CPUs 11-10
fuses 10-10 Status interrupt 13-7
Replacing a module Strain relief 7-11
behavior of S7-300 10-8 Stub cables
replacing fuses length 5-42
digital output module 10-10 Subnets 5-30
Resetting CPU memory 9-13 Substitute value 13-13
Resetting memory Support 1-6
MPI parameter 9-15 surge protection, example 12-25
Restart 13-12 Synchronous error 11-4
Retentivity 13-12 System Diagnostics 13-14
Routing 5-47 System function
Routing a potential difference cable 12-13 SFC 13-14
RS485 System Function Block
bus connector 5-39 SFB 13-14
RS485 repeater 5-40 System memory 13-14
Rules and regulations for error-free
7
operation 12-1
Runtime error 13-12 Terminating resistor 13-14
MPI subnet 5-48
6 setting on the bus connector 7-18
S7-300 Timers 13-14
initial power up 9-12 Tool
Scan rate 13-13 required 6-3
Scope of the manual 1-1 Training Center 1-4
Segment 5-32
8
in the MPI subnet 5-41
in the PROFIBUS subnet 5-41 Ungrounded installation
Service 1-6 connecting PG 9-9
SF uninstalling
LED, evaluation 11-8 the modules 10-5
Shielding cables 12-12 update interrupt 13-8
Shielding contact element 5-5, 7-14 Updating
mounting 7-14 operating system 10-3
Shielding terminal User memory 13-15
laying cables 7-15 User Program 13-15
Signal module 13-13 User-defined addressing 8-1, 8-3
A5E00105492-03 5
*ORVVDU\
9 Voltage
selecting mains voltage 7-5
variable monitoring or control
create variable table 9-18 :
variables
Wiring
modifying 11-1
accessories required 7-1
monitoring 11-1
front connector 7-11
Variables
front connectors 7-3
forcing 11-2
PS and CPU 7-2, 7-6
Vendor ID 11-24
required tools and materials 7-2
Vendor-specific interrupt 13-8
rules 7-2
6 A5E00105492-03

PLC Hardware S7-300

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PLC Hardware S7-300

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FLSA Documentation

Created: 08-05-2007 Marie Luise Blæsbjerg

Original FLSA Documentation

2. SIEMENS S7-300, Hardware and Installation

Project Specific 10.

Copyright W Siemens AG 2004 All rights reserved Disclaim of Liability

Purpose of the manual

Required basic knowledge

Scope of this manual

Changes compared with the previous version

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

Identification for Australia (C-Tick-Mark)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

How the manual fits in

Manual Description of operation, functions and

Reference Manual Description of operation, functions and

Operating Manual Description of configuration, installation,

Manual Description of the individual technological

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

Distributed Peripheral manual

→ • Reference Manual Descriptions of functions and technical

specifications of signal modules, power

Recycling and disposal

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A&D Technical Support

24 hours a day, 365 days a year

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

Service & Support on the Internet

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1 General Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3.9 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V;

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3.27 Relay Output Module SM 322;

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4.16 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4.28 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits;

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

6 Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

B Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-29 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322;

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-25 Connection of Thermocouples with Comparison Point (Order No.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

7-2 Isolation between the Bus Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-28 Parameters of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 VDC 24/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

of the Analog Value within the Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-79 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A-13 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data